Service Manual Logiqe9

8/6/15
GEHC_FRNT_CVR.FM
LOGIQ E9
PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL
ADVANCED SERVICE DOCUMENTATION.

PROPERTY OF GE.
USE OF THESE MATERIALS LIMITED TO AGENTS AND
EMPLOYEES OF GE OR OTHER
PARTIES EXPRESSLY LICENSED BY GE.
UNLICENSED USE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED
Part Number: 5180483-100

Revision: Rev. 7
PROPRIETARY TO GE
DIRECTION 5180483-100, REV. 7 LOGIQ E9 PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL
Important Precautions
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

IF A CUSTOMERS SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
(EN) MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS.

SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE LANGLAIS, CEST AU CLIENT QUIL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
AVERTISSEMENT NE PAS TENTER DINTERVENTION SUR LES QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
(FR)
MANUEL SERVICE NA PAS T CONSULT ET COMPRIS.
LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRANER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, LOPRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES DES
DANGERS LECTRIQUES, MCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

SPRACHE.
FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE BERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
WARNUNG VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
(DE) KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
ii i
PROPRIETARY TO GE
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.

SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIN.
AVISO NO SE DEBER DAR SERVICIO TCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
(ES) CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELCTRICAS, MECNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.
ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM

INGLS.
SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A
GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA
ATENO
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO.
(PT-Br) NO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA.
O NO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANA
DO TCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELTRICOS,
MECNICOS OU OUTROS.
ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA EST DISPONVEL APENAS EM INGLS.

SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A
GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO.
AVISO
NO TENTE EFECTUAR REPARAES NO EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER
(PT-pt) CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO PREVIAMENTE ESTE MANUAL.
A INOBSERVNCIA DESTE AVISO PODE RESULTAR EM FERIMENTOS NO
TCNICO DE ASSISTNCIA, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE EM CONSEQUNCIA
DE CHOQUE ELCTRICO, PERIGOS DE ORIGEM MECNICA, BEM COMO DE
OUTROS TIPOS.
IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

INGLESE.
SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
AVVERTENZA SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELLAPPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
(IT) AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALLADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALLUTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE
ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
iv -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
KESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.

KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST
ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST.
HOIATUS RGE RITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KESOLEVA
(ET)
TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST.
KESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VIB PHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA,
OPERAATORI VI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILGI, MEHAANILISE
VI MUU OHU TAGAJRJEL.
TM HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.

JOS ASIAKKAAN PALVELUNTARJOAJA VAATII MUUTA KUIN
ENGLANNINKIELIST MATERIAALIA, TARVITTAVAN KNNKSEN
HANKKIMINEN ON ASIAKKAAN VASTUULLA.
VAROITUS L YRIT KORJATA LAITTEISTOA ENNEN KUIN OLET VARMASTI LUKENUT
(FI)
JA YMMRTNYT TMN HUOLTO-OHJEEN.
MIKLI TT VAROITUSTA EI NOUDATETA, SEURAUKSENA VOI OLLA
PALVELUNTARJOAJAN, LAITTEISTON KYTTJN TAI POTILAAN
VAHINGOITTUMINEN SHKISKUN, MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN
VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI.
.

,
.

(EL)
.
,
,
, .
EZEN KARBANTARTSI KZIKNYV KIZRLAG ANGOL NYELVEN RHET EL.

HA A VEV SZOLGLTATJA ANGOLTL ELTR NYELVRE TART IGNYT,
AKKOR A VEV FELELSSGE A FORDTS ELKSZTTETSE.
NE PRBLJA ELKEZDENI HASZNLNI A BERENDEZST, AMG A
FIGYELMEZTETS
(HU)
KARBANTARTSI KZIKNYVBEN LERTAKAT NEM RTELMEZTK.
EZEN FIGYELMEZTETS FIGYELMEN KVL HAGYSA A SZOLGLTAT,
MKDTET VAGY A BETEG RAMTS, MECHANIKAI VAGY EGYB
VESZLYHELYZET MIATTI SRLST EREDMNYEZHETI.
v
PROPRIETARY TO GE
ESSI JNUSTUHANDBK ER EINGNGU FANLEG ENSKU.

EF JNUSTUAILI VISKIPTAMANNS ARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMLS EN
ENSKU, ER A BYRG VISKIPTAMANNS A TVEGA INGU.
VIVRUN REYNI EKKI A JNUSTA TKI NEMA EFTIR A HAFA SKOA OG
(IS) SKILI ESSA JNUSTUHANDBK.
EF EKKI ER FARI A ESSARI VIVRUN GETUR A VALDI MEISLUM
JNUSTUVEITANDA, STJRNANDA EA SJKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS,
VLRNNAR EA ANNARRAR HTTU.
TENTO SERVISN NVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKM JAZYCE.

V PPAD, E POSKYTOVATEL SLUEB ZKAZNKM POTEBUJE NVOD
V JINM JAZYCE, JE ZAJITN PEKLADU DO ODPOVDAJCHO JAZYKA
KOLEM ZKAZNKA.
NEPROVDJTE DRBU TOHOTO ZAZEN, ANI BYSTE SI PEETLI
VSTRAHA TENTO SERVISN NVOD A POCHOPILI JEHO OBSAH.
(CS)
V PPAD NEDODROVN TTO VSTRAHY ME DOJT RAZU
ELEKTRICKM PROUDEM PRACOVNKA POSKYTOVATELE SLUEB,
OBSLUNHO PERSONLU NEBO PACIENT VLIVEM ELEKTRICKHOP
PROUDU, RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM K RIZIKU MECHANICKHO POKOZEN NEBO
JINMU RIZIKU.
DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN P ENGELSK.

HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END
ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SRGE FOR OVERSTTELSE.
ADVARSEL FORSG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE
(DA) DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LST OG FORSTET.
MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFRE SKADE
P GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR
TEKNIKEREN, OPERATREN ELLER PATIENTEN.
DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR.

ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE
KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN.
PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE
WAARSCHUWING
ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS.
(NL)
INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET
ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATINT GEWOND
KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK,
MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.
vi -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
APKALPES ROKASGRMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGU VALOD.

JA KLIENTA APKALPES SNIEDZJAM NEPIECIEAMA INFORMCIJA CIT
VALOD, NEVIS ANGU, KLIENTA PIENKUMS IR NODROINT TULKOANU.
BRDINJUMS NEVEICIET APRKOJUMA APKALPI BEZ APKALPES ROKASGRMATAS
(LV) IZLASANAS UN SAPRAANAS.
BRDINJUMA NEIEVROANA VAR RADT ELEKTRISKS STRVAS
TRIECIENA, MEHNISKU VAI CITU RISKU IZRAISTU TRAUMU APKALPES
SNIEDZJAM, OPERATORAM VAI PACIENTAM.
IS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA ILEISTAS TIK ANGL KALBA.

JEI KLIENTO PASLAUG TEIKJUI REIKIA VADOVO KITA KALBA NE ANGL,
VERTIMU PASIRPINTI TURI KLIENTAS.
SPJIMAS NEMGINKITE ATLIKTI RANGOS TECHNINS PRIEIROS DARB, NEBENT
(LT) VADOVAUTUMTS IUO EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVU IR J SUPRASTUMTE
NEPAISANT IO PERSPJIMO, PASLAUG TEIKJAS, OPERATORIUS AR
PACIENTAS GALI BTI SUEISTAS DL ELEKTROS SMGIO, MECHANINI AR
KIT PAVOJ.
DENNE SERVICEHNDBOKEN FINNES BARE P ENGELSK.

HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRK, ER DET
KUNDENS ANSVAR SRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.
ADVARSEL IKKE FORSK REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE
(NO) SERVICEHNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTTT.
MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FRE TIL AT
SERVICELEVERANDREN, OPERATREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES P
GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.
NINIEJSZY PODRCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JZYKU

ANGIELSKIM.
JELI FIRMA WIADCZCA KLIENTOWI USUGI SERWISOWE WYMAGA
UDOSTPNIENIA PODRCZNIKA W JZYKU INNYM NI ANGIELSKI,
OBOWIZEK ZAPEWNIENIA STOSOWNEGO TUMACZENIA SPOCZYWA NA
KLIENCIE.
OSTRZEENIE
NIE PRBOWA SERWISOWA NINIEJSZEGO SPRZTU BEZ UPRZEDNIEGO
(PL)
ZAPOZNANIA SI Z PODRCZNIKIEM SERWISOWYM.
NIEZASTOSOWANIE SI DO TEGO OSTRZEENIA MOE GROZI
OBRAENIAMI CIAA SERWISANTA, OPERATORA LUB PACJENTA W WYNIKU
PORAENIA PRDEM, URAZU MECHANICZNEGO LUB INNEGO RODZAJU
ZAGROE.
vii
PROPRIETARY TO GE
ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI N LIMBA ENGLEZ.

DAC UN FURNIZOR DE SERVICII PENTRU CLIENI NECESIT O ALT LIMB
DECT CEA ENGLEZ, ESTE DE DATORIA CLIENTULUI S FURNIZEZE O
TRADUCERE.
ATENIE NU NCERCAI S REPARAI ECHIPAMENTUL DECT ULTERIOR
(RO)
CONSULTRII I NELEGERII ACESTUI MANUAL DE SERVICE.
IGNORAREA ACESTUI AVERTISMENT AR PUTEA DUCE LA RNIREA
DEPANATORULUI, OPERATORULUI SAU PACIENTULUI N URMA
PERICOLELOR DE ELECTROCUTARE, MECANICE SAU DE ALT NATUR.

.

,
.
!
(RU)
.
,
,
,
.
.

, ,
.

, ,
(BG) .

,
,
.
OVAJ PRIRUNIK ZA SERVISIRANJE DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM

JEZIKU.
AKO KLIJENTOV SERVISER ZAHTEVA JEZIK KOJI NIJE ENGLESKI,
ODGOVORNOST JE NA KLIJENTU DA PRUI USLUGE PREVOENJA.
UPOZORENJE
NEMOJTE POKUAVATI DA SERVISIRATE OPREMU AKO NISTE PROITALI I
(SR)
RAZUMELI PRIRUNIK ZA SERVISIRANJE.
AKO NE POTUJETE OVO UPOZORENJE, MOE DOI DO POVREIVANJA
SERVISERA, OPERATERA ILI PACIJENTA UZROKOVANOG ELEKTRINIM
UDAROM, MEHANIKIM I DRUGIM OPASNOSTIMA.
viii -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
TA SERVISNI PRIRONIK JE NA VOLJO SAMO V ANGLEINI.

E PONUDNIK SERVISNIH STORITEV ZA STRANKO POTREBUJE NAVODILA V
DRUGEM JEZIKU, JE ZA PREVOD ODGOVORNA STRANKA SAMA.
NE POSKUAJTE SERVISIRATI OPREME, NE DA BI PREJ PREBRALI IN
OPOZORILO
RAZUMELI SERVISNI PRIRONIK.
(SL)
E TEGA OPOZORILA NE UPOTEVATE, OBSTAJA NEVARNOST
ELEKTRINEGA UDARA, MEHANSKIH ALI DRUGIH NEVARNOSTI IN
POSLEDINIH POKODB PONUDNIKA SERVISNIH STORITEV, UPORABNIKA
OPREME ALI PACIENTA.
OVAJ SERVISNI PRIRUNIK DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM JEZIKU.

AKO KLIJENTOV SERVISER ZAHTIJEVA JEZIK KOJI NIJE ENGLESKI,
ODGOVORNOST KLIJENTA JE PRUITI USLUGE PREVOENJA.
UPOZORENJE NEMOJTE POKUAVATI SERVISIRATI OPREMU AKO NISTE PROITALI I
(HR) RAZUMJELI SERVISNI PRIRUNIK.
AKO NE POTUJETE OVO UPOZORENJE, MOE DOI DO OZLJEDE
SERVISERA, OPERATERA ILI PACIJENTA PROUZROENE STRUJNIM
UDAROM, MEHANIKIM I DRUGIM OPASNOSTIMA.
TTO SERVISN PRRUKA JE K DISPOZCII LEN V ANGLITINE.

AK ZKAZNKOV POSKYTOVATE SLUIEB VYADUJE IN JAZYK AKO
ANGLITINU, POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATESKCH SLUIEB JE
ZODPOVEDNOSOU ZKAZNKA.
UPOZORNENIE NEPOKAJTE SA VYKONVA SERVIS ZARIADENIA SKR, AKO SI
(SK) NEPRETATE SERVISN PRRUKU A NEPOROZUMIETE JEJ.
ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA ME VYSTI DO ZRANENIA
POSKYTOVATEA SLUIEB, OBSLUHUJCEJ OSOBY ALEBO PACIENTA
ELEKTRICKM PRDOM, PRPADNE DO MECHANICKHO ALEBO INHO
NEBEZPEENSTVA.
DEN HR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGNGLIG P ENGELSKA.

OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRK N
ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FR ATT TILLHANDAHLLA
VERSTTNINGSTJNSTER.
VARNING
FRSK INTE UTFRA SERVICE P UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LST
(SV)
OCH FRSTR DEN HR SERVICEHANDBOKEN.
OM DU INTE TAR HNSYN TILL DEN HR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I
SKADOR P SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL
FLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.
ix
PROPRIETARY TO GE
BU SERVS KILAVUZU YALNIZCA NGLZCE OLARAK SALANMITIR.

EER MTER TEKNSYEN KILAVUZUN NGLZCE DIINDAK BR DLDE
OLMASINI STERSE, KILAVUZU TERCME ETTRMEK MTERNN
SORUMLULUUNDADIR.
DKKAT SERVS KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EKPMANLARA MDAHALE
(TR)
ETMEYNZ.
BU UYARININ GZ ARDI EDLMES, ELEKTRK ARPMASI YA DA MEKANK
VEYA DER TRDEN KAZALAR SONUCUNDA TEKNSYENN, OPERATRN
YA DA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AABLR.
(JA)
Traditional
Chinese
x -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
(ZH-CN)
(KO)
xi
PROPRIETARY TO GE
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write Damage In
Shipment on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or signed for by
a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be
reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the
contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay aclaim
for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE personnel. In
performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers.
All of GEs electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable
electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GEs field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the
GE Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part
number, revision number, page number and suggestion details.
Mail the information to:

Service Documentation
9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2156)
Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA.
GE employees should use Application Lifecycle Management (ALM) to report service documentation
issues. These issues will then be in the internal problem reporting tool and communicated to the writer.
SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN
THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
WARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety
glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
For a complete review of all safety requirements, see: Section 1-4 "Safety considerations" on page 1-
18. of the latest version of LOGIQ E9 Service Manual.
xii -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LEGAL NOTES
The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without
prior written permission of GE.
GE may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Permission to use this Advanced Service Software and related documentation (herein called the
Material) by persons other than GE employees is provided only under an Advanced Service Package
License relating specifically to this Proprietary Material. This is a different agreement from the one under
which operating and basic service software is licensed. A license to use operating or basic service
software does not extend to or cover this software or related documentation.
If you are a GE employee or a customer who has entered into such a license agreement with GE to use
this proprietary software, you are authorized to use this Material according to the conditions stated in
your license agreement.
However, you do not have the permission of GE to alter, decompose or reverse-assemble the software,
and unless you are a GE employee, you may not copy the Material. The Material is protected by
Copyright and Trade Secret laws; the violation of which can result in civil damages and criminal
prosecution.
If you are not party to such a license agreement or a GE Employee, you must exit this Material now.
TRADEMARKS
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
All Material Copyright 2008 - 2015 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved.
xi ii
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Revision History
Date
Revision YYYY/MM/DD Reason for change
Rev. 1 2008/09/16 Initial R1.0.3 Release
Rev. 2 2008/12/01 R1.0.4 Release
Rev. 3 2009/10/01 R2.0.0 Release
Rev. 4 2011/01/14 R3.1.0 Release
Rev. 5 2012/11/06 R4 Release
Rev. 6 2014/07/21 R5 Release
Rev. 7 2015/08/05 R6 Release
List of Effected Pages (LOEP)
Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

Title Page Rev. 7 4-1 to 4-60 Rev. 7 10-1 to 10-30 Rev. 7
Warnings Rev. 7 5-1 to 5-196 Rev. 7 Index Rev. 7
TOC Rev. 7 6-1 to 6-48 Rev. 7 Back Cover N/A

1-1 to 1-30 Rev. 7 7-1 to 7-352 Rev. 7
2-1 to 2-12 Rev. 7 8-1 to 8-672 Rev. 7
3-1 to 3-92 Rev. 7 9-1 to 9-128 Rev. 7
xiv -
GE PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 1
Purpose of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 1
Service manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2

Contents in this service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 3
Typical users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 4
LOGIQ E9 models covered by this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 4
Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 4
Contents in this sub-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 4
Overview of the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 5
History - hardware/software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 5
History - peripherals/software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 5
FRUs for Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 5
History - supported probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 5
How to turn the scanner ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 5
How to check for hardware/software version and installed options . .1 - 5
Purpose of the operator manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 5
Important conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Contents in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Conventions used in book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Model designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Safety precaution messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 6
Standard hazard icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 7
Product icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 9
Table of Contents 51
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Safety considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 15
Human safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 15
Mechanical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 17
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 19
Safe practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 19
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 19
Label locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 19
Dangerous procedure warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 20
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 21
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 22

What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 22
Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 22
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 22
Customer assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 23
Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 23
System manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 24
52 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
CHAPTER 2
Site preparations
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Purpose of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
General console requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Contents in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Console environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
If the unit is very cold or hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
General requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Electrical requirements for LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Inrush current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Site circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Site power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Unit power plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power stability requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
EMI limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Probes environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Time and manpower requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Purchaser responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Required facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Desirable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Minimal floor plan suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Networking setup requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
Stand alone scanner (without network connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
Scanner connected to hospitals network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
InSite Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
Purpose of the DICOM network function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
DICOM option setup requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
53
PROPRIETARY TO GE
CHAPTER 3
System Setup
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
Setup reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Average setup time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Setup warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
Receiving and unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4

Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4
Receiving and unpacking warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4
Receiving the LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
Examine package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
Damage in transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
The Tilt & Shock indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
Position of the Tilt & Shock indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 5
LOGIQ E9 Transportation Box Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 6
Unpacking the LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 7
Packing materials - recycling information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 11
Preparing for setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 12

Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 12
Physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 12
System voltage settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 12
Back Cover Label and ETL testing laboratories safety rating
label (ETL may not be present) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 13
EMI protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 14
54 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Completing the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15

Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Contents in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
System specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
System requirements verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Weight with monitor and peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Acoustic noise output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Verification of the systems voltage setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Electrical specifications for LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Connections on the I/O Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
Connect Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
Connect USB Flash Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
Connections on the Patient I/O panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
Connect ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
Connecting Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Introduction to Connecting Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Connect a probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
Disconnect a probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
Power On/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Detailed Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Connect AC (mains) Power to the LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Switch ON the AC Power to LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
Power shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Complete power down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26
Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
55
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 28
LOGIQ E9 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 28
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 28
Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 29
Contents in this sub-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 29
Approved Internal Peripherals (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 29
Approved External Peripherals (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 29
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 29
Printer/DVR Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30
Test the DVR Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30
Turn OFF Power to LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30
Available Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30
Software Options Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 31
Software Option Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 31
Installing a Software Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 31
Connectivity overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Physical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Stand-alone LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Sneaker Net environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Wired Ethernet from LOGIQ E9 to a Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Connection using Wireless Option (R2.x.x or later) . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Connectivity setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 33
Setup paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 34
Contents in this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 34
User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 34
Product Locator Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 34
Volume Navigation Roll Stand Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 35

Parts Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 35
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 36
Assembling the Roll Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 37
Adjusting Tension on Sliding Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 41
Installing Cover Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 42
Installing Rear Track Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 43
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 44
Cleaning the Mounting Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 44
56 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Configuring Insite ExC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45

Prerequisites for InSite ExC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45
Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45
Configuring InSite ExC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 46
Configuring Agent Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 46
Configuring Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 49
Configuring Request for Service (RFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 51
Remote Check and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 52
57
PROPRIETARY TO GE
CHAPTER 4
Functional Checks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1
Special Equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1
General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2
Power ON/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 3
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 3
Connect AC (mains) Power to the LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 4
Turn Unit ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 5
Power shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 7
Complete Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 9
Top Console position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 11
To unlock the Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 11
To lock the Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 11
To move the floating Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 11
To move the Top Console if Power is OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 12
LCD Monitor position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 12
To unlock the LCD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 12
To lock the LCD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 12
Service Key (Dongle, HASP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 13
Exit to Windows Desktop from the LOGIQ E9 Application Software . . . . . .4 - 15
Removable Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 16
Archiving and Loading Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 16
Loading Presets from removable media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 16
Space Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 16
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 16
Installation and Setup Procedures for Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 16
Moving and Transporting the LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 17
The Casters (Wheels) control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 17
To prepare the unit to be moved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 17
To ensure safety while moving the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 18
Transporting the unit by vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 18
Setting up at a new location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 18
58 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Recording important settings and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
Connectivity Recording the TCP/IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20
Connectivity WLAN R2.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Connectivity Recording the AE Title and Port settings . . . . . . . . 4 - 22
Connectivity Recording Device Destination settings . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Connectivity Recording Dataflow settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Connectivity Recording the Print Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
Connectivity Recording Miscellaneous settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Admin Recording the Software Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Admin Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 29
System Data Store Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 30
System Recording Peripheral settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 31
System Recording software and hardware versions . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 32
Functional checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 33
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 33
Contents in this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34
Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34
Trackball Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34
Other Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 35
Recommended Test Phantoms (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 35
B-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39
M-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 40
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 40
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 40
System CFM and PWD Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Color Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Color B-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Color M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
Adjust the PW/CW Doppler Mode controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
59
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 43

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 43
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 43
Adjust the TVI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 43
Contrast checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 44
Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 44
Check Distance and Tissue Depth Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 44
Check Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 45
Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 45
Report Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 45
Multi Image Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 46
Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . .4 - 46
Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 46
Probe/Connectors Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 47
To Connect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 47
ECG Checks R2.x.x or later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
Parts needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
ECG Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
Peripherals Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 48
Cineloop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
To Activate CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
To Omit Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
To Restore Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
To Start Frame/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 49
Back End Processor checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 50
Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 51
Alphanumeric Keyboard and Display Platform (Console) Checks . .4 - 51
Brakes and Direction Lock Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 51
Operator I/O Movement - LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 52
Operator Console Movement (XY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 52
Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 52
WLAN R2.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 52
60 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Application Turnover Check List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53

Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53
Power supply test and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53

Power Supply Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53
Power Supply Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53
3D/4D and Volume Navigation Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 54
61
PROPRIETARY TO GE
CHAPTER 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1
LOGIQ E9 models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2
LOGIQ E9 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 3
LOGIQ E9 general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 4
LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 4
LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - MRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 6
LEDs on the MRX Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 8
Signal flow overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 13
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 15
The electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 15
LOGIQ E9s Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 16
B-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 16
M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 16
Color Flow Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 16
Pulsed (PW) Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 17
Other Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 17
Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 17
4D Data Collection and Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 18
4D Image Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 18
Volume Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 18
Software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 19
System software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 19
Application software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 20
System configuration and software R1.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 20
System Reload Theory R2.x.x and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 21
62 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22

Transporting LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22
Top Console description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
Top Consoles location in the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
Top Console block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Bidirectional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Fuses, Jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
LCD Monitor Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Bidirectional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Fuses, Jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
Operator Panel general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
Operator Panel Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
Op Panel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
Op Panel Interface Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
Main Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30
Main Console description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30
Air Flow control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31

General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
Location in the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
Casters and Brakes description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
63
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Card Rack description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 32

Card Rack General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 33
Card Rack cards overview (GFI configuration shown) . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 33
Card Rack cards overview - MRX Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 33
Card Rack Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34
Input DC voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34
Input Pulser voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34
Bidirectional signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34
Output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34
Fuses, jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34
Transmitter and Receiver subsystem - GFI configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 35
Transmitter signal path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 35
Phased and Linear Array probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 36
Receiver signal path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 37
Signal control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 38
Global Front End Interface (GFI) Board - GFI configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 39
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 39
Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 42
Input DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 42
Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 42
Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 43
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 43
I2C Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 43
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 44
Fuses, Jumpers and DIP-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 44
LEDs on the GFI board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 44
Test points on the GFI board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 44
64 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Transmit and Receive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45

Transmit and Receive Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46
Digital Receiver board (DRX) - GFI configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47
Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48
Input DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48
Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48
DRX Board Signal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49
DRX Channel Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50
Fuses, Jumpers and DIP-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50
LEDs on the DRX board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50
Testpoints on the DRX board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52
MRX Channel Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53
Transmitter Board (GTX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54
Input TX (Pulser) voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
DIP-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Other switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
LEDs on the GTX board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60
Receiver Board (GRX) - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Relay Board (RLY or GRLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68
Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
DIP-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
65
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Front Plane Boards (XD BUS) - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 70

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 70
Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 70
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71
Fuses, Jumpers, Dip-switches and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 71
Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 72
General description of GFI Configuration Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 72
General description of MRX Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 73
Location in the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 74
Backplane Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 75
Input DC voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 76
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 76
Control signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 76
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 76
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 76
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 76
DIP-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 76
Other switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 76
Channel Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 77
Channel Routing - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 77
Channel Routing - MRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 78
66 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Back End Processor (BEP) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Signal Flow and Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Location of the Back End Processor (BEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81
BEP - Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
BEP Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
The EMC Enclosure House . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
Top and Side BEP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
Inside the BEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
Use of Expansion Slots on Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87
Procedure for resetting the BEP Bios Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87
BIOS Beep Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87
Motherboard Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
BEP Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
BEP I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 94
Functional Description of the I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 94
BEP Extended Power Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 99
Internal Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 100
Hard Disk Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 100
Use of the Hard Disk Drive Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 100
BEP Hard Disk Drive (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 101
Peripherals descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 102
Internal peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 102
External peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 102
DVR Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 103
BEP - USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 104
System USB Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 104
USB Ports on the LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 105
BEP - Video Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 109
Patient I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 110
Patient I/O Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 111
Patient I/O - inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 112
Patient I/O - outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 113
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 113
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 113
Dip Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 113
67
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 114

Main Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 114
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 114
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 116
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 116
Bidirectional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 116
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 117
BEP Power Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 119
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 120
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 120
DIP-Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 120
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 120
Power Up Sequence Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 121
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 121
AC Breaker to ON position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 121
Power Down Sequence description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 122
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 122
Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 122
Enforcement Power Off (Long-push Power Off) Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 123
AC Failure Power Off Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 124
Power Loss description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 125
Cables for LOGIQ E9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 125
Probes description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 125
Product manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 126

User documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 126
Service documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 126
GE Service / Proprietary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 126
VPD Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 127

Screen Layout Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 128
68 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
CHAPTER 6
Service Adjustments
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Power Supply adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
LCD Monitor adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Cautions and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Access to Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
LCD Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Advanced LCD adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Review Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Test the LCD Arm and LCD Monitor range of motion . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
DC Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
When to do a DC Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
DC Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Operator Panel movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Adjusting the XY Locking Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Adjusting the Z Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism and Adjustment . . . . 6 - 11
XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
XY Lock Adjustment for Lock and Brake Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Using the Park Lock Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
Operator Panel XY movement - principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
Direction Lock and Brake adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
Adjust time-out for DICOM servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
69
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Volume Navigation Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 15

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 15
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 15
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 16
Measure Initial Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 17
Perform Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 18
70 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
CHAPTER 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Service Safety Considerations. ..................................... 7-2
Gathering Troubleshooting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Collecting Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Collecting a Screen Capture with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Marking Log files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Capturing Service Logs with ALT+D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R1.x.x) . . . . . . . . 7-8
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R2.x.x or later) . . 7 - 14
Screen Captures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20
Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20
Ctrl+PrintScreen Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20
To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20
71
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Common Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 21

Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 21
Common Service Desktop overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 23
Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 24
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 26
Server History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 27
Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 28
Diagnostics Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 30
Diagnostic Utility Freezes Up/Times Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 34
Diagnostic Symptom Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 34
OP Panel Utilities - Op Panel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 45
Accessing the Service Platform from Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 45
Launching the Op Panel Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 46
Trackball Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 50
Keyboard Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 51
Slidepots Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 52
Encoders Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 53
Pushbuttons Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 54
LEDs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 55
Touchscreen Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 56
Ending the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 56
Diagnostics - Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 57
Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 57
System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 58
Diagnostics - Service Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 59
Digital Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 59
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 63
GFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 66
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 69
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 71
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 72
Transmit/Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 73
Analog Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 74
Analog CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 76
Analog CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 77
I/O Board Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 83
Tx Power Supply Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 87
Extended Power Shutdown Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 89
bayBIRD Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 91
72 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
DVR Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 94
Diagnostics - BEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 95
Essential Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 95
System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 97
Hard Disk Surface Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 98
Hard Disk Quick Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 99
Video Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 100
Network Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 101
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 102
Diagnostics - BEP Interactive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 103
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 104
Mouse (Trackball) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 106
Audio (Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 107
Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 108
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 108
Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 109
4D Motor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 110
Patient I/O Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 112
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 113
Software Options Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 113
InSite ExC Agent Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 114
Utilities - Common Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 115
Event Log Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 115
Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 116
Disk Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 116
IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 117
Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 117
Windows Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 118
User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 119
Shared Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 119
System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 120
Disk Defragmenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 121
Gather Logs Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 122
Image Viewer Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 122
Image Compress & Delete Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 123
Scanner Documentation Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 124
Distinct Network Monitor R1.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 125
Virtual Console Observation (VCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 126
Telnet Server Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 127
Invoke Software Reload R2.x.x or later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 128
73
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Utilities - Scanner Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 129

DICOM Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 129
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 130
PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 131
Troubleshooting using InSite ExC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 132

Purpose of this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 132
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 132
How to access CSD remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 133
How FE Remotely Enables Disruptive Mode and VCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 134
How Customer Enables Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 139
Customer Enables VCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 141
Troubleshooting Insite ExC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 142

Verify Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 142
Troubleshooting flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 143
Troubleshooting Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 144

System Does Not Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 145
Resetting the BEP BIOS Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 146
Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 147
Noise in Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 148
Unable to Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 149
Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 150
System Does Not Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 151
Monitor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 152
Printer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 154
CD/DVD Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 156
Network Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 157
No Contact With Server, But Connection to Network is OK . . . . . . .7 - 158
Volume Navigation (V Nav) Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 158
74 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 159

Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 161
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 162
Noise Picked up from the Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 163
Noise Received via the External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 163
Doppler Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 164
Intermittent Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 164
Motor Boat Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 164
Self-Generated Noise (Noise Generated Inside the LOGIQ E9) . . . 7 - 164
Heat-Related Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 164
Hardware Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 164
Investigate the Type of Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 165
Power Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 165
Noise in 2D Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 166
Noisy Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 166
Noise in Color Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 167
Noise in Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 168
Excessive Noise Lines when the cursor is placed straight down . . . 7 - 168
Main Power Supply (MPS) Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 169
System not Booting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 169
System Boots, but cannot scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 172
Main Power Supply Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 174
Main Power Supply Troubleshooting Flow Chart Procedures . . . . . 7 - 175
Main Power Supply Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 177
Definition of Log Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 179
EMI Prevention/Abatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 180
Different Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 180
Different System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 180
Different Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 180
Disconnect External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 180
Image Artifacts Caused by Front-End Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 181
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 182
Cannot connect to something via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 182
No Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 182
No Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 182
System Pings and Verifies but does NOT Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 183
Images Exit Spooler, But Do Not Display on Destination . . . . . . . . 7 - 183
Adjust time-out for DICOM servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 183
75
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 184

System Halt Errors - Lock ups or Intermittent Problems . . . . . . . . . .7 - 184
CD/DVD Drive Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 184
Image CD/DVD not read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 184
BEP Arrives Without Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 184
Simulator Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 185
Lockups or Blue screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 185
Files corrupt on boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 185
Heres a way to power on the BEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 185
Hard Drive Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 185
Back End Processor (BEP) Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 186
System not Booting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 186
BEP Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 191
Boot up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 194
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 198
No Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 198
No Video on Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 198
Wrong Key Activated on the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 198
Wrong System Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 198
Incorrect System Time When Daylight Savings Time Changes . . . .7 - 199
Touch Panel Not Responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 199
Service Password Does Not Respond When System Set to
Greek/Russian Language (sn70392) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 199
Z Movement fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 199
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 199
Probe Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 199
TEE Probe Temperature Too High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 200
System Temperature Too High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 200
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 201
Base Image Load Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 201
Image or Patient Data Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 201
Cannot find d:\Export\Service folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 201
4D Option Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 201
Log Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 202
LOGIQ E9 Log File Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 208
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 208
Customer Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 208
Key Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 209
Errors versus Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 216
Keywords logfile.txt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 222
Errors That May Not Be Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 223
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 223
76 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Diagnostics Window Overview - R3.x.x and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 225

Diagnostics Menus on R3.x.x and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 225
Determine Hardware Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 226
System Main Board for MRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 227
Front End Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 228
Digital Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 230
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 232
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 233
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 234
Analog Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 235
Analog CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 236
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 238
Transmit/Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 239
Back End Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 239
Power test includes tests on the Transmit Power Supply and
the EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 239
Miscellaneous Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 240
Test of Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 241

Windows Print Test Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 241
Set-up and Test a Printer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 242
View the Windows Printer Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 242
77
PROPRIETARY TO GE
CHAPTER 8
Replacement procedures
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 1
Warnings and important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 2

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 2
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 4
Manpower - When two persons are needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 4
Tools needed for servicing LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 5
Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 6
Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 7

LOGIQ E9 models versus software requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 8
Tools provided with the LOGIQ E9 or as part of an upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 8
Space management - moving all images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 8
Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 8
Loading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 9
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 9
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 9
Loading the System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 10
System Software Load procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 10
Loading the Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 15
Loading Software Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 18
Verifying the software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 18
Verifying the software option key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 19
Verifying the TCP/IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 19
Verifying the AE Title and Port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 19
Restoring Patient Archive and System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 20
Verifying the Video and DVR settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 20
Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 21
Loading the Application Software Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 21
Verifying the software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 24
Verify and Update Vital Product Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 25
78 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Flashing the BIOS memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25

Setup after Software loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25
Verifications after the software has been loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Remote Software Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27
Fast Poll Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27
Confirm Backups for Patient Data and Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30
Connect to the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30
Software Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 32
Reconnect to the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 36
Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Reset to Default Poll Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Troubleshooting Tips for Remote Software Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 41
Replacing Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42

Covers and Bumpers overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Side Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46
Side Covers removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 47
Side Covers installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48
Calibration and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48
Top Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Top Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Top Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
79
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Side Bumpers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 53

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 53
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 53
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 53
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 53
Side Bumpers removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 53
Side Bumpers installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 53
Calibration and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 53
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 53
Foot Rest Bumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 55
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 55
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 55
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 55
Foot Rest Bumper removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 55
Foot Rest Bumper installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 56
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 56
Front Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 57
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 57
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 57
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 57
Front Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 58
Front Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 58
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 59
Plate Connectors w/Guide replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 60
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 60
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 60
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 60
Plate Connectors w/Guide removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 60
Plate Connectors w/Guide installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 60
Filter Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 62
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 62
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 62
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 62
Filter Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 62
Back Filter Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 62
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 63
80 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Rear Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Rear Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
Rear Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Door I/O Panel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Door I/O Panel removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Door I/O Panel installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Cable Hook replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Cable Hook removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Cable Hook installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Rear Bumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Rear Bumper removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Rear Bumper installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
81
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Rear Handle replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 74

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 74
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 74
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 74
Rear Handle removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 74
Rear Handle installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 75
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 75
Printer Filler Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 76
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 76
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 76
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 76
Printer Filler Storage procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 76
Printer Filler Storage installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 76
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 76
Column Cover Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 78
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 78
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 78
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 78
Column Cover Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 78
Column Cover Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 79
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 80
Main Cable Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 81
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 81
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 81
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 81
Main Cable Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 81
Main Cable Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 82
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 82
Covers under XY / Frogleg motors replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 83
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 83
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 83
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 83
Covers under XY / Frogleg motors removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 84
Covers under XY / Frogleg motors installation procedure . . . . . . . . .8 - 85
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 85
82 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Bulkhead Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Bulkhead Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Bulkhead Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 89
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 89
Left Handle Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 89
Right Handle Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 89
Replacing Top Console Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 90

LCD Monitor assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
LCD Monitor removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
LCD Monitor assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 96
LCD Arm assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 98
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 98
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 98
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 98
LCD Arm assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 99
LCD Arm assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
LCD Cables replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
LCD Cables removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 103
LCD Cables installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 107
83
PROPRIETARY TO GE
LCD Mount Lock replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 109

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 109
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 109
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 109
LCD Mount Lock removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 110
LCD Mount Lock installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 110
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 110
WLAN replacement instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 112
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 112
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 112
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 113
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 114
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 114
Set up and Check WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 116
Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 117
Probe Holder Insert replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 118
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 118
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 118
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 118
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 118
Probe Holder Insert removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 118
Probe Holder Insert installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 119
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 120
OP Panel Knobs replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 121
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 121
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 121
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 121
Operator Panel Knobs removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 121
Operator Panel Knobs installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 121
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 122
Upper Operator Panel / Touch Panel Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 124
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 124
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 124
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 124
Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal procedure . . . . . .8 - 126
Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation procedure . . . .8 - 129
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 133
84 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Upper Main Controller Board Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 134

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 134
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 134
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 134
Main Controller removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 135
Main Controller Board Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
Replacing the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140
Remove the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 141
Install the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 144
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 145
USB Connector Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
USB Connector Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 147
USB Connector Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 147
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 148
High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 149
High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable removal procedure . . . . . . 8 - 150
High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable installation procedure . . . . 8 - 150
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 151
Bulkhead Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
Bulkhead Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 153
Bulkhead Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 154
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 154
85
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 156

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 156
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 156
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 156
Remove the Bulkhead Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 157
Install the Bulkhead Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 157
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 158
Speaker replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 159
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 159
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 159
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 159
Speakers removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 160
Speaker(s) installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 160
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 160
Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 162
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 162
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 162
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 162
Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 163
Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . .8 - 164
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 164
Lower Operator Panel (OP) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 166
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 166
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 166
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 166
Lower Operator Panel removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 166
Lower Op Panel Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 169
Lower Operator Panel installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 177
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 178
Lower Operator Panel Frame Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 179
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 179
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 179
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 179
Lower Operator Panel Frame removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 180
Lower Operator Panel Frame installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 181
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 181
86 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Upper Bezel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 182

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 182
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 182
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 182
Upper Bezel removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 183
Upper Bezel installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 183
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 183
Lower Bezel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 185
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 185
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 185
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 185
Lower Bezel removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 186
Lower Bezel Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 187
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 187
Frame UI Upper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 188
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 188
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 188
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 188
Remove the Frame UI Upper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 189
Install the Frame UI Upper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 189
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 190
Trackball Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 191
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 191
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 191
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 191
Trackball Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 192
Trackball Assembly Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 192
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 193
Lower Switch Board with Elastomer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 194
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 194
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 194
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 194
Lower Switch Board with Elastomer removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 195
Lower Switch Board with Elastomer installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 196
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 196
87
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Mode Select Encoders replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 197

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 197
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 197
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 197
Mode Select Encoder removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 198
Mode Select Encoder replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 199
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 200
Encoder Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 201
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 201
Joystick Encoder replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 202
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 202
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 202
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 202
Joystick Encoder(s) removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 203
Joystick Encoder(s) Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 203
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 204
Palm Rest Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 205
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 205
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 205
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 205
Palm Rest Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 205
Palm Rest Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 206
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 206
Left Handle Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 207
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 207
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 207
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 207
Left Handle Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 208
Left Handle Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 208
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 208
88 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Right Handle Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 210

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 210
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 210
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 210
Right Handle Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 211
Right Handle Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 211
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 211
Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 213
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 213
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 213
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 213
Options Holder removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 214
Options Holder installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 215
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 215
Gel Warmer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 217
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 217
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 217
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 217
Gel Warmer removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 217
Gel Warmer installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 219
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 220
Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 221
Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 221
Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder installation . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 222
Replacing the Gel Warmer with a Storage Tray or TV/TR Probe Holder . . 8 - 223
Gel Warmer removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 223
XYZ Buttons replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 224
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 224
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 224
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 224
XYZ Buttons removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 225
XYZ Buttons installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 225
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 226
89
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Probe Cable Hooks replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 227

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 227
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 227
Probe Cable Hook removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 227
Probe Cable Hook installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 227
Probe Cable Hooks Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 228
Console Cable Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 228
Replacing XYZ Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 229

XY Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 230
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 230
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 230
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 230
XY Mechanism removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 231
XY Mechanism installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 232
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 232
XY Brake Assy replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 233
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 233
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 233
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 233
XY-Brake Assy removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 234
XY-Brake Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 236
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 236
Z-Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 238
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 238
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 238
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 238
Z-Mechanism removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 239
Z-Mechanism installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 240
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 241
90 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Drive Gear Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 242

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 242
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 242
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 242
Drive Gear Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 243
Drive Gear Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 245
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 245
XYZ Control Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 247
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 247
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 247
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 247
XYZ Control Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 248
XYZ Control Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 248
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 248
Main Console parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 251

Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 252
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 252
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 252
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 252
Bottom Filter installation procedure (looped type strap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 256
Removal Process with Looped Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 256
Removal Process with Non-loop Type Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 258
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 261
Fan Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 262
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 262
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 262
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 262
Fan Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 263
Fan Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 263
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 264
91
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Subwoofer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 265

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 265
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 265
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 265
Subwoofer removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 266
Subwoofer installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 266
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 266
Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 267
Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 267
Main Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 267
Pedal Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 267
Rear Handle replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 267
Casters and Brakes replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 268

Rear Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 268
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 268
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 268
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 268
Rear Casters removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 269
Rear Casters installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 270
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 270
Front Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 271
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 271
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 271
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 271
Front Casters removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 272
Front Casters installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 273
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 273
92 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Pedal Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 274

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 274
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 274
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 274
Pedal Mechanism removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 274
Pedal Mechanism installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 275
Rod Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 275
Rod Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 275
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 278
Brake Pedal replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 279
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 279
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 279
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 279
Brake Pedal removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 279
Brake Pedal installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 279
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 280
Pedal Release replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 280
Pedal Dir Lock replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 280
Front End Acquisition / Card Cage parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 281

Front End Card Rack parts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 282
Front End Card Cage Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 284
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 284
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 284
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 284
Card Cage Cover removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 284
Card Cage Cover installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 285
Front Plane Board / XD BUS replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 286
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 286
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 286
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 286
Front Plane Boards removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 287
Front Plane Boards installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 288
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 289
93
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Relay Board (GRLY or RLY) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 290

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 290
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 290
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 290
Relay Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 291
Relay Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 291
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 292
Receiver Board (GRX) replacement - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 293
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 293
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 293
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 293
GRX Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 294
GRX Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 294
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 295
Transmitter Board (GTX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 296
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 296
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 296
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 296
GTX Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 297
GTX Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 297
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 298
Digital Receiver Board (DRX) replacement - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . .8 - 299
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 299
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 299
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 299
DRX Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 300
DRX Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 300
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 301
GFI Board replacement - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 302
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 302
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 302
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 302
GFI Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 303
GFI Board installation procedure - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 304
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 304
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 304
94 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
VPD - GFI and MRX Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 305

Before Replacing a Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 307
After Replacing a Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 310
If the System is NOT Functional to Access the Windows
Desktop BEFORE Replacing the Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 312
MRX Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 313
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 313
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 313
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 313
MRX Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 314
MRX Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 314
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 315
Power Distribution (PD) Board replacement - MRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 316
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 316
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 316
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 316
PD Board removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 317
PD Board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 317
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 318
Backplane replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 319
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 319
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 319
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 320
Backplane removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 322
Front End Card Rack installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 326
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 327
95
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Back End Processor (BEP) parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 328

Back End Processor (BEP) parts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 329
Back End Processor replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 335
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 335
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 335
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 335
Back End Processor removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 336
Back End Processor installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 339
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 340
Back End Processor Power Supply replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 341
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 341
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 341
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 341
Back End Processor Power Supply removal procedure . . . . . . . . . .8 - 342
Back End Processor Power Supply installation procedure . . . . . . . .8 - 343
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 343
Back End Processor I/O replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 344
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 344
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 344
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 344
BEP I/O assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 345
BEP I/O Assembly installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 346
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 347
Back End Processor Hard Disk Drive (HDD) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 348
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 348
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 348
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 348
Hard Disk Drive removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 349
Hard Disk Drive installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 350
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 351
96 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Back End Processor Front Module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 352

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 352
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 352
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 352
Front Module removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 352
Front Module installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 354
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 354
Back End Processor Battery Pack replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 356
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 356
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 356
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 356
BEP Battery Pack removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 357
BEP Battery Pack installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 357
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 358
Back End Processor Extended Power Shutdown replacement . . . . . . . . . 8 - 359
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 359
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 359
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 359
BEP Extended Power Shutdown removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 360
BEP Extended Power Shutdown installation procedure . . . . . . . . . 8 - 361
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 361
Digital Video Recorder (DVR) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 362
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 362
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 362
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 362
Digital Video Recorder removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 363
Digital Video Recorder installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 364
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 364
97
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Back End Processor Fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 366

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 366
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 366
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 366
Back End Processor Fan removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 367
Back End Processor Fan installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 368
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 368
Main Power Supply parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 369

Main Power Supply replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 370
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 370
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 370
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 370
Main Power Supply removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 371
Main PS installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 373
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 375
Main Power Supply Fan Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 376
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 376
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 376
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 376
Main Power Supply Fan Assembly removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 377
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 381
4D Motor Controller (4D MC) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 382
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 382
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 382
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 382
4D Motor Controller removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 383
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 393
98 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
I/O Modules replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 394

External I/O Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 394
Patient I/O Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 394
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 394
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 394
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 395
Patient I/O module removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 396
Patient I/O installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 396
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 396
CW replacement instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 398
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 398
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 398
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 398
CW Connector Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 399
CW Connector installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 400
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 401
Peripherals replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 403

Internal Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 404
DVD R/W drive replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 404
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 404
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 404
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 404
DVD R/W drive removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 405
DVD R/W drive installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 406
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 406
Digital Video Recorder (DVR) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 407
99
PROPRIETARY TO GE
DVD Storage Tray replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 408

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 408
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 408
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 408
DVD Storage Tray removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 409
DVD Storage Tray installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 409
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 409
V Nav module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 411
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 411
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 411
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 411
V Nav module removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 412
V Nav module installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 412
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 413
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 413
Black & White Digital Graphic Printer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 414
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 414
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 414
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 414
Black & White Digital Graphic Printer removal procedure . . . . . . . . .8 - 414
Black & White Digital Graphic Printer installation procedure . . . . . . .8 - 414
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 415
Printer Bracket replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 416
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 416
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 416
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 416
Printer Bracket removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 417
Printer Bracket installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 417
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 418
External Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 418
100 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Cables replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 419

LCD Monitor Cables replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 420
Main Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 420
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 420
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 420
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 420
Main Cable (Harness) removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 421
Main Cable (Harness) installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 421
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 427
Option Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 428

LOGIQ E9 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 428
ECG (Patient I/O) Module Kit installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 429
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 429
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 429
Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 429
Parts Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 429
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 430
ECG (Patient I/O) Module Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 431
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 432
Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 433
WLAN option installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 434
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 434
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 434
Parts Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 434
Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 434
Hardware Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 434
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 435
Remove LCD monitor rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 435
WLAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 436
Set up and Check WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 438
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 442
Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 442
101
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Optional External Display Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 443

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 443
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 443
Parts Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 443
102 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
CHAPTER 9
Renewal Parts
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3
Parts list groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
LOGIQ E9 Models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 6
Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7
Top Console parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13

Operator Panel Compatible Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 23
XYZ Mechanism parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24
Main Console parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 26
Casters (Wheels) parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 28
Card Rack parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 30

Card Rack Compatible Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 36
Front End Boards Compatible Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 37
LOGIQ E9 Front End Boards Compatible Configurations Key . . . . 9 - 38
Back End Processor (BEP) parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 39

Back End Boards Compatible Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 43
LOGIQ E9 Back End Boards Compatible Configurations Key . . . . . 9 - 43
Main Power Supply parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 44
103
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 47
Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 47
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 48
Peripherals Compatible Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 49
LOGIQ E9 Peripherals Compatible Configurations Key . . . . . . . . . .9 - 49
Mains Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 50
Internal Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 52
Top Console Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 52
XYZ Controller cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 54
Main Power Supply cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 55
Card Rack cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 56
Back End Processor (BEP) cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 58
Peripherals Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 62
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 63
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 66
Options Compatible Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 69
LOGIQ E9 Options Compatible Configurations Key . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 69
Hardware Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 70
104 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
CHAPTER 10
Care & Maintenance
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Periodic maintenance inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Why do maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Keeping records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Quality assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Maintenance task schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3

How often should maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3
Tools required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Standard GE tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Special tools, supplies and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Specific requirements for periodic maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Tools needed to service the LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Preliminary checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Functional checks (See also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
System checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Peripheral/option checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Mains cable inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
General cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Air filter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Optional diagnostic checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
View the logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Probe maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Probe related checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Basic probe care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Basic probe cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
105
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 14

Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 14
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 15
Grounding continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 16
Meter procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 16
Dale 600 - Ground Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 17
Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 18
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 18
Generic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 18
Dale 600 meter procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 19
Data sheet for chassis source leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 20
Isolated patient lead (source) leakagelead to ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 20
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 20
Generic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 21
Dale 600 meter procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 21
Isolated patient lead (source) leakagelead to lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 23
Dale 600 patient lead tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 23
Isolated patient lead (sink) leakage-isolation test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 23
Data sheet for ECG Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 24
Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 25
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 25
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 25
Generic procedure on Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 27
Meter procedure using probe adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 28
Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe
Isolation (Sink) Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 30
GE Healthcare Leakage Current Limits for LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 32
When there's too much leakage current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 33

Chassis Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 33
Probe Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 33
Peripheral Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 33
Still Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 33
New Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 33
ECG Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 33
ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 34
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 - 35
106 -
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1-1
Overview
1-1-1 Purpose of this chapter
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing LOGIQ E9. The service provider
must read and understand all the information presented here before installing or servicing a unit.
1-1-2 Contents in this chapter

1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 Service manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3 Important conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-4 Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-5 Label locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-6 Dangerous procedure warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1-7 Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-8 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1-9 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1-10 Customer assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 1-2
Service manual overview
Attention
This manual contains necessary and sufficient information for the Field Service Engineer or Biotech
Engineer to maintain and service the system safely. Advanced equipment training may be provided by
factory trained Field Service trainers for the agreed-upon time period.
This service manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound scanning
unit. It is divided in 10 chapters as shown below, in Table 1-1 "Contents in this service manual" on page
1-3.
Indications for Use
The LOGIQ E9 is intended for use by a qualified physician for ultrasound evaluation. Specific clinical
applications and exam types include:
Fetal/Obstetrics
Abdominal (includes renal, GYN/Pelvic)
Pediatric
Small Organ (breast, testes, thyroid)
Neonatal Cephalic
Adult Cephalic
Cardiac (adult and pediatric)
Peripheral Vascular
Musculo-skeletal Conventional and Superficial
Urology (including prostate)
Transrectal
Transvaginal
Transesophageal
Contraindication
The LOGIQ E9 ultrasound system is not intended for ophthalmic use or any use causing the acoustic
beam to pass through the eye.
1-2-1 Contents in this section

1-2-1 Contents in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2-2 Contents in this service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2-3 Typical users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-4 LOGIQ E9 models covered by this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-5 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2 Section 1-2 - Service manual overview

PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-2-2 Contents in this service manual

The service manual is divided into ten chapters.
In the beginning of the manual, before chapter 1, you will find the language policy for GEs service
documentation, legal information, a revision overview, and the Table of Contents (TOC).
An Index has been included after chapter 10.
Table 1-1 Contents in this service manual
CHAPTER
NUMBER CHAPTER TITLE DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction Contains a content summary and warnings.
2 Site preparations Contains pre-setup requirements for the LOGIQ E9.
3 LOGIQ E9 Setup Contains setup procedure with procedure checklist.
4 Functional Checks Contains functional checks that must be performed as part of the
installation, or as required during servicing and periodic
maintenance.
5 Components and Functions (Theory) Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the
electronics.
6 Service Adjustments Contains instructions on how to make any available adjustments to

the LOGIQ E9.
7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines for the
LOGIQ E9.
8 Replacement procedures Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all
changeable FRUs, available option installation instructions, and
upgrade installation instructions.
9 Renewal Parts Contains a complete list of replacement parts for the LOGIQ E9.
10 Care & Maintenance Provides periodic maintenance procedures for LOGIQ E9.
N/A Index A quick way to the topic youre looking for.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-2-3 Typical users of the Basic Service Manual

Service Personnel (setup, maintenance, etc.)
Hospitals Service Personnel
Architectural Planners/Installation Planners (some parts of Chapter 2 - Site preparations)
1-2-4 LOGIQ E9 models covered by this manual
Table 1-2 LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware/Software

Compatibility - Upgrade Options
CONSOLE
MODEL DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE VERSION
NUMBER
Phase 1 BT2010 BT2011 R4 R5 R6
R1.x.x R2.x.x R3.x.x 4 Rev. x.x 5 Rev. x.x 6 Rev. x.x
LOGIQ E9,
5205000 Y U U U U N
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-2 Y U U U U N
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-3 N Y U U U N
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-4 N Y U U U N
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-5 N N Y U U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-6 N N Y U U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-7 N N N Y U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-8 N N N N Y U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-9 N N N N N Y
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware/Software Compatibility - Upgrade Options
LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware/Software

Y Original
U Upgrade available
N Not supported
Front End Processor - see: 9-12-2 "Front End Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-67.
Back End Processor - see: 9-13-1 "Back End Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-79.
NOTE: When not otherwise specified, the contents of this manual applies to all LOGIQ E9 models.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-2-5 Product description
1-2-5-1 Contents in this sub-section

1-2-5-1 Contents in this sub-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2-5-2 Overview of the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-2-5-3 History - hardware/software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-2-5-4 History - peripherals/software versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-2-5-5 FRUs for Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-2-5-6 History - supported probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-2-5-7 How to turn the scanner ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-2-5-8 How to check for hardware/software version and installed options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-2-5-9 Purpose of the operator manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-2-5-2 Overview of the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound scanner

The LOGIQ E9 ultrasound unit is a high performance digital ultrasound imaging system with total data
management.
The system provides image generation in B-Mode, Color Doppler, Power Doppler, M-Mode,
Color M-Mode, PW and 4D, Tissue Velocity imaging, Volume-Guided Ultrasound and Contrast
applications. The fully digital architecture of the LOGIQ E9 unit allows optimal usage of all scanning
modes and probe types throughout the full spectrum of operating frequencies.
Signal flows from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End, and then over to the Back End Processor
and finally to the monitor and peripherals.
System configuration is stored on the hard drive in the Back End Processor.
All necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.
1-2-5-3 History - hardware/software versions

Refer to Section 9-6 "Software" on page 9-6.
1-2-5-4 History - peripherals/software versions

Refer to Section 9-15 "Peripherals" on page 9-83.
1-2-5-5 FRUs for Back End Processor

Refer to Section 9-13 "Back End Processor (BEP) parts" on page 9-72.
1-2-5-6 History - supported probes

Refer to Section 9-18 "Probes" on page 9-112.
1-2-5-7 How to turn the scanner ON and OFF

To turn the scanner ON see: 4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
To turn the scanner OFF see: 4-2-5 "Top Console position adjustment" on page 4-10.
1-2-5-8 How to check for hardware/software version and installed options

To verify the hardware versions on the boards, refer to Section 9-5 "LOGIQ E9 Models and
hardware/software compatibility" on page 9-5.
Refer to 4-4-1 "Software Configuration Checks" on page 4-53 to check the software versions on
local software on the boards.
Refer to Section 4-3 "Functional checks" on page 4-34 to check for installed options.
1-2-5-9 Purpose of the operator manual(s)

The operator manuals should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ E9.
The online versions of the operator manuals are available via the Help function on LOGIQ E9s operator
panel.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 1-3
Important conventions
1-3-1 Contents in this section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-3-2 Conventions used in book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-3-3 Standard hazard icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-3-4 Product icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-3-2 Conventions used in book
1-3-2-1 Model designations

This manual covers the LOGIQ E9 scanners listed in 1-2-4 "LOGIQ E9 models covered by this manual"
on page 1-4.
1-3-2-2 Icons
Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they will reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels, and
conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.
1-3-2-3 Safety precaution messages

Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service
information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary
message. Known or potential hazards to personnel are labeled in one of three ways:
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
When a hazard is present that can cause property damage, but has absolutely no personal injury risk,
a NOTICE is used.
DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL

CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
WARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
CAUTION CAUTION IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL OR CAN CAUSE
MINOR PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE POSSIBLE.
NOTICE Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no
personal injury risk.
Notice Example: Disk drive may crash.
NOTE: Notes are used to provide important information about an item or a procedure.
NOTE: Be sure to read the notes; the information contained in a note can often save you time or effort.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-3-3 Standard hazard icons
Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle,
as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be
used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause harm. Even if a symbol
isnt used in this manual, it may be included for your reference.
Table 1-3 Standard hazard icons
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
BIOLOGICAL ELECTRICAL MOVING
ACOUSTIC OUTPUT EXPLOSION SMOKE / FIRE
LASER HEAT PINCH
LASER
LIGHT
1-8 Section 1-3 - Important conventions

PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-3-3 Standard hazard icons (contd)
Table 1-4 Standard hazard icons (contd)
RADIATION

Other icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.
Table 1-5 Standard Icons that indicate that a special procedure is to be used
AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
OR
HAND PROTECTION FOOT PROTECTION


PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-3-4 Product icons

The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information
provided on the equipment.
Table 1-6 Product icons 1 of 8
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION

Identification and Rating Plate
Manufacturers name and address Rear panel
Identification and Rating Plate
Date of manufacture Rating Plate
Serial Number Rating Plate
Catalog Number Rating Plate
Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or

protection.
United States only Rear panel

Prescription Requirement label
Authorized European Representative Rear panel

address
Equipment Type BF (man in the box

symbol) IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Probe connectors including Doppler
Type equipment having a floating probe connector
applied part.
Equipment Type BF Applied Part (man

in the box with paddle) symbol is in Probe
accordance with IEC 60417-5334.
Equipment Type CF (heart in the box

symbol) IEC 878-02-05 indicates Probe connectors and ECG connector.
equipment having a floating applied part On newer systems also on the rear of
having a degree of protection suitable the system.
for direct cardiac contact.
1 - 10 Section 1-3 - Important conventions

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 1-6 Product icons (Continued) 2 of 8
DEFIBRILLATOR-PROOF TYPE CF At the ECG connector on front of

EQUIPMENT. system.
Laboratory logo or labels denoting

Device Listing/Certification Labels conformance with industry safety Rear of console
standards such as UL or IEC.
This precaution is intended to prevent

injury that may result if one person
attempt to move the unit considerable Rear cover label
distances or on an incline due to the
weight of the unit.
DO NOT push the system at this point or

from this area. Use the handle to push/
Rear of LCD Monitor
pull the system, e.g., DO NOT use the
Front of On-Board V Nav Stand
LCD. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury or system damage.
Follow Instructions for Use.

ATTENTION - Consult accompanying Rear Cover,
documents is intended to alert the user
Rear of LCD Monitor,
to refer to the operator manual or other
Miscellaneous Probe Labels
instructions when complete information
cannot be provided on the label.
Symbol indicating that the Instructions

Rear Panel
for Use are supplied in electronic form.
Follow Instructions for Use.

ATTENTION - Consult accompanying
documents is intended to alert the user
Rear of particular Main Power Supply
to refer to the operator manual or other
instructions when complete information
The system is not designed for use with

DANGER - Risk of explosion used in... Rear cover console
flammable anesthetic gases.
The system is not designed for use with Rear of console

flammable anesthetic gases.
C-UL Mark Parts

Indicates that the product has been Rear of LCD Monitor (inside)
tested and approved in UL Laboratories, Footswitch
based on UL and CSA standards,
through mutual approval activities.
Chapter 1 Introduction 1 - 11
PROPRIETARY TO GE
This unit carries the CE mark.

The LOGIQ E9 unit complies with
regulatory requirements of the
European Directive 93/ 42/EEC
concerning medical devices. Rear of console
It also complies with emission limits for
a Group 1, Class B Medical Device as
stated in EN 60601-1-2
(IEC 60601-1-2).
Various
CAUTION The equilateral triangle is

usually used in combination with other
symbols to advise or warn the user.
Shear Wave Option Capacitor Pack

Monitor Rear Cover
ATTENTION - Consult
accompanying documents
is intended to alert the user to refer to
Various,
the operator manual or other
Rear Cover,
instructions when complete information Probe Label
General Warning
Warning - Dangerous Voltage

(the lightning flash with arrowhead in Various
equilateral triangle) is used to indicate
electric shock hazards.
Mains OFF
Rear of system adjacent to
Indicates the power off position of the
MAINS Switch
mains power switch.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
PINCH POINT
Indicates moving parts that may cause Various
injury (such as the top, rear of the LCD
Arm or XYZ Mech).
Mains ON
Indicates the Power ON position of the
mains power switch.
ON Indicates the power on position of
the power switch.
CAUTION Rear of console
THE ON/OFF BUTTON ON
THE OPERATOR PANEL
DOES NOT ISOLATE MAINS
SUPPLY
ON/OFF button
CAUTION
SYSTEM SHUTDOWN USING
THE ON/OFF BUTTON DOES
or NOT DISCONNECT LOGIQ E9
Operating Panel
FROM MAINS VOLTAGE.
For disconnecting LOGIQ E9 from
mains voltage after system shutdown,
please set the circuit breaker close to
the mains inlet to OFF as described in
4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
Protective Earth
Indicates the protective earth Used several places inside the system.
(grounding) terminal.
Equipotential
Indicates the terminal to be used for
connecting equipotential conductors
Rear of console
when interconnecting (grounding) with
other equipment as described in
IEC60601-1.
Rear Panel, Rating Plate, Circuit

Alternating Current symbol is in
breaker label of console and Front
accordance with IEC 60878-01-14.
Panel (if applicable).
PROPRIETARY TO GE
This symbol indicates that waste

electrical and electronic equipment
must not be disposed of as unsorted
municipal waste and must be collected
Rear of console
separately. Please contact an Rear of LCD Monitor (inside)
authorized representative of the
manufacturer for information concerning
the decommissioning of your
equipment.
This product consists of devices that

may contain mercury, which must be
recycled or disposed of in accordance Rear Panel
or with local, state, or country laws. (Within Rear of LCD Monitor (inside)
this system, the backlight lamps in the
monitor display, contain mercury.)
ETL Listing Mark Monogram Rear Panel
GOST Symbol. Russia Regulatory

Rear Panel
Country Clearance.
EAC Symbol. Rear Panel

TP TC 020/2011 Rating Plate
ISO 7010 - P007

V Nav Transmitter
Volume Navigation Pacemaker Warning

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Indicates the presence of hazardous

substance(s) above the maximum
concentration value. Maximum
concentration values for electronic
information products, as set by the
Peoples Republic of China Electronic
Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006,
include the hazardous substances of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, Probe
cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl
(PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl
ether (PBDE). 10 indicates the number
of years during which the hazardous
substance(s) will not leak or mutate so
that the use of this product will not result
in any severe environmental pollution,
bodily injury, or damage to any assets.
Indicates the presence of hazardous

substance(s) above the maximum
concentration value. Maximum
concentration values for electronic
information products, as set by the
Peoples Republic of China Electronic
Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006,
include the hazardous substances of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, China Rating Plate
cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl
(PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl
ether (PBDE). 20 indicates the number
of years during which the hazardous
substance(s) will not leak or mutate so
that the use of this product will not result
in any severe environmental pollution,
bodily injury, or damage to any assets.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
CAUTION
LCD and Operator Panel information

and warnings.
CAUTION
Rear of the LCD monitor.
How to lower LCD prior to transport
How to lock Operator Panel prior to

transport
DO NOT place a finger, hand or any

object on the joint of the monitor or
monitor arm to avoid injurywhen moving
the monitor and monitor arm.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Non-ionizing Electromagnetic Radiation Rear Panel

Label
1-3-5 Product Labels on LOGIQ E9 consoles used in a veterinary environment

There are different handling instructions when servicing consoles that are used in a veterinary
environment.
Table 1-7 Product Labels on LOGIQ E9 consoles used in a

veterinary environment
LABEL LOCATION
Side Covers
For Veterinary Back Cover
use only
5454608
Probe(s)
5447716
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 1-4
Safety considerations
1-4-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-4-3 Human safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-4-4 Mechanical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1-4-5 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-4-2 Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of
this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this
manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.
1-4-3 Human safety

Operating personnel must not remove the system covers.
Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only.
Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ E9 Training Seminar are authorized to service the
equipment.

ADJUSTING.
WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ E9, SOME METAL
SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUTDOWN MODE.
WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD,
PLACING PEOPLE IN AWKWARD POSITIONS, GE HAS LIMITED THE LIFTING WEIGHT
FOR ONE PERSON IN THE FIELD TO 16 KG (35 LBS). ANYTHING OVER 16 KG (35 LBS)
REQUIRES 2 PEOPLE.
WARNING USE ALL PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PPE) SUCH AS GLOVES, SAFETY
SHOES, SAFETY GLASSES, AND KNEELING PAD, TO REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY.
WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE.
OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT
CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
WARNING Do Not Substitute Parts or Modify Equipment

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute
parts or perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment.
1 - 18 Section 1-4 - Safety considerations

PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-4-3 Human safety (contd)
WARNING When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and
stores mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of
the monitor and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/
when you activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is
removed and the shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the
elevation assembly.
WARNING Ensure that the system is turned off and unplugged.

Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
The Amber light on the Op Panel On/Off button will turn off.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown and Back End Processor may be
energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power
source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to
discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation. The Amber light on the Op Panel On/Off
button will turn off.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown and Back End Processor may be
energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet
WARNING Use extreme caution as long as THE LOGIQ E9 is un-stable, not resting on all four
Casters.
WARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel
and damage to the equipment.
WARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all mechanical parts. If sharp edges are
encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.
The appropriate PPE is required per EHS Policies and SRAs.
WARNING Wear all PPE including gloves as indicated in the chemical MSDS.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-4-4 Mechanical safety
WARNING While the software installprocedure is designed to preserve data, you should save any
patient data, images, system setups to a DVD or hardcopy before doing a software
upgrade.
WARNING PRIOR TO ELEVATING THE SCANNER, VERIFY THAT THE KEYBOARD IS LOCKED IN
ITS LOWEST POSITION. VERIFY THAT THE FRONT BRAKE IS LOCKED AND THE
SCANNER IS UNABLE TO SWIVEL. VERIFY THAT THE REAR BRAKES ARE IN THE
LOCKED POSITION.
WARNING WHEN THE UNIT IS RAISED FOR A REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE, USE
EXTREME CAUTION SINCE IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE AND TIP OVER.
WARNING ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN
EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND
PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR
DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
WARNING NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK, IT
MAY BE DAMAGED.
WARNING REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the
release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a
second time to engage the brake.
WARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the
Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as
much as possible before moving the system.
CAUTION BEFORE YOU MOVE OR TRANSPORT THE SYSTEM, MAKE SURE TO LOCK THE LCD
MONITOR ARM FIRMLY AND FLIP DOWN THE MONITOR TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE
SYSTEM.
CAUTION Always lock the Top/Upper Console in its parking (locked) position before moving the scanner
around.
CAUTION TO AVOID INJURY WHEN YOU MOVE THE LCD MONITOR AND THE MONITOR ARM, DO NOT
PUT YOUR FINGER, HAND, OR OBJECT ON THE JOINT OF THE MONITOROR THE MONITOR
ARM.
1 - 20 Section 1-4 - Safety considerations

PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-4-4 Mechanical safety (contd)
CAUTION LOGIQ E9 WEIGHS 135 KG (298 LB), R3.X AND EARLIER, 140 KG (309 LB), R4.X AND
LATER, OR MORE, DEPENDING ON INSTALLED PERIPHERALS, WHEN READY FOR
USE. CARE MUST BE USED WHEN MOVING IT OR REPLACING ITS PARTS. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THE PRECAUTIONS LISTED BELOW COULD RESULT IN INJURY,
UNCONTROLLED MOTION AND COSTLY DAMAGE. ALWAYS:
- BE SURE THE PATHWAY IS CLEAR.
- USE SLOW, CAREFUL MOTIONS.
- USE TWO PEOPLE WHEN MOVING ON INCLINES OR LIFTING MORE THAN
16 KG (35 LBS).
CAUTION TO AVOID INJURY OR DAMAGE TOTHE MONITOR, MAKE SURE THERE IS NOTHING WITHIN
RANGE OF THE LCD BEFORE MOVING THE MONITOR AND MONITOR ARM. THIS INCLUDES
PEOPLE AS WELL AS THINGS.
CAUTION Ensure that nobody touches the console arm/frogleg when moving the Operator Panel.
CAUTION Use Protective Glasses during drilling, filing and during all other work where eyes need
protection.
CAUTION Use Safety Shoes when doing work where there is any chance of foot damage.
CAUTION Use Protective Gloves when drilling and cutting.
NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables.
NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle, see 4-2-14-4 "Transporting
the LOGIQ E9 by vehicle" on page 4-19.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-4-5 Electrical safety
1-4-5-1 Safe practices

Follow these guidelines to minimize shock hazards whenever you are using the scanner:
The equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground.

The unit is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved
electrical outlet with safety ground. A separate power outlet with a 20 amp circuit breaker for 120
VAC for 120V area, 7.5 amp circuit breaker for 220-240 VAC for 220/240V area or 15 amp circuit
breaker for 100 VAC for Japan.
The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.
Both the system power cable and the power connector must meet international electrical standards.
WARNING Connecting a LOGIQ E9 scanner to the wrong voltage level will most likely destroy it.
1-4-5-2 Probes
Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner:
Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the:
- housing
- cable strain relief
- lens
- seal
- connector pins
- locking mechanism
Do not use a damaged or defective probe.
Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
The system has more than one type of probe port. Use the appropriate probe port designed for the
probe you are connecting.
Section 1-5
Label locations
Refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 2, or the latest version
of the LOGIQ E9 Release Notes.
Table 1-8 Basic User Manual and Release Notes per LOGIQ E9 console
ENGLISH BASIC ENGLISH

CONSOLE MODEL USER MANUAL RELEASE NOTES
NUMBER DIRECTION NUMBER DIRECTION NUMBER
5205000 5180374-100 5180358-100
5205000-2, -3 5335626-100 5335634-100
5205000-4, -5 5389558-100 5389562-100
5205000-6, -7 5450756-100 5449984-100
5205000-8 5496408-100 5476411-100
5205000-9 5573149-100 5573151-100
1 - 22 Section 1-5 - Label locations

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 1-6
Dangerous procedure warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this
manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.

ADJUSTING.
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.
WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION
OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A
DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
WARNING DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT.

BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, DO NOT
INSTALL SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION
OF THE EQUIPMENT.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 1-7
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements (USA) or local Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring
you are in total control of the AC power plug at all times during the service process.
To apply Lockout/Tagout:
1.) Plan and prepare for shutdown.

2.) Shutdown the equipment.
3.) Isolate the equipment.
4.) Apply Lockout/Tagout Devices.
5.) Disconnect the Extended Power Shutdown battery at J3 when working in the BEP.
6.) Control all stored and residual energy.
7.) Verify isolation.
All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9

When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
1. Turn off the scanner.
2. Unplug the system.
3. Maintain control of the system power plug.
TAG
LOCKOUT
& 4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Signed Date
The Amber light on the Op Panel On/Off button will turn off.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS
OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be
energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
If the Shear Wave Option is present, MAKE SURE the LEDs on the Capacitor Pack are OFF before
disconnecting the Capacitor Pack Cables.
1 - 24 Section 1-7 - Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 1-8
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GE policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GE employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have
been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment
with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound
probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care are regulated medical waste for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.
For LOGIQ E9 Vet system
NOTE: Return used/unused spare parts from a veterinary environment with the purple recycling label
(regardless of its actual condition) and add a description on the label stating that the items were
removed from a LOGIQ E9 Vet in a veterinary environment.
This applies for Probes and covers labeled as Vet used.
If purple recycling label is not used in your region, use local recycling label.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 1-9
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
1-9-1 What is EMC?
Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic
environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other
equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility
results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or
when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often
referred to as radiofrequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through
space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy,
EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and
disturbances in the electrical power supply.
1-9-2 Compliance
LOGIQ E9 conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from
electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient
requirements.
Applicable standards are: 47CFR Part 18, IEC6060112:2001.
NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are
in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all
comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
1-9-3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention
WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS:
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TOTHE ADVISED ESD
CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (TO THE RIGHT OF
THE POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical
contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed
for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential
for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.
If the Shear Wave Option is present, MAKE SURE the LEDs on the Capacitor Pack are
OFF before disconnecting the Capacitor Pack Cables.
1 - 26 Section 1-9 - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 1-10
Customer assistance
1-10-1 Contact information
If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the user manual, or if you
require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as
listed below.
Before you call, identify the following information, and acquire image (Alt+D) to send to the Customer
Care team:
1.) System ID serial number.

2.) Software version.
3.) Date and time of occurrence.
4.) Sequence of events leading to issue.
5.) Is the issue repeatable?
6.) Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.
7.) Media brand, speed, capacity, type.
8.) Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.
NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 1-10 Customer assistance (contd)

Table 1-9 Phone numbers for Customer Assistance
LOCATION PHONE NUMBER
1-800-437-1171
USA Service: On-site
GE Healthcare
1-800-558-2040
Ultrasound Service Engineering Service Parts
9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2156)
1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-
Wauwatosa, WI 53226 Application Support
5698
Canada 1-800-668-0732
Service 1-262-524-5300
Latin America
Application Support 1-262-524-5698
Europe
GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH Support Phone: +49 (0) 212-2802-652
Beethovenstrasse 239
Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 Solingen Support Fax: +49 (0) 2122-8024-31
Germany
Egypt Service Center 0020 2322 1252

EAGM
UAE Service Center 00971 8003646
Asia (Singapore)
GE Ultrasound Asia
Tel: +65 6291-8528
Service Department - Ultrasound
298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06
Fax: +6 5 6291-7006
Central Placa
Singapore 168730
Phone: 81-426-48-2940
Japan Support Center
Fax: 81-426-48-2905
86-800-810 8188
China 86-400-812 8188
86-10-6788 2652
1-800-425-8025
India 1-800-425-7255
1-800-102-7750
1 - 28 Section 1-10 - Customer assistance

PROPRIETARY TO GE
1-10-2 System manufacturer
Table 1-10 System manufacturer
MANUFACTURER FAX NUMBER
GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics,

LLC
9900 Innovation Drive 414-721-3865
Wauwatosa, WI 53226
USA
Table 1-11 Authorized Representative
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE TELEPHONE / FAX NUMBER
The location of the CE marking is shown in the Safety chapter of this manual.
+49 761 45 43 -0 /
+49 761 45 43 -233
Authorized EU Representative European registered place of business:

GE Medical Systems Information Technologies GmbH (GEMS IT GmbH)
Munzinger Strasse 3, D-79111 Freiburg, GERMANY
PROPRIETARY TO GE
This page was intentionally left blank.
1 - 30 Section 1-10 - Customer assistance

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Chapter 2
Site preparations
Section 2-1
Overview
This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the setup of a LOGIQ E9.
Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the LOGIQ E9.

2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 General console requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-3 Facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Chapter 2 Site preparations 2-1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 2-2
General console requirements
2-2-2 Console environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2-3 Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2-4 EMI limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-2-5 Probes environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-2-6 Time and manpower requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-2-2 Console environmental requirements
2-2-2-1 If the LOGIQ E9 is very cold or hot

When unpacking the device, allow the temperature of the device to stabilize before powering up. The
following table describes guidelines for reaching operational temperatures from storage or transport
temperatures. See: Table 2-1
Table 2-1 LOGIQ E9 Acclimate Time

o 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
C
oF 140 131 122 113 104 95 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40
Hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
2-2-2-2 Environmental specifications
Table 2-2 Environmental Specifications for LOGIQ E9 Scanners
Operational Storage Transport (< 16 hrs.)

10 - 35 C -10 - 50 C -10 - 50 C
Temperature
(50 - 96 F) (-14 - 122 F) (-14 - 122 F)
30% - 80% 30% - 80% 30% - 80%
Humidity
non-condensing non-condensing non-condensing
Pressure 70 - 106 kPa 70 - 106 kPa 70 - 106 kPa
Heat Dissipation 4712 Btu/hour
2-2-2-3 Cooling
The cooling requirement for the LOGIQ E9 scanner with LCD and onboard peripherals, is up to 4712
Btu/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room.
Each person in the room places an additional 300 Btu/hr demand on the cooling system.
2-2-2-4 Lighting
Bright light is needed for LOGIQ E9 installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient
comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting
system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source
of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible
interference.
2-2 Section 2-2 - General console requirements

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2-2-3 Electrical requirements
2-2-3-1 General requirements
NOTE: GE requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This
dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the LOGIQ E9.
The LOGIQ E9 will function on Voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using 220 volt
power, then a center tapped power source is required.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the LOGIQ E9 outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the LOGIQ E9 outlet.
NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the
main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
2-2-3-2 Electrical requirements for LOGIQ E9

In the table below, the electrical specifications for LOGIQ E9 include LCD and on board peripherals.
Table 2-3 Electrical specifications for the LOGIQ E9
POWER
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE TOLERANCES CONSUMPTION FREQUENCY
5205000-x LOGIQ E9, 100-240 VAC 100-240 VAC +/-10% 1100 W 50/60 Hz
The current drain varies, depending on the mains voltage.
At 230 VAC, the current may be up to 8 A.

At 100 VAC, the current may be up to 10 A.
2-2-3-3 Inrush current

During power on, an inrush circuit prevents the current from increasing above the stated values.
Table 2-4 Inrush current at different mains voltages
VOLTAGE 50 Hz 60 Hz
90 VAC 13 A 12 A
110 VAC 9A 11 A
220 VAC 5.5 A 6A
264 VAC 6A 5A

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2-2-3-4 Site circuit breaker
CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR.

THE LOGIQ E9 SCANNER REQUIRES A DEDICATED SINGLE BRANCH CIRCUIT. TO AVOID
CIRCUIT OVERLOAD AND POSSIBLE LOSS OF CRITICAL CARE EQUIPMENT, MAKE SURE
YOU DO NOT HAVE ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OPERATING ON THE SAME CIRCUIT.
It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the LOGIQ E9 be readily accessible.
2-2-3-5 Site power outlets

A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the LOGIQ E9 without extension cords. Other
outlets adequate for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this
LOGIQ E9 must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the LOGIQ E9. Electrical installation must meet
all current local, state, and national electrical codes.
2-2-3-6 LOGIQ E9 power plug

If the LOGIQ E9 arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer
or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required.
2-2-3-7 Power stability requirements

Voltage drop-out
Max 10 ms.
Power transients (all applications)
Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including
line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2-2-4 EMI limitations

Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The
LOGIQ E9 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Possible EMI sources should be identified before the LOGIQ E9 is installed.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These
sources include:
medical lasers,
scanners,
cauterizing guns,
computers,
monitors,
fans,
gel warmers,
microwave ovens,
light dimmers,
portable phones.
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.
See: Table 2-5 for EMI Prevention tips.
Table 2-5 EMI prevention/abatement
EMI RULE DETAILS
Keep the LOGIQ E9 at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special
Be aware of RF sources shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high
frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals.
Ground the LOGIQ E9 Poor grounding is the most likely reason a LOGIQ E9 will have noisy images. Check
grounding of the power cord and power outlet.
After you finish repairing or updating the LOGIQ E9, replace all covers and tighten all
Replace all screws, RF screws. Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end.
gaskets, covers, cores Install the Card Rack cover over the Card Rack. Loose or missing covers or RF
gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals.
Replace broken RF If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the
gaskets gasket. Do not turn on the LOGIQ E9 until any loose metallic part is removed.
Do not place labels Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the LOGIQ E9. Otherwise, the gap
where RF gaskets touch created will permit RF leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move
metal the label.
Use GE specified The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding.
harnesses and Also, cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is
peripherals specified.
Take care with cellular
Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
phones
Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the Card Rack or hang out of the peripheral
Properly dress
bays. Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach
peripheral cables
the LCD cables to the frame.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2-2-5 Probes environmental requirements
Table 2-6 Environmental Requirements - Probes

Standard Probes 4D Probes
Operation: 10o to 40o C (50 to 104 F) 18o to 40o C (64.4 to 104 F)

-10 to 60 C (14 to 140 F)
Storage:
-10 to 60 C (14 to 140 F) -10o to 50 o C (14 to 122 F)
Temperatures in degrees Celsius (oC) conversion to degrees F: (oF) = (oC * 9/5) + 32
NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF
-10 TO +50 degrees C. or +60 degrees C, DEPENDING ON THE TYPE OF PROBE. WHEN
EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN
ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE.
Refer to the Table in section 2-2-2-1 on page 2-2 to determine the needed settlement time.
2-2-6 Time and manpower requirements

Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible, if possible, six weeks
before delivery, to allow enough time to make any changes.
CAUTION HAVE TWO PEOPLE AVAILABLE TO DELIVER AND UNPACK THE LOGIQ E9.
ATTEMPTS TO MOVE THE LOGIQ E9 CONSIDERABLE DISTANCES OR ON AN INCLINE BY ONE
PERSON COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE OR BOTH.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 2-3
Facility needs
2-3-2 Purchaser responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-3-3 Required facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-3-4 Desirable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-3-5 Minimal floor plan suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-3-6 Networking setup requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-3-2 Purchaser responsibilities

The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay,
confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery.
Purchaser responsibility includes:
Procuring the materials required.

Completing the preparations before delivery of the LOGIQ E9.
Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
NOTE: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site
prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other
connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be
performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical
installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All
electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical
codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.
The desire to use a nonlisted or customer provided product or to place an approved product further
from the LOGIQ E9 than the interface kit allows, presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid
delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing
the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).
The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended
because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference)
should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact LOGIQ E9
reliability.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2-3-3 Required facility needs

NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound
equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.
The LOGIQ E9 will function on Voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using 220 volt
power, then a center tapped power source is required.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage (see: Table 2-3 "Electrical
specifications for the LOGIQ E9" on page 2-3) meeting all local and national codes which is located
less than 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the LOGIQ E9s proposed location
Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide.
Proposed location for LOGIQ E9 is at least 0.46 m (18 inches) from the wall or objects for cooling.
Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft.) of each other with
peripheral within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the LOGIQ E9 to connect cables.
Power outlets for other medical equipment and gel warmer.
Power outlets for test equipment within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of LOGIQ E9.
Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack).
Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal).
2-8 Section 2-3 - Facility needs

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2-3-4 Desirable features

In addition to the Floor Plan Suggestions shown in Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2, a nearby waiting room and a
Receptacle for Biohazardous Waste, like used probe sheaths is suggested. Grid represents 305 x 305 mm (1 x 1
foot).
2-3-5 Minimal floor plan suggestions

Figure 2-1 Floor Plan Suggestion 4.27 x 5.18 m (14 x 17 foot)
10 11 15
12
9 1
PW
X Z
CW
M CF
Elasto
Body Pattern Zoom

Ellipse
B
3D/4D
Comment
Auto
L R
Clear
16
2 3 4 5 13 14
7
1
17
18
Floor Plan Suggestion 4.27 x 5.18 m (14 x 17 foot) Key
Item Description Item Description

1. Secretaries or Doctors Desk 2. File Cabinet
3. Film Viewer 4. Counter Top
Overhead Lights Dimmer - Dual Level Lighting (bright

5. Counter Top and Sink with hot and cold water 6.
and dim)
7. Emergency Oxygen 8. Suction Line
9. 10. Dedicated Power Outlet - Circuit Breaker protected and

LOGIQ E9
easily accessible
457 mm (18 inches) distance of LOGIQ E9 from wall or

11. Network Interface 12.
objects
13. Stool 14. Footswitch
15. Storage for Linens and Equipment 16. Examination Table 1930 x 610 mm (76 x 24 inches)
17. Lavatory and Dressing Room 18. Door at least 762 mm (30 inches)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2-3-5 Minimal floor plan suggestions (contd)

Figure 2-2 Floor Plan Suggestion 2.44 x 3.05 m (8 x 10 foot)
4 5
2 3
11
10
9
Elasto
12
1
2
Comment
Clear
M
CW
X
Body Pattern
Ellipse
PW
Y
e
13
Zoom
3D/4D
CF
Z
L
7
B
R
Auto
6 14
1
Floor Plan Suggestion 2.44 x 3.05 m (8 x 10 foot) Key
Item Description Item Description
1. Door at least 762 mm (30 inches) 2. Film Viewer
Counter Top, Sink with hot and cold water and Supplies
3. 4. Linen Supply
Storage
5. Probes/Supplies 6. Examination Table 1930 x 610 mm (76 x 24 inches)
7. Footswitch 8. Stool
9. LOGIQ E9 10. External Peripherals
Dedicated Power Outlet - Circuit Breaker protected and

11. 12. Network Interface
easily accessible
13. 457 mm (18 inches) distance of LOGIQ E9 from wall or 14. GE Cabinet for Software and Manuals
objects
2 - 10 Section 2-3 - Facility needs

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2-3-6 Networking setup requirements
2-3-6-1 Stand alone scanner (without network connection)

None.
2-3-6-2 Scanner connected to hospitals network

Supported networks:
10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet network connection

Up to 300 Mbps WLAN (option)
2-3-6-3 InSite Requirements

Need internet access available to be able to connect to Insite ExC.
2-3-6-4 Purpose of the DICOM network function

DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient
information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to
workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring
images in this manner frees up the on-board LCD and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while
scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at
a lower cost.
2-3-6-5 DICOM option setup requirements

To configure the LOGIQ E9 to work with other network connections, the sites network administrator
must provide information to complete the form in Figure 2-3 "Worksheet for DICOM Network
Information" on page 2-12. Ensure that there are no spaces in any field of the form.
Entries must include:
A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the LOGIQ E9.
The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING
INFORMATION.
The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the
LOGIQ E9 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and the
revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for troubleshooting.
For connectivity setup information, refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual.
See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per LOGIQ E9 console" on page 1-22.
Chapter 2 Site preparations 2 - 11

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2-3-6-5 DICOM option setup requirements (contd)
Figure 2-3 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information
LOGIQ E9
Host Name IP Address . . . Local Port
AE Title Net Mask . . .

Network
Speed Default Gateway . . .
DHCP
DICOM APPLICATION
OTHER
NAME MAKE/ AE TITLE IP PORT
CONFIGURATION
Store 1 __Raw Data

. . . __Allow Multiframe
__Structured
Reporting
Compression_______
Store 2
__Raw Data
__Structured
Reporting
Compression_______
Store 3
__Raw Data
__Structured
Reporting
Compression_______
DICOM
Print Vendor: ___________
. . . Print Size: _________
Medium: ___________
Copies: ___________
Orientation: ________
Color ______________
Worklist . . .
Storage Associated
. . .
Commit Storage AE
_____________
DICOM . . .
MPPS
2 - 12 Section 2-3 - Facility needs

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Chapter 3
LOGIQ E9 Setup
Section 3-1
Overview
This chapter contains information needed to set up the LOGIQ E9. Included is a procedure that
describes how to receive and unpack the equipment and how to file a damage or loss claim.
How to prepare the facility and unit of the actual setup, and how to check and test the unit, probes, and
external peripherals for electrical safety are included in this procedure.

3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 Setup reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-3 Receiving and unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-4 Packing materials - recycling information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-5 Preparing for setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-6 Completing the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-7 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3-8 Connectivity overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3-9 Connectivity Setup and Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3-10 Setup paperwork. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
3-11 Configuring Insite ExC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3-1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 3-2
Setup reminders
3-2-1 Average setup time
Table 3-1 Average setup time
AVERAGE SETUP
DESCRIPTION COMMENTS
TIME
UNPACKING THE LOGIQ E9 0.5 HOUR
SET UP LOGIQ E9 WO/OPTIONS 4 HOURS DEPENDENT ON THE CONFIGURATION
DICOM NETWORK CONFIGURATION 2 HOURS OR MORE DEPENDENT ON THE CONFIGURATION
INSTALL INSITE / ILINK 0.5 HOUR
3-2-2 Setup warnings

DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE
AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METERS GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DONT TOUCH
THE UNIT!
CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK, CONNECT THE UNIT TO A PROPERLY GROUNDED

POWER OUTLET. DO NOT USE A THREE TO TWO PRONG ADAPTER. THIS DEFEATS SAFETY
GROUNDING.
CAUTION DO NOT WEAR THE ESD WRIST STRAP WHEN YOU WORK ON LIVE CIRCUITS AND MORE
THAN 30 V PEAK IS PRESENT.
CAUTION DO NOT OPERATE THIS UNIT UNLESS ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. LOGIQ E9 PERFORMANCE AND COOLING REQUIRE THIS.
NOTICE NEVER REVERSE POLARITY ON ANY METER THAT INTERCEPTS THE POWER CORD WITH
POWER CONNECTED TO THE SYSTEM.
EVEN IN THE OFF STATE, REVERSING POLARITY ON THE POWER CAN SERIOUSLY DAMAGE
THE POWER SUPPLY.
If the unit is very cold or hot, allow the temperature of the device to stabilize before powering up. The
following table describes guidelines for reaching operational temperatures from storage or transport
temperatures. See: 2-2-2 "Console environmental requirements" on page 2-2.
3-2 Section 3-2 - Setup reminders

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-2-2 Setup warnings (contd)
CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S)

THE USER MANUAL(S) SHOULD BE FULLY READ AND UNDERSTOOD BEFORE OPERATING
THE LOGIQ E9 AND KEPT NEAR THE UNIT FOR QUICK REFERENCE.
CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD

ALTHOUGH THE ULTRASOUND ENERGY TRANSMITTED FROM THE LOGIQ E9 PROBE IS
WITHIN AIUM/NEMA STANDARDS, AVOID UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE. ULTRASOUND
ENERGY CAN PRODUCE HEAT AND MECHANICAL DAMAGE.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 3-3
Receiving and unpacking the equipment
3-3-1 Purpose of this section
This section describes how to receive and unpack LOGIQ E9.

3-3-1 Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3-3 Receiving and unpacking warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3-4 Receiving the LOGIQ E9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-3-5 The Tilt and Shock indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-3-6 Unpacking the LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-3-3 Receiving and unpacking warnings
CAUTION TWO PEOPLE ARE NEEDED TO UNPACK THE UNIT BECAUSE OF ITS WEIGHT.
ATTEMPTS TO MOVE THE UNIT CONSIDERABLE DISTANCES OR ON AN INCLINE BY
ONE PERSON COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE OR BOTH.
TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED WHENEVER A PART WEIGHING 16 KG (35 LBS) OR
MORE MUST BE LIFTED.
CAUTION REMEMBER TO USE RELEVANT PERSONAL PROTECTING EQUIPMENT (PPE) DURING

PACKING/UNPACKING. CHECK WITH YOUR LOCAL EHS REPRESENTATIVE.
3-4 Section 3-3 - Receiving and unpacking the equipment

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-3-4 Receiving the LOGIQ E9
3-3-4-1 Overview
Improper handling during transportation may harm the equipment inside the package even if the
package itself is undamaged.
3-3-4-2 Examine package
Examine package closely at time of delivery.
3-3-4-3 Damage in transportation

Follow this procedure if damage is apparent:
Table 3-2 Damage in transportation

STEP TASK
1. Write Damage In Shipment on ALL copies ofthe freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or signed
for by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent.
2. Report the damage to the carrier.

Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in
any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier.
A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14
day period.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-3-5 The Tilt and Shock indicators
3-3-5-1 Overview
Improper handling during transportation may harm the equipment inside the package even if the
package itself is undamaged.
To make it easier to detect if the handling during transportation has been improper, a Tilt or TIPNTELL
indicator and a Shock indicator have been attached to the transportation box.
3-3-5-2 Position of the Tilt or TipNTell and Shock indicators

The Tilt and Shock indicators have been attached to the side of the transportation box.
Figure 3-1 Tilt and Shock indicators
Figure 3-2 TIPNTELL indicator and Label
NOTE: Before cutting the straps, check the Tilt or TIPNTELL and Shock indicators to make sure they
have not been triggered. If triggered, report it to the carrier. If not, then cut the straps around
the crate.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-3-5-3 LOGIQ E9 Transportation Box Label
The LOGIQ E9 Transportation Box Label is located on the transportation box.
Figure 3-3 LOGIQ E9 Transportation Box Labeling
SYMBOL DEFINITION/COMMENTS SYMBOL DEFINITION/COMMENTS
RECYCLING
Recyclable Wood KEEP DRY
(protect from moisture)
or
RECYCLING FRAGILE, Handle with Care

China Specific
TOP,. UPRIGHT - Transportation

DO NOT STACK
and Storage

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-3-6 Unpacking the LOGIQ E9

The instruction manual describes the best method for unpacking the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound scanning
unit. Images are ONLY for reference; wear proper PPE when handling packaging (gloves, safety shoes,
etc...).
Table 3-3 Uncrating Instructions
Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Before cutting the straps, check Shock and
Tilt Tags to make sure they have not been
triggered. If damaged, report it to the
carrier. If not, then cut the straps around the
crate.
2. Remove the top cover. 2

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 3-3 Uncrating Instructions (Continued)

3. Remove the outside shipping box. 3
Note: Two people are recommended for

performing this step.
4. Remove the LCD foam.

4

PROPRIETARY TO GE

5. Remove the a) Probes and b) accessory
boxes.
6. Remove the L-shaped Cardboard divider.
Note: Use special care when removing the 6

divider.
7. Remove the OP panel foam placed

between the monitor and probe holders.
7
3 - 10 Section 3-3 - Receiving and unpacking the equipment

PROPRIETARY TO GE

8. Remove the lower OP panel brace placed
between the lower OP panel and the
wooden ramp, by moving upward and back.
Remove the wooden ramp.
9. Attach the wooden ramp to the Pallet Base

with Velcro on the rear side of the
LOGIQ E9.
10. Loosen the tie-down strap at the front of the

LOGIQ E9. Push the brass piece to pull
back handle, then push brass piece to
loosen strap.
11. Disconnect the tie-down strap at the rear of

the LOGIQ E9.
Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 - 11

PROPRIETARY TO GE

12. Pull the LOGIQ E9 down the Pallet Base
ramp.
Note: Remember to pull in the LOGIQ E9

from the back for safer transportation.
13. Remove the clear plastic (wrapped around

the LOGIQ E9) from the unit.
14. Place all of the filling inside the

Transportation Box. Close the box, and
store the filling for possible future use.
Section 3-4
Packing materials - recycling information
The packing materials for LOGIQ E9 are recyclable:
The Transportation Box is made of cardboard.

Lever lockings (hinges) are made of zinc plated steel.
The inner reinforcements are made of Ethafoam (Polyethylene foam).
The plastic foil is made of LDPE (Low Density Polyethylene).
Section 3-5
Preparing for setup
3-5-1 Verify Customer Order
Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items
that are missing, back ordered, or damaged.
3 - 12 Section 3-4 - Packing materials - recycling information

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-5-2 Physical inspection

Verify that the LOGIQ E9 arrived intact (visual inspection).
If the LOGIQ E9 has been damaged, please refer to Damage in Transportation on page 3-3-4-3
"Damage in transportation" on page 3-5 in the beginning of this manual.
3-5-2-1 LOGIQ E9 voltage settings

See: 3-6-4-1 "Verification of the LOGIQ E9s voltage setting" on page 3-19.
3-5-3 Volume Navigation Stand

To assemble the Volume Navigation Stand, See: 8-15-2 "Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand" on
page 8-635 or 8-15-4 "On-Board V Nav Stand Option Contents, location and placement of parts" on
page 8-643.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-5-3-1 Back Cover Label and ETL testing laboratories safety rating label (ETL may not be present)
For location of Rating Plate Label, see: Figure 3-12 "Rating Plate(s) Location - How to Identify Console
Model Number" on page 3-16.
Figure 3-4 Back Cover Label with ETL Label
Figure 3-5 Rating Plate Label - R3.x and earlier 100-120V shown
3 - 14 Section 3-5 - Preparing for setup

PROPRIETARY TO GE
(contd)
Figure 3-6 Rating Plate Label - R4.x.x
5205000-8
XXXXXXXXX
Month, YYYY
LOGIQ E9
(01)01122222333334(11)YYMMDD(21)XXXXXXUS6
UDI
~100-120V 10 Amps
~220-240V 8 Amps 50/60 Hz
REF 5205000-9 GE Medical Systems Ultrasound

S/N XXXXXXUS6 and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC
9900 Innovation Drive
YYYY-MM-DD Wauwatosa, WI USA 53226

PROPRIETARY TO GE
(contd)
Figure 3-9 Rating Plate Label - R3 upgraded to XDclear 2.0
LOGIQ E9 R3 to XDclear 2.0 UPG

REF 5589819 UDI
(01)01122222333334(21)XXXXXXUS6

REF 5589818 UDI
(01)01122222333334(21)XXXXXXUS6

REF 5589817 UDI
(01)01122222333334(21)XXXXXXUS6
Figure 3-12 Rating Plate(s) Location - How to Identify Console Model Number
3 - 16 Section 3-5 - Preparing for setup

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-5-4 EMI protection

This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the
covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the LOGIQ E9 from image artifacts caused
by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and
secured before the unit is put into operation.
See: 2-2-4 "EMI limitations" on page 2-5 for more information about EMI protection.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 3-6
Completing the setup
This section describes how to complete the set up of LOGIQ E9.

3-6-3 LOGIQ E9 specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-6-4 Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-6-5 Connections on the I/O Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-6-6 Connections on the Patient I/O panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-6-7 Connecting Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-6-8 Power On/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-6-9 Power shut down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-6-10 Complete power down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3-6-3 LOGIQ E9 specifications
3-6-3-1 LOGIQ E9 requirements verification

Verify that the site meets the requirements listed in (see: Section 2-3 "Facility needs" on page 2-7).
Verify that the specifications below dont conflict with any on-site conditions.
3-6-3-2 Physical dimensions

The physical dimensions of the LOGIQ E9 unit are summarized in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4 Physical dimensions of LOGIQ E9 with monitor and peripherals
PART NUMBER HEIGHT* WIDTH DEPTH UNIT
5205000, 1130 585 830 mm

-2, -3, -4, -5, -6 44.5 23.03 32.67 Inches
1300 585 830 mm
5205000-7, -8, -9
51.2 21.9 32.7 Inches
* Dimensions given with floating keyboard stowed for transport and the LCD Monitor down.
3-6-3-3 Weight with monitor and peripherals
Table 3-5 Weight of LOGIQ E9 with monitor and peripherals
PART NUMBER WEIGHT [KG] WEIGHT [LBS]

5205000-x 135 298
3-6-3-4 Acoustic noise output

Less than 48 dB(A) at 20 degrees Celsius, measured in the operators head position, 20 cm in front of
the keyboards right corner, at 1.30 m above the floor, and in a distance of 1 meter at all four sides, 1
meter above the floor.
3 - 18 Section 3-6 - Completing the setup

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-4 Electrical specifications
WARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ E9 UNIT TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST
LIKELY DESTROY THE UNIT.
3-6-4-1 Verification of the LOGIQ E9s voltage setting

Verify that the mains voltage specified for the unit is available on-site.
The voltage setting for the unit is found on a label on the back of the LOGIQ E9 on lower rear frame of
the LOGIQ E9.
3-6-4-2 Electrical specifications for LOGIQ E9

See: Table 2-3 "Electrical specifications for the LOGIQ E9" on page 2-3 for the electrical specifications
for LOGIQ E9 include LCD and on board peripherals.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-5 Connections on the I/O Rear Panel

NOTE: Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified according
to the respective IEC standards (e.g. IEC60950 for data processing equipment and IEC60601-
1 for medical equipment). Furthermore, all complete configurations shall comply with the valid
version of the system standard IEC60601-1-1. Everybody who connects additional equipment
to the signal input part or signal output part of LOGIQ E9, configures a medical system, and is
therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of the valid version of
IEC60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult the technical service department or your local representative
for GE.
3-6-5-1 Connect Ethernet

Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector (3) on the External I/O (rear side of LOGIQ E9).
Figure 3-13 Ethernet, Audio (1) and DVI-I (2) connection for External Monitor on
rear side of LOGIQ E9 - R3.x and earlier
L R
5180173 revx
1 2 3

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-5-1 Connect Ethernet (contd)
Figure 3-14 Audio (1), Ethernet (2), DVI-I (3) and SVHS (4) connection for External Monitor on
rear side of LOGIQ E9 - R4.x and Later
L R
4 3
2 1
1 4 3
CAUTION To avoid breaking the back cover while opening it in order to connect up the network cable, use
a flat blade screw driver or plastic card and pull hard to open up the back cover door.
SVHS Specifications for BEP6
DVI-I delivering both analog RGB and digital DVI out the rear customer accessible DVI-I port.
The DVI-I output support a fixed 1280x1024 resolution @60Hz 24 bit color depth.
- NOTE: Any display connected to the DVI-I output is intended to serve as a clone of the image
on the main display. In the event that a display connected to DVI-I video output is not capable
of displaying the resolution being used by the main display, then the auxiliary display will be
blank or show a "no-signal" message.
The DVI-D Video output deliver a minimum of 1280x1024 @60Hz 24-bit color depth.
3-6-5-2 Connect USB Flash Drive

Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 3, Section 7.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-6 Connections on the Patient I/O panel
3-6-6-1 Connect ECG

Refer to Chapter 10 in the Basic User Manual for more information.
3-6-7 Connecting Probes
3-6-7-1 Introduction to Connecting Probes

Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is on or off.
R3.x and earlier LOGIQ E9s have two types of probe ports: one non-DLP probe port and three DLP
probe ports (Figure 3-16). R4.x and later LOGIQ E9s have one type of probe ports: four DLP probe ports
(Figure 3-15).
The non-DLP probe port is compatible with the S1-5, S4-10, 6Tc (TEE probe), and 3CRF probe
connectors.
The three DLP probe ports are specific to the LOGIQ E9 probe connectors.
Figure 3-15 Probe connectors - (1) Non-DLP and (2) DLP Probe Port - R3.x and earlier
1 2
R4.x and later LOGIQ E9s have one type of probe ports: four DLP probe ports (Figure 3-16).
Figure 3-16 Probe connectors, four DLP Probe Ports - R4.x and Later

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-7-2 Connect a probe
NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a probe. However, it is a good
idea select a different probe or to freeze the image when removing a probe to avoid
disconnecting a live probe.
CAUTION DO NOT ALLOW THE PROBE HEAD TO HANG FREELY. EXCESSIVE IMPACT TO THE PROBE
WILL RESULT IN IRREPARABLE DAMAGE.
CAUTION TO PREVENT PROBE CONNECTOR PINS DAMAGE, OR PCB BOARD DAMAGE, DO NOT USE
EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN CONNECTING THE PROBES.
1.) Before connecting the probe:

a.) Perform a visual check of the probe pins and LOGIQ E9 sockets.
b.) Remove any dust or foam rests from the probe pins.
c.) Verify the probe and the probe cable for any visual damage.
2.) Hold the probe connector vertically with the cable pointing upward.
3.) Turn the connector locking handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position.
4.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
5.) Turn the locking handle clockwise to the full vertical position to lock in place.
6.) Position the probe cable so that it is not resting on the floor.
CAUTION KEEP THE PROBE CABLES AWAY FROM THE WHEELS.

DO NOT BEND THE PROBE CABLES.
DO NOT CROSS CABLES BETWEEN PROBES.
3-6-7-3 Disconnect a probe

1.) Select a different probe or Freeze the image before removing a probe in order to avoid
disconnecting a live probe.
2.) Rotate the lock handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position to unlock the connector.
3.) Remove the connector from the port.
4.) Ensure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage case, see: 10-5-9
"Cleaning" on page 10-12 for cleaning instructions.
CAUTION REFER TO THE TEE PROBE MANUAL FOR FURTHER INSTRUCTIONS (DIRECTION KZ192871).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-8 Power On/Boot Up
3-6-8-1 Warnings
DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE
PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.
DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THE
SAFETY GROUND.
DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE
POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).
CAUTION LOGIQ E9 REQUIRES ALL COVERS
OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD LOGIQ E9
PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.
NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE.
NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five seconds. When turning OFF the
Circuit Breaker, WAIT until the ON/OFF button is no longer lit. The LOGIQ E9 should de-
energize completely before turning the circuit breaker ON.
3-6-8-2 Detailed Procedure

For a detailed procedure, see: 4-2-3 "Power ON/Boot Up" on page 4-3.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-8-3 Connect AC (mains) Power to the LOGIQ E9
Connecting AC Power to the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound unit involves preliminary checks of the power cord,
voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.
NOTE: The LOGIQ E9 will function on Voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using
220 volt power, then a center tapped power source is required (North America Only).
1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the Circuit Breaker is turned off.
2.) Uncoil the power cable, allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly.
3.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage.
4.) Verify that the on-site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit
Breaker on the rear of the unit.
5.) Connect the Power Cables female plug to the Power Inlet at the rear of the unit.
6.) Lock the plug in position with the Retaining Clamp (ACC Clamp).
7.) Verify that the Mains Power Circuit Breaker is in OFF position, if not, switch it OFF.
Figure 3-17 The Circuit Breaker and ON/OFF button
8.) Connect the Power Cables other end (male plug) to a hospital grade mains power outlet with the
proper rated voltage, and the unit is ready for Power ON/Boot Up.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-8-4 Switch ON the AC Power to LOGIQ E9
1.) Switch ON the Mains Power Circuit Breaker at the rear of the unit. The ON/OFF button will become
amber.
Figure 3-18 The Circuit breaker and ON/OFF button
You should hear a click from the relays in the AC Power and the unit is ready to boot. The ON/OFF
button will turn amber. This indicates that there is power to the PS, but the system is OFF.
2.) Press once on the ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel to boot the unit. The ON/OFF button will
turn green when it is pressed.
During a normal boot, you may observe that:
a.) The units ventilation fan starts on full speed, but slows down after a few seconds (listen to the
fan sound).
b.) Power is distributed to the peripherals, Operator Panel (Console), Monitor, Front End
Processor and Back End Processor.
c.) Back End Processor and rest of the LOGIQ E9 starts with the sequence listed in the next steps:
d.) Back End Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software.
e.) The Start Screen is displayed on the monitor.
f.) A start-up bar indicating the time used for software loading, is displayed on the monitor.
g.) The software initiates and sets up the Front End electronics and the rest of the instrument.
h.) The backlight in the keyboard is lit.
i.) As soon as the software has been loaded, either a 2D screen is displayed on the screen,
indicating that a probe has been connected, or a No Mode screen is displayed, indicating that
no probe has been connected.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-8-4 Switch ON the AC Power to LOGIQ E9 (contd)
Figure 3-19 2D Screen on the display
NOTE: Total time used for start-up is typically less than 170 seconds. When using the sleep mode
(R2.x.x or R3.x.x), start-up time is less then 120 seconds. If starting after a power loss or a lock-
up, the start-up time may be up to four minutes.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-9 Power shut down

When you switch off the unit, the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence.
Figure 3-20 System - Exit menu - R1.x.x
The SYSTEM - EXIT menu, used when switching off the unit, gives you these choices:
Logoff
Use this button to log off the current user.
The system remains ON and ready for a new user to log on.
If the Logoff button is dimmed, it indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment.
Shutdown
Use this button to shut down the system. The entire system will shut down. It is recommended to
perform a full shutdown at least once a week.
If the Shutdown button is dimmed, press the ON/OFF button or Alt F10 to shut down the unit.
Cancel
Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.
Exit (Only available when logged in as GE Service with Service Dongle)

Select this button when you want to exit to the Windows Desktop.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-9 Power shut down (contd)

Sleep mode (only available in LOGIQ E9 running R2.x.x and R3.x.x software).
Figure 3-21 System - Exit menu
Logoff
Shutdown
If the Shutdown button is dimmed, press the ON/OFF button or Alt F10 to shut down the unit.
Cancel


PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-10 Complete power down

1.) Press once on the ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel to display the System - Exit menu.
Figure 3-22 Press once on the ON/OFF button

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-10 Complete power down (contd)
Figure 3-23 System - Exit menu (R1.x.x)
Figure 3-24 System - Exit menu (R2.x.x and R3.x.x)

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Figure 3-25 System - Exit / Download menu (R5 and later)
2.) Select Shutdown to do a complete power down of the unit.

The Back End Processor will first turn off the LOGIQ E9 activity and print the message Please wait
- Shutdown in progress in the LCD display on the Operator Panel.
Next, it starts to shut down itself. The time to turn down the unit, including the Back End Processor,
may vary from 10 seconds up to approximately 1 minute.
The last thing that shuts down, is the light on the Operator Panel, indicating that you can continue
with the next step.
NOTICE Be sure to wait with the next step until the system has finished its shut-down. Failing to do so, may
destroy data on the Hard Disk Drive, making the system fail later.
3.) Switch off the Mains Power Circuit Breaker, located on the rear of the unit. This will cut power
distribution within the unit.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-6-10-1 Sleep Mode

Only available in LOGIQ E9 running R2.x.x and R3.x.x software.
Use Sleep Mode when you do a portable exam in order to reduce the time to start up the system. When
you use Sleep Mode, it only takes 90 seconds to start up the system versus 2-3 minutes. To activate
Sleep Mode, press the ON/OFF button and select Sleep.
NOTICE For optimum system operation, it is recommended that a full shutdown of the system is performed at
least once every 24-hour period. If you shut down the system at the end of the day, no other action is
needed.
Before returning a system to the customer, perform the functional checks. See: Section 4-3 "Functional
checks" on page 4-34.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 3-7
Configuration
This section describes how to configure the LOGIQ E9.

3-7-3 LOGIQ E9 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3-7-4 Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-7-5 Available Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-7-6 Software Options Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
After completing configuration, as described in this section, next step is to control/adjust connectivity
settings, starting with Section 3-8 "Connectivity overview" on page 3-39.
3-7-3 LOGIQ E9 configuration

For complete instructions, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter
16, or the appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes
per LOGIQ E9 console" on page 1-22.
Information includes Entering Location, Adjusting Date and Time, Selecting User Interface Language,
Selecting Online Manual Language, Selecting Units of Measure
3-7-3-1 System Configuration

- Set Device Destinations (see:4-2-15-8 "Connectivity Recording Miscellaneous settings" on
page 4-27).
- Set Dataflow (see: 4-2-15-6 "Connectivity Recording Dataflow settings" on page 4-25).
- Set Buttons (see: 4-2-15-7 "Connectivity Recording the Print Key Assignments" on page 4-
26).
- Set up System Admin (see: 4-2-15-9 "Admin Recording the Software Option Keys" on page
4-29).
- Set up Users (see: 4-2-15-10 "Admin Users" on page 4-30).
- Set up Backup management (see: 4-2-15-11 "System Data Store Management" on page
4-31).
- Set up Peripherals (see: 4-2-15-12 "System Recording Peripheral settings" on page 4-32).
- Set up Keyboard: language and regional settings. (For complete instructions, refer to the
appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, or the appropriate
LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per LOGIQ
E9 console" on page 1-22).
3 - 34 Section 3-7 - Configuration

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-7-4 Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection
3-7-4-1 Contents in this sub-section

3-7-4-1 Contents in this sub-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-7-4-2 Approved Internal Peripherals (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-7-4-3 Approved External Peripherals (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-7-4-4 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-7-4-5 Printer/DVR Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-7-4-6 Test the DVR Microphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-7-4-7 Turn OFF Power to LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-7-4-2 Approved Internal Peripherals (Optional)

This list covers the internal peripherals available for LOGIQ E9:
Printer, Monochrome (Black and White), Digital, SONY.

Digital Video Recorder (DVR). Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 DVR Option Manual,
Direction 5180205-100.
USB Flash Drive. Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 User Manual.
4D Motor Controller. Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Options Manual, Direction
5180288-100.
Volume Navigation. Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Options Manual, Direction
5180409-100.
WLAN (Wireless LAN R2.x.x and R3). Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Options
Manual, Direction 5335640-100.
WLAN (Wireless LAN R4.x.x and later). Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Options
WLAN V3 (Wireless LAN R6.x.x and later). Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Options
Patient I/O (ECG Option R2.x.x or later). Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Options
Manual, Direction 5335639-100
3-7-4-3 Approved External Peripherals (Optional)

The external printers are connected via Ethernet (TCP/IP Network) as DICOM devices.
DICOM Printers. Connected via Ethernet (TCP/IP Network or WLAN) as DICOM devices.
USB Printers, see: 9-15-1 "Printers" on page 9-84.
USB Footswitch
3-7-4-4 Additional Information

See: Section 9-15 "Peripherals" on page 9-83 for replacement units.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-7-4-5 Printer/DVR Checks

Check that Printer/DVR work as described below:
Table 3-6 Peripheral Checks
Step Task to do Notes

1. Press Freeze. Stops image acquisition.
Press (Print 1), (Print 2), (Print 3) or (Print 4) on Prints image displayed on the screen on Black and White or Color
2.
the Control Panel printer, depending on the key assignment configuration.
3. Press [VIDEO] icon on the Control Panel. Brings up the DVR Touch Panel (if the customer has the DVR option).
4. Press [VIDEO] icon on the Control Panel Returns to the scanning mode
5. Press [RECORD] icon on the Control panel. Starts Recording.
6. Press [PLAY] icon on the Control panel. Plays back an examination.
7. Press [STOP] icon on the Control panel. Stops recording.
3-7-4-6 Test the DVR Microphone

If a DVR is installed, record and/or play back a recording to test the microphone.
a.) In scanning mode, press the record button on the console.

b.) Press the microphone icon button on the touch panel.
c.) Note the counter number setting, speak a few words, rewind to original counter number, and
play back.
3-7-4-7 Turn OFF Power to LOGIQ E9

See: 3-6-9 "Power shut down" on page 3-28.
3-7-5 Available Probes

See: Section 9-18 "Probes" on page 9-112.
3-7-6 Software Options Configuration
3-7-6-1 Software Option Installation

A password (Software Option String) enables a software option or a combination of software options.
This password is specific for each LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-7-6-2 Installing a Software Option

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Admin -> System Admin.
2.) Enter the new option key code in the SW Option Key section.
Figure 3-26 System Admin screen, R1.x.x - Add button
Figure 3-27 System Admin screen, R2.x.x or later - Add button
3.) Select the Add button.
CAUTION INCORRECT PASSWORD ENTRY WILL RESULT IN LOSS OF SYSTEM OPTIONS.

IF PASSWORD IS INCORRECT, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL GE SERVICE
REPRESENTATIVE OR THE ONLINE CENTER.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-7-6-2 Installing a Software Option (contd)

4.) In R5 and later the Option String can be imported from the media.
Figure 3-28 Option Keys File in R5 and later - Import
Media (CD/DVD, USB)

Option keys file can be imported from
Service Folder
There is an import button on the Utilities/

System Admin Preset Menu.
5.) Press Save to save the new setting.

6.) Restart to save and activate the settings and adjustments you have done so far.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 3-8
Connectivity overview
NOTE: If you are new or unfamiliar to connectivity on the LOGIQ E9, read Chapter 16, Customizing
Your System, of the Basic User Manual before you continue with the next descriptions and
procedures.
3-8-1 Physical connection
3-8-1-1 Stand-alone LOGIQ E9

No network connection needed.
3-8-1-2 Sneaker Net environment

No network connection needed.
3-8-1-3 Wired Ethernet from LOGIQ E9 to a Workstation
3-8-1-3-1 Direct Cable Connection from the LOGIQ E9 to a Workstation via a Crossover Cable.
You will only need a Crossover Cable for network use to connect the two units this way.
1.) Connect one end of the crossed network cable to the network connector on the LOGIQ E9.
2.) Connect the other end to the network connector to the Workstation, see the Workstation Service
Manual.
3-8-1-3-2 Connection via a Peer-to-Peer Network

You will need a network switch and one network cable for each unit connected to the switch.
3-8-1-3-3 Connection via Hospital Network

You will need one network cable to connect the LOGIQ E9 to a wall outlet on the hospitals network.
3-8-1-4 Connection using Wireless Option (R2.x.x or later)

Refer to:
- R2.x.x and R3.x.x, see: 8-6-8-3 "WLAN - Set up and Check" on page 8-178.
- R4.x and later, see: 8-11-23-3 "WLAN Set-up" on page 8-548.
- Chapter 5 for theory.
- Chapter 16, Configuring Connectivity of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 3-9
Connectivity Setup and Tips
Refer to the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual and see: Section "3-9-1 Setup the LOGIQ E9 for DICOM
Communications (contd)" on page 3-41 for more information.
TOPICS covered in this Section:
Section 3-9-1 "Setup the LOGIQ E9 for DICOM Communications" on page 3-40
Section 3-9-2 "Devices, Services, Dataflows and Print Buttons" on page 3-42
Section 3-9-3 "How to Get the LOGIQ E9 to Recognize another Device on the Network" on page 3-
43
Section 3-9-4 "DICOM Image Storage Service" on page 3-43
3-9-1 Setup the LOGIQ E9 for DICOM Communications
Table 3-7 Utility -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP screen
1. Enter the LOGIQ E9 computer name. This may be the same as the station name.
2. Enter the LOGIQ E9 IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and network speed.
For automatic assignment of IP address, subnet mask and default gateway, select DHCP.
NOTE: If possible, set the LOGIQ E9 Network Speed to match that of the Network switch. If in
doubt, set it to AutoDetect. Otherwise, transfer times can be two to five times longer, during
which the LOGIQ E9 will appear to be locked up. (If the Hard Drive activity light on the front of
the console is lit steady or blinks quickly, the LOGIQ E9 is most likely not hung.)
3 - 40 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup and Tips

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-1 Setup the LOGIQ E9 for DICOM Communications (contd)
Table 3-8 Utility -> Connectivity -> Device screen
1. Select MyComputer.
2. Assign an AE Title to the LOGIQ E9. (AE stands for Application Entity. DICOM services use
this to identify the LOGIQ E9.) AE Title is case-sensitive. This title may contain the Computer
Name from the TCP/IP page, if desired. Maximum number of characters in AE Title is 16
characters.
NOTE: It is NOT recommended to use the factory default. This is not prohibited, but more than
one system with the same AE Title can cause confusion.
3. Edit the Port Number if needed. 104 is typical. Save your changes and reboot the system.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-2 Devices, Services, Dataflows and Print Buttons

Figure 3-29 Dataflows
PACS Server,
Device
Printer, etc.
Services
Storage Performed Query /

Print Service Image Storage
Commitment Worklist Service Procedure Retrieve
Service
Service Service Service
Transfer of
Images and
Data Send To: Print Button Dataflow
LOGIQ E9
Local Archive
A device is a physical unit, separate from the LOGIQ E9, where images and data can be stored and shared. A
device provides various services to the LOGIQ E9.
To represent the device on the LOGIQ E9, add it in Utility -> Connectivity -> Device.
To represent the services of the device(s) on the LOGIQ E9, add them in
Utility -> Connectivity -> Service.
Set up Dataflows and Print Buttons to direct images and data to the services.
Use Utility -> Connectivity -> Dataflow and Utility -> Connectivity -> Button.
A dataflow stores images in the clipboard to the local Hard Disk Drive. When the exam ends, the dataflow sends
the images to the services assigned to it. (A Direct Store setting on the dataflow changes this behavior.
See: 1.) "Dataflow" on page 3-50.)
A print button sends an image to the services assigned to it whenever pressed. A print button also stores the image
locally (to the clipboard) if Copy to Dataflow is assigned to it.
Send To (in the Exam View tab) sends an existing exams images and other data to one service at a time.
See: 3.) "Send To" on page 3-50.)
Worklist and Query/Retrieve services transfer data to the LOGIQ E9. See: 3-9-7 "DICOM Worklist Service" on page
3-63 and 3-9-11 "DICOM Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Service" on page 3-75.
Keep in mind that the settings of a print button that stores an image on the LOGIQ E9 determine the format of the
image file stored locally. A services settings dictate the format of the file that is sent to the service.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-3 How to Get the LOGIQ E9 to Recognize another Device on the Network
Table 3-9 Utility -> Connectivity -> Device screen
1. Press Add. The system creates a device called NewDevice.

2. Change the name to one of your choosing.
3. Enter the IP address of the device.
Ping / Smiley
4. Save your changes and then press Ping. A Smiley Face indicates
successful communication between your LOGIQ E9 and the device. A Frown
indicates failed communication. Check the following:
Is the device running?
Is it connected to the network?
Did you enter the right IP address?
3-9-4 DICOM Image Storage Service
An Image Storage Service provides a place to store patient and exam data from the LOGIQ E9 and
corresponding images. The Image Storage Service, or the device that hosts it, is often called a Patient
Archiving and Communication System (PACS).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-4-1 Initial Steps

To setup an Image Storage Service on the LOGIQ E9, follow these steps:
Table 3-10 Initial Steps - Setup an Image Storage Service

R3.x and earlier
R4.x and later
(continued on next page)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 3-10 Initial Steps - Setup an Image Storage Service
1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Service, from the Destination Device drop-down menu, select the
device on which the service resides. (This assumes you have already setup the device in the
Device tab in 3-9-1 "Setup the LOGIQ E9 for DICOM Communications" on page 3-40).
2. From the Select Service Type to Add drop-down menu, select DICOM Image Storage and
press Add.
3. Change the name of the service to one of your choosing.
4. Enter the AE Title and Port Number of the service. AE Title is case-sensitive.
5. Save your changes and press Verify. A Smiley Face indicates successful communication with
the service.
NOTE: If you get a successful Ping (Smiley Face) at the device level but not at the service
level, it is possible that the AE Title or Port Number of the service settings are incorrect. Ensure
that these are correct then re-verify. Be sure that the service type (Store, Print, etc) is correct
and supported by the device.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-4-2 Properties
Maximum Retries, Retry Interval, and Timeout are used by the Retry protocol when the LOGIQ E9
encounters communication problems with a service:
Table 3-11 Properties
Maximum Retries, Retry Interval, Timeout
How many seconds the LOGIQ E9 should attempt to establish

Timeout
communications with the service
How many times to attempt to establish communication again in the event

Maximum Retries
of failure
Retry Interval How many seconds to wait between each retry attempt
Using the values in Table 3-10 "Initial Steps - Setup an Image Storage Service" on page 3-44 (which
are the default and recommended settings), the LOGIQ E9 will attempt to establish communications
for 30 seconds, up to three times (the original attempt and two retries), with a gap between each
attempt of 10 seconds.
When a print button is set to RawDicom Single (see: 2.) "Print Button" on
page 3-62), and the user presses it while scanning live, it stores a single
DICOM frame (bitmap of the image), along with the raw-data of the image.
The raw data allows the system to treat this as a multi-frame image (cine
clip) because it can regenerate the multiple frames from the raw data
when the situation calls for it.
One such situation is Allow Multiframe. It instructs the LOGIQ E9 to

R3.x and earlier generate a multi-frame image to send to the service in the event that the
Allow Multiframe clip was stored via a print button set to RawDicom Single. When the time
comes to send the clip to the service, the LOGIQ E9 will generate a multi-
frame from the raw data before putting it on the spooler. Such multi-frames
are not permanently stored on the LOGIQ E9 local hard drive.
NOTE: Allow Multiframe is relevant only for clips stored via a print button
set to RawDicom Single. Images stored with either Dicom & Multiple or
RawDicom & Multiple print button settings are always transferred as
multi-frame images, regardless of the setting for Allow Multiframe.
R4.x and later Loops shall be transferred only if this option is checked. Default state
Allow Clips should be checked.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
This will transfer the raw data of an image, if the image was stored as
RawDICOM. Checkmark this when transferring to a service that can
interpret GE-proprietary raw image data, such as Centricity. If it is
checked when sending to a service that does not support GE raw data,
the service may accept the image but ignore the raw data, or may not
Allow Raw Data accept the image.
NOTE: The LOGIQ E9 stores raw data in a DICOM private tag in an image
file. A PACS may delete all private tags, or it may leave them intact, or it
may allow configuration in this regard. Keep this in mind if you later want
to retrieve raw data images from the service.
Compression - Compression takes time, but saves time when the image is transferred.
This compresses image files prior to sending them to the service. Also,
R3.x and earlier
storage space on the service is reduced with compression. Set the
Compression
compression type to one the service accepts.
R4.x and later Enhanced DICOM objects shall only be transferred if this option is
Allow Enhanced DICOM checked. Default state should be unchecked.
Objects This allows a capable PACS to display 3D/4D images.
R4.x and later

This compresses still image files prior to sending them to the service.
Still Image Compression
R4.x and later

This compresses loops /enhanced DICOM files prior to sending them to
Clip/Volume
the service.
Compression
Compression Formats
NOTE: Determine which compression formats the service accepts. Using an incorrect format will
cause problems that can be hard to troubleshoot.
None No compression occurs.
Run-length Encoding compression that does not lose any data that will
RLE
degrade image quality (so-called lossless compression).
Joint Photographic Experts Group compression that provides both

lossless and lossy (image quality degradation) settings. Select this and a
JPG Quality % field appears, in which you can select lossless or various
numeric settings; the higher the setting, the less image data is
compressed (bigger image file) and the less image quality is degraded.
Improved version of JPEG that, compared to JPEG, maintains the same

JPEG2000 image quality in a smaller image file, or provides better image quality in a
file of the same size.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
This controls the maximum number of frames per second that are
transferred:
25, 30 (R3.x and earlier) 60, 80 (R4.x and later) Certain high-frame-
rate applications like cardiology can generate very large datasets. Use 25
Max Framerate or 30 to decimate image frames as desired to send no more than 25 or 30
frames per second. This can affect image quality.
Full - no frame rate decimation occurs (frames are not dropped). In
radiology, frame rates are typically under 25-30 so Full should be an
acceptable setting.
This controls when color appears in images sent to the service:

Gray Regardless of color in the image area, or in annotation
(comments, measurements, arrows, body patterns, depth scale, title bar),
images sent to the service will be in shades of gray. (In DICOM terms, the
Gray setting forces images to be sent in MONOCHROME2 format.)
Color Even if there is no color in the image area itself, an image sent
to the service will still have color, even if only the title bar and depth scale
Color Support
have color. (The Color setting forces images to be sent in RGB format.)
Mixed If the image area itself has color, an image sent to the service
will have color; otherwise, the image will be in shades of gray. (The Mixed
setting sends images as is, without conversion.)
NOTE: Color is recommended unless the user wants to reduce image

storage size. Then, Mixed is suggested.
The LOGIQ E9 creates an association with the service prior to sending

images to it. Think of it as a handshake. When check-marked, Reopen
Per Image causes the LOGIQ E9 to create an association with theservice
for each image in a group of images and to release that association after
each image is transmitted. When it is unchecked, the LOGIQ E9 creates
Reopen Per Image only one association prior to sending any images, and doesnt release it
until all images have been sent. Reopen Per Image is common for CT or
MR, where associations are used to distinguish views (one association for
each view). This is not a typical use for Ultrasound. Unless you have a
specific reason to create an association for each image, leave this option
unchecked.
A Structured Report is a non-image DICOM data file that contains

Enable Structured
measurements and calculations of an exam. If you want to transmit a
Reporting
Structured Report, check Enable Structured Reporting.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Key Image Notes (KIN) provides a way in DICOM to convey certain

information and requests about images in an exam between the
LOGIQ E9 and the service. The LOGIQ E9 supports one KIN mode:
Image Rejection. Image Rejection indicates which images in a currently-
open exam should be deleted.
Key Image Notes
To use Image Rejection, assign the service to a dataflow, and check the
Direct Store dataflow setting. When the user scans with this dataflow in
an exam, deletes one or more images in the clipboard and ends the exam,
the LOGIQ E9 sends a KIN DICOM object to the service. This object lists
the images to be rejected. The service either deletes the images or tags
them with a label such as Rejected for Quality Reasons.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-4-3 Sending Images and Data to a DICOM Image Storage Service

The LOGIQ E9 provides three ways to send images and data:
1.) Dataflow
2.) Print Button
3.) Send To
1.) Dataflow
The LOGIQ E9 default setup stores images in its local Hard Disk Drive. A dataflow allows the LOGIQ
E9 to send images to other locations as well.
To setup a dataflow, follow these steps:
Table 3-12 Dataflow
Utility -> Connectivity -> Dataflow screen
1. Navigate to Utility -> Connectivity -> Dataflow; press Add. The system creates a dataflow
called NewDataflow.
2. Change the name to one of your choosing.
3. Notice the list of available services to the left of the << and >> buttons. Select each DICOM
service you want to attach to your dataflow and press >>. This makes it appear in the list on
the right, indicating that the service is now assigned to the dataflow.
NOTE: You cannot remove Local Archive Int HD from the dataflow. This guarantees that
images will be saved on the local Hard Disk Drive of the LOGIQ E9 and not just transmitted to
the service.
4. Check Direct Store if you want an image generated by a print button to immediately be sent
to the dataflows attached services rather than waiting until the exam is ended for all images.
NOTE: If you plan to generate long cine loops, Direct Store is NOT recommended (either on
the dataflow or via a Print button directly), because system response may be slow.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 3-12 Dataflow
Utility -> Connectivity -> Button
5. Navigate to Utility -> Connectivity -> Button, select a print button and add Copy to Dataflow
to its Printflow View. DO NOT add the DICOM Image Storage Service to the Printflow as you
would run the risk of sending each image to the service twice. Set the other parameters of the
print button as you choose, using Print Button Settings in section Table 3-14 "Print Button
Settings" on page 3-53 as a guide; but keepin mind that the settings ofthe service will override
the settings of the button for the images sent to the service.
Patient Page - Dataflow Drop-down Menu
6. Back on the Patient page, select your dataflow from the drop-down menu. From that point on,
pressing your configured print button sends your images to the service(s) added to your
dataflow.
NOTE: Whenever you change the settings of a dataflow, before you use it, select a different
dataflow or No Archive on the Patient screen, and then reselect the changed dataflow. This
forces the LOGIQ E9 to read the modified resource file and implement your changes. If you
change the settings of any service to which the dataflow directs traffic, you do not need to
reselect it.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-4-3 Sending Images and Data to a DICOM Image Storage Service (contd)
For R4 and later, proceed to: "2.) Print Button - R4.x and later" on page 3-55.
2.) Print Button - R3.x and earlier

The typical use for a print buttonis to copy to dataflow. However, the print button can be set up for image
transfer to a DICOM Image Storage service as a quick way to accomplish direct store to that service
without having to setup a dataflow. Each image is immediately sent to the service rather than waiting
until the exam is ended for all images to be transferred. Another use of this technique is to send existing
images directly to a PACS.
NOTE: If you plan to generate long cine loops, it is NOT recommended to use Direct Store (either on
the dataflow or via a print button directly) as the system response may be slow.
To setup a Print Button for this purpose, follow these steps:
Table 3-13 Print Button Setup - R3.x and earlier
1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Button, select one of the Physical Print Buttons.
2. Set Format, Image Frames, and Compression as desired. See: Table 3-14 "Print Button
Settings" on page 3-53.
service you want to assign to your print button and press >>.
(If you dont add Copy toDataflow to the print buttons Printflow, you will send images directly
to the DICOM service(s) without having them stored permanently on the LOGIQ E9. With a
dataflow, the images are always stored permanently in the database of the LOGIQ E9.)
From this point on, pressing your configured print button immediately places the image on the
spooler to be sent to the service(s) assigned to the button.
NOTE: If you are using a dataflow to which one of your DICOM services is assigned, DO NOT
add that same service to a print button. If you do, two copies of each image may be sent to the
service with each press of the print button.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 3-14 Print Button Settings
Format
The resulting file contains DICOM data and a bitmap of the image. Use
DICOM format to store to DICOM Print devices or to Image Storage
services that do not support raw data. Raw DICOM can still be used in
DICOM
these cases, but it is best to uncheck the Allow Raw Data box on the
service. This flexibility is why the system defaults to RawDicom (Single)
for P1.
The resulting file includes the Raw Data, the DICOM data and a bitmap of
the image. Use RawDicom format to store locally to the LOGIQ E9. This
allows for numerous post-processing, non-acquisition actions and for the
RawDicom replay of cine loops without the overhead of storing multiple DICOM
frames. (Loops are included in the rawdata.) RawDicom can also be used
to send to a PACS, such as Centricity and ViewPoint, which supports
various degrees of raw data functionality.
Use this to generate a Structured Report for the measurements and

calculations of the exam currently open.
M&A
See: 3-9-10 "Structured Reporting" on page 3-73 for additional
information.
Image Frames
Stores a single DICOM frame (bitmap of the image). Note that a raw-data
Single loop is still available if used with RawDicom. This format captures the
video area. It allows measurements without calibration.
Stores multiple DICOM frames (one bitmap for each frame). Select this to
either store multiple DICOM frames locally on the LOGIQ E9 or to export
cine loops to import elsewhere.
Multiple
This option requires more disk space and takes longer to store images
after the print button is pressed. This format captures the image area only.
It allows measurements without calibration.
Stores a screen capture of a selected area. Select this and another drop-
down menu lets you select Image Area, Video Area, or Whole Screen for
the capture area. A Secondary Capture contains no calibration data, just
Secondary Capture
pixel data. Thus it requires manual calibration for measurements, if you
recall the image on the LOGIQ E9 or review it on the PACS.
Measurements without calibration use pixels as the unit.
Independent of the Single, Multiple and Secondary Capture, dual and quad screen images are sent
as secondary captures to a PACS. Measurements on these types of images are in pixels.
Note about bitmap: Bitmap does not refer to a file in .bmp format. The terms image, frame, and
bitmap are interchangeable in a way. For multi-frame images it makes sense to say frame. On the
other hand, DICOM is all about images; the image portion of the file (as opposed to the header) is
really nothing more than a bitmap or screen capture.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 3-14 Print Button Settings
Print buttons use the same formats as Compression on the Image Storage
Service.
NOTE: Suppose compression is specified on both a print button and on

an image storage service, either assigned to the button or assigned to the
dataflow in use. Also, suppose the compression settings are different. At
the point the LOGIQ E9 is to send an image generated by the print button
to the service, the LOGIQ E9 will first un-compress the compressed
version of the print button, and then recompress it using the settings of the
Compression
service. If the compression of the print button is lossy, the un-compression
will not completely restore the original image. Then applying the
compression of the service still generates a lossy image. The process of
un-compressing and recompressing only has a negative impact on
system performance.
In general then, DO NOT use compression on a print key if images it

generates end up getting sent to a service; or, IF YOU DO, use the exact
same compression on the service.
NOTE: Print button actions can also be modified per model (abdomen, etc.) by settings in
Utility -> Application -> Print Controls. Inspect them when print button behavior differs from
expected.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2.) Print Button - R4.x and later
The typical use for a print button is to copy to dataflow. However, the print button can be set up for image
transfer to a DICOM Image Storage service as a quick way to accomplish direct store to that service
without having to setup a dataflow. Each image is immediately sent to the service rather than waiting
until the exam is ended for all images to be transferred. Another use of this technique is to send existing
images directly to a PACS.
NOTE: If you plan to generate long cine loops, it is NOT recommended to use Direct Store (either on
the dataflow or via a print button directly) as the system response may be slow.
To setup a Print Button for this purpose, follow these steps:
Table 3-15 Print Button Setup - R4.x and later
1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Button, select one of the Physical Print Buttons.
service you want to assign to your print button and press >>.
(If you dont add Copy toDataflow to the print buttons Printflow, you will send images directly
to the DICOM service(s) without having them stored permanently on the LOGIQ E9. With a
dataflow, the images are always stored permanently in the database of the LOGIQ E9.)
From this point on, pressing your configured print button immediately places the image on the
spooler to be sent to the service(s) assigned to the button.
NOTE: If you are using a dataflow to which one of your DICOM services is assigned, DO NOT
add that same service to a print button. If you do, two copies of each image may be sent to the
service with each press of the print button.
Continued on next page.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3. Attributes
NOTE: Print button actions can also be modified per model (abdomen, etc.) by settings in
Utility -> Application -> Print Controls. Inspect them when print button behavior differs from
expected.
4. M&A only (no images):
Use this to generate a Structured Report for the measurements and calculations of the exam
currently open.
See: 3-9-10 "Structured Reporting" on page 3-73 for additional information.
5. Still Images:
6. Format:
Ultrasound Image: Stores a single DICOM frame (bitmap of the image), along with the raw
data. This format captures the video area. It allows measurements without calibration.
(Print buttons always store an images raw data to the clipboard, for both clips and single-
frames with one exception for Volume File Format (see below). Whether raw data gets sent
to an Image Storage Service depends on the services settings.)
Secondary Capture Image, Video, or Screen: Stores a screen capture of a selected area:
Image Area, Video Area, or Whole Screen. A Secondary Capture contains no calibration data,
just pixel data. Thus it requires manual calibration for measurements, if you recall the image
on the LOGIQ E9 or review it on the PACS. Measurements without calibration use pixels as
the unit.
Whether the image is a Single-frame, Clip, or Secondary Capture: dual and quad screen
images are sent as secondary captures to a PACS. Measurements on these types of images
are in pixels.
Note about bitmap: Bitmap does not refer to a file in .bmp format. The terms image,
frame, and bitmap are interchangeable in a way. For multi-frame images it makes sense to
say frame. On the other hand, DICOM is all about images; the image portion of the file (as
opposed to the header) is really nothing more than a bitmap or screen capture.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

7. Compression:
Print buttons use the same formats as Compression on the Image Storage Service.
NOTE: Suppose compression is specified on a print button, and also on an image storage
service that is either assigned to the button or assigned to the dataflow in use. Also, suppose
the compression settings are different. At the point the LOGIQ E9 is to send an image
generated by the print button to the service, the LOGIQ E9 will first un-compress the
compressed version of the print button, and then recompress it using the settings of the
service. If the compression of the print button is lossy, the un-compression will not completely
restore the original image. Then applying the compression of the service still generates a lossy
image. The process of un-compressing and recompressing only has a negative impact on
system performance.
In general then, DO NOT use compression on a print key if images it generates end up getting
sent to a service; or, IF YOU DO, use the exact same compression on the service.
8. Clips / Volumes:
This section covers those settings for clips and volumes that can affect the number, contents
and properties of images sent to an Image Storage Service.
Clips: Add Multiframe Data:

Stores multiple DICOM frames (one bitmap for each frame). Select this to either store multiple
DICOM frames locally on the LOGIQ E9 or to export cine loops to import elsewhere.
This option requires more disk space and takes longer to store images after the print button is
pressed.
This format captures the image area only. It allows measurements without calibration.
Compression:
See Compression for Still Images above.
Volume File Format:
This only applies to volume images (3D, 4D).

1. Standard DICOM: Allows the user to not store raw data, for space considerations.
2. Standard DICOM with Raw Data: Stores the raw data.
3. Enhanced DICOM: DICOM provides separate tags and objects for 3D images. Many PACS
do not support them. If a customers PACS does provide support, this setting will use the
3D-specific tags instead of standard tags. It also includes raw data.
2 & 3: Include both 3D-specific tags and standard tags.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

9. Advanced:
VNav Data:
VNav displays a non-Ultrasound series (such as CT or MR slices) next to the live scan.
VNav view: Print the dual-screen image the non-Ultrasound series on one side and the live
Ultrasound scan on the other.
Ultrasound Only: Print only the Ultrasound image.
V Nav & Ultrasound (2 files): Print one each of V Nav view and Ultrasound Only.
Compare Assistant:
Compare Assistant displays an image from a previous exam next to the live scan.
Comparison View: Print the dual-screen image the previous image on one side and the live
scan on the other.
New Image: Print only the live scan.
Both Comparison & New (2 files): Print one each of Comparison View and New Image.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3.) Send To
Use Send To to send existing exams to a DICOM service. Follow these steps:
Table 3-16 Send To
1. On the Patient screen, select the desired patient. In the Exam View tab, select the exam to
transfer.
2. Press Send To.
3. A pop-up appears with a drop-down menu. Select any existing service to which images can be
sent (typically, DICOM Image Storage and Print services). Select the desired service and
press OK.
4. Press F4 to access the DICOM Job Spooler to confirm successful transmission of the exam.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-5 DICOM Print Service

A DICOM printer is different from a typical network printer. It understands and accepts image files in
DICOM format, and extracts and prints the images within.
Print Service Setup
To setup a Print Service on your LOGIQ E9, follow these steps:
Table 3-17 Print Service Setup
Device tab.)
2. From the Select Service drop-down menu, select DICOM Print and press Add.
5. From the Vendor drop-down menu, select the vendor of the service printer. The system adjusts
some of the Properties of the printer accordingly.
6. Maximum Retries, Retry Interval and Timeout have the same use as with DICOM Image
Storage Services. See: 3-9-4-2 "Properties" on page 3-46.
7. Set the Properties of the printer as desired. Refer to the operator manual of the printer for
preferred or expected settings. The graphic in this Table shows typical settings.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 3-17 Print Service Setup
8. The LOGIQ E9 allows you to annotate each image: check Enable. The Annotation section of
the screen expands to let you set parameters for this feature:
a.) Field: Combination of patient id, last name, and first name to appear in the annotation
b.) Location: one or more of these, depending on the Vendor selected:
Top: Annotation appears once, at the top of each sheet, whether one or more images are
on the sheet
Bottom: Annotation appears once, at the bottom of each sheet, whether one or more
images are on the sheet
Per Image: Annotation appears on each image
c.) Format ID and Starting Position: These are available only if the Vendor is Other. Other
settings and uses are beyond the scope of this document. Refer to the operator manual of the
printer for guidance.
the service.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-6 Print Service Use
Print Service Use
As with a DICOM Image Storage Service, the LOGIQ E9 provides three ways to send images to a Print
Service:
1.) Dataflow
2.) Print Button
3.) Send To
The setups and uses are basically the same, except when the Format of the Print Service is set to
something other than 1x1. Then, if the Print Service is tied either to a dataflow with Direct Store set, or
to a print button, the LOGIQ E9 will hold each image in its spooler until the number of images specified
by Format is reached. For example, a Format of 3x4 specifies 12 images per sheet. Until you press the
print button 12 times, the LOGIQ E9 sends nothing to the Print Service. If you press the print button 24
times, the LOGIQ E9 sends the images in two batches of 12 each. Any images left on the spooler when
you start a new exam or end the patient are sent at that point.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-7 DICOM Worklist Service

A Worklist provides a repository of data for patients scheduled for an exam. The LOGIQ E9 can query
and filter the entries of the Worklist and retrieve one or more of them to create a patient for each with
an initial exam.
Worklist Setup
For R6, there is a new field in Worklist Setup, see: Table 3-19 "New Field in Worklist Setup" on page 3-
64.
To setup a Worklist Service on the LOGIQ E9, follow these steps:
Table 3-18 Worklist Setup
Device tab.)
2. From the Select Service drop-down menu, select DICOM Worklist and press Add.
6. Set Maximum Results to the maximum number of results returned. The default and
recommended setting is 100.
7. Search Criteria are filters that restrict the entries returned by a query to those that match all
criteria. The LOGIQ E9 provides two defaults: Modality (set to US for Ultrasound), and
Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date (commonly known as Exam date, and set to today).
Modify these or add other criteria as you wish. These define remote filtering.
See: "Remote versus Local Filtering" on page 3-65.
the service.
9. Select the Dont Use checkbox when you DO NOT want to remotely filter on that search
criterion. The tag will not be part of the Query. This is useful when a Worklist service does not
correctly handle the tag.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-7 DICOM Worklist Service (contd)
Table 3-19 New Field in Worklist Setup
R5.1.1 and earlier
R5.1.2 and later
Verify Before Query: If the LOGIQ E9 attempts a Query to a service that does not respond, the
scanner will wait for a period determined by the Timeout and Maximum Retries settings. During this
period user input is disabled. To avoid this, checkmark Verify Before Query. Then the scanner will first
verify that the service will respond, and wait no longer than Verify Timeout seconds. If the service
fails to respond in that time, the LOGIQ E9 will not attempt the Query.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Remote versus Local Filtering
The search criteria you set up in the Utility -> Connectivity -> Service page are used in remote
filtering. When you press the Query button on the Worklist screen, the criteria becomes part of the
DICOM message exchange between the LOGIQ E9 and the Worklist service. The service returns only
those entries that match all of the search criteria.
In contrast, local filtering occurs on the fly on the patient data already queried, listed and stored on
the LOGIQ E9. Local filtering occurs every time you enter a value in one of the fields above the list on
the Worklist screen, such as Patient ID. The displayed list gets filtered progressively for each selection
you make or character you enter. Table 3-20 ""Remote versus Local Filtering" illustrates this
example: For a Worklist with dozens of entries, select Accession Number as the Search Key and enter
1. The list is filtered to display only those entries whose Accession Number starts with 1. Now enter
2 after the 1. The list is filtered again to display only those entries whose Accession Number starts
with 12.
Table 3-20 "Remote versus Local Filtering
Local Filtering - Query Button NOT pressed
Local filtering DOES NOT generate any DICOM traffic between the LOGIQ E9 and the service. It acts
only upon the list already on the LOGIQ E9. This local list does not constitute actual patients and
exams on the LOGIQ E9. Creation of patients and exams does not occur until you select one or more
entries on the list and press Transfer. But, there is a twist; if you enter a value in one of the fields
above the list on the Worklist screen, and then press Query, you are doing remote filtering again.
The filter comprises the search criteria you set up in the Utility -> Connectivity -> Service page, plus
whatever you entered in the field(s) above the list on the Worklist screen.
Remote Filtering - Query Button PRESSED (exact match ONLY)
Continuing the Accession Number example: Enter 12 and press Query. The query returns only
exact matches.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Remote versus Local Filtering (cont.)
To get partial matching, similar to what local filtering provides, add an asterisk at the end of the string:
Table 3-21 "Remote versus Local Filtering (cont.)
Remote Filtering - Query Button PRESSED (partial matching)
Some of the remote search keys use special formats:

- A tag that represents a date (example: 00400002 Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date, which is
generally called "Exam Date") three formats:
* A valid single date in format YYYYMMDD (example: 20141112 for November 12, 2014)
* A range of dates separated by a dash (example: 20140902-20141002 for the range
September 2, 2014 through October 2, 2014)
* TODAY[x,y], a range around todays date where x represents the number of days before today,
and y represents the number of days after today (examples: TODAY[0,0] means today only;
TODAY[1,3] means yesterday, today, and the three days after today)
- A tag that represents a persons name, such as 00100010 Patient's Name. A complete name entry
has five components separated by carets ( ^ ):
* LastName^FirstName^MiddleName^Prefix^Suffix (Example: Public^John^Q.^Mr.^Jr. for
"Mr. John Q. Public Jr.")
- Many non-date tags formed by letters, numbers or both can use the asterisk as a wildcard.
* For example, M* for Patients Name will return all patients whose last name starts with M. M by
itself though returns only those patients whose name is exactly M.
* Exceptions: Patient ID and Modality require an exact match.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Remote versus Local Filtering (cont.)
The format of the values used for Search Criteria for both Worklist and Query/Retrieve services are
defined in the DICOM standard: http://medical.nema.org/dicom. Select the latest year available in this
folder. Open Part 5: Data Structures and Encoding, and examine Table 3-22 "Dicom Value
Representations" . For example, here are the rules for a valid AE Title:
Table 3-22 Dicom Value Representations
VR Name Definition Character Repertoire Length of Value
A string of characters that

Default Character Repertoire
identifies an Application Entity
excluding character code 5CH
with leading and trailing
AE (Application (the BACKSLASH \ in 16 bytes
spaces (20H) being non-
Entity) ISO-IR 6) and control maximum
significant. A value consisting
characters LF, FF, CR and
solely of spaces shall not be
ESC.
used.
Basically, an AE Title can be up to 16 characters. Leading and trailing spaces are ignored. A title of all
spaces is not valid. These characters are not allowed: \, line feed, form feed, carriage return, and
escape.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Worklist Use
Follow these steps for Worklist Use:
Table 3-23 Worklist Use
Worklist Display
1. From the Patient screen, press Worklist. The Data Transfer screen appears with Worklist
selected as the Task.
2. In the From: drop-down menu, select the Worklist to query.
3. Press Query. The LOGIQ E9 displays a list of all entries in the Worklist that meet the criteria
set in both the Utility -> Connectivity -> Service page and on this Worklist screen.
4. To filter this list further, enter (more) values in Patient ID, Last Name, etc. This provides local
filtering. It DOES NOT generate more query requests to the Worklist service.
5. Select one or more entries from the list and press Transfer. The LOGIQ E9 creates initial
patient and exam data for each entry. If you transferred a single entry, the LOGIQ E9 returns
to the Patient screen with the patient and new exam selected.
The Worklist screen provides a couple of other controls:

6. Clear: This clears all local filters and restores the list to the last actual Query.
7. Dicom properties: This button displays some DICOM tags for the currently selected entry.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-8 DICOM MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure Step) Service
A DICOM Performed Procedure, also known as Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS), is a way
to inform your billing system that an ultrasound procedure has been completed and can be billed.
A typical setup has your Worklist Service handle MPPS communications. For example, you can retrieve
todays scheduled exams and report completed exams to the same system.
To set up MPPS on the LOGIQ E9, follow these steps:
Table 3-24 Setup and Use a DICOM MPPS

Utility -> Connectivity -> Service
1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Service, from the Destination Device drop-down menu, select
your Worklist device.
2. From the drop-down menu of services, select Dicom Performed Procedure and press Add.
3. Provide a name, set the AE Title and Port Number for your Worklist service. AE Title is case-
sensitive.
the service.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 3-24 Setup and Use a DICOM MPPS
Dataflow tab - MPPS added
6. In the Dataflow tab, add your MPPS service to the same dataflow that handles your DICOM
Image Storage service.
To set up MPPS on the server end, refer to the documentation of the Worklist service.
From this point on, from the perspective of the user, MPPS works quietly in the background. It
handles completed exams, abandoned exams, and empty exams with no input or monitoring
required from the user.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-9 DICOM Storage Commitment Service

DICOM Storage Commitment enables the LOGIQ E9 to obtain a commitment from the image storage
service that images have been stored. With this commitment, you may choose to delete the images from
the LOGIQ E9.
To set up Storage Commitment on the LOGIQ E9, follow these steps:
Table 3-25 DICOM Storage Commitment Service Setup and Use
1. In Utility -> Connectivity -> Service, from the Destination Device drop-down menu, select
your Image Storage server.
2. From the drop-down menu of services, select Dicom Storage Commitment and press Add.
3. Provide a name, set the AE Title and Port Number for your Image Storage service.
5. For Associated Storage, select the name of your Image Storage service.
the service.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 3-25 DICOM Storage Commitment Service Setup and Use
7. In the Dataflow tab, add your Storage Commitment service to the same dataflow that handles
your Image Storage service.
Storage Commitment includes reverse negotiation with the receiving end the Image
Storage service. Basically, the receiver needs to know the AE Title, IP address and Port
Number of the LOGIQ E9. Refer to the documentation of the Image Storage service for setting
up Storage Commitment.
NOTE: The Store Commit and its Associated Storage (A) MUST BE in the same Dataflow!
DICOM Job Spooler - STC identified
To confirm a successful Storage Commitment, press F4 to inspect the spooler after you send images
to the Image Storage service. An entry of:
Type: STC
Contents: Value equals the number of images stored, plus one if a Structured Report was sent.
Status: Done or Success
Error: no indication confirms a successful storage commitment.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-10 Structured Reporting
Structured Reporting provides for transmission of exam measurements and calculations in a separate
non-image file. It is not a service in itself, but is a feature of some DICOM Image Storage services, and
is always associated with one. The service must be able to interpret and display the data in the
Structured Report. Refer to the documentation of the Image Storage service documentation for
Structured Reporting.
Table 3-26 Structured Reporting
Utility -> Connectivity -> Service - Enable Structured Reporting checked
To enable Structured Reporting for an Image Storage service, go to the set-up screen for that service
in Utility -> Connectivity -> Service, check the Enable Structured Reporting box and press Save.
From that point on, the LOGIQ E9 sends a Structured Report at the end of an exam with
measurements.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 3-26 Structured Reporting
Sending Structure Report - R3.x and earlier
Sending Structure Report - R4.x and later
A Structured Report can be sent for the measurements and calculations of the currently-open exam
via a Print button. Add the Image Storage service to the Printflow setting of that button and set the
Format for that button to M&A. Take measurements in an exam and press the Print button. The
LOGIQ E9 generates a Structured Report and sends it to the Image Storage service.
The LOGIQ E9 does not store Structured Report files. Instead, when called upon, it conveys the
measurements and calculations to the service via the DICOM message exchange between them.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-11 DICOM Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Service

A Q/R service retrieves patients data and corresponding exams from a PACS. The LOGIQ E9 can
query the service for exams belonging to patients that match search attributes. The LOGIQ E9 can then
retrieve the exams from the service and store them in the local archive.
3-9-11-1 Q/R Service Setup

Follow these steps for Q/R Service Setup:
Table 3-27 Q/R Service Setup
Device tab.)
2. Verify Before Query: If the LOGIQ E9 attempts a Query to a service that does not respond, the
LOGIQ E9 will wait for a period determined by the Timeout and Maximum Retries settings.
During this period, user input is disabled. To avoid this, checkmark Verify Before Query. Then
the LOGIQ E9 will first verify that the service will respond, and wait no longer than Verify
Timeout seconds. If the service fails to respond in that time, the LOGIQ E9 will not attempt
the Query.
From the Select Service drop-down menu, select Dicom Query/Retrieve and press Add.
6. Set Maximum Results to the maximum number of results returned.
7. Search Criteria are essentially the same as with Worklists. The concepts of Remote and
Local queries are also the same. See: "Remote versus Local Filtering" on page 3-65.
the service.
NOTE: In many cases, the Q/R service allows a LOGIQ E9 to query its patient data, but will
not allow actual transfer of exams/images without some level of authorization. Typically, the
service needs to know the AE Title, IP address, and Port Number of the LOGIQ E9. Refer to
the documentation of the Q/R service.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-11-2 DICOM Query/Retrieve (Q/R) Service
Q/R Service Use
Follow these steps for Q/R Service Use:
Table 3-28 Q/R Service Use
1. From the Patient screen, press Data Transfer. The Data Transfer screen appears.
Select Q/R as the Task.
2. In the From: drop-down menu, select the Q/R service to query.
3. Press Query. The LOGIQ E9 displays a list of all patients in the Q/R service that meet the
criteria set in both the Utility -> Connectivity -> Service page and on this Q/R screen.
4. To filter this list further, enter (more) values in Patient ID, Last Name, etc.
NOTE: This provides local filtering; it DOES NOT generate more query requests to the Q/R
service, unless you press the Query button again.
5. Select one or more entries (patients or individual exams) from the list and press Transfer. The
LOGIQ E9 retrieves the patients and their exams and stores them on its local hard drive. These
patients are available on the patient screen. You can view their exams and images, and create
new exams for them.
Each patient entry in the list indicates the number of series (exams) available for retrieval (5a).
To retrieve all of them, double-click anywhere in the row, or single-click the row and press the
Transfer button. To retrieve individual exams, single-click on the entrys folder icon (5b). This
displays a list of the exams. Double-click the exam you want to retrieve, or Ctrl-click and Shift-
click to select more than one and then press Transfer.
6. During the transfer, the Transfer button changes to Cancel. Press it to return control to the
LOGIQ E9 before all selected patients download. Example: If you selected 5 patients to
transfer, but pressed Cancel while the third one was transferring, Patients 1 and 2 have been
retrieved and will remain on the LOGIQ E9. Patients 4 and 5 will not be retrieved. As for
Patient 3, cancellation depends on when you pressed Cancel during its transfer; a partial
cancellation may occur: the patient's data transfers, but not its images.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-11-3 Q/R Support for Volume Navigation
V Nav (Volume Navigation) combines 3D images from other modalities (CT, MR, etc.) with Ultrasound
scanning. Use Q/R to load non-Ultrasound images into the LOGIQ E9.
The LOGIQ E9 supports retrieval of these non-US image types:
MR (Magnetic Resonance)
CT (Computed Tomography)
PT (Positron Emission Tomography)
XA (X-Ray Angio)
MG (Digital Mammography)
Use filter 00080061 Modalities in Study to retrieve non-US images. To filter on more than one modality,
separate each by a \ (backslash). For example, US\MR\CT\PT\XA\MG returns entries for all
modalities supported by the LOGIQ E9.
Basic Use with V Nav
This guide is not intended to cover V Nav extensively. However, here are the initial steps:
Table 3-29 Q/R Support for Volume Navigation
Image History Display
1. Query and retrieve the non-US study from PACS.

2. Create a new exam for this patient.
3. Press the V Nav key located above the keyboard on the operator panel.
4. On the Touch Panel, press Load; select From Database from the pop-up menu.
5. An Image History page displays on the screen. Select any desired image in the non-US series
and press Review.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 3-29 Q/R Support for Volume Navigation
LOGIQ E9 Scan Screen
6. The LOGIQ E9 displays the scan screen, prompts you to confirm the patient data set selected,
and displays the non-US volume on the right side of the screen.
7. To scroll through the dataset, press the Scroll Z Trackball button. Use the Trackball to scroll
through the dataset to find the area of interest.
8. When done, press Scroll Z again. You are now scanning live on the left side of the screen with
your reference view on the right screen.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-12 Spooler
The DICOM Job Spooler shows all current and recent outgoing jobs performed by the LOGIQ E9.
Outgoing jobs involve objects sent to a remote service: images, Structured Reports, and Key Image
Notes sent to a PACS; print jobs to a DICOM printer; Storage Commitment to a PACS; and Modality
Performed Procedure Step to a Worklist service. They do not include incoming objects namely,
Worklist and Q/R queries and transfers.
Table 3-30 Spooler
Dicom Job Spooler Display
Toggle F4 on the keyboard to alternately display and hide the Spooler.

The columns in the DICOM JOB SPOOLER display:
# job number
Last Name and Patient ID patient data
Destination name of service receiving the objects
Type object type: Storage for images, Structured Reports, and Key Image Notes; STC for
Storage Commitment; MPPS for Modality Performed Procedure Step
Contents number of objects being sent
Status Pending, Active, Hold, Done or Success, Failed
Error populated if the transfer fails
Information may contain general information
The buttons in the DICOM JOB SPOOLER display:

Refresh Refresh the status of jobs on the spooler
Delete Select one or more jobs on the spooler and press Delete... to delete them. A pop-up
asks you to confirm your choice. (Successful jobs get deleted automatically after several minutes.)
Resend Select a single job and press Resend to send it to its original destination. If you select
more than one job, the Resend button is disabled.
Send To Select a single job and press Send To... to send the job to any image storage or
print service set up on the LOGIQ E9. A pop-up presents a list of these services. If more than one
job is selected, the Send To button is disabled.
Hide Same as F4: return to scan screen
Select All Selects all jobs in the list
NOTE: Data for a service, such as IP address, AE Title and Port #, become part of the job. If any are
incorrect, the job fails. If you correct the error, do not use Resend to try to send the job again. The
job file is not updated with the correct data and it will fail to transfer. Instead, return to the Exam View
tab, press Send To... and select the service or press "Send To" on the Spooler Display. This
replaces the old job file with one that has the correct data.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-12 Spooler (contd)

Common Error Messages
No connection established check network and log file: This usually indicates a bad
or missing network connection OR incorrect IP Address, AE Title, or Port # between the LOGIQ E9 and
service.
The remote system was not able to interpret the image information check log
file: This indicates an issue with the image or patient data, such as a missing Patient ID.
The remote service is out of resources: For example, the PACS has no more storage space.
3-9-13 Wireless
Configuring a Wireless network is beyond the scope of this guide. Both the User and Service manuals
cover Wireless setup in detail. In particular, for setting up theWLAN, refer to the appropriate version the
LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, or the appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-
8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per LOGIQ E9 console" on page 1-22, Configuring the
Wireless Network (Option). (Available via the Help F1 key on the LOGIQ E9 keyboard.)
Table 3-31 Wireless
Help F1 Key Display
NOTE: When both wired and wireless are enabled, the LOGIQ E9 chooses wired.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-9-14 Network Sniffer

The LOGIQ E9 includes a network sniffer, Wireshark, that displays network traffic between the
LOGIQ E9 and other devices. Its output can be saved in files. It is useful for debugging connectivity
issues. Usually only DICOM traffic is examined. Follow these steps:
Table 3-32 Network Sniffer
Wireshark: Capture Interfaces
1. Press Alt-N to display Wireshark.

2. In Capture/Interfaces press Options on the interface that corresponds to the LOGIQ E9 IP
address.
Wireshark: Capture Options
3. Make sure "Capture packets in promiscuous mode" is unchecked. Press Start.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
Network Connection: Capturing Wireshark
4. In the "Filter" bar, enter "dcm" or "dicom." (Which one Wireshark accepts, depends on its
version. Wireshark will indicate whether it accepts one or the other by turning the Filter
background green.) Press Apply.
Once Wireshark displays DICOM traffic, select an individual line and expand the DICOM tree
in the lower frame to view DICOM-specific data.
Wireshark Info column
Capture Restart clears the current traffic display, in preparation for the next DICOM exchange.
In the Wireshark Info column, entries with Reject or Abort definitely indicate issues. For example,
the above exchange occurred when the LOGIQ E9 tried to send an exam to Viewpoint, but Viewpoint
did not have the correct AE Title for the LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Encoded Value in the Status tag
Other times, however, the actual reason for an issue is often encoded in innocuous-looking entries
near the end of the exchange. For example, the above situation involved the LOGIQ E9 attempting
to send an image to Viewpoint directly via a print button, without a patient id. Viewpoints
C-STORE-RSP message to the LOGIQ E9 indicated, by an encoded value in the Status tag, that
it did not store the image.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Wireshark: Save file as
To save the network traffic currently displayed, stop the capture and press File / Save As. In the
pop-up, select a destination drive or folder, name the file, select both All packets and Displayed
under Packet Range, and press Save.
This saves the DICOM traffic in a file with suffix .pcap, which can be analyzed by Wireshark or a
similar network sniffer.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 3-10
Setup paperwork
NOTE: During and after setup, the documentation (i.e. CDs with documentation, Users Manuals,
Installation Manuals etc.) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system
documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available during
the operation and service of the complete system.
3-10-1 Contents in this Section

3-10-1 "Contents in this Section" on page 3-85
3-10-2 "User Manual(s)" on page 3-85
3-10-3 "Product Locator Card / UDI" on page 3-85
3-10-2 User Manual(s)

Check that the correct User Manual(s) or CD with User Manuals, per software (SW) revision and
language, for the system is included.
3-10-3 Product Locator Card / UDI

NOTE: The Product Locator Card shown may not be the same as the provided Product Locator card.
The UDI of the medical device must be captured when any work is performed on that device. Refer to
your local procedures on the actual capturing of the UDI.
Figure 3-30 Product Locator Card (Example)
GIB, European Central Admin Product Locator Card
g
GEHC - Americas Product Locator Cards Asia Service Operation
Mailing Product Locator W523 XEROX Office No. 1, Yongchang North Road
Address P.O. Box 414 VKUUMTECHNOLGIAI GPGYR Beijing Economic and
Milwaukee, WI 53201-0414 FTI T 141 Technologic Development Area
1046 Budapest Hungary Beijing 100176 China
DESCRIPTION F DA MOD EL REV SERIAL
OCP BS ORD
DISTRICT CUSTOMER NO. DATE (MO DA - YR)
DESTINATION
SHIPMENT
NAME AND
ADDRESS
ZIP CODE
46-303268P1 Rev 14
GIB, European Central Admin Product Locator Card
g
GEHC - Americas Product Locator Cards Asia Service Operation
Mailing Product Locator W523 XEROX Office No. 1, Yongchang North Road
Address P.O. Box 414 VKUUMTECHNOLGIAI GPGYR Beijing Economic and
Milwaukee, WI 53201-0414 FTI T 141 Technologic Development Area
1046 Budapest Hungary Beijing 100176 China
DESCRIPTION F DA MODEL REV SERIAL
SYSTEM LTD. OCP BS ORD EMPLOYEE NO.
DISTRICT RO O M DATE (MO DA - YR)
CUSTOMER NO.
INSTALLATION
DESTINATION
NAME AND
ADDRESS
ZIP CODE
46-303268P1 Rev 14

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 3-11
Configuring Insite ExC
3-11-2 Prerequisites for InSite ExC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3-11-3 Configuration Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3-11-4 Configuring InSite ExC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
3-11-2 Prerequisites for InSite ExC Setup

1.) If not already available, collect the following information from the IT Administrator:
a.) System IP Address
________/_________/________/________
b.) Default Gateway

________/_________/________/________
Proxy Server, if necessary
________/_________/________/________ and Port __________________
c.) Proxy Authentication, if necessary

User _______________________ and Password__________________ and Scheme.
d.) System ID (SID) number____________________________________
3-11-3 Configuration Steps

1.) Complete 3-11-2 - Prerequisites for InSite ExC Setup.
2.) Configure the system on the customers network using the System IP Address and Gateway
Address collected above.
NOTE: See the appropriate system Service Manual to configure the system to access the network.
3.) On the LOGIQ E9, access the Service Login screen.

The Service Login screen opens (Figure 3-31 "Service Login Screen - LOGIQ E9" on page 3-87).
3 - 86 Section 3-11 - Configuring Insite ExC

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-11-3 Configuration Steps (contd)

Figure 3-31 Service Login Screen - LOGIQ E9
4.) Select GE Service and enter the password, then select OKAY.
The Service Desktop opens.
5.) Select the CONFIGURATION tab.

The Configuration Page opens (Figure 3-32 "Configuration Home Page - LOGIQ E9" on page 3-88).
3-11-4 Configuring InSite ExC

Configure the System to connect to InSite ExC. All bold fields are mandatory. Before configuring the
agent be sure that you have a network connection and check that it is configured. You will not be able
to perform checkout with the default network configuration.
3-11-4-1 Configuring Agent Configuration

1.) Select the CONFIGURATION tab and choose the InSite ExC Agent Configuration link in the
frame on the left side.
2.) Inspect the Device Name field and the CRM field. The Device Name field auto populates with the
prefix LE9_ followed by the Serial number.
NOTE: The Device Name cannot be edited.
3.) In the Serial Number/System ID (CRM) field (for Ultrasound), enter the System ID now.
This is a required field. For consoles located in the U.S.A., the System ID is pre-populated. Outside
of the U.S.A., follow the local System ID convention.
The CRM field auto-populates with format of LOGIQ E9 followed with the first five digits of the serial
number. The CRM field is editable, and can be edited to reflect the desired System ID.
NOTE: If CRM says unknown, try rebooting. When you install software the system reboots, but you
need a second boot to get the serial number into the service platform.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-11-4-1 Configuring Agent Configuration (contd)
Figure 3-32 Configuration Home Page - LOGIQ E9
4.) In the Display Name field, enter a descriptive name that is easy to identify with this device. For
example, Unit 1.
5.) In the Description field, create a unique description of the system. For example, St. Marys
Hospital.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-11-4-1 Configuring Agent Configuration (contd)

6.) Configure the following mandatory fields as desired:
- Continent
- Country
- City
- State
- Institution
The Agent Configuration Tool screen opens (Figure 3-33).
Figure 3-33 Completed Agent Configuration Tool screen - LOGIQ E9
Must show IP addresses for

1. Must match System ID 3. Must be DISABLE, unless a
the server selected
5. proxy server is provided by
Must be PILOT or the hospital
2. 4. Recommended to filter *.zip
PRODUCTION

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-11-4-2 Configuring Advanced Configuration

1.) Select PILOT2 or PRODUCTION from the Enterprise Server dropdown list. The Pilot server is
used for initial production, please check with the OLC to verify that the current server is used.
- Enterprise parameters are populated for Pilot as shown below:
* Enterprise Server URL = https://198.169.188.26:443
* Enterprise Tunnel URL = https://198.169.188.27:443
- Or for Production, as shown below:
* Enterprise Server URL = https://198.169.188.10:443
* Enterprise Tunnel URL = https://198.169.188.11:443
2.) Configure the Service Center settings as RPROC.
3.) Select Enable in the File Watcher field.
NOTE: File Watcher will monitor d:\export\service for R2.x.x or earlier, and d:\service for R3.x.x and
later.
NOTE: Do not change the Directory field.
4.) In the Filter field, it is recommended to set it to *.zip, so that the system will only upload zip files to
the back office. Example, Alt D logs.
5.) If a proxy is needed, select Enable from the Proxy dropdown list and enter a valid proxy server
address and port (if needed).
If proxy authentication is needed:
a.) Enable it and enter Scheme (if needed).

b.) Enter User information and Password.
6.) Save the settings from the previous steps by clicking the Submit Changes button. A page is
displayed on the CSD indicating the agent will be restarted.
If a screen requests ok for password, select Yes. The Submit Changes screen opens.
Figure 3-34 Submit Changes Response

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-11-4-2 Configuring Advanced Configuration (contd)

7.) Access and inspect the CSD Home Page. The Home Page appears and indicates Configured and
Checked out.
If configured properly, the Service Home Page updates in approximately 10 seconds
(although it may take upto 2 minutes). If it does not check out, confirm the Agent Configuration
Tool screen has correct URL / IP address information. Make corrections, and repeat 1 Select
PILOT2 or PRODUCTION from the Enterprise Server dropdown list. The Pilot server is used
for initial production, please check with the OLC to verify that the current server is used. 3-50.
If it fails again, contact the OLC or the Hospital IT department to check that your system has
access to the Internet.
NOTE: If this fails wait a minute and refresh the page by clicking on the home page button again. There
is often a delay before the checkout is complete.
Figure 3-35 Configuration Home Page - LOGIQ E9

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3-11-4-3 Configuring Request for Service (RFS)

To configure the LOGIQ E9 to enable the customer to submit an RFS,
1.) Position the Windows pointer on top of the GE InSite ExC icon at the bottom of the display.
2.) Press the right Trackball Set key. This opens the RFS screen.
3.) Select the Users tab and type the sites Contact Name. Manual and machine-generated RFS
requests are directed to this person. Items with red asterisks are required fields and must be filled
in.
4.) Click on Set Default Machine contact.
Figure 3-36 Select Default Machine Contact
NOTE: Machine-generated RFS is the system default. If you wish to disable RFS, remove the
checkmark at Automatic Request for Service via Utility -> Admin -> System Admin.
Figure 3-37 Request for Service Setting on System Admin Page
3-11-4-4 Remote Check and Configuration

Contact the OnLine Center for InSite Checkout confirmation.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Chapter 4
Functional Checks
Section 4-1
Overview
This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ E9 scanner and
diagnostics instructions using the built-in service software.

4-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-3 Functional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-4 Application Turnover Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4-5 Power supply test and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4-6 3D/4D and Volume Navigation Functional Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4-7 SWAVE (Shear Wave Shear Elasto) Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4-8 Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-1-3 Special Equipment required

An empty (blank) DVD-R disk
At least one probe (ideally you should check all the site probes used by the system.)
For available probes, see: Section 9-18 "Probes" on page 9-112.
ECG Harness:
- CABLE ECG MARQ. AHA/AMERICA, P/N:164L0025
- LEADWIRES ECG MARQ. AHA/AMERICA, P/N: 164L0027
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 4-2
General procedures
NOTICE SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS

Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers
are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE
GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG
LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON
WILL TURN OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS BATTERY AT J3, OR THE BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT
PC N3 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY, EPS OR
CHARGEBOARD AND BEP MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF IF THE
CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET.
4-2-1 Overview
Some procedures are used more often than other. The intention with this section is to keep the most
used procedures in one place.

4-2-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2-3 Power ON/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2-4 Power shut down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-2-5 Top Console position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-2-6 LCD Monitor Positions and Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-2-7 Service Key (Dongle, HASP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-2-8 Exit to Windows Desktop from the LOGIQ E9 Application Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-2-9 Removable Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-2-10 Archiving and Loading Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-2-11 Space Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-2-12 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-2-13 Installation and Setup Procedures for Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-2-14 Moving and Transporting the LOGIQ E9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-2-15 Recording important settings and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-2 Section 4-2 - General procedures

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-3 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-3-1 Warnings
DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE
PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.
DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THE
SAFETY GROUND.
DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE
POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.
NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare.
NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five (5) seconds. When turning OFF
the Circuit Breaker, the system should de-energize completely before turning the circuit breaker
ON.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-3-2 Connect AC (mains) Power to the LOGIQ E9

Connecting AC Power to the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound unit involves preliminary checks of the power cord,
voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.
NOTE: The LOGIQ E9 will function on Voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using
220 volt power, then a center tapped power source is required.
1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the Circuit Breaker is turned off.
2.) Uncoil the power cable, allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly.
3.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage.
4.) Verify that the on-site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit
Breaker on the rear of the unit.
5.) Connect the Power Cables female plug to the Power Inlet at the rear of the unit.
6.) Lock the plug in position with the Retaining Clamp (ACC Clamp).
7.) Verify that the Mains Power Circuit Breaker is in OFF position, if not, switch it OFF.
Figure 4-1 The Circuit Breaker and On/Off button
8.) Connect the Power Cables other end (male plug) to a hospital grade mains power outlet with the
proper rated voltage, and the unit is ready for Power ON/Boot Up.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-3-3 Turn Unit ON

1.) Switch ON the Mains Power Circuit Breaker at the rear of the unit. The ON/OFF button will become
amber.
Figure 4-2 The Circuit breaker and ON/OFF button
You should hear a click from the relays in the AC Power and the unit is ready to boot. The ON/OFF
button will remain amber.
2.) Press once on the ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel to boot the unit. The ON/OFF button will
turn green when it is pressed.
During a normal boot, you may observe that:
a.) The units ventilation fan starts on full speed, but slows down after a few seconds (listen to the
fan sound).
b.) Power is distributed to the peripherals, Operator Panel (Console), Monitor, Front End
Processor and Back End Processor.
c.) Back End Processor and rest of scanner starts with the sequence listed in the next steps:
d.) Back End Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software.
e.) The Start Screen is displayed on the monitor.
f.) A start-up bar indicating the time used for software loading, is displayed on the monitor.
g.) The software initiates and sets up the Front End electronics and the rest of the instrument.
h.) The backlight in the keyboard is lit.
i.) As soon as the software has been loaded, either a 2D screen is displayed on the screen,
indicating that a probe has been connected, or a No Mode screen is displayed, indicating that
no probe has been connected.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-3-3 Turn Unit ON (contd)
Figure 4-3 2D Screen on the display
NOTE: Total time used for start-up is typically one and a half minutes or less. If starting after a power
loss or a lock-up, the start-up time may be up to four minutes.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

When you switch off the unit, the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence.
Figure 4-4 System - Exit menu
Logoff
Shutdown
If the Shutdown button is dimmed, press the ON/OFF button or Atl F10 to shut down the unit.
Cancel


PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-4 Power shut down (contd)

Sleep Mode R2.x.x and R3.x
Use this button to reduce the boot up time (is less than 120 seconds). Intended to help on portable
studies.
Sleep saves all Memory content, in the Hard drive and shuts down. When booting up, memory
content is restored from HDD. This feature is not a substitute of a regular shutdown. The system
should be shutdown completely at least once a day to prevent performance issues.
Figure 4-5 Sleep Mode

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-4-1 Complete Power Down
Table 4-1 Power Down the LOGIQ E9

1. Power down the systemand disconnect the Press once on the ON/OFF button
mains power cable from the wall outlet.
Press once on the ON/OFF button on the

Operator Panel to display the System -
Exit menu. When you switch off the unit,
the system performs an automatic
shutdown sequence.
2. Select Shutdown to do a complete power

down of the LOGIQ E9.
The Back End Processor will first turn off

the scanner activity and print the message
Please wait - Shutdown in progress in the
LCD display on the Operator Panel.
Next, it starts to shut down itself. The time

to shutdown the LOGIQ E9, including the
Back End Processor, may vary from 10
seconds up to approximately 1 minute.
The last thing that shuts down is the light on

the Operator Panel, indicating that you can
continue with the next step.
NOTE: Sleep Mode only available in

LOGIQ E9 running R2.x.x and R3.x.x
software.
NOTICE
Be sure to wait with the next step until the system has finished its shut-down. Failing to do so may
destroy data on the Hard Disk Drive, making the system fail later.
Switch off the Mains Power Circuit Breaker, located on the rear of the LOGIQ E9. This will cut power
distribution within the unit.
Unplug the unit.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-5 Top Console position adjustment

The system Top Console can be freely moved in all directions (if the power is on or if the mechanism is
not locked in position prior to powering down the system). The vertical displacement of the Top Console
is motor driven. The control buttons are located around the handles.
CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the
Top Console. This includes both objects and people.
Power on the LOGIQ E9 before performing the following steps.

Figure 4-6 Top Console adjustment controls: Lock (1), Up/Down (2)
1. Lock button: unparking and sideways displacement of the console.
2.Up/Down button: raising/lowering the console.
To raise/lower the Top Console
1.) Press and hold down the Up/Down button (Figure 4-6, button 2) accordingly to raise or lower the
Top Console.
2.) Release the button when the Top Console is at the desired height.
4-2-5-1 To unlock the Top Console

1.) Press and hold down the Lock and brake release button(s) (Figure 4-6, button 1) and pull the Top
Console out of the locked position until the Top console is in the desired position.
2.) Release the button(s).
4-2-5-2 To lock the Top Console

1.) Press and hold down the Lock and brake release button(s) (Figure 4-6, button 1) while pushing
the Top Console in the locked position.
2.) Release the button(s).
4-2-5-3 To move the floating Top Console

1.) The unlocked Top Console can be easily moved by pressing and holding down the Lock and brake
release button(s) (Figure 4-6, button 1) and move the Top Console in any direction.
2.) Release the button when the Top Console is at the desired height.
4-2-5-4 To move the Top Console if Power is OFF

To manually release the consoles XY-mechanism (frogleg) if the power is OFF, see: Section 6-7
"Operator Panel movement" on page 6-35.
4 - 10 Section 4-2 - General procedures

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-6 LCD Monitor Positions and Lock
Figure 4-7 LCD Monitor Position and Lock - Original Arm
1. Unlocked LCD Monitor 2. Locked LCD Monitor
Figure 4-8 LCD Monitor Positions - Daeil Arm
1 2 3
1. Tilt LCD Monitor 3. Move Monitor Up and Down
2. Move Monitor Back and Forth 4. Monitor front view / Monitor

tilted down (side view)
When the LCD Arm is unlocked. verify the LCD Monitor can move up/down (vertically) and left/right
(horizontally).
NOTE: The LCD Monitor can move approximately 100 mm (3.94 inches) vertically and
250 mm (9.84 inches) horizontally.
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 11

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-6 LCD Monitor Positions and Lock (contd)
Figure 4-9 LCD Monitor Positions - Ergotron Arm
3
2
2
3
6 4b
4a
5 4c
6
1. Vertical Travel = 150mm 4. Pan Arm Rotation = 45 (90 total)
2. Rotation at Mount = 90 (180 total) 5. LCD Translation = 350mm
3. Lift Arm Rotation = 135 (270 6. Tilt

total) a. No Collistion
b. Approximately 20
(based on Pan Arm Off-set)
c. 85-90
When the LCD Arm Lock is unlocked. verify the LCD Monitor can move up/down (vertically) and left/
right (horizontally).
NOTE: The LCD Monitor can move approximately 100 mm (3.94 inches) vertically and
250 mm (9.84 inches) horizontally.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-6-1 To unlock the LCD Monitor

Turn the knob counter clockwise to unlock the LCD Monitor.
The LCD Monitor can be moved freely in all directions.
4-2-6-2 To lock the LCD Monitor

Turn the knob clockwise to raise the lock and move the LCD Monitor into the parked position.
4-2-6-3 LCD Monitor position for Transport
Figure 4-10 LCD Monitor transport Position (Daeil Arm shown)
Lock Arm and tilt LCD Monitor down.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-7 Service Key (Dongle, HASP)

A Service Dongle and a proprietary GE Service password are necessary for use by GE Service when
performing proprietary level diagnostics like accessing the desktop on the BEP. The password used
with the GE service dongle changes at specific intervals.
1.) Power down the LOGIQ E9, see: 4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-7.
2.) Attach your GE Service Dongle to any accessible USB port. LOGIQ E9 has several USB ports to
choose between. There are USB ports on the Operator Panel, on the rear of the LOGIQ E9.
3.) Power ON the LOGIQ E9. After it boots up to application, press the ON/OFF button and select exit.
If a Service Dongle is plugged in, a Maintenance Access dialog will be displayed on the screen.
Figure 4-11 Maintenance Access dialog
4.) Leave the Username field empty.

5.) Type the current GE Service Password in the Password field.
NOTE: READ THIS NOTE BEFORE YOU CONTINUE:

After you have selected OK, the Start Application dialog will be displayed on screen, see: Figure
4-12 "Start Application dialog (actual Software loaded will display)" on page 4-15. Be ready to
select MAINTENANCE... before the Time Bar is full, or the application software will start.
A description on how to recover, if you fail to select MAINTENANCE... is included, but you will
spend some extra time doing it.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-7 Service Key (Dongle, HASP) (contd)

6.) Select OK in the Maintenance Access dialog to verify the password. The Start Application dialog
will be displayed.
Figure 4-12 Start Application dialog (actual Software loaded will display)
NOTE: Install SW button is only enabled if there is an Application software disk in the DVD drive.
7.) Select MAINTENANCE... to enter Maintenance mode.

This will bring up the Maintenance dialog. See: Figure 4-13.
8.) Select EXIT TO WINDOWS. This will display the Windows Desktop on the screen.
Figure 4-13 Maintenance dialog

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-8 Exit to Windows Desktop from the LOGIQ E9 Application Software

Follow these steps if you want to exit to the Windows Desktop when the application software is running.
The Service Dongle must be plugged in, if not, see: 4-2-7 "Service Key (Dongle, HASP)" on page 4-14.
1.) Press ON/OFF button or Atl F10. This will bring up System- Exit window.
2.) Select Exit. This will bring the Maintenance access window.
3.) Enter the service password and click OK.
4.) In the System halted window select Maintenance.
5.) In the Maintenance dialog, select EXIT TO WINDOWS. The Windows Desktop displays on the
screen.
NOTE: If you need to restart LOGIQ E9, ensure that you do a complete power down (Shut Down). This
is required to power up the Front End Processor.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-9 Removable Media

Refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, or the appropriate
LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per LOGIQ E9
console" on page 1-22 to perform the following tasks:
Using Removable Media

Labeling Removable Media
Formatting Removable Media
Verifying Removable Media
4-2-10 Archiving and Loading Presets
4-2-10-1 Loading Presets from removable media

For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, or
the appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per
LOGIQ E9 console" on page 1-22.
4-2-11 Space Management

Refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, or the appropriate
LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per LOGIQ E9
console" on page 1-22 to perform the following tasks:
Configuring the Disk Management Function

Setting the Disk Management Schedule
Configuring Data Management Settings
Configuring Destination Device Setting
Running the Disk Management Function
Starting Disk Management Manually
4-2-12 Backup
For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, or
the appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per
4-2-13 Installation and Setup Procedures for Peripherals

Refer to 3-7-4 "Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection" on page 3-35.
Table 4-2 Printer Functional Tests
See
Section Functional Test Debrief Script
LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction

Section 7-10 Test of Printers 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required
tests and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-14 Moving and Transporting the LOGIQ E9
4-2-14-1 The Casters (Wheels) control

The wheels of the LOGIQ E9 are controlled by the pedals located between the front wheels of the
LOGIQ E9.
Examine the wheels frequently for defects to avoid breaking or jamming.

Figure 4-14 Pedals
1.) Press the right pedal to engage the Parking brake.

2.) Press the center pedal to release the Parking brake.
3.) Press the left pedal to engage the Swivel lock.
4.) Press the center pedal to release the Swivel lock.
4-2-14-2 To prepare the LOGIQ E9 to be moved

1.) If not locked, move the keyboard console and LCD monitor to the park position (see: 4-2-5 "Top
Console position adjustment" on page 4-10 and 4-2-6 "LCD Monitor Positions and Lock" on page
4-11).
2.) Turn the system off, including the circuit breaker (see: 4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-7), and
remove the plug from the wall.
3.) Disconnect all cables linking the LOGIQ E9 to any off-board peripheral devices and network.
4.) Secure the LOGIQ E9s power cable.
5.) Place all probes in the probe holder. Ensure that the probe cables do not protrude from the
LOGIQ E9 or interfere with the wheels.
6.) Ensure that no loose items are left on the LOGIQ E9.
7.) Fold down the monitor.
8.) Unlock the brake.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-14-3 To ensure safety while moving the LOGIQ E9

1.) Ensure that the keyboard console and LCD monitor are in locked position (see: 4-2-5 "Top Console
position adjustment" on page 4-10 and 4-2-6 "LCD Monitor Positions and Lock" on page 4-11).
WARNING Do not move the LOGIQ E9 if the keyboard console and LCD Monitor are in free position.
Ensure that the hands of the patient and user are away from the console arm when
moving the keyboard console.
2.) Proceed cautiously when crossing door or elevator thresholds. Grasp the front handle grips or the
back handle bar and push or pull. Do not attempt to move the LOGIQ E9 using cables or probe
connectors. Take extra care while moving the LOGIQ E9 on inclines.
3.) Ensure that the LOGIQ E9 does not strike the walls or door frames.
4.) Ensure that the pathway is clear.
5.) Move the LOGIQ E9 slowly and carefully.
CAUTION Avoid ramps that are steeper than 10 degrees.
6.) Use two or more persons to move the LOGIQ E9 over long distances or on inclines.
4-2-14-4 Transporting the LOGIQ E9 by vehicle

Take extra care when transporting the LOGIQ E9 by vehicle. In addition to the moving precautions listed
on 4-2-14-3 "To ensure safety while moving the LOGIQ E9" on page 4-19, follow the procedure
described below.
1.) If not locked, move the keyboard console and LCD monitor to the park position (see: 4-2-5 "Top
Console position adjustment" on page 4-10 and 4-2-6 "LCD Monitor Positions and Lock" on page
4-11).
WARNING Do not move/lift the unit if the keyboard console and LCD monitor are in free (unlock
ed)
position.
2.) Disconnect all probes and secure them in their boxes.
3.) Ensure that the transporting vehicle is appropriate for the units weight.
4.) Park the vehicle on a level surface for loading and unloading.
5.) Secure the unit while it is on the lift, to prevent rolling. Do not attempt to hold it in place by hand.
Cushion the unit and strap the lower part so that it does not break loose.
6.) Ensure that the unit is secured inside the vehicle. Secure it with straps to the two hooks under the
system to prevent movement while in transit.
7.) Drive cautiously to prevent vibration damage.
4-2-14-5 Setting up at a new location

1.) When the unit is in place at a new location, lock the wheel brakes.
2.) Follow the set up procedure described in Section 3-6 "Completing the setup" on page 3-18.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15 Recording important settings and parameters
NOTICE An error or power loss may occur during the software loading.
Always keep a paper record of the settings for the LOGIQ E9. Verify that it is current before starting a
software load!
4-2-15-1 Overview
See the following pages to record data.
NOTE: Some screens vary from different versions of software.
These subsections include descriptions for recording/setting up data for the following screens.
With the system Powered On, follow the procedures below to document basic system information and
back up Presets, and if required, Patient Archive and Patient Images prior to software load.
Utility -> Connectivity

- TCP/IP see:( 4-2-15-2 "Connectivity Recording the TCP/IP settings" on page 4-21)
- Device (see: 4-2-15-4 "Connectivity Recording the AE Title and Port settings" on page 4-
23)
- Misc (see: 4-2-15-8 "Connectivity Recording Miscellaneous settings" on page 4-27)
Utility -> Admin

- System Admin (see: 4-2-15-9 "Admin Recording the Software Option Keys" on page 4-29
These subsections include descriptions for recording/setting up data for the following screens.
Hardcopy forms are provided here for convenience, but content will be included if selected during
Backup process. Backing up this information is only required if an upgrade specifies the information be
backed up or as an extra precaution against loss due to a corrupt back-up disk.
Utility -> Connectivity

- Device (see: 4-2-15-5 "Connectivity Recording Device Destination settings" on page 4-24).
- Service (see: 4-2-15-5 "Connectivity Recording Device Destination settings" on page 4-
24).
- Dataflow (see: 4-2-15-6 "Connectivity Recording Dataflow settings" on page 4-25).
- Buttons (see: 4-2-15-7 "Connectivity Recording the Print Key Assignments" on page 4-26).
- Removable Media (see: 4-2-15-6 "Connectivity Recording Dataflow settings" on page 4-
25).
Utility -> Admin

- Users (see: 4-2-15-10 "Admin Users" on page 4-30)
Utility -> System

- Backup/Restore (see: 4-2-15-11 "System Data Store Management" on page 4-31).
- Peripherals (see: 4-2-15-12 "System Recording Peripheral settings" on page 4-32).
- About (see: 4-2-15-13 "System Recording software and hardware versions" on page 4-33).
- General, Record Region, Language and Regional Options. Refer to the appropriate version
of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and
Release Notes per LOGIQ E9 console" on page 1-22.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-2 Connectivity Recording the TCP/IP settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP.
Figure 4-15 TCP/IP settings
2.) Record all settings in Table 4-3 "Record settings from TCP/IP screen" on page 4-21.
Table 4-3 Record settings from TCP/IP screen
PARAMETER VALUE
COMPUTER NAME
IP SETTINGS
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
DEFAULT GATEWAY
NETWORK SPEED

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-3 Connectivity WLAN

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> WLAN.
Figure 4-16 WLAN settings
2.) Record all settings in Table 4-4 "Record settings from WLAN screen" on page 4-22.
Table 4-4 Record settings from WLAN screen
PARAMETER VALUE
NETWORK NAME (SSID)
NETWORK AUTHENTICATION
DATA ENCRYPTION
NETWORK KEY
KEY INDEX
Specify Yes/No to The Key is

Provided Automatically
IEEE 802.1x AUTHENTICATION

INFORMATION
EAP TYPE

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-4 Connectivity Recording the AE Title and Port settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> Device.
2.) Select My Computer in the List of Devices, if not already selected.
Figure 4-17 Device settings
3.) Record all settings in Table 4-5 "Record settings for My Computer from Device screen" on page 4-
23.
Table 4-5 Record settings for My Computer from Device screen
PARAMETER VALUE
AE TITLE
PORT NO
MAC ADDRESS
NOTE: This information may be
located in the TCP/IP page in some
versions of software.
4.) Record all settings in Table 4-6 "Record settings for each device listed in Device table" on page 4-23.
Table 4-6 Record settings for each device listed in Device table
NAME IP ADDRESS

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-5 Connectivity Recording Device Destination settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> Service.
Figure 4-18 Service settings
2.) Record all settings in Table 4-7 "Record settings from Service screen" on page 4-24 for each
Destination Device and Service.
Table 4-7 Record settings from Service screen
DESTINATION DEVICE PROPERTIES

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-6 Connectivity Recording Dataflow settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> Dataflow.
Figure 4-19 Dataflow settings
2.) Record all settings in Table 4-8 "Record settings from Service screen" on page 4-25.
Table 4-8 Record settings from Service screen
DESTINATION DEVICE SERVICES (TYPES) FOR EACH

NAME DESTINATION DEVICE PROPERTIES NAME

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-7 Connectivity Recording the Print Key Assignments

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> Buttons.
Figure 4-20 Button settings
2.) Record all settings in Table 4-9 "Record settings from Button screen" on page 4-26.
Table 4-9 Record settings from Button screen
IMAGE COMPRESSION
PARAMETER FORMAT FRAMES COMPRESSION QUALITY PRINTFLOW VIEW
PRINT1
PRINT2
PRINT3
PRINT4
PRINTSCREEN

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-8 Connectivity Recording Miscellaneous settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> Miscellaneous.
Figure 4-21 Miscellaneous settings
2.) Record all settings in Table 4-10 "Record settings from Miscellaneous screen" on page 4-28.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-8 Connectivity Recording Miscellaneous settings (contd)
Table 4-10 Record settings from Miscellaneous screen
Patient/Exam Menu Options Setting Print and Store Options Setting

Use birthdate P[1-4] Key Sound
Auto search for patient Store Dual as DICOM Only
Automatic generation of patient ID Dual When Color Support is Mixed
After [End Current Patient], go to: Store Multiframe for Sec Capture Loops
Keep Search String Enable Smart Capture Area
Worklist Auto Query Store 2D (B-Mode) Loop with Timeline Data
Show BBT Patient List Print - Font Size
Double-click on patient list to start: DICOM Multi-frame image resolution
Detail Mode Show progress bar while storing image

Export to USB HDD: Create DICOMDIR Image Order Scheme
Automatic Disable Patient Data Columns in examination listing

Remember cursor position on Transfer Screen Enable Other ID
Patient/Exam Message Option Validation Format
Request acknowledge of End Exam action
Warn image store without patient
Warn register to No Archive
Warn image store to Read Only dataflow
Warn video titles exist in the internal storage
Columns in examination listing

Date | Category | Exam Description | Img. size | M&A | Disk

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-9 Admin Recording the Software Option Keys

Figure 4-22 System Admin settings
2.) Record the S/W Option Key(s) - alphanumeric string(s) - from the Installed Option Keys field in Table
4-11 "Software Option Keys" on page 4-29.
WARNING Make sure that the Software Option Keys (alphanumeric passwords) have been
recorded correctly. If the key is incorrect, you will not be able to log on after the SW
installation has been completed. The password is case sensitive. Hyphens must also
be recorded. There may be more than one password.
Table 4-11 Software Option Keys
SW OPTION KEYS

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-10 Admin Users

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Admin -> USERS.
Figure 4-23 Users settings
2.) Record all settings in Table 4-12 "Record settings from Users screen" on page 4-30.
Table 4-12 Record settings from Users screen
GROUP
USER ID PREFIX LAST NAME FIRST NAME MEMBERSHIP OP RIGHTS

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-11 System Data Store Management

1.) Select Utility -> System -> Backup/Restore.
Figure 4-24 Backup/Restore settings
2.) Record all settings in Table 4-13 "Record settings from Backup/Restore screen" on page 4-31.
Table 4-13 Record settings from Backup/Restore screen
MOVE FILES OLDER REMINDER DIALOG

THAN IN (DAYS) INTERVAL DAYS MEDIA CAPACITY
EZMove
EZBackup

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-12 System Recording Peripheral settings

1.) Select Utility -> System -> Peripherals.
Figure 4-25 Peripherals settings
2.) Record Video Settings Format, DVR model, and Network printer model in Table 4-14 "Record
settings from Peripheral screen" on page 4-32.
Table 4-14 Record settings from Peripheral screen
PARAMETER VALUE
VIDEO SETTINGS FORMAT

___PAL ___NTSC
DVR PICTURE QUALITY
MIC LEVEL
STANDARD PRINTER
DEFAULT PRINTER
SETUP
ERASE VIDEO DATA AFTER BURNING IS

COMPLETE. (not pictured)
PARAMETERS

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-2-15-13 System Recording software and hardware versions

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> System -> About.
Figure 4-26 Hardware/Software information
2.) Record software and hardware versions in Table 4-15 "Record Software and Hardware versions"
on page 4-33.
Table 4-15 Record Software and Hardware versions
DESCRIPTION RECORD VERSIONS
APPLICATION SW VERSION
APPLICATION SW PART NUMBER
SYSTEM SW VERSION (IMAGE REV)
SYSTEM SW (IMAGE) PART NUMBER

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 4-3
Functional checks
4-3-1 Overview
After setting up the system, performing an upgrade, or replacing hardware, perform all appropriate
functional tests before returning a system to the customer. Include the functional test information in the
service dispatch.
For a Service call with FRU replacement:
perform the functional tests and include the debrief script found at the end of the respective
replacement procedure in Chapter 8.
For a Service call with no FRU replacement:
perform the following basic functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided
below.
NOTE: Closure of dispatch assumes site is operational.
Table 4-16 General System Function Check
See
Section Functional Test Debrief Script
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction

5180483-100, Rev Rev. 7. Equipment passed all
4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks required tests and is ready for use.
4-3-19 Mechanical Function Checks
4-3-11 Basic Measurements
4-3-19-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks
4 - 34 Section 4-3 - Functional checks

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-2 Contents in this Section

4-3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-3-2 Contents in this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-3-3 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-3-4 Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-3-5 Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-3-7 M-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4-3-9 Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4-3-10 Contrast checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4-3-11 Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4-3-12 Multi Image Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4-3-13 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4-3-15 ECG Checks R2.x.x or later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-3-15 ECG Checks R2.x.x or later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-3-16 Peripherals Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-3-17 Cineloop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-3-18 Back End Processor checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4-3-19 Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4-3-3 Preparation
Turn on power to LOGIQ E9. For detailed description, see: 4-2-3 "Power ON/Boot Up" on page 4-3.
4-3-4 Basic Controls
4-3-4-1 Trackball Area

Different functions can be assigned to the trackball depending of the current active mode. The Trackball
area consist of:
The Trackball: used as a cursor control in acquisition mode, scrolling control in freeze and as a
selection tool (like a mouse cursor) in post-processing mode.
Three SELECT keys (identical): Perform the selected control or highlighted menu item.
The TRACKBALL key: Toggles between the available trackball function assignments displayed in
the Status bar.
The update menu key: enables quick access to image related functions from a pop-up menu.
4-3-4-2 Other Controls

Other controls are located on separate keys (knobs and buttons) or groups of keys on the Operator
Panel.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-5 Performance Tests
4-3-5-1 Recommended Test Phantoms (optional)

GE recommends the RMI 430GS phantom (optional), but it is not required. It is the most current
phantom (optional) recommended to our field service personnel and provides the necessary targets and
extended life necessary for consistent system testing.
Figure 4-27 Performance tests
Lateral Distance
Measurement
Penetration
2
4
Axial Distance
Contrast Measurement
Resolution
& 6
Gray Scale
Photography 4 3 2 1
8 Functional
Resolution
10
Lateral
Resolution 12
14
Axial 16
Resolution
RMI 403GS

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

For information on the systems different modes as well as expected results, refer to the appropriate
version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5, or the appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes.
4-3-6-1 Introduction
The B-mode is the systems default mode.
Figure 4-28 B-mode Screen Example
Depending on probe availability, choose the preset application shown below. The LOGIQ E9 probes are
ONLY approved for use for the applications listed in the table below.
For R4.x.x or later, IQC preset for Service is available.
Image Quality Check (IQC) is intended to facilitate Image Quality checks during Quality Assurance
Evaluations. Quality Assurance tests are used to determine whether a scanner is providing the same
level of performance year after year.
By using the same settings year after year, this ensures that the data collection is consistent,
independently of who performs the test.
This preset only includes fundamental settings for B-Mode.
Processing modes like SRI, Harmonics, etc., are turned off.
To do an Image Quality Check (IQC):
1.) Activate IQC via Utility -> Imaging Preset Manager -> Category (select the Category first).
2.) Click on the plus sign in front of IQC for Service.
3.) Assign IQC to a Touch Panel key by using the right arrow key.
4.) Map the IQC to the location you want it to appear on the Touch Panel.
5.) Select Model -> IQC.
4-3-6-2 Probe Indications for Use

See On-line Help or refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 17.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-6-3 Preparations
You may use a phantom (optional) when doing these tests.
1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanners active probe connector.
- see: Section 3-6-7 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-22 for info about connecting the probes.
- For available probes, see: Section 9-18 "Probes" on page 9-112.
2.) Turn ON the scanner.
The B-Mode window is displayed (default mode).
3.) If needed, adjust the Displays Brightness and Contrast setting (see: Section 6-3 "Monitor
adjustments" on page 6-2).
WARNING ALWAYS USE THE MINIMUM POWER REQUIRED TO OBTAIN ACCEPTABLE IMAGES
IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE GUIDELINES AND POLICIES.
1.) Press B-MODE on the Operator Panel to access B-Mode.
2.) These Image Controls are used to optimize the B-Mode picture:
- Use Gain and TGC controls to optimize the overall image together with the Power control.
- Use Depth to adjust the range to be imaged.
- Use Focus to center the focal point(s) around the region of interest.
- Use Frequency (move to higher frequencies) or Frame rate (move to lower frame rate) to
increase resolution in image.
- Use Frequency (move to lower frequency) to increase penetration.
- Use the control to optimize imaging in the blood flow regions and make a cleaner, less noisy
image.
- Use Reject controls to reduce noise in the image.
4-3-6-4 Checks
Check Width, Focus, Framerate, Frequency
The results of these adjustments must be verified on the B-Mode sector on the screen.
Check Up/Down, Left/Right, B Color Maps and Cineloop

The results of these adjustments must be verified on the B-Mode sector on the screen.
Check Gain, TGC and Depth

Check B-Mode Soft Menu Controls
Check Compress, Contour, Reject and Tilt
Check Power and Dynamic Range

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-7 M-Mode Checks

For information on the systems different modes as well as expected results, the Basic User Manual or
User Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.
Table 4-17 B/M-Mode Functions
Control Description
Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 10% increments between 0-100%. Values
Power Output (Acoustic Power)
greater than 0.1 are displayed
Dynamic Range Controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast.
Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam for a
Focus Number and Position
specific area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of the image.
Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before
Rejection
it will be processed).
Frame Average Temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image.
Colorize Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect a Gray Map.
Gray Map Determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.
Rotation (Up/Down) Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop up menu.
Frequency Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to probe's next lower frequency or shift up to a higher frequency.
Frame Rate/Resolution Optimizes B-Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible image.
Sweep Speed Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept.
- For available probes, see: On-line Help or refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9
Basic User Manual, Chapter 17. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per
4-3-7-2 Checks
Check Horizontal Sweep, Frequency, and Focus
Check Compress, Reject, Power and Dynamic Range

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks
For information on the systems different modes as well as expected results, the Basic User Manual or
User Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.
For complete information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual,
Chapter 5, or the appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and
4-3-8-3 Color Mode Checks

Color Flow screens are B or M-Mode screens with colors representing blood or tissue movement. Color
Flow may be selected both from B-Mode, or from M mode, or a combination of these.
For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5, or the
appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes.
4-3-8-4 Color B-Mode

4-3-8-5 Color M-Mode

Check Horizontal Sweep, PRF, Baseline, and Invert

Check Variance, Color Maps and Cineloop
Check Sample Volume
Check Frequency and Acoustic Power
Adjust OIR

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-8-6 PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks

For information on the systems different modes, the Basic User Manual or User Guide will familiarize
you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.
Doppler is used to measure velocity (most often in blood). Doppler mode can be done with a special
pencil probe or with an ordinary probe. By using an ordinary probe, you can first bring up a B-Mode
picture for navigation purpose and then add Doppler.
1.) Connect one of the probes to the scanner.
- See: Section 3-6-7 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-22 for info about connecting the probes.
2.) Turn ON the scanner
The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode).
3.) If needed, adjust the Displays Brightness and Contrast setting.

4.) Press PW or CW to start Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW) or Continuous Wave Doppler (CW).
5.) Use the trackball to select the Area of Interest (Sample Volume) in PW ordirection of interest in CW.
4-3-8-8 Adjust the PW/CW Doppler Mode controls

Adjust the Active mode gain to set the gain in the spectral Doppler area.
Adjust Low velocity reject to reduce unwanted low velocity blood flow and tissue movement.
In PW mode, adjust Sample volume to low setting for better resolution, or higher setting to more
easily locate the disturbed flows.
Adjust the Compress setting to balance the effect of stronger and weaker echoes and obtain the
desired intensity display.
Adjust Frequency to optimize flow display. Higher setting will improve resolution and the lower
setting will increase the depth penetration.
Adjust Frame rate to a higher setting to improve motion detection, or to a lower setting to improve
resolution.
NOTE: Frequency and Frame rate settings may affect the Low Velocity Reject.
Adjust Power to obtain an acceptable image using the lowest setting possible. This is particularly
important in CW mode, as the energy duty cycle is 100% (constant).
NOTE: The Doppler Power setting affects only Doppler operating modes.
Adjust the following settings to further optimize the display of the image.
Use he tHorizontal sweep to optimize the sweep speed.
To view signal detail, adjust Scale to enlarge the vertical spectral Doppler trace.
Use Invert to reverse the vertical component of the spectral Doppler area of the display.
Use Angle correction to steer the ultrasound beam to the blood flow to be measured.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-9 Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks
TVI calculates and color codes the velocities in tissue. The tissue velocity information is acquired by
sampling of tissue Doppler velocity values at discrete points. The information is stored in a combined
format with grey scale imaging during one or several cardiac cycles with high temporal resolution.
1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanners left-most probe connector.
- See: Section 3-6-7 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-22 for info about connecting the probes.
2.) Turn ON the scanner
The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode).
3.) If needed, adjust the Displays Brightness and Contrast setting.

4.) Press TVI.
5.) Use the trackball (assigned function: Pos) to position the ROI frame over the area to be examined.
6.) Press Select. The instruction Size should be highlighted in the trackball status bar.
NOTE: If the trackball control pointer is selected, press trackball key to be able to select between
Position and Size controls.
7.) Use the trackball to adjust the dimension of the ROI.
4-3-9-3 Adjust the TVI Controls

To reduce quantification noise (variance), the Nyquist limit should be as low as possible, without
creating aliasing. To reduce the Nyquist limit: Reduce the Scale value.
NOTE: The Scale value also affects the frame rate. There is a trade off between the frame rate and
quantification noise.
TVI provides velocity information only in the beam direction. The apical view typically provides the
best window since the beams are then approximately aligned to the longitudinal direction of the
myocardium (except near the apex). To obtain radial or circumferential tissue velocities, a
parasternal view must be used. However, from this window the beam cannot be aligned to the
muscle for all the parts of the ventricle.
NOTE: PW will be optimized for Tissue Velocities when activated from inside TVI.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-10 Contrast checks

For a basic functional check of the systems different modes as well as expected results, refer to the
appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5, or the appropriate LOGIQ E9
Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per LOGIQ E9 console" on page
1-22.

NOTE: The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze.
4-3-11-1 Check Distance and Tissue Depth Measurement

1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.
2.) Move the TRACKBALL to position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most anterior
point (tissue depth).
3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
4.) The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
5.) Move the TRACKBALL to position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most
posterior point (tissue depth).
6.) Press Set to complete the measurement.
The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window.
NOTE: Before you complete a measurement:

To toggle between active calipers, press MEASURE.
To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press
CLEAR once.
NOTE: To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn Cursor Select.
NOTE: After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point,
but not data entered onto worksheets, press Clear.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-11-2 Check Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement

1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.
2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper.
3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
4.) The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
5.) Move the Trackball to position the second caliper.
6.) Turn the Ellipse control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears.
NOTE: Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern.
7.) Move the Trackball to position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (the calipers).
8.) To increase the size, turn the Ellipse control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size, turn the
Ellipse control in a counterclockwise direction.
9.) To toggle between active calipers, press Measure.
10.)Press Set to complete the measurement.
11.)The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window.
NOTE: Before you complete a measurement:

To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press Clear once. The original caliper is
displayed to restart the measurement.
To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press Clear again.
4-3-11-3 Worksheets
Measurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations.
There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. The worksheets are selected
from the Measurement Touch Panel.
4-3-11-4 Report Pages

Measurements/Calculations that are included on the worksheet can also be displayed on Report Pages.
Report Pages can be customized to meet the appropriate needs of the user.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-12 Multi Image Checks

For information on the systems different modes as well as expected results, refer to the appropriate
version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5, or the appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes.
4-3-13 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images

appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per

PROPRIETARY TO GE

NOTE: Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is ON or OFF.
4-3-14-1 To Connect a Probe

1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case.
2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable.
3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable
damage.
4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise.
5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector.
7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not
resting on the floor.
CAUTION TAKE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS WITH THE PROBE CABLES:

- KEEP AWAY FROM THE WHEELS
- DO NOT BEND
- DO NOT CROSS CABLES BETWEEN PROBES
Table 4-18 Probe and Connectors Checks
Step Task Expected Result(s)

1. The probe activates in the currently-selected
Select the appropriate connected probe
operating mode. The probe's default settings
from the probe indicators on the Touch
for the mode and selected exam are used
Panel.
automatically.
2. Launch the application.
To change application without changing the The selected application starts.
current probe, press THE DESIRED MODE
on the Operator Panel.
3. Verify no missing channels All channels is functioning.
4. Verify there's no EMI/RFI or artifacts specific
No EMI/RFI or artifacts.
to the probe.
5. Test the probe in each active connector slot.,
see:
It will display pictorial data each time
Section 3-6-7 "Connecting Probes" on page
3-22.
6. Do a leakage test on the probe, see: Section
It passes the test.
10-7 "Electrical Safety Tests" on page 10-12.
7. Repeat this procedure for all available
probes.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-15 ECG Checks R2.x.x or later
The ECG capability on this unit, is intended as use as a trigger for measurements, but can also be
viewed on the screen.
4-3-15-2 Parts needed

ECG Harness, P/N:16L0026 + P/N:16L0028
ECG Pads, (3 pc)
or
ECG simulator
None
4-3-15-4 ECG Checks

Select Preset, Select Cardiac, Select Scan.
If you do not see: the ECG line, select the ECG tab, you should see selection on touch screen for
DISPLAY ECG, select and press. You should then see the line.
Plug in the ECG cables with nothing attached, so you pick up noise, the line should display noise.
Table 4-19 ECG Checks
Step Task Expected Result(s)

1. The unit displays a straight curve along the
Connect the ECG harness to the connector
bottom edge of the image sector on the
on the front of the system
screen.
2. Connect the three leads to a ECG simulator,
When connecting, the signal on the screen
or
will be noisy
Fasten the three ECG Pads to your body
When the connection is completed, a typical
and connect the three leads to respective
clean ECG signal is displayed.
ECG Pad

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-16 Peripherals Checks

See: Table 3-6 "Peripheral Checks" on page 3-36.
4-3-17 Cineloop Check

Chapter 5, or the appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and
4-3-17-1 To Activate CINE

1.) Press Freeze, then roll the Trackball to activate CINE.
2.) To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop.
4-3-17-2 To Omit Images

1.) Roll the Trackball to the frame you want to delete and press Omit Image.
4-3-17-3 To Restore Images

1.) To undo deleting an image from the CINE Loop, press Restore Image.
4-3-17-4 To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame

1.) Press First to move to the first CINE frame.
2.) Press Last to move to the last CINE frame.
4-3-17-5 To Start Frame/End Frame

1.) Turn the Start Frame dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial
to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop.
2.) Turn the End Frame dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the
left to move backward through the CINE Loop.
4-3-17-6 To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed

1.) Turn the Loop Speed dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed.
4-3-17-7 To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame

1.) Turn Frame by Frame to move through CINE memory one frame at a time.
4-3-17-8 Checks
Check Left Marker, Right Marker, Cycle Select and Number of Cycles
Check First, Last Cycle, Select all
Adjust Scroll and Cine Speed

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-18 Back End Processor checks

If all the previous tests have been passed successfully, the Back End Processor is most likely OK.
See: Service Platform.
If the system seems to be operating erratically, refer to: "Diagnostics/Troubleshooting" on page 7-1.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-19-1 Alphanumeric Keyboard and Display Platform (Console) Checks

See: 7-5-16-1 "Keyboard" on page 7-126.

Check that the brakes and direction locks function as described below.
Table 4-20 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

1. Press the left pedal (1), this:
Releases the brake and engages the locked

wheel direction.
You may need to move he t system around a little

to get the wheels to lock into the locked direction.
2. Press the right pedal (2) this:
Engages the brakes in full lock.
3. Press the middle pedal (3), this:
Engages swivel lock.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-19-3 Operator I/O Movement - LCD

Check that the monitor functions as described below
Table 4-21 19 LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks
Step Task Note(s)
1. Use both hands, one at the top of the LCD and one at the bottom, to
Tilt Forward/Back
rotate the screen forward and back.
2. Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the LCD and one
Move Left/Right
at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the screen left and right.
See: 4-2-6 "LCD Monitor Positions and Lock" on page 4-11.
4-3-19-4 Operator Console Movement (XY)

See: 4-2-5 "Top Console position adjustment" on page 4-10.
4-3-19-5 Footswitch
1.) Plug in the footswitch.
2.) Select Utility -> Application.
You should see the footswitch programming options for Left Middle Right switches.
3.) Program them all for Freeze.

4.) Then Scan and use each pedal to freeze and unfreeze to be sure each works.
Figure 4-29 Footswitch Function Checks
4-3-19-6 WLAN
R2.x.x or R3.x.x, see: 8-6-8-3 "WLAN - Set up and Check" on page 8-178.
R4.x.x or later, see: 8-11-23-3 "WLAN Set-up" on page 8-548.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4-3-19-7 Software DVR (Option) Configuration Functional Checks
NOTE: These functional checks are only applicable if the Software DVR Option has been installed.
Table 4-22 Software DVR Configuration Functional Checks
STEPS
Power up the LOGIQ E9.

NOTE: When the USB Microphone is powered, a red LED indicator will be ON,
indicating the USB Microphone has power. This does not indicate any warning.
Inserted the media (DVD or USB), otherwise the DVR controls (Video Buttons)
WILL NOT be available.
Follow Chapter 15 of the Basic User Manual for instructions on Media
requirements, how to set up and use. To identify the appropriate version of the
LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual or Release Notes, see: Table 1-8 "Basic User
Manual and Release Notes per LOGIQ E9 console" on page 1-22.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 4-4
Application Turnover Check List
Complete these checks before returning the scanner to customer for use:
4-4-1 Software Configuration Checks
Table 4-23 Software Configuration Checks
STEP TASK CHECK ( )
1. Check Date and Time setting
2. Check that Location (Hospital Name &

Department) is correct
3. Check Language settings
4. P1 P2 P3 P4
Check assignment of Printer Keys
5. Check that all of the customers options are

correctly installed
Section 4-5
Power supply test and adjustments
4-5-1 Power Supply Test Procedure
Run the System Voltage test. Refer to 7-5-12-4 "System" on page 7-69.
4-5-2 Power Supply Adjustment

There are no adjustments on the power supplies. The DC Power is self-regulated. If a voltage is outside
the specified range, it means that something is wrong, either with the power supply itself or with a unit
connected to that specific power outlet.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 4-6
3D/4D and Volume Navigation Functional Check
Chapters 5 and 6, or theappropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and
Refer to 6-10-5 "Setup" on page 6-44 and 6-10-6 "Measure Initial Accuracy" on page 6-45.
Section 4-7
SWAVE (Shear Wave Shear Elasto) Functional Check
If the Capacitor Pack is not present or the Power Supply to Capacitor Pack Cable is not connected, or
connected properly, the option to select the Shear Elasto soft button after pressing the Elasto button,
the Touch Panel key Shear Elasto/strain Elasto button WILL NOT be present.
Select a probe (9L D and C1-6D).

Select ELASTO button.
In the Touch Panel, select Shear Wave button if not already selected.
Verify that the Shear Wave button is available.
4 - 54 Section 4-6 - 3D/4D and Volume Navigation Functional Check

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 4-8
Site Log
Table 4-24 Site Log
DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 4-24 Site Log (Continued)
4 - 56 Section 4-8 - Site Log

PROPRIETARY TO GE

PROPRIETARY TO GE

PROPRIETARY TO GE

PROPRIETARY TO GE

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Chapter 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Section 5-1
Overview
This chapter explains LOGIQ E9s ultrasound system concepts, component arrangement, and
subsystem functions. It also describes the Power Distribution System. Refer to the Basic User Manual
for more information.

5-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 LOGIQ E9 models and hardware/software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-3 LOGIQ E9 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-4 Software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-5 Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-6 Main Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5-7 Air Flow control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5-8 Casters and Brakes description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5-9 Card Rack description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5-10 Transmit and Receive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5-11 Back End Processor (BEP) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
5-12 Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175
5-13 Power Loss description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-192
5-14 Cables for LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-192
5-15 Probes description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-192
5-16 Product manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-193
5-17 VPD Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-194
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-2
LOGIQ E9 models and hardware/software compatibility

CONSOLE
NUMBER
Phase 1 BT2010 BT2011 R4 R5 R6
LOGIQ E9,
5205000 Y U U U U N
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-2 Y U U U U N
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-3 N Y U U U N
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-4 N Y U U U N
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-5 N N Y U U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-6 N N Y U U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-7 N N N Y U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-8 N N N N Y U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-9 N N N N N Y
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations Key
Table 5-2

Y Original
U Upgrade available
N Not supported
Front End Processor - see: 9-12-2 "Front End Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-67
Back End Processor - see: 9-13-1 "Back End Boards Compatible Configurations" on page 9-79
5-2 Section 5-2 - LOGIQ E9 models and hardware/software compatibility

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-3
LOGIQ E9 description
The purpose of this section is to give you an overview of LOGIQ E9 and how it functions.

5-1-1 Purpose of this chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-3-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-3-4 LOGIQ E9 general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-3-5 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - R3.x and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-3-6 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - BEP6.x - R4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-3-7 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - BEP6.1 - R5.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-3-8 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - BEP6.2 - R6.x and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-3-9 Signal flow overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-3-10 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-3-11 The electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-3-12 LOGIQ E9s Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-3-3 Introduction
The LOGIQ E9 ultrasound system is a high performance digital ultrasound imaging system with total
data management.
The LOGIQ E9 provides image generation in B-Mode, Color Doppler, Power Doppler, M-Mode, PW, 4D,
Harmonic Imaging, and Contrast imaging applications. The fully digital architecture of the LOGIQ E9
ultrasound system allows optimal usage of all scanning modes and probe types throughout the full
spectrum of operating frequencies.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-4 LOGIQ E9 general description

LOGIQ E9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the
Front End Electronics, then to the Back End Processor, and finally, the results are displayed on the
monitor
System configuration is stored on the hard drive, inside the Back End Processor (BEP), and all
necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.
5-3-5 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - R3.x and earlier

GFI Configuration
Overall block diagram includes the following sections:
Main Power Supply

Front End Card Rack, with:
- GRLY(1) - Global Relay Board
- GRX (2) - Receiver Boards (GRX64 & GRX128)
- CW (0) - Note: supported on R2.x.x and later.
- GTX (3) - Transmitter Boards (64 channels each, in this configuration). Note: some
illustrations show that there are four boards; this is for illustration purposes only.
- DRX (3) - Digital Receiver Boards (64 channels each, in this configuration). Note: some
illustrations show that there are four boards; this is for illustration purposes only.
- GFI (1) -
Back End Processor (BEP), with:
- BEP Power Supply
- I/O Board
- HDD -- 160GB Hard Drive
- ADD Video Card for DVI
- DVR Card (Optional)
- Front Panel LEDs, etc.
Volume Navigation (V Nav) Bay of Birds Assembly
CD/DVD
Operator Console Assembly, with:
- LCD Monitor
- Upper Operator Panel Assembly
- Lower Operator Panel Assembly
- Bulkhead
- Gel Warmer (Optional) which can be placed on the left or right-hand side of the console
- TV Probe Holder (Optional) which can be placed on the left or right-hand side of the console
XYZ Controller Assembly
Z-Axis Motor Assembly
5-4 Section 5-3 - LOGIQ E9 description

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-5 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - R3.x and earlier (contd)

CW is supported for R2.x.x or later. The CW circuitry is found on the CW version of the GRX128 board.
Figure 5-1 LOGIQ E9 Block diagram - GFI configuration (BEP5.x)
X-Y FROG
LOCK BRAKES
MOTOR
T INNER
LEFT BRAKE
OUTER
LEFT BRAKE
B
C
D2 D1
D4
W MAIN LCD DISPLAY

W
+12V
D3 HV INV
5V
Z MOTOR C VIDEO FLAT

B INNER OUTER
CNTL SCREEN
RIGHT BRAKE RIGHT BRAKE
E 5V USB/
MIC
AUDIO
USB USB
HUB
A 48V WLAN R2.x.x and R3.x.x
MAIN POWER SUPPLY CARD RACK Option
F G REG
12V
5V
POWER
XYZ CONTROLLER
SPARE or not POPULATED

FACTOR
CORRECTION
CONTROLLER BOARD J15
RX-64 or RX-128
TO J24 MEMORY STICK
J
SPARE or GTX
PRINTERS ISOLATION
AND
GEL WARMER 5V FROM J21 MICROPHONE
RELAY
J25
DRX
DRX
BULKHEAD
GTX
DRX
GTX
RX-128
120VAC
GTX
DC HEAD
GFI
48V BOARD R
H INVERTER 5V FROM J22 5V J19
TRACKBALL
TEMP J21
P1 P7
L CONTROL P5
J22 USB
USB
USB
CONTROL P2 HUB
J18
USB P8 J23
USB KEYBOARD
AUDIO
S P3 48V
12V 5V 3.3V
3.3V +12V
DC +5V
VOLTAGES P4 +48V
DC-DC +5V BSCAN P6 J1
CONVERTERS (X2 = P4 on MPS) REG uP
GFI AUDIO
BACKPLANE
A
I2C ON/ 5V
BB PULSER VPD L OFF TOUCH +12V
I VOLTAGES CW PROBE
HV INV
4D MOTOR USB/ 10.4"
(X1 = P3 on MPS)
CNTRL 4D MOTOR DRIVE CONNECTION VIDEO LCD SWITCH
H-BRIDGE (R2.x.x OPTION) BOARD
K BULKHEAD UP/DN/LOCK
PLATE BUTTONS
SATA PWR
DVD ADAPT PWA
DVD 1
OP PANEL
U
SATA
M
Y
POWER
MAIN CABLE
BAYBIRD
USB (VGU DVI VIDEO
OPTION) 48V POWER/AUDIO
Z USB FOR OP PANEL
USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL
UP/DN/BRAKE/RELEASE SWITCHES
J1 BEP EXTERNAL CABLES AND HARNESSES:

J5 J4 J3 J2
ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
5 1 48V, 5Vstby
A 5148381-X MAIN POWER CORD (X DEPENDS ON COUNTRY)
48V,+12V
PS_ON#
48V_OK
B GA200335 FROG BRAKE CONTROL (2 used)
6 +5V,+5Vstby DC-DC AC_FAIL# C GA200334 FROG BRAKE ARM (2 used)
CONVERTERS
4
PS_ON#, PWROK
& SEQUENCE
LOGIC BEP PWR D 5272357-2 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY
+12V, -12V + 5V
3.3V, 5Vstby SUPPLY FRONT D1 5269862 MAIN CABLE POWER/AUDIO
PANEL
D2 5262473-2 MAIN CABLE VIDEO
MODULE
3 D3 5265371 MAIN CABLE XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS
REAR D4 5248609 MAIN CABLE USB (2 used)
12
PANEL
J46 E 5196889 VIDEO (HDMI) CABLE - LCD
F 5196890 POWER/USB CABLE - LCD
IF NO
10/100bT
J44 10 DVR 11 G 5248610 USB OP PANEL TO BULKHEAD (2 used)
DVI-I OUT
H 5194492 USB CABLE - MAIN POWER SUPPLY
AUDIO R
J42 I 5194495 POWER CABLE BEP 48V
AUDIO L J43 J 5152290 PCI EXPRESS CABLE
J40
K 5266407 POWER CABLE DVD
EXT USB 1
PATIENT I/O L 5194492-6 USB CABLE - XYZ CONTROLLER
DVI-A
J41
(BT2010 or later M 5270048 SATA CABLE DVD
16X PCI EXPRESS
EXT USB 2
PCI
PCI EXPRESS
PCI
CN1 CN4
OPTION)
DVI-D J20 CN21
DVI-I OUT
DVI-I IN
AUDIO IN
ATX2 USB 1,2,3,4

ANALOG VIDEO
MOTHERBOARD
N 5194491 BEP TO CARD RACK BACKPLANE CABLE

1000MbT
TX MAIN
SPARE PCI EXPRESS x4
10/100/
DVI-D POWER + LEDS

RX
A P 5194498 AUDIO CABLE - SUBWOOFER

DVI-D
J21 TX
Q 5194492-2 USB CABLE BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
(OPTIONAL)
R 5194493 POWER CABLE BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)

VIDEO CARD
+5stby
DVR
SPARE PCI
J22
48V
GFI SATA3 S GA200536 CW CONNECTOR FLEX CIRCUIT (USED ONLY IF CW INSTALLED)
DIGITAL
AUDIOJ36
+12V
LR
AUDIO 8 T 5310448 XY LOCK
OUT +5V
SATA2 U 5198990 UP/DOWN/LOCK BUTTONS
HOST
+5V
DVD
AUDIO
+12V
J29 AMP IF NO W 5196892 SAFETY GROUND WIRE LCD ARM (2 used)
N DVR
POWER
Y 5244550 POWER BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
BSCAN
ON/OFF SW, SATA1

I2C
J30
PWR LED
J31
USB 6 2 Z 5194492-3 USB CABLE BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
SATA0
USB 5 J35 AA 5245462 GEL WARMER POWER
J32
USB BB 5194492-4 USB CABLE 4D CONTROLLER
CN5
USB 8 J3
J100
USB
7
USB7
5,6,7,8
J7
PCI
EXPRESS x1
BEP ASSEMBLY CABLES AND HARNESSES:
USB HUB 1
J28 USB Micro CN18 ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

Controller
1 5165844-2 BEP POWER HARNESS
USB HUB 2
J27 (IO Ports & AUDIO IN

BW Q OPTION
VPD) L,R,CENTER AUDIO OUT,
2 5193725-2 MOTHERBOARD HARNESS
USB HUB 3
KEY * ON/OFF SW,

PRINTER J26 J12
PWR LED uBTX 3 5193726 FRONT PANEL HARNESS
(OPTIONAL) J25 J14 12V
MOTHERBOARD
+12V ATX1
POWER 4 5152291 PCI EXPRESS BULKHEAD
USB
TO MAIN
J33
AUDIO
CENTER AUDIO OUT 5 5195600 SATA BULKHEAD J3
PWR PWR P AMP 6 5183810 SATA BULKHEAD J2
J34
SUPPLY +5V +12V 48V +5stby
SATA SATA PWR
7 5183841 SATA HARD DRIVE

R HARD
REG +3.3V DRIVE
8 5183841-2 SATA DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
+12V
+5V 9 5266922 POWER HARD DRIVE
I/O BOARD 20A
10 5169280 DVI FLEX MAIN ICHIRO
48V OUT 11 5197215 DVI FLEX DVR JUMPER ICHIRO (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
* On systems running R2.03 DC-DC
CONVERT
ER
+
12V
- 9 12 5194363 NETWORK PATCH CABLE CAT6
or earlier, Option Key was 48V IN
CONTROL
BATTERY
installed into J25 and these V SENSE

EPS
BOARD -
12V
+
BATTERY
systems have no cable L.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

MRX
Overall block diagram includes the following sections:
Main Power Supply

Front End Card Rack, with:
- GRLY(1) - Global Relay Board
- MRX (1) - Receiver Board with and without CW
- GTX (3) - Transmitter Boards (64 channels each, in this configuration). Note: some
illustrations show that there are four boards; this is for illustration purposes only. Back End
Processor (BEP), with:
Back End Processor (BEP), with:
- BEP Power Supply
- I/O Board
- HDD -- 160GB Hard Drive
- ADD Video Card for DVI
- DVR Card (Optional, not supported on R6 or later)
- Front Panel LEDs, etc.
Volume Navigation (V Nav) Bay of Birds Assembly
CD/DVD
Operator Console Assembly, with:
- LCD Monitor
- Upper Operator Panel Assembly
- Lower Operator Panel Assembly
- Bulkhead
- Gel Warmer (Optional) which can be placed on the left or right-hand side of the console
- TV Probe Holder (Optional) which can be placed on the left or right-hand side of the console
XYZ Controller Assembly
Z-Axis Motor Assembly
Table 5-3 New Card Rack configuration for MRX
New Part Replaces Comments

MRX
See: Figure 5-47 "MRX
Board and LEDS on MRX DRXs
MRX Board combines the functionality of the Digital Receiver Boards (DRXs),
Board" on page 5-68 and GRXs
Analog Receiver Boards (GRXs) and the Global Front End Interface (GFI)
Figure 5-50 "Power GFI
Distribution (PD) Panel and
LEDs - MRX" on page 5-70
Power Distribution (PD)

See: "USB Ports on the
LOGIQ E9 - R3.x and earlier" Function of power
on page 5-160 or Figure 5- distribution previously Power Distribution Board replaces all power supplies previously present in DRX
and GRX Boards, plus the Monitoring circuitry for the Card Rack Fan control.
143 "USB Architecture of a supplied from DRX Boards.
GFI configuration - R3.x and
earlier" on page 5-162
Backplane Backplane Change for MRX compatibility
Front Plane Front Plane Change for MRX compatibility

PROPRIETARY TO GE

CW is supported for R3.x.x and later. The CW circuitry is found on the MRX Board.
NOTE: Figure 5-9 "LOGIQ E9 Signal Flow - MRX" on page 5-14 is identified in color to simplify the
differences between R2.x.x and earlier (or GFI configuration) and R3.x.x and later (MRX). Red
represents GFI configuration and blue represents MRX. The Card Rack only shows MRX.
Figure 5-2 LOGIQ E9 Block diagram - MRX (BEP5.x)
X-Y FROG
LOCK BRAKES
MOTOR
T INNER
LEFT BRAKE
OUTER
LEFT BRAKE
B
C
D2 D1
D4
W MAIN LCD DISPLAY

W
+12V
D3 HV INV
5V
Z MOTOR C VIDEO FLAT

B INNER OUTER
CNTL SCREEN
E 5V USB/
MIC
AUDIO
USB USB
HUB R2.x.x and R3.x.x
A 48V WLAN
MAIN POWER SUPPLY Option
CARD RACK F REG
12V
G 5V
POWER
XYZ CONTROLLER FACTOR
J CORRECTION
METAL SHIELD
METAL SHIELD
METAL SHIELD
CONTROLLER BOARD
GTX
GTX
GTX
PD
RELAY
J15
TO MEMORY STICK
MRX
J24
PRINTERS ISOLATION
48V
120VAC
AND
DC HEAD
GEL WARMER BULKHEAD J25
5V FROM J21 MICROPHONE
BOARD R
H INVERTER 5V FROM J22 5V J19
TRACKBALL
TEMP J21
P1 P7
L CONTROL P5
J22 USB
USB
USB
CONTROL P2 HUB
J18
USB J23
P8 USB KEYBOARD
AUDIO
P3 3.3V
DC BSCAN
S 48V 12V 5V 3.3V +12V
+5V
DC-DC VOLTAGES DOPPLER AUDIO +48V J1
P6 uP
CONVERTERS (X2 = P4 on MPS) +5V REG
PCI EXPRESS P4 ON/ 5V
BB PULSER
VPD
I2C EXTRA PCI
CW PROBE L OFF TOUCH +12V
EXPRESS LANES
I VOLTAGES
HV INV
USB/ 10.4"
4D MOTOR (X1 = P3 on MPS) J2 J1 CONNECTION
CNTRL BACKPLANE 4D MOTOR DRIVE
(BT2010
VIDEO LCD SWITCH
H-BRIDGE BOARD
OPTION)
K Na J2 J1 BULKHEAD UP/DN/LOCK
to/from BEP PLATE
A
BUTTONS
SATA PWR
DVD ADAPT PWA
DVD 1
OP PANEL
U
SATA
M
Y
POWER
MAIN CABLE
BAYBIRD
USB (VGU DVI VIDEO
OPTION) 48V POWER/AUDIO
Z USB FOR OP PANEL
J1 BEP EXTERNAL CABLES AND HARNESSES:

J5 J4 J3 J2
Na
5 1 48V, 5Vstby
48V,+12V
PS_ON#
48V_OK
6 +5V,+5Vstby DC-DC AC_FAIL# C GA200334 FROG BRAKE ARM (2 used)
4 CONVERTERS
PS_ON#, PWROK
& SEQUENCE
LOGIC BEP PWR D 5272357-2 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY
+12V, -12V + 5V
3.3V, 5Vstby SUPPLY FRONT D1 5269862 MAIN CABLE POWER/AUDIO
PANEL
MODULE
3 D3 5265371 MAIN CABLE XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS
REAR D4 5248609 MAIN CABLE USB (2 used)
12
PANEL
J46 E 5196889 VIDEO (HDMI) CABLE - LCD
F 5196890 POWER/USB CABLE - LCD
IF NO
10/100bT 10 DVR 11 G 5248610 USB OP PANEL TO BULKHEAD (2 used)
J44
DVI-I OUT
H 5194492 USB CABLE - MAIN POWER SUPPLY
AUDIO R
I 5194495 POWER CABLE BEP 48V
J42
AUDIO L J43
J 5152290 PCI EXPRESS CABLE (OMTTED)
J40
K 5266407 POWER CABLE DVD
EXT USB 1
PATIENT I/O L 5194492-6 USB CABLE - XYZ CONTROLLER
DVI-A
J41 (BT2010 or later M 5270048 SATA CABLE DVD
16X PCI EXPRESS
EXT USB 2
PCI
PCI EXPRESS
PCI
CN1 CN4
OPTION)
CN21
DVI-D ATX2 USB 1,2,3,4
ANALOG VIDEO
MOTHERBOARD
J20 MAIN
N 5194491 BEP TO CARD RACK BACKPLANE CABLE (OMTTED)
1000MbT

10/100/
TX DVI-D POWER + LEDS

AUDIO IN
DVI-I IN
DVI-I OUT
RX
DVI-D
Na 5372764 BEP TO CARD RACK BACKPLANE AND PCI EXPRESS CABLE
J21 TX
A P 5194498 AUDIO CABLE - SUBWOOFER
J2 J1
(OPTIONAL)
Q 5194492-2 USB CABLE BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)

VIDEO CARD
SPARE PCI
+5stby
DVR
J22
48V DOP
SATA3 R 5194493 POWER CABLE BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
DIGITAL
AUDIO
LR
XFMR
8 S GA200536 CW CONNECTOR FLEX CIRCUIT (USED ONLY IF CW INSTALLED)
+12V AUDIO +5V
SATA2 T 5310448 XY LOCK
HOST
+5V OUT
DVD
AUDIO
+12V AMP
XFMR J36
IF NO U 5198990 UP/DOWN/LOCK BUTTONS
J29
Na DVR
POWER
W 5196892 SAFETY GROUND WIRE LCD ARM (2 used)
BSCAN
SATA1
I2C
J30
ON/OFF SW,
J31 PWR LED 2 Y 5244550 POWER BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
SATA0
J32
J35
Z 5194492-3 USB CABLE BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
USB HUB 2 USB AA 5245462 GEL WARMER POWER
CN5 J3 BB 5194492-4 USB CABLE 4D CONTROLLER
J100 USB 5
USB
7
USB 6
5,6,7,8 PCI
EXPRESS x1
J7
USB 8
USB HUB 1
USB Micro
USB 7
Controller CN18
J28 (IO Ports
&VPD AUDIO IN
1 5165844-2 BEP POWER HARNESS
BW Q J27 OPTION L,R,CENTER AUDIO OUT,
2 5193725-2 MOTHERBOARD HARNESS
USB HUB 3
KEY ON/OFF SW,

PRINTER J26 J12 PWR LED uBTX 3 5193726 FRONT PANEL HARNESS
(OPTIONAL) 12V
MOTHERBOARD
J25 J14
ATX1
POWER 4 5152291 PCI EXPRESS BULKHEAD (OMTTED)
+12V
USB
TO MAIN J33 AUDIO CENTER AUDIO OUT
5 5195600 SATA BULKHEAD J3
PWR PWR P AMP 6 5183810 SATA BULKHEAD J2
SUPPLY J34
SATA SATA PWR
+5V +12V 48V +5stby

7 5183841 SATA HARD DRIVE
R HARD
REG +3.3V DRIVE
8 5183841-2 SATA DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
+12V
+5V 9 5266922 POWER HARD DRIVE
I/OBOARD 20A
10 5169280 DVI FLEX MAIN ICHIRO
48V OUT 11 5197215 DVI FLEX DVR JUMPER ICHIRO (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
DC-DC
CONVERT + - 9 12 5194363 NETWORK PATCH CABLE CAT6
ER
12V
48V IN BATTERY
CONTROL
EPS
V SENSE BOARD - +
12V
BATTERY

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-6 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - BEP6.x - R4.x
Figure 5-3 LOGIQ E9 Block diagram - BEP6.x - R4.x

X-Y
LOCK FROG
MOTOR BRAKES
T INNER
LEFT BRAKE
OUTER
LEFT BRAKE
B C
D2
D1 D4
MAIN LCD DISPLAY

+12V
D3 HV INV
5V
C VIDEO FLAT
Z MOTOR B INNER OUTER CNTL SCREEN
5V USB/
MIC
AUDIO
USB USB
HUB NOT
A E USED
MAIN POWER SUPPLY CARD RACK NOT INSTALLED 48V
12V
G STARTING
REG 5V
XYZ CONTROLLER
POWER APRIL 2014
FACTOR
CORRECTION
METAL SHIELD
METAL SHIELD
METAL SHIELD
GTX
GTX
GTX
CONTROLLER BOARD
PD
RELAY
J15
TO MEMORY STICK
MRX
J24
PRINTERS ISOLATION
48V
AND GEL WARMER J25
120VAC DC HEAD BULKHEAD 5V FROM J22 5V
INVERTER
H TEMP
BOARD
J21
J19
TRACKBALL
P1 P5 P7
CONTROL USB
J22 USB
CONTROL USB
HUB
L P2 USB
P8
J18
J23
AUDIO
USB KEYBOARD
DC
BSCAN
S P3 48V
12V 5V 3.3V
3.3V +12V
VOLTAGES P4 +5V
DC-DC DOPPLER AUDIO +48V J1
(X2 = P4 on MPS) +5V P6 REG uP
CONVERTERS PCI EXPRESS
I2C ON/
VPD EXTRA PCI OFF 5V +12V
BB PULSER L TOUCH
I EXPRESS LANES
HV INV
VOLTAGES USB/ 10.4"
4D MOTOR (X1 = P3 on MPS)
BACKPLANE
J2 J1 CW PROBE VIDEO LCD
A
CNTRL 4D MOTOR DRIVE SWITCH
H-BRIDGE CONNECTION BOARD
(BT2010 OPTION)
BULKHEAD
PLATE UP/DN/LOCK
BUTTONS
SATA PWR SATA

DVD 1 OP PANEL
U
M
Y
POWER
BAYBIRD MAIN CABLE

USB (VGU DVI VIDEO
Z OPTION) 48V POWER/AUDIO
USB FOR OP PANEL
J1
1 EXTERNAL CABLES AND HARNESSES:

C GA200334 FROG BRAKE ARM (2 used)
A HARD
DRIVE D 5272357-2 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY
J2 J1
SATA SATA PWR 9 without DVR
FRONT I/O D1 5269862 MAIN CABLE POWER/AUDIO
REAR 11
9 with DVR D2 5262473-2 MAIN CABLE VIDEO
SVGA
PANEL DVI-D J 3 D3 5265371 MAIN CABLE XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS
4
S-VIDEO J30 TX DVI-D
RX
DVI-D 2 D4 5248609 MAIN CABLE USB (2 used)
OUT
(OPTION)
J44
DVI-D
TX 8 E 5430937 VIDEO (HDMI)+USB CABLE - LCD
DVI-I OUT CN DVI 2
G 5248610 USB OP PANEL TO BULKHEAD (2 used)
PCI
16X PCI EXPRESS
USB #H3
H 5194492-8 USB CABLE - MAIN POWER SUPPLY
IPASS2 CN F101
PCIE x1 IPASS1
USB PWR ENABLE
DVI-I IN
DVI-I OUT
AUDIO IN
J40
EXT USB 1
FET +5V I 5194495 POWER CABLE BEP 48V
EXT USB 2
J41
USB #H4
OC DETECT CN
SATA6
CN
SATA4
CN DVI 1
J 5431486 PCI EXPRESS RIBBON CABLE
J46 CN AUDIO1
L 5194492-6 USB CABLE XYZ CONTROLLER
USB 1,2
+ LEDS
(OPTIONAL)
100/1000bT CN
SATA0
M 5431110 POWERED eSATA CABLE DVD
SPARE
LAN
J42
PATIENT IO
DVR
AUDIO R
CTRL
AUDIO L
J43
(BT2010 P 5194498 AUDIO CABLE - SUBWOOFER
48V OPTION) Q 5194492-2 USB CABLE BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
TO DVR
HOST
J21
DVD
+5stby +12V
GFI/MRX
AUDIO
S GA200536 CW CONNECTOR FLEX CIRCUIT (USED ONLY IF CW INSTALLED)
J22
48V
AMP
DIGITAL AUDIO (FUTURE) U 5198990 UP/DOWN/LOCK BUTTONS
5V STBY
+12V CODEC
AUDIO
SATA0
SATA4 5A Without DVR 48v TO 28v Y 5244550 POWER BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
With DVR CONVERT
ACFAIL
AMP +3.3V +3.3V SATA5

CN SATA5
+5V PCIe L5
+5V STBY +5V
6
J3
ON/OFF SW, PWR LED
+5V STBY
PCIe L6
Vbat AA 5245462 GEL WARMER POWER
POWER
+12V
SATA #3 CN IO 1
USB8
PCH
CN SATA3
BB 5194492-4 USB CABLE 4D CONTROLLER
HUB 28v/BAT
SATA2 48V
J2 SOURCE
+12V CN PWR1
SATA #2 SELECT
CN IO 2 48V
POWER ON/OFF
ACFAIL BEP ASSEMBLY CABLES AND HARNESSES:
J100 USB 0 SATA3 5V STBY USB
J7 USB 1 USB0
SATA0 cFast
5vDUAL
POWER
5vDUAL
J28 USB 2
1 #$ BEP POWER
Q
J27 USB7 3.3vDUAL 2 #% FRONT PANEL
USB 3 PCIe L8
3 #@ SATA HARD DRIVE
USB9 POWER 28v 28v 28v
USB13 Mini PCIe
USB Micro USB10 USB12 TO TO TO
USB
J26 USB 4 Controller
IO Ports &
USB 13
3.3vDUAL
12v 5v 3.3v
4 #@ POWER HARD DRIVE
TO MAIN +5V
PWR PWR
J25 USB 5 VPD +5V
+12V
5 5439827!! SATA TO DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
SUPPLY +12V +12V
J4 USB 6 +48V
+28V BATT 5A 5439827-2!! DVR TO SATA (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
BW R +48V
PRINTER
J14 USB 7 +5V
6 #$ SATA JUMPER (USED IF DVR NOT INSTALLED)
(OPTIONAL)
J12 USB 9
+3.3V 7 #$ PAT IO POWER AND USB
OPTION KEY CN PWR2 8 5408168$ VIDEO JUMPER FLEX (USED IF DVR NOT INSTALLED)
+5V R4 ONLY POWERBOARD
+12V
J29
Patient IO 9 5428990$!! DVI-SAMTECH FLEX
+5V
11 5435462 AUDIO FOR DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
5vDUAL
ACFAIL
J30
+12V
Vbat
48V
P J33
SIDE I/O BOARD MOTHERBOARD CN USB11 # = no GE number for cable
$ = included in cable kit 5433408-80
% = cable comes with Front Panel 5433408-41
@ = cable comes with HD 5433408-50
20A
!! = cable comes with DVR kit 5263884-3
48V
CHARGER
- + Vbat
12V
BATTERY 5vDUAL
AC FAIL
+ - CHARGEBOARD
12V 7
BATTERY
BEP 6.1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-7 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - BEP6.1 - R5.x
Figure 5-4 LOGIQ E9 Block diagram - BEP6.1 - R5.x

X-Y
LOCK FROG
MOTOR BRAKES
T INNER
LEFT BRAKE
OUTER
LEFT BRAKE
B C
D2
D1 D4
D3
+12V
C 5V
HV INV
Z MOTOR B INNER OUTER
RIGHT BRAKE RIGHT BRAKE VIDEO FLAT
CNTL SCREEN
5V USB/
MIC
AUDIO
A CARD RACK USB USB
MAIN POWER SUPPLY HUB NOT
CC E USED
48V
12V
POWER G REG 5V
SWAVE TO CORRECTION
METAL SHIELD
METAL SHIELD
METAL SHIELD
Option PRINTERS
GTX
GTX
GTX
PD
RELAY
UPPER OP MEMORY STICK
MRX
(Capacitor ISOLATION
120VAC
48V
Pack) INVERTER
AND
DC HEAD
GEL WARMER J25
MICROPHONE
BULKHEAD 5V FROM J22 5V
H TEMP
BOARD
P5 J21
J53 TRACKBALL
CONTROL P1 USB
USB USB J18
J22 HUB
CONTROL HUB
L USB
P8 J23
USB KEYBOARD
AUDIO
DC
BSCAN
S P3 48V
3.3V J52
uP
VOLTAGES P4 12V 5V 3.3V
DC-DC DOPPLER AUDIO
(X2 = P4 on MPS) +5V P6 +48V uP
CONVERTERS PCI EXPRESS REG
VPD I2C 5V TOUCH
EXTRA PCI
BB PULSER L
10.4" ON/
I VOLTAGES
EXPRESS LANES
USB/ SVGA OFF
BACKPLANE
J2 J1 CW PROBE VIDEO LED
A
CNTRL 4D MOTOR DRIVE Back Light SWITCH
H-BRIDGE CONNECTION BOARD
(BT2010 OPTION) LOWER OP
BULKHEAD
UP/DN/LOCK 5V 3.3V
PLATE
BUTTONS
REG
SATA PWR SATA

DVD 1 OP PANEL U
M
Y
POWER
USB
BAYBIRD MAIN CABLE
(VGU EE DVI VIDEO
USB FOR OP PANEL
J1
1 EXTERNAL CABLES AND HARNESSES:

A HARD
DRIVE D 5272357-2 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY
J2 J1
FRONT I/O D1 5269862 MAIN CABLE POWER/AUDIO
REAR 11
9 with DVR D2 5262473-2 MAIN CABLE VIDEO
SVGA
PANEL DVI-D J 3 D3 5265371 MAIN CABLE XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS
4
S-VIDEO J30 TX DVI-D
RX
DVI-D 2 D4 5248609 MAIN CABLE USB (2 used)
OUT
(OPTION)
J44
DVI-D
TX 8 E 5430937 VIDEO (HDMI)+USB CABLE - LCD
DVI-I OUT CN DVI 2
PCI
16X PCI EXPRESS
USB #H3
IPASS2 CN F101
PCIE x1 IPASS1
USB PWR ENABLE
DVI-I IN
DVI-I OUT
AUDIO IN
J40
EXT USB 1
FET +5V I 5194495 POWER CABLE BEP 48V
J41
EXT USB 2
USB #H4
OC DETECT CN
SATA6
CN
SATA4
CN DVI 1
J 5431486 PCI EXPRESS RIBBON CABLE
J46 CN AUDIO1
USB 1,2
+ LEDS
(OPTIONAL)
100/1000bT CN
SATA0
M 5431110 POWERED eSATA CABLE DVD
SPARE
LAN
J42
PATIENT IO
DVR
AUDIO R
CTRL
AUDIO L
J43
(BT2010 P 5194498 AUDIO CABLE - SUBWOOFER
48V OPTION) Q 5194492-2 USB CABLE BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
TO DVR
HOST
J21
DVD
+5stby +12V
GFI/MRX
AUDIO
S GA200536 CW CONNECTOR FLEX CIRCUIT (USED ONLY IF CW INSTALLED)
J22
48V
AMP
DIGITAL AUDIO (FUTURE) U 5198990 UP/DOWN/LOCK BUTTONS
5V STBY
+12V CODEC
AUDIO
SATA0
SATA4 5A Without DVR 48v TO 28v Y 5244550 POWER BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
With DVR CONVERT
ACFAIL

CN SATA5
+5V PCIe L5
+5V STBY +5V
6
J3
ON/OFF SW, PWR LED
+5V STBY
PCIe L6
Vbat AA 5245462 GEL WARMER POWER
POWER
+12V
SATA #3 CN IO 1
USB8
PCH
CN SATA3
BB 5194492-4 USB CABLE 4D CONTROLLER
HUB 28v/BAT
J2
+12V
SATA2
CN PWR1
48V
SOURCE CC 5486912 CAPACITOR PACK CABLE (USED ONLY IF SWAVE INSTALLED)
SATA #2 SELECT
CN IO 2 48V EE 5439524 CABLE V NAV INSIDE (USED ONLY IF V NAV INSIDE INSTALLED)
POWER ON/OFF
ACFAIL
J100 USB 0 SATA3 5V STBY USB
5vDUAL 5vDUAL
J7
SATA0 cFast
USB 1 USB0 POWER
J28 USB 2 BEP ASSEMBLY CABLES AND HARNESSES:

Q
J27 USB 3 USB7
USB9
USB13
PCIe L8
3.3vDUAL
POWER 28v 28v 28v ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
Mini PCIe
USB
J26 USB 4
USB Micro
Controller USB 13
USB10 USB12 TO
12v
TO
5v
TO
3.3v 1 #$ BEP POWER
3.3vDUAL
TO MAIN J25 USB 5
IO Ports &
VPD +5V
+5V 2 #% FRONT ANEL P
PWR PWR
SUPPLY J4 USB 6
+12V
+48V +12V +12V 3 #@ SATA HARD DRIVE
BW R J14 USB 7
+28V BATT
+48V
+5V 4 #@ POWER HARD DRIVE
PRINTER USB 9 5 5439827!! SATA TO DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
J12 +3.3V
(OPTIONAL) 5A 5439827-2!! DVR TO SATA (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
OPTION KEY CN PWR2
+5V
+12V Patient IO
POWERBOARD 6 #$ SATA JUMPER (USED IF DVR NOT INSTALLED)
J29
+5V 7 #$ PAT IO POWER AND USB
5vDUAL
8 5408168$ VIDEO JUMPER FLEX (USED IF DVR NOT INSTALLED)

ACFAIL
J30
+12V
Vbat
48V
P J33 9 5428990$!! DVI-SAMTECH FLEX

SIDE I/O BOARD MOTHERBOARD CN USB11
11 5435462 AUDIO FOR DVR (USED ONLY IF DVR INSTALLED)
# = no GE number for cable

20A
48V % = cable comes with Front Panel 5433408-41
-
CHARGER @ = cable comes with HD 5433408-50
+ Vbat
12V !! = cable comes with DVR kit 5263884-3
BATTERY 5vDUAL
AC FAIL
+ - CHARGEBOARD
12V 7
BATTERY
BEP 6.1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-8 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - BEP6.2 - R6.x and later

On console model 5205000-9 (R6.x) a 23 inch Wide Screen, High Definition Ultrasound LCD and a
22 inch OLED (Organic Light-emitting Diodes) Monitor which requires a new Bulkhead Board. To easily
identify and understand the differences, see: Figure 5-6 "LOGIQ E9 23 inch LCD Monitor Block diagram
- R6.x and later" on page 5-11 and Figure 5-7 "LOGIQ E9 OLED Monitor Block diagram - R6.x and later"
on page 5-12. These are the only changes to the Overall block diagram - BEP6.x - R5.x and later.
Figure 5-5 LOGIQ E9 Block diagram - BEP6.2 - R6.x and later
X-Y
FROG +12V
LOCK HV INV 23 inch
MOTOR BRAKES 5V
DISPLAY
T INNER
LEFT BRAKE
OUTER
LEFT BRAKE
VIDEO
CNTL
FLAT
SCREEN
B C
5V
D2
D1 D4 USB USB USB Microphone
HUB Dongle (option)
NOT USED
E 48V
12V
REG 5V
Ea
D3 +12V
HV INV OLED
5V
C DISPLAY
Z MOTOR B INNER OUTER VIDEO
CNTL
FLAT
SCREEN
5V
USB USB USB Microphone

HUB Dongle (option)
A CARD RACK GEL WARMER
MAIN POWER SUPPLY 48V
12V
NOT USED
CC REG 5V
TEMP
POWER CONTROL G
SWAVE TO CORRECTION
METAL SHIELD
METAL SHIELD
METAL SHIELD
Option PRINTERS
GTX
GTX
GTX
PD
RELAY
UPPER OP
E1 MEMORY STICK
MRX
120VAC
Pack) INVERTER
AND
E2
MICROPHONE
48V DC HEAD J25
H BOARD
P5 J21
P1 USB
J22 USB USB J16 J2
HUB
KEYBOARD
CONTROL HUB
L P2 48V USB
to P8 J23 J17 J1 TRACKBALL
12V USB
CONV AUDIO
DC
BSCAN
S P3 48V
3.3V uP
VOLTAGES P4 12V 5V 3.3V
DC-DC DOPPLER AUDIO
(X2 = P4 on MPS) +5V P6 +48V uP
CONVERTERS PCI EXPRESS REG
I2C P10 J3
VPD EXTRA PCI
5V TOUCH
BB PULSER L
10.4" ON/
I VOLTAGES
EXPRESS LANES
USB/ SVGA OFF
BACKPLANE
J2 J1 CW PROBE VIDEO LED
BUTTONS
A
CNTRL 4D MOTOR DRIVE Back Light
H-BRIDGE CONNECTION ROTARIES, SLIDES
(BT2010 OPTION) Ea1
5V 3.3V
BULKHEAD UP/DN/LOCK LOWER OP
Ea2 PLATE BUTTONS REG
SATA PWR SATA
E3
DVD 1 OP PANEL U
M
Y
POWER
USB
BAYBIRD MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY D
(VGU EE DVI VIDEO
USB FOR OP PANEL
J1
1
EXTERNAL CABLES AND HARNESSES:
A HARD
DRIVE
J2 J1
SATA SATA PWR FRONT I/O D 5272357-2 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY
REAR
PANEL
SVGA
3
D1 5269862 MAIN CABLE POWER/AUDIO
J
S-VIDEO J30
DVI-D
TX DVI-D
4
2
DVI-D
OUT DVI-D
RX D3 5265371 MAIN CABLE XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS
(OPTION) TX 7
J44
D4 5248609 MAIN CABLE USB (2 used)
DVI-I OUT CN DVI 2
E 23 inch DISPLAY CABLE SET (part of the Monitor Arm)
PCI
16X PCI EXPRESS
USB #H3 CN F101

IPASS2
PCIE x1 IPASS1
USB PWR ENABLE
EXT USB 1
J40 E1 5194492-9 USB
FET +5V
EXT USB 2
J41 OC DETECT CN CN CN DVI 1
E2 5486545 POWER
SATA6 SATA4
J46
USB #H4
CN AUDIO1
E3 5505835 VIDEO
OLED DISPLAY CABLE SET (part of the Monitor Arm)
USB 1,2
+ LEDS
100/1000bT CN
SATA0 Ea
SPARE
SPARE
LAN
AUDIO R
J42
J43
CTRL PATIENT I/O Ea1 5620756 USB/POWER
AUDIO L (OPTION) Ea2 GC200353-2 VIDEO
48V
TO DVR
J21
GFI/MRX
+5stby +12V AUDIO I 5194495 POWER CABLE BEP 48V
48V
J22 AUDIO
AMP J 5431486 PCI EXPRESS RIBBON CABLE
DIGITAL AUDIO (FUTURE)
5V STBY
+12V CODEC
SATA0 48v TO 28v
AUDIO
+3.3V
SATA4
CONVERT M 5431110 POWERED eSATA CABLE DVD
ACFAIL
AMP +3.3V SATA5

CN SATA5
ON/OFF SW, PWR LED

+5V
+5V STBY +5V PCIe L5
PCIe L6 5 P 5194498-2 AUDIO CABLE - SUBWOOFER
J3
+12V
+5V STBY
PCH
Vbat
POWER Q 5194492-2 USB CABLE BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
SATA #3 CN IO 1
HUB USB8
SATA2
CN SATA3
48V 28v/BAT R 5194493 POWER CABLE BW PRINTER (USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED)
J2
+12V
SATA #2
CN PWR1
SOURCE
SELECT S GA200536 CW CONNECTOR FLEX CIRCUIT (USED ONLY IF CW INSTALLED)
CN IO 2
POWER ON/OFF
48V
ACFAIL T 5310448 XY LOCK
J100 USB 0 SATA3 5V STBY USB U 5198990 UP/DOWN/LOCK BUTTONS
5vDUAL 5vDUAL
J7 USB 1 USB0
SATA0 cFast
POWER Y 5244550 POWER BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
J28 USB 2 Z 5194492-3 USB CABLE BAYBIRD (USED ONLY IF VGU INSTALLED)
Q 3.3vDUAL AA 5245462 GEL WARMER POWER
J27 USB 3 USB7
PCIe L8
USB9 POWER 28v 28v 28v
J26 USB 4
USB Micro
USB13
USB10 USB12
Mini PCIe TO TO TO BB 5194492-4 USB CABLE 4D CONTROLLER
Controller USB 13 12v 5v 3.3v
USB
TO MAIN J25
IO Ports &
+5V
3.3vDUAL CC 5486912 CAPACITOR PACK CABLE (USED ONLY IF SWAVE INSTALLED)
USB 5 VPD +5V
PWR PWR
SUPPLY USB 6
+12V
+48V +12V +12V
EE 5439524 CABLE V NAV INSIDE (USED ONLY IF V NAV INSIDE INSTALLED)
J4
+28V BATT
BW R J14 USB 7
+48V
+5V
PRINTER USB 9
J12 +3.3V
(OPTIONAL)
OPTION KEY CN PWR2
+5V POWERBOARD
+12V Patient IO
J29
+5V
5vDUAL
ACFAIL
J30
+12V
Vbat
48V
P J33 ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

1 #$ BEP POWER
2 #% FRONT PANEL
3 #@ SATA HARD DRIVE
20A
4 #@ POWER HARD DRIVE
48V
5 #$ SATA JUMPER
CHARGER 6 #$ PAT I/O POWER AND USB
- + Vbat
12V 7 #$ VID EO JUMPER FLEX
BATTERY 5vDUAL
AC FAIL
# = no GE number for cable
+ - CHARGEBOARD
12V 6 % = cable comes with Front Panel 5433408-40
BATTERY @ = cable comes with HD 5433408-51
BEP 6.2
5 - 10 Section 5-3 - LOGIQ E9 description

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-8 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - BEP6.2 - R6.x and later (contd)
Figure 5-6 LOGIQ E9 23 inch LCD Monitor Block diagram - R6.x and later
A
5
P1
BULKHEAD
4
P2 P10 BOARD
DVI VIDEO
P3
from Main
Cable
3 L
2
1
BULKHEAD
PLATE
A Monitor Arm Adapter ground 3. Power from P2

1. HDMI to P10 4. USB to external USB
2. USB to P3 5. USB Microphone Dongle (option)
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 11

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-8 LOGIQ E9 Overall block diagram - BEP6.2 - R6.x and later (contd)
Figure 5-7 LOGIQ E9 OLED Monitor Block diagram - R6.x and later
R
3
A
P1
BULKHEAD
BOARD
P2
P3 P10
}
USB HDMI PWR DVI VIDEO
from Main
Cable
BULKHEAD
PLATE
1
2
A Monitor Arrm Adapter ground 3. USB to external USB

1. HDMI from P10 4. USB Microphone Dongle (option)
2. Power and USB from P3

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-9 Signal flow overview

Figure 5-8 LOGIQ E9 Signal Flow - GFI Configuration
192
Frontplane GTX 64 Ch DRX 64

GTX 64 Ch DRX 64
GRX 64
David GTX Nathan DRX
GRLY GRX 128 Pulser A/D
0 64 Ch 0 64 Ch
128
David Nathan GFI

R 1 1
192
192 192
...
e
...
l T/R TGC
a David Nathan
2
192
y 2 FDEM SDEM
s
CW David Nathan
Option
Pulser
3 A/D ATGC T_sig
192
GDIF GDIF
BEP
Backplane
The GTX board(s) in the Front End Card Rack, generates the Transmit Pulse bursts using the DC
Transmit High voltage from the Main Power Supply. The Transmit bursts are routed from the GTX board
via the XD bus to the Relay board where the ultrasound probes send energy into the body.
Weak ultrasound echoes from body structures and blood cells are received by the probes and routed
via the Relay board and the XD bus to the RX board. The RX board amplifies these signals. Then the
signals are routed to the DRX board(s) where the signals are A/D converted. The digital signals are then
further processed on the DRX boards.
After amplification and digital signal processing in the Front End electronics, the signal is transferred via
the PCIe bus to the Back End Processor. The Back End Processor receives input commands from the
User Interface (Operator Panel), handles the communication with the rest of the LOGIQ E9, delivers
signals (digital video) to the LCD screen and the Touch Screen. controls and delivers digital video
signals to an optional, internal, Digital Video Recorder, provides output to an optional, internal printer.
The communication to the network (Ethernet) is also handled by the back End Processor.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-9 Signal flow overview (contd)

Figure 5-9 LOGIQ E9 Signal Flow - MRX
Frontplane
256 GTX 64 Ch
GTX 64 Ch
David GTX
Pulser 0 64 Ch
CW
David
MRX
Option
1
...
A/D
Converters David
I/Q 2
David
Filter Pulser 3
GRLY MRX 192 Ch GDIF

256
X I Analog
X
X Q Beamformer
TGC A/DA Nathan
TGC A/DA 32 Ch
R
192
TGC A/DA Nathan

e 256 32 Ch Front End
TGC A/DA
l T/ R Nathan Interface
a 32 Ch
Nathan
192
y 32 Ch
s Nathan
DSP
32 Ch
Nathan
192
32 Ch
TGC A/D SED
TGC Test
GFE
Gen Gen
The MRX Board combines the functionality of the Receiver Boards (DRX and GRX) and the GFI.
The Transmit Pulse bursts transmitted, are still routed from the GTX board(s) via the XD bus to the
Relay board where the ultrasound probes send the energy into the body. Weak ultrasound echoes from
body structures and blood cells are received by the probes and routed via the Relay board and the XD
bus to the MRX board. The MRX board amplifies the ultrasound signal and connects it with an A/D
converter to the digital domain. The digital signals are then further processed on the MRX boards.
All the processing is the same as a GFI configuration, but now the DRX, GRX and GFI are no longer
separate boards.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-10 Operator Panel

The user initiates system operation via the Operator Panel which contains a control panel with different
controls for TGC and an LCD touch panel display. An alphanumeric keyboard is located on the Operator
Panel.
5-3-11 The electronics

LOGIQ E9 internal electronics are divided into two major assemblies:
Front End Card Rack

For details about the Front End Card Rack, see: Section 5-9 "Card Rack description" on page 5-54.
Back End Processor (BEP)

For details about the BEP, see:
Section 5-11 "Back End Processor (BEP) description" on page 5-113.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-12 LOGIQ E9s Operating Modes
5-3-12-1 B-Mode
B-Mode is a two-dimensional image of the amplitude of the echo signal. It is used for location and
measurement of anatomical structures and for spatial orientation during operation of other modes. In B-
mode, a two-dimensional cross-section of a three-dimensional soft tissue structure such as the heart is
displayed in real time. Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale or
color values in the display. The outline of the 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) cross-section is a sector,
depending on the particular transducer used. B-mode can be used in combination with any other mode.
5-3-12-1-1 Harmonic Imaging

Tissue Harmonic Imaging, acoustic aberrations due to tissue, are minimized by receiving and
processing the second harmonic signal that is generated within the insonified tissue. LOGIQ E9`s high
performance Harmonic Imaging provides superb detail resolution and penetration, outstanding contrast
resolution, excellent acoustic clutter rejection and an easy to operate user interface for switching into
Harmonic Imaging mode. Coded Harmonics enhances near field resolution for improved small parts
imaging as well as far field penetration. It diminishes low frequency amplitude noise and improves
imaging technically difficult patients. It may be especially beneficial when imaging isoechoic lesions in
shallow-depth anatomy in the breast, liver and hard-to-visualize fetal anatomy. Coded Harmonics may
improve the B-Mode (2D (B-Mode)) image quality without introducing a contrast agent.
5-3-12-2 M-Mode
In M-mode, soft tissue structure is presented as scrolling display, with depth on the Y-axis and time on
the X-axis. It is used primarily for cardiac measurements such as value timing on septal wall thickness
when accurate timing information is required. M-mode is also known as T-M mode or time-motion mode.
Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale values in the display. M-
mode displays time motion information of the ultrasound data derived from a stationary beam. Depth is
arranged along the vertical axis with time along the horizontal axis. M-mode is normally used in
conjunction with a 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) image for spatial reference. The 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode)
image has a graphical line (M-line) superimposed on the 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) image indicating where
the M-mode beam is located.
5-3-12-3 Color Flow Doppler Mode

Color Doppler is used to detect motion presented as a two-dimensional display. There are three
applications of this technique:
Color Flow Mode - used to visualize blood flow velocity and direction
Power Doppler (Angio) - used to visualize the spatial distribution of blood
A real-time two-dimensional cross-section image of blood flow is displayed. The 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode)
cross-section is presented as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent blood flow
(velocity, variance, power and/or direction). To provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-
section is overlaid on top of the gray scale cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode)
echo). For each pixel in the overlay, the decision of whether to display color (Doppler), gray scale (echo)
information or a blended combination is based on the relative strength of return echoes from the soft
tissue structures and from the red blood cells. Blood velocity is the primary parameter used to determine
the display colors, but power and variance may also be used. A high pass filter (wall filter) is used to
remove the signals from stationary or slowly moving structures. Tissue motion is discriminated from
blood flow by assuming that blood is moving faster than the surrounding tissue, although additional
parameters may also be used to enhance the discrimination. Color flow can be used in combination with
2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) and Spectral Doppler modes.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-12-3-1 Power Doppler

A real-time two dimensional cross-section of blood flow is displayed. The 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) cross-
section is presented as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent the power in
blood flow echoes. Often, to provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-section is overlaid
on top of the gray scale cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) echo). For each
pixel in the overlay, the decision of whether to display color (Doppler power), gray scale (echo)
information or a blended combination is based on the relative strength of return echoes from the soft-
tissue structures and from the red blood cells. A high pass filter (wall filter) is used to remove the signals
from stationary or slowly moving structures. Tissue motion is discriminated from blood flow by assuming
that blood is moving faster than the surrounding tissue, although additional parameters may also be
used to enhance the discrimination. The power in the remaining signal after wall filtering is then
averaged over time (persistence) to present a steady state image of blood flow distribution. Power
Doppler can be used in combination with 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) and Spectral Doppler modes as well
as with 4D mode.
5-3-12-4 Pulsed (PW) Doppler

PW Doppler processing is one of two spectral Doppler modalities, the other being CW Doppler. In
spectral Doppler, blood flow is presented as a scrolling display, with flow velocity on the Y-axis and time
on the X-axis. The presence of spectral broadening indicates turbulent flow, while the absence of
spectral broadening indicates laminar flow. PW Doppler provides real time spectral analysis of pulsed
Doppler signals. This information describes the Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the
sample volume. PW Doppler can be used alone but is normally used in conjunction with a 2D (B-Mode)
(B-Mode) image with an M-line and sample volume marker superimposed on the 2-D image indicating
the position of the Doppler sample volume. The sample volume size and location are specified by the
operator. Sample volume can be overlaid by a flow direction cursor which is aligned, by the operator,
with the direction of flow in the vessel, thus determining the Doppler angle. This allows the spectral
display to be calibrated in flow velocity (m/sec.) as well as frequency (Hz). PW Doppler also provides
the capability of performing spectral analysis at a selectable depth and sample volume size. PW Doppler
can be used in combination with 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) and Color Flow modes.
5-3-12-5 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler

Continuous Wave Doppler systems use two crystals, one to send and one to receive the echoes.
The transmitter inputs a continuous sinusoidal wave. The receiver detects the shift.
An audible sound is created and recorded by either an analog recorder or spectral analyzer. Spectral
analysis separates the signal into individual components and assigns a relative importance.
The benefits of CW Doppler include high sensitivity to low velocities and detection of high velocities
without aliasing. Although CW Doppler cannot distinguish between the sending and receiving signals or
extraneous echoes, nor does CW Doppler produce a precise image like Pulsed Wave Doppler.
5-3-12-6 Other Modes

4D: The LOGIQ E9 Ultrasound System may be used to acquire multiple, sequential 2D (B-Mode) (B-
Mode) images which can be combined to reconstruct a three dimensional image. These 4D images are
useful in visualizing three-dimensional structures, and in understanding the spatial or temporal
relationships between the images in the 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) sequence. The 4D image is presented
using standard visualization techniques, such as surface or volume rendering.
For more information on Volume Navigation and Contrast Imaging, refer to the Basic User Manual.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-12-6-1 4D Data Collection and Reconstruction

2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode) gray scale images may be reconstructed. The acquisition of volume data sets
is performed by sweeping 2D (B-Mode) (B-Mode)-scans with special transducers (called 4D-
transducers) designed for the 2D (B-Mode)-scans and the 4D-sweep.
Images are spatially registered, using internal probe position sensing and a position control to ensure
geometric accuracy of the 4D data.
2D (B-Mode) ultrasound imaging modes are used to view a two dimensional cross-sections of parts of
the body. For example in 2D (B-Mode) gray scale imaging, a 2 dimensional cross-section of a 3-
dimensional soft-tissue structure such as the heart is displayed in real time. Typical, the user of an
ultrasound machine manipulates the position and orientation of this 2D (B-Mode) cross-section in real
time during an ultrasound exam.
By changing the position of the cross-section, a variety of views of the underlying structure are obtained,
and these views can be used to understand a 3-dimensional structure in the body.
To complete survey a 3-dimensional structure in the body, it is necessary to collect 2D (B-Mode) images
which span a volume containing the structure. One way is to sweep the imaging cross-section by
translating it in a direction perpendicular to the cross-section. Another example method is to rotate the
cross section about a line contained in the cross section. The LOGIQ E9 Ultrasound System uses the
automated so called C-Scan for the motion perpendicular to automated B-scan. Once a representative
set of 2D (B-Mode) cross-sections are obtained, standard reconstruction techniques can be used to
construct other 2D (B-Mode) cross-sections, or to view the collection of the cross-sections as a 4D
images.
5-3-12-6-2 4D Image Presentation

The basic technique for 4D image presentation is to combine the 2D (B-Mode) crosssections into an
image which represents how the volume of the data would appear from a particular viewing direction.
The mathematics behind this feature is called 4D-rendering. Such combined images are called
projections, because the data from the volume is projected onto a flat 2-dimensional surface, e.g. the
ultrasound system display. This technique can be applied to any 2D (B-Mode) ultrasound mode.
Several techniques can be used to aid the human observer in understanding the resulting 2D (B-Mode)
image as a representation of a three-dimensional object. One is to rotate the volume of data, and
present the resulting sequence of 2D (B-Mode) projections to the observer. The changing direction of
observation helps the observer to separate the features in the volume according to their distance from
the observer.
5-3-12-7 Volume Navigation

Using a position sensor attached to the probe, Volume Navigation Fusion (V Nav) lets you import a pre-
acquired Ultrasound, CT or MR DICOM volume dataset and register it to the live Ultrasound image. As
a result, you can view live Ultrasound scanning simultaneously with the corresponding multi-planar
reformatted (MPR) slice from the pre-acquired dataset.
In addition, you can use V Nav as a type of GPS positioning marker to track an anatomy of interest.
V Nav is available in B-Mode, Color Flow, PDI, and Contrast Modes; it is not available while in 3D/4D
or when timeline modes are active. Biopsy capability is available while in V Nav.
5-3-12-8 Contrast Imaging

The LOGIQ E9 is designed for compatibility with commercially available Ultrasound contrast agents.
Because the availability of these agents is subject to government regulation and approval, product
features intended for use with these agents may not be commercially marketed nor made available
before the contrast agent is cleared for use. Contrast related product features are enabled only on
ultrasound systems for delivery to an authorized country or region of use. It is not currently approved for
use in the United States.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-3-12-9 Elastography
Elastography shows the spatial distribution of tissue elasticity properties in a region of interest by
estimating the strain before and after tissue distortion caused by external or internal forces. The strain
estimation is filtered and scaled to provide a smooth presentation when displayed.
With Elastography active, the image will show a color map/bar indicating the level of elasticity detected
by the system. The Elastography image is achieved by pulsating the probe manually while you are
scanning the anatomy of interest.
5-3-12-9-1 Shear Wave

With the Shear Wave option, the scanner creates the distortion by generating shear waves in tissue
using a diagnostic ultrasound transducer. Shear waves "push" the tissue at a low frequency in either a
single burst of high amplitude, long duration pulses or a series of such pulses.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-4
Software overview
LOGIQ E9 has a huge amount of features implemented in software. The intention with this section is to
give you a brief overview of the software used on LOGIQ E9. You can also refer to the Basic User
Manual for more information

5-4-3 LOGIQ E9 software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
5-4-4 Application software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-4-3 LOGIQ E9 software

LOGIQ E9 running R3.x and earlier software:
- The LOGIQ E9 Software is based on Windows XP Embedded.
LOGIQ E9 running R4.x and later software:

- The LOGIQ E9 Software is based on Windows 7 Embedded.
5 - 20 Section 5-4 - Software overview

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-4-4 Application software

The Application Software includes all the functionality for LOGIQ E9.
The software is installed, including the Service Platform.

At the next boot up, the Service Platform checks for the Serial Number by reading the file
c:\serialno.txt. If this file doesnt exist, it configures itself to check at the next boot up. If you run the
Service Platform at this point, you will see CRM unknown.
During this boot up, the scanner software (echoloader) tries to update the Service Platform with the
versions of the operating system, ghost, and software. This information is what gets sent to the
enterprise system (also known as InSite Questa Server) for display. This may fail because the
system is also trying to configure itself with the system serial number. Also during this boot cycle
the scanner software writes out serialno.txt.
During the second boot up, the Service Platform finds serialno.txt and configures itself. The scanner
software again tries to update the Service Platform with the various versions. Again, it may fail
because the Service Platform is updating itself with the system serial number. At this point, logging
into the Service Platform shows the correct CRM number. The Service Platform will stop looking for
the serial number now that it has it.
During the third boot up, the scanner software will again try to update the various versions to the
Service Platform. This time it will succeed. At this point, if you log onto the enterprise site, the
versions of the operating system, ghost, and application software will be correct.
During any subsequent boot up, the scanner software will update the various versions to the Service
Platform only if one of them has changed.
In summary,
It takes two boot cycles of the application software to get the CRM number correct (actually, it takes
two more boot cycles if you count the one after the ghost software completes and the one after
Windows finishes installing).
It can take an additional boot cycle to get the CRM correct on the Service Login page. Please be
aware that it may take this additional boot cycle before the versions are shown correctly on the
enterprise system.
In R2.x.x and later, Software installation copies the contents of the DVD to the Z drive so that it is
available for remote software reload.
5-4-4-1 System configuration and software R1.x.x

System configuration is stored on a Hard Disk Drive inside the Back End Processor.
At power up, all necessary software is loaded from the Hard Disk Drive.
The drive configuration is: c:\System, d:\User, e:\Archive, g:\Optical Drive

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-4-4-2 System Reload Theory - R2.x.x and R3.x
Figure 5-10 Grub loader configuration
When the system is successfully configured for remote software reload:
- The Grub loader is configured to load the contents of the Grub partition.
- Network settings are saved.
- The batch file is Z:\SoftwareReload.bat, and is created in the Z:\ partition.
This batch file contains the command necessary to reload the application software and restore network
settings.
The user starts the reload process be rebooting the system. This starts the software reload process:
The Grub loader boots into the grub partition, launches Symantec Ghost, with a command to reload the
C:\ partition from a ghost image stored on the Z:\ drive. After the ghost is complete, the system is
re-configured to boot from the C:\ drive and the system is rebooted. When the system reboots the
operating system will perform normal startup items such as finding devices and loading device drivers.
After a fixed time interval, the system reboots.
When the system starts up the second time, it performs tasks such as drive remapping. When these
tasks are complete, the system runs the batch file Z:\SoftwareReload.bat. Z:\SoftwareReload.bat starts
the LoadSoftware batch file, performs the complete software reload, restore of network settings,
followed by a reboot.
This completes the software reload cycle.
If reloading SW from the CD/DVD drive
When the system is booted from the base image it will present the user with a menu. When the user
selects an option to load the base image disk, it will be copied to the Z drive and then the image will be
loaded from the Z drive.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-4-4-3 System Reload Theory - R4.x

The reload feature is accessed from the service browser on the Utilities tab. The FE starts this feature
with the following actions:
Activate Disruptive mode from Common Utilities -> Disruptive Mode

Configure the system for reload from Common Utilities -> Invoke SW Reload. This includes backing
up the network configuration.
Reboot the system from Common Utilities -> System Shutdown.
Once the system restarts the following process is followed:
The system reboots and runs a Window PE boot image. Ghost is run and the C drive is reimaged.
When the C drive finishes reimaging the system boots into the reloaded C Drive Windows partition.
The system installs devices and reboots.
The system installs the software
The system reboots into the scanner software. The scanner software comes up in disruptive mode
and restores the network configuration.
Base Image
The base image has been modified to support software download (future) and reload. The following
table shows the disk partition layout. The C, D, and E partitions are the partitions that are standard to
support the product. Unlike earlier versions of software download the boot sector is the standard
Windows boot loader.
Table 5-4 Disk Partition Layout - R4.x
Boot sector
Windows Boot Sector Format
(MBR)
C: Windows XP / application NTFS
D: User settings / config NTFS
E: Database / data NTFS
Z: Software Repository NTFS
The Z partition contains the Software Repository and the tools necessary to support it. Even though it
is updated each time the software is installed, it needs to be setup as part of the base image.
If reloading SW from the CD/DVD Drive
When the system is booted from the base image it will present the user with a menu. When the user
selects an option to load the base image disk, it will be copied to the Z drive and then the image will be
loaded from the Z drive.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-4-4-4 System Reload Theory - R5 and later
Graphic shows proportional size of disk partition between R5 and R4.
Figure 5-11 Disk Partition Layout - R5 and later
R5 and later Partitions

475GB
Z: C: R4 Partitions
V: 230GB
D:
Z:
C:
D:
E:
E:
Table 5-5 Disk Partition Layout - R5.x and later
R6 and later Size R5 Size R4 Size

Partition
Usage (approximately) (approximately) (approximately)
Letter
GB GB GB
C: Windows 7 / application 60 60 50
D: User settings / configuration 20 20 20
E: Database / data 325 325 136
Software DVR
V: 20 Not Used N/A
(R6 and later)
Z: Software Repository 40 40 25

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-4-4-5 Software Download - R5 and later
Software Download will be used in future FMI deployments when there are changes on Software ONLY.
Software downloads are intended to update only the C partition. Either Base Load or Application
Software, or both. These Software updates will not be modifying user or archive partitions.
Once the package is scheduled, the user will see an envelope in the InSite icon on the LOGIQ E9 The
Back Office will schedule the Software packages to download to specified consoles according to the
effectivity of the FMI.
Figure 5-12 Software Down Load Packages - R5 and later

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-4-4-5 Software Download - R5 and later (contd)

When the user presses the ON/OFF button, the shutdown menu will show the option to download or
decline.
Figure 5-13 SW Download Shutdown Menu

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Once the package is downloaded, the user will have the option to install it.
Figure 5-14 SW Download - Download / Decline Menu

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Once the Software is installed, the user will have toanswer the Functional Checks Dialog Box to confirm
that the Software installed was successful.
Figure 5-15 SW Download Functional Checks Dialog Box

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Whether the SW installation is successful or not, a machine RFS will be generated to indicate status of
the update.
Figure 5-16 RFS generated to indicate status of update

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-4-4-6 Option Keys Storage in R5 and later
Option Dongle is not used in R5 and later.
Figure 5-17 No Option Dongle - R5 and later
Option strings are now going to be located in a file and will be stored in two different locations.
Backplane
Non Volatile RAM

Primary source
Part of Backplane VPD
Hard Drive
Stored as a text file under userdefs

Can be backed up to CD/DVD/USB
Can be Imported from Media or from Service folder

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-4-4-6 Option Keys Storage in R5 and later (contd)
Option Key File Storage in R5 and later.
Option Keys file is stored under userdefs Folder.
Figure 5-18 userdefs Folder - OptionKeys
Backups are created to help restore original

keys if the file is accidentally overwritten.
Up to 4 back up files are created. One every
time the system boots up.
Option Keys file is saved along with User

presets.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-4-4-7 Option Keys File in R5 and later - Import
Figure 5-19 Option Keys File in R5 and later - Import
Media (CD/DVD, USB)

Option keys file can be imported from
Service Folder
There is an import button on the Utilities/

System Admin Preset Menu.
5-4-4-8 Option String Structure in R6 and later

Starting with R6, more than one option string may be needed to activate all options purchased.
One of the option strings contains the basic option that enables the product to startup. Depending on
which string gets entered into the license dialog, the LOGIQ E9 may start up without requesting the
other option strings.
Additional option strings need to be entered via the Utility -> Admin Page.
Option strings can also be imported from a text file. This can be done from either the license dialog or
from the Utility -> Admin Page.
The LOGIQ E9 looks for files in the following locations:
CD/DVD
USB drive
D:\Service
It looks for a file that matches one of the following two names:
OptionKeys_XXXXXX.csv Where XXXXXX is the serial number of the LOGIQ E9

OptionKeys.txt
If both files are available, it picks the filename with the serial number. The file is a simple text file with
one option string per line.
The option strings for starting in R6 do contain non-alphabetic or numeric characters.
String representation of encrypted option key: 2-9, A-H, J-N, P-Z, "?", "%" and "&" (35 signs).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-5
Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel
The purpose of this section is to give you an overview of LOGIQ E9s Top Console and to tell you how
it function.

5-5-3 Transporting LOGIQ E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-5-4 Top Console description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5-5-5 LCD Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5-5-6 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5-5-3 Transporting LOGIQ E9

The Top Console must be locked into the lower, center (X/Y) position before transporting the
LOGIQ E9. The LCD Monitor must be in its flipped down position. And the rear wheel brake must be
set. Refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, or the
appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-4 Top Console description

The Top Console includes:
LCD monitor
Operator Panel with;
- An On/Off switch
- A Touch Panel Screen and a Control Panel with controls for manipulating the picture quality
and for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A)
- An alphanumeric keyboard (QWERTY keyboard).
- Trackball
- XYZ Control, e.g., frogleg controls and lock to move the Top Console left/right, forward/
backward, and up/down.
speakers for stereo sound output (used during Doppler scanning/replay)
A flexible harness of electrical wires secures the connection between the Top Console and the rest of
the LOGIQ E9.
The Top Console can be moved up/down (Z-axis), sideways to the left and to the right (X-axis) and back
and forth (Y-axis). The XYZ Mechanism is commonly referred to as the frogleg.
The up/down movement of the console is motor driven. The control buttons for the electrical motor are
centered between the handles. A gas spring inside the LOGIQ E9 counterbalances the Z-axis (vertical)
movement, lessening the load the Z motor must move.
The brakes used for locking the consoles X and Y movement are all operated by electrical motors
5-5-4-1 Top Consoles location in the LOGIQ E9

The Top Console is located on the top of the LOGIQ E9, and includes the Main LCD monitor, the Monitor
Arm, the Operator Panel with the Touch Screen, Speakers, an alphanumeric keyboard, and frogleg
controls.
Figure 5-20 Top Consoles location (A) - R1 through R3 (left) and R4 shown
A
A
5 - 34 Section 5-5 - Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-4-2 Top Console block diagram - R3.x and earlier
Figure 5-21 Top Console block diagram - R3 and earlier
MAIN LCD
HV INV +12V
W 5V DISPLAY
W VIDEO FLAT
CNTL SCREEN
E 5V USB/
MIC
AUDIO
USB USB
HUB
48V WLAN R2.x.x and R3.x.x
OPTION
F G REG
12V
5V

J24 MEMORY STICK

BULKHEAD J25
GEL WARMER BOARD R
5V FROM J22 5V J19
J21 TRACKBALL
P1 P5 P7
TEMP J22 USB
USB
CONTROL USB
P2 HUB
J18
USB P8 J23
USB KEYBOARD
AUDIO
P3 48V 3.3V +12V
12V 5V 3.3V
+5V
P4 +48V J1
P6 uP
REG
ON/ 5V
OFF TOUCH +12V
L
HV INV
USB/ 10.4"
VIDEO LCD SWITCH
BOARD
BULKHEAD UP/DN/LOCK
PLATE BUTTONS
DVI VIDEO
TO/FROM 48V POWER/AUDIO U OP PANEL
MAIN USB FOR OP PANEL
CONSOLE USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL
CABLE: D UP/DN/BRAKE/RELEASE SWITCHES
5-5-4-3 Input Signals

On/Off Switch and LED
DVI Video for the Main Monitor
+48 VDC power for the electronics
Audio (Stereo) for the speakers
USB line dedicated to the Touchscreen Video
5-5-4-4 Bidirectional Signals

USB for Op Panel uses a USB HUB with 7 outlets:
- 2 x USB connector on the Bulk Head (one goes to main monitor; other is spare)
- 2 x USB connectors on the Operator Panel
- USB for the Trackball
- USB for the Alphanumeric Key Board
- USB for the Switch Board Rotary Devices and the touch keys on the Touch Screen
5-5-4-5 Fuses, Jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs

Dip Switches on the Trackball. Refer to Chapter 8.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-4-6 Top Console block diagram - R4.x
Figure 5-22 Top Console block diagram - R4.x
+12V
5V
HV INV MAIN LCD
VIDEO FLAT
DISPLAY
CNTL SCREEN
5V USB/
MIC
AUDIO
USB USB
NOT INSTALLED HUB NOT
E G STARTING USED
48V
12V
APRIL 2014 REG 5V

MEMORY STICK
J24
GEL WARMER J25
BOARD J19 TRACKBALL
TEMP J21
P1 P5 P7
CONTROL USB
J22 USB
USB
HUB
P2 USB
J18
P8 J23
AUDIO
USB KEYBOARD
P3 48V 3.3V +12V
12V 5V 3.3V
P4 +5V
+48V J1
P6 REG uP
ON/
OFF 5V +12V
L TOUCH
HV INV
USB/ 10.4"
VIDEO LCD SWITCH
BOARD
BULKHEAD
PLATE UP/DN/LOCK
BUTTONS
MAIN CABLE U OP PANEL

DVI VIDEO
TO/FROM 48V POWER/AUDIO
USB FOR OP PANEL
MAIN USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL
CONSOLE UP/DN/BRAKE/RELEASE SWITCHES
CABLE: D


- 2 x USB connector on the Bulk Head (one goes to main monitor; other is spare

Dip Switches on the Trackball. Refer to Chapter 8.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-4-10 Top Console block diagram - R5.x and later*

* On console model 5205000-9 (R6.x) a 23 inch Widescreen Ultrasound LCD Monitor which requires a
new Bulkhead Board. To easily identify and understand the differences, see: Figure 5-6 "LOGIQ E9 23
inch LCD Monitor Block diagram - R6.x and later" on page 5-11.
Figure 5-23 Top Console block diagram - R5.x and later
UPPER OP J3 MEMORY STICK

USB
HUB MICROPHONE
J25 (2)
BULKHEAD R J4
BOARD J53
P1 P5 J21 USB TRACK
J52
USB USB J18
BALL
J22 HUB
HUB
(3)
USB J23 (7)
P8 J51
USB J17
KEYBOARD
AUDIO
P3 48V
+48V uP
VPD
BKLT
VPD
P4
REG
12V CNTRL TOUCH

P6 J12 J5 J26 J7 12V
CNTRL
L ENABLE LED
REG
5V ON/
CN10 CN4
BKLight PCAP OFF
3.3V VIDEO
CNTRL TOUCH
CN7
10.4" BUTTONS, LIGHTS
SVGA
ROTARIES, SLIDES
BULKHEAD UP/DN/ 5V 3.3V

PLATE LOCK REG LOWER OP
BUTTONS
MAIN CABLE OP PANEL

DVI VIDEO
48V POWER/AUDIO
USB for OP PANEL
USB for VIDEO on TOUCH PANEL


- 1 USB connector on the Bulk Head (goes to main monitor)

Refer to Chapter 8. No Dip Switches on the Trackball.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-5 Monitor
5-5-5-1 LCD Monitor Block Diagram - R3.x and earlier

A 19-inch High Resolution Monitor with non-interlace scan is used as the main monitor.
Figure 5-24 Main LCD Monitor Block Diagram - R3.x and earlier
W HV INV +12V MAIN LCD

5V
VIDEO FLAT DISPLAY
E CNTL SCREEN
5V USB/
MIC
AUDIO
USB USB
F HUB
WLAN
48V
12V R2.x.x and R3.x.x

REG
5V OPTION

Digital Video Signals (HDMI)
+48 VDC

USB (Microphone)
WLAN Option in R2.x.x and R3.x.x
5-5-5-4 Output Signals

NONE

NONE
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-5 Monitor (contd)
5-5-5-6 LCD Monitor V2 Block Diagram - R4.x and R5.x

A 19-inch High Resolution Monitor V2 with non-interlace scan is used as the main monitor.
Figure 5-25 Main LCD Monitor V2 Block Diagram - R4.x and R5.x
+12V MAIN LCD

HV INV
5V DISPLAY
VIDEO FLAT
CNTL SCREEN
5V USB/
MIC
E AUDIO
USB USB
HUB NOT
USED
48V
12V
REG 5V

+48 VDC

USB (Microphone)
USB (not used)

NONE

NONE

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-5-11 23 inch Wide Screen Ultrasound LCD Monitor - R6.x and later
A 23 inch Wide Screen, High Definition Ultrasound LCD, with non-interlace scan is used as the main
monitor. Also see: 5-5-5-21 "USB Hub - R6.x and later" on page 5-42.
Figure 5-26 LOGIQ E9 23 inch LCD Monitor Block diagram - R6.x and later
A
5
P1
BULKHEAD
4
P2 P10 BOARD
DVI VIDEO
P3
from Main
Cable
3 L
2
1
BULKHEAD
PLATE
A Monitor Arm Adapter ground 3. Power to J1
1. HDMI to P4 4. USB to external USB
2. USB to P3 5. USB Microphone Dongle (option)

+48 VDC

USB (Microphone, Option)
USB (not used)

NONE

NONE
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-5-16 22 inch Wide Screen Ultrasound OLED Monitor - R6.x and later
A 22 inch Wide Screen, High Definition Ultrasound OLED (Organic Light-emitting Diodes), with non-
interlace scan is used as the main monitor. Also see: 5-5-5-21 "USB Hub - R6.x and later" on page 5-42.
Figure 5-27 LOGIQ E9 OLED Monitor Block diagram - R6.x and later
R
3
A
P1
BULKHEAD
BOARD
P2
P3 P10
}
USB HDMI PWR DVI VIDEO
from Main
Cable
BULKHEAD
PLATE
1
2
A Monitor Arm Adapter ground 3. USB to external USB

1. HDMI from P10 4. USB Microphone Dongle (option)
2. Power and USB from P3

+48 VDC

USB (Microphone, Option)
USB (not used)

NONE

NONE

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-5-21 USB Hub - R6.x and later

The internal USB hub supports the USB 3.0 specification. One uplink and three downlinks (minimum).
One for LCD controller

Two accessible ports
NOTE: BEP6.2 supports USB 2.0 speeds. USB 3.0 devices can be connected, but the BEP6.2 will not
support USB 3.0 speeds and will drive the device as USB2.0.
Figure 5-28 USB Hub - R6.x and later
2 USB 3.0 OSD

Ports Remote
USB 3.0
Ports
USB 3.0
Input Conn.
Includes a 900mA over current protection for each port.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-6-1 Operator Panel general description

The Operator Panel includes an On/Off switch, different controls for manipulating the picture quality,
and controls for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A), an alphanumeric keyboard and frogleg controls.
Figure 5-29 Operator Panel
13
1.) Probe and Cord Holder

2.) USB Ports (2)
3.) Measurement Selection Menu and Joystick controls
4.) Keyboard
5.) Feature Keys: Elastography, Volume, Navigation, Loop View, Contrast
6.) Modes (B, M, CF, PDI, PW, CW, TVi) /Gain/XYZ Controls for 3D/4D Mode
7.) TGC
8.) Trackball, Trackball Keys, Pointer, Measure, Comment, Body Pattern, Clear, Zoom, 3D/4D, P1
See: Figure 5-30 "Customer Removable Trackball" on page 5-44.
9.) L/R, Start/Stop, Freeze
10.)Steer/Width/Depth/Reverse
11.)Auto
12.)P2, P3, P4
13.)Frogleg Controls (XYZ Mechanism)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-6-1 Operator Panel general description (contd)

Customer Removable Trackball introduced for forward production in R4.
A new Bezel was introduced with different dimensions around the Trackball and Trackball Keys to fit the
Removable Trackball. Trackball Keys are slightly narrower.
Figure 5-30 Customer Removable Trackball
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-6-2 Operator Panel Block Diagram
Figure 5-31 Operator Panel Block Diagram - R4 and earlier
USB Inductive or
Optical Trackball BUTTON MATRIX
E J6 BUTTON MATRIX KEYBRD
CONTROLLER AMBER
LED +12V
ENCODERS (X12) MATRIX
+5V
GRN CH A/B HI FET
BUFFER
+5V
CH A/B
BUFFER AMB
AMB PWM
A/N KEYBOARD ON/OFF CH A/B INTENSITY
BACKLIGHT BUTTON BUFFER CONTROL
LED MATRIX LOW FET
+12V SLIDE
POTS
AMB AMB
GREEN
ENABLE +3.3V +3.3V LED
FET +12V
A/N KEYBOARD MATRIX A/D +3.3V MATRIX
CONV QUAD QUAD QUAD
HI FET
USB + MUX DETECT DETECT DETECT
KEYBRD CHIP
+5V
CONTROLLER SELECT
GRN
PWM
SERIAL INTENSITY
BUS CONTROL
J7
LOW FET
+12 / +5 / +3.3V
J1 SWITCH PCB
D
F
A
J19 J18 J1 CONTROL PCB

+12 / +5 / +3.3V
+12V
MODE+
CLK
SERIAL BUS
+3.3V
I2C
+5V BUS BOOT
J5 MICRO- EEPROM
TS CONTROL
CTRL
AUX USB LER PROGRAM
EEPROM
PCB
AUX USB J3 RAM
PORT 1 5V stby
AUX USB PWR LED
PORT 2 +3.3V PWR SW
2.5V=MAX BRIGHT
0V = MIN
+3.3V USB +3.3V
USB6
HV INVERTER J6 HUB
REG +5V
XFMR
+12V B +12V EE
+12V
POT
ENABLE
PTC
3.3V 3.3V USB5

C 48V
TOUCH LVDS USB
SCREEN XMTR uP
J24 J25
Daughter Card
J22 J21 J23
LCD DISPLAY
UPPER OP PANEL REAR SHEET METAL
NOTE: High Voltage Inverter was replaced by LED Backlight Driver in later console models. See:
Section 9-8 "Top Console parts" on page 9-19.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-6-2 Operator Panel Block Diagram (contd)
Figure 5-32 Operator Panel Block Diagram - R5 and later

USB
HUB MICROPHONE
J25 (2)
J4
J53
J21 USB TRACK
J52
USB USB J18
BALL
J22 HUB
HUB
(3)
J23 (7)
J51
USB J17
KEYBOARD
+48V uP
VPD
BKLT
VPD
REG
12V CNTRL TOUCH

J12 J5 J26 J7 12V
CNTRL
ENABLE
LED
REG
5V ON/
CN10 CN4
BKLight PCAP OFF
3.3V VIDEO
CNTRL TOUCH
CN7
SVGA
ROTARIES, SLIDES
5V 3.3V
REG LOWER OP
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-6-3 Op Panel Interface - R4 and earlier
Figure 5-33 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cable placement - R4 and earlier
Power - ON/OFF LOGIC E9

1. USB - Video from BEP 3. 5. USB -Trackball
to BEP USB - OUT to Bulkhead
7.
USB - Upper OP Panel USB - AN Keyboard and Board
2. 4. 6. Lower OP Panel
from BEP Power

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-6-4 Op Panel Interface - R5 and later
Figure 5-34 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cables - R5 5208000 and 5209000 family

USB
HUB MICROPHONE
R J25 (2)
J4 6
BULKHEAD
BOARD
P5 J21 USB TRACK 6 J53
P1
J22 USB USB J18 8 J52
HUB BALL
HUB
(3)
USB J23 (7)
P8 J51
USB J17
KEYBOARD
AUDIO 7
P3 48V
+48V uP
VPD
BKLT
VPD
P4
REG
12V CNTRL TOUCH
P6 J12 J5 J26 J7 12V
CNTRL
1 2 3
ENABLE
L LED
REG
5V ON/
CN10 CN4
BKLight PCAP OFF
3.3V VIDEO
CNTRL TOUCH
CN7
4 SVGA
ROTARIES, SLIDES

BUTTONS
MAIN CABLE OP PANEL X = comes in OP Panel Cable Kit

DVI VIDEO
48V POWER/AUDIO
USB for OP PANEL
Customer USB Ports:

1. Video Controller Power 3. Backlight 5. Power - J17 7. Power Upper to Lower
USB - J16
2. Video Controller USB 4. Video 6. Trackball 8. USB Upper to Lower
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-6-4 Op Panel Interface - R5 and later (contd)
Figure 5-35 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cable placement - R5 and later
1. Upper OP Panel 4. USB - Video - J22

48V Power - ON/OFF LOGIC to
2. USB - Main Display - J25 5.
BEP - J23
Upper to Lower Connector:
3. USB - BEP - J21 6. Power - J17 (top)
USB - J16

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-6-5 Op Panel Interface Schematic - R4 and earlier
Figure 5-36 Op Panel Interface Schematic - R4 and earlier
+5VSTBY +5VSTBY
150 Q28
LOWER OP
GRN
150
UPPER OP
J23 PWR_LED+ Q30 AMBER
6
22 22
Ribbon Cable
+5VSTBY
2 +5VSTBY
23 23
+5VSTBY
ON/OFF SW 100 also to

PWR_SW 100
1 Upper OP
21 21 USB -
LOGIQ E9
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-5-6-6 Op Panel Interface Schematic - R5 and later
Figure 5-37 Op Panel Interface Schematic - R5 and later
+5VSTBY +5VSTBY
150
LOWER OP
GRN
150
UPPER OP
J17 PWR_LED+ PWR_LED AMBER
6
8 8
8 Pin Molex Micro-Fit
+5VSTBY
2 +5VSTBY
2 2
+5VSTBY
ON/OFF SW 100 also to

PWR_SW 100
1 uProc in
1 1 the Lower
OP I/O

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-6
Main Console
5-6-1 Main Console description
Figure 5-38 Main Console location (A)
The Main Console hosts the:
Patient HDD and Network Indicators

Front End Card Rack
Back End Processor (BEP)
Optional B/W printer
DVD Recorder (card in BEP) Option
DVD player
Power Supply (Main Power)
4D Motor Controller Option
Volume Navigation Option
Lifting mechanism for the Frog Leg and Top Console
Rear handle
Front and Rear Casters with lock and brake mechanism
The Main Console consists of a frame that acts as the skeleton of the LOGIQ E9. The other parts, listed
above, are mounted to the frame. The outside of the Main Console is covered with plastic covers.
5 - 52 Section 5-6 - Main Console

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-7
Air Flow control
5-7-1 General description
The Air Flow Control includes the following components: Air cooling fans located at the bottom of the
LOGIQ E9.
5-7-2 Location in the LOGIQ E9

There are two filters. One located on the rear of the LOGIQ E9 and one located beneath the air cooling
fans at the bottom of the LOGIQ E9. Refer to Chapter 8 for more information.
Section 5-8
Casters and Brakes description
The front brake is used for everyday use; the back brake is ONLY used to transport the LOGIQ E9. Refer
to Chapter 8 for more information.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-9
Card Rack description
The purpose of this section is to tell you about the Card Rack, sometimes referred to as the Front End
Card Rack, and how it functions.

5-9-3 Card Rack General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5-9-4 Transmitter and Receiver subsystem - GFI configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5-9-5 Global Front End Interface (GFI) Board - GFI configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5-9-6 MRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5 - 54 Section 5-9 - Card Rack description

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-3 Card Rack General description

The Card Rack with the electronics is also called the Front End Card Rack.
NOTICE Do not insert a card in the wrong position in the card rack. If the power is turned on with a card placed
in the wrong position, the LOGIQ E9 can be damaged.
5-9-3-1 Card Rack cards overview (GFI configuration shown)
Figure 5-39 Card Rack cards - GFI configuration
5-9-3-2 Card Rack cards overview - MRX Configuration
Figure 5-40 Card Rack Cage - MRX
Shield
GRLY
MRX
GTX PD

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-3-3 Card Rack Location in the LOGIQ E9
Figure 5-41 Card Rack Location (CardRack door identified)
The Card Rack is located on the right side of the LOGIQ E9, behind the Right Side Cover.
5-9-3-4 Input DC voltages

These voltages comes from the Main Power Supply.
+24 VDC
+/-6 DC
V
+/- 15 VDC
+11 VDC
+/- 100VDC, also known as the Probe Mux voltage (PMX).
5-9-3-5 Input Pulser voltages

TSV1: 0 VDC to 140 VDC
These voltages come from the Main Power Supply.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-3-6 Input signals

RX signals from probes
BEP to Card Rack Backplane Cable
- +5VDC (to GFI)
5-9-3-7 Bidirectional signals

PCI Express cable
- control signals from the BEP
- digital data to the BEP
- I2C bus
- Boundary Scan
5-9-3-8 Output signals

TX signals to probes
- GFI audio (to BEP)
5-9-3-9 Fuses, jumpers, DIP-switches and LEDs

See descriptions for each card/module

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-4 Transmitter and Receiver subsystem - GFI configuration
5-9-4-1 Transmitter signal path
Figure 5-42 The Ultrasound Transmitter with three GTX boards - GFI configuration
1 2
GRX DRX
5 6
GRLY
3
4 7
GFI
8
9 11
16
10
14 15
GTX
12
13
1. Doppler Probe 5. GRX 9. DLP 13. STA_BUS
DL or DLP, pending on
2. CW_BUS (RX) 6. DRX 10. 14. FE_BUS
Relay Board
3. Probes 7. FE_BUS 11. XD_BUS 15. GFI Board
4. Relay Board 8. LVDS_BUS 12. GTX 16. PCIe BUS to/from BEP
The Global Front End Interface (GFI) board loads scan parameters via the FE_BUS into local RAM on
the GTX boards and on the DRX boards.
The scan parameters includes probe dependant steering and focusing delay for a certain scan pattern.
Thus, when the GFI board goes through a scan sequence, it loads the proper contents of the RAM into
the TX ASIC (DAVID), then issues a transmit trigger pulse (TXTRIG_L) for the transmitter.
By firing the transmit pulses from the different elements at certain repeated time intervals and with
different delays, the ultrasound beam can be steered in desired directions to obtain the selected scan
patterns (e.g. B+Mode, Color Flow etc.).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-4-1 Transmitter signal path (contd)

The ultrasound transmit bursts are generated on the GTX boards, initiated by the transmit trigger pulse
(TXTRIG_L). The transmit trigger starts the TX ASIC (DAVID) on the GTX board, each generating
several transmit pulses with different delays. The transmit pulses are then routed to separate transmit
amplifiers fed with voltage HV1 and HV2. The voltages HV1 and HV2 are controlled by the Acoustic
Power Control software.
The transmit pulses are routed via the Front Plane, located on the front side of the GTX, GRX and Relay
boards, to the Relay board, where they are fed to the selected probe.
5-9-4-2 Phased and Linear Array probes

Phased and Linear Array probes consist of several identical transducer elements (e.g. 64, 128).
Four probes can be connected to the LOGIQ E9 at the same time. The probe connectors are physically
located on the Relay Board, where one is selected and connected to the transmitter (GTX boards) and
receiver (GRX board) through a number of relays.
For available probes, see: See On-line Help or Chapter 17 of the Basic User Manual.
The three right-most probe connectors are DLP Connectors. You can connect any probe thats name
ends in -D.
The left-most probe connector is aNon-DLP Connector. You can connect either the 3CRF or S1-5 probe
in this port.
CAUTION DO NOT CONNECT ANY LOGIQ 9 PROBES TO THE LOGIQ E9.

For available probes, see: See On-line Help or Chapter 17 of the Basic User Manual.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-4-3 Receiver signal path
Figure 5-43 The Ultrasound Receiver - GFI configuration
1 2
GRX DRX
5 6
GRLY
3
4 7
GFI
8
9 11
16
10
14 15
GTX
12
13
Relay Board
The reflected signal from body structures and blood cells are routed from the probe, via the Relay Board
and the Front Plane to the GRX (receiver) boards, where pre-amplification and Analog Time Gain
Compensation (ATGC) is performed. The gain is determined by an analog control signal (ATGC)
generated by the Global Front End Interface (GFI) board.
On the very input of the GRX boards are transmit/receive (T/R) switches to prevent the transmitters from
damaging the receivers.
The output channels from the GRX boards are fed to the DRX boards where the signals in each receiver
channel are A/D converted. Then the beamforming for the received signals takes place.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-4-4 Signal control
Figure 5-44 The Ultrasound Transmitter and Receiver Control Signals - GFI configuration
1 2
GRX DRX
5 6
GRLY
3
4 7
GFI
8
9 11
16
10
14 15
GTX
12
13
Relay Board
The Global Radio Frequency Interface (GFI) board controls the GTX (transmitter) and GRX / DRX
(analog and digital receiver boards). GFI loads all parameters to the GTX and DRX ASICs. It reads the
probe identification, selects probe connector on Relay board and controls the high voltage multiplexer
in linear probes.
In addition the GFI generates:
the transmit trigger pulse for GTX

a receive synchronization pulse (TXTRIG_L) used by DRX
a differential ATGC voltage used by GRX
global 50 MHz and 200 MHz system clocks and Reset pulse (SRES)
Test signal / Dither signal
The output signals from the DRX is fed to the GFI for further signal processing. The result is transferred
via the PCI Express (PCIe) bus to the BEP for more signal processing.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-5 Global Front End Interface (GFI) Board - GFI configuration
5-9-5-1 General description

The GFI is the Front End Card Racks interface to the Back End Processor (BEP).
Figure 5-45 GFI block diagram - GFI configuration
Doppler
Audio
FAN ctrl
ATGC DAC FE Cache

16 bit SDR
TGEN DAC 133MHz
TEE PROBE Power

GFEINTF DC/DC
XCVFX40
ADC I/F
Probe Mux/
TxPower/
FE Control/ JTAG
Timers CONTROL
SAP control
3.125Gb/6.25Gb CDR Data/Control Link x4 EMIF

800Mb SS GTX Control Link x2 MLA
16 bit
24 bit
LVDS CW data (300 Mb * 2) TMS320C6455
Backplane
CedSdem
67 PINS 64 bit @ 133MHz
QDR2 XC4VSX35 (98 PINS)
TGC I/O Banks = 11
RAM Max User I/O = 448
clk200
clk156
clk50I clk200
clk156
clk50Q CLOCK clk50I
DDR-II
GENERATOR
500MHz
32 bit
32bit@66MHz
20 Buses
I2C MUX 2
PCI to
2.5Gbps 1X
PCI-Express PCI-Express
Connector
DRX/GTX bridge
CONFIG
FPGA
CONFIG
xc9572XL

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-5-1 General description (contd)

During boot, various setup parameters are downloaded from the BEPs Hard Drive, via the PCI Express
bus to the GFI2 board. On the GFI2 board, the parameters are loaded to a high speed, DDR II RAM.
When a scanning mode is selected, or scanning parameters are adjusted, the GFI board receives setup
parameters from the BEP and pass these on to the FE boards. The GFI also, based on some of these
parameters, controls some front end signals directly.
The digitized and beamformed ultrasound data, received from the DRX boards, are further processed
on the GFI board before the result is sent to the BEP for use in the display system.
The Gecko FEbus provides a data channel between the GFI module and the other Front End modules,
such as the GTX and DRX modules. An overview of the structure of the Serial FEBus is depicted in the
figure below.
5-9-5-1-1 Power Note

When TS_OK goes low, the GFI stops sending TS-STROBE to PS and sends a Transmit Stop to GTX.
the GTX boards then shut off transmit.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

GFEINTF
The GFEINTF (Front End Interface) is used to provide control data to the rest of the FE and receive data
back from the FE.
FE Cache SDR 133 MHz: Used to store setup data for FE.
Doppler Audio: Setup parameters for Doppler.
ATGC DAC: Digital to analog converter for the Time Gain Control (TGC) used by the GRX boards.
TGEN DAC:
TEE PROBE: Signals to control the TEE probe. Signals from the switches on the TEE probe.
(FUTURE)
ADC I/F:
Probe Mux/ TX Power/ FE Control/ Timers SAP Control
I2C controller used for monitoring temperatures and voltages throughout the front end. The I2C
controller is also used to read VPD proms on the other front end boards.
Power DC/DC
The input voltage (24 VDC) is converted to the needed on-board voltages.
JTAG CONTROL
JTAG boundary scan is used during production testing of the board.
4D Controller Module
Monitors the outputs of the 4D Motor Controller.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-5-2 Location in the LOGIQ E9

The GFI2 board is plugged into the Backplane as the right most board in the FE rack.
Figure 5-46 GFI2 location - GFI configuration
GFI2 BOARD
5-9-5-3 Input DC Voltages

+24 DC (from Main Power via Backplane)
+/- 15 VDC
+/- 6VA DC
BEP5V
Other needed voltages are generated locally on the GFI.
5-9-5-4 Clocks
These clocks are generated on the board:
200 MHz for on board (GFI) use

200/50 MHz (for the RX board)
200 MHz for the RX board

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-5-5 Control Signals

TS_LEVEL_OK (indicates level stable and ready for transmit)
TS_OK (indicates voltages, currents, power OK)
5-9-5-6 Safety
It is important that the GFI has a direct connection to the TXPS so that an emergency shutdown will
happen if the DSP software crashes or a probe over temperature situation is detected (this applies to
all probes with a thermistor in the probe tip).
For safety reasons a hardware watchdog is required, this watchdog must stop all ultrasound transmit if
not toggled frequently. Thus, if the DSP software crashes, all ultrasound transmission will cease.
The GFI module safety hardware shall completely disable the energizing of the probe should the
temperature exceed one of the hard coded maximum temperature references. This functionality may be
enabled and disabled by software.
The GFI can detect transmit overload condition from each GTX board.
5-9-5-7 I2C Interface

I2C Interface. There is a need for at least one I2C interface in order to read PROM contents, do
temperature measurements, voltage measurements, fans, DC power, and so on.
The GFI2 board supports the following I2C buses for reading and writing EEPROMs containing Vital
Product Data, reading temperature sensors, controlling registers etc.
DRX_BUS: 3.3V
GTX_BUS: 3.3V
RX128_BUS: 3.3V
RLY_BUS: 3.3V
PROBE_BUS: 3.3V
GFI_BUS: 3.3V
4D_MOT_BUS: 3.3V
Please refer to the VDP Data section at section 5-17 for more information.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-5-8 Outputs
PCI Express bus to BEP (connector J14 on the card)
STA bus
Other Control signals like TXTRIG etc.
5-9-5-9 Fuses, Jumpers and DIP-switches

None
5-9-5-10 LEDs on the GFI board
Table 5-6 LEDs on the GFI board
LED NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION NORMAL OPERATION START UP ERROR CONDITION

DS1 GREEN 3V3 STATUS
DS3 GREEN 1V8 STATUS LIT (ON) Transition to being ON OFF*
DS4 GREEN CORE DSP STATUS
DS6 GREEN DRX1 LIT IF DRX 1 IS MISSING**
DS7 GREEN DRX2 LIT IF DRX 2 IS MISSING

DARK IF THE FPGAs ON
DS8 GREEN DRX3 LIT IF DRX 3 IS MISSING
THE BOARDS HAVE NOT
DS9 GREEN DRX4 LIT IF DRX 4 IS MISSING BEEN SUCCESSFULLY
DARK BEFORE STARTUP, PROGRAMMED -- i.e.,
DS10 GREEN GTX1 LIT IF GTX 1 IS MISSING** SOMETHING IS WRONG
DS11 GREEN GTX2 LIT IF GTX 2 IS MISSING WITH THE
CORRSPONDING BOARD.
DS12 GREEN GTX3 LIT IF GTX 3 IS MISSING
DS13 GREEN GTX4 LIT IF GTX 4 IS MISSING

LIT (ON) ONCE
DS14 GREEN GFI-DONE
PROGRAMMING IS DONE
DS15 GREEN VDD_3V3

DS16 GREEN VDD_1V5 OFF DURING START-UP OFF*
LIT (ON)
DS17 GREEN VDA_3V3
DS18 GREEN VDA_1V5

DS19 GREEN SD_DEBUG 0

NOT USED FOR SERVICE
DS22 GREEN GFE_DEBUG 0
*IF DSI1-5 AND 14-18 IS OFF, THEN SOMETHING IS WRONG WITH THE BOARD.
**NOT PRESENT ON THE LOGIQ E9.
5-9-5-11 Test points on the GFI board

There are no test points for use by Service.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-6 MRX
Figure 5-47 MRX Board and LEDS on MRX Board
NAT0 22
Q1 DS1 DS2 C1
BD3 CHIP1
25 U2 24
C12
C10 C2
C11
AFE_SCLK FL1
C5
C6
TP1 C3 C4
U1 AR2 AR3
AFE 223
C8
C9
Q4 Q2 Q3 U3
TSIG_OUT U4 AR1
C7
TP4
C13
U5 U6 TRS115
C17
C16
TP2
TP3 15VNA AFE_DIN TP5 FL2
C15
R2
R1 FL5 CH152 48 AB1 A1 TP6 VR1
C14 U8 FL7
FL4
R3
FL3 C993
AFE 222
P1 2 C23 PA TEMP J5
TP8 C25 U7 TP9
FL6
C28
C18 C21
BAR CODE
C27
R7 6VPA U9 C1014 C319
TP7
TRS114
C29 CH144 C31 1V2 NAT0 R244 C35
FL8
15VPA
U130
C36
C39 C40 FL9 R17
R97
U10 C41 C42 C43 C1015
C32
C33 C26 TP10 R5
C38 FL10 U12 R249 U11
FL97
R8 U129
C37 U13 25 24
R9 R13
R10 R14
R11 R15
R12 R16
C1017
C46
U14
C44 C45
AFE 221
C47 R18
C49 AR5 U15
TRS113
VR2 C48 U17 U18 U19

C50
15 16 U21
AB22 A22 25
CH136
VR3
U22 BD3 CHIP0 U20
C51 C54
TP11 C52 48
U16 AR6
C53 C56
J11 5V_JTAG
NATHAN 0
AFE 220
C55
TP13
A B C D E F TP12 VR4
TP14
GND GND
T R S 112
C57 D1 Q5 D2 D3 D4 D5 Q6 ADPRBCD C61

R21 14 C60 C62
Q7 25 24 25 24 2 P2
R22
CH128 U26 NAT1
BD2 CHIP1
U24
R25 DS3 DS4 R23

U23
C58 R26
C63
C59
C66
C64
15
U25
TP15
AFE 219
AFE Q8 Q9
C67
C65
SCLK 48 R24
T R S 119
13
25 24 48 U28 11
FL11
TP16
CH184 AFE_DIN 48 A1 J4
U29
AB1
R27
U27
C1005
AFE 218
U32 C72 C71
C69
C77
R29
R30
R31
TP17 48
T R S 118
C76 C74
C79
CH176 C75 1V2 NAT1 25
U30 24 U31
C80
U33
C78
C82 U34
C81 TP18 C83
R33 R37
R34 R38
R35 R39
R36 R40
C84
VR5 C88 TTRIG
C87
C86
Q10 R41 F E D C B A
AFE 217
C85
C90
C91
C89
R43
T R S 117
C93 U35 C92 U36

R42
C94
R46 A22
AB22
U37
R47
C97
CH168 BD2 CHIP0
R44
C95 C103 NATHAN 1 C96
U38
L1
C98
R45
C100
C104
C99
C101
AFE 216
TP20
U39
TP19 U40
C105
C102 FL12 SYNC C106
TXTRIG
TRS116
PWB
25 U42 24
5393909 REV 5 C107
C108 C109
C110
VR6 VR7
C114
C111 CH160 NAT2 U44 C112

C113 AFE_SCLK BD1 CHIP1 DS5 DS6 C116 A1 A11
TP21 C115
C117
TP22
AFE 215
1V8_MVP
R50
A1
Q11
C121
Q12 R48 R49 U43

R51 A9 R52
C119
U41
T R S 123
TP23 R53 R54

C118
C120
VR8 AFE_DIN R55 R56 C122
R57 R58
CH216 48 R59 R60
R64
A1 C123
AB1 R11 R61 J9 R62 22
R1 R65 R66
R67
VGA R63 C994 R68 J1 U45
C127
FLT Q13 C129 20
AFE 214
TP26
C125
C132 C134
TP24 C128 TP25 C955
C130 C131
T R S 122
R71 R75
R72 R76
R73 R77
R74 R78
1V2 NAT2 FPGA SQ PIN
U46 CH208 C135
U50 AP34
22 U54
J12 C136 C137
AP1
U48 C138 10
U47 U49 C140
AFE 213
C141
PWA C139
MRX
C142 J2
TRS121
R80 R81 C144

R79 R84 R85
5393908
AB22 A22 C143

CH200 BD1 CHIP0
C145
U53 NATHAN 2 C146

J8
33 C147
48
AFE 212
R86 R87
U51 U52 C148

49 32 TP27
TRS120
GND
C150
C152
C155
C149
R539
C151
C156
R88
C154
CH192 25 U57 24 NAT3

TP28 DS7 DS8 C153
AFE_SCLK 25
C157
TXTRIG 64 17 C160
R91
TP29
C159
BD3 CHIP2
C163
R170
R92
AFE 211
TP30 U56 U55 16 A1 C158

GND U58 C164
C161 C162
TP32 2V5_AFE
R93 Q14 Q15 A34

TRS111
K
J3 TP31 C165
R94
U59
C166
C167
AFE_DIN R358_6
FL30_6
R354_6
R353_6
C168 CH120 FL29_6 R360_6
48
R96
R95 AB1 A1 R355_6 R362_6 SP35_6

U60
C169
C174_6 R351_6
C1006 R357_6 R359_6
AFE 210
C173_6 R361_6
C174 A1 A29 AJ29
C171 15
C173
e1
R99 R100
R350_6
TP33
TRS110
CH112 C176 J1
U58_6
1V2 NAT3
R346_6
C178
VR9 C177 U62 11

C180 C179
R343_6
R345_6
U57_6
R101 R105
R102 R106
R103 R107
R104 R108
C182
R334_6 R328_6
J9 A1
R330_6
U61
AFE 209
C181
Q26
A B C D E F C183
U52_6
TRS109
R177
R316_6
C184 TP34 BD3 CHIP2
GND
R326_6
U63
R109 CH104 AB22 A22

R110
R321_6
R315_6
U64 NATHAN 3 R313_6
R111 Q16 A1
R112 C188
C187
U65
C186
C152_6 AJ1
R169
C185 C191 16 C150_6 R310_6

C151_6
AFE 208
FL27_6
R309_6
C189 C153_6
17
C192
64 FL28_6 R312_6 F E D C B A
C190
FL13
TRS108
C145_6 C149_6
DS16
VR10 PCIE PWR GOOD C193 C144_6
TP35 CH96 U66 TP19_6 TP31_6 C194 C195
25 24 NAT4
C199
3V3PA U1 U17 A1
R234_6
1V8 DSP
PCIRSTN
AFE_SCLK 49 BD2 CHIP2 DS9 DS10

C197
C196 32 Y1
C198
TP37
C202 C201
AFE 207
U67 TP36
SP31_6
R116 33 48
C203
C200
Q17 Q18 U29_6

C204
TRS107
C205
R211_6 TP37_6
TP38
R227_6
37
AFE_DIN
48
C206 25 24
CH88
R117
PS2_6 TP20_6
48
U68
AB1 A1
U32_6
540
DSP RESET
A17
U102 36
STAT N6
GRSTN
C995 2615
AFE 206
C210
C208
U69 TP13_6
TRS106
TP39 48 PCIE RSTN U1_6

CH80 C212 1V2 NAT4 U70 R508_6
C317_6
C103_6
R511_6
C310_6
FL22_6
FL21_6
R120
R121
R122
R123
540
C214 DS11 DS12
R129
DS13
C213
R124
R125
R126
R127
U71 U72 VR8_6 22

R128 Q19 Q20 Q21 C98_6
Q22 C216 DSP CORE
AFE 205
U73
C220
TP40
C219
TRS105
C217
R131
BD2 CHIP2
2614
C222
R132
R130
A22 R142
C221 CH72 AB22 R823 C218 R143
1V8D_ADC1 DSP_POR_N R144 C101_6
FL14 U75 NATHAN 4 R133 R145
R134
TP41
R135
R136
R137
R138
R139
R140
R141
C224 DSP SFT RST

R822
TP36_6 R148
TP42
R828
32 R824 R825 R826 R827 U78 R149

17
AFE 204
U74 C223 33 16 U82

U76 A1 A16
C722 R821
T R S 104
CH64
C225 U77
25 U83 24 NAT5
540
J7
12 25
13
DS14 DS15
C227
C226 48
U79 U81
C228
C229 U85 2616

24
SDA
TP43
49 U84
AFE 203
64
TP44 U80 Q23 Q24
VR11 C230 R150 AFE
SCLK
T R S 103
TP47
5VPA
T16
R151
R152
Q25
TP46 T1
R153
R154
CH56 AFE_DIN
BD1 CHIP3
C231
GND 48 AB1 A1 C232 C233 C234 TP45

TP50 1V8_ADC1
R155
3V3PA
J10 22 TP51 SCL

C236 C241
TP49
R158
C237
R162 C1007 TP52 TP53 TP54 C235

1V7_CON 2V5D 3V3D 25
AFE 202
R164 C242 R159 R160 R161 R830

C244
C243
R156
C247 C239
ASSEMBLED IN
R685 TP48
T R S 102
R829
K1 C249 FL15 C246 1V2 NAT5

U89 3V3CLK
CH48 TP55
U87
C843 U86
C248
C250
R175
R165 R171
R166 R172
R167 R173
R168 R174
U88 R818
AFE 201
C252
U91
C987
C253
T R S 101
15
R819
U90 U92
VR13
U93
U94 A22
C254
R693
C257
CH40 AB22 J6
C861
BD1 CHIP2 C863 R713

C255 C258
U95 Q26 Y3 SP5

NATHAN 5 R177 C862
C975
R730 U96 11
R176
R729
C256
Q27 R728 R831

AFE 200
TP56 DS16
U128
R815
C988 C989
C983
GND
U97
R832
TP57 U100
48 C332 48 37 R178 R179
C880
TRS100
2V5 CH32 D6
U102 36
C260
SP1_6
C884
25
R811
VR12
U99
C977
C259
540
C269
C251
U101
C973
T1
U111
C956 C917
U103
C262 C 265 C 266 C261

C822 U112 2614
C263
FL16 12 25
C331
D7 13
U98 24
C829 U105
C857
24
C267
FL96
C797
C798
C942 C925 C940 U113 U114 U104

C264
R760 U106 C268 U107 C937 U110 C270 U115 CP

U108 U109
F E D C B A
5-9-6-1 LEDs on the MRX Board

Only one LED (DS16) is used for service, all other LEDs are used for development.
Table 5-7 LEDs on the MRX Board
LED NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION
If ON and not flashing, all MRX supply voltage are good.
DS16 GREEN If flashing, one or more voltage supplies on the MRX is missing or out of range.
If OFF while Card Rack is ON, all power to MRX is bad or not present.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-6 MRX (contd)

Figure 5-48 MRX Board Location in the MRX Card Cage
Quiet Room
Ultra-Quiet Room
David
David
Tx 128 C
David
/ R ha
David David
x A nn
David
nal el
David David
og
Bu
s
Nathan David
David
David
Front Planes
Nathan
2 each 128 channel
Tx 64 Channel
Tx 64 Channel
David David
Nathan
Tx 64 Channel
Nathan David
David
Nathan
64 Channel
David
Nathan
Board Key
4-D
David
Rx 64 Channels
64 Channel
ilter, A/D)
Rx 64 Channels
(A-A F ilter, A/D)
Rx 64 Channels
GRLY
A Filter, A/D)
XDIF
Nathan
64 Channels
Tx 128 C
(A-A Filter, A/D)

David
Nathan
/R h
MRX
RF Amp
TxDavid
x A ann
Nathan
nal el
David
Tx
A
og
Tx Board Bu
(A-
David
SCAN
s
Nathan
(A--A
Front Plane
Nathan
n
t io
Rx
Nathan
PD ib u
Nathan
s tr
Backplane Di
er /D C
EQ
Pow DC
BMP
Shield
GRLY
MRX
192 Channels Shield
GTX Board Shield
3 each x 64 Channels
PD Board Backplane
Figure 5-49 Card Rack Cage - MRX
Shield
GRLY
MRX
GTX PD

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-6 MRX (contd)
Figure 5-50 Power Distribution (PD) Panel and LEDs - MRX
MP 3 4 MP 3 5 MP36 E D C B
TP59 Q1
2V3_MRX1 SW1
C1
GND C2 C3 TP1
L1
MP19
MP31
R2 TP3 R1
Q2
C4 2V3_MRX1
C5
Q3 J5
L15
Q4 C6
L2
2V3_MRX1 SW2
C7 C8 TP4
MP32
MP20
BAR CODE
J12
TP48 TP2
SD 2V3_MRX1
TP6 GND
GND
R224
C189
TP7
C190
3V3_MRX1
POWER DISTRIBUTION
C9
MP21
PWA
R225 R223 TP5
R222
ASSEMBLED IN
J21
J4
5301212
C10 C11 Q5
MP33
TP60
GND Q6 C12
C13
L3 L17
TP8
3V3_MRX1 SW C205 2V5_MRX1
Q7 TP9 2V5
C14 TP11
MRX1 SW
E D C B A
C16 C17
E
C15
J18
Q8
MP30
MP 1 6 MP 1 7 MP18
L4
L18
C206
MP22
C18 TP10
12V
MP15
TP34 GND
MP1
C175 C174 TP50
SD 3V3_MRX1 / 2V5_MRX1
C173
R53
DS1
R116
FL13 TP12
FL11 2V5_MRX1 VS R238 TP15
C203 E D C B A
TP13
MP23
R240
C204
3V3_MRX1 VS GND
C177 R239
MP29
R242 Q9 1V7_MRX1 SW1
TP44
C19
FL12 R243 TP14
C181
L5 TP16
C178
GND C51 C52 C53 1V7_MRX1
R7
C176
C184 Q10
DS2
MP14
C22
MP2
J23 C20 C21
C23
FL16 FL14 FL15 J2
C61 C62 C63 Q11
C25 C26
C57
C55
Q19 J10
Q12
MP28
C56 L6
DS3 TP17 L16
MP24
TP58 Q20 1V7_MRX1 SW2
J22
C179 C24 R8
GND
TP35
MP25 MP26 MP27

MP13
MP3
C64 C65 C66 TP19
TP49
12V SW
SD 1V7_MRX1
GND
Q23 Q24
R231
DS4
C107 R9
C165
L11 R230
R233
C197
FL9 FL7 C196
R10 TP20
FL10 FL8 TP18 2V3_MRX2 VS J1
C208
C27
R11
3V3_MRX2
R12
R6 R5
C168 U1 C28
C170 C29
TP61
MP12
MP4
R15
DS5 R14 L7
L19 R13
C31
GND C167 C209
R17 J13
24V C162 C30 R16
C32
R244
TP36 C169
L14 TP21 TP51 TP22
R60 C166 3V3_MRX2 VS SD 3V3_MRX2 GND R18
Q13 TP23 E D C B A
C160 C161 C33 2V3_MRX2
L8
C34 C35
C36
R4 C163 C37
MP11
MP5
C164 L20
TP24
TP57 Q14 J15
R19
TP27
1V7_MRX1 TP25 C38 1V7_MRX2
L12 L21
DS1
DS R202
C158
TP56
C54 Q15 C39
2V3_MRX1 L13
DS
DS2 Q16 E D C B A
R203 C40 C42
C41
TP55 R211
L9
C60
FL6
3V3
J16
DS3
DS R204 FL5 TP26
MP10
C159
MP6
TP64
TP52 R20
R205 R198 GND
2V5_MRX1 R3 SD 2V3_MRX2
TP62 R206 R199
R162
DS4
DS R209 24V IN
TP63 GND C214 J7
U20
U19
U2
MP9 MP8 MP7

3V3_MRX1
TP29
DS5
DS R210 R201 R249 R21
TP54 TP28 2V3_MRX2 VS TP30
R200 TP31 2V5_MRX2
1V7_MRX2 VS R22
C219
C43
R23
FAN_CTRL_ACT
VFANA U3
C135
C45 R24 C44

FL3
L22
R30
R31
R32
C155
Q17
R55
R27
R28
R29
R25
R26
C46 U4 U5 R35
R34
R33
R39
R40
R37 L10
C48
SP2 J19 R38

U8 C47
R 42
R41
U7
R251
U6
C49
R36
R170
5301213 REV
R44
C138
Q18
R43 U9
TP32 TP53 R45

R175 TP33
R46
2V5_MRX2 VS SD 2V5_MRX2
R50
C50 C130 R54

R47
R48
R49
R51 C137 GND R56

C126
R168
R52
R57
R167
R178 R58
TP37
TP38
Q21 FAN_TACH_A C172
R63 R59
U11 GND
C58
R62 R64
R61
J6
U10
TP39
4
R 65
R66
Q22 R68
R67
PWB TP40 U12

U13
R69
C59
R70 R72 C171

VFANA R71
R73
TP41 TP42
VOUT 3V3
E D C B
Table 5-8 LEDs on the PD - MRX
LED NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION
DS1 1V7_MRX_1, (1.7V to MRX)
DS2 2V3_MRX1 (2.3V to MRX)

GREEN/ 3V3 (3.3V for voltage monitor on PD board and I2C
DS3
YELLOW communication)
DS4 2V5_MRX1 (2.5V to MRX)
DS5 3V3_MRX_1 (3.3V to MRX)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-6 MRX (contd)
Figure 5-51 Power Distribution (PD) Architecture- MRX
LOGIC E9 with MRX

Architecture Power Distribution Board MRX Board
24V to 3.3V
Main 3.3V 3.3V
DC/DC Converter
Power Supply
24V to 2.5V 3.3V to 1.0V
Digital DC/DC Converter DC/DC Converter
2.5V
24V
24V
24V to 2.3V 2.5V
DC/DC Converter 2.3V
2.3V to 1.8V LDO
24V to 1.7V 1.7V
DC/DC Converter 1.7V to 1.2V LDO
Analog +15V to +14V LDO

+15V
+15V +15V to +11V LDO
-15V -15V -15V to -14V LDO
+6V +6V to +5V LDO
+6V
-6V +6V to +3.3V LDO
-6V -6V to -5V LDO

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-9-6 MRX (contd)
Figure 5-52 PD Block Diagram - MRX
PD Board
Card Rack
24V in 1.7V to MRX
2.3V to MRX
DC to DC
conversion
3.3V to MRX MRX
2.5V to MRX
1.7V, 2.3V, 3.3V, 2.5V

Signals
Card Rack
Fan Control Voltage
Monitor
Fan and Voltage
Data reported to
Fan Speed and
Application
Duty Cycle Voltage
Software Data Output Data
Output

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-10
Transmit and Receive
5-10-2 Transmit and Receive Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5-10-3 Digital Receiver board (DRX) - GFI configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5-10-4 Transmitter Board (GTX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5-10-5 Receiver Board (GRX) - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
5-10-6 Relay Board (RLY or GRLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
5-10-7 Front Plane Boards (XD BUS) - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
5-10-8 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
5-10-9 Channel Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-2 Transmit and Receive Architecture

Here are some background illustrations for the LOGIQ E9 transmit and receive architecture.
Figure 5-53 Transmit and Receive Boards - GFI configuration
Figure 5-54 High Speed Configuration (GFI configuration shown)
Figure 5-55 Backplane Implementation (GFI configuration shown)
Backplane Implementation (Daisy Chain Architecture) Data Bus, Control Bus DRX, Control Bus GTX
(Source Synchronous)
5 - 74 Section 5-10 - Transmit and Receive

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-3 Digital Receiver board (DRX) - GFI configuration

A DRX board provides two main functions to the beamformer:
1.) Conversion of analog RF input signals from 64 channels into streams of digital data, and
2.) Receive signal beamforming. The DRX performs optimal, range dependent focusing and steering
to create multiple receive beams simultaneously.
The DRX board has the capability of beamforming multiple beams or lines (MLAs) simultaneously. 4
lines of receive beamformed data is referred to as MLA4.
The DRX board contains 64 channels of A/D conversion and beamforming circuitry.
The Gecko architecture allows for two DRX boards to be used to form a 128-channel system, and
three DRX boards to be used to form a 192-channel system.
The Gecko system will use identical DRX boards. The boards will identity their location in the system
by the geographical addressing bits defined by the Backplane. The slot location information will be
used by the GDIF on the DRX board to configure itself.
Each DRX board in the system calculates MLA data based on the 64 analog channels that drive its
A/D converters (ADCs). In order to generate beams with data from more than 64 channels, the MLA
data for each DRX board in the system must be combined with the MLA data from other DRX
boards.
All digital signal processing and beamforming is performed in an ASIC referred to as Nathan.
Today we are using three DRX boards to support 192 receiver channels.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 5-56 DRX location - GFI configuration
4 pc DRX boards

+24 DC. Other voltages are generated locally on the DRX.

Receiver Beamforming data/ Scan Control data (from GFI)
Clocks (2 x 50MHz, 200 MHz and 156.25 MHz)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-3-5 DRX Board Signal Flow

There are 64 channels of differential analog input signals that originate on the receive amplifier
board, the GRX board. The amplified receive signals pass through the Backplane and to the DRX
board via 3 cPCI connectors.
The analog input signals enter the DRX board, route to the Anti Alias filters and on to the A/D
converters inputs.
The A/D converters on the DRX board convert each of the 64 analog signals to streams of 12 bit
digital words. The A/D conversion runs at a rate of 50 Msamples/sec.
The first column of Nathan s on the DRX board performs the digital beamforming function on the A/
D data streams. Nathans process 16 channels of A/D data and provide intermediate (partial)
beamform results to adjacent (subsequent) Nathan devices. Each Nathan performs a summation
of its beamform results with those coming from previous Nathans.
The final Nathan on a DRX board transfers its beamform result to the Interface FPGA, (GDIF).
The GDIF on each DRX adds its beam result to the result from previous DRX boards and send the
result to subsequent DRX boards or GFI (in the case that it is the last DRX board in the signal chain.
5-10-3-6 DRX Channel Allocation

There are 4 Nathan ASICs on each column on the DRX board. Each Nathan processes 16 channels at
the same time, generates partial beamsum result on those 16 channels, sums with the partial beamsum
received from previous Nathan and sends the result to the next Nathan. The system channels allocation
for the DRX is shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-57 DRX Channel Allocation/Routing
F rontplane Upper
X DB US (192-255)
XDB US (128-191)
128-191 GRLY J11/J12

Probe 1
128 Ch 128-191
64-127
192-255
128-191 J 11/J 12 J 11/J 12 J9 J9 J9 J9 J 4/J 3 J 4/J 3 J 4/J 3 J 4/J 3
192-223
Probe 2 224- 160-
C W Doppler R X
192 Ch 255 191

224-255 192-223
160- 128-
224-255 192-223 160-191 128-159
32-63 191 159
192- 128-
64-127 223 159
128-191 R X128 (1) R X128 (2) G T X (1) G TX (2) G TX (3) G TX (4) DR X (1) DR X (2) DR X (3) DR X (4) G FI
192-223
Probe 3 0-31 64-95
192 Ch
32-63 96- 96-
32-63 0-31 32-63 64-95 0-31 32-63 64-95 96-127
64-127 128 127
128-191 J6
Probe 4 192-255 J 9/J 10 J 9/J 10 J 10 J 10 J 10 J 10 J 3/J 2 J 3/J 2 J 3/J 2 J 3/J 2
0-63
256 Ch 0-63
64-127 64-127
J9/J10
B ac kplane
XDB US (64-127)
XDB US (0-63)
F rontplane L ower
L ow level C hannels 0-63 Amplified C hannels 0-63

Low L evel C hannels 64-127 Amplified C hannels 64-127

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-3-7 Outputs
Digital signal data to next DRX. Data from the last DRX card is sent to GFI.
5-10-3-8 Fuses, Jumpers and DIP-switches

None
5-10-3-9 LEDs on the DRX board
Nathan field
The Nathan field has an array of LEDs that display Nathan status. There is one green LED per Nathan
as well as one common red LED per Nathan row. The leds are arranged as follows:
Figure 5-58 LEDs for Nathan (beamforming) circuits
Nathan Row 0 Status 3 2 1 0
Nathan Error 3 2 1 0
Never Lit
Used
for
LOGIQ E9
Each Nathan drives two signals connected to LEDs, a green "running light" and a red "error" status light.
In normal operation, the four green lights blink in turn while scanning -- or in unison (all at the same
time) when not scanning.
During start-up, all are solid (not blinking).
Anything else doesnt necessarily indicate a bad board, but does indicate that you should run
diagnostics.
When running diagnostics, just one of the LEDs is lit, but this behavior is not relevant.
The red "error" light will turn on when Nathan generates an internal error, and turn off when the error
state is cleared by an access to the error register in Nathan.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-3-9 LEDs on the DRX board (contd)
GDIF status display.
Programming status LEDs exist on the left side of the board. They indicate the programming status of
the GDIF FPGA.
GDIF debug LEDs exist near the lower left side of the board. They are used for GDIF status display.
Figure 5-59 GDIF status display
INT
DONE
GDIF LED 0 TOP MGT 1 LINK UP
GDIF LED 2 BOTTOM MGT 1 LINK UP
GDIF LED 8 BOARD LAST IN CHAIN*
GDIF LED 9 ERROR CONDITION**
* Normal condition on DRX2 is ON; normal condition on DRX3 and 4 is OFF. The LED is red when the
last in chain.
**Red indicates an error.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-3-10 Testpoints on the DRX board
Figure 5-60 Test points
TX_TRIG_N
RESET_N
24V
3V6
3V3_ADC
3V3
2V5_MGT_TX
2V5_MGT_RX
2V5
1V5
Not used on 1V8 COL3
1V8 COL2
LOGIQ E9 1V8 COL1
1V8 COL0
Table 5-9 DRX Board Test Point Locations
Signal Test Point Location
TX_TRIG_N Board Edge
DRX_RST_N Board Edge
Power Supply Voltages Board Edge
Several locations on top and bottom side of

GND
board

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-3-11 MRX Channel Allocation

There are 6 Nathan FPGAs on the MRX board. Each Nathan processes 32 channels at the same time,
generates partial beam sum results on those 32 channels, sums with the partial beam sum received
from previous Nathan and sends the result to the next Nathan.
Figure 5-61 MRX Channel Allocation/Routing - R3.x.x
Frontplane Upper
XDBUS(224-255)
XDBUS(128-223)
128-191 GRLY J11/J12

Probe 1
128 Ch 128-191
64-127
192-255
128-191 J11/J12 J11/J12 J9 J9 J9 J9
192-255
Probe 2
192 Ch 160- 128-
32-63 224-255 192-223
128-223 224- 55 191 159
64-127
(MRX 64
128-191 MR GTX (1) GTX (2) GTX (3) GTX (4) PD
future)
192-255
Probe 3
CW Doppler RX
192 Ch
32-63 96-
32-1 7 0-31 0-31 32-63 64-95
64-127 127
J6
128-191
J9/J10
192-255 J9/J10 J10 J10 J10 J10
Probe 4
256 Ch 0-63
0-63
64-127 64-127
J9/J10
Backplane
XDBUS(32-127)
XDBUS(0-31)
Frontplane Lower
Low level Channels 0-31 Low Level Channels 128-223

Low Level Channels 32-127 Low Level Channels 224-255

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-3-11 MRX Channel Allocation (contd)
Figure 5-62 MRX Channel Allocation/Routing - R4.x.x and later
Frontplane Upper
XDBUS(224-255)
XDBUS(128-223)
128-191 GRLY J11/J12

Probe 1
128 Ch 128-191
64-127
192-255
128-191 J11/J12 J11/J12 J9 J9 J9 J9
192-255
Probe 2
192 Ch 160- 128-
32-63 224-255 192-223
128-223 224- 55 191 159
64-127
(MRX 64
future)
192-255
Probe 3 CW Doppler RX
192 Ch
32-63 96-
32-1 7 0-31 0-31 32-63 64-95
64-127 127
J6
128-191
J9/J10
192-255 J9/J10 J10 J10 J10 J10
Probe 4
256 Ch 0-63
0-63
64-127 64-127
J9/J10
Backplane
XDBUS(32-127)
XDBUS(0-31)
Frontplane Lower


PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-4 Transmitter Board (GTX)

The purpose of the GTX board is to provide the transmitter channel hardware and function for the
beamformer system. Each GTX board in the LOGIQ E9 contains 64 transmit channels. When populated
with three GTX boards for a total of 192 channels the system configuration is referred to as LOGIQ E9.
Figure 2-1 shows where the GTX board fits into the signal flow of the beamformer Front End Card Rack
configuration. Figure 2-2 illustrates the physical arrangement of these circuit boards.
GFI Configuration
The Global Radio Frequency Interface (GFI) board loads scan parameters via the FE-BUS into local
RAM on the GTX boards and on the DRX boards.
The scan parameters include probe-dependent steering and focusing delay for a certain scan
pattern. Thus, when the GFI board goes through a scan sequence, it loads the proper contents of
the RAM into the TX ASIC (David), then issues a transmit trigger pulse for the transmitter and a
receive synchronization pulse for the beamformers on the DRX boards.
different delays, the ultrasound beam can be steered in desired directions to obtain the selected
scan patterns (B-Mode, etc.).
Figure 5-63 GTX Board Location in a GFI Configuration Card Cage
GTXs

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-4 Transmitter Board (GTX) (contd)

MRX
The MRX Board loads scan parameters via the FE-BUS into local RAM on the GTX boards and
locally on the MRX board.
The scan parameters includes probe-dependent steering and focusing delay for a certain scan
pattern. Thus, when the MRX board goes through a scan sequence, it loads the proper contents of
the RAM into the TX ASIC (David), then issues a transmit trigger pulse for the transmitter and a
receive synchronization pulse for the beamformers on the MRX board.
different delays, the ultrasound beam can be steered in desired directions to obtain the selected
scan patterns (B-Mode, etc.).
Figure 5-64 GTX Board Location in the MRX Card Cage
Quiet Room
Ultra-Quiet Room
David
David
Tx 128 C
David
/ R ha
David
x A nn
David
nal el
David David
og
Bu
s
Nathan David
David
David
Front Planes
Nathan
David
2 each 128 channel
Tx 64 Channel
Tx 64 Channel
David David
Nathan
Tx 64 Channel
Nathan David
David
Nathan
64 Channel
David
Nathan
Board Key
4-D
David
Rx 64 Channels
64 Channel
(A-A F ilter, A/D)
Channels
A F ilter, A/D)
Rx 64 Channels
GRLY
-A Filter, A/D)
XDIF Nathan
64 Channels
Tx 128 C
(A-A Filter, A/D)
David
MRX
RF Amp /R h Nathan
David
x A ann
Nathan
nal el
David
64
Tx
og
Tx Board Bu
David
SCAN
s
TxRx
(A-
Nathan
(A-A
Front Plane
Nathan
n
t io
Rx
Nathan
PD ib u
Nathan
s tr
Backplane Di
er /D C
EQ
Pow DC
BMP
Shield
GRLY
MRX
192 Channels Shield
GTX Board Shield
PD Board Backplane

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-4 Transmitter Board (GTX) (contd)
Figure 5-65 GTX Block Diagram
BACKPLANE
FRONTPLANE
INTERFACE
INTERFACE
Tx Module 4 Channels
HVS
Tx Module 4 Channels
A'
TSV1
16
DAVID ASIC TSV2
TSV1 / TSV2
TSV1
HV Select 6VPA
Tx Module 4 Channels B' & Filter
TSV2 J4 LGND
ANALOG
POWER
32
Tx Module 4 Channels CONDITIONING
LDO'S
10VPA
6VPA
J9 6VPA
6VNA
Tx Module 4 Channels 6VNA
11VPA
J3
11VPA LGND
A'
Tx Module 4 Channels 24VDC
16 Decoupling/Filter
DAVID ASIC
11VPA
B' Logic Power
Conditioning LGND
Tx Module 4 Channels 4V0 DC-DC,
1V8 DC-DC J2
3V3 David Decoupling/Filter
ASIC IO Power
3V3_CLK
Clock Power Logic Power
Tx Module 4 Channels Conditioning Conditioning
LDOs 1V2 LDO,
2V5 LDO
Decoupling/Filter
Tx Module 4 Channels 24VDC

I2C INTERFACE
TEMP/VOLTAGE
I2C
MONITORING
Tx Module 4 Channels A'

16
DAVID ASIC
FPGA
J12 B' CONFIGURATION
Tx Module 4 Channels XILININX CPLD
XXXXXX 24VDC
TX_TRIG,
ANALOG J8 JTAG,
POWER
32 FPGA -
CONDITIONING
INTERFACE
LDO'S
Tx Module 4 Channels 10VPA 200M HSS LVDS I2C
TXTRIG INTERFACE
CLOCK 200M HSS

DISTRIBUTION
50M I&Q LVPECL
50M I&Q LVDS
Tx Module 4 Channels 50M I&Q LVTTL
Tx Module 4 Channels A' B'

A' HSS FPGA
XILININX
16 XC3S-1000
DAVID ASIC
A B HIGH SPEED
SERIAL
Tx Module 4 Channels B' J6 INTERFACE
HSS TO NEXT BOARD SOURCE/SYNC
I&Q CLKS
HSS FROM PREVIOUS BOARD
ANALOG
POWER
VREF
Tx Module 4 Channels CONDITIONING
GENERATION
LDO'S
5VPA, 5VNA

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 5-66 GTX board
The Transmitter board (MLP2.3) contains 64 individually controlled transmit channels. On the LOGIQ
E9, three boards are used, giving a total of 192 TX channels. The GTX-MLP2.3 boards provide transmit
pulses via the Front Plane (XD BUS) to the Relay board and then to the transducer array (the probes).
The Transmitter board, GTX-MLP 2.3, contains 64 individually controlled transmit channels On the
LOGIQ E9, three boards are used, giving a total of 192 TX channels. The GTX-MLP 2.3 boards
provide transmit pulses via the Front Plane (XD Bus) to the Relay board and then to the transducer
array (probes).
Frequency-, delay-, and pulsewidth parameters for the boards are received on the FE_BUS from
the GFI. The parameters are decoded and stored in the DAVID beamformer ASICs.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 5-67 Block Diagram for the GTX board

TSV1&2
FROM
LV MAIN POWER TSV1
TSV2
TX_TRIG_L
FROM GFI
FE_BUS TRANSMIT
FRONT END TX
XD1-64
FROM GFI INTERFACE PULSE TO RLY VIA XDBUS
GEN.
(64 CH.) 64
TRANSMITTERS
Frequency-, delay- and pulswidth parameters for the boards are received on the FE_BUS from the GFI.
The parameters are decoded and stored in the DAVID beamformer ASICs.
A pulse from the GFI board, TX_TRIG_L, trigs the Transmit Pulse Generators.
TS Voltage 1 and TS Voltage 2 from the LV Power, supply the transmitters with the needed voltages to
generate the correct ultrasound power.

LOGIQ E9 uses three GTX boards (#4, #3, and #2 -- not #1). GTX boards are located in the same
position for MRX.
Figure 5-68 GTX boards location - (GFI configuration shown)
CW PROBE 4D MOTOR DRIVE

PULSER
CONNECTION MAIN
VOLTAGES
(BT2010 OPTION) I2C
VPD (X1 = P3 on MPS) POWER
GFI AUDIO
BACKPLANE +5V
DC
SUPPLY
VOLTAGES
BSCAN (X2 = P4 on MPS)
S
#1 #2 #3 #4 #1 #2 #3 #4
GTX or OPEN slots
NOT POPULATED
RX-64 or RX-128
RX-128
RELAY
GTX
DRX
GTX
GTX
DRX
DRX
GFI
FRONT PLANE GFI Configuration J TO/FROM

(TRANSDUCER BUS BOARD) CARD RACK BEP (J5)

PROPRIETARY TO GE

The voltages are delivered from the Main Power Supply.
+24 VDC
The +24 VDC voltage is used to generate + 3.3 VDC, + 2.5 VDC, and several other voltages,
internal on the card.
+/- 6
DCV
+/- 11 VDC
5-10-4-4 Input TX (Pulser) voltages


TX_TRIG
I2C BUS
DTAG/BSCAN

HSS FE BUS (High Speed Serial Bus)
5-10-4-7 Outputs
Pulses sent via the Front Plane to the selected probe.
HSS FE BUS (High Speed Serial Bus) to the next board.
HVFAULT signal from each board to GFE FPGA on GFI board. If a GTX*_HVFAULT signal is
asserted, scanning will be disabled.
5-10-4-8 Fuses
None.
5-10-4-9 Jumpers
None.
5-10-4-10 DIP-switches
S1 - CPLD. (NOT USED BY SERVICE.)
5-10-4-11 Other switches

S2 - Debug Push Button. (NOT USED BY SERVICE.)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-4-12 LEDs on the GTX board
Figure 5-69 GTX board LEDs - GFI Configuration
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5
DS6
DS7
DS8 DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5
DS6
DS7
DS8
Table 5-10 LEDs on GTX board - GFI Configuration
NORMAL
LED NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION OPERATION
DS1 - DS5 GREEN LOGIQ error if ON OFF
DS6 RED GTX Operation NORMAL ON
DS7 RED ON, if last GTX in Cardrack (GTX2) ON
DS8 RED GTX Operation NORMAL ON

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-5 Receiver Board (GRX) - GFI Configuration

The reflected signal from body structures and blood cells are routed from the probe, via the Relay Board
and the Front Plane to the GRX (receiver) boards, where pre-amplification and Analog Time Gain
Compensation (ATGC) is performed. The gain is determined by an analog control signal (ATGC)
generated by the Global Radio Frequency Interface (GFI) board.
To support 192 analog receiving channels from the probes, two different GRX boards are used in the
LOGIQ E9:
64 Channel Receiver board

128 Channel Receiver Board
128 Channel Receiver board with analog CW Doppler
The 128 channel Receiver board also include the needed circuits to demodulate the CW Doppler signals
from a Pedof probe.
A T/R switch on the inputs to the GRX boards protects the input circuits on the boards from the transmit
signals from the GTX boards.
The on-board temperature is sensed with either two or three temperature sensors on each board,
depending on the board type.
The output channels from the GRX boards are fed to the DRX boards where the signals in each receiver
channel are A/D converted. Then the beamforming for the received signals takes place.
Figure 5-70 GRX Board Position in the Card Cage - GFI Configuration

5-10-5
Q65
R1870 C1762 R1879 R1524 L1124 L1000 L1126 L1002 R1528 L1128 L1004 R1530 L1130 L1006
R1526
L517 L518
R1878
C1400 C1402 C1404 C1406
L1032
L1034
L1036
L1038
R1516 L1116 L1118 R1520 L1120 R1522 L1122
R1636
C1472
C200
R1638
C1474
C202
R1640
C1476
C204
R1642
C1478
C206
C1761 R1871 R348 R1518
C1272 C1336 C1274 C1276 C1340 C1278 C1342
C1208 C1338 C1210 C1212 C1214
R378
8
8
8
8
16
16
16
16
C830
C832
C834
C836
4 4
C1195
5 5 5 5 MODULE NAME S/N :
R1856
R1857
20 20 20 20
C1752
C1758
C1753
C1760
U400 U402 U404 U406
U221 U222
U432
U434
U436
U438
R411
R410
R405
R406
C1686
C1504
C1641
C1506
C1683
C1508
C1644
C1510
1
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 P/N: NNxxxxxx-xx Dev waver :
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
R445
C172
R446
8 8
C1757
C1759
C1687
C1633
C1691
C1645
R1868 R1869 C1264 C1328 C1266 C1330 C1268 C1332 C1270 C1334
TP6
TP7
C1200 C1202 C1204 C1206
L519
C1070
U93
C546 C1764 C537
R1500 L1100 R1502 L1102 R1504 L1104 R1506 L1106
16
16
16
16
R1876
R1877
4 4
R1628
R1630
R1632
R1634
C1432
C1434
C1436
C1438
C1763
R323 C2101 R330 R1508 L1108 R1510 L1110 R1512 L1112 R1514 L1114 BAR-CODE
U465
U467
U469
U471
8
8
8
8
U224 U225 C2164 C2154
D396
5 R444
8 8
C61
R1556 L1156 L1008 R1558 L1158 L1010 R1560 L1160 L1012 R1562 L1162 L1014
C184
C2103
Q102 Q103
C545
C536
C1408 C1410 C1412 C1414
L1040
L1042
L1044
L1046
R1548 L1148 R1550 L1150 R1552 L1152 R1554 L1154
R1652
C1480
R1654
C1482
R1656
C1484
R1658
C1486
R1872
R461
R462
R463
R459
R1873
C227
C228
C229
C223
C1288 C1352 C1290 C1354 C1292 C1356 C1294 C1358
R321 R322 R329 R328 C1224 C1226 C1228 C1230
C2100 C2102
C1100
8
8
8
8
16
16
16
C838
C840
16
C842
C844
5 5 5 5
L520
20 20 20 20
C209
R324 D385 R325 D386
U408 U410 U412 U414
U440
U442
U444
U446
C1631
C1512
C1680
C1514
C1667
C1516
C1653
C1518
Q101
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15
Q100
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
C1654
C1656
C1635
C1652
G7
R320 R327 C1280 C1344 C1282 C1346 C1284 C1348 C1286 C1350
C1216 C1218 C1220 C1222 R456
R270
8
D387
R1532 L1132 R1534 L1134 R1536 L1136 R1538 L1138
C71
16
16
16
16
D392
R319 C12
R1644
R1646
R1648
R1650
C2160
C1440
C1442
C1444
C2150
C1446
R326
R1540 L1140 R1542 L1142 R1544 L1144 R1546 L1146
U473
U475
U477
U479
8
8
8
8
U226
D399
C215
R1874 R1875
R1588 L1188 L1016 R1590 L1190 L1018 R1592 L1192 L1020 R1594 L1194 L1022
R1880
16
U96
C1416 C1418 C1420 C1422
L1048
L1050
L1052
L1054
C1075
R1881 R1580 L1180 R1582 L1182 R1584 L1184 R1586 L1186
R1668
C1488
R1670
C1490
R1672
C1492
R1674
C1494
8
C538 C1304 C1368 C1306 C1370 C1308 C1372 C1310 C1374
R1885 C1240 C1242 C1244 C1246
C1768
R1884
8
8
8
8
16
16
16
16
C846
C848
C850
C852
C534 5 5 5 5
20 U416 20 U418 20 U420 20 U422
U112
D501
U448
U450
U452
U454
C1639
C1520
C1688
C1522
C1658
C1524
C1661
C1526
C1766
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
4 4
16
C1638
C1648
C1650
C1660
U223 U227 C1296 C1360
C1232
C1298 C1362
C1234
C1300 C1364
C1236
C1302 C1366
C1238
R1882
C1074
C1765
C1767
8 R1883 8 R1564 L1164 R1566 L1166 R1568 L1168 R1570 L1170
R432
16
16
16
16
C1077
U105 C137
R1660
R1662
R1664
R1666
C1448
C1450
C1452
C1454
R1572 L1172 R1574 L1174 R1576 L1176 R1578 L1178
D500
C130 R431 C127
U481
U483
U485
U487
C539 C535 R369
C117
8
8
8
8
C2165 C2155 R447
8
TP4
R374 8
R1886 R1887 L1024 L1026 L1028 L1030 R449 4 L523
R1620 L1220 R1622 L1222 R1624 L1224 R1626 L1226 R430
C119
1 5 L525
C136
L526
U125
R419
C123
R421
R422
C122
R1889 C1424 C1426 C1428 C1430 U127
L1056
L1058
L1060
L1062
R1612 L1212 R1614 L1214 R1616 L1216 R1618 L1218
R1684
C1496
R1686
C1498
R1688
C1500
R1690
C1502
R1890 C138
C129
R429
C126
R428
C212
D397
U98
4
R358
R1891 C1320 C1384
C1256
C1322 C1386
C1258
C1324 C1388
C1260
C1326 C1390
C1262
8 L528 C141
R1888 28
R360
C1135
32
24
C216
5
8
8
8
8
C13
C146
DIRECTION 5180483-100, REV. 7
16
16
16
16
16
C854
C856
C858
C860
C131 C128 20
C76
C77 5 5 5 5 U123
20 20 20 20 U126
U129
R409
U424 U426 U428 U430 R272 C134
L571
10 15
U456
U458
U460
U462
D740 D741
16
C1670
C1528
C1681
C1530
C1682
C1532
C1677
C1534
C60
16
14
R362 R368
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 C148
C142
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
L529 C143
C1198
C1663
C1632
C1634
C1676
8
C133 4
R363 R365 C1312 C1376
C1248
C1314 C1378
C1250
C1316 C1380
C1252
C1318 C1382
C1254 C140
R434
D388
U128
R433
C132
U124
C181
U101
R359
C121
R361 R367 8
R420
R423
R424
C124
R1596 L1196 R1598 L1198 R1600 L1200 R1602 L1202 R427
L527
C135
16
16
16
L524
16
4
C120
8
R1676
R1678
R1680
R1682
C2161
C1456
C1458
C1460
C2151
C1462
C1072
TP3
R1604 L1204 R1606 L1206 R1608 L1208 R1610 L1210
8
K1
R364 R366
U489
U491
U493
U495
R448
C147
C118
8
8
8
8
C125 4
R426
8
C78 L1001 C139
R1525 L1125 R1527 L1127 L1003 R1529 L1129 L1005 R1531 L1131 L1007 R425
C1076
U100
C1401 C1403 C1405 C1407
L1033
L1035
L1037
L1039
R1517 L1117 R1519 L1119 R1521 L1121 R1523 L1123
R1637
C1473
R1639
C1475
R1641
C1477
R1643
C1479
4
C79
TP17
R275
C1273 C1337 C1275 C1339 C1277 C1341 C1279 C1343
C1209 C1211 C1213 C1215 4
Q1
C1073
R465
R342
TP16
C257
D402
C14
R334
8
8
8
8
C58
16
16
16
16
C831
C833
C835
C837
C213
5 5 5 5 U145
20 U401 20 U403 20 U405 20 U407 R274 R470
C59 8
U433
U435
U437
U439
R467
C1630
C1505
C1689
C1507
C1659
C1509
C1669
C1511
R466
L521
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
C1679
C1657
C1690
C1668
R373 C1
C1265 C1329 C1267 C1331 C1269 C1333 C1271 C1335
C1201 C1203 C1205 C1207
R468
R469
R1501 L1101 R1503 L1103 R1505 L1105 R1507 L1107
16
16
16
16
R370
R1629
R1631
R1633
R1635
C1433
C1435
C1437
C1439
C62
R1509 L1109 R1511 L1111 R1513 L1113 R1515 L1115
Figure 5-71 GRX board
U466
U468
U470
U472
8
8
8
8
L522
C2166 C2156
C54 R1557 L1157 L1009 R1559 L1159 L1011 R1561 L1161 L1013 R1563 L1163 L1015
C1409 C1411 C1413 C1415
L1041
L1043
L1045
L1047
R1549 L1149 R1551 L1151 R1553 L1153 R1555 L1155
R1653
C1481
R1655
C1483
R1657
C1485
R1659
C1487
C53
C1199
C1289 C1353 C1291 C1355 C1293 C1357 C1295 C1359
C211
C72
C52 C1225 C1227 C1229 C1231
8
8
8
8
16
C839
16
C841
16
C843
16
C845
5 5 5 5
C18 C19 20 U409 20 U411 20 U413 20 U415
R303
U441
U443
U445
U447
C1646
C1513
C1649
C1515
C1651
C1517
C1685
C1519
8
8
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
L570
C1678
C1673
C1643
C1693
R305
R300
U91
U92
C1281 C1345 C1283 C1347 C1285 C1349 C1287 C1351
C1217 C1219 C1221 C1223
R302
4
4
R1533 L1133 R1535 L1135 R1537 L1137 R1539 L1139
16
16
16
16
R1645
R1647
R1649
R1651
C2162
C1441
C1443
C1445
C2152
C1447
1 5 U82 R1541 L1141 R1543 L1143 R1545 L1145 R1547 L1147
R295
R294
R293
R292
C236
C235
R298
R301
R304
U474
U476
U478
U480
8
8
8
8
R1589 L1189 L1017 R1591 L1191 L1019 R1593 L1193 L1021 R1595 L1195 L1023
R442
C1132
R443
C167
R299
R296
R297
L515
L516
L513
L514
C1417 C1419 C1421 C1423
L1049
L1051
L1053
L1055
R1581 L1181 R1583 L1183 R1585 L1185 R1587 L1187
R1669
C1489
R1671
C1491
R1673
C1493
R1675
C1495
C1305 C1369 C1307 C1371 C1309 C1373 C1311 C1375
C24 R307 C21 R306 C1241 C1243 C1245 C1247
C75 C22
8
8
8
8
R372
16
C847
16
C849
16
C851
16
C853
C23 C42 C20 5 5 5 5
20 U417 20 U419 20 U421 20 U423
U449
U451
U453
U455
C1647
C1521
C1664
C1523
C1642
C1525
C1692
C1527
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
U99 C28
C1671
C1640
C1674
C1684
C1297 C1361 C1299 C1363 C1301 C1365 C1303 C1367
C214
C1233 C1235 C1237 C1239
C34
C47
C46
C35
C31
C45
R311
C73 R1565 L1165 R1567 L1167 R1569 L1169 R1571 L1171
16
16
16
16
R313 R371
R1661
R1663
R1665
R1667
C1449
C1451
C1453
C1455
C43 R1573 L1173 R1575 L1175 R1577 L1177 R1579 L1179
20
U482
U484
U486
U488
R318
8
8
8
8
C2167 C2157
21
80
C50
R316 C40
C51 R1621 L1221 L1025 R1623 L1223 L1027 R1625 L1225 L1029 R1627 L1227 L1031
R317 C32
C1425 C1427 C1429 C1431
L1057
L1059
L1061
L1063
R1613 L1213 R1615 L1215 R1617 L1217 R1619 L1219
R1685
C1497
R1687
C1499
R1689
C1501
R1691
C1503
C210
U90 R308
R315 C39 C1321 C1385 C1323 C1387 C1325 C1389 C1327 C1391
C1257 C1259 C1261 C1263
C27 R309
8
8
8
8
16
16
16
16
C855
C857
C859
C861
40
5 5 5 5
61
C25 C38 C48 20 20 20 20
41
60
U425 U427 U429 U431
U457
U459
U461
U463
C33
C1662
C1529
C1672
C1531
C1675
C1533
C1636
C1535
R312
10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15
24
32
24
32
24
32
24
32
C49
R1923
C1655
C1665
C1666
C1637
R314 R310
C1313 C1377 C1315 C1379 C1317 C1381 C1319 C1383
C1249 C1251 C1253 C1255
C41
C44
C30
C37
C36
C29
C114
C26 C116
R1597 L1197 R1599 L1199 R1601 L1201 R1603 L1203
16
16
16
16
R1677
R1679
R1681
R1683
C2163
C1457
C1459
C1461
C2153
C1463
R1605 L1205 R1607 L1207 R1609 L1209 R1611 L1211
U490
U492
U494
U496
R1924
8
8
8
8
C1134
TP8
C74
C113 C1539 C1538 C1537 C1536
R418 C115
10
2 38
16
16
16
16
C221 R457
R416
U122
P13
U299
U298
U297
U296
R1925
20
8
8
8
8
C222 R458
C108 C224 R460
U113
10
10
10
10
R1926
U114
U119
U120
U115
20
20
20
20
C110 C109 C112
C111
D393 D394
C205 U136 U138
C203
C169 10 C171
C98
C95
U104
D389 20 D395
C97
C96
U135 U137
C207
C201
C168 C170
R267
R381
R382
R385
R386
C106
20 R266
TP33TP34TP35TP26TP27TP28TP30
C80
R383
R384
R437
R436
U144 C10
C261
PROPRIETARY TO GE
10
R387
R388
C1071
C259
C260
R452 R454 R345 R344

R453 R451 R346 R347
R257
R258
C258
R253 R259
C1139
G9
L573
Receiver Board (GRX) - GFI Configuration (contd)
C1190
TP25
TP24
C1197
L572
TP40
TP39
TP38
TP36
TP37
TP32
TP31
TP29
R333
R331
C249
R332
C248
R291
R286
R287
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

R289
C250
R288
R341
R282
R290
8
R338
C252
C17
R339
C247
U85
R511
R512
R509
R510
U87
16 D401
R335
C251
R337
R271
R277
R273
C255 R281
C102
C253
R340
C254
R396
5
C99 R375 C83
C100 U111
R376 R377 8
10
R398
C101
R264 U88
C7
C8
C9 16
C6
R391
C85
C84
C89
C92
R464 R265
R392 R455
R263
R393 R380
R397 R450
C160
C161
C162
C218
R394
TP9 TP15
8 C86 C182 R276

R280
R395 32 8
C87
TP23
C15
U97
U89 R357
16 24
1
C93
73
108
R390
10
C219
72
16 D398
109
R356
R389
U95
C94
C91 C88 C57
U141
C90 C155
20
C2
C153
R261
5
R260
20
15
C159
C156
U140 R269
U109 C104
R403 R471
5
10
R404 C107 C152

C158 C217
R355
D391
C150
R401 C154
20
15
R402
U108 C103
R399
5
10
R400 U102 R415

37
144
U121
R435
C262
36
R417
C82
C157
R379
C151
C230
C149
R354
38
1
C1187 R412 R414

R353
C183
C105 R413
U94
C56
L579
P8
L578
5
C1140
R352
D390
C1194
LOGIQ E9 PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL
5 - 91
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-5 Receiver Board (GRX) - GFI Configuration (contd)
Figure 5-72 The Ultrasound Receiver - GFI configuration
1 2
GRX DRX
5 6
GRLY
3
4 7
GFI
8
9 11
16
10
14 15
GTX
12
13
Relay Board

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-5 Receiver Board (GRX) - GFI Configuration (contd)
Figure 5-73 GRX Signal Flow - GFI Configuration
28 Receive Channels go from the GRLY through the Top Plane -> T/R Switch (x128) -> Preamp/TGC
(a Test Signal from the GFI goes to the Preamp/TGC as well) -> 128 Receive Channels to DRX via the
Backplane.
No LEDs are visible from the edge of the GRX board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-6 Relay Board (RLY or GRLY)
5-10-6-1 General description - R3.x and earlier

The main task of the Relay Board is to route the transducer channels between the active probe and the
Transmitter or Receiver modules that are active. Relays are used in order to switch the connections
between the active probe connectors.
The module contain four probe connectors:
one connector supports probes with 128 channels.

three (DLP) connectors support probes with 192 channels (one connector is designed to support
probes with 256 channels, for future use, but currently supports probes with 192 channels.
Figure 5-74 Relay Board Connector Configurations - R3.x and earlier
128-191 J11/J12
Probe 1
128 Ch 128-191
64-127
192-255
128-191
192-223
Probe 2
192 Ch
32-63
64-127 GRLY
128-191
192-223
Probe 3
192 Ch
32-63
64-127
128-191
Probe 4 192-255
0-63
256 Ch 0-63
64-127 64-127
J9/J10

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-6 Relay Board (RLY or GRLY) (contd)
5-10-6-2 General description - R4.x and later

The main task of the Relay Board is to route the transducer channels between the active probe and the
Transmitter or Receiver modules that are active. Relays are used in order to switch the connections
between the active probe connectors.
The module contain four probe connectors:
all connectors are DLP.

three connectors support probes with 192 channels (one connector is designed to support probes
with 256 channels, for future use, but currently supports probes with 192 channels.
Figure 5-75 Relay Board Connector Configurations - R4.x and later
J11/J12
128-191 128-191
192-223
192-255
Probe 1
192 Ch 32-63
64-127
128-191
192-223 GRLY
Probe 2
192 Ch
32-63
64-127
128-191
192-223
Probe 3
192 Ch
32-63
64-127
128-191
Probe 4 192-255
0-63
256 Ch 0-63
64-127 64-127
J9/J10

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-6 Relay Board (RLY or GRLY) (contd)
Figure 5-76 GRLY Board Location in the Card Rack (GFI Configuration shown)
GRLY

5-10-6
1
K12 K101 K103
DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
R73
R23 R108 R107 R106 R105 R104
C125 C121 K247 C120 C124
C128 C132
S3
R139
R138
R140
K249
R137
K8 K9 K51 K54 K107 K124 K118 K139 K132 K150
K35 K27 K46 K91
A B C D E F G H J K L M
C129 C133
K11 K10 K96 K102 K121 K112 K117 K129 K144 K149
K24 K40 K45 K48 J13 10
20
K6 K1 K95 K53 K106 K111 K126 K138 K143 K134 C136 C140
K34 K39 K29 K90
34
K5 R146 R148
K50 K100 K105 K123 K116 K137 K131 K148
K33 K26 K44 K89 K251
R145 R147
S6 J3
C134 C130 K250 C131 C135 C141 C137
C122 C126 C123 C127 K3 K7 K2
K287_J14 K288_J14 K83 K86 K171 K188 K182 K203 K196 K214
K67 K59 K78 K155 C138 C142
K290_J14 K289_J14 K160 K166 K185 K176 K181 K193 K208 K213
R150 R152
K56 K72 K77 K80 J1_J14 10
R149 K252 R151
20 K7_J14 K1_J14 K159 K85 K170 K175 K190 K202 K207 K198
K66 K71 K61 K154
S4
C139 C143
34 K6_J14 K82 K164 K169 K187 K180 K201 K195 K212

Relay Board (RLY or GRLY) (contd)
K65 K58 K76 K153 C18
U4
R37
CR3
T3
Figure 5-77 Relay board - R3.x and earlier
S1
C19
K20 K19 K21 K22 C146 C144 K253 C145 C147
K3_J14 K5_J14 K2_J14
C150 C148 C149 C151 U2
R36
CR4
K287 K288 K280 K286 K219 K224 K230 K235 K240 K246 C20
R35
R2
U3
K290 K289 K279 K284 K218 K223 K229 K234 K239 K245
CR6
R42
K267 K256 K262 K275

J1_J15 10 R60
C26
K7_J15 K1_J15 R8
R41
20 K217 K228 K233 K244

CR7
K266 K255 K261 K274

U5
R40
CR5
Q10
C46
34 C107
C108
K265 K260 K273 U34 TP1 TP2

50 26
C48
R49
S5 U9 51 25
connector. The Doppler Probe has two XD channels.

D1
R114
R119
C94
TP6
FL16
CR16 C92
U15 Q6 Q3 Q4 Q5
Q7 Q1
R111
U7
C45
U16
C110
C112
C90
R190 R191 R192

FL14
Q2
TP7
U8
C49
75
C88
CR1 R91 R74

C109 R55 R54 R52 R47 R56 R57
C166
C164
C165
PROPRIETARY TO GE
K3_J15 K5_J15 K2_J15 76 100

R115
R120
R173 Q11
C34
R21
U14 R50 R48 R46 R53 R51

U31 U32 U33 C117
C103
Y1
R187 R188 R189 PS1 U18 U17 S2
TP13
C115
VR2
R71
TP12
CR15 R110
C162
C163
C161
K13 K14 C104 HS1 C73 C38 C39 C74 R30

R109
U28 U29 U30
J
L
F
K
E
B
A
N
H
D
C
BB
AA
Z
T
Y
X
V
S
P
CC
U
R
1
1
U10 VR1 TP5

R184 R185 R186 CR2
2
2
CR14 U11 U13

3
3
U12
C159
C158
C160
K18 K15 U19 R99 C31 C32

4
4
C55 C58
U25 U26 U27 D9 D7
5
5
R103
R178
C72
J16 R98
FL9
U6 C57
C25
R3
6
6
R102 TP11
R100 R101 R95
7
7
R18 R17 D8 F3
D10
K16 K17
8
8
TP8 R22 TP10 C99 C101

D2 D3 TP9
FL21
C66
9
9
U21 U20 U22 U23 U24 C83 R11 R12 R16 R15
C84 C98
0
0
R20
FL5
Z
T
F
A
Y
X
V
S
K
E
B
U
R
N
H
D
C
P
G
F2
FL2
FL3
FL7
FL6
C64
R9 R10 R14 R13

BB
AA
CC
FL20
F1
C29
FL19 FL18
FL1
C28
R180 R179 R181 R182 R183
2
The probe connectors are mounted on the solder side of the board.
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

Figure 5-78 Probe connectors - (1) Non-DLP and (2) DLP Probe Port - R3.x and earlier
The signals to the Doppler probe are routed via the Backplane and cables to the Doppler probe
There are 4 probe connectors: 1 Non-DLP connector (left-most) for the 3CRF and S1-5 probes and 3
5 - 97
DLP connectors (for any [probe name]-D probes. DO NOT connect LOGIQ 9 probes to the LOGIQ E9.
Section 5-10 - Transmit and Receive 5 - 98
the probe ports.
The Relay board is located in the Card Rack on the end nearest to the front of the scanner, adjacent to
Location in the LOGIQ E9 5-10-6-3
connector. The Doppler Probe has two XD channels.
The signals to the Doppler probe are routed via the Backplane and cables to the Doppler probe
Figure 5-80 Probe connectors, four DLP Probe Ports - R4.x
R4.x and later systems have one type of probe ports: four DLP probe ports (Figure 5-80).
The probe connectors are mounted on the solder side of the board.
connectors (for any [probe name]-D probes. DO NOT connect LOGIQ 9 probes to the LOGIQ E9.
There are 4 probe connectors: Four DLP connector for the 3CRF and S1-5 probes and 3 DLP
K167 K166 K165 K164 K163 K162 K161 K160 K159 K158 K157 K156 K155 K154 K153
K176
K178
K175
K168
K181
K180 K192 K177 K174 K173 K172 K171 K170 K169
K179
K182
K190
K189
K194 K191 K188 K187 K186 K185 K184 K183 TP3

K196 K195 K193
GND
K208 K207 K206 K205 K204 K203 K202 K201 K200 K199 K198 K197
K209
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
K210
D
D
D
D
E
E
E
E
K211
F
F
F
F
K212
R143
R146
R144
R145
G
U2
G
G
G
H
H
H
H
R150
R149
R148
R147
K214 K213
J
J
J
J
K
K
K215
K
K
L
L
K217
K216
K218
M
M
M
M
K221 K220 K219
K226 K231
34
20
34
10
J1
34
10
20
10
20
10
J15
20
34
J14
8
J16 J13
K230 K229 K228 K227 K224 K223 K222 K233
K225
R1
R158
R157
R156
R155
R154
R153
R152
51
TP4 R159
A16
R160 T16
R161
R162
1V2 DEBUG2
TP6
R168
DEBUG1
R163
R164
C127
K232
543
TP5
U3
R165
8530
R167
REV2B
R166
C126
U4
K236 K235 K234
K239
U5
K242 K241 K240 T1 K238 K237
TP7
C129
CR2
C130 C128 GND
A1
T1
D8
R169
C131
FL9
K251 K250 K246
U6
F2 D9
C132
C133
U7
17
K253
K247
K266
24
25
16
GND
K248 K245 K244 K243
U8
TP8 K252 K249
U9
C135
9
K259
8
K263
K255
K258
R171
R172
R170
R173 32
Q1
FL11 K264 K256
FL10 Y1 K265 K262 K261 K260 K257
K254
R174
C134
C136
U10
R176
PS1
R175 U11
K275
K271 K267
K270
C137
Q2
K276 K273 K269 K268
K274 K272
R177
K277
C138
C139
3V3
U12
TP9
R178
R181
K282
K286
R182
R180
R179
K281
FL13 K278
FL12 U13 R183
U15 C140
TP10
C141
CR3 K288 K287 K285 K284 K283 K280 K279
C142
TESTIN4
C143
Q3
K292
U14
K297
K300
R186 K293
C145
R187
R184
C146 K299 K291 K290 K289
K298 K296 K295 K294
R193 R188
C144
R191
R192
C148
R189
R185
FL14
VCC
TP11
C149
C151
K305 K301
K309
K304
C157
C147
U16
C150
R190
C152
U20 R195
U17
C153 R194
FL15 C158 K312 K311 K310 K308 K307 K306 K303 K302
C156
R197
R196
U19
R198 C155
C159 C154
R202 U18 K317
K321
R201 PMX
K316
TP14
16
R200
15
R199 VPP
R204
TP12 R203 DS1 DLP_AUX
D11 D10 GND C160 U21 R205 TP13
12V R206 DS2 LVDC_4
Q4 K324 K319 K318 K315 K314 K313
K323 K322 K320 DS3 12P_4
FL16
R207
C161
C162 DS4 HV1N_4
U22
R211 R210 R209 DS5 HV1P_4
K329
FL17
K333
R214 R213 R212 DS6 HV2P_4
K328
R208
DS7 HV2N_4
K325 R217 DS8 AUX_1
FL18
K334 K330 K327 K326
R215
K336 K335 K332 K331
C163
R216 R218 DS9 3V3
R219 DS10 LVDC 1
2
R220 Q6
FL19
Q5 DS11 VCC
GND R222
C170 D12
Q7
C166
GND R223 DS12 12V
D13
R221
D14
PMX R226 DS13 AVEE
FL20
TP15 J17 1
VNN R227 DS14 STATUS
R224
C169 K348 K347 K346 K345 K344 K343 K342 K341 K340 K339 K338 K337 TP16
TP17 C175 R228 DS15 FAULT
Q8
FL21 R225
C172
F3 R233 R232
R229 VR1 R231 DS16 TSV2N
TSV2P
DS17
C174
TSV1P
DS18
TSV1N
R230
C176
R236 R235 R234 DS19
FL23 R242
R238 R237 DONE DS20
Q9
TP19 TP18
R239
FL22 C177 AVEE
DLP AUX
R240
C179 C178 R241
VR2
Figure 5-79 Relay board - R4.x and later
Relay Board (RLY or GRLY) (contd) 5-10-6
LOGIQ E9 PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 5180483-100, REV. 7
PROPRIETARY TO GE
PROPRIETARY TO GE

+/-6V CD
+/-15V CD
+/-100V DC
Voltages provided by regulators on the board:
+12 V DC
+5 DC
V
+3.3 V DC
-3.3 V DC
-5 VCD
and
LV DC (3.3 V/2.5A) for RT3D probe

Transmit period:
XMIT Pulses via the XD_BUS
Receive period:
Echo signals from the selected probe

LVDS_BUS
STA_BUS

Transmit period:
XMIT Pulses to the selected probe.
Receive period:
Echo signals via XD_BUS to GRX cards

Securing the regulator used for -3V3 supply for

Security for (Pedof) Doppler probe
DESCRIPTION
+5V (VCC1) to Probe
3V probe (-3.3VDC)
K12 K101 K103
DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
R73
R23 R108 R107 R106 R105 R104
C125 C121 K247 C120 C124
C128 C132
S3
R139
K249
R138
R140
R137
K8 K9 K51 K54 K107 K124 K118 K139 K132 K150
K35 K27 K46 K91
C129 C133
K11 K10 K96 K102 K121 K112 K117 K129 K144 K149
K24 K40 K45 K48 J13 10
Section 5-10 - Transmit and Receive

20
K6 K1 K95 K53 K106 K111 K126 K138 K143 K134 C136 C140
K34 K39 K29 K90
34
K5 R146 R148
K50 K100 K105 K123 K116 K137 K131 K148
K33 K26 K44 K89 K251
R145 R147
S6 J3
C134 C130 K250 C131 C135
Figure 5-81 Fuses on the Relay board - R3.x and later
C122 C126 C123 C127 C141 C137

K3 K7 K2
K287_J14 K288_J14
PROPRIETARY TO GE
K83 K86 K171 K188 K182 K203 K196 K214

K67 K59 K78 K155 C138 C142
K290_J14 K289_J14 K160 K166 K185 K176 K181 K193 K208 K213
R150 R152
K56 K72 K77 K80 J1_J14 10
R149 K252 R151
20 K7_J14 K1_J14 K159 K85 K170 K175 K190 K202 K207 K198
K66 K71 K61 K154
S4
C139 C143
34 K6_J14 K82 K164 K169 K187 K180 K201 K195 K212
K65 K58 K76 K153 C18
U4
CR3
R37
S1 T3
C19
K20 K19 K21 K22 K253
240mA/125V Fast Action

C146 C144 C145 C147
0.4A/30V Auto Recover

K3_J14 K5_J14 K2_J14
C150 C148 C149 C151 U2
1.1A/6V Auto Recover

CR4
R36
K287 K288 K280 K286 K219 K224 K230 K235 K240 K246 C20
R35
R2
U3
K290 K289 K279 K284 K218 K223 K229 K234 K239 K245
CR6
K267 K256 K262 K275
R42
J1_J15 10 R60
C26
Fuses on the Relay board

K7_J15 K1_J15 R8
CR7
K217 K228 K233 K244
R41
20
K266 K255 K261 K274
U5
CR5
R40
C108
Q10
C46
VALUE
K265 K260 K273 34 U34 C107 TP1 TP2
C48
50 26 R49
S5 U9
R114
R119
51 25 D1
C94
TP6
FL16
CR16
Q6 Q3 Q4 Q5 C92
U15
R111
Q7 U7 Q1
C45
C110
C112
U16
C90
FL14
R190 R191 R192
Q2
TP7
U8
C49
C88
75 R91 R74
C166
C164
C165
CR1 R52 R56 R57
R115
R120
K3_J15 K5_J15 K2_J15 76 100 C109 R55 R54 R47
Q11
C34
R173
R21
U14 R50 R48 R46 R53 R51
U31 U32 U33 C117
C103
Y1
S2
TP13
C115
R187 R188 R189 PS1 U18 U17
TP12
VR2
R71
CR15 R110
C162
C163
C161
K13 K14 C104 HS1 C73 C38 C39 C74 R30
R109
U28 U29 U30
AA
CC
BB
M
N
D
H
A
G
C
L
K
B
F
E
J
W
VR1
Z
V
Y
P
T
R
S
1 U10 TP5
CR2
1
R184 R185 R186

CR14
2
U11 U13
2
C159
C158
C160
K18 K15 U12
3
3
U19 R99 C31 C32

C55 C58
4
R103
D9
4
U25 U26 U27 D7
C72
J16 R178
FL9
5
U6 C57
C25
5
R98
R3 R102 TP11
6
6
R100 R101 R95 R18 R17
D10 D8 F3
7
7
K16 K17 TP8 TP10 C99 C101
TP9
C66
R22
8
8
D2 D3
FL21
U21 U20 U22 U23 U24 C83 C84 C98 R11 R12 R16 R15
9
FL5
0
0
R20
F2
C64
FL2
FL3
FL7
FL6
FL20
M
W
D
U
A
Z
G
X
C
Y
L
K
B
T
F
AA
E
P
R9 R10 R14 R13

CC
BB
C29
C28
FL19 FL18
FL1
F1
R180 R179 R181 R182 R183
D2 D3 TP11
F1
TP9 R22 F3
C84 C101
FL21
R20
F2
C28
FL1
F3
F1
F1
F2
FL20
C29
FL18
Table 5-11
FUSE
F1
F2
F3
Fuses
5-10-6-8
5 - 100
PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-6-8 Fuses (contd)
Figure 5-82 Fuses on the Relay board - R4.x and later
K167 K166 K165 K164 K163 K162 K161 K160 K159 K158 K157 K156 K155 K154 K153
K176
K178
K175
K168
K181
K180 K192 K177 K174 K173 K172 K171 K170 K169
K179
K182
K190
K189
K196 K195
K194
K193
K191 K188 K187 K186 K185 K184 K183 TP3
GND
K208 K207 K206 K205 K204 K203 K202 K201 K200 K199 K198 K197
F2
K209
A
A
C1
B
B
B
C
C
C
K210
D8
D
D
E
K211
E
FL9
F
F
K212
R143
R146
R144
R145
F2
U2
G
D9
G
G
G
H
H
H
H
R150
R149
R148
R147
K214 K213
J
J
J
K215
K
F1
K
K
K
L
L
L
L
K217
K216
K218
M
M
M
M
K221 K220 K219
K226
J16 J15 J14 J13 K231
34
20
34
J1
10
34
10
20
10
20
10
20
34
8
K230 K229 K228 K227 K224 K223 K222 K233
K225
R158
R157
R156
R155
R154
R153
R152
R1
51
TP4
R161
A16
R160 T16 R159
R162
1V2 DEBUG2
TP6
R168
R163
REV2B
8530
R164
DEBUG1
543
C127
R165
TP5 K232
U3
R167
C126
R166
U4
K236 K235 K234
K239
U5
K242 K240 K238 K237
K241 T1 TP7
C129
CR2
C130 C128 GND
A1
T1
D8
R169
C131
FL9
K251 K250 K246
U6
C132
C133
F2 D9
K253
U7
K266
17
K247
24
25
16
GND
K245 K244 K243
TP8 K248
U8
K252 K249
U9
C135
K259
9
K263
K258
8
R173 32
R171
K255
R172
R170
Q1
FL11
R174
K265 K264 K261 K257 K256

C134
FL10 Y1 K262 K260
F3
K254
C136
R176
U10
PS1
R175 U11
K275
K270
K271 K267
C137
Q2
R177
K276
C138
K277 K274 K273 K272 K269 K268

R178
C139
U12
R181
3V3
TP9
K286
R180
R179
K282
K281
R182
FL13 K278
FL12 U13 R183
TP10
C141
C140
TESTIN4
U15
C142
CR3 K288 K287 K285 K284 K283 K280 K279

C143
K292
Q3
K297
U14
K300
R186 K293
R187
R184
C145
C146
C144
K299 K298 K296 K295 K294 K291 K290 K289

R193 R188
R189
R191
C148
R185
FL14
R192
TP11
VCC
C151
K309
C149
K304
C157
C153 R194
C147
K305
C150
K301
U16
R190
C152
U20 R195
C159 C154
U17
FL15 C158 K312 K311 K310 K308 K307 K306 K303 K302
C156
R197
U19
R196
R202 R198 C155
K321
K316
U18 K317
R200
R201 PMX
TP14
16
R204
15
R199 TP12 D10 VPP R203 DS1

D11 GND C160 U21 R205 TP13 DLP_AUX
12V R206 DS2 LVDC_4
Q4 K318 K313
FL16
K314
C161
K324 K323 K322 K320 K319 K315

R207 DS3 12P_4
C162 DS4 HV1N_4

U22
FL17
K333
R211 R210 R209 DS5 HV1P_4
K328
K329
R208 R214 R213 R212 DS6 HV2P_4
DS7 HV2N_4
FL18
C163
R215
K335 K334 K332 K331 K330 K327 K326 K325 R217 DS8 AUX_1
K336
R216 R218 DS9 3V3
FL19
R220 Q6 R219 DS10 LVDC 1

Q5
2
TP15 J17 1
R222 DS11 VCC

C166
GND
C170 D12
R221
D13
Q7
GND R223 DS12 12V

D14
PMX R226 DS13 AVEE

R224
FL20 VNN R227

C172
C169
TP17 C175
K348 K347 K346 K345 K344 K343 K342 K341 K340 K339 K338 K337 TP16 R228 DS14 STATUS
Q8
F3 FL21 R225 DS15 FAULT

R229 VR1 R233 R232 R231 DS16 TSV2N
TSV2P
C174
DS17
TSV1P
R230
DS18
C176
TSV1N
R236 R235 R234 DS19
FL23 R242
R238 R237 DONE DS20
Q9
R239
TP19 TP18
FL22
R240
DLP AUX C177 AVEE

C179 C178 R241
VR2
Table 5-12 Fuses on the Relay board
FUSE VALUE DESCRIPTION
F1 1.1A/6V Auto Recover +5V (VCC1) to Probe
Security for (Pedof) Doppler probe

F2 240mA/125V Fast Action
(located on opposite side of GRLY)
Securing the regulator used for -3V3 supply for

F3 0.4A/30V Auto Recover
3V probe (-3.3VDC)
5-10-6-9 Jumpers
NONE
NONE

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-7 Front Plane Boards (XD BUS) - GFI Configuration

The main function of the Frontplane Board is to connect the 256 probe channels to the 256 system
transmit/receive channels.
5-10-7-1 General Description

The two identical Front Plane boards plug into the rear edge connectors on the Relay Board, the GTX
Board(s) and on the GRX Board(s).
The XD signals, TX and RX signals to and from the probes (via the Relay Board) are routed via these
boards.

The Front Plane boards plugs into the connectors on the rear of the Relay board, the GTX board(s) and
the GRX board(s).
Figure 5-83 Front Plane location - (GFI Configuration shown)
FRONT PLANE
BOARDS

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 5-13 Input Signals
INPUT DESCRIPTION CONNECTION FROM

Active Probe via Relay board in Receive
Back scattered echo signals (Receive Mode) and
XD1 - XD256 Mode
Transmitter pulses (Transmit Mode)
GTX board in Transmit Mode.
Table 5-14 Output Signals
OUTPUT DESCRIPTION CONNECTION TO

Active Probe via Relay board in
Transmitter pulses (Transmit Mode) and Back scattered
XD1 - XD256 Transmit Mode
echo signals (Receive Mode)
GRX board(s) in Receive Mode.
5-10-7-5 Fuses, Jumpers, Dip-switches and LEDs

None
Figure 5-84 Frontplane Board Block Diagram

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-8 Backplane
5-10-8-1 General description of GFI Configuration Backplane

The Backplane has connectors for the Front End boards (RELAY, GRX, GTX, DRX and GFI). It also
includes connectors for the Main Power supply, and a fan connector.
Voltages are distributed from the Main Power supply to the different boards.
Control signals and Clocks are distributed from the GFI board to the other boards.
Low amplitude analog signals from GRX board to DRX board.
Beamformed data signals are routed from DRX board to GFI board.
The only active electronics on the Backplane are a I2C memory device for the Board Info and a voltage
regulator for the power supply to the I2C memory. In addition, there are termination resistors and power
supply bypass capacitors.
Figure 5-85 Backplane - GFI Configuration

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-8 Backplane (contd)
5-10-8-2 General description of MRX Backplane

The Backplane has connectors for the Front End boards (RELAY, GTX, MRX and PD). It also includes
connectors for the Main Power supply, and a fan connector.
Voltages are distributed from the Main Power supply to the different boards.
Control signals and Clocks are distributed from the MRX board to the other boards.
Beamformed data signals are routed on MRX board.
The only active electronics on the Backplane are a I2C memory device for the Board Info and a voltage
regulator for the power supply to the I2C memory. In addition, there are termination resistors and power
supply bypass capacitors.
Figure 5-86 Backplane - MRX

PROPRIETARY TO GE

The Backplane is attached to the rear side of the Front End card rack.
Figure 5-87 Backplane location (GFI Configuration shown)
BACKPLANE

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-8-4 Backplane Block Diagram
Figure 5-88 Backplane Block Diagram - GFI Configuration
I/O Board Connector
Main
G Power Supply
R GTX DRX Connector
RX128 F
L Boards Boards I
Y
Fan Connector
Figure 5-89 Backplane Block Diagram - MRX
I/O Board Connector
Main
Power Supply
GRLY MRX GTX PD Connector
Fan Connector

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-8-5 Input DC voltages

See: Section 5-12 "Power distribution" on page 5-175.

See description for each FE board.
5-10-8-7 Control signals

5-10-8-8 Outputs
5-10-8-9 Fuses
NONE.
5-10-8-10 Jumpers
NONE.
NONE
5-10-8-12 Other switches

NONE.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-9 Channel Routing
5-10-9-1 Channel Routing - GFI Configuration

There are 4 Nathan ASICS on each column on the DRX board. Each Nathan processes 16 channels at
the same time, generates partial beam sum results on those 16 channels, sums with the partial beam
sum received from previous Nathan and sends the result to the next Nathan.
Figure 5-90 Channel Routing - GFI Configuration
F rontplane Upper
X DB US (192-255)
XDB US (128-191)
128-191 GRLY J11/J12

Probe 1
128 Ch 128-191
64-127
192-255
128-191 J 11/J 12 J 11/J 12 J9 J9 J9 J9 J 4/J 3 J 4/J 3 J 4/J 3 J 4/J 3
192-223
Probe 2 224- 160-
C W Doppler R X
192 Ch 255 191
224-255 192-223
160- 128-
224-255 192-223 160-191 128-159
32-63 191 159
192- 128-
64-127 223 159
128-191 R X128 (1) R X128 (2) G T X (1) G TX (2) G TX (3) G TX (4) DR X (1) DR X (2) DR X (3) DR X (4) G FI
192-223
Probe 3 0-31 64-95
192 Ch
32-63 96- 96-
32-63 0-31 32-63 64-95 0-31 32-63 64-95 96-127
64-127 128 127
128-191 J6
Probe 4 192-255 J 9/J 10 J 9/J 10 J 10 J 10 J 10 J 10 J 3/J 2 J 3/J 2 J 3/J 2 J 3/J 2
0-63
256 Ch 0-63
64-127 64-127
J9/J10
B ac kplane
XDB US (64-127)
XDB US (0-63)
F rontplane L ower
L ow level C hannels 0-63 Amplified C hannels 0-63


PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-9-2 Channel Routing - MRX

There are 6 Nathan FPGAs on the MRX board. Each Nathan processes 32 channels at the same time,
generates partial beam sum results on those 32 channels, sums with the partial beam sum received
from previous Nathan and sends the result to the next Nathan.
Figure 5-91 Channel Routing, MRX - R3.x.x
Frontplane Upper
XDBUS(224-255)
XDBUS(128-223)
128-191 J11/J12
Probe 1
128 Ch 128-191
64-127
192-255
128-191 J11/J12 J11/J12 J9 J9 J9 J9
192-223
Probe 2
192 Ch 160- 128-
32-63 GRLY 224-255 192-223
128-223 224- 55 191 159
64-127
(MRX 64
future)
192-223
Probe 3
CW Doppler RX
192 Ch
32-63 96-
32-1 7 0-31 0-31 32-63 64-95
64-127 127
J6
128-191
J9/J10
Probe 4 192-255 J9/J10 J10 J10 J10 J10
0-63
256 Ch 0-63
64-127 64-127
J9/J10
Backplane
XDBUS(32-127)
XDBUS(0-31)
Frontplane Lower


PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-9-2 Channel Routing - MRX (contd)
Figure 5-92 MRX Channel Allocation/Routing - R4.x.x
Frontplane Upper
XDBUS(224-255)
XDBUS(128-223)
J11/J12
128-191 128-191
192-223
192-255
Probe 1
192 Ch 32-63 J11/J12 J11/J12 J9 J9 J9 J9
64-127
128-191 160- 128-
192-223 GRLY 224-255 192-223
Probe 2 128-223 224- 55 191 159
192 Ch
32-63
(MRX 64
future)
128-191
CW Doppler RX
192-223
Probe 3
96-
192 Ch
32-63
32-1 7 0-31 0-31 32-63 64-95
127
64-127
J6
128-191 J9/J10 J9/J10 J10 J10 J10 J10
Probe 4 192-255
0-63
256 Ch 0-63
64-127 64-127
J9/J10
Backplane
XDBUS(32-127)
XDBUS(0-31)
Frontplane Lower


PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-10-9 Channel Routing (contd)

To conveniently support different channel numbered systems, the channel indexes are indexed so that
adding channel number into the system can be done by adding additional hardware while keeping the
channel index the same. System channel indexes expand from the middle number channel:
Figure 5-93 System Channel Index
GTX1 future
GTX2
GTX3
GTX4
0 31 32 63 64 95 96 127 128 159 160 191 192 223 224 255
64 channels
128 channels
192 channels
256 channels future
NOTE: 0-31 and 224-256 (GTX 1, not populated) currently supports probes with 192 channels, but is
designed to support probes with 256 channels for future use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-11
Back End Processor (BEP) description
The BEP and its sub-modules acts as the systems central processor. This chapter includes
descriptions for the vital BEP modules.

5-11-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
5-11-4 Signal Flow and Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
5-11-5 Location of the Back End Processor (BEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
5-11-6 BEP5.x - Block Diagram - R3.x and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
5-11-7 BEP5.x Description - R3.x and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
5-11-8 BEP5.x Top and Side BEP Connections - R3.x and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
5-11-9 BEP Extended Power Shutdown - R3.x and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
5-11-10 Internal Storage Devices - R3.x and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
5-11-11 BEP6.x - Block Diagram - R4.x and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
5-11-12 BEP6.x Description - R4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
5-11-13 Top and Side BEP6.x Connections - R4.x and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
5-11-14 BEP CB (ChargeBoard - functions as Extended Power Shutdown in BEP6.x) . . . . . . . 5-154
5-11-15 Internal Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
5-11-16 Peripherals descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
5-11-17 Internal peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
5-11-18 External peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
5-11-19 BEP - USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159
5-11-20 BEP - Video Card - R3.x and earlier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
5-11-21 BEP - Video Card - R4.x and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
5-11-22 Patient I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171
5-11-3 Introduction
The Back End Processor is a computer designed specially for the use in the LOGIQ E9 Ultrasound
Scanners made by GE.
5-11-4 Signal Flow and Processing

The Back End Processor receives the data from the Front End. Data is tagged as B-Mode, M-Mode,
Color Flow, and Doppler.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-5 Location of the Back End Processor (BEP)

The BEP is located on the left side, behind the side cover, inside the LOGIQ E9, see: Figure 5-94.
Figure 5-94 Back End Processor
5 - 114 Section 5-11 - Back End Processor (BEP) description

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-6 BEP5.x - Block Diagram - R3.x and earlier

The BEP is the brain of the LOGIQ E9. Controls peripherals, audio, display, data transfer, image
processing, etc.
Figure 5-95 CPU/Back End Processor Block Diagram - GFI configuration
SATA PWR SATA

DVD ADAPT PWA
DVD 1
J
K
M
H I
Y
POWER
BAYBIRD
USB (VGU
OPTION)
Z
J1 BEP
J5 J4 J3 J2
5 1 48V, 5Vstby
PS_ON#
48V,+12V
48V_OK
6 +5V,+5Vstby DC-DC AC_FAIL#
CONVERTERS
4 & SEQUENCE
PS_ON#, PWROK
+12V, -12V + 5V
LOGIC BEP PWR
3.3V, 5Vstby SUPPLY FRONT
PANEL
MODULE
3
REAR
12
PANEL
J46
IF NO
10/100bT
J44 10 DVR 11
DVI-I OUT
J42
AUDIO R
AUDIO L J43
EXT USB 1 J40
DVI-A PATIENT I/O

J41
(BT2010 OR
16X PCI EXPRESS

EXT USB 2
PCI
PCI EXPRESS
PCI
CN1 CN4
DVI-D J20 CN21
DVI-I OUT
DVI-I IN
AUDIO IN
ATX2 USB 1,2,3,4 LATER
ANALOG VIDEO
MOTHERBOARD
1000MbT
TX MAIN

10/100/
DVI-D POWER + LEDS

RX OPTION)
A
DVI-D
J21 TX
D2
(OPTIONAL)
VIDEO CARD
+5stby
DVR
SPARE PCI
48V
J22
GFI SATA3
DIGITAL
LR AUDIOJ36
D1 +12V AUDIO 8
OUT +5V
SATA2
HOST
+5V
DVD
+12V AUDIO
AMP IF NO
N
J29
POWER
DVR
BSCAN
ON/OFF SW, SATA1

I2C
J30
PWR LED
J31
USB 6 2
SATA0
USB 5 J35
J32
USB
CN5
USB 8 J3
J100
USB
D4 7
USB 7
5,6,7,8
PCI
J7 EXPRESS x1
USB HUB 1
D4
J28 USB Micro CN18
BB Controller
USB HUB 2
J27 (IO Ports & AUDIO IN

VPD OPTION L,R,CENTER AUDIO OUT,
USB HUB 3
J26 KEY * ON/OFF SW,

J12
Q PWR LED uBTX
J25 12V
L
J14
POWER MOTHERBOARD
+12V ATX1
J33 CENTER AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
P AMP
J34
+5V +12V 48V +5stby
SATA SATA PWR
HARD
REG +3.3V DRIVE
+12V
+5V
IO BOARD 20A
48V OUT
DC-DC
CONVERT + - 9
ER
12V
BATTERY
* On systems running R2.0.3 or
48V IN
CONTROL
earlier, Option Key was installed EPS
into J25 and these systems have V SENSE BOARD -
12V
+
no cable L. BATTERY

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-6 BEP5.x - Block Diagram - R3.x and earlier (contd)

Table 5-15 New Back End Configuration - MRX
One cable replaces three cables

PCIe Cable
- Cable, BEP to Backplane Change requires a different connection to BackPlane for Doppler
Cable - BEP5 to MRX
- Cable, PC2GFI Card (PCI express) Audio to new I/O Board in BEP.
version Backplane
- Cable, PCI express bulkhead
I/O Board I/O Board Change for MRX compatibility.
BEP Assembly BEP Assembly New BEP changes only on the PCIe Cable and the I/O Board.
Figure 5-96 CPU/Back End Processor Block Diagram - MRX
J2 J1
K Na
A
to/from BEP
SATA PWR
DVD ADAPT PWA
H DVD 1
SATA
J M
Y I
POWER
BAYBIRD
USB (VGU
OPTION)
Z
J1 BEP
J5 J4 J3 J2
Na
5 1 48V, 5Vstby
PS_ON#
48V,+12V
48V_OK
6 +5V,+5Vstby DC-DC AC_FAIL#
4 CONVERTERS
& SEQUENCE
PS_ON#, PWROK
+12V, -12V + 5V
LOGIC BEP PWR
3.3V, 5Vstby SUPPLY FRONT
PANEL
MODULE
3
REAR
12
PANEL
J46
IF NO
10/100bT 10 DVR 11
J44
DVI-I OUT
AUDIO R J42
AUDIO L J43
EXT USB 1
J40
PATIENT I/O
DVI-A
J41 (BT2010 or later
16X PCI EXPRESS
PCI
PCI EXPRESS
PCI
EXT USB 2 CN1 CN4

OPTION)
CN21
DVI-I OUT
DVI-I IN
AUDIO IN
DVI-D ATX2 USB 1,2,3,4

ANALOG VIDEO
MOTHERBOARD
J20
1000MbT
MAIN
10/100/
TX DVI-D POWER + LEDS

RX
DVI-D
J21 TX
A
D2
(OPTIONAL)
J2 J1
VIDEO CARD
DVR
SPARE PCI
+5stby
48V DOP
J22 SATA3
DIGITAL
AUDIO
D1 LR
XFMR
8
+12V AUDIO +5V
SATA2
HOST
+5V OUT
DVD
AUDIO
+12V XFMR J36
AMP IF NO
J29
Na DVR
POWER
BSCAN
SATA1
I2C
J30
ON/OFF SW,
J31 PWR LED 2
SATA0
J32
J35
USB HUB 2 USB

CN5
J3
J100 USB 5
USB
D4
7
USB 6
5,6,7,8
PCI
J7 EXPRESS x1
D4
USB 8
USB HUB 1
USB Micro
USB 7
Controller CN18
J28
BB (IO Ports
&VPD AUDIO IN
J27 OPTION L,R,CENTER AUDIO OUT,
USB HUB 3
KEY ON/OFF SW,

J26
Q J12 PWR LED uBTX
12V
L
J25 J14 POWER MOTHERBOARD
+12V ATX1
J33 AUDIO CENTER AUDIO OUT

P AMP
J34
SATA SATA PWR
+5V +12V 48V +5stby
HARD
REG +3.3V DRIVE
+12V
+5V
I/O BOARD 20A

48V OUT
DC-DC
CONVERT + - 9
ER
12V
48V IN BATTERY
CONTROL
EPS
V SENSE BOARD - +
12V
Red indicates GFI Configuration BATTERY
Blue indicates MRX

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-7 BEP5.x Description - R3.x and earlier
5-11-7-1 The EMC Enclosure House

A power supply for local voltages
A motherboard with RAM, a processor and PCI connectors for extension cards
An I/O board on the rear of the BEP with:
- Stereo audio to the speakers
- Subwoofer audio to the sub-woofer (low frequency (bass) speaker)
- DVI-I video output
- Two USB ports
- Interface for the B/W printer, the DVD drive and the optional DVR drive
- LAN output from the motherboard (10/100/1000 Base T)
Figure 5-97 External Connections, Rear
Hard Disk drive(s)

Front Panel with:
- Two USB ports (future)
- Status lights (LEDs) for network and Hard Disk activity
Patient I/O with AUX, Phono and ECG connectors. (future)
Figure 5-98 External Connections, Front
HDD Access Network

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-8 BEP5.x Top and Side BEP Connections - R3.x and earlier
Please refer to the illustrations.
Figure 5-99 Top BEP5.x Connections
-
GFI Configuration.
Not present with
MRX.
.
Figure 5-100 Side BEP Connections
Main LCD Video

OP Console
Factory Test
USB
Power
NOT PS/2
Center Speaker

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-8-1 Inside the BEP5.x

Here is a representative example of the inside of the BEP5.x:
Figure 5-101 Inside the BEP5.x
Power Supply
I/O Board HDD
EPS

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-8-2 Use of Expansion Slots on Motherboard

The Motherboard is a custom board designed for LOGIQ E9. It is based on Intels BTX Form Factor. It
has 2GB RAM, a Intel Core2 Duo E6400 Processor, with a long production life, and with Temperature,
Voltage, and Fan Speed Monitoring.
Video ard
C
DVR (Optional)
5-11-8-3 Procedure for resetting the BEP Bios Memory

See: 7-8-2-1 "Resetting the BEP BIOS Memory" on page 7-179.
5-11-8-4 BIOS Beep Codes

BIOS uses beeps of varying duration. A long beep will typically last for 2 seconds while a short beep will
last only 1 second. BIOS also uses beeps of different frequency to indicate critical errors. If BIOS detects
that the CPU is overheating it may play a high pitched repeating beep while the computer is running.
Table 5-16 BEP5.x Beep Codes
Beep Code Meaning Possible Cause
1 Long, 2 Short Video adapter failure Bad video adapter
Repeating (Endless loop) Memory error Bad memory or bad connection
1 Long, 3 Short Video adapter failure Bad video adapter or memory
High freq. beeps (while running) CPU is overheating CPU fan failure
Repeating High, Low beeps CPU failure Bad processor

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-8-5 Motherboard Block Diagram
Figure 5-102 Motherboard Block Diagram
CN1
PCI EXPRESS
16X PCI EXPRESS
PCI
PCI
CN21 CN4
ANALOG VIDEO
MOTHERBOARD
DVI-I OUT
DVI-I IN
AUDIO IN
ATX2 USB 1,2,3,4
1000MbT
MAIN
10/100/
+ LEDS
POWER
(OPTIONAL)
SPARE PCI
DVR
SATA3
VIDEO CARD
8
DIGITAL
HOST
SATA2
DVD
IF NO
DVR
SATA1
SATA0
CN5
J3
USB
5,6,7,8
PCI 7
EXPRESS x1
CN18
AUDIO IN
L,R,CENTER AUDIO OUT,
ON/OFF SW,
PWR LED
uBTX
12V
POWER
MOTHERBOARD
ATX1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-8-6 Motherboard Components
Figure 5-103 Motherboard Components

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-8-7 BEP Power Supply

Single board.
Figure 5-104 BEP Power Supply Components
48V, 5Vstby
PS_ON#
48V,+12V
48V_OK
+5V,+5Vstby DC-DC AC_FAIL#
CONVERTERS &
SEQUENCE
PS_ON#, PWROK
+12V, -12V + 5V
LOGIC BEP PWR
3.3V, 5Vstby SUPPLY

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-8-7 BEP Power Supply (contd)
Figure 5-105 BEP PS Voltages
* This LED is not present in the latest BEP.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-8-8 BEP5.x I/O Board

The BEP I/O Board combines the internal and BEP I/O into one easily-replaced board. Designed in
Milwaukee. Contains three USB hubs. Splits video between the main monitor and rear video output.
Distributes audio to speakers and rear connectors. Works with Extended Power Shutdown in a power
fail condition.
Figure 5-106 BEP5.x I/O Board Block Diagram - GFI Configuration
J44
DVI-I OUT
J42
AUDIO R
J43
AUDIO L
J40
EXT USB 1
J41 DVI-A
EXT USB 2
DVI-D J20
TX Main Cable
DVI-D
Power/Audio
RX
DVI-D
J21 TX
Main Cable
Video
+5stby
48V
J22
GFI
LR AUDIO
Main Cable
Power/Audio +12V AUDIO
+5V BEP to Card Rack
OUT
Backplane Cable
Power Baybird AUDIO
AMP J36
(used only if J29
VGU installed) ON/OFF SW,
BSCAN
I2C
J30
PWR LED
Power Cable -
DVD J31
USB 6
J32
USB 5 J35
Motherboard
J100 USB 8 Harness
USB 7
Main Cable -
USB (2 used) J7
USB HUB 1
J28 USB Micro

USB Cable -
Controller
USB HUB 2
4D Controller
J27 (IO Ports
USB Cable - &VPD
USB HUB 3
Baybird Option Key *

J26 J12
(used only if
VGU installed)
J25 J14
BW Printer +12V
XYZ Controller J33 CENTER AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
AMP
Audio Cable - J34
+5V +12V 48V +5stby
Subwoofer
I/O BOARD
REG Power
+3.3V +12V
+5V
* On systems running R2.03 or earlier, Option Key was

installed into J25 and these systems have no Cable L.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-8-8 BEP5.x I/O Board (contd)
Figure 5-107 BEP5.x I/O Board Block Diagram - MRX
J44
DVI-I OUT
J42
AUDIO R
J43
AUDIO L
J40
EXT USB 1
J41 DVI-A
EXT USB 2
DVI-D J20
TX Main Cable
DVI-D Power/Audio
RX
DVI-D
J21 TX
Main Cable
Video
+5stby
48V DOP
J22 AUDIO
Main Cable XFMR BEP to
LR
Power/Audio +12V Card Rack
AUDIO +5V Backplane
+5V OUT
AUDIO Cable
Power Baybird +12V XFMR J36
(used only if J29
AMP
BSCAN
VGU installed)
I2C
J30
ON/OFF SW,
Power Cable -
DVD J31 PWR LED
J32
J35
USB HUB 2
Motherboard
Harness
J100 USB 5
USB 6
Main Cable -
USB (2 used)
J7
USB 8
USB HUB 1
USB Micro
USB 7
USB Cable -
Controller
4D Controller J28 (IO Ports
USB Cable - &VPD
J27 Option
Baybird
USB HUB 3
Key
(used only if
VGU installed) J26 J12
J25 J14
BW Printer
+12V
XYZ
Controller J33 AUDIO CENTER AUDIO OUT
AMP
Audio Cable - J34
Subwoofer +5V +12V 48V +5stby
I/O BOARD Power

REG +3.3V
+12V
+5V

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 5-108 BEP5.x I/O Board
5-11-8-9 Inputs
Supply voltage of 5V and 12V from BEP power supply card. The power voltages are regulated
at +/-10%.
5V STDBY from the BEP power supply card for OP I/O (Pass through). The maximum current for
the 5V STDBY is 2.5A per supply voltage.
PWR_ON signal from the Operator panel to the Motherboard (pass through).
Two USB ports for OP Panel (pass through), one USB for USB hub and one USB for Patient I/O
module.
Doppler Audio from GFI or MRX.
Doppler Audio mixed with Windows system sounds from motherboard.
DVI-I input from the video card or DVR card.
Battery voltage for the test connector.
Battery charger status signals.
AC Fail and PSON_N signal from the BEP PS.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-8-10 Outputs
12V DC and 5V DC for Patient I/O, DVD drive, Wireless microphone receiver and High capacity
drive. The maximum current capability is 2A
5V STDBY from the BEP power supply card for OPI/O (Pass through) USB ports for Color and BW
printer
USB port for Option Key
USB port for Wireless Microphone Receiver
USB port for 4D Motor Controller
Audio Line In to the Motherboard
Audio to DVR board on Motherboard
Audio to the OP Panel for the speakers.
External Audio outputs
Audio to the subwoofer
DVI-D output for Main Monitor
DVI-I output for External Monitor
Two external USB ports
Two spare internal USB ports
External Test connector
I2C bus clock and data signals to the Backplane, BEP PS and Battery charger module.
Control signals for the Battery charger module
5-11-8-11 Functional Description of the BEP5.x I/O Board

Video Sub System. The video on the BEP I/O is the same as the video on the main monitor. The I/O
card supports video resolutions up to 1600*1200 @ 60Hz. The I/O card supports both digital video and
analog video on BEP I/O. The I/O card receives the DVI-I input from the DVR, this DVI-I video consists
of both digital and analog video. The digital video (i.e. DVI-D) is fed to the main system monitor. The
digital and the analog, which is the DVI-I, is fed to the external video output. Given below is the video
distribution in the I/O card. The DVI-I signals are received and they are fed to the TMDS receiver. The
DVI video is encoded in TMDS format. The TMDS receiver converts these signals to digital RGB
signals. The digital RGB signals are then fed to the TMDS transmitter to convert them to the TMDS
format. The digital RGB signals are also fed to the second TMDS transmitter that encodes the digital
RGB into the TMDS format to be fed to the external DVI-I output. The analog video is fed to this output
to make it DVI-I meaning DVI-Integrated (Both digital and analog). In order to connect an analog
monitor, a DVI-I to VGA adapter is needed.
Figure 5-109 Video Distribution
J44
DVI-I OUT
DVI-A
DVI-D J20
J21 TX DVI-D Main Cable
RX Power/Audio
Main Cable DVI-D
Video TX

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-8-11 Functional Description of the BEP5.x I/O Board (contd)

Audio Subsystem, Doppler Audio from GFI of a GFI Configuration system or Doppler Audio from the
MRX Board of an MRX Configurationsystem. The stereo audio to the BEP I/O isline-level. The Doppler
audio from the GFI or MRX Board is received and fed to the audio splitter. The splitter output is fed to
the Audio Line In to the motherboard and to the audio in of the DVR card and also to the external audio
outputs. The audio signals to the motherboard and DVR card are fed to the header on the I/O card. The
external audio signals, left and right signals are fed to the RCA jack connectors. The external audio is
the Doppler audio from the GFI or MRX.
Figure 5-110 GFI or MRX Audio Distribution
J42 AUDIO R Out

From Backplane
J43 AUDIO L Out GFI or MRX
AUDIO AUDIO
Splitter J36
AUDIO in for
DVR Card
AUDIO line J35
in for MB
To
Motherboard
Audio from the Motherboard (R#9). R#9.1-The audio signal goes to sub-woofer shall support 5W
subwoofer. The audio from the motherboard, which is Doppler audio mixed with the system sounds is
fed to the I/O card. This is amplified and fed to the operator panel for the main speakers and also to the
subwoofer. The audio distribution is shown below.
Figure 5-111 Motherboard Audio Distribution
+12V
J22
AUDIO From MB
AMP J35
To OP I/O L R AUDIO Out

+12V
J33
AUDIO CENTER AUDIO Out
AUDIO to Subwoofer
AMP

PROPRIETARY TO GE

USB Subsystem (R#1, R#2, R#3, R#5). Four USB ports from the motherboard are fed to the I/O board.
USB 5 and 6 are for the operator console and is passing through the I/O card (R#2). USB7 is for the
Patient I/O module. (R#3) Three 4-port USB hubs will be employed to create the required 10 USB ports
as shown in Figure 6.3. USB 8 will be fed to first USB hub. The outputs of the first hub drive the USB
micro controller, external USB1, the second USB hub and the third USB hub. USB micro controller and
USB1 are driven by the first hub rather than the second one to have better latency. The second hub
drives the Color and black and white printer, Option key and Wireless microphone receiver. The third
hub drives 4D motor controller, external USB 2. The other two ports of the third hub are populated for
spares. I/O card shall not provide isolation to the external outputs, as an external door will be present.
(R#5)
Figure 5-112 USB Subsystem
EXT USB 1 J40
J41
EXT USB 2
J22
USB 6
From MB
USB 5 J35
USB 7
J100
MAIN Cable - D4
USB 8
J7
USB HUB 1
MAIN Cable - D4
J28 USB Micro
4D Controller - BB Controller
USB HUB 2
(IO Ports &

BAYBIRD (used only J27
VPD) OPTION
if VGU installed) - Z
USB HUB 3
J26 KEY*
J12
BW Printer - Q
J25 J14
XYZ Controller - L
* On Systems running R2.0.3 or earlier, Option Key was

installed into J25 and these systems have no Cable L.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

USB I/O Ports (R#4). The Vital Product Data of the I/O card is stored in the program PROM. (R#4) The
USB Micro controller will be a part of the JTAG boundary scan chain. This is discussed in detail in
section 7. The SCDT signal from the DVI receiver is fed to the micro controller I/O pin to monitor the
presence of DVI input to the DVI receiver. This is an active high signal. The micro controller also controls
the switch for the DDC -CLK and DDC-DATA. These are the I2C signals from the DVI receiver. A SPDT
switch is employed to connect the DDC data and clock signals from the DVI receiver to either the main
monitor DVI-D connector or the external monitor DVI-I connector. The switch is normally connected to
the main monitor. This I2C bus is used to read the EDID PROM in the monitor. In the event the main
monitor is bad we want to be able to switch to read the EDID PROM on the external monitor. The I2C
bus must access and read the DVI-TX RSEN register content. If this bit is set then the transmitter is
seeing the DVI receiver on the other end in the monitor. AC_FAIL and PSON_N signals are fed to the
interrupts ports of the microcontroller. Based on the signal logic the microcontroller decides to enable
either the main power supply 48V or the battery 48V. The microcontroller generates a I2C_Reset line
and this is fed to the I2C multiplexer to reset the I2C bus.
Figure 5-113 USB I/O Ports

PROPRIETARY TO GE

USB Subsystem (R#10, R#11, R#12, R3#13) From the BEP power supply, 5V STBY, 5V and 12V are
fed to the I/O card. (R#10) 5V STBY is fed to the OP I/O (R#13). The 5V and 12V are fed to the power
connectors for the DVD drive, High capacity drive, the Patient I/O drive and Wireless microphone.
(R#11) The PWR_ON signals from the OP I/O pass through the I/O board and go to the motherboard.
(R#12)
Figure 5-114 Power Subsystem

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-9 BEP Extended Power Shutdown - R3.x and earlier

The Extended Power Shutdown provides 2 minutes of power to ensure orderly shutdown of LOGIQ E9.
It uses two replaceable sealed Lead Acid Batteries. The Extended Power Shutdown is NOT a UPS
On power fail, the LOGIQ E9 shuts down. There are three Charge states Bulk Charge, Over Charge,
Float Charge.
Figure 5-115 Extended Power Shutdown Block Diagram
20A
48V OUT
DC-DC
CONVERT + -
ER
12V
48V IN BATTERY
CONTROL
EPS
V SENSE BOARD - +
12V
BATTERY
Figure 5-116 Extended Power Shutdown Components
CAUTION When the BEP door is open, the Extended Power Shutdown circuit board is exposed. When
working inside the BEP, remove the battery cable from the Extended Power Shutdown to prevent
accidental short circuit of the 24V of the battery that can damage the Extended Power Shutdown
circuitry.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-10 Internal Storage Devices - R3.x and earlier

LOGIQ E9 has these internal storage devices:
EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet (size: 120 GB, or more)
CD/DVD drive available from front of scanner. ONLY CD-R discs and DVD Recordable discs are
supported. (Not CD R/W or DVD R/W)
5-11-10-1 Hard Disk Drive Partitions

The LOGIQ E9 Hard Disk Drive is divided into four partitions. Table 5-17 "LOGIQ E9 Hard Disk Drive
Partitions" on page 5-134 describes the drive letter and the use of the partitions.
Table 5-17 LOGIQ E9 Hard Disk Drive Partitions
DRIVE LABEL SIZE TYPE
C: SYSTEM 15.0 GB NTFS
D: USER 10.0 GB NTFS
E: ARCHIVE 115 GB NTFS
Depends on the type of media

G: OPTICAL DRIVE
inserted
Z: Package Repository Remote Software Reload
5-11-10-2 Use of the Hard Disk Drive Partitions
Table 5-18 Use of the Partitions
DRIVE
LETTER LABEL SUBDIRECTORY USED FOR
Windows operating system
C: SYSTEM target\bin Idunn Program Files
target\resources Factory resources
Should be empty, but may contain patches

target\bin
of program files
target\resources User changed resources
D: USER Directory for exchanging files in/out of the

system
Log files
Temporary files
GEMS_DB Local archive database
GEMS_IMG Local archive images

E: ARCHIVE
GEMS_REP Local archive reports
Temporary storage for images
G: OPTICAL System swap file
Package
Z: Remote Software Reload
Repository

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-10-3 BEP HDD (Hard Disk Drive)

The Hard Disk Drive is a 160GB SATA device with ~115GB for Patient DB and Images.
Figure 5-117 BEP Hard Disk Drive

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-11 BEP6.x - Block Diagram - R4.x and later

The BEP is the brain of the LOGIQ E9. Controls peripherals, audio, display, data transfer, image
processing, etc.
Table 5-19 New Back End Configuration - MRX

Less cables
BEP6.X BEP5.X Dual fans
ON/OFF and reset buttons
I/O Board I/O Board Change for new Motherboard
ChargeBoard EPS (Extended Power Shutdown)
PowerBoard Power Supply Board
Figure 5-118 CPU/Back End Processor Block Diagram - R4.x and R5
SATA PWR SATA

DVD 1
M
Y
POWER
BAYBIRD
I USB (VGU
Z OPTION)
J1
1
DRIVE
HARD
A
J2 J1
FRONT I/O
11
REAR SVGA 9 with DVR
PANEL DVI-D J 3
4
S-VIDEO J30 TX DVI-D DVI-D 2
OUT RX
DVI-D
(OPTION) TX 8
J44
DVI-I OUT CN DV12
PCI
16X PCI EXPRESS
USB #H3 CN F101

IPASS2
PCIE x1 IPASS1
USB PWR ENABLE
DVI-I OUT
DVI-I IN
AUDIO IN
J40
EXT USB 1
FET +5V
J41 OC DETECT CN CN
EXT USB 2 CN DV11
SATA6 SATA4
USB #H4
J46 CN AUDIO1
USB 1,2
+ LEDS
(OPTIONAL)
100/1000bT CN
SATA0
SPARE
LAN
J42
PATIENT IO
DVR
AUDIO R
CTRL
J43
AUDIO L (BT10
48V
OPTION)
TO DVR
HOST
J21
DVD
D2 GFI
+5stby +12V AUDIO
48V
J22 AUDIO 5
AMP
D1 DIGITAL AUDIO (FUTURE)
5V STBY
+12V CODEC
SATA0
AUDIO SATA4 5A without DVR 48v TO 28v
with DVR CONVERT
ACFAIL

CN SATA5
+5V PCIe L5
+5V STBY +5V
ON/OFF SW, PWR LED PCIe L6 6
+5V STBY Vbat
J3
+12V PCH POWER
SATA #3 CN IO 1
HUB USB8 CN SATA3
SATA2 48V 28v/BAT
J2 SOURCE
+12V CN PWR1
SATA #2 SELECT
CN IO 2 48V
POWER ON/OFF
ACFAIL
J100 USB 0 5V STBY USB
D4 SATA3
5vDUAL 5vDUAL
J7
SATA0 cFast
USB 1 USB0 POWER
D4
J28 USB 2
BB
J27 USB7 3.3vDUAL
USB 3 USB9 PCIe L8
USB13
POWER 28v 28v 28v
USB Micro Mini PCIe TO TO TO
USB10 USB12
J26 USB 4 Controller 12v 5v 3.3v
Q (IO Ports
USB 13
3.3vDUAL
J25 USB 5 &VPD +5V
L +5V
+12V
J4 USB 6 +48V +12V +12V
H +28V BATT
+48V
J14 USB 7 +5V
J12 USB 9
+3.3V
OPTION KEY CN PWR2

+5V R4 ONLY POWERBOARD
+12V Patient IO
J29
+5V
5vDUAL
ACFAIL
J30
+12V
Vbat
48V
P J33
20A
48V
CHARGER
- + Vbat
12V
BATTERY 5vDUAL
AC FAIL
+ - CHARGEBOARD
12V 7
BEP 6.1
BATTERY

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-12 BEP6.x Description - R4.x
5-11-12-1 The EMC Enclosure House

A PowerBoard for local voltages
A motherboard with RAM, a processor and PCI connectors for extension cards
An I/O board on the rear of the BEP with:
- Stereo audio to the speakers (1)
- Subwoofer audio to the sub-woofer (low frequency (bass) speaker)
- DVI-I video output
- Two USB ports
- Interface for the B/W printer, the DVD drive and the optional DVR drive
- LAN output from the motherboard (10/100/1000 Base T)
Figure 5-119 External Connections, Rear
L R
4 3
2 1
Hard Disk Drive(s)

Front Panel with:
- Two USB ports (future)
- Status lights (LEDs) for network and Hard Disk activity
Patient I/O with AUX, Phono and ECG connectors. (future)
Figure 5-120 External Connections, Front

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-13 Top and Side BEP6.x Connections - R4.x and later

Refer to the illustrations.
Figure 5-121 Top BEP Connections - J5 PCIe to GFI2 is present on GFI Configuration
J1Main PS
48V, 5V In
J5 PCIe
to GFI2
(legacy)
Figure 5-122 Side BEP Connections

J21 Upper LCD Video Out
Inside BEP
J3 SA1
SPARE
Reset
On/
Off
J2 SA2
DVD
25
25
13
13
J22 Test Connector
J23 A/V Out

14
14
1
J100 Op
Panel Video
J7 Op Panel
Buttons
J28 4D
Motorcontroller
J27 DriveBay
J26 BW
Printer
J25 XYZ
Motorcontroller
J4 Main
PS USB
J14 Spare
Power Power Inside BEP

6
6
4
4
2
2
1
1
3
3
5
J29 J30
Power Power J12 Options
Dongle
R4 only
J33 Center

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-13-1 Inside the BEP6.x

Here is a representative example of the inside of the BEP6.x:
Figure 5-123 Inside the BEP6.x
2. Printer Bracket 4. Front I/O 6. ChargeBoard 8. BEP Fans 10. BEP to BP Cable
3. Hard Disk Drive 5. PowerBoard 7. Battery 9. Side I/O Board 11. Video Bypass Board

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-13-2 BEP5.x in comparison to BEP6.x
Table 5-20 BEP5.x compared to BEP6.x
Front End
Back End
Hardware Widescreen
Processor Processor RAM USB Wireless
Compatibility Monitor
Family
GFI vs. MRX
Core 2 Duo Different I/O

2GB External to Board ->
2 cores, 11 ports,
BEP 5.x DDR2-667 BEP different Not Supported
2.13GHz 3 hubs
Limit 3.5GB USB Dongle BEP part
2M Cache numbers
Internal
i5-2400 8GB 15 ports, 1 hub same wireless

(hub only for technology
One BEP for
BEP 6.1 4 cores, 3.1GHz DDR3-1333 in laptops Not Supported
customer both
8M Cache Limit 16GB ports) R4 and R5 are
not compatible
with R6
Internal
same wireless
Widescreen
i5-2400 8GB 15 ports, 1 hub technology
Monitor
(hub only for in laptops One BEP for
BEP 6.2 4 cores, 3.1GHz DDR3-1333 supported in
customer R6 is not both
8M Cache Limit 16GB R6
ports) compatible
BEP 6.2x
with
R4 and R5

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-13-3 Use of Expansion Slots on Motherboard

The Motherboard is a custom board designed for LOGIQ E9. It is based on Intels BTX Form Factor. It
has 2GB RAM, a Intel Core2 Duo E6400 Processor, with a long production life, and with Temperature,
Voltage, and Fan Speed Monitoring.
Video ard
C
DVR (Optional)
5-11-13-4 Procedure for resetting the BEP Bios Memory

See: 7-8-2-1 "Resetting the BEP BIOS Memory" on page 7-179.
5-11-13-5 BIOS Beep Codes

BIOS uses beeps of varying duration. A long beep will typically last for 2 seconds while a short beep will
last only 1 second. BIOS also uses beeps of different frequency to indicate critical errors. If BIOS detects
that the CPU is overheating it may play a high pitched repeating beep while the computer is running.
Table 5-21 BEP6.x Beep Codes
Beep Code Meaning Possible Cause
1 Long, 2 Short Video adapter failure Bad video adapter
Repeating (Endless loop) Memory error Bad memory or bad connection
1 Long, 3 Short Video adapter failure Bad video adapter or memory
High freq. beeps (while running) CPU is overheating CPU fan failure
Repeating High, Low beeps CPU failure Bad processor

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-13-6 Motherboard Block Diagram
Figure 5-124 Motherboard Block Diagram - R4 and R5
11 9
J
3
4 without DVR 2
8 with DVR
CN DV12
PCI
16X PCI EXPRESS

IPASS2 CN F101
PCIE x1 IPASS1
DVI-I OUT
DVI-I IN
AUDIO IN
CN CN CN DV11
SATA6 SATA4
CN AUDIO1
USB 1,2
+ LEDS
(OPTIONAL)
CN
SATA0
SPARE
DVR HOST
DVD
5
SATA0
SATA4 5A Without DVR
+3.3V SATA5 With DVR
CN SATA5
PCIe L5
+5V
PCIe L6 6
+5V STBY
PCH
CN IO 1
HUB USB8 CN SATA3
SATA2
CN PWR1
CN IO 2 48V
POWER ON/OFF
ACFAIL
SATA3 5V STBY
5vDUAL
SATA0 cFast
USB0 POWER
3.3vDUAL
USB7
USB9 PCIe L8
POWER
MAIN POWER
USB13
USB10 USB12
Mini PCIe from
3.3vDUAL
POWERBOARD
+5V
+12V +12V
+48V
+5V
+3.3V
CN PWR2
Patient IO
+5V
+12V 7
MOTHERBOARD
CN USB11

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-13-6 Motherboard Block Diagram (contd)
BEP 6.2 and later the DVR Card is no longer present. The Video Jumper Flex Cable (7) and SATA
Jumper Cable (5) are now present when the DVR Card is not present. These Jumpers were removed
in the previous BEPs if the CDVR Card Option was installed.
Figure 5-125 Motherboard Block Diagram - R6 (no DVR Card)
J 3
4
2
7
CN DVI 2
PCI
16X PCI EXPRESS

IPASS2 CN F101
PCIE x1 IPASS1
CN CN CN DVI 1
SATA6 SATA4
CN AUDIO1
USB 1,2
+ LEDS
CN
SATA0
SPARE
SPARE
SATA0
SATA4
+3.3V SATA5
CN SATA5
PCIe L5
+5V
+5V STBY
PCIe L6 5
PCH
CN IO 1
HUB USB8 CN SATA3
SATA2
CN PWR1
CN IO 2 48V
POWER ON/OFF
ACFAIL
SATA3 5V STBY
5vDUAL
SATA0 cFast
USB0 POWER
USB7 3.3vDUAL
USB9 PCIe L8 MAIN POWER
USB13
POWER
Mini PCIe from
USB10 USB12
POWERBOARD
3.3vDUAL
+5V
+12V +12V
+48V
+5V
+3.3V
CN PWR2
Patient IO
6
+5V
+12V
MOTHERBOARD CN USB11

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-13-7 Motherboard Components
Figure 5-126 Motherboard Components

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-13-8 BEP6.x Power Supply - PB (PowerBoard)

Single board.
Figure 5-127 BEP Power Supply - PB Components
to CN PWR2 on MB to CN PWR1 on MB
28v 48V
ACFAIL
TO
12v 5V STBY
48V
Vbat 28v 5vDUAL
TO
5vDUAL 5v 48v TO 28v
ACFAIL 28v/BAT
CONVERT
28v SOURCE
SELECT 48V
TO Vbat
POWERBOARD 3.3v
Figure 5-128 BEP PS - PB Voltages
PLED2 ATX POWER OK
PLED3 POWER ON
PLED4 +3.3V
PLED5 +5V STBY
PLED6 +28V
PLED1 +5V
PLED7 POWER OK
PLED2 +48V
PLED2 +12V
All LEDs are green when the LOGIQ E9 is on and voltage is ok.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-13-9 BEP6.x I/O Board

The BEP I/O Board combines the internal and BEP I/O into one easily-replaced board. Designed in
Milwaukee. Contains three USB hubs. Splits video between the main monitor and rear video output.
Distributes audio to speakers and rear connectors. Works with the ChargeBoard in a power fail
condition.
Figure 5-129 BEP6.x I/O Board Block Diagram - R4.x
REAR SVGA
PANEL DVI-D
J30 TX DVI-D
S-VIDEO DVI-D
OUT RX
DVI-D
(OPTION) TX
J44
DVI-I OUT
USB #H3
USB PWR ENABLE
J40
EXT USB 1
FET +5V
J41 OC DETECT
EXT USB 2
USB #H4
J46
100/1000bT
J42 LAN
AUDIO R
CTRL
J43
AUDIO L
TO DVR
J21
MAIN
CABLE VIDEO GFI/MRX
+5stby +12V AUDIO
48V
J22 AUDIO from
MAIN CABLE AMP CN 10 1
POWER/AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO (FUTURE) on MB
+12V CODEC
AUDIO
AMP +3.3V
+5V
+5V STBY
ON/OFF SW, PWR LED
POWERED eSATA J3
+12V
CABLE DVD SATA #3
J2
+12V
SATA #2
J100 USB 0
MAIN CABLE
USB (2 used) - D4 J7 USB 1
J28 USB 2
4D CONTROLLER -
BB from
J27 USB 3
BAYBIRD -Z CN 10 2
USB Micro on MB
J26 USB 4 Controller USB 13
BW PRINTER - Q
(IO Ports
XYZ J25 USB 5 &VPD +5V
CONTROLLER - L
+12V
MAIN POWER J4 USB 6 +48V
SUPPLY - H +28V BATT
J14 USB 7
J12 USB 9
OPTION KEY
+5V NOT PRESENT IN R5
+12V
J29
POWER BAYBIRD
J30
J33
SUBWOOFER
SIDE I/O BOARD

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 5-130 BEP6.x I/O Board
5-11-13-10 Inputs
Supply voltage of 5V and 12V from BEP PowerBoard. The power voltages are regulated
at +/-10%.
5V STDBY from the BEP PowerBoard for OP I/O (Pass through). The maximum current for the 5V
STDBY is 2.5A per supply voltage.
PWR_ON signal from the Operator panel to the Motherboard (pass through).
Two USB ports for OP Panel (pass through), one USB for USB hub and one USB for Patient I/O
module.
Doppler Audio from GFI or MRX.
Doppler Audio mixed with Windows system sounds from motherboard.
DVI-I input from the video card or DVR card.
Battery voltage for the test connector.
Battery charger status signals.
AC Fail and PSON_N signal from the BEP PS.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-13-11 Outputs
12V DC and 5V DC for Patient I/O, DVD drive, Wireless microphone receiver and High capacity
drive. The maximum current capability is 2A
5V STDBY from the BEP power supply card for OPI/O (Pass through) USB ports for Color and BW
printer
USB port for Option Key
USB port for Wireless Microphone Receiver
USB port for 4D Motor Controller
Audio Line In to the Motherboard
Audio to DVR board on Motherboard
Audio to the OP Panel for the speakers.
External Audio outputs
Audio to the subwoofer
DVI-D output for Main Monitor
DVI-I output for External Monitor
- NOTE: Any display connected to the DVI-I output is intended to serve as a clone of the image
on the main display. In the event that a display connected to DVI-I video output is not capable
of displaying the resolution being used by the main display, then the auxiliary display will be
blank or show a "no-signal" message.
Two external USB ports
Two spare internal USB ports
External Test connector
I2C bus clock and data signals to the Backplane, BEP PS and Battery charger module.
Control signals for the Battery charger module

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-13-12 Functional Description of the BEP6.x I/O Board

Video Sub System. The video on the BEP I/O is the same as the video on the main monitor. The I/O
card supports video resolutions up to 1600*1200 @ 60Hz. The I/O card supports both digital video and
analog video on BEP I/O. The I/O card receives the DVI-I input from the DVR, this DVI-I video consists
of both digital and analog video. The digital video (i.e. DVI-D) is fed to the main system monitor. The
digital and the analog, which is the DVI-I, is fed to the external video output. Given below is the video
distribution in the I/O card. The DVI-I signals are received and they are fed to the TMDS receiver. The
DVI video is encoded in TMDS format. The TMDS receiver converts these signals to digital RGB
signals. The digital RGB signals are then fed to the TMDS transmitter to convert them to the TMDS
format. The digital RGB signals are also fed to the second TMDS transmitter that encodes the digital
RGB into the TMDS format to be fed to the external DVI-I output. The analog video is fed to this output
to make it DVI-I meaning DVI-Integrated (Both digital and analog). In order to connect an analog
monitor, a DVI-I to VGA adapter is needed.
Figure 5-131 Video Distribution
SVGA
DVI-D
TX DVI-D DVI-D
RX
DVI-D
TX
J44
DVI-I
OUT
to CN 10 1 on MB
MAIN
CABLE J21
VIDEO

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Audio Subsystem, Doppler Audio from GFI of a GFI Configuration system or Doppler Audio from the
MRX Board of an MRX Configurationsystem. The stereo audio to the BEP I/O is line-level. The Doppler
audio from the GFI or MRX Board is received and fed to the audio splitter. The splitter output is fed to
the Audio Line In to the motherboard and to the audio in of the DVR card and also to the external audio
outputs. The audio signals to the motherboard and DVR card are fed to the header on the I/O card. The
external audio signals, left and right signals are fed to the RCA jack connectors. The external audio is
the Doppler audio from the GFI or MRX.
Figure 5-132 Audio Distribution
from CN 10 1 on MB
AUDIO R J42 TO DVR

J43
AUDIO L
GFI/MRX
AUDIO
AUDIO line IN for Motherboard

CODEC
DIGITAL AUDIO (FUTURE)
Audio from the Motherboard (R#9). R#9.1-The audio signal goes to sub-woofer shall support 5W
subwoofer. The audio from the motherboard, which is Doppler audio mixed with the system sounds is
fed to the I/O card. This is amplified and fed to the operator panel for the main speakers and also to the
subwoofer. The audio distribution is shown below.
Figure 5-133 Motherboard Audio Distribution
from CN 10 1 on MB
+5stby +12V AUDIO

48V
J22 AUDIO
To OP PANEL AMP
POWER/AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO (FUTURE)
+12V CODEC
AUDIO
AMP
AUDO to
J33
SUBWOOFER

PROPRIETARY TO GE

BEP6 I/O Board has similar functionality as BEP5 I/O Board. Some connections are different.
Figure 5-134 BEP5 I/O Board in comparison to BEP6 I/O Board
BEP PS power LEDs

PLED2 ATX POWER OK
PLED3 POWER ON
PLED4 +3.3V
BEP5 BEP Rear

BEP6 BEP Face PLED5 +5V STBY
J40 Customer USB

J44 Customer Video Out
BEP Face
PLED6 +28V
J46 LAN
J41 Customer USB
10/100/1000 PLED1 +5V
4 3
2 1
J43 J42 J45

J4 Main J1Main PS Customer Audio Customer Inside BEP PLED7 POWER OK
DVI IN J3 SA1
PS USB 48V, 5V In S-Video
Hub3 OK/Error SPARE Reset
Hub2 OK/Error On/ PLED2 +48V
MC OK/Error J2 SA2 Off
J3 SA1 J2 SA2 DVD
DVD SPARE PLED2 +12V
J22 pins of note:
25
25
13
13
5 - PWR_SW
6 - 5V_STDBY
BEP Top
Test Connector
25
25
13
13
9-13 - 48V
J22 A/V Out
J5 PCIe 17, 21-25 - GND
Test Connector
t o GFI2
J22 A/V Out

18 - PWR_LED_P
BEP Top
Test Connector
pins of note:
14
14
1
5, 13, 23 - Ground J1 Main PS
14
14
1
1
3 - 24V 48V, 5V In
4 - 48V
8 - 12V
J100 Op
9 - 5V J100 Op
Panel Video 10 - AC_FAIL_N Panel Video J5 PCIe
J7 Op Panel 11 - 3.3V to GFI2
J7 Op Panel
Buttons 12 - 5V_STDBY (legacy)
Buttons
16 - VBAT_TP
J28 4D J28 4D
24 - PWR_SW
Motorcontrol Motorcontroller
25 - PSON_N
BEP Front
J27 Bay Bird J27 DriveBay
J26 BW J9 Customer USB

J26 BW SPD LED
Printer Printer
J25 XYZ Motor J25 XYZ
Controller * Motorcontroller
5V J4 Main
12V PS USB
Inside BEP
6
ACT LED ACT LED J8 Customer USB

4
4
2
WARNING: J14 Spare

!
1
J14 Spare
3
3
5
J29-30 are for powering peripheral

J31 J32 devices. They are not keyboard/mouse
Power Power ports and will destroy any keyboard or Power Power Inside BEP
mouse that is plugged into them.
6
6
6
J12 Options
4
4
4
2
2
1
1
3
3
Dongle*
5
5
5
J29 J30 J29 J30

Power Pinout:
6
Power Power
4
Power Power J12 Options

2 1
1, 2 - GND
3,5 - 12V Dongle
3
5
J33 Center
4,6 - 5V
Speaker out
J33 Center

PROPRIETARY TO GE

BEP6 I/O Board has similar functionality as the BEP5 I/O Board. Some connections are different.
Figure 5-135 BEP6.x I/O USB I/O Ports
REAR SVGA
PANEL DVI-D
J30 TX DVI-D
S-VIDEO DVI-D
OUT RX
DVI-D
(OPTION) TX
J44
DVI-I OUT
USB #H3
USB PWR ENABLE
J40
EXT USB 1
FET +5V
J41 OC DETECT
EXT USB 2
USB #H4
J46
100/1000bT
J42 LAN
AUDIO R
CTRL
J43
AUDIO L
TO DVR
J21
MAIN
CABLE VIDEO GFI/MRX
+5stby +12V AUDIO
48V
J22 AUDIO from
MAIN CABLE AMP CN 10 1
POWER/AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO (FUTURE) on MB
+12V CODEC
AUDIO
AMP +3.3V
+5V
+5V STBY
ON/OFF SW, PWR LED
POWERED eSATA J3
+12V
CABLE DVD SATA #3
J2
+12V
SATA #2
J100 USB 0
MAIN CABLE
USB (2 used) - D4 J7 USB 1
J28 USB 2
4D CONTROLLER -
BB from
J27 USB 3
BAYBIRD -Z CN 10 2
USB Micro on MB
J26 USB 4 Controller USB 13
BW PRINTER - Q
(IO Ports
XYZ J25 USB 5 &VPD +5V
CONTROLLER - L
+12V
MAIN POWER J4 USB 6 +48V
SUPPLY - H +28V BATT
J14 USB 7
J12 USB 9
OPTION KEY
+5V NOT PRESENT IN R5
+12V
J29
POWER BAYBIRD
J30
J33
SUBWOOFER
SIDE I/O BOARD

PROPRIETARY TO GE

USB Subsystem (R#10, R#11, R#12, R3#13) From the BEP power supply, 5V STBY, 5V and 12V are
fed to the I/O card. (R#10) 5V STBY is fed to the OP I/O (R#13). The 5V and 12V are fed to the power
connectors for the DVD drive, High capacity drive, the Patient I/O drive and Wireless microphone.
(R#11) The PWR_ON signals from the OP I/O pass through the I/O board and go to the motherboard.
(R#12)
Figure 5-136 Power Subsystem
S-VIDEO J30
OUT 12V FROM BEP
(OPTION) POWERBOARD
5V
J22
TO OP
IO
ON/OFF SW, PWR LED FROM

MOTHERBOARD
+5STBY
HIGH CAPACITY
DRIVE J29
DVD J30
DRIVE

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-14 BEP CB (ChargeBoard - functions as Extended Power Shutdown in BEP6.x)

The CB (ChargeBoard) provides 2 minutes of power to ensure orderly shutdown of LOGIQ E9. It uses
two replaceable sealed Lead Acid Batteries. The CB is NOT a UPS On power fail, the
LOGIQ E9 shuts down. There are three Charge states Bulk Charge, Over Charge, Float Charge.
Figure 5-137 BEP6 CB Block Diagram
20A
48V
CHARGER
- + Vbat
12V
BATTERY 5vDUAL
AC FAIL
+ - CHARGEBOARD
12V
BATTERY from POWERBOARD
Figure 5-138 CB Components
CAUTION When the BEP door is open, the ChargeBoard circuit board is exposed. When working inside
the BEP, remove the battery cable from PCN1 on the ChargeBoard to prevent accidental short
circuit of the 24V of the battery that can damage the ChargeBoard circuitry.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-15 Internal Storage Devices

LOGIQ E9 has these internal storage devices:
EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet (size: 120 GB, or more)
CD/DVD drive available from front of scanner. ONLY CD-R discs and DVD Recordable discs are
supported. (Not CD R/W or DVD R/W)
5-11-15-1 Hard Disk Drive Partitions

The LOGIQ E9 Hard Disk Drive is divided into four partitions. Table 5-17 "LOGIQ E9 Hard Disk Drive
Partitions" on page 5-134 describes the drive letter and the use of the partitions.
Table 5-22 LOGIQ E9 Hard Disk Drive Partitions
DRIVE LABEL SIZE TYPE
C: SYSTEM 15.0 GB NTFS
D: USER 10.0 GB NTFS
E: ARCHIVE 115 GB NTFS
Depends on the type of media

G: OPTICAL DRIVE
inserted
Z: Package Repository Remote Software Reload
5-11-15-2 Use of the Hard Disk Drive Partitions
DRIVE
LETTER LABEL SUBDIRECTORY USED FOR
Windows operating system
C: SYSTEM target\bin Idunn Program Files
target\resources Factory resources
Should be empty, but may contain patches

target\bin
of program files
target\resources User changed resources
D: USER Directory for exchanging files in/out of the

system
Log files
Temporary files
GEMS_DB Local archive database
GEMS_IMG Local archive images

E: ARCHIVE
GEMS_REP Local archive reports
Temporary storage for images
G: OPTICAL System swap file
Package
Z: Remote Software Reload
Repository

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-15-3 BEP Hard Disk Drive (HDD) - R4.x and later
R4 only
The Hard Disk Drive is a 160GB SATA device with ~136GB for Patient DB and Images.
R5.x and Later
The Hard Disk Drive is a 500GB SATA device with ~136GB for Patient DB and Images in R4 and
~325GB for Patient DB and Images in R5.
Figure 5-139 BEP6.x Hard Disk Drive - R4.x only

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-16 Peripherals descriptions
5-11-17 Internal peripherals

(See: 3-7-4-2 "Approved Internal Peripherals (Optional)" on page 3-35)
DVD R/W available from the front of the BEP and the scanner.
NOTE: Only CD-R and DVD-R (write and read) are supported. CD-R/W and DVD R/W disks are not
supported.
DVR (as board in BEP, option), supported only on R5 and earlier

Black & White Digital Graphic Printer (connected to BEP)
V Nav Option
Patient I/O Module, R2.x.x or later
S-Video on-board (BEP6 only)
WLAN - R2.x.x and R3. only
WLAN on-board (BEP6 only)
Shear Wave Option
5-11-18 External peripherals

(See: 3-7-4-3 "Approved External Peripherals (Optional)" on page 3-35)
USB Flash Drives

Color rinter
P
USB Hard Disk Drives
Footswitch - R2.x.x or later
External Monitor - R2.x.x or later
Video Scan Converter

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-18-1 DVR Card

The Digital Video Recorder card replaces the External DVR with a single Internal Card. It supports
writing to the on-board Flash Drive for later writing to DVD.
The DVR Card is no longer used or supported in R6 and later.
Figure 5-140 DVR Block Diagram

Host computer system
SATA
host
DDR2 SDRAM FLASH 24C08

256MiB 16MiB I2C eeprom
1KiB
DVI Out
drive
I2C SATA
SATA
DVI MUX
Transmitter
Sil1160
I2C I2C
OSC SATA
50 MHz
/2
Video 25MHz
DVI In
DVI Video & Audio SATA

Receiver Front End bridge
FPGA Audio (SPI)
Sil1161
(debug)
Drive
UART
CF/
TMS320DM6446
Doppler
DaVinci
Stereo audio SPI
audio
ADC
USB (Host/
OSC OSC
device)
24 MHz 27 MHz USB
OSC SMI
24.768 MHz
Ethernet PHY
Reset/
brownout
OSC
Ethernet 10/100 link
25 MHz
Realtek RTL8169SC
Power supplies ethernet controller
1.2V - daVinci core

1.8V - daVinci I/O + FPGA core Host reset
2.5V - FPGA aux
3.3V - Supplied by PCI bus
5.0V - Supplied by PCI bus
PCI Card Edge
Host computer system
Figure 5-141 DVR Components

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-19 BEP - USB

USB testing to 2.0 levels at the board and assembly level.
5-11-19-1 LOGIQ E9 USB Ports

Operator Panel. The two Operator Panel USB Ports SHOULD ONLY BE USED for Bus-powered USB
Hard Disk Drives and USB Flash Drives. The following configurations can be used:
One or two USB Flash Drives

One Flash Drive and One Bus-powered Hard Disk Drive
One Bus-powered Hard Disk Drive
CAUTION DO NOT plug in TWO Bus-powered Hard Disk Drives at the

same time.
Rear of LOGIQ E9. The two USB ports at the back of the LOGIQ E9 SHOULD ONLY BE USED for the
following devices:
Color or Report Printer
NOTE: When connecting an external printer to the LOGIQ E9 via the USB port on the back of the
LOGIQ E9, you MUST ensure that the power supplied to the printer is fed from the same power
feed as the LOGIQ E9. This assures compliance to leakage currents.
Flash Drive
Service Key
Footswitch
CAUTION ONLY plug in devices to the USB ports located at the rear of
the LOGIQ E9 WHILE the LOGIQ E9 is NOT powered up. If
you plug in a device while the LOGIQ E9 is powered on, your
system may become unusable.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-19-2 USB Ports on the LOGIQ E9 - R3.x and earlier

You can find these via Computer Management -> Device Manager -> ACPI Multiprocessor PC -> PCI
bus -> Intel(R) 82801 G (ICH7 Family) USB2 Enhanced Host Controller - 27CC -> USB Root Hub
Figure 5-142 USB Ports on the LOGIQ E9 - R3.x and earlier

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-19-2 USB Ports on the LOGIQ E9 - R3.x and earlier (contd)
Refer to 5-11-19-2 "USB Ports on the LOGIQ E9 - R3.x and earlier" on page 5-160.
Artista...-> USB Video for TouchPanel

Generic USB Hub -> Hub in Power Supply
Microchip Custom USB Device -> Power Supply
Generic USB Hub -> First Level Hub on the I/O Board
Generic USB Hub -> Second Level Hub on the I/O Board
Aladdin USB Key -> Option Key
GE BEP I/O Card -> Processor on the I/O Board
Ascension USB Device for DRIVEBAY -> Bay of Birds
Generic USB Hub -> Hub in OP I/O
Aladdin USB Key -> Service Key (in OP I/O Port)
GE Ultrasound Console -> OP I/O Processor
Generic USB Hub -> Hub in Monitor
EIZO HID Monitor Controls, HID-compliant device -> Monitor Controls
USB Composite Device, USB Audio Device -> Microphone in Monitor
USB Human Interface Device, HID-compliant consumer control device -> Unused Controls for
Microphone
USB Human Interface Device, HID-compliant mouse -> Trackball
USB Human Interface Device, HID Keyboard Device -> Keyboard
USB Mass Storage Device, SanDisk U3 Cruzer Micro USB Device -> Memory Stick (on OP I/O Port)
USB Printing Support -> UPD897 or UPD898 Printer

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 5-143 USB Architecture of a GFI configuration - R3.x and earlier
USB 2.0 Monitor

USB 2.0
Hub
Power Supply Ichiro USB Microphone
Hub
USB 1
Pow er Supply
Layout (P2)
USB 1 uController Wireless
LAN USB 2
(Opt.)
USB 2 N/C
USB 3
4DMC
(Now externally cabled) Monitor Controls
J4
BEP Op I/O
Motherboard USB 2.0

I/O I/O Board
Root Hubs USB 1 Hub
Board uController
OP I/O
USB 1 USB 2 J12 Spare USB 1 uController
Internal
Patient I/O J14 Spare USB 2 J19

USB 2 (Opt.) Rear USB 3 Trackball
USB 1 J41 Customer Internal
Bottom Bulk
USB 2.0 J25 Option J18 A/N head
USB 3 N/C USB 4 USB 3
Hub Dongle Keyboard
USB 2
DO NOT
USB 4 J24 P7 P2
USB 4 Center CONNECT
N/C
Cable USB 3 J26 BW Printer P2
USB 2.0 USB 1 (Opt.)
5193726
Hub USB 5 J25 P8 P3
Rear Right
USB 4 J40 Customer J27 BayBird
USB 5 N/C USB 2 Upper
Top (Opt.)
USB 6 Customer
USB 2.0 Bottom
USB 6 J28 4DMC ( PS)
N/C
Hub USB 3 (Opt.) Upper
USB 7 Customer
J35 Top
USB 7 USB 4 J7 J21
USB 8 J35 J100 J22 Touchpanel

Video
Cable
5193725

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 5-144 USB Architecture of an MRX configuration - R3.x and earlier
USB 2.0 Monitor

Hub
USB 2.0 Cherokee/Mitra Lambd a

Lambda Microphone USB 1
Hub Power Supply P ower SSupply
Power u pply
Or
Wireless
Power Supply LAN USB 2
USB 1 uController
uCo
C ntroller (Opt.)
N/
N C
N/C 4DMC 4DMC USB 3
USB 2 (Now
o externally
e ternally
ex l Power Supply (Now
o exexternally
e ternally
l
uCo
uController
C ntroller Monitor Controls
cabled) cabled)
J4
BEP Op I/O
Motherboard I/O USB 2.0 J12 Option

USB 1 USB 2.0
Root Hubs Board Hub Dongle Hub
USB 2.0
J14 Spare I/I O
OP I/O
Hub USB 2 Internal USB 1
USB 1 uCo
C ntroller
uController
XYZ
USB 1 USB 3 J25 Motor
Patient I/O
USB 2 J19
USB 2 (Opt.) Controller Trackball
J26 BW Printer Bulk

USB 2 USB 4 (Opt.) J18 A/N head
USB 3 N/C USB 3
Keyboard
K yboard
Ke
J27 BayBird
USB 3 I/O Board (Opt.) DO NOT
uController USB 4 J24 P7 P2
USB 4 Center CONNECT
N/C J28 4DMC ( PS)
Cable (Opt.) P2
5193726 USB 4 Rear
J40 USB 5 J25 P8 P3
USB 1 Customer Right
USB 5 J35 Top
Upper Cable
USB6
J41 Rear USB 6 Customer 5196890
USB 2 Customer Bottom
USB 6 J35 Bottom
USB5 Upper
USB 3 N/C
USB 7 Customer
J35 Top
USB 7 USB 2.0
USB8
Hub
USB 4 N/C
USB 8 J35
Cable USB7 J7 J21
5193725-2 J100 J22 T uchpanel
To
Touchpanel
Video
Cable
5272357
D4 - 5248609 x2

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-19-3 USB Ports on the LOGIQ E9 - R4.x
You can find these via Computer Management -> Device Manager -> ACPI Multiprocessor PC ->
PCI bus -> Intel(R) 82801 G (ICH7 Family) USB2 Enhanced Host Controller - 27CC -> USB Root
Hub
Figure 5-145 USB Architecture - R4.x
Motherboard
BEP
Ichiro USB Touchpanel
Video
Op I/O
USB Ports
Layout (R4)
USB 2.0
(All USB 2.0) I/O Hub
Board
J100 Touchpanel J21 OP I/O
USB 1 USB 1 uController
Video Cable
5272357
J7 OP I/O D4 - 5248609 x2 J22
USB 2 USB 2 J19
Trackball
J28 4DMC (PS) Bulk
USB 3 J18 A/N
(Opt.) USB 3 head
Keyboard
J27 BayBird
USB 4
(Opt.) J24 P7 P2
USB 4
J26 BW Printer Center
USB 5
(Opt.) J25 P8 P3
USB 5
J25 XYZ Motor Right
USB 6
Controller Upper
J4 Power Supply USB 6 Customer
USB 7 Top
Upper
J14 Spare USB 7 Customer
USB 8 Bottom
(N/C)
J9
USB 1 Front Customer
Top
USB 9 USB 2.0 Hub Monitor
J8 (Kortek)
One Of
Internal Option USB 2 Front Customer
USB 10 Bottom USB USB USB
J12 Dongle J40 1 2 3
Rear Customer
USB 3 Top
USB 11
I/O Board J41 Monitor
uController USB 4 Rear Customer N/C Mic
USB 12 Controls
Bottom
USB 2.0 4DMC USB 2.0 Hub Monitor
USB 13
Mini PCIe Hub (Externally cabled)
Slot
(Eizo)
USB 14 Power Supply USB USB USB
ECG USB 1 uController
Module 1 2 3
(Opt.)
S -Video
Card (Opt.) USB 2 N/C
Mic N/C Monitor
Controls
(In Some Supplies)
Power Supply

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-19-3 USB Ports on the LOGIQ E9 - R4.x (contd)
Refer to Figure 5-145 "USB Architecture - R4.x" on page 5-164.

Microphone

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-19-4 USB Ports on the LOGIQ E9 - R5.x
Hub
Figure 5-146 USB Architecture - R5.x

Touchpanel Upper USB 2.0 Lower
BEP
Motherboard
USB Ports
Ichiro USB Video
Hub
J53
USB 2.0 USB
(All USB 2.0) I/O
Board
Layout (R5) Hub 1
USB
Trackball
J100 Touchpanel J21 J8 Spare A/N

USB 1 USB 1 N/C 2 Keyboard
Video Cable
5272357
J7 OP I/O J22 USB Lower
USB 2 D4 - 5248609 x2 J16 J52
USB 2 3 uController
J28 4DMC (PS)
USB 3 J25 P8 P3
(Opt.) USB 3
J27 BayBird Bulk
USB 4
(Opt.) Touch head
USB 4 Controller
J26 BW Printer
USB 5
(Opt.) USB 2.0
USB 5 N/C
J25 XYZ Motor Hub
USB 6
Controller Upper
J4 USB 6 USB 1 Customer
Power Supply Top
USB 7
Upper
J14 Upper
Spare USB 7 uController USB 2 Customer
USB 8 Op Bottom
(N/C)
J9 I/O
Top
J8 (Kortek)
One Of
Internal Option Bottom
USB 10 USB USB USB
Dongle J40
J12 Rear Customer 1 2 3
USB 3 Top
USB 11
USB 12 Controls
Bottom

USB 13
Mini PCIe Hub (Externally cabled ) (Eizo)
Slot
Power Supply USB USB USB
USB 14 ECG USB 1
Module
uController 1 2 3
(Opt.)
S -Video
Mic N/C Monitor
Controls
(In Some Supplies)
Power Supply

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-19-4 USB Ports on the LOGIQ E9 - R5.x (contd)
Refer to Figure 5-146 "USB Architecture - R5.x" on page 5-166.

Microphone

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-19-5 USB Ports on the LOGIQ E9 - R6.x and later
Hub
NOTE: The 23 inch and OLED Monitors are USB 3.0 ready, but we will not support USB 3.0 speeds
due to limitations on the BEP. So any USB 3.0 device connected to LE9 will be operating at
USB 2.0 speeds.
Figure 5-147 USB Architecture - R6.x and later

Touchpanel Upper USB 2.0 Lower
BEP
Motherboard
USB Ports
Ichiro USB Video
Hub
J53
USB 2.0 USB
(All USB 2.0) I/O
Board
Layout (R6) Hub 1
USB
Trackball
J100 Touchpanel J21 J8 Spare A/N

USB 1 USB 1 N/C 2 Keyboard
Video Cable
5272357
J7 OP I/O J22 USB Lower
USB 2 D4 - 5248609 x2 J16 J52
USB 2 3 uController
J28 4DMC (PS)
USB 3 J25 P8 P3
(Opt.) USB 3
J27 BayBird Bulk
USB 4
(Opt.) Touch head
USB 4 Controller
J26 BW Printer
USB 5
(Opt.) USB 2.0
USB 5 N/C
J25 XYZ Motor Hub
USB 6
Controller Upper
J4 USB 6 USB 1 Customer
Power Supply Top
USB 7
Upper
J14 Upper
Spare USB 7 uController USB 2 Customer
USB 8 Op Bottom
(N/C)
J9 I/O
Top
J8 (Kortek)
One Of
Internal Option Bottom
USB 10 USB USB USB
Dongle J40
J12 Rear Customer 1 2 3
USB 3 Top
USB 11
USB 12 Controls
Bottom

USB 13
Mini PCIe Hub (Externally cabled ) (Eizo)
Slot
Power Supply USB USB USB
USB 14 ECG USB 1
Module
uController 1 2 3
(Opt.)
S -Video
Mic N/C Monitor
Controls
(In Some Supplies)
Power Supply
USB 3.0
Hub
USB 1
USB 2
23 inch Monitor
USB 3.0
Hub
USB 1
USB 2
OLED Monitor

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-19-5 USB Ports on the LOGIQ E9 - R6.x and later (contd)
Refer to Figure 5-147 "USB Architecture - R6.x and later" on page 5-168.

USB Human Interface Device, HID-compliant consumer control device -> Controls for Microphone

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-20 BEP - Video Card - R3.x and earlier

ADD2 card similar to L9.
Figure 5-148 BEP Video Card
5-11-21 BEP - Video Card - R4.x and later

The video card is integrated into the BEP Motherboard. There is no separate Video Card on BEP6.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-22 Patient I/O
NOTE: The ECG functionality of the Patient I/O module is not intended for patient monitoring nor to
support alarm functionality. This input is intended as a tool for easier synchronization of images
and cineloop control during ultrasound examinations.
The Patient I/O panel is located on the front of LOGIQ E9.

Figure 5-149 Patient I/O Panel
1 - PHONO
2 - ECG
3 - AUX (PRESSURE/PULSE)
Figure 5-150 Patient I/O Panel
The Patient I/O contains the electronics for:
Phono
ECG/Respiration
Analog inputs - AUX (Pressure/Pulse)
The three inputs are separately isolated due to safety requirements.
The patient leads for ECG and respiration can be rotated by software (i.e. it is possible to change
between Lead I, II and III by pushing a button).
The module extracts respiration from ECG signals from the ECG/Respiration input.
The scanned image that is displayed, is synchronized with the ECG, respiration and phono traces. In
M-Mode or Doppler, the traces are synchronized to that particular mode's sweep. The operator can
control the gain, the position and the sweep rate of the traces using the assignable controls.
AUX is capable of handling a pulse/pressure signal.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-22-2 Patient I/O Location in the LOGIQ E9

The Patient I/O is located in front of the Back End Processor with the connector panel available from
the front of the LOGIQ E9.
Figure 5-151 Patient I/O Panel Location in the LOGIQ E9
1 - PHONO
2 - ECG
3 - AUX (PRESSURE/PULSE)

+5 VDC
+12 VDC
Pinout for the DC input on the Patient I/O module
Table 5-24 DC input pinout on the Patient I/O Module
CONNECTOR SIGNAL NAME

DC INPUT
Pin 1: +12VDC
Pin : 2ND
G
Pin : 3ND
G
Pin : 45VDC
+

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-22-4 Patient I/O - inputs

ECG / Respiration
Phono (from a phono heart microphone)
AUX - Analog Input (Pulse/Pressure)
Pinout for the AUX connector

The pinout for the AUX connector is described in the table below:
Table 5-25 Pinout for the AUX Connectors
AUX
Pin 1: Input -
Pin 2: Input +
Pin : 3ndG
Pin 4: Nasal Sensor 1
Pin 5: Nasal Sensor 2
The AUX is default a 1 Vpp (Volt peak-to-peak) input with a max frequency of 300 Hz. It has a
programmable high gain mode with a maximum input signal of 300 mVpp (millivolt peak-to-peak).
The inputs are differential. For a single ended sensor signal, the pin 1 (input -) should be connected to
the GND of the sensor.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-11-22-5 Patient I/O - outputs

USB2:
Digital Trace Data

Module ID PROM communication
Pinout for the USB outlet on the Patient I/O module
Table 5-26 USB outlet on the Patient I/O Module

USB 2
Pin 1: +5V (NOT USED BY PATIENT I/O)
Pin 2: D-
Pin 3: D+
Pin : 4ND
G
Pin : 5ND
G
5-11-22-6 Fuses
NONE
5-11-22-7 LEDs
NONE
5-11-22-8 Dip Switches

NONE

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-12
Power distribution
The power distribution within the LOGIQ E9 is described in this section.

5-12-3 Main Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
5-12-4 BEP Power Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-182
5-12-5 Power Up Sequence Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-184
5-12-6 Power Down Sequence description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185
5-12-7 Enforcement Power Off (Long-push Power Off) Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-186
5-12-8 AC Failure Power Off Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-187
5-12-9 Shear Wave (SWAVE) Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-188
5-12-10 V Nav Inside Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-190

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-3 Main Power Supply

The Main Power Supplys main task is to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on-site Mains Power
System and to supply the various internal subsystems with AC or DC power.
Figure 5-152 Main Power Supply
90-250Vac Line Filter

Rectifier
IEC60601-1
Inrush Current Isolation
Limier
113 400 V Stand By + 5Vstb (12W)
110V
Inverter 120VA
SELV outputs (<60Vdc)
400V
PFC 24V + 24V
+ 48V
+ 48V
+ 15V
48V + 12V
+ 6V
- 48V 15V
6V
+/- 48V 0-140V

MLP 0-140V
130W
100 V
PMX
8W
0 95V
TLP 0 95V
2X20W
5 - 176 Section 5-12 - Power distribution

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 5-153 Power Supply Block Diagram - R4 and earlier
A MAIN POWER SUPPLY
POWER
FACTOR
CORRECTION
TO
PRINTERS ISOLATION
AND
120VAC
DC HEAD
INVERTER
USB MAIN POWER H
SUPPLY TO BEP (J4) CONTROL
TO XYZ DC VOLTAGES ->

I
CONTROLLER (48V) FEPS MOTHERBOARD ->
DC-DC
CONVERTERS FEPS BOARDS
(X2 = P4 on MPS)
USB CABLE BB 4D MOTOR
4 D CONTROLLER (J28) CNTRL TX POWER to
H-BRIDGE
FEP MOTHERBOARD to
RELAY CARD
TO BEP (J1) (X1 = P3 on MPS)
Power from the wall outlet (100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz) is connected to the Main Power Supply. The
Main Power Supply delivers the needed voltages to the rest of the LOGIQ E9:
Internal Printer (110 VAC)

Front End Rack (DC power with several voltages)
Front End Rack (TSV1 and TSV2 for the transmitters)
Front End Rack (PMXVOUT for the probe channel multiplexers)
Back End Processor
An inrush current limiter reduce the peak input current when the LOGIQ E9 is switched on. An EMI filter
helps to reduce EMI to acceptable levels.
The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the
wall outlet.
Fuses are located inside the power supply (only to be replaced by the manufacturer).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 5-154 Power Supply Block Diagram - R5 and later
A MAIN POWER SUPPLY
POWER
FACTOR
SWAVE CORRECTION
Option TO
PRINTERS
120VAC
Pack) INVERTER
AND
DC HEAD
USB MAIN POWER

SUPPLY TO BEP (J4) H
CONTROL
TO XYZ DC VOLTAGES ->

I
CONTROLLER (48V) FEPS MOTHERBOARD ->
DC-DC
CONVERTERS FEPS BOARDS
(X2 = P4 on MPS)
USB CABLE BB 4D MOTOR
4D CONTROLLER (J28) CNTRL TX POWER to
H-BRIDGE
FEP MOTHERBOARD to
RELAY CARD
TO BEP (J1) (X1 = P3 on MPS)
Power from the wall outlet (100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz) is connected to the Main Power Supply. The
Main Power Supply delivers the needed voltages to the rest of the LOGIQ E9:
Internal Printer (110 VAC)

Front End Rack (DC power with several voltages)
Front End Rack (TSV1 and TSV2 for the transmitters)
Front End Rack (PMXVOUT for the probe channel multiplexers)
Back End Processor
An inrush current limiter reduce the peak input current when the LOGIQ E9 is switched on. An EMI filter
helps to reduce EMI to acceptable levels.
The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the
wall outlet.
Fuses are located inside the power supply (only to be replaced by the manufacturer).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 5-155 Main Power Supply
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
5-12-3-2 Temperature Control

The Main Power Supply is equipped with an internal fan with variable speed for temperature control.
Both the temperature of the air entering the power supply and leaving the power supply are measured.
Fan speed is controlled by the power supply.
5-12-3-3 Input
Mains Power, 100 VAC or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Figure 5-156 L1 - Mains IN connector

USB bus
Figure 5-157 P6 - USB Type B
PIN SI GNAL NAME

1V CC
2D -
3D +
4G ND

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-3-5 Outputs
Table 5-27 Power outputs 1 of 2
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION TO
115 VAC OUT ON TWO CONNECTORS
P2 Peripherals (B/W Printer)
Card Rack Connector

Z B D PIN SIGNAL NAME
Number ZB D
2 2 TSV1/TxPS1P TSV1/TxPS1P TSV1/TxPS1P
4
4 TSV2/TxPS2P T SV2/TxPS2P TSV2/TxPS2P
6 GND G N
6
8 TxPS2N TxP S2N TxPS2N
10
12
TxPS1N TxP
GND G
S1N
ND
TxPS1N
GND
Front End Card Rack
14 TSON_STRB C W_SPR1 5205054, 5205054-2, 5205054-3,
16 TS_LEVEL_OK 4 D_STB PMXVOUTN
18 TS_OK G ND PMXVOUTP 5205054-4 Main Power Supplies
20 4D _SPARE1
22 GND 4D_ VOL_TRIG 4D_STA
24 4D_RESET_N 4 D_VOL_DIR 4D_HALL
32 26 GND 4 D_FRAME_TRI 4D_COS_DRV
G
28 GND GND 4D_COS_RTN
30 4D_SPARE2 GN D 4D_SIN_DRV
4D_SIN_RTN
P3 Card Rack Connector
Z B D PIN SIGNAL NAME

Number ZB D
2 2 TSV1/TxPS1P TSV1/TxPS1P TSV1/TxPS1P
4
6 GND G N
6
10 TSV1/TxPS1P TSV1/TxPS1P TSV1/TxPS1P
12 GND GND GND
14 TSON_STRB C W_SPR1
Front End Card Rack
16 TS_LEVEL_OK 4 D_STB PMXVOUTN 5205054-5 Main Power Supply
18 TS_OK G ND PMXVOUTP
20 4D _SPARE1
22 GND 4D_ VOL_TRIG 4D_STA
24 4D_RESET_N 4 D_VOL_DIR 4D_HALL
32 26 GND 4 D_FRAME_TRI 4D_COS_DRV
G
28 GND GND 4D_COS_RTN
30 4D_SPARE2 GN D 4D_SIN_DRV
4D_SIN_RTN

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 5-27 Power outputs (Continued) 2 of 2
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION TO
Card Rack Connector
P4 Front End Card Rack
+48 VDC
PIN S IGNAL NAME
1 +48 V
2 +48 V
Pin 1 3 +48 V
4 +48 V
5 +48 V
6A C_FAIL_N
P5 7P SON_N Back End Processor and motor power
8 48 V_OK
Pin 8 9G ND
10 G ND
11 G ND
12 G ND
13 G ND
14 G ND
15 + 5V_STBY
USB TYPE B
PIN SI GNAL NAME

P6 1V CC Back End Processor
2D -
3D +
4G ND
P7 GND STUD Ground Stud
Shear Wave Bulk Capacitance Connector
PIN SIGNAL NAME

7 1 GND
2 GND
6 1 3 GND
(P5) 4 TSV1
P8 5 TSV1
Capacitor Pack
6 TSV1
7 GND
8 GND
9 GND
10 TSV2
11 TSV2
12 TSV2

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-4 BEP Power Harness
Figure 5-158 BEP Power Harness
HARD DRIVE
POWER
PIN 1
POWER IN
PIN 12 PIN 1 PIN 9 PIN 1 PIN 5 PIN 1
J3 J2 J1
J34
PIN 3 PIN 12 PIN 1
PIN 2
A
PIN 1
PIN 13
ATX2 ATX1
PIN 1 PIN 13 EPS-J2
PIN 13
PIN 12
PIN 1 PIN 12
PATIENT I/O
POWER
PIN 1
MOTHERBOARD (J) ATX2

J3 MAIN POWER
3V3 ORN
1 1
3V3 ORN
2 2
GND BLK
3 3
5V RED
4 4
GND BLK
5 5
5V RED
6 6
GND BLK
7 7
PWR_ OK GRY (22AWG)
8 8
5V_STDBY PUR
9 9
12V1 YEL
10 10
12V1 YEL
11 11
3V3 ORN
12 12
3V3 ORN
13 13
12V_N BLU
14 14
GND BLK
15 15
PSON_N GRN (22AWG)
16 16
GND BLK
17 17
GND BLK
18 18
GND BLK
19 19
3V3_SENSE BRN (22AWG)
20 20
5V RED
22 21
5V RED
21 22
5V RED
23 23
PIN 12 GND BLK
24 24
MOTHERBOARD (J) ATX1

PROCESSOR POWER
J3 BLK
1
BLK
2
YEL
3
YEL
PIN 1 4
HARDDRIVE
POWER
RED (22AWG) 5V1
4
BLK (22AWG) GND
3
PIN 9 BLK (22AWG) GND
BEP CHASSIS J1 2
YEL (22AWG) 12V1
POWER IN 1 PATRIOT IO
BRN (22AWG) GND J2 POWER
13
BRN (22AWG) GND RED (22AWG) 5V
12 4
BLU (22AWG) 48V_PS BLK (22AWG) GND
5 PIN 1 3
BLU (22AWG) 48V_PS BLK (22AWG) GND
4 2
YEL (22AWG) 12V1
EPS BOARD 1
J2 J2
WHT (22AWG) AC_FAIL_N_PS GND
9 6 PIN 5 2
GRN (22AWG) PS_ON_N_PS GND
8 7 4
GRY (22AWG) 48V_OK_PS 12V2
7 8 J1 1 IO BOARD
BRN (22AWG) GND 12V2
10 14 PIN 1 3 5V J34
PUR (22AWG) 5V_STBY_PS 5V RED
15 18
5V
11 7
BRN (22AWG) GND GND BLK
22 11 6 GND
15
BLU (22AWG) 48V_PS GND BLK
24 3 16
GND
14
BRN (22AWG) GND 12V1 12V1 YEL
12
12V1
21 10 15
BLU (22AWG) 48V_PS 5V 5V 5V RED
23 2 5 5
BRN (22AWG) GND SCL GRY (22AWG)
20 9 8 2
BLU (22AWG) 48V PS GND GND BLK
12 1 11 8
EPS BOARD
5V_STDBY PUR (22AWG)

BATTERY BACKUP 18 NC 17 9
BLU (22AWG) 48V_BEP J1 GND GND BLK
1 1 12 22
15 2 13 11
BLU (22AWG) 48V_BEP 12V1 YEL
13
12V1
13 3 10
BRN (22AWG) GND 12V1 YEL
16 4 14 17
BLU (22AWG) 48V_BEP SDA WHT (22AWG)
14 5 9 3
17 7 18 4
PUR (22AWG) 5V_STBY_BEP
2 8 NC 10
BRN (22AWG) GND
3 9 NC 21
GRY (22AWG) 48V_OK_BEP
4 10 NC 24
GRN (22AWG) PSON_N_BEP
6 6 NC 23
GRN (22AWG) PSON_N
19 NC 1
WHT (22AWG) AC_FAIL_N_BEP AC_FAIL_N
5 16
48V
6
48V
19
GND
7
GND
20
BEP Power Harness w/EPS

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-4-1 Fuses
Fuses located inside the power supply (only to be replaced by the manufacturer).
A current limiter will switch off the power if any of the outputs are overloaded.
Under-voltage and over-voltage Protection is provided for all of the output voltages.
The Power Supply will be turned off if the temperature grows too high.
5-12-4-2 Jumpers
None.
5-12-4-3 DIP-Switches
None.
5-12-4-4 LEDs
There are no LEDs on the power supply.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-5 Power Up Sequence Description
5-12-5-1 Overview
The Power Up Sequence can be divided in the following steps:
1.) Switch AC Breaker to ON position

2.) Press the ON button on the Operator Panel
3.) BEP power-up
5-12-5-2 AC Breaker to ON position
Figure 5-159 Power On Sequence
BEP
Op I/O
Power On
PSON_N
PSON_N via BEP
(5Vstb)
M M
a +24V a
+48V
i +/-15, +/-6, +11V
n
48V_OK
M
a
PC Voltages
n
BEP
PS-OK
BEP
enumerates PCI
TS Voltage USB
TS_OK
TS_LEVEL_OK
1.) BEP, powered by 5Vstb, detects contact of Power-On Button.

2.) BEP sends PSON_N low to the Main Power supply.
3.) Main Power supply powers up +48V.
4.) Main Power supply powers up +24V, 15V, 6V, +11V.
5.) Main Power supply provides 48V_OK as soon as +48V is within specification.
6.) BEP Power supply Provides PC voltages from +48V.
7.) BEP enumerates PCI. (note that GFI DSP, or MRX DSP and PCI Express bridge must be powered
before BEP enumerates PCI).
8.) BEP application software controls +24V, 15V, 6V, +11V via USB (RackPower 0x6A).
9.) BEP application software controls TSV1and TSV2 via USB (SetTxPS 0x68).
10.)Main Power supply provides TS_OK and TS_LEVEL_OK output signals to GFI or MRX.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-6 Power Down Sequence description
5-12-6-1 Overview
There are three possible scenarios for Power Down of the LOGIQ E9:
Power Down - normal power down (short push)

Enforcement Power Down (long push)
Power Loss
Each of the scenarios are described below.
5-12-6-2 Power Down
Figure 5-160 Power Down Sequence
Main Power Supply BEP GFI

or
Short-
Push
MRX
Power
Sw.
OS dialog box
USB SetTxPS GFI Stop PCI

and TX
Dischage
Shutdown
TSV1 and Stop Scanning.
TSV2 Disconnect HV.
TS_ON_STRB false.
Shutdown
Card Rack
Shutdown
PMX Voltages USB
RackPower
BEP OS
shutdown of
Shutdown all HD and
power supplies peripherals
except 48V
Shutdown all PSON_N PSON_

power supplies N False
1.) BEP detects short-term contact of Power Switch.

2.) BEP OS dialog box prompts user for power down.
3.) BEP, via PCI express, commands the GFI or MRX to stop scanning, disconnect TX circuits from
TS, stop strobe TS_ON_STRB.
4.) BEP, via USB, commands Power Supply to shutdown TSV1 and TSV2 (SetTxPS 0x68).
5.) Controller turns OFF PMX voltages.
6.) BEP, via USB, commands Power Supply to shutdown card rack (RackPower 0x6A).
7.) BEP OS performs shutdown.
8.) BEP sends PSON_N high to Power Supply.
9.) Controller turns OFF TS voltages.
10.)Controller TS_OK output signal goes low.
11.)Controller turns OFF PMX voltages.
12.)Controller turns OFF voltages +/-15, +/-6, +11V, +24V.
13.)Controller turns OFF +48V.
14.)Controller output 48V_OK goes low.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-7 Enforcement Power Off (Long-push Power Off) Sequence
Figure 5-161 Enforcement Power Off (Long-push Power Off) Sequence
GFI or MRX Main MCU BEP

Long-
Push
Power
Sw.
TS Shutdown PSON_N
Stop PSON_N
TS_OK (TS_OK low)
Transmitting False
(SetTxPS to 0V)
Shutdown
PMX Voltages
Shutdown
+/-6V, +/-15V,
+11V, +24V
Shutdown 48V_OK Shutdown

+48V BEP
Power Supply
1.) BEP detects long-term contact of Power Switch.

2.) PSON_N goes high.
3.) Controller TS_OK output signal goes low.
4.) Controller turns OFF TS voltages.
5.) Controller turns OFF PMX voltages.
6.) Controller turns OFF voltages +/-15, +/-6, +11V, +24V.
7.) Controller turns OFF +48V.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-8 AC Failure Power Off Sequence
Figure 5-162 AC Failure Power Off Sequence
GFI or MRX Main Power Supply BEP
Main mcu detects

AC or 48V failure
TS_OK
TS_OK
false
Stop
Transmitting
Shutdown
TS
ACFAIL_N ACFAIL_N
ACFAIL_N Stop Scanning.
true
GFI Stops
Scanning.
Disconnect TX
from TSV.
Record Failure in
Flash (incl Time) BEP OS
shutdown of HD
and peripherals.
Shutdown of
24V, LV
48V_OK
48V_OK Shutdown
False BEP PS
1.) Controller on Main Power supply detects AC line failure condition or 48V failure.
2.) When the controller detects AC failure ( IEC criteria ):
a.) Controller TS_OK output signal goes low.
b.) Controller turns OFF TS voltages. (keep PMX on for probe mux bias voltage).
c.) Controller ACFAIL_N output signal goes low.
d.) Controller records failure in Flash RAM. (need timer).
e.) Controller turns OFF voltages +/-15, +/-6, +11V, +24V.
f.) Controller 48V_OK output signal goes low when 48V drops out of specification.
3.) GFI or MRX responds to TS_OK going low:
- GFI or MRX signals GTX to stop transmitting.
4.) GFI or MRX responds to ACFAIL_N going low:
- GFI or MRX stops scanning and disconnect GTX Transmit circuit from TSV1/TSV2 (MLP).
5.) BEP Responds to ACFAIL_N going low:
a.) BEP commands GFI or MRX to stop scanning.
b.) BEP starts an orderly shutdown of Hard Drive and peripherals.
6.) 6. After BEP shutdown, BEP sets PSON_N high. PSON_N circuit is powered by 5Vstb. After an
ACFAIL_N, 5Vstb is powered by a backup battery.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-9 Shear Wave (SWAVE) Option

What is Shear Wave?
A Shear wave is a transverse wave that occurs in an elastic medium when it is subjected to periodic
shear.
Figure 5-163 SWAVE Visually Explained
A = Ultrasound push pulse applied. B = Shear Wave response.
There are basically two methods of creating shear waves in tissue.
External, low frequency vibrator applied to the body of the patient. Used in Magnetic Resonance
Elastography (MRE).
Generating shear waves in tissue using a diagnostic ultrasound transducer. Shear waves "push"
the tissue at a low frequency in either a single burst of high amplitude, long duration pulses or a
series of such pulses.
Where is it used?
Because elasticity, stiffness, viscosity and a number of other Properties of certain tissue types change
with disease states, there is a clinical need of a quantitative method for assessing elasticity of tissue in
order to help detect potentially cancerous masses and help diagnose diffuse soft tissue diseases like
liver fibrosis.
Pre-SWAVE Mode
Intermediate mode between B mode scanning and a single point analysis technique.
During this pre-mode, the previous B-mode imaging mode is still active.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-9 Shear Wave (SWAVE) Option (contd)

SWAVE Acquisition
Pressing the Start" set key initiates SWAVE acquisition.
Post-SWAVE Acquisition
System displays the acquired SWAVE image and background B-mode image.
User can cycle through the acquired frames, measure and annotate.
SWAVE images can be stored in both raw data and DICOM format.
In order to support the Shear Wave functionality, the Main Power Supply and the GTX Boards have
been modified.
GTX Boards: A new version of the GTX Boards (GTX 2.4) has been introduced in R5 to support
Shear Wave. The new GTX Boards ARE NOT backwards compatible.
Main Power Supply: The Capacitor Pack Module is added and connected to the HV outputs of the
Power Supply to support the extra power needed to handle the Ultrasound pulse for Shear Wave.
Shear wave is only available with MRX configurations. GFI configuration will not be compatible with the
Shear Wave option.
Figure 5-164 Capacitor Pack Module
The cover is removed from the Capacitor Pack Module to show the components ONLY. The cover must
NEVER be removed in the field. The Capacitor Pack can store up to 112 Volts.
DANGER
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS

EQUIPMENT. DO NOT REMOVE THE CAPACITOR PACK COVER.
Figure 5-165 Capacitor Pack Module LEDs
R3
J2
DS1
J4
BULK CAPACITANCE BOARD J6
R4
5487883 A
PWA
3
5487884 REV x DS2
PWB
6
R1 R2
J1
4 e1 e1
F1
BAR CODE
J3 J5 J7
ASSEMBLED IN

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-10 V Nav Inside Option

The VNAV inside allows the use of probes that have built in VNAV sensors, avoiding having external
cables and VNAV bracket use.
The following hardware is introduced to support the VNAV option:
DriveBay2+
GRLY Board with Hi-Pass connection
Card Cage Front Cover to access the GRLY
Cable from GRLY to DriveBay2+ (EE)
Some of them are already present in the standard console, depending upon the console vintage.
Figure 5-166 V Nav Inside Option Block Diagram
CARD RACK
METAL SHIELD
METAL SHIELD
METAL SHIELD
GTX
GTX
GTX
PD
RELAY
MRX
DC
BSCAN
S
VOLTAGES DOPPLER AUDIO
(X2 = P4 on MPS) +5V
PCI EXPRESS
VPD I2C
PULSER EXTRA PCI
EXPRESS LANES
VOLTAGES
J2 J1
(X1 = P3 on MPS)
BACKPLANE
A
4D MOTOR DRIVE
CW PROBE
Y CONNECTION
Z (BT2010 OPTION)
POWER
USB
BAYBIRD
(VGU EE
OPTION)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-12-10 V Nav Inside Option (contd)
Figure 5-167 V Nav Inside Option HDMI Auxiliary Sensor Input from GRLY
Figure 5-168 V Nav Inside Option Cable from GRLY to Auxiliary Sensor Input

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-13
Power Loss description
A power loss may be due to:
The Mains Switch has been switched to OFF

The Mains cable has been disconnected
Brown-out
If a power loss occur, all AC power distribution within the LOGIQ E9 is lost. Both the Back End Processor
and the Front End Card Rack stops functioning, the peripherals and the monitor also looses its power.
Section 5-14
Cables for LOGIQ E9
Please refer to:
Section 9-16 "Mains Power Cables" on page 9-90

Section 9-17 "Internal Cables" on page 9-92
Section 5-15
Probes description
See: Section 9-18 "Probes" on page 9-112.
5 - 192 Section 5-13 - Power Loss description

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-16
Product manuals
The information needed to use and service the LOGIQ E9 scanner is collected in the documents
described in this section.
NOTE: Dates on screenshots are represented in MM/DD/YYYY format throughout the manual.
Information on how to change the LOGIQ E9s date can be found in Customizing Your System,
Chapter 16 in the LOGIQ E9 User Manual/User Guide.
5-16-1 User documentation

LOGIQ E9 User Manual/User Guide
LOGIQ E9 Advanced Reference Manual
LOGIQ E9 Release Notes
LOGIQ E9 eLabeling Kit (contains LOGIQ E9 eDOCs CD, which contains all user manuals, and
translations and the Basic Service Manual)
5-16-2 Service documentation

LOGIQ E9 Basic Service Manual
LOGIQ E9 Unpacking/Packing Procedure
LOGIQ E9 Option Manuals
5-16-3 GE Service / Proprietary documentation

LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Manual (this manual)
LOGIQ E9 Upgrade / Option installation manuals
LOGIQ E9 Field Modification Instructions
LOGIQ E9 Service Notes

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 5-17
VPD Editor
Refer to the figure below for an annotated screen layout.
Figure 5-169 VPD Editor (GFI Configuration shown)
A.) Device Grid

B.) Field Drop Down List
C.) VPD Field Grid
D.) Splitter Bar
E.) Grid Options
F.) Action Buttons
G.) Corner - drag corner to resize window
5 - 194 Section 5-17 - VPD Editor

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5-17-1 Screen Layout Elements
Table 5-1 VPD Editor Screen Description
Parameter Description
The list of devices that support VPD.Click on a row in this grid to select a deviceand view the VPD fields. The first installed
Device grid
and available device is automatically selected at started.
Device column An abbreviated device name.
Installed column Indicates if the device is present in the system.
Type column A device can be a component or a probe.
Available column Indicates if a device can be programmed at this location (vendor mode).
VPD field grid A list of data items that make up the VPD.
Number (#) column An simple index (for reference only).
Name column An abbreviated name for the VPD data item.
Description column A full text description of the VPD data item.
The current value of the item in the editor. Click on the cell and start typing to edit. If the cell has a drop down list, click
the arrow to see the choices. Some drop down lists will save values typed into the cell. Fields that may need attention are
Value column
highlighted in red. Some field values may be updated automatically. CRC and checksum fields are calculated
automatically when data is written to the device, and are not updated as editing occurs.
The value saved to the device. Fields that may need attention are highlighted in red. The entire row is highlighted in light
Previous value column
blue when the current value does not match the previous value.
Type column The type of storage an item uses (for reference only).
Size column The number of non-volatile storage bytes the item uses. The input is limited by the size of the field.
Offset column The byte offset into non-volatile storage where the item is located (for reference only).
Grid options checkboxes The checkboxes control the visibility of various columns in the grids.
Action buttons Click to perform the action.
Load a set of values into the current value column of the currently selected device. A file dialog will appear to allow
Load template
selection of the template file.
Save a set of values from the current value column of the currently selected device. A file dialog will appear to allow
Save template
naming of the template file.
Write all Saves the current values of all fields to the device, whether or not the field is changed.
Write dirty Saves the current vales of all modified fields to the device. The row of a modified field is highlighted in light blue.
Cross check system Verifies that the system serial number field is the same on all components (excluding probes). A pop-up dialog will allow
serial the user to correct any mismatches.
Cross check functional

Verifies that the functional revision value of all components has a matching resource file.
rev
Generate RevCheck file Creates a CSV file with data from all components (GE manufacturing only). The file is placed in d:\Log.
Splitter bar A moveable boundary between the device and field grids
Dialog frame A moveable window edge

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5 - 196 Section 5-17 - VPD Editor

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Chapter 6
Service Adjustments
Section 6-1
Overview
This section describes how to adjust the scanner.

6-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 Power Supply adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-3 Monitor adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-4 Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of motion Adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-5 Touch Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6-6 DC Offset Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6-7 Operator Panel movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6-8 Direction Lock and Brake adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6-9 Adjust time-out for DICOM servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6-10 Volume Navigation Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Section 6-2
Power Supply adjustments
It is not possible to adjust the power supplies.
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 6-3
Monitor adjustments
This section describes how to adjust the Monitor for optimal performance.

6-3-3 Access to Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-3-4 Monitor Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-3-5 Advanced Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-2 Section 6-3 - Monitor adjustments

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-3-3 Access to Adjustments

19 inch Monitor:
The monitor adjustment is done via three controls (buttons) on front of the monitor.
Figure 6-1 19 inch LCD Monitor adjustment buttons - see:
Table 6-2 "Advanced Monitor Adjustments" on page 6-7 for feature descriptions

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-3-3 Access to Adjustments (contd)

Wide Screen Monitors (R6 or later):
Brightness and Contrast adjustments can be done via touchpanel encoders under Utilities screen
(Figure 6-2 "Wide Screen Monitors (R6 or later) Brightness and Contrast adjustments" on page 6-4).
All Monitor settings have been optimized at the factory, so normally, there should be no need for any
further adjustments.
Under special lighting conditions, you may want to adjust the Monitor screens backlight intensity.
Factory default Intensity is: 100% (also depends on the Room Profile setting).
For complete information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter
16, or the appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes
per LOGIQ E9 console" on page 1-22.
Figure 6-2 Wide Screen Monitors (R6 or later) Brightness and Contrast adjustments
To obtain test patterns for B/W or color adjustments, press Utility on the Touch Panel and select Test
Patterns.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-3-4 Monitor Adjustment Procedure

Table 6-1 Recommended Monitor Settings
Room Condition Contrast Brightness
Monitor 19 inch 23 inch OLED 19 inch 23 inch OLED
Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology 85 100 40 35 40 50
Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology 90 100 65 55 70 50
Bright Room 100 100 100 100 100 50
Factory Settings 100 100 40 60 70 50
6-3-4-1 Brightness for 19 inch LCD Monitors

To reduce the brightness, press the left arrow button. A popup box with the current brightness
setting will be displayed on the screen.
To increase the brightness, press the right button.
Push the mode button once to remove the popup from the screen and save the current values.
6-3-4-2 Contrast for 19 inch LCD Monitors

Use the recommended Monitor settings. The contrast is adjusted by the LOGIQ E9 software, when
selecting scanning modes and doing scanning adjustments. Changing the monitors contrast settings in
one mode will influence the picture quality in other modes.
Figure 6-3 19 inch Adjustment Buttons - Upgraded to R6

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-3-4-3 Brightness/Contrast for Widescreen Monitors

Touch panel encoder labeled as brightness/contrast. Up/down for brightness and rotate for contrast.
Push the mode button once to remove the popup from the screen and save the current values.
Monitors can be adjusted via Touch panel Utilities.
There are defined values under Room Profile:
Dark
Semi DarkLight
User defined: with this setting, the user can set the brightness and contrast manually by using the
encoder labeled as brightness/contrast. Up/down for brightness and rotate for contrast.
Chapter 3 or the appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and
Figure 6-4 23 inch Adjustment Buttons
Figure 6-5 OLED Adjustment Buttons

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-3-5 Advanced Monitor Adjustments

Table 6-2 Advanced Monitor Adjustments
1. 19 inch LCD Monitor Monitor Adjustment Buttons

NOTE: DO NOT adjust these
settings unless necessary!
To get access to the advanced

adjustments, press the mode button
for more than 10 seconds. This will
display the Advanced Menu on the
screen.
Menu on LCD original version:

< Screen >
< Color >
< Others >
< Information >
< Language >
< Exit >
1 Left Monitor Controls Advanced Menu

2 Mode
3 Right
4 Microphone
Menu on LCD V2
a. Screen
b. Color
c. Others
d. Information
e. Language
f. Exit

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-3-5 Advanced Monitor Adjustments (contd)

Table 6-3 Advanced Monitor Adjustments (cont.)
Advanced Monitor Adjustments (cont.)
Use the correct button to select any of the menu items. The details for the original LCD Monitor are
described below:
The Screen sub-menu:
Not used on this LCD screen.
The Color sub-menu has the following choices:
- Color: Brightness: (%)
- Color: Contrast: (%)
- K: Color temperature. Factory setting
- Gamma: Factory setting
- Gain: Retain Factory settings R (%), G (%), B (%)
- Reset: Reset all LCD Color settings to factory default.
- Return: Return to the Advanced Menu.
The Others sub-menu has the following choices:
- Screen Size: Adjust screen size.
- Menu Position: Adjust the menus position.
- Reset: Reset all position settings.
- Return: Return to the Advanced Menu.
The Information sub-menu is divided in two:
First part:
- Input Signal
- fH: Retain Factory settings (kHz)
- fV: Retain Factory settings (Hz)
Second part:
- (The monitors part number)
- Usage Time xxx H (counts the monitor usage in hours)
The Language sub-menu:
- This sub-menu has several language choices. Factory setting: English.
23 inch and OLED Wide screen Monitors Color and Gamma settings can be adjusted via Utility pages
on the Touch Panel. For complete information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic
User Manual, Chapter 3 or the appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User
Manual and Release Notes per LOGIQ E9 console" on page 1-22.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-3-5-1 Review Test Patterns
R5 and earlier:
There are different test patterns available: Gray Bars, Color Bars, Resolution, Text, Brightness/Contrast
Evaluation, Brightness Calibration 2, White, Gray, Red, Green and Blue.
Pixel patterns should appear to be a uniform color rectangle on the Blue/Yellow (B/Y and Y/B), Cyan/
Red (C/R and R/C), Green/Magenta (G/M and M/G) and Black/White (K/W and W/K). If an area of the
screen appears to have a dark or light grouping of pixels, first clean the screen to ensure that gel or dust
is not causing an optical defect.
R6 and later:
The wide screen monitors dont use a Gamma setting but instead use a DICOM Gray Scale Standard
Display Function (GSDF).
OLEDs are GSDF-compliant with all contrast settings, but not all brightness settings.
23 inch Monitors are GSDF-compliant with all brightness settings but not all contrast settings.
19 inch Monitors are GSDF-compliant when set at the default monitor settings. For R6-upgraded
LOGIQ E9s, the software installation insures that the 19 inch Monitor is GSDF-compliant at the
factory settings and sets the Monitor to be at default settings.
To enable the GSDF mode, in the touch panel go to Utilities -> System, System Display tab and check:
Enable DICOM grayscale display mode (GSDF).
Figure 6-6 Check to enable GSDF Mode

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-3-5-1 Review Test Patterns (contd)
R6 and later:
In addition to Gamma grayscale settings, a setting is now available that follows the DICOM Gray Scale
Standard Display Function (GSDF). If a sites PACS workstations are calibrated to the GSDF, this
setting may help to make the image appearance more uniform between the ultrasound system and
PACS. By default, GSDF is disabled for 19 Monitors and enabled for widescreen monitors.
For all monitors, you may enable the GSDF-compliant mode in the Utility pages. System ->
System Display -> Display -> Enable DICOM grayscale mode (GSDF).
With GSDF disabled, the Monitor still uses a gamma curve that may be selected on the Touch Panel
(for backwards compatibility with sites that are happy with their PACS or may have a mix of older
systems).
With GSDF enabled on Widescreen Monitors, the gamma button on the touch panel affects the
image, emulating the appearance of that gamma, but does not affect the monitor.
- With GSDF enabled on 19 inch Monitors, the manual monitor settings must be at factory
defaults to ensure GSDF compliance.
19 inch Monitors will need to be set up manually after upgrading since the default screen layout
settings in R6 are adjusted to Wide screen monitors. This can be accomplished via Utilities pages.
Go to Utilities -> System -> System Display
Set the drop-down menu in Use Wide Screen for -> Single Image to Off.
Make sure the checkbox in Side Panel Content -> Measurement Summary is checked.
6 - 10 Section 6-3 - Monitor adjustments

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Test patterns are available to aid in evaluating the display visually and quantitatively.
Table 6-4 Test Patterns used visual assessments
Test Pattern Corresponding Graphic
Gray Bars
Color Bars
Resolution
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6 - 11

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 6-4 Test Patterns used visual assessments
Brightness
Contrast
CT
Used for Luminance response
QC
Used for Resolution, luminance,
distortion, artifacts
6 - 12 Section 6-3 - Monitor adjustments

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Test Patterns used for quantitative assessments:
Table 6-5 Test Patterns used for quantitative assessments
LN-1 to LN-18
Typically used for luminance
measurements
For complete information, Refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual,
Chapter 3. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per LOGIQ E9 console" on page 1-
22.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 6-4
Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of motion Adjustment procedure
This section describes how to adjust the Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of motion for optimal
performance.
Table 6-6 LOGIQ E9 Monitor Arms
Original Arm Daeil Arm Ergotron Arm
Adjustment(s) available
Monitor Range of motion and
Monitor Range of motion. Monitor Range of motion.
Monitor Arm vertical adjustment.

6-4-3 Cautions and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-4-4 LCD Arm and LCD Monitor Tilt adjustment - Original Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-4-5 LCD Arm and LCD Monitor Tilt adjustment - Daeil Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-4-6 Monitor Arm and Monitor Friction Adjustment - Ergotron Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-4-3 Cautions and Warnings

Be aware of pinch points at hinges when adjusting Monitor Arm and Monitor.
6 - 14 Section 6-4 - Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of motion Adjustment procedure
PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-4-4 LCD Arm and LCD Monitor Tilt adjustment - Original Arm
Table 6-7 LCD Arm and LCD Monitor Tillt adjustment - Original Arm
1. Confirm LCD Arm and LCD Monitor LCD in vertical position

have full range of motion.
Move the LCD arm from side to
side.
Move the LCD from a face forward,
vertical position to a face down,
horizontal position.
Remove the Monitor Rear Cover.
Too tight:
If the customer finds the LCD
difficult to move from a vertical to
horizontal position, use a 17 mm
wrench to loosen nuts at hinge. Be
sure to loosen both sides equally.
Start with 1/4 turn and test full 90
degree movement before loosening
more.
LCD Hinge Nuts
Too loose:
If the customer finds the LCD does
not remain in place after adjusting
the LCD from a vertical to horizontal
position, use a 17 mm wrench to
tighten nuts at hinge. Be sure to
tighten both sides equally. Start with
1/4 turn and test full 90 degree
movement before tightening more.
NOTE: If the monitor is not level,
see: 8-6-3-2 "LCD Monitor
installation - R3.x and earlier" on
page 8-120 to level the monitor.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-4-5 LCD Arm and LCD Monitor Tilt adjustment - Daeil Arm
There are no adjustments for the Daeil LCD Arm.
If the Monitor is too loose or too tight when it is tilted, perform a Tilt adjustment.
Table 6-8 Monitor Tilt adjustment - Daeil Arm
1. Tilt the Monitor down and remove

the Monitor Rear Cover.
If the Monitor is too loose, turn the
Adjustment Nut (A) towards the
back and Nut (B) towards the front
to increase the friction, using a 13
mm open-end wrench.
Turn the Nuts the opposite direction
to decrease the friction. The Monitor
should stay in the position it is
released at.
NOTE: Be sure to tighten or loosen
both sides equally. Start with 1/4
turn and test full 90 degree
movement before tightening or
loosening more.
Reinstall the Monitor Rear Cover.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-4-6 Monitor Arm and Monitor Friction Adjustment - Ergotron Arm
6-4-6-1 Monitor Arm Vertical adjustment
If the Monitor rises or falls when it is released, perform a Vertical adjustment.
Table 6-9 Monitor Arm Vertical adjustment
1. Tilt the Monitor down to access the Monitor Arm Vertical Adjustment Screw
Vertical Adjustment Screw.
If the Monitor was rising, turn the

Adjustment Screw clockwise to
increase the friction, using a 4 mm
Allen wrench.
If the Monitor was falling, turn the

Adjustment Screw
counterclockwise to decrease the
friction.
The Monitor should stay in the

position it is released at.
NOTE: The heavier the Monitor, the

more friction will be required.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-4-6-2 Monitor Arm Vertical adjustment - Ergotron Arm
If the Monitor is too loose or too tight when it is tilted, perform a Tilt adjustment.
Table 6-10 Monitor Tilt adjustment - Ergotron Arm
1. Tilt the Monitor down and remove

the Monitor Rear Cover.
If you have a thick wrench, it is
easier to reach the nuts by using the
boxed end of the wrench.
If the Monitor is too loose, turn the

Adjustment Nut (A) towards the
back and Nut (B) towards the front
to increase the friction, using a
13 mm wrench.
Turn the Nuts the opposite direction
to decrease the friction. The Monitor
should stay in the position it is
released at.
NOTE: Be sure to tighten or loosen
both sides equally. Start with 1/4
turn and test full 90 degree
movement before tightening or
loosening more.
Reinstall the Monitor Rear Cover.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 6-5
Touch Panel Calibration
This section describes how to calibrate the Touch Panel when replacing FRUs for optimal performance.

6-5-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6-5-5 5207000 Upper Op family - R4 or earlier (pre-calibration and calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6-5-6 5207000 Upper OP family - R5 and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6-5-7 5209000 Upper OP family - R5 and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-5-3 Introduction
Touchscreen Calibration may be needed after replacing the following parts:
Op Panel - Upper
Op Panel Controller Board
Upper Op Panel LCD/Frame/Touchscreen
Calibration procedures vary depending on the version of software and/or the upper operator family
installed.
If your system is running R4 or earlier versions: (only 5207000 Upper OP families are supported)
Calibration and calibration verification are done via the Common Service Desktop (CSD)
Diagnostics.
If the Touchscreen is so far out of calibration, or hangs and the normal calibration procedure does
not work, you can perform a pre-calibration using the tool called GETESTAPP which is on the
Windows desktop, then perform the normal calibration via the CSD Diagnostics.
Figure 6-7 Sequence of Calibration and Troubleshooting Flow Chart 5207000 Upper Op family with
R4 and earlier
Replace Part(s)
Calibration Verification Slightly off?

Bad?
Okay?
Finished.
Run GETESTAPP
for Pre-calibration
Okay? TP Calibration
Finished.
Bad?
Re-order FRU(s)
6 - 20 Section 6-5 - Touch Panel Calibration

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-5-3 Introduction (contd)

If your system is running R5 or later versions:
5207000 Upper OP family:

- Calibration and calibration verification are done via GETESTAPP which is on the Windows
desktop.
not work, the FRU may need replacement. There is no pre-calibration or reset calibration available
for this version.
5209000 Upper OP family:
- Calibration and calibration verification are done via GETESTAPP which is on the Windows
desktop.
not work, there is a reset calibration available via GETESTAPP.
Figure 6-8 Sequence of Calibration and Troubleshooting Flow Chart 5207000 and 5209000 Upper Op
families with R5 and later
Replace Part(s)
Calibration Verification Slightly off?

Bad?
Okay?
Finished.
5209000
family?
no
yes
Reset Calibration
Okay? TP Calibration
Finished.
Bad?
Re-order FRU(s)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-5-4 5207000 Upper OP family (R4 and earlier) - Calibration and Calibration
Verification
Table 6-11 5207000 Upper OP family (R4 and earlier) - Calibration and Calibration Verification

1. NOTE: Always try TP Calibration Verification before attempting to calibrate.
To do a Touchscreen Calibration, follow the directions on the Touchscreen. As each of the
cross-hairs appear, touch them with your finger or a pencil eraser.
NOTE: You MUST hold your finger on the cross-hair until it moves to the next location. If you
just tap the calibration cross-hair, there is a good chance your calibration will be corrupt or
hang.
2. Under the GEMS Service Touch Panel Calibration Screen
Home Page - Service
Browser:
Select Service
Diagnostics/
Miscellaneous/Touch
Panel - expand Touch
Panel, check TP
Calibration.
Expand TP.
Click the Execute button,

at bottom of screen.
Click Reset button, at

bottom of screen.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3. Calibration Verification Touch Panel Calibration Verification Screen
Check TP Cal Verification.
The Start Touchscreen

Verification brings up a
grid (see Step 4). Each
time you touch the screen
a small red dot appears
where you touch. This will
indicate that the calibration
is correct and you DO
NOT need to re-calibrate.
Click Reset button, at

bottom of screen.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4. If the red dots do not show Touchscreen Calibration Verification Grid
up at the touched places,
you need to run the Touch
Panel calibration. To
terminate the verification,
move the trackball pointer
into the grid and press the
set key of trackball.
If just a few squares off,

pre-calibration is probably
not necessary.
If way off or no dots,

perform a pre-calibration.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-5-5 5207000 Upper Op family - R4 or earlier (pre-calibration and calibration)

Table 6-12 5207000 Upper Op family - R4 or earlier (pre-calibration and calibration)

1. Boot up with service dongle and Exit to Windows.
Double-click on the GETESTAPP Icon on the desktop.

2. Click Option->CP Type->
Ichiro,
Click the Attach button (1) -

System should respond with
Hardware and Software
revisions.
Click the Touchscreen tab (2).

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3. Press Calibrate to get the
screen shown and the indicated
targets.
Press the Touchscreen at the

estimated location of the
target(s) shown in the Main
Screen.
The Blue dots that show up do

not really show where you
touched, they are based on the
previous calibration, so they
can be WAY OFF from where
you actually touched.
NOTE: Pressing the Indicated

Target too quickly can cause
the Touchscreen to hang.
Blue Dot
You will see a blue dot in the

position touched.
Remember this
pre-calibration is only a coarse,
base-line calibration. You will
need to run the Utility
Calibration in the Service
Browser after.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4. Calibration Routine Complete.
5. Close the GETESTAPP and click on GO ICHIRO Icon on the desktop to re-launch the
application.
6. Go back to the Service Browser
and run the Touch Panel
Calibration utility again.
If this second calibration does

not work, then the FRU may be
defective.
7. Do Calibration Verification. See: 7-5-17-2 "Calibration Verification" on page 7-131.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-5-6 5207000 Upper OP family - R5 and later

Table 6-13 5207000 Upper OP family - R5 and later


2. Touch on Upper Op panel
screen to check if the
calibration is adequate.
The dot should appear on
the places you touch.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3. Select Calibration (1) to
run calibration utility if
needed.
Follow the instructions

described in the window
on the right (2).
When calibration is
successful, you will see
the word Complete
highlighted.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3. If the calibration fails, the
(CONT)
system will prompt a
message indicating the
failure and the word Fail
will be highlighted.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-5-7 5209000 Upper OP family - R5 and later



2. Select Test Touchscreen
Follow the Steps

described in the
highlighted window above
Observe if the place you

touch shows the dot under
your touch, also check if
the line drawn follows the
position where you touch.
3. Select to Run Windows

Calibration utility if the
touchscreen test
demonstrated that the
calibration is not correct.
It is recommended to
select 9 point calibration,
then run calibration.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4.
Make sure you touch the cross sign very lightly, using a small area of your finger contacting
the screen, this will trigger the cross sign to move to the next location
When all points have been touched, the system will ask if you wish to save the calibration
data.
5. To reset calibration to
factory default, select
clear cal data (1) on the
pull down and select Run
Windows Calibration (2).

PROPRIETARY TO GE

5. Click OK on the dialog box
(CONT)
confirming calibration
reset to defaults. Run
9 point calibration and
retest using Test
touchscreen."

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 6-6
DC Offset Calibration
6-6-1 Introduction
The DC offset calibration is performed to calibrate each ADC channel of the GRX inputs. The system
calibrates the ADC to zero output when there is no signal on the input. These bias voltages are stored
in the Back End Processor.
6-6-2 When to do a DC Offset Calibration

Do DC Offset Calibration:
when installing a new LOGIQ E9

after software has been updated or replaced
when DRX board(s) or a MRX board has been interchanged
when a DRX board(s) or a MRX board has been replaced
when the Back End Processor has been replaced
6-6-2-1 DC Calibration Procedure

1.) Disconnect all connected probes.
2.) Power on the LOGIQ E9.
3.) On the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Service to access CSD.
4.) Log in as GE Service, enter current password
5.) Select Diagnostics tab.
6.) Select Service -> Diagnostics.
7.) Select the + before Service Diagnostics folder to open the list of choices.
8.) Select the + before Analog Receive to open the test choices for the analog receiver.
9.) Select DC Offset Calibration and then follow the on-screen instructions.
6 - 34 Section 6-6 - DC Offset Calibration

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 6-7
Operator Panel movement
The Operator Panel movement within the LOGIQ E9 is described in this section.

6-7-3 Adjusting the XY Locking Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6-7-4 Adjusting the Z Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6-7-5 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6-7-6 Using the Park Lock Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6-7-3 Adjusting the XY Locking Mechanism

Table 6-15 Adjusting the XY Locking Mechanism

1. This procedure is intended to adjust the XY Adjustment for Operator Panel
locking mechanism for the XY Assembly.
Locate hex screw behind the XY Assembly

to adjust it correctly.
Use a 3 mm hex tool to adjust. Rotating the

screw clockwise will tighten and rotating
the screw counterclockwise will loosen the
lock.
Too tight will reduce the slack and make it

harder to engage the lock. Make the
adjustments in 1/4 turn increments and test
the lock until the optimum adjustment is
achieved.
NOTE: When turning the hex screw, do not

exceed half turn increments.
Overtightening will prevent the console
from locking into place and too loose will
make the console loose. You may try 1/2
turn adjustments, but the console may be
too tight or have too much slack.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-7-4 Adjusting the Z Mechanism

Table 6-16 Adjusting the Z Mechanism

1. There are no adjustments for the OP Z Mechanism Manual adjustment lever
vertical movement.
The Z mechanism can be manually

repositioned in the event the drive gear is
disconnected or has failed.
Push and hold the lever toward the center

of the device, and the OP can be adjusted
vertically.
WARNING
Operator console can drop unexpectedly when the mechanism is released.
6-7-5 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism and Adjustment
6-7-5-1 XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts
Table 6-17 XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts
Items Corresponding Graphic

1 U-bolt XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts
2 Brakes (one inside each of the

4 XY arms)
3 Park Lock (engages U-bolt)
6 - 36 Section 6-7 - Operator Panel movement

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-7-5-2 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism
Table 6-18 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism

1. This procedure is intended to release and XY Manual Release for Lock and
adjust the XY mechanism.
Brake Mechanism
Use a small tipped screwdriver and press in
until a click or the release, releases.
Some force may be required if the lock
adjustment is too tight.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-7-5-3 XY Lock Adjustment for Lock and Brake Mechanism

Follow this procedure if the park lock is not working, or the lock does not respond when pressing the
Frogleg Controls:

1. Release the lock manually. See: Table 6-18 Park Lock screws
"XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake
Mechanism" on page 6-37.
Remove the four screws (1).
Gently guide the park lock out, the power

cable is fragile. DO NOT pull.
NOTICE
DO NOT pull the park lock out, the power cable is fragile, guide it out.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

2. If park lock nut, (2) and park lock lever (3)
are in these positions., the lock will not Park Lock WILL NOT engage
engage. (This occurred in some earlier when in these positions
systems.) The nut and retainer did not
return to the charged mode after unlock.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3. Rotate the threaded lead screw on the
actuator, (4) counterclockwise until the lock Park Lock WILL NOT engage
nut is barely touching the bearing housing when in these positions
(5) of the threaded lead screw and the two
plastic springs just touch, but do not
deform. Make sure the lever is loose and
engages with the lock wheel, (6), as shown.
Adjustment Set
Before reassembling the lock assembly,
make sure the nut, (2) and lever (3) are in
the position, as shown.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-7-6 Using the Park Lock Properly

It is important to inform a customer of the following if they are experiencing problems with the XY park
lock function.
Be sure to:
Apply the brakes. The locking mechanism will not engage if the device can move when trying to
park the console.
Push the release button and gently guide the console into the locked position until the lock is
engaged.
Not apply any weight on the console or lean on it. If the console is not in the normal resting position,
the lock will not engage when trying to park it.
6-7-7 Operator Panel XY movement - principle of operation

When the OP is in the locked position, press the left button lock of the Frogleg Controls, which causes
the motorized park lock to release and releases the brakes, momentarily in the froglegs. This allows the
OP to move in the XY direction.
When the console is not locked (floating), press the lock button, this will only release the brakes in the
froglegs, to allow easy movement. When the lock button is pressed and the console is pushed back into
the locked position, the U-bolt mechanically engages the park lock (similar to a car door). Pushing the
lock button does not affect the locking action of the park lock, it only releases the brakes, to allow the
OP to get pushed into the park lock easier. But, the lock button must be pushed to get the OP to the
locked position. Once the OP is in the lock position and the lock button is released, you can hear the
sound of the park lock rotating to engage the U-bolt.
For R4, at shutdown, a message will appear ONLY if the Operator Panel is not parked. This message
tells the user that the Operator Panel is not parked.
The user can proceed to park the Operator Panel or to leave it un-parked.
Notice that ONCE the user selects shutdown in the Monitor, the 2 buttons (Z-motion and XY-motion)
are disabled. The brakes on the XY mechanism are released the XY movement is free but the Z-motion
is disabled. If the user wants to adjust the Z mechanism after shutdown, they will need to use thehandle
in the back of the unit.
NOTE: Remember, if the device brakes are not locked when trying to lock the OP, this can act as a
shock absorber and make it more difficult for the park lock to lock.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 6-8
Direction Lock and Brake adjustments
There are no adjustments for the Direction Lock or the brakes.
Section 6-9
Adjust time-out for DICOM servers
If you are experiencing problems with slow responses from DICOM servers, increase the time-out in the
DICOM server properties dialog. (Utility -> Connectivity -> Service -> Properties -> Maximum
Retries and Timeout.)
Problems with slow responses may result in images being re-sent automatically and low transfer rates.
The retry settings can be used to make jobs retry on bad networks.
When portable (off-line), use minimum time-out and no retries or it will affect shutdown speed.
6 - 42 Section 6-8 - Direction Lock and Brake adjustments

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 6-10
Volume Navigation Calibration Procedure
The Volume Navigation Calibration Procedure within the LOGIQ E9 is described in this section.

6-10-3 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6-10-4 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6-10-5 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6-10-6 Measure Initial Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6-10-7 Perform Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6-10-3 Overview
The Volume Navigation system is factory calibrated. However, small variations in the electromagnetic
sensors, sensor brackets and the probes themselves can create system-to-system variation. This
procedure is a means to do a system-specific calibration correction.
Note that the field calibration only applies to the specific type of probe (9L, ML6-15, C1-5, e.g.) that is
used. Therefore, it may be necessary to repeat this procedure for each probe type that a customer
owns.
6-10-4 Equipment
Use a phantom (optional) with distinguishable points that can be scanned from at least two directions
(top and side, e.g.). It is best to use a special calibration phantom (optional) that has target points in
the phantom (optional) and has been developed for this purpose. Note that the strings in many
phantoms (optional) are not a good choice because it is not easy to specify a particular point along the
string.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-10-5 Setup
Connect a service key to the system. Set the system up for V Nav by connecting the transmitter and
sensors. Attach the sensor/biopsy bracket to the probe, making sure to use the correct bracket for the
probe. Connect sensors 1 and 2, assuring that their positions are not swapped. Put the phantom
(optional) in a location where it does not rock or otherwise move while it is being scanned. Make sure
to avoid areas with metal. Adjust the transmitter so that the bottom of the transmitter is at about the same
level as the top of the phantom (optional). The top, center of the phantom (optional) should be about 8-
16 inches (20-40 cm) from the face of the transmitter.
The calibration environment must be tested for electromagnetic field distortions. Calibrating in an
environment with electromagnetic field distortions will likely generate a field calibration correction less
accurate than the factory calibration.
1.) Enter V Nav by pressing the V Nav key.

2.) Set the Magnetic Distortions control (see the touch panel) to Show All.
- Move the windows pointer over the 2nd Environmental Quality Indicator in the upper left
corner of the screen to initiate a mouseover window.
3.) Move the transducer across the surfaces of the phantom (optional) where you will be scanning.
The absolute value of the magnetic distortion reading (1-2 Distortion) should be consistently less than
1 mm, especially since the transducer is held steady in one location. It is also important that the reading
is not cycling quickly between values such as continuously looping from -0.2 to 0.6. The environmental
quality for both sensor 1 and sensor 2 should be in the green range, preferably at 6 or 7 bars.
Scanning the phantom (optional), place a GPS Marker on a point of interest. Holding the probe steady,
the point should not drift or move in a large circle. Turn the transducer 90 degrees and confirm that the
GPS Marker is still tracking the point of interest.
Problem 1 Distortion reading is too large. Attempt to adjust the environment by removing or moving
away from metal and adjusting the placement of the transmitter. If the distortion is not updating at all,
the second sensor may be bad.
Problem 2 Distortion is cycling or GPS Marker is circling when the probe is steady. Make sure the
transmitter is close enough to the phantom (optional).
Problem 3 The GPS Marker does not track the point of interest when the transducer is turned. Verify
that sensors 1 and 2 are not swapped.
6 - 44 Section 6-10 - Volume Navigation Calibration Procedure

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-10-6 Measure Initial Accuracy

In order to know if the calibration correction is good, you need a baseline measurement of the current
accuracy.
1.) Identify a point in the phantom (optional) that you can see from multiple angles. For example, from
the top of the phantom (optional), from the top of the phantom with the probe turned 90 degrees and
from the side of the phantom. A point at approximately 6 cm depth is recommended.
2.) Select the GPS Marker key and select Delete All.
3.) Select the Measure Accuracy key.
4.) Scan to the first point of interest. Holding the probe steady, move the Windows Pointer over the
point of interest and press the Right Trackball key. A GPS Target Marker (labeled 1) is placed
on the point of interest.
5.) Change the orientation on the probe 90 degrees and mark the same point again. Write down the
results shown on the status bar.
(Prior to Correction) Distance #-# = _________ [mm]
(After Correction) Distance #-# = _________ [mm]
6.) Return to the original probe orientation from step 3 and mark the point a third time. This point should
be at the same location as the point from step 3.
7.) Change the orientation of the probe so that you are scanning the same point again, but from the
side of the phantom (optional). Mark the point a fourth time. Write down the results shown on the
status bar.
(Prior to Correction) Distance #-# = _________ [mm], mean (2 values) = __________mm
(After Correction) Distance #-# = _________ [mm], mean (2 values) = __________mm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-10-7 Perform Calibration

The calibration buttons referred to are found on page 2 of the V Nav touch panel.
NOTE: Use the service key to see the calibration buttons.
To perform a calibration you need to identify at least 3 different points of interest in the phantom
(optional) and scan each of these points from at least 3 different views. If the point of interest is
accessible from two surfaces of the phantom (optional), four views are recommended. If the point of
interest is accessible from three surfaces of the phantom (optional), six views are recommended.
1.) Identify a point in the phantom (optional) that you can see from multiple angles. For example, from
the top of the phantom (optional), from the top of the phantom (optional) with the probe turned 90
degrees and from the side of the phantom (optional).
2.) Select the Calibration Delete button and choose All. A message appears on the status bar
indicating the calibration procedure has been reset. Repeat this step at any time if you want to start
the process over.
3.) Select the Calibration Next Point button. A message on the status bar appears indicating that
Point 1 has been added.
4.) Scan to the first point of interest. Holding the probe steady, move the Windows Pointer over the
point of interest and press the Right Trackball key. A GPS Target Marker (labeled T) is placed
on the point of interest and a message Calibration Correction: Input Accepted appears on the
status bar. If this view of the point was not marked where you wanted it, remove it by selecting
Calibration Delete -> Last View.
5.) Identify a second view of the point of interest identified in step 5. For example, turn the probe 90
degrees or move the probe to a different surface of the phantom (optional). The GPS marker will
help to guide back to the same point of interest; make sure that you are marking the same point of
interest. Once you are at the same point, use the Windows Pointer and the Right Trackball key as
before to mark the point of interest. If this view of the point was not marked where you wanted it,
remove it by selecting Calibration Delete -> Last View. If you are unable to confidently get a second
view of the point of interest, you can select the Calibration Delete -> Last Point key and return to
Step 4, 11, 14 or 16 depending on how you got to this step.
6.) Identify a third view of the point of interest identified in step 5. For example, turn the probe 90
degrees or move the probe to a different surface of the phantom (optional). Note that this view
should be different than the view used instep 5 and different than the view used in step 6. The GPS
marker will help to guide back to the same point of interest; make sure that you are marking the
same point of interest. Once you are at the same point, use the Windows Pointer and the Right
Trackball key as before to mark the point of interest. If this view of the point was not marked where
you want it, you can remove it by selecting Calibration Delete -> Last View. If you are unable to
confidently get a third view of the point of interest, you can select the Calibration Delete -> Last
Point key and return to Step 4, 11, 14 or 16 depending on how you got to this step.
7.) Optionally, you may identify additional views of the point of interest from step 5. For example, turn
the probe 90 degrees and take another view from the second surface. If the point can be seen from
a third surface this could also be used for one or more additional views.
8.) At this stage, you have completed at least 3 views of the first point of interest.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6-10-7 Perform Calibration (contd)
9.) Select the Calibration Next Point button. A note on the status bar appears indicating that the Point
2 has been added.
10.)Repeat steps 5 through 8 for a point of interest that is away from the first point of interest.
11.)At this stage, you have completed at least 3 views of the second point of interest.
12.)Select the Calibration Next Point button. A note on the status bar appears indicating that Point 2
has been added. Repeat steps 5 through 8.
13.)Repeat steps 5 through 8 for a point of interest that is away from the first and second points interest
and does not create straight lines between points 1, 2 and 3.
14.)At this stage, you have completed at least 3 views of the third point of interest.
15.)Optionally, you may identify additional points of interest by selecting the Calibration Next Point
button and repeating step 5 through 8.
16.)Select the Calibration Calculate button on the touch panel. A series of calculations are performed
in 5 steps. Once the fifth step is complete a value appears on the status bar. This message appears
briefly, so watch for it. If you miss this message, press Calibration Calculate again to redo the
computations and redisplay the result. Record your results.
Init. Mean Dev. = ______________, Opt. Mean Dev. = __________________
The lower the value, the more likely the calibration correction is good.
17.)At this point, the calibration correction is being used but it has not been saved for later use.
Following the steps in the Measure Initial Accuracy section to evaluate the performance of the
calibration correction.
18.)If the correction is better than the Initial Accuracy, it may be saved with the Calibration Write key.
The key automatically stores the value with other system presets. If the accuracy is not better than
the initial accuracy, exit and reenter V Nav to discard the results. Another calibration correction can
be attempted by starting at step 3.
Problem 1 Calibration Next Point button is not on the touch panel. Connect a service key, exit V Nav,
enter V Nav and go to page 2 of the touch panel.
Problem 2 If you are confused about the number of points and views you have performed, restart the
process starting with Step 3.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Chapter 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Section 7-1
Overview
7-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 7
This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and
system operation. Basic host-, system-, and board-level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied.
Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.

7-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2 Service Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-3 Gathering Troubleshooting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-4 Screen Captures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-5 Common Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-6 Troubleshooting using InSite ExC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-165
7-7 Troubleshooting Insite ExC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-175
7-8 Troubleshooting Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-177
7-9 Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-191
7-10 Test of Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-351
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 7-2
Service Safety Considerations

ADJUSTING.
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.
WARNING IF A LOGIQ E9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT PROCESSOR (CARD CAGE) COVER
IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.
WARNING USE ALL PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PPE) SUCH AS GLOVES, SAFETY
SHOES, SAFETY GLASSES, AND KNEELING PAD, TO REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY.
7-2 Section 7-2 - Service Safety Considerations

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 7-3
Gathering Troubleshooting Data
7-3-1 Purpose of this Section
Problem images and system data (logs) can be acquired at the device or through remote diagnostics
(InSite ExC). These data can be used to perform service at the device, or can be sent back to the
manufacturer for analysis.

7-3-1 Purpose of this Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-3-3 Collecting Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-3-4 Collecting a Screen Capture with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-3-5 Capturing Service Logs with ALT+D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-3-6 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R1.x.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-3-7 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R2.x.x or later) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-3-3 Collecting Vital System Information

The following information is necessary to properly analyze data or images being reported as a
malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:
NOTE: This information is normally collected with the Alt+D or Gather Logs utility.
- Product Name = LOGIQ E9

From the Utility -> System -> About screen:
Applications Software
- Software Version
- Software Part Number
- Build View
- Build Date
System Base Image Software
- Base Image Revision

- Image Part Number
- Image Date
7-4 Section 7-3 - Gathering Troubleshooting Data

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-3-4 Collecting a Screen Capture with Logs

NOTE: In R6 the screen capture is no longer taken.
If the system malfunctions, press the Alt+D keys simultaneously. This Alt+D function is available at all
times, and collects a screen capture of the image monitor, user-defined presets, and the following logs:
Keyboard Shadow Log (restricted in R6 or later)

Error Logs
Crash Log (restricted in R6 or later)
Vital Product Data
DICOM Logs
Windows Event Logs
Diagnostic Logs
Service Logs
For a detailed list of Service Logs captured,
see: 7-3-5 "Capturing Service Logs with ALT+D" on page 7-7.
Figure 7-1 ALT+D Dialog Box

R5 and earlier R6 and later
When Alt+D is pressed, a menu box opens. Enter the following information:
System ID serial number.

Software version.
System Date and time of occurrence.
Sequence of events leading to issue.
Is the issue repeatable?
Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.
Media brand, speed, capacity, type.
Select the Destination (storage media or Service directory for remote viewing through InSite ExC)
and click the Store button.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-3-4 Collecting a Screen Capture with Logs (contd)

NOTE: For Application SW R3.x.x or later, the Service Directory is no longer located under the export
folder, it is located in d:\ root directory (d:\service).
NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.
NOTE: To save to a CD/DVD you MUST select CD/DVD Recordable as the destination device,
otherwise the data is written to the default Export/Service directory on the hard drive. The
Export/Service directory is only used for InSite ExC. It is not intended for images or report
storage use.
For CD/DVD; the system will automatically format if youinsert an unformatted disk, gather logs and write
it out to the disk.
The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates
the possibility of artifacts from compression.
Double check the media that you made to ensure it contains at least two files. An example is shown in
Figure 7-2 "Example of Zipped Trouble Image and Logs File" on page 7-6.
Figure 7-2 Example of Zipped Trouble Image and Logs File
NOTE: In R2.x.x or later, the name of the file includes the name of the system:
log_computerName_YYMMDD_HHMMSS.zip
In R6 and later, logs collected via Alt+D are divided in two groups, with and without patient information.
The Alt+D dialog box will request the user to check the box authorizing the inclusion of logs that could
possibly include protected information.
If box is checked, the system will create two log files with the following format name:
log<SN>_<DATE>_<TIME>.zip
log<SN>_<DATE>_<TIME>_ProtectedInfo.zip
Where <SN> is the serial number, <DATE> is the date in format YYMMDD and <TIME> is the time in
format HHMMSS.
7-3-4-1 Marking Log files

If a customer is experiencing issues during operations, the event can be marked and logged by pressing
Alt+1 or Alt+2 when they occur. When Alt+1 or Alt+2 are pressed, a marker is placed in the log to aid
log analysis.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-3-5 Capturing Service Logs with ALT+D

The following is a list of the Service logs captured during an ALT+D log capture:
Figure 7-3 Capture Service Example

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-3-6 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R1.x.x)

A sniffer monitors network traffic and allows you to capture network data without redirecting or altering it.
NOTE: If you are launching the network sniffer from the Utilities menu (7-5-21-15 "Distinct Network
Monitor R1.x.x" on page 7-148), you can begin with step 1 of this procedure.
Launch the network sniffer application one of the following two ways:
1.) On the Regular Scan Screen, press Alt+N. This launches the network sniffer application.
2.) Select Configure on the Distinct Network Monitor Window.
Figure 7-4 Distinct Network Monitor Window
3.) Click on Capture Settings after selecting the Configuration pull-down menu.
4.) The Configuration screen opens.
Figure 7-5 Configuration Screen

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-3-6 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R1.x.x) (contd)
NOTE: Steps 5 - 12 describe how to filter the data so that you only record this systems network activity.
If you prefer, you may skip the filter section and start the data capture now. If you do, you will
capture all network activity, not just this systems.
5.) On the Configuration screen (Figure 7-6 "Configuration - Filters Tab" on page 7-9), select the Filters
tab
6.) In the New Filter section confirm built-in templates is selected, then click Create.
Figure 7-6 Configuration - Filters Tab

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7.) On the Select Filter Task screen, select Show only IP packets FROM/TO one or more IP
addresses, then select Next.
The Enter Filter Settings screen opens.
Figure 7-7 Enter Filter Settings
8.) Enter the IP address you wish to monitor, and click the Add button (). Repeat this step for all IP
addresses you wish to add, then select Finish.
The Enter Filter Settings screen closes.
9.) On the Configuration Screen, select the Capture Tab (Figure 7-8 "Capture Tab on Configuration
Screen" on page 7-11).
7 - 10 Section 7-3 - Gathering Troubleshooting Data

PROPRIETARY TO GE
10.)In the Filter to Apply field, select My Computer.
Figure 7-8 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen
11.)Select Close. The Configuration screen closes.

12.)On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen, select Capture > Packets and Statistics (Play).
NOTE: The Network Sniffer will now collect data until you select Capture > Stop.
13.)Double-click on the Go Ichiro icon to start the system application.

14.)Perform the DICOM transaction you want to troubleshoot (such as Worklist Query, Send to PACS,
etc.). Perform the function several times to ensure the data is captured in the sniff.
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 11
PROPRIETARY TO GE
15.)When the transaction finishes (or fails), select Ctrl+Alt+Del to open Task Manager.
Select Exit to close the application and return to Windows. Then open Windows Task Manager to
open the Distinct Network Monitor screen.
Figure 7-9 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen
16.)From the Task Manager Applications tab, select Distinct, and then select the Switch To button.
The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
17.)On the Distinct Network Monitor screen (Figure 7-4 "Distinct Network Monitor Window" on page 7-
8), select Capture > Stop.
After stopping the data collection, a screen similar to Figure 7-11 "Save As Capture File dialog box"
on page 7-13 opens
Figure 7-10 Capture Data Sample
18.)Select File > Save As. Enter the file name d:\log\Sniffer\MyLog.
19.)Select Save.
20.)On the Save As Capture File dialog (Figure 7-11), select Save.
Figure 7-11 Save As Capture File dialog box
21.)Check the d:\log\Sniffer directory. At a minimum, there should be the following two files: MyLog.cap,
MyLog.num.
22.)Copy the files to media, or ask the OLC to upload the files if the system has remote connectivity.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-3-7 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R2.x.x or later)
Wireshark is a new network sniffer program that replaces Distinct in R2.x.x or later. Functionality is
similar from previous software.
Logs collected should be stored under d:/log/Sniffer folder to ensure they form part of general log
collection Alt+D or Collect Log.
1.) Press Alt+N.

2.) On the network sniffer screen, select Capture -> Options.
Figure 7-12 Network Sniffer Screen
3.) Select the interface that will be receiving packets (Network card A or Wireless B).
NOTE: Remember, if the device has a DVR, it will show up in the list. Select either Intel Network
connection or the Wireless network adapter.
If you are working with a Wireless connection, you must uncheck the Capture packets in promiscuous
mode; the wireless option does not support this mode.
Figure 7-13 Sniffer Captions Options

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-3-7 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (Software R2.x.x or later) (contd)
Use filters to limit the captured data. Filter by IP or by IP and port number.
By IP only: press on Capture Filter.
4.) Select IP only.

Use the IP address of the Scanner or the one from the DICOM device under test, on the Filter string
field, using the following syntax: (example) host 3.62.12.33 as shown in Figure 7-14 "Capture Filter IP
Only" on page 7-15, press OK.
Figure 7-14 Capture Filter IP Only
PROPRIETARY TO GE
By IP and port: Select Capture filter.
5.) Select New.

6.) Edit name for example DICOM port 104.
7.) Enter the string with the following syntax: port xxx and host yy.yy.yy.yy, where xxx is the port
number of My Computer in the scanner and yy.yy.yy.yy is the IP address of the device under test
(PACS,server, etc).
8.) Press OK.
Figure 7-15 Sniffer Capture Filter IP and Port
9.) Select Start.

10.)Minimize network sniffer window and initiate communication to the DICOM device (eg. send images
to the storage device or query Worklist).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
11.)Press Alt+N to restore Sniffer window and observe the network activity.
Figure 7-16 Sniffer Window and Network Activity
A.) "Packet List" pane - the packet list pane displays all the packets in the current capture file. Each line
in the packet list corresponds to one packet in the capture file.
B.) "Packet Details" pane - shows the current packet (selected in the "Packet List" pane) in a more
detailed form. This pane shows the protocols and protocol fields of the packet selected in the
"Packet List" pane.
C.) "Packet Bytes" pane - The packet bytes pane shows the data of the current packet (selected in the
"Packet List" pane) in a hexdump style.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
In addition to the pre capture filter, use the Filter tool on the screen to filter what is displayed.
Filter the DICOM packets, since they are the most probable for the troubleshooting.
12.)Type dcm and press Apply. The display should filter all DICOM packets, filtering out image data.
Figure 7-17 Filter Tool Display
13.)Select Capture > Stop. Or, select the icon in the task bar to stop the capture.
14.)Select File > Save As. Enter the file name d:\log\Sniffer\MyLog. (MyLog can be changed to the
name of your preference).
WireShark uses the libpcap (*.pcap, *.cap) file format as the default format to save captured packets.
(If you need to open this file with D-Trace or DVTK, the capture can be re-saved in NA Sniffer Windows
format).
Figure 7-18 Select Capture Stop Icon

PROPRIETARY TO GE
15.)Select Displayed. This will save only the filtered values rather than the entire capture.
16.)Select SAVE.
If you perform Alt+D or Gather Logs, these sniffer logs will be included in the zip file.
Figure 7-19 Select Capture Display
17.)Exit the sniffer application by clicking on the X in the upper right corner.
18.)If you have already performed Save as, you can continue without saving and quit the program.
Make sure you have saved your data before exiting the program.
Figure 7-20 Save Capture Data Question
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 7-4
Screen Captures
To capture screen images that can be used for diagnostic and troubleshooting purposes.

7-4-3 Ctrl+PrintScreen Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-4-4 To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-4-3 Ctrl+PrintScreen Shortcut

A Ctrl+PrintScreen shortcut is available for quickly capturing the image displayed on the system. Images
captured using this shortcut are saved in the d:\export\service\image (R2.x.x or earlier) or in
d:\service\image (R3.x.x or later) directory using both the JPEG (.jpg) and raw DICOM (.dcm) formats.
The InSite ExC connection will have access to the export folder on the D drive to retrieve these
images. This feature will allow the customer to quickly and easily acquire images that can then be
viewed by the OLC.
7-4-4 To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut

With the desired image displayed on the screen, press Ctrl and PrtSc (print screen) keys
simultaneously.
If you want to compress or delete them:
1.) From the touchpanel, select Utility -> Service -> Utilities -> Common Utilities -> Image
Compress & Delete Utilities. See: 7-5-21-13 "Image Compress & Delete Utility" on page 7-146.
2.) Select the checkbox for the image(s) you want to save, compress or delete.
3.) Select Compress or Delete Files, whatever function is desired.
A compressed file of the images is stored in d:\export (R2.x.x or earlier) or in d:\service (R3.x.x or
later). You may rely on the date and time of the Ctrl+PrtSc procedure to identify the most recent
image recorded. The uncompressed files are stored in d:\export\service\image (R2.x.x or earlier) or
in d:\service\image (R3.x.x or later).
NOTE: For Application software R2.x.x or earlier, The Export\Service Directory may get deleted if the
user clicks on the button Delete Files For Transfer on the Save As dialog. See: 7-9-13-3
"Cannot find d:\Export\Service folder" on page 7-238. The Directory MUST BE recreated after
it is removed. For Application SW R3.x.x or later, the Service Directory is no longer located
under the export folder, it is located in d:\ root directory (d:\service)
7 - 20 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 7-5
Common Service Desktop
This section describes the features of the Common Service Desktop (CSD).
NOTE: To run diagnostics, you should detach all probes.
NOTE: Reboot the system after performing any diagnostics before returning the system to customer
use.
NOTE: When using the Common Service Desktop do NOT minimize any of the Common Service Desktop
windows. If you minimize them they end up in the lower left corner of the screen behind the Service
Desktop Manager window and cannot be restored.
PROPRIETARY TO GE

7-5-3 Common Service Desktop overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-5-4 Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7-5-5 Home. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
7-5-6 Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7-5-7 Diagnostics Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7-5-8 Diagnostic Utility Freezes Up/Times Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7-5-9 Diagnostic Symptom Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7-5-10 OP Panel Utilities - Op Panel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7-5-10-2 Launching the Op Panel Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7-5-10-3 Trackball Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7-5-10-4 Keyboard Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7-5-10-5 Slidepots Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7-5-10-6 Encoders Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7-5-10-7 Pushbuttons Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7-5-10-8 LEDs Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7-5-10-9 Touch Screen Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7-5-10-10Ending the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7-5-11 Diagnostics - Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
7-5-12 Diagnostics for Service Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
7-5-13 DVR Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-111
7-5-15 Diagnostics - BEP Interactive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-124
7-5-16 Diagnostics - BEP Interactive Tests - R4.x and later. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-125
7-5-17 Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-130
7-5-18 4D Motor Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-132
7-5-19 Patient I/O Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-134
7-5-20 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-135
7-5-21 Utilities - Common Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-137
7-5-22 Utilities - Scanner Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-154
7 - 22 Section 7-5 - Common Service Desktop

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-3 Common Service Desktop overview

Introduction
The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all ultrasound and
cardiology systems containing a PC backend. The Service Platform will increase service productivity
and reduce training and service costs.
Insite ExC Platform Features
Many of the services of the Common Service Desktop come from its integration with Insite ExC. The
following topics contain a brief introduction of Insite ExCs features.
Web Server/Browser
The Service platform and other Service software use the Insite ExC web server and the Internet
Explorer browser.
Connectivity
NOTE: This feature that allow the customer to contact the GE OnLine Center, are available for
Warranty and Contract customers only.
This feature provides basic connectivity between the scanner and the OnLine Center (OLC).
Configuration
This feature provides the interfaces to configure various Insite ExC parameters.
Contact GE
NOTE: This feature that allow the customer to contact the GE OnLine Center, are available for
Warranty and Contract customers only.
Allows for an on-screen, one-touch button used to contact the OnLine Center and describe problems
with their scanner in an easy and convenient way.
Refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 6, or the
appropriate LOGIQ E9 Release Notes for more information about using Insite ExC.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-4 Global Service User Interface (GSUI)

Internationalization
The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and is in English only.
There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface.
Service Login
Select the phone icon in the status bar at the bottom of the scan display screen.
This icon links the user or the Field Engineer (FE) to the service login screen.
Figure 7-21 Service Login Screen- LOGIQ E9

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-4 Global Service User Interface (GSUI) (contd)

Access / Security
The service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to
the tools that are authorized for their use.
Table 7-1 Access Authorization
USER LEVEL ACCESS AUTHORIZATION PASSWORD

Operator uls
Authorized access to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same acquisition
Administrator uls
diagnostic tests as GE Service.
External Service gogems
GE Service rotating security

Knowledge of the service level password.
password
NOTE: For a GE Field Engineer, the password changes at specific intervals.
Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is
viewable to authorized users.
Restart LOGIQ E9 after diagnostics
Always shutdown the system and reboot after a diagnostics session. A red message on the task bar will
remind you that the system needs to be restarted after a diagnostic run or disruptive mode is enabled,
before it is returned for customer use.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-5 Home
The Home page displays a summary of information from various items that are monitored.
System Information hardware versions (Boards/FRU's, Console), software versions (Base Image
and Application).
- Click Details to view the Server History of all TCP/IP pages that have occurred to the system
since the system was reghosted. See: 7-5-5-1 "Server History Log" on page 7-27.
Connected Probes probes connected, network devices connected, and peripherals connected.
Options Installed with status and expiration date.
Windows Printers.
System Health Information alerts for temperature, FRUs, application, OS, and archive.
- Check Auto Update and set the Frequency (in seconds) for the system to perform self-checks.
- Click the Update link to manually refresh the System Health Information.
Figure 7-22 Home Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-5-1 Server History Log
Figure 7-23 Server History Log
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-6 Error Logs

1.) From the Log Viewer page click the Click Here link.
Figure 7-24 Error Logs - Log Viewer
2.) Select the log you wish to view.
Figure 7-25 Log Viewer - Log Options
NOTE: Informatics is no longer present for R4.x and later.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-6 Error Logs (contd)

Features of the log viewer include:
Plot logs and pages using the Utilities menu.

Text search using the Search menu.
Color-coded log entries to identify severity levels:
- Green: A Level 3 severity indicates that the parameter is within 0% - 50% of specified
tolerance.
- Orange/brown: A Level 2 severity indicates that the parameter is 50% - 100% of specified
tolerance.
- Red: A Level 1 severity indicates that the parameter is out of specification.
Figure 7-26 Log Viewer - Sample Page
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-7 Diagnostics Window Overview

1.) Instructions Frame
- Displays either test-specific text or the default instructions.
2.) Status Frame
- Initially displays the last known status for a selected diagnostic. Once the diagnostic starts,
the frame displays the current status of all test results. Also see: Figure 7-29 "Details Link
on Diagnostic Window" on page 7-32 for more current status data reporting.
- The Status Frame also contains the user interface elements used for Diagnostic Control and
Operator Feedback.
3.) Loop Count
- This is an editable text field that only accepts numeric values of 4 digits or less. When the
switch is configured as an execute switch and pressed, the loop count field will be queried
to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic.
4.) Execute Button
- This switch has two modes - each with appropriate text:
- Execute - to start the diagnostic
- Abort - to stop a diagnostic
5.) Progress Indicator
- Displays a graphical progress indicator for the user.
6.) Short Text Message
- Displays brief messages about the tests progress during execution.
7.) Status Frame Background Color
- Initially gray, the Status Frame background color changes upon completion of a diagnostic to
indicate completion status.
- Code Status Fail = Red
- Code Status Pass = Green
- Code Status Abort = Yellow

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-7 Diagnostics Window Overview (contd)
Figure 7-27 Diagnostic Window Overview
The Service Diagnostics windows have some advanced features.
NOTE: The Loop Count field must have a value of 2 or greater to activate the Advanced features.
8.) This button toggles between Standard and Advanced mode. The window below shows the
advanced features.
9.) Select the choice for Stop On Failure for the Looping and List sections:
- Yes = the test will abort at the first failure
- No = the test will complete even if there are failures
10.)Select the choice for Stop On Abort for the Looping and List sections:
- List = the list will abort when you click the Abort button
- Loop = the looping will abort when you click the Abort button
- Diag = the diagnostic test will abort when you click the Abort button
PROPRIETARY TO GE

11.)Select the Loop Order:
- ABCABCABC = Runs the selected diagnostics as one group and runs each group for the
number of loops specified.
- AAABBBCCC = Runs the selected diagnostics one at a time for the maximum loop value then
proceeds to the next diagnostic.
Figure 7-28 Advanced Features of Service Diagnostic Windows
Some diagnostic windows that verify the tolerance of known values compile the test data and display it
in a table. You can access this data through the Details links.
12.)Click the Details icon to open the Details window.

13.)Click the See Details link to compile the Details data.
14.)The table displays the compiled detail data.
Figure 7-29 Details Link on Diagnostic Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 7-30 Details Window
Figure 7-31 Details Table
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-8 Diagnostic Utility Freezes Up/Times Out

If the diagnostic utility has timed out (freezes up, will no longer run) you have to close the Common
Service Desktop and launch it again. This may occur when issues with the scanner cause the diagnostic
utility to fail completion of an executed test.
7-5-9 Diagnostic Symptom Guide

Use this Diagnostic Symptom Table to help match a symptom with the possible diagnostic test.
For additional troubleshooting help, see: Section 7-8 "Troubleshooting Trees" on page 7-177 and
Section 7-9 "Troubleshooting Tips" on page 7-191.
Table 7-2 Diagnostic Symptom Table 1 of 2
Symptom Diagnostic Test - see:
3D Positioning Problems 7-5-12-14 "bayBIRD Tests" on page 7-91
Audio - General/PC Audio Problems 7-5-12-11 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-83
7-5-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-66

7-5-16-3 "Audio (Sound)" on page 7-129
Audio - Doppler Problems
7-5-12-11 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-83
7-5-12-9 "Analog CW" on page 7-76
BEP Problems (Troubleshooting) 7-9-9 "Back End Processor (BEP) Troubleshooting" on page 7-223
Communication Problems 7-5-12-2 "Memory" on page 7-63
7-9-7 "Connectivity" on page 7-219

Connectivity/Network Problems
7-5-14-10 "Network Adapter" on page 7-121
7-5-12-5 "Noise" on page 7-71

Image - Artifacts/Noise 7-9-2 "Noise" on page 7-195
7-5-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-66
7-5-12-8 "Analog Receive" on page 7-74

Image - Channel Failures/Noise
7-5-12-5 "Noise" on page 7-71
Image Loss 7-9-13-2 "Image or Patient Data Loss" on page 7-238
Image - Pixilated/Jagged edges 7-5-12-1 "Digital Receive" on page 7-59
Image - Scanner Refresh is Slow/Image

7-5-14-6 "Video Card" on page 7-118
Hangs
7-5-12-1 "Digital Receive" on page 7-59

7-5-14-12 "Memory" on page 7-123
Intermittent General Problems
7-5-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-66
7-5-12-2 "Memory" on page 7-63
Keyboard Not Typing Correct Characters 7-5-16-1 "Keyboard" on page 7-126
Main Power Supply Problems

7-9-4 "Main Power Supply (MPS) Troubleshooting" on page 7-202
(Troubleshooting)
Monitor not working 7-5-12-11 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-83
Printer Problems 7-8-8 "Printer Troubleshooting" on page 7-187
Scanning problems - Stops, interrupted, wont

7-5-12-12 "Tx Power Supply Test" on page 7-87
scan
Simulator Mode - Scanner launches into

Simulator Mode

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-2 Diagnostic Symptom Table (Continued) 2 of 2
Symptom Diagnostic Test - see:
7-5-14-4 "Hard Disk Drive Surface Scan" on page 7-116

7-5-14-5 "Hard Disk Drive Quick Test" on page 7-117
Slow Computing Speed
7-5-21-10 "Disk Defragmenter" on page 7-143
7-5-21-3 "Disk Usage" on page 7-138
7-5-12-13 "EPS (Extended Power Shutdown) or CB (ChargeBoard used in

Sudden Shutdown of System
BEP6) Tests" on page 7-89
7-5-12-4 "System" on page 7-69

Temperature - High/out of Spec
TGC Problems 7-5-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-66
Trackball sticks, cursor hard to control 7-5-16-2 "Mouse (Trackball)" on page 7-128
USB Ports/Devices not working 7-5-12-11 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-83
V Nav Issues 7-5-12-14 "bayBIRD Tests" on page 7-91
Voltage out of Spec 7-5-12-4 "System" on page 7-69
Footswitch problems 7-5-16-1 "Keyboard" on page 7-126
Table 7-21, Patient I/O Test Table, on page 43

ECG trace issues 7-5-19 "Patient I/O Tests" on page 7-134
Table 7-3, GFI FRU Tests Table, on page 36
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-9 Diagnostic Symptom Guide (contd)
Table 7-3 GFI FRU Tests Table

FRU
FREY Main
GRX64/ GTX GTX GTX DRX DRX DRX Back End Fan
GRLY GFI Back- Power
GRX128 (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) Processor Tray
Test plane Supply
GFI Swept
Demodulator T R R R
Test
GFI Front
End Interface T R R R
Test
GFI Analog T R R R T R R R
Test
GFI Memory T R R R
Access Test
GFE Access T R R R
Test
Probe LVDS T T R R R
Test
GFI Fan Test T R R T R
Relay LVDS T T R R R
Test
GFI GTX Test T T T T R R R
GFI Fixed T R R R
Demod Test
Key:
T: The FRU is tested with the test.
R: The FRU is required for the test but is not specifically tested.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-4 Digital Receive Tests Table

FRU
Test DRX (slot2) DRX (slot3) DRX (slot4) GFI Back End Processor FREY Backplane
FDEMOD Signal Test T T T T R R
DRX High Speed Bit Error Test T T T R R R
DRX IF FPGA Test T T T R R R
DRX ASIC Test T T T R R R
DRX Signal Path Test T T T R R R
Nathan Channel Repeater T T T R R R
Nathan Alignment Test T T T R R R
Nathan Input TVG Alignment T T T R R R
Nathan MLA Data Alignment T T T R R R
Key:
Table 7-5 Memory Tests Table

FRU
GTX GTX GTX DRX DRX DRX
GFI Back End Processor FREY Backplane
Test (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) (slot2) (slot3) (slot4)
GFI Memory Access Test T R R
DRX IF FPGA Memory Test T T T R R R
DRX Memory Test T T T R R R
GTX IF FPGA Memory Test T T T R R R
GTX Memory Test T T T R R R
Key:
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-6 System Tests Table

FRU
GRLY GRX64/ GTX GTX GTX DRX DRX DRX GFI Back End FREY Fan
Test GRX128 (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) Processor Backplane Tray
System Temperature T T T T T T T T R R T
Test
System Voltage Test T T T T T T T T R R R
FPGA Version Test T T T T T T T T T R R
Key:
Table 7-7 Noise Test Table

FRU
GRX64/
GRLY DRX (slot2) DRX (slot3) DRX (slot4) GFI Back End Processor FREY Backplane
Test GRX128
Noise Floor Test T T R R R R R R
Key:
Table 7-8 Analog Receive Tests Table

FRU
GRLY GRX64/ DRX DRX DRX GFI Back End FREY Front Plane Front Plane
Test GRX128 (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) Processor Backplane (upper) (lower)
DC Offset Calibration R R T T T R R R R R
Analog Rx Test (High gain) R T T T T R R R R R
Analog Rx Test (Medium gain) R T T T T R R R R R
Analog Rx Test (Low gain) R T T T T R R R R R
Key:

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-9 Analog CW Tests Table

FRU
Back End FREY
GRX128w/CW GFI Front Plane (upper) Front Plane (lower)
Test Processor Backplane
GRX aCW Dual Channel T T R R R R
GRX aCW Beam Forming T T R R R R
GRX aCW IQ Symmetry T T R R R R
GRX aCW Mixer Clock Sync T T R R R R
GRX aCW BP Filter/Mixer Clk T T R R R R
GRX aCW Post Mixer Gain T T R R R R
GRX aCW Doppler LPF T T R R R R
GRX aCW Dither Injection T T R R R R
GRX aCW Pedof T T R R R R
GRX ADC Digital LVDS T T R R R R
GRX Mixer Phase Setup T T R R R R
Key:
Table 7-10 Transmit Tests Table

FRU
GTX GTX GTX
GFI Back End Processor FREY Backplane Main Power Supply
Test (slot2) (slot3) (slot4)
GTX High Speed Bit Error Test T T T R R R R
Tx P6 Illegal Waveform Test T T T R R R R
Key:
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-11 Transmit and Receive Tests Table

FRU
Loop
Back
Connect FREY Front Front
GRX64/ GTX GTX GTX DRX DRX DRX Back End
or GRLY GFI Back- Plane Plane
GRX128 (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) (slot2) (slot3) (slot4) Processor
(Service plane (upper (lower)
or Eng
Test Tool)
T/R Channel T T T T T T T T T R R R R
Test
Key:
Table 7-12 I/O Board Tests Table

FRU
Test GFI Back End Processor I/O Board FREY Backplane Monitor External Monitor (Mfg tool)
I/O Board Pwr Supply Test R T
I/O Board GFI Voltage Test T R T R
GFI Temperature Test T R T R
I/O Board Self Test R T
I/O Board Loop Back Test R T
I/O Board Audio Test T R T R
Video Status (Service) R T T
Key:
Table 7-13 Tx Power Supply Tests Table

FRU
Test GFI Back End Processor FREY Backplane Main Power Supply
TxPs Control Test R T
TxPs Watchdog Test T R R T
TxPs Alarm Test R T
TxPs Keep Alive Test T T
Key:

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-14 Extended Power Shutdown Tests Table

FRU
Test Back End Processor I/O Board Extended Power Shutdown
Extended Power Shutdown R R T

Detection Test

Voltage Test

Load Test

Charge State Test
Key:
Table 7-15 bayBIRD Tests Table

FRU
Test Back End Processor Bay Bird
Run All Tests R T
Sensor 1 R T
Sensor 2 R T
Sensor 3 R T
Transmitter R T
System R T
Key:
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-16 BEP Tests Table

FRU
Test Back End Processor
Essential Test T
Hard Disk Long T
Hard Disk Short T
Memory T
Network Adapter T
System Board T
Video T
Key:
Table 7-17 BEP Interactive Tests Table

FRU
Test Back End Processor I/O Board OP Panel Monitor
AVI playback T
CD-R test T
CD-RW T
DVD-R T
DVD-RDL T
DVD-RW T
DVD+R T
DVD+RDL T
DVD+RW T
DVD_RAM T
DVD READONLY T
Keyboard* T T
Microphone T
Monitor T T T
Trackball T T
Sound T
USB Ports T T
Key:
* When testing footswitch, footswitch connection is required.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-18 Touch Panel Tests Table

FRU
Test Back End Processor OP Panel
TP Calibration R T
TP Cal Verification R T
Key:
Table 7-19 DVR Tests Table

FRU
Test Back End Processor DVR
Self Test R T
Version Information R T
Key:
Table 7-20 4D Motor Controller Tests Table

FRU
Test GFI Back End Processor Main Power Supply 4D Motor Controller GRLY RAB2-5 Probe
Presence Test R R R T R R
Version Test R R R T R R
Static 3D Test R R R T R R
4D Test R R R T R R
Key:
Table 7-21 Patient I/O Test Table

FRU
Test GFI Back End Processor Main Power Supply Patient I/O
Patient I/O T T R T
Key:
PROPRIETARY TO GE

Table 7-22 Testing the XY Control

1. XYZ Utilities Folder (XYZ Utils)
Access Common Service Desktop as

GE Service. Select Diagnostics tab.
At the end of the list of available Service

Diagnostics, you will find the XYZ Utils
(XYZ Utilities) Folder.
XYZ Utils provides two different tests:

XYZ Version Test
XYZ Fix Park Lock
2. XYZ Version Test
Run the XYZ Version Test.
The system will retrieve the Hardware and

Firmware versions as follows and will show
status PASS.
NOTE: The version displayed in the

illustration may not match the one in the
field. The pass status will indicate that the
system can read the device.
3. XYZ Fix Park Lock
Run the XYZ Fix Park Lock Test.
The system will release (Undock) the OP

Panel and reset the position of the park
lock. You will hear the motor moving,
releasing the console. The status should
show Passed.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-10 OP Panel Utilities - Op Panel Interface

The Operator Panel functionality can be tested using a program (GE Test App) available through the
Service Platform.
R4 or earlier
R5 and later, OP Panel Test only available on Windows desktop.
Although this diagnostic may be executed when the application software is running, its performance is
greatly reduced and the controls will respond very slowly. It is recommended that this test be run from
Windows before the application software has started. To access this test from Windows, see the
instructions below.
7-5-10-1 Accessing the Service Platform from Windows

1.) Insert the Service Key into a USB port.
2.) Press the Standby (ON/OFF) button and select Exit.
NOTE: If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10.
With the service dongle attached, a screen will be displayed to allow Maintenance Access.
3.) In the Maintenance Access screen, leave the Username blank, enter the current Password and
select OK.
4.) From the Start Application screen select Maintenance.
5.) In the Maintenance window select Exit to Windows to access the Windows Desktop.
6.) Click on the GETestApp for the operator panel test.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-10-2 Launching the Op Panel Test

If the LOGIQ E9 is running R5 or later, see:
Figure 7-35 "OP Panel Test Start Up - R5 and later" on page 7-49.
Figure 7-32 Select System Type - R4 or earlier
7.) In R4 or earlier, on the Startup tab, select the Attach button to connect the Op Panel to the test
interface. The other buttons on the Startup tab will now be active. See: Figure 7-33 and Figure 7-
34 "Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab - Detach and Other Buttons Active - R4 and earlier" on
page 7-48.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-10-2 Launching the Op Panel Test (contd)
Figure 7-33 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab - Attach Button Active - R4 and earlier
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 7-34 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab - Detach and Other Buttons Active - R4 and earlier
8.) Select the tabs to test the various features of the Op Panel.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 7-35 OP Panel Test Start Up - R5 and later
For R5 and later, the upper right corner indicates the type of Op Panel is detected (connected).
5207000 series (used in consoles 5205000-7 and earlier).

Upper/Lower 5209000 / 5208000 series (used in consoles 5205000-8 and later) R5 or later.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-10-3 Trackball Tab

Test the trackball functionality by moving the pointer over the blue box. Verify that the X and Y position
are updated as the pointer is moved.
Test the Left and Right select buttons by pressing each button on the op panel. Verify that the
corresponding button is highlighted when each button is pressed.
See: Figure 7-36 or Figure 7-37.
Figure 7-36 Trackball Tab - R4 and earlier
Figure 7-37 Trackball Tab - R5 and later

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-10-4 Keyboard Tab

Test the keyboard functionality by typing on the keyboard. Verify that the corresponding key is
highlighted when each key is pressed. See: Figure 7-38 or Figure 7-39.
NOTE: The keyboard test does not give an indication when the Print Screen button is pressed.
Figure 7-38 Keyboard Tab - R4 and earlier
Figure 7-39 Keyboard Tab - R5 and later
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-10-5 Slidepots Tab

Test the slidepot (TGC) functionality by moving each slidepot through its range. Verify that the visual
and numeric position of the slide pot are updated as the slide pot is moved.
Test the LED for each slide pot by pressing on the LED buttons. See: Figure 7-40 or Figure 7-41.
Visually verify the LED functionality on the upper operator panel.
Figure 7-40 Slidepots Tab - R4 and earlier
Figure 7-41 Slidepots Tab - R5 and later

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-10-6 Encoders Tab

Test the encoder functionality by rotating each encoder knob. Verify that the position is updated as the
encoder is moved.
Test the encoder button selection function by pressing each knob on the op panel. Verify that the
corresponding knob is highlighted when each knob is pressed. See: Figure 7-42 or Figure 7-43.
Figure 7-42 Encoders Tab - R4 and earlier
Figure 7-43 Encoders Tab - R5 and later
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-10-7 Pushbuttons Tab

Test the pushbutton functionality by pressing each button on the operator panel. Verify that the
corresponding pushbutton is highlighted when each button is pressed. See: Figure 7-44 or Figure 7-45.
Figure 7-44 Pushbuttons Tab - R4 and earlier
Figure 7-45 Pushbuttons Tab - R5 and later

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-10-8 LEDs Tab

Test the LED functionality by selecting each button or knob on the GE Test App. Verify that the
corresponding LED is illuminated when each button or knob is selected. See: Figure 7-46 or
Figure 7-47.
Figure 7-46 LEDs Tab - R4 and earlier
Figure 7-47 LEDs Tab - R5 and later
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-10-9 Touch Screen Tab

Test the Touch Screen functionality by pressing on the Touch Screen of the upper operator panel. Verify
that the press is indicated in the black window by a highlighted circle. See: Figure 7-48 or Figure 7-49.
Figure 7-48 Touch Screen Tab - R4 and earlier
Figure 7-49 Touch Screen Tab - R5 and later
7-5-10-10 Ending the Program

1.) When you have finished testing the Op Panel, close the GE Test App.
2.) Shutdown the system and reboot.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-11 Diagnostics - Common Diagnostics
7-5-11-1 Disruptive Mode

The customer enables this feature by choosing Disruptive Mode and confirming Yes, before a GE
Service FE can access the customers ultrasound scanner remotely. Disruptive Mode can be
requested remotely by the service technician or OLC, or it can be selected by the customer directly on
the scanner or workstation.
See: Section 7-6 "Troubleshooting using InSite ExC" on page 7-165 for details.
Figure 7-50 Disruptive Mode Utility Window
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-11-2 System Shutdown

System Shutdown is intended for use from a remote computer. The menu gives you the ability to either
Restart or Shutdown the system.
NOTE: Retain Disruptive Mode:
Retain Disruptive Mode MUST be checked if you are working from a remote computer.
Retain Disruptive Mode should be unchecked if you are working locally on the scanner.
Figure 7-51 System Shutdown Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12 Diagnostics for Service Diagnostics

Front End (Card Rack) diagnostics listed in this section are applicable for GFI configurations. For MRX
configuration, see: 7-9-19 "LOGIQ E9 Transmit and Receive Signal Path Diagnostics" on page 7-275.
Also for diagnostics for GFI Configurations running R3.x.x and later, and for MRX Configurations, see:
7-5-12-15 "Diagnostics Window Overview - R3.x.x and later" on page 7-95.
7-5-12-1 Digital Receive

See: 7-5-7 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-30 for a description of the looping and list
features.
Symptoms:
Intermittent general problems (communication between DRX and GFI)

Image artifacts - pixilated/jagged edges
1.) Select the Digital Receive checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only
the selected tests.
2.) Enter the desired Loop Count (numeric value of 4 digits or less).
3.) Click Execute to run the test(s).
Figure 7-52 Digital Receive Window
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-1 Digital Receive (contd)

Tests the signal path from the DRX to the GFI to the BEP. Also tests for latency signals of the DRX or
Nathan to the GFI.
Name: FDEMOD Signal Test

Description: Signal path test starting from the Fixed Demod on the GFI
Run Time: 00:03
If this test failed:
1.) Replace the PCIe cable.
2.) If GFI test above fails, replace the GFI board.
3.) Replace the BEP.
NOTE: The DRX High Speed Bit Error Rate Diagnostic Test Fails intermittently (not reliable) when run
on a system with MLA4 DRX3.1 (5301040-4) with production software revision R1.0.6 ONLY.
The intermittent errors encountered by the diagnostic may not be due to real failure; therefore the DRX
High Speed Bit Error Rate Diagnostic test results are not reliable when under this configuration.
This problem does not affect in any way the operation or performance of the LOGIQ E9, it is only related
to the diagnostic result.
DO NOT REPLACE BOARDS DUE TO THIS FAILURE.
The Diagnostic DRX Signal Path tests the same functionality without being affected by the issue and
will be a reliable test to troubleshoot any issue with the DRX board since it checks bit by bit all vector
data send to the FE DRX back at the backend PC.
Name: DRX High Speed Bit Error

Description: High Speed Bit Error Test on the DRX
Run Time: 00:03
1.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed DRX boards.
3.) Interface to GFI may be cause of the failure. See: 7-5-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-66.
Name: DRX IF FPGA Test

Description: Signal path test starting from IF FPGA on DRX boards
Run Time: 00:03
Name: DRX ASIC Test

Description: Digital Signal path tests sourced from output of Nathan ASIC
Run Time: 00:03

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Name: DRX Signal Path Test (this test provides the most coverage on the DRX)
Description: Digital signal path sourced from input to Nathan. Does not testADC. Sends simulated data
across the signal path.
Run Time: 00:03
Name: Nathan Channel Repeater Test
Description: Tests the functionality of the Nathan channel repeater. Looks for latency signal
communication issues analog signal path.
Run Time: 00:05
Name: Nathan Alignment Test
Description: Output TVG of Nathan with system configured for max number of MLAs supported by
system. Verifies the alignment (16 identical samples in a row) of IF to GFI.
Run Time: 00:05
Name: Nathan Input TVG Alignment Test
Description: Input TVG of Nathan with system configured for max number of MLAs supported by
system. (Internal and external test modes of Nathan.)
Run Time: 00:05
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Name: Nathan MLA Data Alignment Test
Description: Output TVG of Nathan with system configured for max number of MLAs supported by
system. Each MLA gain is set differently to detect MLA ordering problems. Verifies the alignment (16
identical samples in a row) of IF to GFI.
Run Time: 00:05

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-2 Memory
features.
Symptoms:
Intermittent Problems
Communication Problems
1.) Select the Memory checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only the
selected tests.
Figure 7-53 Memory Window
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-2 Memory (contd)
Assesses the general state of the system. Tests the integrity of memory and communication of the
described boards. Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers. The utility fills the memory with
data, retrieves the data, and compares it to the original data.
Name: GFI Memory Access Test
Description: Tests the internal and external RAM of the GFI Board.
NOTE: There may be multiple board dependencies causing this test to fail. Also, see the FDEMOD
Signal Test, 7-5-12-1 "Digital Receive" on page 7-59.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the GFI board.
Name: DRX IF FPGA Memory Test
Description: Tests memory of Interface FPGAs on the DRX boards
NOTE: Also run the DRX Memory Test (next test below) for a full range of testing capacity.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the failed DRX board.
Name: DRX Memory Test
Description: Tests the memory of the Nathan ASICs on the DRX Boards.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the failed DRX board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-2 Memory (contd)
Name: GTX IF FPGA Memory Test
Description: Tests memory of Interface FPGAs on the GTX boards
NOTE: Also run the GTX Memory Test (next test below) for a full range of testing capacity.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the failed GTX board.
Name: GTX Memory Test
Description: Tests memory of the David ASICs on the GTX Board
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the failed GTX board.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-3 GFI
features.
Symptoms:
TGC Problems
Doppler Audio Problems
Image Artifacts
Intermittent Instability
1.) Select the GFI checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only the selected
tests.
Figure 7-54 GFI Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-3 GFI (contd)
Name: GFI Swept Demodulator Test
Description: Performs a signal path test of the swept demodulator FPGA on the GFI
Run Time: 00:05
Name: GFI Swept Demodulator Engineering Test (Not used in the field)
Name: GFI Front End Interface Test
Description: Test that the GFI can access Front End cards
Run Time: 00:06

2.) If the diagnostic identifies problems with other boards, run tests on those boards also.
3.) Replace any other failed boards as identified by the diagnostics for those boards.
Name: GFI Analog Test
Description: Tests the analog circuitry of the GFI Board.
NOTE: Used for test purposes only. There may not be any symptoms displayed by the system.
Run Time: 00:03
1.) Also run the Analog RX Tests (high, medium, low gain) for a complete test of the GFI gain.
See: 7-5-12-8 "Analog Receive" on page 7-74.
Name: GFI Memory Access Test
Description: Tests the internal and external RAM of the GFI Board. (Same as the GFI Memory Test)
Run Time: 00:01
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-3 GFI (contd)
Name: GFE Access Test
Description: Reads the version of the GFE FPGA
Run Time: 00:01
Name: Relay LVDS Test
Description: Tests the LVDS connection between the GFI interface and the GRLY
Run Time: 00:02
1.) Swap GFI boards and/or GRLY board to determine which board has failed.
2.) Replace the failed board.
Name: GFI Fan Test
Description: Test Front End card rack fan control and fan speed measurements
Run Time: 00:40
1.) Check fan drawer in Front End Card Rack. Verify connection with backplane. Replace defective fan.
2.) Replace GFI board.
Name: GFI GTX Test
Description: Test communication with the GTX Board. (Same as the GFI Memory Test)
Run Time: 00:03
1.) Based on failure information, replace the failed GTX or swap the GTX boards to isolated failure.
Name: GFI Fixed Demod Test
Description: GFI Fixed Demodulator signal path test. (Similar to the FDEMOD test with a slight variation
on how the test is run.)
Run Time: 00:03

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-4 System
features.
Symptoms:
High temperature reports on the Home page.

Temperature specifications are out of tolerance.
Voltage specifications are out of tolerance.
1.) Select the System checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only the
selected tests.
Figure 7-55 System Window
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-4 System (contd)
NOTE: You can also view temperature logs in the System Health Information section of the Home
page. These logs may help identify a trend or subsystem where temperature and voltage have
been high. low. or erratic. See: 7-5-5 "Home" on page 7-26 for temperature logs/reports.
Name: System Temperature Test
Description: Compares all system temperatures to their specified values
Run Time: 00:01
If temperature specifications are out of tolerance:
1.) The system should not be in a small enclosed space with other equipment that generates a lot of
heat. Move the system away from walls and other equipment.
2.) Clean or replace any dirty fan filters.
3.) Replace the fan tray beneath the card rack if the tachometer readings are slow.
4.) Check the fan on the BEP and replace the fan if it is not working.
5.) Replace the GFI board if none of the above fixes the temperature problems.
Name: System Voltage Test
Description: Compares all system voltages to their specified values
Run Time: 00:01
If any system is out of tolerance:
1.) Check the voltage test points on the system boards.

2.) Replace the system boards that are out of tolerance.
3.) Check the power supply.
4.) Replace the power supply if it is out of tolerance.
Name: FPGA Versions
Description: Displays the version for all of the FPGAs
Run Time: 00:01
1.) If the test fails to read every FPGA version, check the connection between the Host and the GFI
board. Replace the GFI board.
2.) If the test fails to read the DRX IF FPGA version, check the DRX boards.
3.) If the test fails to read the GTX IF FPGA version, check the GTX boards.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-5 Noise
features.
Symptoms:
Image artifacts
Image oise
n
Poor image quality
Missing image channels
1.) Select the Noise checkbox or the individual subtest to run the test.
3.) Click Execute to run the test.
Figure 7-56 Noise Window
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-5 Noise (contd)
Name: Noise Floor Test
Description: Measures the noise floor of the System. The entire system is required for this diagnostic.
The noise floor is calculated from IQ data received without a signal source.
Run Time: 00:02
1.) See: 7-9-2 "Noise" on page 7-195 for information on minimizing environmental noise. If the problem
continues:
2.) Try a new probe (channels in the probe may be faulty). If the problem continues:
3.) Run the tests for 7-5-12-8 "Analog Receive" on page 7-74.
7-5-12-6 Transmit
Name: GTX High Speed Bit Error Test
Description: High Speed Bit Error Test on the GTX
Run Time: 00:03
1.) Swap GTX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed GTX boards.
3.) Interface to GFI may be the cause of the failure. See: 7-5-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-66.
Name: Tx P6 Illegal Waveform Test
Description: Transmits an illegal waveform and checks the error registers.
Run Time: 03:21
1.) Swap GTX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Replace any failed GTX boards.
3.) Interface to GFI may be the cause of the failure. See: 7-5-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-66.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-7 Transmit/Receive
Name: T/R Channel Test
Description: Transmit and Receive Channel Test. Transmits on one at a time and received on one
channel at a time using an open probe connector.
Run Time: 00:03
1.) Swap front-plane boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved.
2.) Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved. Replace any
failed DRX board.
3.) Run Analog Receive Tests from section 7-5-12-8 "Analog Receive" on page 7-74.
4.) Replace GRX boards.
5.) Replace GRLY.
NOTE: Tx Rx Chain Test Tx1

Tx Rx Chain Test Tx2
These tests will be removed from the Service Diagnostics folder. They will remain in the
Engineering Diagnostics folder.
NOTE: GRLY folder

GRLY Receive Test conn 1
These tests will be removed from the Service Diagnostics folder. They will remain in the
Engineering Diagnostics folder.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-8 Analog Receive

features.
Symptoms:
Image artifacts - channel failure/noise

1.) Select the Analog Receive checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only
the selected tests.
Figure 7-57 Analog Receive Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-8 Analog Receive (contd)

Tests the signal path from the GFI to the backplane (GTX) to the GRX.
Name: DC Offset Calibration Utility
NOTE: The DC Offset Calibration Utility diagnostic MUST be run when the DRX boards are replaced
or moved. See: Section 6-6 "DC Offset Calibration" on page 6-34.
Description: Measures and corrects for the DC offset of the ADCs on the DRX.
Run Time: 00:02
Run this utility to calibrate the correct DC offset after replacing or moving DRX boards. A popup
message alerts the user to run this utility after DRX boards have been replaced or moved.
Name: Analog RX Test (High Gain)
Description: Signal path test of the GRX boards with a TGC set to high (peak) gain. Failures could be
channel in DRX boards, Nathan, GRX to DRX communication.
Run Time: 00:02
NOTE: A block of 8 dead channels indicates a failed DRX board.
2.) Replace any failed boards.

3.) Replace GRX boards (these cannot be swapped as one is 64 channel and one is 128 channel).
Name: Analog RX Test (Medium Gain)
Description: Signal path test of the GRX boards with a TGC set to medium gain.
Run Time: 00:02

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-8 Analog Receive (contd)
Name: Analog RX Test (Low Gain)
Description: Signal path test of the GRX boards with a TGC set to low gain.
Run Time: 00:02

7-5-12-9 Analog CW
NOTE: Disconnect all probes before running diagnostics. Only connect a probe or test connector if
instructed for a specific test.
Figure 7-58 Analog CW and Patient I/O Service Diagnostics Options

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-10 Analog CW
Analog Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Tests.
Under Service Diagnostics / Analog CW.
INPUT > a sine wave generated on the GFI test vector generator and injected on the GRX board(-s).
OUTPUT > The signal passes through the analog Doppler circuitry of the GRX board and into the GFI.
Figure 7-59 Analog Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Tests
The test input signal is a sine wave generated on the GFI test vector generator (TVG) and injected on
the GRX board (-s). The setup of the analog Doppler is done through a 512-bit setup word. The output
signal from the GRX will depend on the Doppler setup. For example the frequency will be determined
by the frequency of the signal in and the Mixer clock setup.
The signal passes through the analog Doppler circuitry of the GRX board and into the GFI. The GFE is
setup to receive CW data and the GFI processing in bypass mode.
The level is adjusted with the TSIG_GAIN and IQ_GAIN parameters to avoid saturation through the
GRX Doppler circuit.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-10 Analog CW (contd)

The 3-term Blackman-Harris window function is used for the analog CW tests. The input frequency is
2.521 MHz for a number of the tests and with the Mixer clock at 2.5 MHz; a Doppler frequency at 21 kHz
should result. To be able to find such low frequencies a vector is acquired that enables the Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT) of 16K samples (I-data) or 8K (I- & Q-data). This will give bin spacing of approximately
3 kHz (8K samples) and 1.5 kHz (16K samples).
The following tests will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is recommended to disconnect
all probes before running diagnostics. Only connect a probe or test connector if instructed for a specific
test.
Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Dual Channel
For each channel pair, a signal is set up with f0=2.521 MHz, the Band Pass (BP) filter at 3.1 MHz and
a mixer frequency of 2.5 MHz. The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled. The Doppler channel
pairs are measured for the parameters: fdop, spectrum peak, RMS, SNR and THD. This is calculated
for I & Q data separately.
Disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.
Run Time: 00:05
If this test fails:
1.) Verify the following tests pass:

- GFI ests
T
- Analog Receive Tests
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Dual Channel test fails:
2.) Replace the CW GRX board.
Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Beam Forming
A sum of sine waves with the same frequency, but different phase, gives a sine wave output where the
amplitude is a function of the different phase settings.
The test uses small overlapping groups (4 channels) where the channel pairs have different phase
settings. Any amplitude deviation detected in this test, should indicate that there is something wrong
with phase setup. For each subtest, a signal is set up with f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz and
a mixer frequency of 2.5 MHz. The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled. The parameters tested
are: fdop, spectrum peak, RMS and SNR on the I-data.
Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes connected to the scanner, but it is
recommended to disconnect all probes before running diagnostics.
Run Time: 00:05

- GFI ests
T
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Beam Forming test fails:

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW IQ Symmetry
For each subtest, a signal is setup with f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz and a mixer frequency
of 2.5 MHz. The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled. The number of sub-test, with identical
setup, is by default, eight. For the I/Q- symmetry test, the DC-component and RMS value for both the I-
and Q-part of the data set are measured. The symmetry quality measurement for this test is calculated
from the RMS values for each sub-test.
Run time: 00:05

- GFI ests
T
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW IQ Symmetry test fails:
Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Mixer Clock Sync
For the Mixer Clock Sync test, a signal is set up with f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz and a mixer
frequency of 2.5 MHz. The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled. The test enables one channel
pair, plus each of the other channel pairs per sub test, one at the time. The parameters to test for are
fdop, spectrum peak, RMS and SNR on the I-data.
Run Time: 00:05

- GFI ests
T
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Mixer Clock Sync test fails:
Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW BP Filter / Mixer Clk
In the Band Pass Filter / Mixer Clock Test, for each channel pair, a signal is set up with combinations of
input signal frequency, Band Pass (BP) filters and mixer frequencies. The dither and Pedof probe inputs
are disabled. The Doppler channel pairs are measured for the parameters: fdop, spectrum peak, RMS
on I-data.
Run Time: 00:08

- GFI ests
T
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW BP Filter / Mixer Clk test fails:
PROPRIETARY TO GE

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Post Mixer Gain
For each subtest, a signal is set up with f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz and a mixer frequency
of 2.5 MHz. The dither and Pedof inputs are disabled. The TSIG_GAIN parameter is set to give -26.1
dB gain. The test is run by setting up the four different IQ_GAIN parameter settings that corresponds to
the 4 post mixer gain setting of 0 dB, -4 dB, -8 dB and -12 dB. The RMS and RMS attenuation between
the four mixers gain settings on both I- and Q-data are tested.
Run Time: 00:05

- GFI ests
T
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Post Mixer Gain test fails:
Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Doppler LPF
For the Low Pass Filter test, Doppler test frequencies, both in the filter pass band and the stop band are
set up. The mixer clock frequency is set to 2.5 MHz and the band pass filter to 3.1 MHz. The dither and
Pedof inputs are disabled. The LP-filter 3 dB frequency will typically be at about 40 kHz. The following
parameters are tested: fdop, spectrum peak and RMS both in the I- and Q-data.
Run Time: 00:05

- GFI ests
T
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Doppler LPF test fails:

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Dither Injection
A signal is injected in the dither input and result in the received I/Q data is checked. The test signal
generator is used for signal injection where the input signal is f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz
and a mixer frequency of 2.5 MHz. The dither input is enabled for this test, while the Pedof inputs are
disabled. The DITHER_GAIN parameter values are set to 0, 1, 2 and 3. The parameter values
corresponds to Dither gain of 0 dB, -7 dB, -19 dB and -30 dB respectively. The RMS and the RMS
attenuation between the different gain settings in both I- and Q-data are tested.
Run Time: 00:05

- GFI ests
T
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Dither Injection test fails:
Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX aCW Pedof
In the test, the two center frequencies of 2 MHz and 6 MHz are verified. These frequencies are set by
switching the Pedof band pass filter. The GFI test signal generator is used to input sine waves. The
Pedof test signal input is enabled. The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled. Sub tests using
combinations of input signal frequency, Pedof band pass filter settings, mixer clock frequency, test
signal gain, and IQ gains are run.
Parameters tested: fdop, spectrum peak, RMS, SNR and THD on both I- & Q-data. With this test the
Pedof (SD probe) CW path on the GRX board is tested.
The aCW Pedof Test will only be run on the CW64 board.
Run Time: 00:05

- GFI ests
T
If these tests pass, and the GRX aCW Pedof test fails:
PROPRIETARY TO GE

Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX ADC Digital LVDS
For the Analog-to-Digital Converter Digital Low-Voltage Differential Signaling test, the digital link from
the Doppler ADC and to the GFI board is verified. To verify signal integrity, the ADC is set up to
continuously transmit a predefined bit-pattern. Both I- and Q-data are acquired and each sample value
is tested. Port 0 on the PCA9554 I2C register on the GRX board is used to turn the ADC test pattern on/
off. The test signal generator on GFI is disabled for this test.
Run Time: 00:05

- GFI ests
T
If these tests pass, and the GRX ADC Digital LVDS test fails:
Name: Service Diagnostics / Analog CW / GRX Mixer Phase Setup
This test utilizes a PCA9554 I2C register on the GRX board. All phase bits are set to one in the analog
Doppler setup data, before reading back from the I2C register and test bits 6 and 7 in the returned byte.
Next, all zeroes are sent to the analog Doppler, read back again and bits 6 and 7 appear in the returned
byte. The test passes if the bits ofinterest in the read back byte match the phase values that were setup.
Bit 6 and 7 are the last bits in the two shift register chains and if the correct value were read, the chains
must be intact. The test signal generator on GFI is disabled for this test.
Run Time: 00:05

- GFI ests
T
If these tests pass, and the GRX Mixer Phase Setup test fails:

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-11 I/O Board Tests

features.
Symptoms:
Intermittent Problems
Popup messages warning of system voltage problems - I/O Board Pwr Supply Test
System comes up in simulator mode - run I/O Board GFI Voltage Test
Unable to run diagnostics
No doppler audio/system audio/general audio sounds - run I/O Board Audio Test
No display on the monitor
1.) Select the I/O Board Tests checkbox to run all the subtests, or select the individual subtests to run
only the selected tests.
Figure 7-60 I/O Board Tests Window
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-11 I/O Board Tests (contd)
Name: I/O Board Pwr Supply Test
Description: Compares all local I/O Board voltages to their specified values.
NOTE: This is part of the self-monitoring process reported in the System Health Information section of
the Home page. See: 7-5-5 "Home" on page 7-26.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Replace the I/O Board.
Name: I/O Board GFI Voltage Test
Description: Compares all voltages on the GFI to their specified values. The GFI may not be working,
therefore the BEP cannot communicate with the Front End.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Verify that the BEP to Backplane cable is properly connected and/or swap the cable with a known
good cable. If the problem continues:
2.) Run the GFI tests to determine if the GFI is faulty. See: 7-5-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-66.
Name: I/O Board GFI Temperature Test
Description: Reads temperature sensors on the GFI board and compares the values against specified
limits.
Run Time: 0:05
2.) Check the Front End card rack cooling fans.
3.) Run the GFI Tests to determine if the GFI is faulty. See: 7-5-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-66.
Name: I/O Board Self Test
Description: The processor on the I/O Board performs a check of its basic functions.
Run Time: 00:01

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Name: I/O Board Loop Back Test
Description: Basic test of the USB communications with the I/O Board
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Verify that the USB cable/connections are properly connected. If the problem continues:
2.) Swap the USB cable/device with a known working cable/device. If the problem continues:
Name: I/O Board Audio Test
Description: Test all the audio channels on the I/O board.
Run Time: 00:03
2.) Run the GFI tests on 7-5-12-3 "GFI" on page 7-66 to verify that the GFI is working correctly. If the
GFI board is OK and the problem continues:
PROPRIETARY TO GE
NOTE: The following Video tests can be used when the Touch Panel and the keys on the control panel
are on/illuminated, but the monitor does not come on.
Name: Video Status (Manufacturing)
Description: Tests if the I/O can detect a primary, secondary monitor and mother board video signal.
Run Time: 00:01
2.) Swap monitors with a known working monitor. If the problem continues:
3.) Replace the monitor.
Name: Video Status (Service)
Description: Tests if the I/O can detect the primary monitor and the mother board video signal.
Run Time: 00:01
2.) Swap monitors with a known working monitor. If the problem continues:
3.) Replace the monitor.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-12 Tx Power Supply Test

features.
Symptoms:
System will not scan

Interrupted scanning
Scan unexpectedly stops
1.) Select the Tx Power Supply Test checkbox to run all the subtests, or select the individual subtests
to run only the selected tests.
Figure 7-61 Tx Power Supply Tests Window
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-12 Tx Power Supply Test (contd)
Name: TxPs Control Test
Description: Transmit Power Supply Control Test (Verifies the voltage points are within specifications)
Run Time: 00:10
1.) Replace the power supply
Name: TxPs Watchdog Test
Description: Transmit Power Supply GFI Watchdog Test (Tests that the power supply watchdog is
working)
Run Time: 00:07
Name: TxPs Alarm Test
Description: Transmit Power Supply Alarm Test (Tests the fault detection of power supply)
Run Time: 00:04
Name: TxPs Keep Alive Test
Description: Transmit Power Supply Keep Alive Test (Tests the communication between BEP and
power supply and fault detection)
Run Time: 00:07

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-13 EPS (Extended Power Shutdown) or CB (ChargeBoard used in BEP6) Tests
features.
Symptoms:
System shuts down immediately after power loss/interruption
1.) Select the Extended Power Shutdown Tests checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual
subtests to run only the selected tests.
Figure 7-62 EPS or CB Tests Window
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-13 EPS (Extended Power Shutdown) or CB (ChargeBoard used in BEP6) Tests (contd)
Name: Extended Power Shutdown Detection Test
Description: Extended Power Shutdown Detection Test (Verifies the BEP can communicate with the
Extended Power Shutdown through the I/O board)
Run Time: 00:03
1.) Run the I/O board tests: see: 7-5-12-11 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-83.
2.) Replace the I/O board if there are any problems. If the I/O board tests are OK:
3.) Replace the Extended Power Shutdown.
Name: Extended Power Shutdown Voltage Test
Description: Extended Power Shutdown Voltage Test (Tests the specified voltages of the Extended
Power Shutdown)
Run Time: 00:05
1.) Run the I/O board tests: see: 7-5-12-11 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-83.
2.) Replace the I/O board if there are any problems. If the I/O board tests are OK:
3.) Replace the Extended Power Shutdown.
Name: Extended Power Shutdown Load Test
NOTE: Run this test with only one (1) loop. Do not run multiple loops on this test. Each loop will cause
the battery to discharge power, requiring a longer time to recharge after the test.
Description: Extended Power Shutdown Load Test (tests the battery load capacity)
Run Time: 00:30
1.) Replace the Extended Power Shutdown battery
Name: Extended Power Shutdown Charge State Test
Description: Reads the charge state of the Extended Power Shutdown unit and displays it.
Run Time: 00:06
1.) Run the I/O board tests. See: 7-5-12-11 "I/O Board Tests" on page 7-83.
2.) Replace the I/O Board if there any problems. If the I/O Board tests are OK:
3.) Replace the Extended Power Shutdown board and the battery pack.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-14 bayBIRD Tests

features.
Symptoms:
3D triangulation position is off/wrong

V Nav Issues/poor tracking
NOTE: RF/EMI interference may also cause conditions of these symptoms. See: 2-2-4 "EMI limitations"
on page 2-5.
1.) Select the bayBIRD Tests checkbox to run all the tests, or select the individual subtests to run only
the selected tests.
Figure 7-63 bayBIRD Tests Window
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-14 bayBIRD Tests (contd)
Sensor 4 added for DriveBay2+ 3D Tracking System, introduced in R4.

Figure 7-64 Miscellaneous Tests - bayBIRD (V Nav change)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Name: Run All Tests
Description: Runs all of the tests that are in the box
Run Time: 00:24
1.) Run subsequent tests as identified in the failed test results
Name: Sensor 1
Description: Runs the tests for Sensor 1
Run Time: 00:21
1.) Move the sensor (trandsucer) to a different port. If the transducer fails, replace the transducer.
2.) If the problem still persists, replace the bayBIRD.
Name: Sensor 2
Run Time: 00:21
1.) Move the sensor (transducer) to a different port. If the transducer fails, replace the transducer.
Name: Sensor 3
Run Time: 00:21
Name: Sensor 4 (R4 and bayBird2+)
Run Time: 00:21
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Name: Transmitter
Description: Runs the tests for Transmitter
Run Time: 00:21
Name: System
Description: Runs the tests for System
Run Time: 00:25

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-15 Diagnostics Window Overview - R3.x.x and later

Diagnostics for GFI Configurations running R3.x.x and later, and for MRX Configurations.
7-5-12-16 Diagnostics Menus on R3.x.x and later

In R 3.x.x and later, Service Diagnostics have been grouped in 4 major functional areas:
Figure 7-65 Diagnostics Menu - MRX
Front End Tests - All Diagnostics related to Card Rack Boards.

Back End Tests - All Diagnostics related to Back End Processor.
PowerTests - All Diagnostics related to Transmit Power Supply and EPS.
Miscellaneous Tests - All Diagnostics related to other devices and options
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-17 Determine Hardware Platform

When running this diagnostic, the system will return a result with the type of Card Rack configuration:
GFI as System Main Board = Card Rack Configuration based on GFI2.

MRX as System Main Board = Card Rack Configuration based on MRX.
Figure 7-66 Determine Hardware Platform
For GFI, run the test described in section 7-5-12 "Diagnostics for Service Diagnostics" on page 7-59.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-18 System Main Board for MRX

For MRX Hardware platforms, run these tests.
Figure 7-67 System Main Board Tests for MRX
NOTE: Same tests you find in R2.0.4 and later, but different naming conventions on some of the tests.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-19 Front End Interface

This group of Diagnostics, test the MRX Board.
Figure 7-68 Front End Interface
NOTE: Same type of tests as the tests available for GFI.
Table 7-23 Front End Interface

Line Name: Description: Run Time: If this test failed:
Performs a signal path test of
1 MRX Swept 00:05
the swept demodulator FPGA Replace the MRX board.
Demodulator Test
on the MRX.
1.) Replace the MRX Board.
2.) If the diagnostic identifies problems with other
2 MRX Front End Test that the MRX can access 00:06 boards, run tests on those boards also.
Interface Test Front End cards.
3.) Replace any other failed boards as identified by
the diagnostics for those boards.
1.) Also run the Analog RX Tests (high, medium, low
3 Tests the analog circuitry of 00:03
MRX Analog Test gain) for a complete test of the MRX gain.
the MRX Board.
Tests the internal and external
MRX Memory RAM of the MRX Board.
4 00:01 Replace the MRX Board.
Access Test (Same as the Memory Test
folder).
5 Reads the version of the GFE 00:01
GFE Access Test Replace the MRX Board.
block in the MVP FPGA.
Tests the LVDS connection
6 00:02 1.) Replace the GRLY Board.
Relay LVDS Test between the MRX interface
and the GRLY.
1.) Check fan tray in Front End Card Rack. Verify
Test Front End card rack fan connection with backplane. Replace fan tray if any
7 Fan Test control and fan speed 00:04 fan is defective.
measurements. 2.) Replace PD board.
1.) Based on failure information, replace the failed
8 Test communication with the 00:03
MRX GTX Test GTX or swap the GTX Boards to isolate failure.
GTX Board.
MRX Fixed Demod MRX Fixed Demodulator
Test signal path test.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-19 Front End Interface (contd)
Table 7-24 Front End Interface - Board Tested/Required Matrix for Diagnostics
FRU - T = Tested / R = Required

"Front
Plane
Upper FREY "Main
"GTX "GTX "GTX Back End and Back "Fan Power
Line GRLY MRX (slot2) (slot3)" (slot4)" PD Processor Lower" Plane Tray" Supply"
1 T R R R R
2 T R R R R
3 T R R R R
4 T R R R R
5 T R R R R
6 T T R R R R
7 T R R R T R
8 T T T T R R R R
9 T R R R R
PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-20 Digital Receive

This group of Diagnostics, test the MRX Board.
Figure 7-69 Digital Receive
NOTE: Same type of tests as the tests available for DRX.
Table 7-25 Digital Receive - Board Tested/Required Matrix for Diagnostics

1.) Replace the PCIe cable (BEP5 to MRX
FDEMOD Signal Signal path test starting from Backplane)
1 00:03
Test the Fixed Demod on the MRX 2.) If MRX test above fails, replace the MRX Board.
2 Digital RX High Speed Bit Error Test on 00:03 Replace the MRX Board.
Beamformer Test the MRX
Digital signal path sourced
Digital Rx Signal from input to RxBF. Does not
Path Test test ADC. Sends simulated
data across the signal path.
Tests the functionality of the
Digital Rx RxBF channel repeater. Looks
4 Beamformer for latency signal 00:05 Replace the MRX Board.
Repeater Test communication issues along
the signal path.
Output TVG of RxBF with
system configured for max
Digital Rx
5 number of MLAs supported by 00:05
Beamformer Replace the MRX Board.
the system. Verifies the
Alignment Test
alignment (4 identical samples
in a row) of IF to MRX.
Input TVG of RxBF with
6 RxBF Input TVG 00:05
number of MLAs supported by Replace the MRX Board.
Alignment Test
the system. (Internal and
external test modes of RxBF.)
Output TVG of RxBF with
number of MLAs supported by
system. Each MLA gain is set
7 RxBF MLA Data 00:05
differently to detect MLA Replace the MRX Board.
Alignment Test
ordering problems. Verifies
the alignment (4 identical
samples in a row) of IF to
MRX.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-26 Digital Receive - Board Tested/Required Matrix for Diagnostics

"Front
Plane
Upper FREY "Main
1 T R R R R
2 T R R R R
3 T R R R R
4 T R R R R
5 T R R R R
6 T R R R R
7 T R R R R
8 T R R R R

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-21 Transmit
Figure 7-70 Transmit
Table 7-27 Transmit

1.) Swap GTX Boards to determine if the failure point
1 GTX High Speed High Speed Bit Error Test on 00:03 changes as the boards are moved.
Bit Error Test the GTX 2.) Replace any failed GTX boards.
3.) Interface to MRX may be the cause of the failure.
1.) Swap GTX boards to determine if the failure point
2 Tx P6 Illegal Transmits an illegal waveform 03:21 changes as the boards are moved.
Waveform Test and checks the error registers. 2.) Replace any failed GTX boards.
3.) Interface to MRX may be the cause of the failure.
Table 7-28 Transmit - Board Tested/Required Matrix for Diagnostics

"Front
Plane
Upper FREY "Main
1 T T T T R R R R
2 T T T T R R R R

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-22 Memory
Assesses the general state of the system. Tests the integrity of memory and communication of the
described boards. Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.
The utility fills the memory with data, retrieves the data, and compares it to the original data.
Figure 7-71 Memory - MRX
Table 7-29 Memory

MRX Memory Tests the internal and external
Access Test RAM of the MRX Board.
Tests the RxBF memory on
2 RxBF Memory Test 00:01 Replace the MRX Board.
the MRX Board.
3 GTX IF FPGA Tests memory of Interface 00:01 Replace the failed GTX Board.
Memory Test FPGAs on the GTX boards
Tests memory of the TxBF on
4 GTX Memory Test 00:01 Replace the failed GTX Board.
the GTX Board
Table 7-30 Memory - Board Tested/Required Matrix for Diagnostics

"Front
Plane
Upper FREY "Main
1 T R R R R
2 T R R R R
3 R T T T R R R R
4 R T T T R R R R

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-23 System
Figure 7-72 System
Table 7-31 System

1.) The system should not be in a small enclosed
space with other equipment that generates a lot of
heat. Move the system away from walls and other
equipment.
2.) Clean or replace any dirty fan filters.
Compares all system
System 3.) Replace the fan tray beneath the card rack if the
1 temperatures to their specified 00:01
Temperature Test tachometer readings are slow. Perform the Fan test
values
to confirm issue.
4.) Check the fan on the BEP and replace the fan if
it is not working.
5.) Replace the MRX Board if none of the above
fixes the temperature problems.
1.) Check the voltage test points on the system
boards.
2.) Replace the system boards that are out of
2 System Voltage Compares all system voltages 00:01 tolerance.
Test to their specified values
3.) Check the main power supply.
4.) Replace the main power supply if it is out of
tolerance.
1.) If the test fails to read every FPGA ver
sion, check
the connection between the Host and the MRX
Displays the version for all of
3 FPGA Versions 00:01 Board. Replace the MRX Board.
the FPGAs
2.) If the test fails to read the GTX IF FPGA version,
check the GTX boards.
Table 7-32 System - Board Tested/Required Matrix for Diagnostics

"Front
Plane
Upper FREY "Main
1 T T T T T T R R T R
2 T T T T T R R R R
3 T T T T R R R R

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-24 Analog Receive
Figure 7-73 Analog Receive
Table 7-33 Analog Receive

Measures and corrects for the
DC offset of the ADCs on the
Run this utility to calibrate the correct DC offset after
MRX.
1 DC Offset 00:02 replacing the MRX Board. A popup message alerts
NOTE: The DC Offset
Calibration Utility the user to run this utility after MRX Board has been
Calibration Utility diagnostic
replaced.
MUST be run when the MRX
Board is replaced.
Analog signal path test of the
Analog RX Test
2 MRX Board with a TGC set to 00:02 Replace the MRX Board.
(High Gain)
high (peak) gain.
3 Analog RX Test 00:02
GRX boards with a TGC set to Replace the MRX Board.
(Medium Gain)
medium gain.
Analog RX Test
4 GRX boards with a TGC set to 00:02 Replace the MRX Board.
(Low Gain)
low gain.
Table 7-34 Analog Receive - Board Tested/Required Matrix for Diagnostics

"Front
Plane
Upper FREY "Main
1 R T R R R R R
2 R T R R R R R
3 R T T T T R R R R R
4 R T T T T R R R R R

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-25 Analog CW
Figure 7-74 Analog CW
Table 7-35 Analog CW

If this test
Line Name: Description: Run Time: failed:
A sum of sine waves with the same frequency, but different
phase, gives a sine wave output where the amplitude is a function
of the different phase settings.
The test uses small overlapping groups (4 channels) where the
channel pairs have different phase settings. Any amplitude
deviation detected in this test, should indicate that there is
MRX aCW Beam something wrong with phase setup. For each subtest, a signal is Replace the
1 00:05
Forming set up with f0=2.521 MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz and a mixer MRX Board.
frequency of 2.5 MHz. The dither and Pedof probe inputs are
disabled. The parameters tested are: fdop, spectrum peak, RMS
and SNR on the I-data.
Are the probes connected? The test will run with probes
connected to the scanner, but it is recommended to disconnect all
probes before running diagnostics.
For each subtest, a signal is setup with f0=2.521 MHz, the BP
filter at 3.1 MHz and a mixer frequency of 2.5 MHz. The dither and
Pedof probe inputs are disabled. The number of sub-test, with
identical setup, is by default, eight. For the I/Q- symmetry test, the
2 MRX aCW IQ DC-component and RMS value for both the Iand Q-part of the 00:05 Replace the
Symmetry data set are measured. The symmetry quality measurement for MRX Board.
this test is calculated from the RMS values for each sub-test.
For the Mixer Clock Sync test, a signal is set up with f0=2.521
MHz, the BP filter at 3.1 MHz and a mixer frequency of 2.5 MHz.
The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled. The test enables
one channel pair, plus each of the other channel pairs per sub
MRX aCW Mixer Replace the
3 test, one at the time. The parameters to test for are fdop, 00:05
Clock Sync MRX Board.
spectrum peak, RMS and SNR on the I-data.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-35 Analog CW

If this test
Line Name: Description: Run Time: failed:
In the Band Pass Filter / Mixer Clock Test, for each channel pair,
a signal is set up with combinations of input signal frequency,
Band Pass (BP) filters and mixer frequencies. The dither and
Pedof probe inputs are disabled. The Doppler channel pairs are
4 MRX aCW BP 00:08 Replace the
measured for the parameters: fdop, spectrum peak, RMS on I-
Filter / Mixer Clk MRX Board.
data.
For the Low Pass Filter test, Doppler test frequencies, both in the
filter pass band and the stop band are set up. The mixer clock
frequency is set to 2.5 MHz and the band pass filter to 3.1 MHz.
The dither and Pedof inputs are disabled. The LP-filter 3 dB
MRX aCW frequency will typically be at about 40 kHz. The following Replace the
5 00:05
Doppler LPF parameters are tested: fdop, spectrum peak and RMS both in the MRX Board.
I- and Q-data.
In the test, the two center frequencies of 2 MHz and 6 MHz are
verified. These frequencies are set by switching the Pedof band
pass filter. The MRX test signal generator is used to input sine
waves. The Pedof test signal input is enabled. The dither and
Pedof probe inputs are disabled. Sub tests using combinations of
input signal frequency, Pedof band pass filter settings, mixer clock
Replace the
6 MRX aCW Pedof frequency, test signal gain, and IQ gains are run. 00:05
MRX Board.
Parameters tested: fdop, spectrum peak, RMS, SNR andTHD on
both I- & Q-data. With this test the Pedof (SD probe) CW path on
the MRX Board is tested.
Table 7-36 Analog CW - Board Tested/Required Matrix for Diagnostics

"Front
Plane
Upper FREY "Main
1 T T R R R R R
2 T T R R R R R
3 T T T T T R R R R R
4 T T T T T
5 T T T T T

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-26 Noise
Table 7-37 Noise

Measures the noise floor of 1.) See: 7-9-2 "Noise" on page 7-195 for information
the System. The entire system on minimizing environmental noise. If the problem
is required for this diagnostic. continues:
1 Noise Floor Test 00:02
The noise floor is calculated 2.) Try a new probe (channels in the probe may be
from IQ data received without faulty). If the problem continues:
a signal source. 3.) Run the tests for Analog Receive
Table 7-38 Noise - Board Tested/Required Matrix for Diagnostics

"Front
Plane
Upper FREY "Main
1 T R R R R R

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-27 Transmit/Receive
.
Table 7-39 Transmit/Receive

1.) Swap front-plane boards to determine if the
failure point changes as the boards are moved.
Transmit and Receive
Replace Front Plane is determined to be failing.
Channel Test. Transmits on
1 00:03 2.) Swap GTX boards around to check if the failure
T/R Channel Test one at a time and received on
follows one of the boards. Replace if determined to
one channel at a time using an
be failing.
open probe connector.
3.) Replace GRLY.
Table 7-40 Transmit/Receive - Board Tested/Required Matrix for Diagnostics

"Front
Plane
Upper FREY "Main
7-5-12-28 Back End Tests

Back End test includes tests on devices inside the BEP.
7-5-12-29 Power test includes tests on the Transmit Power Supply and the EPS
NOTE: No Changes for MRX Configurations. Same tests found in R2.0.4 or later. See: 7-5-14
"Diagnostics - BEP" on page 7-112.
Figure 7-75 Back End Tests - MRX

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-12-30 Miscellaneous Tests

This group of Diagnostics, test the VNAV Drive bay (bayBIRD), DVR, 4D options and Touch Panel and
XYZ tests.
NOTE: No Changes for MRX Configurations. Same tests found in R2.0.4 or later. See:
7-5-12-14 "bayBIRD Tests" on page 7-91.

Table 7-18 "Touch Panel Tests Table" on page 7-43.
Table 7-19 "DVR Tests Table" on page 7-43.
Table 7-20 "4D Motor Controller Tests Table" on page 7-43.
Table 7-21 "Patient I/O Test Table" on page 7-43.
Table 7-22 "Testing the XY Control" on page 7-44.
Figure 7-76 Miscellaneous Tests - MRX

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-13 DVR Tests

NOTE: R6 and later will not have this test since the hardware DVR Option is not supported, only
software DVR. See: 4-3-19-7 "Software DVR (Option) Configuration Functional Checks" on
page 4-52.
Figure 7-77 DVR Test Screen
Name: DVR Version Test
Description: Reads the current version of the DVR board if installed
Run Time: 00:01
1.) If fails, re-seat board and run DVR self test

2.) If problem persist, replace DVR Board
Name: DVR self Test
Description: This test executes a self test of the DVR Board if installed
Run Time: 00:07
1.) If fails, re-seat board

2.) If problem persist, replace DVR Board

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14 Diagnostics - BEP

For Diagnostic differences, see 7-5-16 "Diagnostics - BEP Interactive Tests - R4.x and later" on page
7-125.
Table 7-41 BEP Test Description Table for R3.x and earlier
Test Description
Essential test PCI, PCI Express, CPU, Memory, HD Disk, and Video.
Hard Disk Long Extensive test of Hard Disk Drive.
Hard Disk Short Abbreviated test of Hard Disk Drive.
Memory Tests the memory on the mother board.
Network Adapter Tests connectivity to other devices on the network.
System board Tests the real time clock.
Video Tests the video boards.
Table 7-42 BEP Test Description Table for R4.x and later
Test Description
Essential test PCI, PCI Express, CPU, Memory, HD Disk, and Video with or without Network.
Hard Disk Long Extensive test of Hard Disk Drive.
Hard Disk Short Abbreviated test of Hard Disk Drive.
Memory Tests the memory on the mother board.
Network Adapter Tests connectivity to other devices on the network.
System board Tests the real time clock.
Video Tests the video boards.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14-1 Essential Tests

See: 7-5-7 "Diagnostics Window Overview" on page 7-30 for a description of this windows features.
Runs tests on essential functions of the BEP. This is a good starting point for isolating issues that may
originate from the BEP. The test results are displayed in the Status portion of the window.
Run Time: About 2 minutes.
2.) Click the Execute button.
3.) Failed tests may have another diagnostic test that can help isolate the failure, or will indicate which
part to replace. For:
- PCI Bus configuration
- CMOS memory
- CPU - run 7-5-14-3 "System Board" on page 7-115
- RAM - run 7-5-14-12 "Memory" on page 7-123
- Hard Drive status and Random Seek - run 7-5-14-4 "Hard Disk Drive Surface Scan" on page
7-116 and run 7-5-14-5 "Hard Disk Drive Quick Test" on page 7-117
- Network Interface (loopback only) - run 7-5-14-10 "Network Adapter" on page 7-121.
7-5-14-2 Essential Tests differences in R4 and later

Essential test in R4 has two versions:
Essential test: Complete test, same as R3 or earlier

Essential test, No network: same test, except it does not run the network tests for wired or wireless
connection.
Figure 7-78 Essential Tests Window
When network cable or Wireless network does not exist, the

Essential test fails but does not translate into a hardware
failure.
Essential test No Network will not run Network tests to quickly
identify other failures not related to network. (Intended for use
mostly in Manufacturing)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14-1 Essential Tests (contd)
Figure 7-79 Essential Tests Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14-3 System Board

Runs tests on essential functions of the PC Mother Board. The test results are displayed in the Status
portion of the window.
Run Time: About 1 minute.
2.) Click the Execute button. If there are any failures:
3.) Check the Motherboard Harness. Swap with a known good harness. If the problem continues:
4.) Replace the Motherboard. If the problem continues:
Figure 7-80 System Board Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14-4 Hard Disk Drive Surface Scan

Runs tests on essential functions of the Hard Disk Drive. The test results are displayed in the Status
portion of the window. This test can take a long time to complete. For a quick test to determine if there
are possible problems with the Hard Disk Drive, run
7-5-14-5 "Hard Disk Drive Quick Test" on page 7-117 before running this test.
The following tests are performed on your hard drive to ensure the Hard Disk Drive controller and the
drive mechanism are working correctly. The disk surface itself is also checked.
Drive Status - Hard Disk Drive heads are moved from track 0 to the maximum track one track at a
time.
Random Seek - Hard Disk Drive heads are moved randomly several hundred times.
Surface Scan - This test scans for surface defects on the Hard Disk Drive.
Run Time: May take over an hour.
3.) Replace the Hard Disk Drive.
Figure 7-81 Hard Disk Drive Surface Scan Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14-5 Hard Disk Drive Quick Test

Runs an overview set of tests on essential functions of the Hard Disk Drive. The test results are
displayed in the Status portion of the window. Run this test before running the 7-5-14-4 "Hard Disk Drive
Surface Scan" on page 7-116.
Run Time: May take about 6 minutes.
3.) Defragment the Hard Disk Drive. See: 7-5-21-10 "Disk Defragmenter" on page 7-143. If the problem
continues:
4.) Run the 7-5-14-4 "Hard Disk Drive Surface Scan" on page 7-116. If the problem continues:
5.) Replace the Hard Drive.
Figure 7-82 Hard Disk Drive Quick Test Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14-6 Video Card

Runs a test on essential functions of the Video Card. The test results are displayed in the Status portion
of the window.
This diagnostic tests your system's video capabilities. This involves testing the video memory with 18
patterns, testing your graphics acceleration, and text output. You will see these tests being performed
on your monitor.
You can cancel this test at any time by hitting the Escape (Esc) key.
The following tests are performed on your monitor:
Memory - Video memory is tested by filling the video buffer with 18 test patterns, one pattern at a
time. The tests will fill the entire screen with a single color.
Data Transfer - This tests the graphics acceleration part of your video controller. These tests will
appear on your screen as black and white concentric squares and rectangles of various sizes and
colors. If errors are detected, the locations of the problems are displayed.
Text Output - This test prints a text string in random sizes and colors to tests your video device driver
and video controller.
Run Time: May take about 10 minutes.
3.) Replace the Video Card if there are any errors. If the problem continues:
Figure 7-83 Video Card Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14-7 S-Video Image displays a portion of the Main Display

The S-Video image displays a portion of the main display that includes the probe image in both single
and dual probe display modes. To provide increased resolution and maintain the proper aspect ratio on
the S-Video display, the entire main display image is not projected on the S-Video monitor. The S-Video
crop area was selected to optimize the probe image so when the LOGIQ E9 is not in an imaging mode,
the S-Video will continue to display a cropped portion of the screen which may appear incorrect.
7-5-14-8 The Monitor Measurement Summary Sidebar does not appear after Upgrading to R6
After upgrading to R6, the monitor Measurement Summary Sidebar does not appear, and the image
uses the same space it would for Dual, all the time. So the image will go right up to the left edge of the
screen.
When upgrading to R6 software in a LOGIQ E9 with a 19 inch LCD, the following steps must be
completed to have the correct layout for 19 inch Monitors. DO NOT skip this step, or the monitor layout
will not be correct.
Go o Utilities
t -> System -> System Display:
- Set the drop-down menu in Use Wide Screen for > Single Image to OFF
- Make sure the checkbox in Side Panel Content > Measurement Summary is checked.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14-9 Monitor Adjustment Controls do not show for the OLED Monitor
Symptom: Monitor Adjustment Controls do not show for the OLED Monitor.
Description: LOGIQ E9 boots up normally but no Room profile, color profile, gamma or color space
controls are visible on the Touch Panel Utility pages. This is an indication that the LOGIQ E9 has not
identified the OLED Monitor USB device, although is able to display video.
Log file may display an entry as in the following example:
Info ; CSonyOled(3904); Sony OLED S/N 0x8000261 found;
Error ; CSonyOled(3904); Unable to connect to Sony OLED S/N 0x8000261;
Workaround: Rebooting the LOGIQ E9 should re-connect the OLED.
If the problem persist, the driver may be corrupted and may need to be un-installed and re-installed
again. You can accomplish this in two ways:
1.) Re-ghosting C partition only. You could use software reload feature in the common service desktop
to accomplish the C partition plus application load automatically. Or, you can load it from disks.
2.) Un-install and re-install the driver manually.
a.) Exit to Windows
b.) Open device manager, select the USB2.0 Hub under the Generic USB Hub that contains the
console. See illustration.
c.) Right click on properties for the USB2.0 Hub, under details tab verify that it is the VID 05E3
USB Hub
d.) Right click uninstall. Note: do not remove any device, only click on uninstall. Removing the
device will require to re-ghost to recover the driver.
e.) Then click on scan for hardware changes icon. Install the driver and reboot. You may need
to reboot twice for the change to work.
Figure 7-84 Un-install and re-install the driver manually

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14-10 Network Adapter

Runs a test on essential functions of the Network Interface. The test requires the system to be
connected to a network. The test results are displayed in the Status portion of the window.
This test gives the current status of the network and provides the option to restart the network
components in the BEP.
Figure 7-85 Network Interface Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14-11 Network Adapter Diagnostic Changes for R4
Network Adapter Test is split into 2 folders:
Network Adapter - see: Table 7-128 on page 7-161 and Table 7-129 on page 7-162
Network Adapter Reliability - see: Table 7-130 on page 7-163 and Table 7-131 on page 7-164
Each folder contains separate tests for Wired and Wireless Adapters.
Figure 7-86 Network Adapter Diagnostics Window - R4
Network Adapter: Tests essential functions of the

Network interface.
Wired LAN Network adapter test
Wireless Network adapter test
Network Adapter Reliability: Same as above plus

this test uses larger Data packets and tighter
requirements to pass
Wired LAN Network adapter test
Wireless Network adapter test

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-14-12 Memory
Runs a test on essential functions of the Memory. The test results are displayed in the Status portion of
the window.
3.) Replace the BEP if any tests fail.
Figure 7-87 Memory Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-15 Diagnostics - BEP Interactive Tests
Table 7-43 BEP Interactive Test Description Table - R3.x and earlier
Test Description
AVI playback Tests playing back an AVI file.
CD-R test Tests writing and reading to a CDR
CD-RW Not supported - Tests writing and reading data to a CD-ROM
DVD-R Tests writing and reading data to a DVD-R disk
DVD-RDL Not supported - Tests writing and reading to a DVD-R double layer disk
DVD-RW Not supported - Tests writing and reading a DVD-RW disk
DVD+R Not supported - Tests writing and reading to DVD+R media.
DVD+RDL Not supported - DVD+R double layer
DVD+RW Not supported - DVD+RW read write test
DVD_RAM Not supported - DVD RAM read and write test
DVD READONLY Not supported - DVD RAM read and write test
Keyboard N/A
Microphone N/A
Monitor Monitor test patterns
Trackball N/A
Sound Generates sounds for testing the speakers
USB Ports Lists USB Devices

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-16 Diagnostics - BEP Interactive Tests - R4.x and later

Interactive tests in R4 and later have been reduced. Tests that are not supported are no longer listed.
Table 7-44 BEP Interactive Test Description Table - R4.x
Test Description
AVI playback Tests playing back an AVI file.
CD-R test Tests writing and reading to a CDR
DVD-R Tests writing and reading data to a DVD-R disk
DVD READONLY Not supported - DVD RAM read and write test
Keyboard N/A
Microphone N/A
Monitor Monitor test patterns
Trackball N/A
Sound Generates sounds for testing the speakers
USB Ports Lists USB Devices
If you want to run these tests, it is recommended to run on a DOS prompt instead of CDS. This test will
take approximately 70 seconds.
Insert the service ky

Exit from the scanner software and exit to Windows
Start a DOS prompt
Insert a blank DVD-R into the drive
Enter the command:
cd %insite_home%\PCDoctor\bin
pcd run --file scripts\dvdminusr.xml
There is another test with a CD-R disk. It is not recommended because it takes over 30 minutes. If you
want to run the CD-R test, enter the command:
pcd run --file scripts\cdr.xml-R

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-16-1 Keyboard
1.) Click the Execute button on the Keyboard window. The PC-Doctor Keyboard Test opens.
2.) Select your keyboard type from the drop-down menu. Usually the default choice is the correct one.
3.) Click the Start button.
4.) Press each key on the systems keyboard once and make sure the corresponding keys on-screen
are removed from view.
- Click the Pass button if all the keys are removed from the PC-Doctor Keyboard Test.
- Click the Fail button if any key is not removed from the on-screen keyboard. Failed keys may
be damaged and you may have to have your keyboard repaired or replaced.
- Click the Abort button to exit the test.
5.) The test status is displayed in the Current Status portion of the window.
Figure 7-88 Keyboard Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-16-1 Keyboard (contd)

Footswitch Tests
Under Service Diagnostics / BEP Interactive/ Keyboard
INPUT > Press left, middle or right footswitch keys.
OUTPUT > Keys will be registered as follows:
- Left Footswitch = Left Windows + F10

- Middle Footswitch = Left Windows + F11
- Right Footswitch = Left Windows + F12
Figure 7-89 Footswitch Tests

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-16-2 Mouse (Trackball)

Runs a test on essential functions of the Trackball. The test results are displayed in the Status portion
of the window.
3.) Verify the signal cable is connected securely.
4.) Clean the Trackball. If the problem continues:
5.) Replace the Trackball.
Figure 7-90 Mouse Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-16-3 Audio (Sound)

1.) Click the Execute button at the bottom of the screen. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the first
test screen to open.
2.) Click Left Front and Right Front buttons to test your speakers. You should hear a recorded message
from each speaker.
3.) Click on the Beep button. You should hear a low beep from your PC.
4.) If all work, click the Pass button. Click the Close button.
5.) Do not perform the Microphone Interactive Test. Click the Close button.
6.) To test the WAV sound reproduction, click Left Channel, Right Channel, or Both Channels to test
your speakers. You should hear a guitar chord.
7.) Click on the Beep button. You should hear a low beep from your PC.
8.) Click the Close button.
9.) When you return to the Audio Test screen, click the Abort button.
10.)After closing the Service screen, you may see a Runtime Error screen(s). Close the screen(s).
11.)Before returning the system to the customer, always remember to reboot.
12.)If no sound is produced in these tests, choose the More Info button in the Audio Test dialog box for
information about possible causes and solutions.
Figure 7-91 Audio Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-17 Touch Panel
7-5-17-1 Calibration
NOTE: Always try TP calibration verification before attempting to calibrate. 7-5-17-2 "Calibration
Verification" on page 7-131. If the Touch Panel is so far out of calibration, hangs or does not
calibrate and the normal calibration procedure does not work, it may be necessary to do a
complete Pre-calibration. See: Section 6-5 "Touch Panel Calibration" on page 6-19.
To do a Touch Screen Calibration, follow the directions on the Touch Screen. As each of the cross-hairs
appear, touch them with your finger or a pencil eraser.
NOTE: You MUST hold your finger on the cross-hair until it moves to the next location. If you just tap
the calibration cross-hair, there is a good chance your calibration will be corrupt.
Figure 7-92 Touch Panel Calibration Screen

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-17-2 Calibration Verification

The Start Touch Screen Verification brings up a grid. Each time you touch the screen a small red dots
appears where you touch, this will indicate that the calibration is correct and you do not need to
re-calibrate.
If the red dots do not show up at the touched places, you need to run the Touch Panel calibration. To
terminate the verification, move the trackball pointer into the grid and press the set key.
Figure 7-93 Touch Panel Calibration Verification Screen

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-18 4D Motor Controller

NOTE: This test requires a 4D probe be connected to the system. This test requires a 4D probe to be
connected to the system. Refer to on-screen Instructions for details. See: Figure 7-94 "4D Motor
Controller Screen" on page 7-132.
Figure 7-94 4D Motor Controller Screen
Name: Presence Test
Description: This test detects the presence of the 4D Motor Controller.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Verify USB connection between the Host and the Main Power Supply.
2.) Verify 4D Motor Controller connections in Main Power Supply.
3.) Replace 4D Motor Controller.
Name: Version Test
Description: Displays the 4D Motor Controller version number.
Run Time: 00:01
1.) Verify USB connection between the Host and the Main Power Supply.
2.) Verify 4D Motor Controller connections in Main Power Supply.
3.) Replace 4D Motor Controller.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-18 4D Motor Controller (contd)

Name: Static 3D Test
Description: Performs a basic static 3D scan using the RAB2-5 probe connected in probe socket 4.
Run Time: 00:11
1.) Verify an RAB2-5 probe is connected to probe socket 4 (right-most probe socket).
2.) Verify the correct probe icon appears on the touch panel.
3.) Verify there is no red arrow in the icon indicating that no 4D Motor Controller was detected. Re-run
the 4D Motor Controller Presence Test in this case.
4.) Replace the 4D Motor Controller board.
Name: 4D Test
Description: Performs a basic 4D scan using the RAB2-5 probe connected in probe socket 4.
Run Time: 00:11
1.) Verify an RAB2-5 probe is connected to probe socket 4 (right-most probe socket).
2.) Verify the correct probe icon appears on the touch panel.
3.) Verify there is no red arrow in the icon indicating that no 4D Motor Controller was detected. Re-run
the 4D Motor Controller Presence Test in this case.
4.) Replace the 4D Motor Controller board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-19 Patient I/O Tests

Under Service Diagnostics / Patient I/O.
This procedure provides a basic test of the ability of the system to start and stop the acquisition of data
from the Patient I/O Module to the Host via the GFI.
INPUT > The connection of ECG leads, PHONO (PCG) or AUX is optional.
OUTPUT > The results display information about the signal data acquired from the ECG input to the
Patient I/O Module. The information includes the minimum signal value, maximum signal value and
mean signal value.
If this test fails:
1.) Run GFI tests

If GFI is ok:
2.) Replace Patient I/O module

If this test passes and there are still issues with poor or no ECG trace, replace ECG leads.
Figure 7-95 Patient I/O Tests

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-20 Configuration
7-5-20-1 Software Options Interface

Use this window to add, delete, and view details for software options.
Add = Click the Add button to enter a new Software Option Key.
Delete = Select a Software Option Key and click the Delete button to remove a Software Option Key.
Details = Select a Software Option Key and click the Details button. A table at the bottom of the
screen displays information for Hardware ID, Product Code, Version, Options Serial Number, and
Key Life.For LOGIQ E9 the Product code must be 32, and the Version must be 1. (See: Figure 7-
96 "Software Options Interface Window" on page 7-135 the Details table at the bottom of the
window.)
Refresh = Click the Refresh button to update the list after adding or deleting Software Option Keys.
Figure 7-96 Software Options Interface Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-20-2 InSite ExC Agent Configuration

Device Name = LE9_<the serial number>
CRM Name = may be different in different countries (poles) (equivalent to the System ID)
Enter the appropriate data for the InSite ExC configuration and click the Submit Changes button.
NOTE: If data is missing from any required fields the form will refresh and the required fields will be
identified by red labels when you click Submit Changes.
Click the Reset Form button to clear the current data.
Figure 7-97 InSite ExC Agent Configuration Window
For more information on how to configure InSite ExC, go to Section 7-7 "Troubleshooting Insite ExC
Configuration" on page 7-175.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21 Utilities - Common Utilities
7-5-21-1 Event Log Viewer

1.) Select the log you wish to view:
- Application link = an event log relative to application events
- System link = an event log relative to system events
- Log Name = enter the Log Name you want to view and click the View button
Figure 7-98 Event Log Viewer Window
This is an example of the Application Log.
Figure 7-99 Application Log Window Example

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-2 Disruptive Mode

Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting. If you are accessing through InSite
ExC, this can only be enabled with the customer/operator confirmation. See: Section 7-6
"Troubleshooting using InSite ExC" on page 7-165.
Figure 7-100 Disruptive Mode Window
7-5-21-3 Disk Usage

View capacity and usage statistics for the different disk drives.
Figure 7-101 Disk Usage Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-4 IP Configuration
View Windows IP configuration and LAN connection data.
Figure 7-102 IP Configuration Window
7-5-21-5 Network Status

View data for active network connections.
Figure 7-103 Network Status Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-6 Windows Services

View the Windows Services that are started and running. A Windows Service is a computer program
that has been automatically started and is running in the background on the computer.
Figure 7-104 Windows Services Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-7 User Accounts

View the user accounts that have been given access to this system.
Figure 7-105 User Account Window
7-5-21-8 Shared Resources

This screen displays all shared network resources on this system.
Figure 7-106 Shared Resources Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-9 System Shutdown

System Shutdown gives you the ability to Restart or Shutdown the system when using Virtual Console
Observation from a remote computer. See: Section 7-6 "Troubleshooting using InSite ExC" on page 7-
165.
NOTE: Retain Disruptive Mode checkbox:
MUST be checked if you are working from a remote computer.

Should be unchecked if you are working locally on the scanner.
Figure 7-107 System Shutdown Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-10 Disk Defragmenter

Disk fragmentation can reduce the amount of disk space available, and slow computing speed. Use the
disk defragmenter to restore optimum disk space and speed performance.
NOTE: System performance can be significantly reduced while the Disk Defragmenter is running.
1.) Select the Volume (drive) you want to defragment, or analyze for fragmentation.
- Click the Defragment button to defragment the selected volume.
- Click the Analyze button to generate an Analysis Report that identifies any files that require
de-fragmenting. Continue with step 2 below.
Figure 7-108 Disk Defragmenter Window
NOTE: The Disk Defragmenter Window may hide behind the service browser.
2.) Select the file(s) you wish to defragment and click the Defragment button on the Analysis Report
window.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-11 Gather Logs Utility

Click the Gather Logs button to prepare them for retrieval by the On Line Center. The logs are
compressed into a .zip file and the filepath and file name is displayed on the window.
If the application is not running, logs can be gathered using the Gather Logs shortcut on the Windows
desk top.
Figure 7-109 Gather Logs Utility Window
In R6 and later, Gather Logs Utility will not be collecting logs that contain protected information. If those
logs are needed, the OnLine Engineer will have to request the user to perform an Alt D function,
authorizing the inclusion of protected information in the logs.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-12 Image Viewer Utility

The Image Viewer Utility lists the availability of images for export. This example shows no images
available for export.
Figure 7-110 Image Viewer Utility Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-13 Image Compress & Delete Utility

Select the images you want to compress or delete. This example shows no images available at this time.
Compress Files = compresses images into a .zip file.

Delete Files = deletes the images from the image Export/Service directory.
Figure 7-111 Image Compress & Delete Utility Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-14 Scanner Documentation Interface

Use this to view the user and service documentation for the system. You need to have your
documentation disk inserted in the drive in order to open it. Otherwise you will see the message
displayed in Figure 7-112 "Scanner Documentation Interface Window" .
Figure 7-112 Scanner Documentation Interface Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-15 Distinct Network Monitor R1.x.x

The Distinct Network Monitor has a sniffer that monitors network traffic and allows you to capture
network data without redirecting or altering it.
For directions on how to configure the sniffer go to "Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer
(Software R1.x.x)" on page 7-8.
Figure 7-113 Distinct Network Monitor Window
NOTE: The Distinct Network Monitor Window may hide behind the service browser.
LOGIQ E9 R2.x.x or later Distinct was replaced by Wireshark. This menu is no longer available. Use
Alt+N to open the sniffer application.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-16 Virtual Console Observation (VCO)

VCO is used by a remote service technician or the Online Center (OLC) to access and modify all
scanner settings and programs on the customer's ultrasound scanner.See: Section 7-6
"Troubleshooting using InSite ExC" on page 7-165.
Figure 7-114 Virtual Console Observation Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-17 Telnet Server Control

Telnet Server must be running to allow remote access to the DOS command prompt window. Click the
Start button to run Telnet Server.
NOTE: Telnet Server is a Windows service that runs in the background. StopTelner Server when you
are not using it to perform a service action. It can slow the system down if left running in the
background.
Figure 7-115 Telnet Server Control Window
To access Telnet, use the following information:
User: insite
Password: 2getin

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-18 Invoke Software Reload

Active remote software reload. See: Section 8-4-12-8 "Software Reload" on page 8-40.
Figure 7-116 Invoke Software Reload - R2.x.x and R3.x
Figure 7-117 Invoke Software Reload - R4 and later

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-19 Invoke Software Rollback

Due to changes for Software Download capabilities, you will see an additional function on the utilities
tab.
Rollback function will be used by the On Line Engineer to roll back to the original software in cases
where the downloaded software is not working correctly. Active only when there has been a software
download.
Figure 7-118 Invoke Software Rollback

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-21-20 Clean-up SW package Repository

This utility cleans up the Software package repository. It deletes previous, pending and left over
packages. It keeps the current packages.
Warning if you run the command you will not be able to perform a SW Rollback. Package Repository
Cleanup should only be performed by the On Line Center in case SW download has problems.
Figure 7-119 Clean-up SW package Repository

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-22 Utilities - Scanner Utilities
7-5-22-1 DICOM Verify

This utility provides an easy way to verifyDICOM connectivity between the scanner and DICOM devices
on the network.
1.) Enter AE Title, IP Address, and Port values of the DICOM device.
2.) Check the Loop checkbox to repeat the operation, or leave it unchecked to perform the operation
once.
3.) Click the Verify button to see the results.
4.) Uncheck the Loop checkbox to stop the operation.
Figure 7-120 DICOM Verify Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-22-2 Replacement
Field is not populated on the LOGIQ E9.
Figure 7-121 Replacement Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-22-3 PM
Field is not populated.
Figure 7-122 PM Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-23 Wireless Network Configuration (WLAN Diagnostics)
7-5-23-1 Wireless Networks
Figure 7-123 Wireless Networks Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-23-2 Wireless Properties
Figure 7-124 Wireless Properties Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-23-3 Wireless Monitor
Figure 7-125 Wireless Monitor Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-23-4 Wireless Securities
Figure 7-126 Wireless Securities Window
7-5-23-5 Wireless Diagnostics
Figure 7-127 Wireless Diagnostics Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-23-6 Network Adapter Diagnostic Changes for R4 and later
Figure 7-128 Wired LAN Network adapter test Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-5-23-6 Network Adapter Diagnostic Changes for R4 and later (contd)
Figure 7-129 Wireless Network adapter test Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 7-130 Wired LAN Network adapter test Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 7-131 Wireless Network adapter test Window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 7-6
Troubleshooting using InSite ExC
This section describes how to use the InSite ExC remote service features of the Common Service
Desktop.

7-6-1 Purpose of this Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-165
7-6-3 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-165
7-6-4 How FE Remotely Enables Disruptive Mode and VCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-167
7-6-5 How Customer Enables Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-172
7-6-6 Customer Enables VCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-174
7-6-3 General
InSite ExC allows the Online Engineer or Field Engineer to connect remotely into the LOGIQ E9 and
access the Common Service Desktop to check system health and collect system information, as well
as run Diagnostics, activate VCO and Telnet features.
Most of the InSite ExC Remote Service features are the same as described in Section 7-5 "Common
Service Desktop" on page 7-21. However, some may require enabling disruptive mode.
NOTE: Only GE Service personnel have access to this feature. A password is required. All actions and
changes should be documented.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-6-3-1 How to access CSD remotely

To configure InSite ExC, see: Section 3-11 "Configuring Insite ExC" on page 3-86.
To connect to the device, use the search tool on the left-hand side of the Questra page or on the InSite
Remote Services Platform (RSvP).
1.) Have the customer activate fast poll on their device (left click on the InSite ExC icon and select
Connect to GE), to establish a quicker connection.
2.) Select Connect to device.
3.) Select Connect under UL_CSD (Questra) or CIS_CSD (RSvP).
4.) Log in as GE Service.
Figure 7-132 Reconnect to the Device
Figure 7-133 CIS_CSD (RSvP) Remote Tools tab
If you need to run diagnostics, VCO, Telnet or any other feature considered disruptive for the user, you
may be asked to active disruptive mode.
7 - 166 Section 7-6 - Troubleshooting using InSite ExC

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-6-4 How FE Remotely Enables Disruptive Mode and VCO

1.) The OLC or FE connects to the remote scanner or workstation through a Remote Service Tool
(RST).
NOTE: The behavior of the Remote Service Tool (RST) is beyond the scope of this manual. The
following steps describe the activities that take place once the OLC or FE remotely enables
connection to the scanner or workstation.
Once connected to the remote scanner the OLC or FE will sign in at the Service Login Screen (See:
Figure 7-134 "Service Log Screen" on page 7-167).
Figure 7-134 Service Log Screen
2.) Select GE Service, enter the current password, and select Okay.
3.) Select Utility -> Common Utilities -> Disruptive Mode (See: Figure 7-135 "Disruptive Mode" on
page 7-168).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-6-4 How FE Remotely Enables Disruptive Mode and VCO (contd)
Figure 7-135 Disruptive Mode
4.) To Enable Disruptive Mode select Yes.

5.) A request is sent to the scanner or workstation asking permission to diagnose the system remotely.
The customer receives the InSite ExC Notification shown in Figure 7-136.
Figure 7-136 InSite ExC Notification

PROPRIETARY TO GE

6.) The customer selects Yes.
NOTE: If the customer does not wish to have diagnostics running at the time of the request, they select
No. A message is sent back to the OLC or FE that Disruptive Mode is not enabled.
The screen below confirms the Disruptive Mode status change.
Figure 7-137 Disruptive Mode Enabled
7.) After Disruptive Mode is enabled, Virtual Console Observation can be activated by selecting
Utilities -> Common Utilities -> Virtual Console Observation, and then pressing the Start
button.
If Virtual Console Observation has been activated successfully, the following display is shown to the
OLC or FE:
Figure 7-138 Virtual Console Observation is Running
8.) To terminate Virtual Console Observation, the OLC or FE can press the Stop button.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

9.) Once the OLC or FE selects Stop, Figure 7-139 is displayed.
Figure 7-139 Virtual Console Observation is stopped
NOTE: An attempt to activate the Virtual Console Observation Tool without first enabling Disruptive
Mode will result in the screen display shown in Figure 7-140:
Figure 7-140 Virtual Console Observation Warning

PROPRIETARY TO GE

To connect to the system via VNC, go to the ToatalAccess window on your laptop/computer and select
Connect under UL_VNC, CIS_VNC (RSvP).
Figure 7-141 TotalAccess Window
Click OK on the message displayed for the connection and wait to get the Virtual Console Observation
widow. This window will display the main application and touch panel screens.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-6-5 How Customer Enables Disruptive Mode

Perform these steps for a customer to enable Disruptive Mode.
1.) On the Touch Screen, click on the Utilities button, then the Service button. This icon links the User
or Field Engineer (FE) to the Service Login screen shown in Figure 7-142.
NOTE: The screen in Figure 7-142 is an example from a LOGIQ E9 Engineering system. The System
Type and/or System ID will vary between scanners and workstations.
Figure 7-142 Service Login Screen
2.) Select Operator and enter the password ULS, then click Okay.
3.) Select Utility -> Common Utilities -> Disruptive Mode (See: Figure 7-143 "Disruptive Mode
Enabled" on page 7-173).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-6-5 How Customer Enables Disruptive Mode (contd)

4.) To Enable Disruptive Mode select Yes.
The Figure 7-143 screen below confirms the Disruptive Mode status change.
Figure 7-143 Disruptive Mode Enabled

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-6-6 Customer Enables VCO

Perform these steps for a customer to enable VCO:
1.) Left click on the InSite ExC icon.

2.) Select Clinical Life Line. This will activate disruptive mode and VCO for the application OLC to
quickly assist the customer.
3.) If you select Clinical Life Line again, it will turn off disruptive mode and VCO.
4.) A Red message indicating that the system should be rebooted will remain until the system is
rebooted.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 7-7
Troubleshooting Insite ExC Configuration
7-7-2 Verify Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-175
7-7-3 Troubleshooting flowchart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-176
7-7-2 Verify Configuration Steps

See: Section 3-11-4 "Configuring InSite ExC" on page 3-87.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-7-3 Troubleshooting flowchart
Figure 7-144 Troubleshooting flowchart
Start
The hospital is not allowing the system to route out.

Request IT to open a path to the Internet port 443
Open Internet Explorer and type: (Secure Socket Layer).
https://198.169.188.10:443 Request IT to provide internet access.
No message
Message
Returns GE
No returned?
Healthcare
(Access
Web Server?
Denied)
Yes
Yes The hospital firewall is blocking your access to the
Re-check configuration and reboot. Internet. Request IT to allow access.
System should work. Also, check is a proxy server is needed.
Request IT to provide proxy information.
7 - 176 Section 7-7 - Troubleshooting Insite ExC Configuration

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 7-8
Troubleshooting Trees
7-8-2 LOGIQ E9 Does Not Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-178
7-8-3 Noise in Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-181
7-8-4 Unable to Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-182
7-8-5 Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-183
7-8-6 System Does Not Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-184
7-8-7 Monitor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-185
7-8-8 Printer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-187
7-8-9 CD/DVD Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-189
7-8-10 Network Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-190
7-8-11 Volume Navigation (V Nav) Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-191

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-2 LOGIQ E9 Does Not Power On / Boot Up

.
Figure 7-145 Power On / Boot Up Flowchart - Page 1
System does not boot
Is the AC power cable

NO
seated to the Scanner and
to the wall power outlet?
Connect the AC power cable

YES between the Scanner and the wall
power outlet in right way.
Is the main breaker

NO
turned ON in the
back of the system?
YES Turn ON the main breaker of

the Scanner.
Has the ON/OFF

NO
key on the Control Panel
been pressed once?
Press the ON/OFF button on the

YES Control Panel.
Perform Network Troubleshooting
If the System is not booting and the BIOS screen does not appear, try resetting the BIOS using the
jumper on the motherboard. The jumper is located just below the Battery (Silver disk) in the upper-left
corner of the BEP Motherboard.
If the BEP has been replaced and just turned on for the first time, and no video is coming out of the main
monitor, open the BEP and ensure that the Video Card is seated properly. Although the packaging is
made to resist several drops, packaging being mishandled in transportation may result in unseated
boards.
7 - 178 Section 7-8 - Troubleshooting Trees

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-2-1 Resetting the BEP BIOS Memory

1.) Turn off the system breaker on the back of the system.
2.) Open the BEP cover and unplug battery pack (J3) from Extended Power Shutdown board J3, or the
battery from the Chargeboard at PCN1.
3.) If you have a BEP5, remove the HDD Drive mounting frame and remove HDD assembly per steps
of procedure in section 8-11-12 "BEP HDD (Hard Disk Drive) replacement - BEP5.x" on page 8-491.
4.) Disconnect J46 Ethernet cable from BEP I/O Board (this provides much easier access to
Jumper J1).
5.) If you have a BEP5, locate the Yellow Jumper (J1) in the upper left corner of the BEP Mother board
just below the BIOS Battery and the ATX Power connection to the Motherboard. If you have a
BEP6, locate JCMOS1 from 1/2 to 2/3.
6.) Using a pair of fine (long and narrow), needle nose pliers or tweezers, move Jumper J1 (the yellow
jumper just below the battery in the upper left corner of the BEP Motherboard) to the left by one pin.
7.) J1 is normally across pins 1 and 2 (two pins that are on the right side of the three pins).
8.) Move J1 left one pin so it is across pins 2 and 3 (two pins on the left side of the three pins).
9.) Turn on the system breaker. Wait 2 full minutes.
10.)Turn off the system breaker.
11.)Move the jumper (J1) back to Normal position.
12.)Reconnect J46 Ethernet cable to BEP I/O Board.
13.)If you have a BEP5, install HDD Drive per steps 1-4 of the procedure in section 8-11-12 "BEP HDD
(Hard Disk Drive) replacement - BEP5.x" on page 8-491.
14.)Plug in the battery on the Extended Power Shutdown board (J3), or the battery to the Chargeboard
at PCN1.
15.)Close the BEP cover and tighten the screw on the top of the cover.
NOTE: Be careful not to pinch the wires as you close the cover.
16.)Turn on the system breaker.

17.)Push the Power Button.
18.)Flash BIOS Memory per procedure in section 8-4-9 "Flashing the BIOS memory" on page 8-31.
19.)Boot up the system and set the system time and date per section 7-9-10-5 "Incorrect System Time
When Daylight Savings Time Changes" on page 7-236.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-2-2 Boot Sequence

1.) Press the I/O (On/Off) button. Upon releasing the button the light turns from amber to green.
2.) A few beeps are heard and the BEP and card rack fans come on.
3.) The BIOS screen appears on the LCD screen.
4.) The keyboard backlights flash momentarily.
5.) The Device Screen appears on the LCD.
6.) The Starting Scanner completion bar appears on the LCD screen.
7.) The blue screen appears on the image monitor, the LCD screen is blank.
8.) The completion bar measures the progress of the boot up.
9.) The ultrasound application screen appears on the image monitor and the Touch Panel graphics
appear on the LCD screen.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-3 Noise in Image
Figure 7-146 Noise in Image
Noise is shown in Image.
Is there any electrical YES

devices that affect the
Scanner?
NO See: 7-5-12-5 "Noise" on page 7-71.
Check probes.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-4 Unable to Scan
Figure 7-147 Unable to Scan
Unable to scan!
Are probes connected in NO

right way?
Check the probe connection.

YES Probes should be recognized on the
touch panel.
END
Are other operations YES

possible?
NO Check the HV power supply unit. Run

diagnostics for TX power.
Restart the scanner.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-5 Trackball
Figure 7-148 Trackball Troubleshooting
The trackball is low sensitive!
Does the trackball YES

move at all?
NO Check Speed and Acceleration

menu: System, General Presets.
Run Diagnostics for the Op Panel.
NO
Replace the trackball unit.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-6 System Does Not Power Off / Shutdown
Figure 7-149 Power Off / Shutdown Flowchart
If the ON/OFF switch is illuminated

with an amber color, the scanner is in
NO stand-by mode which indicates that it
Is the ON/OFF switch has been Shut-Off, but the power
illuminated with switch in the back is on.
a green color?
If the ON/OFFswitch is not illuminated
at all, the scanner has been Shut Off
and Powered Down in the back.
YES
Shutdown the scanner from a software

screen or depress the ON/OFF switch.
Depress and hold the ON/OFF switch

on the scanner for approximately 10
seconds.
NO
Did the scanner Shut Off? If the scanner fails to Shut Off, turn off
the power switch in the back of the
unit and wait about 20 seconds to turn
it back on. Check that the system
powers ON and OFF normally.
YES
Restart the scanner.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-7 Monitor Troubleshooting

NOTE: Reset the monitor settings to the factory defaults prior to troubleshooting the monitor.
Figure 7-150 Monitor Troubleshooting
Error on the monitor display!
Do the colors seem YES

abnormal?
NO Set the Monitor settings to the default

(Section 6-3 "Monitor adjustments" on
page 6-2)
Does the Contrast or the

YES
Brightness adjustment
seem improper?
NO Adjust Contrast and Brightness.
Does distortion occur on YES

the monitor? Does the
display area seems
abnormal?
Run Monitor test under BEP interactive.
NO
Does the monitor display

nothing?

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-7 Monitor Troubleshooting (contd)

Monitor does not work
- Verify power is present to monitor
- Check if video is present at external DVI connection (you may need an external monitor)
Prints do not match monitor
- Verify factory default settings. Chapter 3 in the User Manual calls out suggested settings for
various exam and lighting conditions.
Video test patterns are not clear, bright, parallel or square
- Replace the monitor
The LCD monitor used for LOGIQ E9 has a custom color profile (ICC Profile) programmed into the LCD
itself, which is designed to reduce noise in the image by suppressing low-level and very high-level gray
values. Due to this, the contrast setting also plays a role along with the brightness setting in the
'brightness calibration' test pattern. When using the SMPTE Pattern on systems running R4.3.0 or
earlier, please be aware that the LOGIQ E9 monitor gray level does not display falls in the noise range
(< 6 or > 225 on a 0-255 range of 8-bit gray scale values). The LOGIQ E9 intentionally displays a
gray value of < 6 as 0 (darkest) or a gray value above 225 as 255 (brightest). Although the
instructions on the SMPTE pattern screen may indicate that the display is not showing all the gray
levels, this behavior is normal. The SMPTE pattern version used on R4.3.0 and earlier was not fully
suitable for LCD technology.
In R5 and later versions, the pattern used to check calibration have been updated to suit the latest
Monitor technology.
R6 and later:
For further information about test patterns available on the, refer to the appropriate version of the
LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 3. See: Table 1-8 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes per

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-8 Printer Troubleshooting
Figure 7-151 Printer Troubleshooting
Unable to use Printer(s)!
Perform Generic Test of Printers,

see: Section 7-10 "Test of Printers"
on page 7-351.
YES
Did the Test Page print
correctly.
There is no problem with the printer

NO tested. Test other printers.
Is the printer(s) properly NO

connected?
Check that all signal, and power

YES supply cable connections between
Printer and Scanner are OK.
See: next page Figure 7-152 "Printer

Troubleshooting (continued)" .

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-8 Printer Troubleshooting (contd)
Figure 7-152 Printer Troubleshooting (continued)
Still unable to use the Printer(s)!
Is there print papers left? NO
YES Insert the printer papers.
Is proper configuration for NO

the Print key(s) set?
YES Configure the Print key(s).
Is printing unavailable NO
even by manual
operation?
YES Check the signal cables Between

BEP and I/O board.
Is there an error message YES

on the monitor display?
NO Try reinstalling printer driver or

reload software.
Replace the Printer.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-9 CD/DVD Troubleshooting
Figure 7-153 CD/DVD Troubleshooting
Unable to record to CD/DVD!
Is a new, unused CD/DVD NO

disc inserted in
the drive?
YES Insert a new, un-used

CD/DVD disc.
Are CD/DVDs rated at the proper NO

write speed?
YES
Acquire CD/DVDs rated at the proper
write speed.
Reboot and attempt to format the

CD/DVD from the desktop. Can you NO
record now?
Replace CD/DVD Drive.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-10 Network Troubleshooting
Figure 7-154 Network Troubleshooting
No Connection to the Network
Is the
TCP/IP Cable between
NO
LOGIQ E9 and network
outlet connected and well
seated?
Connect the cable and verify that it is
YES well seated in both ends.
Try a network cable that is known to

be OK
YES
Is the connection OK now?
NO
Replace the network cable.
Is the
cable between BEP and NO
rear panel connection OK?
YES
Replace the BEP.
Connect a Crossed Network Cable
between the Scanner and your PC/
Laptop.
Try to ping from the PC/Laptop to
LOGIQ E9.
If OK, the hardware connection
inside LOGIQ E9 is OK.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-8-10 Network Troubleshooting (contd)
7-8-10-1 No Contact With Server, But Connection to Network is OK

Check Network setup on the scanner. See: 7-5-21-5 "Network Status" on page 7-139.
7-8-11 Volume Navigation (V Nav) Troubleshooting

If the distortion is not corrected by following the calibration instructions, you can check the functionality
of the sensors without the application running by using the following utility and observing the behavior
of the sensors:
C:HARDWARE_DRIVERS\drivebay\Cubes.exe
Section 7-9
Troubleshooting Tips
Each entry in the table will hyper-link to the issue and resolution.
Table 7-45 Troubleshooting Tips Table
Sub-System Issue
4D See: 7-9-14 "4D Option Troubleshooting" on page 7-238
Backend Isolation from Front End To isolate the Front End from the Backend and boot up into Simulator Mode,
(Simulator Mode) you must:
Power Down the System,
GFI Configuration - Disconnect the PCIe cable on both the GFI Board and
BEP.
MRX Configuration - Disconnect the PCIe cable to the Motherboard (J3).
Disconnect the USB cable to the Patient I/O Module if present. This step
may be necessary since the Patient I/O Board is a self-powered USB device
and back powers the USB data lines causing boot up issues while the
system is disconnected from the front end.
In simulator mode, the scan screen may display pulsatile circles or no scan
at all, but will allow other application functions to run normally.
Back End Processor See: 7-9-8-1 "System Halt Errors - Lock ups or Intermittent Problems" on
Also see: 7-9-9 "Back End page 7-221 (continued)
Processor (BEP) Troubleshooting"
on page 7-223. See: 7-9-8-2 "CD/DVD Drive Failures" on page 7-221
See: 7-9-8-3 "Image CD/DVD not read" on page 7-221
See: 7-9-8-4 "BEP Arrives Without Video" on page 7-221
See: 7-9-8-5 "Simulator Mode" on page 7-222
See: 7-9-8-6 "Lockups or Blue screens" on page 7-222
See: 7-9-8-7 "Files corrupt on boot" on page 7-222
See: 7-9-8-8 "Heres a way to power on the BEP" on page 7-222
See: 7-9-8-9 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-222

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Sub-System Issue
Connectivity See: 7-9-7-1 "Cannot connect to something via the network" on page 7-219
See: 7-9-7-2 "No Ping" on page 7-219
See: 7-9-7-3 "No Verify" on page 7-219
See: 7-9-7-4 "System Pings and Verifies but does NOT Send" on page 7-220
See: 7-9-7-6 "Adjust time-out for DICOM servers" on page 7-220
Diagnostics Window Overview - See: 7-5-12-15 "Diagnostics Window Overview - R3.x.x and later" on page
R3.x.x and later 7-95
EMI Prevention/Abatement See: 7-9-5 "EMI Prevention/Abatement" on page 7-217
See: 7-9-5-1 "Different Power Outlet" on page 7-217
See: 7-9-5-2 "Different System" on page 7-217
See: 7-9-5-3 "Different Location" on page 7-217

Image Artifacts See: 7-9-6 "Image Artifacts Caused by Front End Boards" on page 7-218
Log Analysis See: 7-9-16 "Log Analysis - R3.x and earlier" on page 7-240
Log File Reading See: 7-9-18 "LOGIQ E9 Log File Reading" on page 7-250
Main Power Supply
Also see 7-9-4 "Main Power Supply
(MPS) Troubleshooting" on page 7- See: 7-9-2 "Noise" on page 7-195
202.
Monitor See: 7-5-14-8 "The Monitor Measurement Summary Sidebar does not
appear after Upgrading to R6" on page 7-119
No Boot See: 7-8-2 "LOGIQ E9 Does Not Power On / Boot Up" on page 7-178
Noise See: 7-9-2 "Noise" on page 7-195
See: 7-9-2-1 "Noise Picked up from the Air" on page 7-196
See: 7-9-2-2 "Noise Received via the External Cables" on page 7-196
See: 7-9-2-4 "Intermittent Noise" on page 7-197

See: 7-9-2-5 "Motor Boat Noise" on page 7-197
See: 7-9-2-6 "Self-Generated Noise (Noise Generated Inside the LOGIQ

E9)" on page 7-197
See: 7-9-2-7 "Heat-Related Noise Problems" on page 7-197
OLED Monitor See: 7-5-14-9 "Monitor Adjustment Controls do not show for the OLED
Monitor" on page 7-120
7 - 192 Section 7-9 - Troubleshooting Tips

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Sub-System Issue
Operator Panel See: 7-9-10-1 "No Audio" on page 7-235
See: 7-9-10-2 "No Video on Touch Panel Display" on page 7-235
See: 7-9-10-3 "Wrong Key Activated on the Touch Panel" on page 7-235
See: 7-9-10-4 "Wrong System Date and Time" on page 7-235
See: 7-9-10-5 "Incorrect System Time When Daylight Savings Time

Changes" on page 7-236
See: 7-9-10-6 "Touch Panel Not Responding" on page 7-236
See: 7-9-10-7 "Service Password Does Not Respond When System Set to
Greek/Russian Language (SN 70392)" on page 7-236
Operator Panel Keyboard See: 7-9-1 "Shortcut Keys" on page 7-194
Probes See: 7-9-11-1 "Probe Recognition" on page 7-236
Replacing New Fan Tray - Fails See: 7-9-30 "LOGIQ E9 Replacing New Fan Tray - Fails "GFI Fan Test"" on
"GFI Fan Test page 7-345
Software See: 7-9-13-1 "Base Image Load Troubleshooting" on page 7-238
See: 7-9-13-2 "Image or Patient Data Loss" on page 7-238
S-Video in output in R6 with Wide See: 7-5-14-7 "S-Video Image displays a portion of the Main Display" on
Screen Monitors page 7-119
System boots, but cannot scan See: 7-9-2-7 "Heat-Related Noise Problems" on page 7-197
System not booting up See: 7-9-2-7 "Heat-Related Noise Problems" on page 7-197
System Temperature Too High See: 7-9-12 "System Temperature Too High (System Overheating)" on page
(System Overheating) 7-237
Transmit and Receive Signal Path See: 7-9-19 "LOGIQ E9 Transmit and Receive Signal Path Diagnostics" on
Diagnostics page 7-275
VPD Editor "Not Opening

(console models running See: 7-9-31 "LOGIQ E9 VPD Editor "Not Opening"" on page 7-346
Application Software R3.1.0)
V Nav Inside Probes See: 7-9-11-2 "V Nav Inside Sensors Failure" on page 7-236
Z-Axis Stuck Down See: 7-9-28 "LOGIQ E9 Z-Axis Stuck Down" on page 7-337
Audio
See:
Audio DOES NOT Play after
7-9-29 "Audio DOES NOT Play after Upgrade from R2 to R5" on page 7-341
Upgrade from R2 to R5
LOGIQ E9 Replacing New Fan See:

Tray - Fails "GFI Fan Test" 7-9-30 "LOGIQ E9 Replacing New Fan Tray - Fails "GFI Fan Test"" on page
7-345
LOGIQ E9 VPD Editor "Not
See: 7-9-31 "LOGIQ E9 VPD Editor "Not Opening"" on page 7-346
Opening"
Brakes See: 7-9-32 "Sticking Brakes" on page 7-348
See: 7-9-33 "Brake Functionality (not effectively stopping the LOGIQ E9)" on
page 7-350
Test of Printers See: Section 7-10 "Test of Printers" on page 7-351

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-1 Shortcut Keys

There are several Shortcut keys to be utilized on the LOGIQ E9:
Alt + 1 or Alt + 2 to mark events in the log file. Used for the flagging issues during operation.
Alt + F10 = is the SW Shut Down.
If the system can be shut-down by using these keys it means that SW is working and the problem
could be the ON/OFF switch or the wire that carries the shut-down signal.
Alt + F5 or F11 for the echo simulator (keyboard simulation), brings up or removes the frontpanel
simulator. It may be used with VCO to press buttons on the frontpanel that are not a standard key
on your PC.
Alt +=Ato bring up a cursor (Alt + A stands for Arrow).
Alt + D to capture the scanner logs (See:
"7-3-4 Collecting a Screen Capture with Logs (contd)" on page 7-6.
Alt + N activates the Network Sniffer monitor, or restores it if it is minimized or hidden.
R4.x and later
With the Service Key connected:
Alt - ctrl - D -> brings up the Debug command window. This can be used to run Sclogs. See:
"7-3-4 Collecting a Screen Capture with Logs (contd)" on page 7-6.
Alt - Tab -> allows you to switch between task screens. You must access Windows first, then re-
launch the application to be able to use this combination of screens.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-2 Noise
Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. They also generate EMI. Possible EMI sources
should be identified before the unit is installed. See: 7-5-12-5 "Noise" on page 7-71 for the diagnostic Noise
Floor test.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. Some of
these sources include:
medical lasers
scanners
cauterizing guns
computers
monitors
fans
gel warmers
microwave ovens
light dimmers
portable phones
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.
When talking to the customer, try to gather as much information as possible about the conditions when
the noise appear:
Is the noise present...
... all the time?
(See: 7-9-2-1 "Noise Picked up from the Air" on page 7-196 and 7-9-2-2 "Noise Received via the External
Cables" on page 7-196).
... after some time of use? (After how long time?)
(See: 7-9-2-6 "Self-Generated Noise (Noise Generated Inside the LOGIQ E9)" on page 7-197.)
... at special times of the day (or night)? When?
(See: 7-9-2-1 "Noise Picked up from the Air" on page 7-196 and 7-9-2-2 "Noise Received via the
External Cables" on page 7-196.)
... at all locations in the hospital, or only in one room/area?
- All locations:
(See: 7-9-2-6 "Self-Generated Noise (Noise Generated Inside the LOGIQ E9)" on page 7-
197.)
- Only in one room/area:

(See: 7-9-2-1 "Noise Picked up from the Air" on page 7-196 and 7-9-2-2 "Noise Received via
the External Cables" on page 7-196.)
... from time to time, no special pattern of time is observed?
(See: 7-9-2-1 "Noise Picked up from the Air" on page 7-196 and 7-9-2-2 "Noise Received via the
External Cables" on page 7-196.)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-2-1 Noise Picked up from the Air

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the air.
If picked up by a probe cable, the noise will be coherent -penlight noise pointing down in the picture-
due to the fact that the noise is received on all channels)
Is it a problem on one probe only?
Try another probe.

Is it a problem on one of the probe connectors only?
Move the scanner to another location and verify any changes.
7-9-2-2 Noise Received via the External Cables

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the wiring.
The noise can enter the system via the mains power cable, probe cable(s) or any other external
connected cable(s).
Disconnect cables that are not needed for the basic use of the scanner:
Network cable
Cables to any external peripherals
ECG cables and other cables connected to the Patient I/O
Verify if the noise change or disappear when the cables are removed.
Often, this type of noise is due to grounding problems in the mains power system or that the scanner is
sharing a power line with other equipment.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-2-3 Doppler Noise

Horizontal stripes:
This is typically an analog problem on either of these boards:
- Transmitter board (GTX)
- Receiver board (GRX)
Spikes
This is a typical digital problem and may be caused by an issue on:
- Digital Receiver board (DRX)
- Front End Interface Board (GFI)
7-9-2-4 Intermittent Noise

Is there any equipment that is turned on and off near the scanner?
Is the noise present around the clock or only at certain times?
7-9-2-5 Motor Boat Noise

May be hardware failure on GTX card or on the TX (Main Power supply).
7-9-2-6 Self-Generated Noise (Noise Generated Inside the LOGIQ E9)

Example: Color Noise in the near field.
Self generated noise will not change if you touch the scanner or the probes.
Self generated noise may be due to either:
- heat problems
- hardware problems
- software problems
7-9-2-7 Heat-Related Noise Problems

Heat problems are usually starting when LOGIQ E9 has been ON for some time.
If LOGIQ E9 has been used for scanning for some time before the noise appears, it may be due to either
heat problems or some software related issues. By doing a restart as described here, you may learn
some more about the cause:
Select Ctrl+Alt+R to restart the back end Processor without power-cycling the unit.
If the noise is present after the restart, the cause is most likely due to heat problems.
If the noise is gone after the restart, it may be due to either the setup/adjustments of the LOGIQ E9
or a software failure
Some possible causes for heat problems:
Fan filters need to be cleaned or replaced.

Use of the LOGIQ E9 at room temperatures outside the allowed temperature limits.
Fans are worn out.
Hardware problems.
7-9-2-8 Hardware Problems

A hardware issue will typically be an error/malfunction on a card.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-3 Investigate the Type of Noise

Use the flow chart below to investigate the type of noise.
Figure 7-155 Noise Type

START
DISCONNECT ALL CABLES

THAT ARE NOT IN USE. (KEEP
POWER CABLE AND ACTIVE
PROBE CONNECTED.)
THIS MAY INDICATE THAT THE NOISE WAS PICKED

DOES YES UP BY ONE OF THE CABLES YOU DISCONNECTED.
THE NOISE CONNECT THE CABLES AGAIN, ONE BY ONE AND
DISAPPEAR? WATCH THE NOISE. IF ONE CABLE IS
RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL THE NOISE, REPLACE IT.
NO
DOES YES THIS MAY INDICATE THAT THE NOISE ISPICKED UP

THE NOISE DUE TO STRONG ELECTRIC OR MAGNETIC FIELDS
CHANGE? OR THAT THE GROUNDING IS FAULTY.
NO
DOES
THE NOISE CHANGE
YES THIS MAY INDICATE THAT THE NOISE IS PICKED UP
IF YOU HOLD THE PROBE
AND AT THE SAME TIME DUE TO STRONG ELECTRIC OR MAGNETIC FIELDS
TOUCH THE SCANNER OR THAT THE GROUNDING IS FAULTY.
GROUND?
NO
THE NOISE IS EITHER

RECEIVED VIA THE AC
POWER CABLE OR IS
SELF GENERATED.
See: 7-9-3-1 "Power Cable
Test" on page 7-198
7-9-3-1 Power Cable Test

Use a ferrite core on the AC power cable to verify if the noise is picked up by the AC power cable.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-3-2 Noise in 2D Mode
Table 7-46 Noise in 2D Mode
STEP TASK
Noise is shown in 2D Mode. Is there any electrical devices that affect the LOGIQ E9?
1 If Yes, continue with step 2.
If No, continue with step 3.
2 Keep the LOGIQ E9 away from those electrical devices.
3 Check the Probe(s).
7-9-3-3 Noisy Images

Typical noise problems:
coherent noise patterns straight down in the image field.

flashes of noise straight down.
Usually the noise is only picked up when coupling the probe to your body.
Table 7-47 Noisy Images
STEP TASK
Try another probe (same model). Does it help?

1 If Yes, replace the original probe.
If No, continue with the next step.
Disconnect all probes that are not in use. Keep only the active probe connected. Does it help?
2 If Yes: The noise is most likely from an external source. If possible, try to locate and remove the source.
Disconnect all external cables from the I/O (on the rear side of LOGIQ E9) and from the Patient I/O, to establish
whether the noise is due to interference from external devices. Does it help?
3
If Yes, continue with step 4.
There are possible ferrite solutions to most of the cable connections.

On USB cables:
4
Wind the cable 5-6 times trough a ferrite ring, GE Part Number 038X0028.
Verify that the shielding is connected to Ground on the Patient I/O Cable(s)
5 Do the DC Offset Calibration, see: Section 6-6 "DC Offset Calibration" on page 6-34.
Other possible internal noise sources:

Main Power Supply,
6
Peripherals.
Disconnect devices from the USB ports on the Op.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-3-4 Noise in Color Flow

coherent noise patterns straight down in the image field.

flashes of noise straight down.
Table 7-48 Noise in Color Flow
STEP TASK

3

On USB cables:
4
Verify that the shielding is connected to Ground on the Patient I/O Cable(s)
5 Do the DC Offset Calibration, see: Section 6-6 "DC Offset Calibration" on page 6-34.

Main Power Supply,
6
Peripherals
Disconnect devices from the USB ports on the Op.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-3-5 Noise in Doppler Mode

Horizontal lines.
Table 7-49 Noise in Doppler Mode
STEP TASK

3

On video cables:
4 Wind the cable twice through a split ferrite, GE Part Number 038X1012 / 038X1112.
On USB cables:
5 Verify that the shielding is connected to Ground on the Patient I/O cable(s).
6 Adjust Acoustic Power a few dB down in order to determine if the noise is coming from the Main Power Supply,
If the noise disappears, the source is the main Power Supply.

Main Power Supply
7
Peripherals.
Disconnect devices from the USB ports on the Op
7-9-3-6 Excessive Noise Lines when the cursor is placed straight down
Table 7-50 Excessive noise lines when the cursor is placed straight down
STEP TASK
1 Verify that the shielding is connected to Ground on the Patient I/O Cable(s).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4 Main Power Supply (MPS) Troubleshooting

NOTE: When troubleshooting procedures refer to the GFI, this should be the MRX Board in a MRX
Configuration system. Troubleshooting procedures for a GFI Configuration MPS are essentially
the same for MRX.
Topics of this Section:
1.) System not Booting Up - see:

7-9-4-1 "System not Booting Up" on page 7-203.
2.) System Boots, but cannot scan - see:
7-9-4-2 "System Boots, but cannot scan" on page 7-208.
3.) System boots, with hardware error - Lambda PS only - see:
7-9-4-3 "System boots, with hardware error - Lambda PS only" on page 7-210.
4.) Main Power Supply Troubleshooting Flow Chart - see:
7-9-4-4 "Main Power Supply Troubleshooting Flow Chart" on page 7-211.
5.) Main Power Supply Troubleshooting Flow Chart Procedures - see:
7-9-4-5 "Main Power Supply Troubleshooting Flow Chart Procedures" on page 7-212.
6.) Main Power Supply Logs (Examples of Main Power Supply Log) - see:
7-9-4-6 "Main Power Supply Logs" on page 7-214.
7.) Definition of Log Entries - see:
7-9-4-7 "Definition of Log Entries" on page 7-216.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-1 System not Booting Up
NOTE: Reset the rear panel Main Power Switch in order to de-energize the Main Power Supply before
removing or installing any board or modifying the system.
Table 7-51 System not booting up
Symptom Task / Conclusion
Check DS6 5V Standby on EPS If LED is ON, Main PS is ok for 5Vstby.

(BEP Door)
If OFF, Main PS may be defective.
If ON, EPS is passing 5Vstby to BEP PS.

Check DS3 5Vstby BEP
(BEP Door)
If OFF, EPS may be defective.
If ON, Main PS is ok for 48V.
Check DS5 48V OK (BEP Door) If OFF, check cable J1 that connects to the
Main PS. If the cable is connected, the Main
PS may be defective.
No Amber light on - ON/OFF
If ON, check the main cable from the BEP I/O
button
(J22) to the Operator Panel.
If OFF, short pin 12 to 24 momentarily (see:

BEP Cover Label) on the Test Connector of
the BEP I/O Board to by-pass the ON/OFF
Check LED on BEP PS 5Vstb button.
If that still does not turn on the BEP, unplug
J22 and try again. The BEP PS may be
defective.
If BEP turns ON, replace the cable and/or ON/

OFF button and/or OP Panel.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
When there is a failure that forces the Main Power Supply to shutdown, you will
only see the amber light trying to turn green once, until the rear panel Main
Power Switch is reset.
Measure test connector, pin 12 and ground

5Vstb.
Test connector pin (24V) to see if system turns

ON.
If there is no green light at all, - Use the Power ON/Off button on the
even after resetting the main Motherboard.
breaker
If system does not power up, replace:
1. BEP PS
2. EPS
3. BEP
If system powers up, troubleshoot connection

to OP Panel.
- Main Power Supply Fan failure may cause

this problem. Use a mirror to look at the fans;
check if they try to rotate at boot up (two
people may be needed to test this).
Mirror Viewing fans under Main Power

Amber light ON but no green light Supply
(or briefly ON) when pressing ON/
OFF button
If the green light appears

momentarily
If the fans do not move, tip the Main PS and
gently move each fan with a screw driver to
move them from their current position.
Sometimes removing the PS is enough
movement to move the fans.
If the Main PS powers up after the fans are

moved, you will see a failure message in the
Log Files. See: 7-9-4-6 "Main Power Supply
Logs" on page 7-214.
If the fans do not move after this step, the Main

PS needs replacement.
NOTE: This is a rare occurrence. Monitor site

for future occurrences.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
If all are present and FPO is ON, BEP PS may

be defective.
If so, you should be able to have 48V

Check LEDs for PS_ON, 5Vstb
measurable at Test connector of
and 48V in.
BEP I/O, pin 4.
Pin 3 is the +24 V (there is no LED) if coming

up in simulator mode.
Disconnect J22 and short pins 12 to 24, or use

Power Button to observe if the BEP powers up.
Troubleshoot the LCD on the
If it does not turn ON, then disconnect the
BEP PS isolation Op Panel.
cable to the backplane.
If not, check BEP devices.
Disconnect the following

devices to eliminate possible
causes of over current:
DVD drive
If power is reestablished, troubleshoot
V NAV drive bay
individual devices disconnected. If no power,
BEP I/O Board
replace BEP PS.
(Bottom connector inside
the BEP)
DVR card (if present, not a
likely problem)
Attempt to reset the BIOS as

LCD monitor has no display and described in Section 7-8-2-1 If Resetting the BEP BIOS Battery does not
the fans are running high "Resetting the BEP BIOS restore display, replace the BEP.
Memory" on page 7-179.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-1 System not Booting Up (contd)
Figure 7-156 BEP5 Power Supply Voltages
Figure 7-157

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-1 System not Booting Up (contd)
Figure 7-158 BEP6 Power Supply Voltages (BEP6 PowerBoard)
PLED2 ATX POWER OK
PLED3 POWER ON
PLED4 +3.3V
PLED5 +5V STBY
PLED6 +28V
PLED1 +5V
PLED7 POWER OK
PLED2 +48V
PLED2 +12V

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-2 System Boots, but cannot scan
Table 7-52 System boots, but cannot scan
If the system is booting, check error logs and

run diagnostics.
If 24V is present, then the simulator mode

may be caused by problems with GFI board or
cable. Check if the Fan Tray, under the Card
Rack, is running (Fan Tray uses 24V to run).
Fan Tray running means 24V is present.
Check if 24V is present If not running, try isolating the problem by
removing all cards in the Card Rack, except
Simulator mode/or no scan the GFI.
Observe the LEDs in the Card Rack.

If no lights are observed, disconnect GFI and
connect another board. Observe LEDs.
If the Fan Tray is not running, go to isolate the
Backplane.
If 24V is not present, see: Figure 7-160 "Main

Isolate cause Power Supply Troubleshooting Flow Chart" on
page 7-211.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-2 System Boots, but cannot scan (contd)
Use Figure 7-159 and Table 7-53 to locate P4 Pins.
Figure 7-159 Main Power Supply P4 Location and P4 Pins Location (reference)
Table 7-53 Main Power Supply P4 Pins
Pin Signal Name

Z B D Number
Z B D
2 GND GND GND

2
4 +6V +6V +6V
6 GND GND GND

4
8 -6V -6V +6V
6 10 GND GND GND
12 +15V AC_FAIL_N EXT_SYNC
14 -15V GND not used
16 not used not used not used
18 GND GND GND
20 +11V +11V +11V
22 +24V +24V +24V
24 +24V +24V +24V
26 +24V +24V +24V

32
28 GND GND GND
30 GND GND GND
32 GND GND GND

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-3 System boots, with hardware error - Lambda PS only
Table 7-54 System boots, with hardware error - Lambda PS only
The firmware in the PS may have been

corrupted and the system is not able to control
the power supply. The logfile.txt will report
USB errors since it cannot see the PS USB
device and will prevent scanning.
Example:
Monday,Jul 25 14:57:19,2011; Error ;
Replace the PS acqTransLayer(288); CMicrochipUsbIf::Open
Cannot open output pipe (last error
The latest Firmware Version is 0x00000000)
1.21. Check Firmware Version
System boots, with hardware on the PS label or check the Monday,Jul 25 14:57:19,2011; Info ;
error SysCfg.Csv file in the Alt D ifmgr(208); 14:57:19 HandleEvent:
logs. IMLoader(0), EAErrorHandler(2467),
(BSTR)HWCAP Invalid Hardware
Check if 24V is present Configuration, (BSTR)Invalid Hardware
Configuration(68) 6029.3ms }
NOTE: A long term solution is already in place

to prevent possible scenarios where the
firmware may get corrupted. This solution has
been implemented in production.
Manufacturing believes that only 50 units
shipped with this old firmware may be
susceptible to this problem.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-4 Main Power Supply Troubleshooting Flow Chart
Use the Flow Chart and Troubleshooting Flow Chart Procedures to isolate cause/failure(s).
Figure 7-160 Main Power Supply Troubleshooting Flow Chart
START Simulator Mode
No 24V
1. Power-down and wait for ON/OFF Button LED to turn from amber Yes 24V @
to OFF. Always wait for amber light to be completely OFF. TC-3 1. Power-down and wait for ON/OFF Button to turn OFF.
2. Remove all cards from Card Rack, Card Rack Fan Tray and 4DMC 2. Install GFI Card. Observe power LEDs on GFI.
board from Main Power Supply (Main PS). 3. Measure voltage at TC-3.
3. Inspect Backplane pins. Make sure none are broken or bent.
4. Power-up and locate Pin 3 of the Test Connector on BEP (will be Yes 24V @
referred to as TC-3). To locate the Test Connector and pin-out, TC-3,
see label on BEP door. TC-3 is connected to 24V of the Yes LED
Backplane. on GFI
No 24V @ TC-3,
5. Measure the voltage at TC-3.
No LED on GFI
No 24V @ TC-3
Replace GFI
Go to "Power Supply 24V Out Test."
Fail Go to "Remaining Parts Procedure.
Pass Procedure
complete.
Replace PS
No short
Go to "Short found No Simulator
Circuit Test." Mode Finished.
Replace PS and Power-down.

Backplane. Pass Install all removed parts.
Short found.
Go to New PS and Power-up.
Faulty parts
Backplane Test Check for Simulator Mode.
replaced.
Procedure.
24V @ TC-3
Fail Still Go to START.
Simulator Mode
1. Contact Support.
2. Return unneeded new parts.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-5 Main Power Supply Troubleshooting Flow Chart Procedures
Use these procedures with the Troubleshooting Flow Chart to isolate cause/failure(s).
7-9-4-5-1 Power Supply 24V Out Test

Power-down the LOGIQ E9. Turn off the rear panel Main Power Switch. Wait for the ON/OFF Button
LED to turn OFF. Unplug the MAINS Power supply cable from the Power Supply and the on-site MAINS
Power System.
You will need to make DC voltage measurements with a DMM on the 24V pin, Z 22 of connector P4, on
the Power Supply. See: Figure 7-159 "Main Power Supply P4 Location and P4 Pins Location
(reference)" on page 7-209. Disconnect the Main Power Supply from the Backplane connectors, leaving
all the other cables connected to the Power Supply. If you are unable to get the probes of the DMM into
pin Z 22 on P4, you may need to insert some longer (non-braided) wires into the pinholes so that they
extend far enough upward for you to make the measurements with the DMM probe. To do this, you may
also need to disconnect the remaining cables on the Power Supply so you are able to view and locate
pins Z 22 and ground pin Z 28 on P4 and insert the wires. Once the wires are in place, you MUST
reconnect all cables that were removed.
With the Power Supply still disconnected from the Backplane and all other cables connected, power-up
the system. Once the system has gone into simulator mode, measure the DC voltage between pins
Z 22 and Z 28 (ground). If the nominal voltage measured is between 23V and 25V, then this test passes.
If the voltage measured is not within that range, the test fails.
7-9-4-5-2 Short Circuit Test

With the system powered-down and the rear panel Main Power Switch off, disconnect the Power Supply
from the Backplane. Remove the BEP I/O to Backplane cable from the BEP.
Use a DMM to measure resistance (ohms) to test for electrical isolation between the 24V rail and
ground. Measure the resistance between the 24V pins of the Backplane and the ground pin. If the
resistance is low - less than 10 Mega ohms, then there is a short circuit in the Backplane. Replace the
Backplane and go to the beginning of the Short Circuit Test.
If there is no short between the 24V pins and ground, then go to the next step.
Measure the resistance between the TC-3 pin and the ground pin of the test connector. If the resistance
is low - less than 10 Mega ohms, then there is a short circuit in the I/O Board. Replace the I/O Board
and go to the beginning of this step. If there is no short found, go to the next step.
Reconnect the BEP I/O to Backplane cable. Measure the resistance between the TC-3 pin and the
ground pin of the test connector. If the resistance is low - less than 10 Mega ohms, then there is a short
circuit in the BEP I/O to Backplane cable. Replace the cable and go to the beginning of this step.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-5 Main Power Supply Troubleshooting Flow Chart Procedures (contd)
7-9-4-5-3 New PS and Backplane Test Procedure

Order a new Power Supply and Backplane.
With the system powered-down and the rear panel Main Power Switch off, install the new Backplane.
Power-up the system, wait for simulator mode and measure the voltage at TC-3. If the voltage measured
is between 23V and 25V, the test passes. Return the new Power Supply to service.
If the voltage at TC-3 is not in the acceptable range, power-down the system. Turn the rear panel Main
Power Switch off and install the new Power Supply. Power-up the system, wait for simulator mode and
measure the voltage at TC-3. If the voltage measured is between 23V and 25V, the test passes. Return
the new Power Supply to service. If the voltage is not in the acceptable range, the test fails.
With the system powered-down and the rear panel Main Power Switch off, re-install the old Backplane.
Power-up the system, wait for simulator mode and measure the voltage at TC-3. If the voltage measured
is between 23V and 25V, the new Backplane can be returned to service. If not, re-install the new
Backplane.
7-9-4-5-4 Remaining Parts Procedure

With the system powered-down and the ON/OFF Button LED OFF, install the Fan Tray. Power-up the
system. If the fans dont run or the GFI power LED is OFF, replace the Fan Tray and repeat this step.
If the fans are running and the GFI power LED is ON, go to the next step.
With the system powered-down and the ON/OFF Button LED OFF, install the next card in the rack.
Power-up the system and check all power LEDs on the cards. If any power LEDs go out on any of the
installed cards and/or 24V at TC-3 is no longer present, replace the card you installed and go to the
beginning of this step. If all card LEDs are ON, repeat this step for the next card to re-install, until all
cards are in place. If you find that all cards need to be replaced, stop. It is very unlikely that all cards
would be faulty. The problem is more likely the Power Supply. Replace the Power Supply and go to
START on the Troubleshooting Flow Chart.
7-9-4-5-5 Troubleshooting log files:

Applies to Main Power Supply Part Numbers 5205052, 5205052-2 and 5205052-3/-4 and
5205054-3.
When the system is able to boot up to some degree, the log files may give you more information about
voltage status.
The Main Power Supply has a log file that stores the last 10 Power Supply events in non-volatile
memory. During a normal system startup, the Power Supply may record 3 or 4 events in the log. The
log is circular, so the oldest entry will be over-written first. The Power Supply does not have a real time
clock. The Power Supply gets the date and time from the BEP. If an event is recorded in the log before
the Power Supply reads the date and time, the date and time fields will be filled with 0.
When the application software starts, the Power Supply Log is copied into logfile.txt. Possible log entries
are:
Table 7-55 Possible log entries
0 = NoDetail 5 = MaxP 10 = HighVoltageOVP 15 = Inverter fail
1 = AC error 6 = Log full 11 = Strobe 16 = keepalive fail
2 = MinV 7 = Startup 12 = FanFail
3 = MaxV 8 = LowVoltageOVP 13 = OverTemp
4 = MinP 9 = 48VOVP 14 = OverCurrentPrimary

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-6 Main Power Supply Logs
Examples of Main Power Supply Log

acqHouseKeeping(3068); TxPs event log seq[00] date[00/00/00] time[00:00:03]
source[System (rack) supply] type[Error] detail[TS On Strobe]
Friday,Feb 12 07:26:43,2010; Info; acqHouseKeeping(3068); TxPs event log seq[01]

date[00/00/00] time[00:02:19] source[System (rack) supply] type[Error] detail[Fan
Failure] -- REAL FAILURE (This is related to the fans in the Main Power Supply.)

date[02/11/10] time[11:08:22] source[System (rack) supply] type[No alarm] -- NORMAL
detail[Startup Date/Time]

date[02/11/10] time[11:16:36] source[System (rack) supply] type[Error] detail[AC
Error] -- NORMAL

date[00/00/00] time[00:00:03] source[System (rack) supply] type[Error] detail[TS On
Strobe] -- NORMAL

date[02/12/10] time[07:26:12] source[System (rack) supply] type[No alarm]
detail[Startup Date/Time]

date[02/12/10] time[07:26:15] source[System (rack) supply] type[No alarm] detail[TS
On Strobe] -- NORMAL

date[02/12/10] time[07:26:39] source[System (rack) supply] type[No alarm] detail[AC
Error] -- NORMAL

date[00/00/00] time[00:04:56] source[System (rack) supply] type[Error] detail[Fan
Failure] -- REAL FAILURE

date[00/00/00] time[00:05:13] source[System (rack) supply] type[Error] detail[AC
Error] -- NORMAL

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-6 Main Power Supply Logs (contd)
Examples of Main Power Supply Information at Startup - Normal Messages

Friday,Feb 12 07:27:52,2010; Info; acqHouseKeeping(3056); TxPs Alarm source[System
(rack) supply] type[Error] detail[TS On Strobe]
Friday,Feb 12 07:27:52,2010; Info; acqHouseKeeping(3056); TxPs TS On Strobe Event

discarded (root cause of HW watchdog stop will handle the event)
Friday,Feb 12 07:27:52,2010; Info; acqHouseKeeping(3060); TxPs alarm status AC-

V[116.4 VAC] AC-Freq[60 Hz] ACErr[no] RackOn[48V ACinv]
Friday,Feb 12 07:27:52,2010; Info; acqHouseKeeping(3060); +48V[48.02 Volts] +24V[3.64

Volts] +15V[0.00 Volts] -15V[-11.79 Volts] +12V[0.00 Volts] +6V[0.00 Volts] -6V[-1.86
Volts] +5V[4.96 Volts] -- THESE VOLTAGES WERE MEASURED AFTER THEY WERE
TURNED OFF. (This is not considered a failure.)
Friday,Feb 12 07:27:52,2010; Info; acqHouseKeeping(3060); inTemp[25 C] outTemp[26

C] +PMX V[27.11 Volts] -PMX V[-18.41 Volts] -- THESE VOLTAGES WERE MEASURED
AFTER THEY WERE TURNED OFF. (This is not considered a failure.)
Friday,Feb 12 07:27:52,2010; Info; acqHouseKeeping(3064); TxPs alarm info

source[Transmit supply 1] V+[0.32 Volts] V-[0.00 Volts] Power[0.00 Watts]
Current[0.000 Amps] Prgmd V[0.00 Volts]

Additional Examples of Main Power Supply Information at Startup - Normal Messages

Friday,Feb 12 07:26:39,2010; Info; acqHouseKeeping(3060); TxPs alarm status AC-
V[116.1 VAC] AC-Freq[60 Hz] ACErr[yes] RackOn[48V LV ACinv]
ACErr[yes] = (Power Supply was disconnected from AC. Not an indication of an error, unless followed
by battery operation message.)
[48V LV ACinv] = (Not an indication of an error, unless followed by battery operation message.)
Friday,Feb 12 07:26:39,2010; Info; acqHouseKeeping(3060); +48V[48.02 Volts]

+24V[24.07 Volts] +15V[15.00 Volts] -15V[-14.98 Volts] +12V[11.02 Volts] +6V[5.90
Volts] -6V[-6.03 Volts] +5V[4.95 Volts]
Friday,Feb 12 07:26:39,2010; Info; acqHouseKeeping(3060); inTemp[24 C] outTemp[24

C] +PMX V[0.00 Volts] -PMX V[0.00 Volts]

Friday,Feb 12 07:26:39,2010; Info; acqHouseKeeping(3056); TxPs Alarm source[System

(rack) supply] type[No alarm] detail[TS On Strobe]
Friday,Feb 12 07:26:39,2010; Info; acqTransLayer(3048); CUsbPsAdapter:Init Power

supply protocol version 4

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-4-6 Main Power Supply Logs (contd)
NOTE: Some power supplies may report a missing USB Hub, This is considered normal for MPS P/Ns
5205250-4 or later and 5205254-2 or later. This Hub is not used and has been depopulated.
USBConfig: Optional USB device "PowerSupply Hub" not found
7-9-4-7 Definition of Log Entries
The Power Supply reports information to the application software upon request. It eventually shows up
in logfile.txt. The application software requests the information (shown in examples). Most of the
information is self-explanatory. A few items need some explanation:
ACErr can be misleading. Whenever AC is removed from the Power Supply, it is considered to be an
error. Even if the system is OFF (Power Supply is really in stand-by) and then AC is removed. This is
normal operation and not really an error, but the Power Supply reports it as an error.
TS On Strobe error can also be misleading. The TS On Strobe comes from the GFI. This is a watchdog
signal that should always be there. If the GFI hangs, then TS On Strobe should stop. The Power
Supply will then turn the TS supplies OFF and report an error to the application software. But during
normal power-up, the Power Supply looks for the TS On Strobe signal. Because the GFI has not booted
up completely yet, it does not send out TS On Strobe right away. The Power Supply considers this an
error at every start-up (but it really is not). The application software clears this error before scanning.
Another area that is misleading is the reported voltage. For example, a system error occurs that requires
the card rack voltages to turn OFF. The Power Supply turns the voltages OFF. Then the application
software requests the system voltage information. The Power Supply will report some voltage between
0 volts and the normal voltage. This is not a voltage failure, but rather an effect of something else that
happened. Think of it as a domino effect. You need to look for the first domino in order to find the root
cause of the problem.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-5 EMI Prevention/Abatement

For EMI rules and details, see: Section 2-2-4 "EMI limitations" on page 2-5.
7-9-5-1 Different Power Outlet

Connect the unit to another power outlet and verify if the noise changes or disappear.
NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main
facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. See: Section 2-3-3 "Required
facility needs" on page 2-8.
7-9-5-2 Different System

Try another LOGIQ E9 at the same location and look for the same noise. If the noise is present on the
new system too, the noise is most likely from an external source/equipment.
7-9-5-3 Different Location

Move the scanner to another location and verify if the noise changes or disappear. This may help you
to locate an external noise source.
Try to move the scanner to:
another location inside the room

another room
another floor
7-9-5-4 Disconnect External Cables

Disconnect all external cables (network, all unused probes, ECG leads etc.) and verify if the noise
disappears.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-6 Image Artifacts Caused by Front End Boards

Image artifacts can be caused by any of the boards on the Front End. Artifacts are frequently due to the
Front End Power supply or board failures. It is important to use the Diagnostic tools on the service
interface to try to narrow down the failure to one or two boards.
Artifacts that look like white vertical lines, rain or snow cones in one or more areas of the image can
be troubleshot in different ways:
- One troubleshooting technique is to swap DRXs around to if the artifact moves. (Pulling out
the boards will keep the system from booting up; all the boards must be present for the system
to operate)
- Another approach is to run the Diagnostic Utilities to establish which channel the artifact
affects. A channel is a signal path sent through the system boards. Any of these boards in the
path can be causing the failure.
- Be aware that the problem may only appear with one mode, probe or preset.
- Check all the probes on all the ports. Remove all the probes, and then check each probe
singly in every port.
* If port-related, replace Connector board.
* If the artifact only occurs with one probe, replace probe.
* If the problem persists with the new probe, reload software. Do not reload presets until
you have tested the system with the default settings and be sure that the problem does
not persist. User Defined Presets can carry corruption back to the system.
- If you suspect that the problem may be caused by software corruption, please note: Corrupt
Presets can be identified by a problem in only one exam category using a specific probe, or
a particular mode with a specific probe. Use the Clean Userdef function under Scanner
Utilities, leaving the system with only the factory defaults. Be sure to back up the presets,
including Connectivity configuration, TCP/IP page and Option strings before deleting the User
defined files. DO NOT reload presets until you have tested the system.
* Before performing Clean User Defs function, perform an Alt+D to capture the logs and
preset files. If the problem is corrected with Clean User Defs, send in the log to the OLC
so that the corrupted preset files can be reviewed.
* After booting up the system, without starting any patient or accessing any menu, click on
the Service and log in. Click on Utilities, then on Scanner utilities and then on Clean User
Defs. Say OK and that will clean the folder. Shutdown the system immediately, using the
System Shutdown function under Scanner Utilities. After rebooting, the system will come
up with default settings. Only reload presets from disk if you are sure they were stored
before the corruption occurred. If only Imaging Presets are affected you can restore the
Connectivity presets by using the selective Restore function.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-7 Connectivity
For more information on Connectivity Setup, see:
Section 3-9 "Connectivity Setup and Tips" on page 3-40.
7-9-7-1 Cannot connect to something via the network

1.) Open command prompt.
2.) Ping 127.0.0.1", verify no lost packets. - error here try reimage
3.) Ping machine IP address given by hospital or default in manual, verify no lost packets. - error here
replace BEP
4.) Ping gateway if given one else skip to next, verify no lost packets. - error here verify network cable
plugged in, and lights blink on BEP. Double check subunit and gateway are correctly entered. This
point and beyond are hospital issues
5.) Ping another machine on the network, verify no lost packets. - error here try pinging from another
computer on the same network
7-9-7-2 No Ping
Check the speed of your connection. Media Type should be set for Auto Select. Remember that
every time the system is re-ghosted, that setting goes back to the default value.
Check cables. You need a crossover cable if you are connected directly to the device. Use a straight
cable whenever you go through a hub. The use of a hub is highly recommended.
Try connecting the network cable directly to the Ethernet port in the back of the BEP. If the
connection works, troubleshoot the cabling to the external device.
Check proper addressing. System should be under the same subnet or have a gateway address to
be able to connect to another subnet.
Verify that the network is active and running.
Check with your laptop if you can ping the LOGIQ E9 and the device (Printer or PACs).
7-9-7-3 No Verify
Check if the device supports Verify.
Check port and AE title info.
Check if device is up and running. It may be up but in an error status. Reboot the device if possible.
You also may need to reboot the LOGIQ E9.
Use Network Sniffer (Alt N).
Clean User Defs before reloading software in case there is a corrupt Connectivity.res file. Be sure
to do an Alt + D to capture logs before performing a Clean User Defs so that if the presets are
corrupt the logs can be sent to OLC for Engineering to review.
Reload software.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-7-4 System Pings and Verifies but does NOT Send

Check if device is up and running. It may be up but in an error status. Reboot the device if possible.
You also may need to reboot the LOGIQ E9.
Check device configuration.
Clean the spooler (F4). If the jobs in the spooler cannot be deleted, you need to do it in Windows.
These jobs may be corrupted or may be using a lot of space in the disk and cause problems sending
DICOM images. Insert the Service Key (Dongle), turn the system on and log in into maintenance
and exit to Windows (the application should not be running). Then go to Windows Explorer and look
for the file C:\Ichiro\target\jobqueue.res. Delete the file.
Delete the files from E:/Spooler and then the Recycle Bin. Reboot the system.
Check Connectivity configuration on the LOGIQ E9.
- If it is a printer, check that the printer supports the film type and format. Some printers dont
support different image sizes (or different formats, such as the Patient entry screen). If this is
the case, the spooler may show the job in a Done status but the images never get printed.
Try sending secondary capture.
- If it is a storage device, check if the type of image selected is supported (color, gray,
Multiframe)
- If it is a Worklist broker, you must use a Dataflow in which your Worklist is the primary input.
Otherwise it wont let you retrieve patients. Also check your Worklist search criteria
configuration. Refer to User Manual (Chapter 16).
Use Network Sniffer (Alt N).
Clean User Defs before reloading software in case there is a corrupt Connectivity.res file. Be sure
to do an Alt+D to capture logs before performing a Clean User Defs so that if the presets prove
corrupt the logs can be sent to OLC for Engineering to review.
Reload software.
7-9-7-5 Images Exit Spooler, But Do Not Display on Destination

Symptom: Images exit spooler but do not display on destination. Sometimes affects only Cine or
Secondary Capture.
Cause: Destination unable to view the particular photometric interpretation.
Solution: Check what compression and photometric interpretation the destination device supports and
adjust (if possible) on the destination service to the settings, which results in successful viewing.
NOTE: Note that compression JPEG will give photometric interpretation YBR_FULL_422, RLE will give
YBR_FULL and uncompressed will give RGB. The exception to this is if you enable B/W only,
then you will get photometric interpretation MONOCHROME2 for all compressions.
7-9-7-6 Adjust time-out for DICOM servers

If you are experiencing problems with slow responses from DICOM servers, increase the time-out in the
DICOM server properties dialog.
Problems with slow responses may result in images being re-sent automatically and low transfer rates.
The retry settings can be used to make jobs retry on bad networks. There is no need to set retries for
mobile (off-line) use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-8 Back End Processor

Also see 7-9-9 "Back End Processor (BEP) Troubleshooting" on page 7-223.
7-9-8-1 System Halt Errors - Lock ups or Intermittent Problems

Collect error Logs and send them to the OLC to be evaluated. Refer to 7-3-4 "Collecting a Screen
Capture with Logs" on page 7-5. It is extremely important to give as much detail as possible about
the occurrence of the problem and the date and time it showed up. On the scan screen, press
ALT + D. Reload software.
In the event of a hard drive failure, see: 7-9-8-9 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-222.
7-9-8-2 CD/DVD Drive Failures

Check that the media (disk capacity and speed) is supported.
- For the CD, the capacity is normally 700MB.
Check Windows for driver issues. Go to Control Panel > Administrative tools > Computer
management > Device Manager.
Re-install drivers if necessary.
If the CD drive is having problems, replace the CD Drive.
If the problem persists, replace the BEP.
7-9-8-3 Image CD/DVD not read

Put the CD or DVD in a laptop and see if it can be read. If it cannot be read, the disk is bad.
If it can be read make a copy at a low burn speed (8X). If the copy does not work, replace CD-RW
or DVD-R drive.
7-9-8-4 BEP Arrives Without Video

If the BEP arrives without video, re-seat the video card. Note: this only occurs if the BEP has been
dropped repeatedly in shipping.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-8-5 Simulator Mode

Check the connection of the PCIe cable on both the GFI board and BEP, or the connection of the
PCIe cable to the motherboard (J3 on MRX Configuration).
Check PS. You can visually check the LED status on the PS on the BEP. If any of the voltages is
missing, replace PS.
7-9-8-6 Lockups or Blue screens

Run the PC Diagnostics tests.
7-9-8-7 Files corrupt on boot

Possible error messages: ntldr missing or corrupt, "c:\windows\system32\config corrupt, hive
corrupt
Reimage and advise clinicians not to power off system by holding Power Button down.
In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-8-9 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-222.
7-9-8-8 Heres a way to power on the BEP

Short pins B12 and B24 (PWR SW and 5V_STDBY) in the Test Connector on the I/O board.
7-9-8-9 Hard Drive Failure

These are some common symptoms of hard drive failure. See: 7-5-14-4 "Hard Disk Drive Surface Scan"
on page 7-116, 7-5-14-5 "Hard Disk Drive Quick Test" on page 7-117 and 7-9-9 "Back End Processor
(BEP) Troubleshooting" on page 7-223 for diagnostic tests.
The results of hard drive diagnostics may indicate bad sectors on the hard drive.
The system may not boot because of bad sectors on the hard drive.
Attempts to re-image the C: partition may fail because of bad sectors on the C: partition.
The system may not boot and displays blue screen stop errors (dark blue screen with white text -
blue screen of death).
In the event of a hard drive failure, determine whether or not the customer requires recovery of data. If
the customer requires data recovery, collect the following information from the customer:
Customer contact name

Customer contact phone
Customer contact address
What data they require (e.g. studies for a date range or everything)
Whether the customer wants their data on CD or DVD media
Tell the customer GE will attempt to recover as much data as possible. Write a complaint and include
the above information, and do not discard or return the failed hard drive. A member of the Complaint
Handling Unit or the Installed Base team will contact the author ofthe complaint and provide instructions
for delivery of the failed hard drive to engineering. Engineering will then recover as much data as
possible and send the recovered data directly to the customer.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-9 Back End Processor (BEP) Troubleshooting

NOTE: When troubleshooting procedures refer to the GFI, this should be the MRX Board in a MRX
Configuration system. Troubleshooting procedures for a GFI Configuration MPS are essentially
the same for MRX.
Topics of this Section:
1.) System not booting up (or partially booting) - see:

7-9-9-1 "System not Booting Up (or partially booting)" on page 7-223.
2.) BEP Troubleshooting Flow Chart - see:
7-9-9-2 "BEP Troubleshooting Flow Chart" on page 7-227.
3.) Boot up sequence - see:
7-9-9-3 "Boot up sequence" on page 7-230.
7-9-9-1 System not Booting Up (or partially booting)
NOTE: Reset the rear panel Main Power Switch in order to de-energize the Main Power Supply before
removing or installing any board or modifying the system.
Table 7-56 System not booting up (or partially booting)
Symptoms / Causes Task / Resolutions
Collect error Logs and send them to the OLC to be evaluated. See: 7-3-4
"Collecting a Screen Capture with Logs" on page 7-5. It is extremely important
to give as much detail as possible about the occurrence of the problem and the
date and time it showed up. On the scan screen, press
ALT + D.
In the event of a Hard Drive failure, see: Table 7-56 "System not booting up
(or partially booting)" on page 7-223, "Hard Drive Failure."
Perform BEP Diagnostics. Run several loops of BEP diagnostics.
If Cause / Symptom occurs frequent enough at the site, take the system tothe
Minimum Configuration and see if the Cause / Symptom goes away.
Lock-ups and system errors may occur from high temperatures in the Card
Rack due to: a clogged air filter under the fan tray, clogged screens on the fan
tray assembly, clogged air intake to the BEP, bad fans in the BEP, and/or a
System Errors: Lock ups or clogged, rear filter under the main power supply.
Intermittent Problems. Inspect and clean all of the above.
If the filters were dirty or possibly clogged, reboot the system after cleaning the
screens/filters and monitor for reoccurrence of the problem. Also, check Card
Rack temperatures in the logfile-TempMon.txt file for abnormally high
operating temperatures. Readings between 65 and 80 degrees C can cause
lockups while readings of 80 degrees C or above will cause shut-downs. Also
check the BEP CPU temperature for operating temperatures greater than 45
degrees C.
If after cleaning the air filters, lock-ups and system errors continue to occur from
high temperatures in the Card Rack, components will need to be replaced.
If problems persist, reload Base Image and Application Software. See: 8-4-7
"Loading the Software" on page 8-10.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
1. If possible, run the BEP Diagnostics and Card Rack Diagnostics to try and
identify the problem. Run several loops of diagnostics.
2. If able to get into Windows, send the system logs to the OLC. If OLC finds
nothing in logs, have OLC contact Engineering before replacing the BEP.
3. Shutdowns may occur from overheating in the Card Rack due to: a clogged
air filter under the fan tray, clogged screens on the fan tray assembly, and/or a
clogged, rear filter under the main power supply. Inspect and clean all of the
above.
If the filters were dirty or possibly clogged, reboot the system after cleaning the
System boots up but reboots or
screens/filters and monitor for reoccurrence of the problem. Also, check the
shuts down without prompts, or
Card Rack temperatures in the logfile-TempMon.txt file for any temperatures
locks up.
above 80 degrees C including erroneous temperatures (i.e 1000 degrees C).
High temperatures persisting even with a clean filter or erroneous values will
require replacing the particular board where the temperatures are too high. Use
the temperatures in logfile-TempMon.txt file to identify which board needs
replacement.
4. BEP overheating. Check BEP CPU temperatures in the logfile-

TempMon.txt file for any temperatures above 70 degrees C. Temperatures
above 70 degrees C will cause the system to shutdown.
5. If steps 1 through 4 did not identify the cause, proceed to Figure 7-161
"Rebooting or Shutting Down Troubleshooting Flow Chart" on page 7-227.
1. If the system wont boot up/turn on at all, determine if the MPS or BEP PS is
defective. To do this, see: 7-9-4 "Main Power Supply (MPS) Troubleshooting"
on page 7-202 to determine if the Main PS is defective.
2. If the system partially boots up, i.e. wont boot past BIOS or fails booting to
System partially boots up, will not application software or booting into Windows, see: Figure 7-162
boot up, or is not powering on. "Troubleshooting Partial Boot - System is stuck in BIOS or the system boots
past BIOS, then displays disk boot failure in DOS screen" on page 7-228.
To power on the BEP without using the ON/OFF Button:

Short pins B12 and B24 (PWR SW and 5V_STDBY) in the Test Connector on
the I/O Board.
System fails to boot and BEP See: 5-11-8-4 "BIOS Beep Codes" on page 5-120.
makes beeping noise.
Simulator Mode: "Bulls eyes" on Check the connection of the PCIe cable on both the GFI board and BEP or the
imaging screen (black circleswith connection of the PCIe cable to the motherboard (J3 on MRX Configuration).
white rings). Also see 7-9-4 "Main Power Supply (MPS) Troubleshooting" on page 7-202.
Check that the media (disk capacity and speed) is supported.

- For the CD, the capacity is normally 700MB.
Check Windows for driver issues. Go to Control Panel > Administrative tools >
CD/DVD Drive Failures. Computer management > Device Manager.
Re-install drivers if necessary.
If the CD Drive is having problems, replace the CD Drive.
If the problem persists, replace the BEP.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Put the CD or DVD in a laptop and see if it can be read. If it cannot be read, the
disk is bad.
Image CD/DVD is not being read.
If it can be read, make a copy at a low burn speed (8X). If the copy does not
work, replace the CD-RW or DVD-R Drive.
Files corrupt on boot up with: Re-image and advise clinicians not to power off the system by holding down the
power button.
Possible error messages: ntldr
missing or corrupt, In the event of a Hard Drive failure, see: Table 7-56 "System not booting up (or
"c:\windows\system32\config partially booting)" on page 7-223, "Hard Drive Failure."
corrupt,
hive corrupt
Hard Drive Failure. In the event of a Hard Drive failure, determine whether or not the customer
requires recovery of data. If the customer requires data recovery, collect the
These are some common following information from the customer:
symptoms of Hard Drive failure. Customer contact name
See: 7-5-14-4 "Hard Disk Drive Customer contact phone
Surface Scan" on page 7-116 and Customer contact address
7-5-14-5 "Hard Disk Drive Quick What data they require (e.g. studies for a date range or everything)
Test" on page 7-117 for Whether the customer wants their data on CD or DVD media
Diagnostic Tests.
The results of Hard Drive Tell the customer GE will attempt to recover as much data as possible. Write a
Diagnostics may indicate bad complaint and include the above information. DO NOT discard or return the
sectors on the Hard Drive. failed Hard Drive. A member of the Complaint Handling Unit or the Installed
The system may not boot up Base team will contact the author of the complaint and provide instructions for
because of bad sectors on the delivery of the failed Hard Drive to engineering. Engineering will then recover
Hard Drive. as much data as possible and send the recovered data directly to the customer.
Attempts to re-image the
C: partition may fail because of
bad sectors on the C: partition.
The system maynot boot up and
displays a blue screen with stop
errors (dark blue screen with
white text).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
1. If the Touch Panel has no video, re-seat the USB cable on the J100 of the
BEP. If there is still no video after 1 minute, power down the system. Open the
upper OP Panel and re-seat all cables on the back of the Touch Panel, and re-
seat all cables on the bulkhead board (small circuit board behind Touch Panel).
Inspect all cables for pinching and/or damage. Replace anything damaged.
Rule out the Touch Panel video port, J100 (See BEP Door Label.), as a
problem by plugging in a mouse. If the mouse works, then troubleshoot the
upper OP Panel and cables.
If the Touch Panel video does not display, replace the Touch Panel and the
main cable harness. Reload any drivers.
2. If the LCD monitor has no video and the fans are running high, attempt to
reset the BIOS as described in Section 7-8-2-1 "Resetting the BEP BIOS
Memory" on page 7-179. If resetting the BIOS does not work, proceed to
System has no video.
Step 3.
3. If the LCD monitor has no video, power down the system. Re-seat the Video
Card and flex cable in the BEP, on the motherboard and the I/O Board. If the
system has a DVR Card, disconnect the flex cable from the DVR and connect
it to the Video Card. If video returns, replace the DVR Card.
If video is still not present, re-seat the video cable connector underneath the
upper OP Panel and inspect the cable for any damage.
If video is still not present after trying the above procedure, then plug a monitor
into the rear DVI port on the BEP. Use a DVI or VGA monitor with an adapter.
If video is present on the separate monitor, replace the flex cable. If video does
not return, order a new flex cable, I/O Board, and BEP. Try the flex cable and
I/O Board first to determine if they are the cause. Resort to replacing the BEP
last.
BEP5.x ONLY, not applicable to

BEP6.x.
Ticking or Popping sound in

speakers after system has fully
booted (speaker noise during
boot up is common and not a
problem).
1. Single tick - about every 1. The known causes of this noise is a blown fuse in the BEP EPS or the EPS
second that matches the blinking battery cable is not fully seated in the connector.
of the DS2 LED on the BEP door.
Check the fuse in the EPS on the BEP. Replace the fuse if itis blown. If the fuse
is not blown, re-seat the battery cable on the EPS circuit board. If the noise
does not go away, order a new battery pack assembly with cable.
2. Double ticks - about every two 2. Replace the I/O Board.

seconds, no blinking LEDS.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-9-2 BEP Troubleshooting Flow Chart
Use the Flow Chart isolate cause/failure(s).
Figure 7-161 Rebooting or Shutting Down Troubleshooting Flow Chart
NOTE: If unfamiliar with the Boot Up

Sequence, see: 7-9-9-3 "Boot up
sequence" on page 7-230.
Problem persists.
1. Perform Minimum Configuration Steps.
START
2. Reboot.
System boots to simulator mode.

Problem not present.
Issue is likely to be with the Card Rack, or the BEP I/O 1. Reconnect DVD Cables. Problem persists.
to Backplane Cable, or the PCIe Cable to GFI. 2. Reload Base Load Image and
Troubleshoot these components. Application Software.
Problem not present.
Run HD Surface Test.
Pass, but problem Fails

Problem was a Base Load Image and
persists.
Application Software issue.
Monitor site for a reoccurrence.
Replace HD.
Occurs later.
Replace HD.
Problem persists. Order HD and BEP.
Determine which causes problem,
HD or BEP and return unneeded
Minimum Configuration Steps new part.
1. Power-down and disconnect the mains
power cable from the wall outlet. Problem not
2. GFI - Disconnect the BEP I/O to present.
Contact OLC,
Backplane Cable (cable that connects the
or ZSE.
I/O Board to the Card Rack).
Finished.
3. GFI - Disconnect the GFI Cable (PCIe to GFI 2).
2-3. MRX - Disconnect the BEP to MRX
Backplane Cable.
4. Disconnect the DVD Drive and
DVD power (SATA 1 Cable - DVR).
5. Disconnect the DVR, if present (inside the
BEP, next to the Video Card).
6. Disconnect the V Nav, if present (Bay Bird).
7. Disconnect the Patient I/O,
if present (Harness inside the BEP).
8. Power-up. System should reboot three times
because it is looking for the Card Rack, then
should be in Simulator Mode.
- The 48VDC to the XYZ be removed.
- DVI to the LCD and J22 to the Upper Op Panel.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-9-2 BEP Troubleshooting Flow Chart (contd)
Use this Flow Chart to Troubleshoot Partial Boot (system is stuck in BIOS or the system boots past
BIOS, then displays disk boot failure in DOS screen) to isolate cause/failure(s).
Figure 7-162 Troubleshooting Partial Boot -

System is stuck in BIOS or the system boots past BIOS, then displays disk boot failure in DOS screen

Sequence, see: 7-9-9-3 "Boot up
System displays
sequence" on page 7-230. System boots past BIOS, then displays
1. Power down. disk boot failure.
disk boot failure in DOS screen.
START Power ON system. 2. Re-seat HD Cable / SATA.
3. Power-up (reboot).
System stuck
in BIOS. System boots
System boots
without problems.
without problems.
Replace HD.
Finished.
Still displays
disk boot failure.
Finished.
Splash Screen goes away and screen
1. Reboot. displays "Detecting IDE drives" message.
2 Press "Tab" key repeatedly,
through BIOS (do not hold down). Contact OLC,
or ZSE.
System stays at
"splash" screen. System boots
past BIOS.
2. Reboot.
System stays at
"splash" screen.
Determine which
component causes
Replace BEP. error and troubleshoot.
System boots
Minimum Configuration Steps 1. Disconnect DVD Drive past BIOS.
1. Power-down and disconnect the mains from BEP.
power cable from the wall outlet. 2. Re-seat HD Cables.
2. GFI - Disconnect the BEP I/O to System still
Backplane Cable (cable that connects the stuck in BIOS.
3. GFI - Disconnect the GFI Cable (PCIe to GFI 2). Reconnect DVD if system gets stuck
2-3. MRX - Disconnect the BEP to MRX Replace HD. in BIOS, replace DVD and Cable.
Backplane Cable. Determine which Determine which components
4. Disconnect the DVD Drive and component caused error. causes the error and troubleshoot.
DVD power (SATA 1 Cable - DVR). Return unneeded parts. Return unneeded parts.
6. Disconnect the V Nav, if present (Bay Bird).
7. Disconnect the Patient I/O,
if present (Harness inside the BEP).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-9-2 BEP Troubleshooting Flow Chart (contd)
Use the Flow Chart to Troubleshoot Partial Boot (system cannot boot into Windows or System boots
past Windows, but Application Software crashes) to isolate cause/failure(s).
Figure 7-163 Troubleshooting Partial Boot (continued) -

System cannot boot into Windows or System boots past Windows, but Application Software crashes

Sequence, see 7-9-9-3 "Boot up
sequence" on page 7-230. System boots past Windows, but
Application Software crashes. System boots to
START Reload Base Image Application.
Power ON system. Fail
and Application Run HD Drive
Software. Surface Test.
Load Application
System cannot boot Pass
Software ONLY. Application
into Windows.
Software crashes.
Finished. Replace HD.

System boots.
Reload Base Image. Application Software goes into
Simulator Mode, no crash.
Still wont boot. (The system will attempt to
reboot three times before going
into Simulator Mode.)
2. Reboot.
Application Software
still crashes.
Determine which component from
Minimum Configuration Steps the configuration causes crash.
1. Power-down and disconnect the mains Contact OLC,
power cable from the wall outlet. or ZSE.
2. GFI - Disconnect the BEP I/O to
Backplane Cable (cable that connects the
System
boots.
3. GFI - Disconnect the GFI Cable (PCIe to GFI 2). 1. Perform Minimum Configuration Steps. Determine which component
2-3. MRX - Disconnect the BEP to MRX 2. Reboot. was causing the boot issue.
Backplane Cable.
4. Disconnect the DVD Drive and System does not boot.
DVD power (SATA 1 Cable - DVR).
6. Disconnect the V Nav, if present (Bay Bird). Contact OLC, or ZSE.
7. Disconnect the Patient I/O, May need to determine if
if present (Harness inside the BEP). problem is in the BEP or HD.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-9-3 Boot up sequence
Table 7-57 Boot Up Sequence
Description of Function Screen Information or Display
Pressing "DEL" key during the

first part of the boot up sequence
Optimize or change BIOS settings.
will bring up the BIOS Password
Screen.
BIOS Information Screen
BIOS Load.
System Information Screen
Devices from CPU
Blank Blue screen on Main LCD

and Touch Panel display.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

R3.x and earlier
Windows background splash on

Main LCD Display Windows R4.x and later
load/boot process in progress.
Message displays if Service Key

is present and lights up during
boot.
Maintenance Access dialog if

Service Key is present during
boot.
Select Cancel.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Applications load/boot (a couple

of flashes occur before it
completes).
R3.x and earlier
Windows background splash on

R4.x and later
Touch Panel LCD Display.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Scan Screen will display,
or
Simulator Mode Screen will

display at Minimum Configuration
or system problem.
In Simulator Mode, the scan
screen may display pulsatile
circles or no scan at all, but will
allow other application functions
to run normally.
R3.x and earlier shown
Successful boot into Windows

before Application installed or
when using Service Key to
access desktop.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Ticking or Popping sound in

speakers after system has fully
booted (speaker noise during
boot up is common and not a
problem).
1. Single tick - about every 1. The known causes of this noise is a blown fuse in the BEP EPS or the EPS
second that matches the blinking battery cable is not fully seated in the connector.
of the DS2 LED on the BEP door.
Check the fuse in the EPS on the BEP. Replace the fuse if itis blown. If the fuse
is not blown, re-seat the battery cable on the EPS circuit board. If the noise
does not go away, order a new battery pack assembly with cable.
2. Double ticks - about every two 2. Replace the I/O Board.

seconds, no blinking LEDS.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-10-1 No Audio
See: 7-5-16-3 "Audio (Sound)" on page 7-129 and I/O Board Audio Test on 7-5-12-11 "I/O Board Tests"
on page 7-83 for audio diagnostic tests.
Check volume settings in the application and also in Windows.

Use headphones, (the type that you use on a personal CD player or a laptop) to test the audio output
directly from the back of the BEP.
- If no Audio is present on the BEP, reload software. If the problem persists, replace the BEP.
- If Audio is present, follow the audio signal to the Op Panel (the audio amplifier is located in
the upper Op panel). The Audio output from the BEP goes to the Internal I/O and from there
to the Op Assembly (use an adapter to plug the headphones to the RCA outputs of the Internal
I/O). If Audio outputs are working, replace Upper Op Assembly. Otherwise replace Internal I/
O board.
- Always measure the speakers impedance; it should measure approximately 7 ohms. If
speakers are bad, it is possible that the amplifier on the Upper Op Assembly might be
defective, too.
7-9-10-2 No Video on Touch Panel Display

See: 7-5-14-6 "Video Card" on page 7-118 and the video status test on 7-5-12-11 "I/O Board Tests" on
page 7-83 for video card diagnostic tests.
If the video is too dim, has dimmed areas or there is no video at all, replace the HV LCD inverter.
If the HV LCD inverter is burnt, there is a possibility that the Digital Video Card on the PC also got
damaged; in that case you can replace the Video Card.
Replace the Back End Processor if the problem continues.
Replace upper panel assembly.
7-9-10-3 Wrong Key Activated on the Touch Panel

Perform Touch Screen Verification Utility, check first before calibrating. See: 7-5-16-1 "Keyboard"
on page 7-126.
Calibrate touch panel.
Replace Upper Panel Assembly.
7-9-10-4 Wrong System Date and Time

Order CMOS Battery and BIOS Blaster CD, refer to BEP parts Section 9-13 "Back End Processor
(BEP) parts" on page 9-72.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-10-5 Incorrect System Time When Daylight Savings Time Changes

1.) From the touch panel, press Utility -> System.
2.) Select Date/Time.
3.) On the Date and Time Properties screen, select the Time Zone tab.
4.) Disable the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes checkbox, select Apply.
5.) Select the Date & Time tab.
6.) Set the proper time for the systems location, and then select OK.
7.) Select Save.
7-9-10-6 Touch Panel Not Responding

Perform Touch Screen Verification Utility, check first before calibrating. Access the Service
interface (Click on the Wrench) and go to Diagnostics > Service Diagnostics > Service Diagnostics
> Touch Panel > TP Cal Verification.
Calibrate touch panel. Access the Service interface and go to Diagnostics > Service Diagnostics >
Service Diagnostics > Touch Panel > TP Calibration.
Reload software.
Replace Upper Panel Assembly.
7-9-10-7 Service Password Does Not Respond When System Set to Greek/Russian Language (SN 70392)
Although you may change the language settings/keyboard to respond to different languages, the
keyboard must to be set to English to enter the password into the Service Browser or Maintenance
Access window.
If you enter the service password into the Service Browser login or Maintenance login, and it does
not respond: select the link to return to the Login page, press ALT+SHIFT to toggle the keyboard
to English, and enter the service password again.
7-9-10-8 Z Movement fails

If the Top Console does not lower, but it can be raised, this indicates that one of the control switches
is stuck in Up position.
If you have to help the Top Console up when raising it, but the motor assistance works when
lowering the Top Console, it indicates that the gas spring inside the Z Mechanism is failing.
- Replace the Z Mechanism.
7-9-11 Probes
7-9-11-1 Probe Recognition

Check all the probes on all the ports. Remove all the probes, and then check each probe singly in
every port.
- If the problems persist with all the probes, replace the GRLY board.
- If only one probe fails to be recognized, clean User Defs to check if the problem is caused by
corrupted presets. If the problem is not resolved, replace the probe.
7-9-11-2 V Nav Inside Sensors Failure

In the event that the V Nav Inside sensors would fail, the probe would continue to be recognized as a
V Nav Inside probe and would continue to scan correctly. On entry into V Nav, the LOGIQ E9 would
report a failure to initialize or connect to the V Nav sensors.
V Nav inside probes could be used with external sensors. In the event of an initialization / connection
failure to the V Nav Inside sensor, the LOGIQ E9 will automatically switch to and try to initialize the
external sensors.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-11-3 TEE Probe Temperature Too High

Use the flow chart below to investigate the heat problem.
Figure 7-164 TEE Probe Temperature Too High
TEE probe temperature too high!
Is the probe temperature too high NO

with all TEE probes?
YES
Replace TEE probe.
Replace GFI/MRX Board.
7-9-12 System Temperature Too High (System Overheating)

When the temperature inside the LOGIQ E9 increases, the fan speed will increase to cool down the
system. If the air filters become too dusty, a higher fan speed is required to keep the air stream at the
sufficient level. When the fan speed increases, the fan noise will also increase. If the cooling air stream
is insufficient to stabilize the interior temperature within the operating margin, the system will stop
operating.
Solution:
Clear the BEP Fan(s) intake(s), all filters and the Fan Tray screen of any debris.
Clean or replace the filters. See: 8-8-3 "Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement /
cleaning" on page 8-339 or 8-8-4 "Bottom Filter installation (looped type strap)" on page 8-344.
If a fan is worn out, it may be noisy, or stop working.
Solution: Replace the fan tray.
NOTE: Whenever the left Side Cover is removed, clear the BEP Fan(s) intake(s) of any debris.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-13 Software
7-9-13-1 Base Image Load Troubleshooting

If you have trouble while loading Base Image software try the following:
Copy the software CD to your laptop.

Try to load this copy of the CD to the scanner.
If the copy doesnt load properly, the Base Image software CD is corrupt. You need to get a new CD.
Read error on Base Image load - Replace HDD see: 8-11-12 "BEP HDD (Hard Disk Drive) replacement
- BEP5.x" on page 8-491.
7-9-13-2 Image or Patient Data Loss

If you experience image or patient data loss, generate an Alt+D log and/or if possible, generate a copy
of the HDD data and submit a complaint to the appropriate make center.
7-9-13-3 Cannot find d:\Export\Service folder

For Application software R2.x.x or earlier, the common symptom is that Alt+D logs cannot be saved in
the Export\Service directory or the OnLine Center cannot capture logs. In R1.x.x, if the customerdeletes
the content of the Export directory while in the Save As screen, the Service directory will be deleted. To
prevent this from happening, make sure the customer deletes individual images while in Save As. If the
folder has been deleted, ask the customer to go to scan screen and press CNTRL PRTSCRN, that will
acquire an image for Service and the folder will be automatically created. This can also be done
remotely.
7-9-14 4D Option Troubleshooting
Table 7-58 4D Option Troubleshooting
Symptom Action
1. Make sure 4D option is installed

2. Try another 3D/4D probe. If the new probe works, you have a bad probe.
Cannot select probe from touch panel 3. Run Diags on 4D Motor Controller.
4. Replace cable from motor control to PS (flex cable).
5. Replace motor controller
1. Try another 3D/4D probe. If the new probe works, you have a bad probe.
Probe will not sweep. No image update. 2. Replace cable from motor control to PS (flex cable).
3. Replace motor controller.
Probe will sweep for a short time, then

1. Try another 3D/4D probe. If the new probe works, you have a bad probe
stops. Image update halts.
1. Tray another 3D/4D probe of a different type. If the new probe shows the same
IQ problem, this is probably not a 3D/4D specific issue. If the new probe does not
Black image area in the 2D (B-Mode)
have the IQ problem, go to number 2 below.
image.
2. Try another 3D/4D probe of the same type. If the new probe images correctly,
you have a bad probe.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-15 Shear Wave Option Troubleshooting
Table 7-59 Shear Wave Option Troubleshooting
Symptom Action
Is Option Hardware installed properly and Option String present?

Shear Wave Control is not available on the
User will not be able to select the Shear Wave Control on the Touch Screen
Touch Screen.
(Control is not available).
Reboot to check if Shear Wave is still available.

While the LOGIQ E9 is OFF and Capacitor Pack is discharged, check Capacitor
Performance is poor. Cable connections.
NOTE: Both Capacitor Pack Module LEDs (two modules, four LEDs total) should
Fuse is blown or has blown while in Shear be lit after few seconds of booting up (visible through the Capacitor Pack Cover).
Wave (the fuse IS NOT replaceable). BCM2 is only used during CW Doppler + Simultaneous.
If all Capacitors are NOT charging, the charge time will be affected. Even if the
LEDs are lit. At boot up the system should detect the failure and disable Shear
Wave.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-16 Log Analysis - R3.x and earlier

NOTE: The examples used in this section are from a GFI Configuration system.
Here is an example of how to analyze a Log:
1.) Startup Logging

; Starting log system
Same familiar comment to denote startup of the system.
; ScDisplayType(364); Monitor found in registry: MFG: "ENC", Model: "GA700", Serial Number: "20037077"
; EchoLoader(364); Primary display resolution set to High by SmartVideoResolution (display = GA700)
; Preset reset(364); SaveToStream change[0] hospital [GE Healthcare]
; Warning; ScResCat(364); Couldn't find filename to save to.
; Info ; EchoLoader(364); Primary display resolution set to 1280 x 1024 (60 Hz refresh - fallback from 75)
; GFI 0x02280108 , GFI_P2P_filter 0x00021006 driver versions are opened

; Downloading LSW from file: gfireboot.out
Driver for communication with GFI started.

; Downloading LSW from file: gfi2tr.out
; Downloading FPGA contents from file: C:\Scanner\target/firmware/GFI/gfi2_fpga_1.bin
GFI FPGA and DSP firmware downloaded
; ScFEProxy(364); FEProxy::targetPresent() is true.
The card rack HW has been detected and system is being booted normally.
; ConfigLog(364); TARGET_ROOT: "C:\Scanner\target"

; ConfigLog(364); TEST_ROOT: "D:\Scanner\target"
; ConfigLog(364); TEMP: "D:\temp"
; ConfigLog(364); Overall SW version R1.0.3C
; ConfigLog(364); Overall SW Part Number 5193239-4

; ConfigLog(364); SW Build Version XP-Shadow_mke_LOGIQ E9_p1
; ConfigLog(364); SW Build Date Mon Jul 07 17:01:45 2008
; ConfigLog(364); Ghost Part Number 5135125-20 Rev 3

; ConfigLog(364); Ghost Date 2008-06-27 14:00
; ConfigLog(364); BEP Version in Ghost = 5
Report of the SW and Base load version.

; ConfigLog(364); Processor Identifier = x86 Family 6 Model 15 Stepping 2, GenuineIntel
; ConfigLog(364); Number of Processor = 2

; AcqLoader(364); Cannot find file none.dll
; ScFEProxy(364); SSN: E00009

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-16 Log Analysis - R3.x and earlier (contd)

System serial number.
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Part Number (P/N): 5161631
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Functional Revision (FNRV): 2A
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Product Code (PRD): GFI
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Pole (PLE): mke
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Serial Number (SN): BEYTBK
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYTBK
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX4 Part Number (P/N): 5301040-2
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX4 Functional Revision (FNRV): 2B
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX4 Product Code (PRD): DRX

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX4 Pole (PLE): mke
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX4 Serial Number (SN): BEYZK1
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX4 Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYZK1

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX3 Serial Number (SN): BEYZJH
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX3 Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYZJH
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX2 Serial Number (SN): BEYZJE
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX2 Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYZJE
; acqGfi(3272); hardwarepck:***HwConfig::RFI_GetHwConfig(3) offst 0 len=128 failed
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GTX4 Part Number (P/N): 5201044-01
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GTX4 Functional Revision (FNRV): 2A
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GTX4 Product Code (PRD): GTX

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GTX4 Pole (PLE): yms
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GTX4 Serial Number (SN): 00019
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GTX4 Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): 00019

PROPRIETARY TO GE


; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRX2 Part Number (P/N): GA200295
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRX2 Functional Revision (FNRV): 2B
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRX2 Product Code (PRD): GRX

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRX2 Pole (PLE): nor
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRX2 Serial Number (SN): 200710-014
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRX2 Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): WO0710107014
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRX1 Functional Revision (FNRV): 2A

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Part Number (P/N): GA200296

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Functional Revision (FNRV): 2B
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Product Code (PRD): GRLY
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Pole (PLE): nor

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Serial Number (SN): 200718-009
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): WO0718093009

PROPRIETARY TO GE

; acqGfi(3272); hardwarepck:HwConfig::RFI_GetHwConfig: Reading non-existing device(-1)
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Part Number (P/N): 5205052
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Functional Revision (FNRV): 1A
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Product Code (PRD): TXPS
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Pole (PLE): mke
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Serial Number (SN): 00018
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): 00018
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Part Number (P/N): 5141000-3
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Functional Revision (FNRV): 1A
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Product Code (PRD): IOB
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Pole (PLE): mke
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Serial Number (SN): BEYZMJ
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYZMJ
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Part Number (P/N): 5161814
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Functional Revision (FNRV): 2A
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Product Code (PRD): BP

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Pole (PLE): mke
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Serial Number (SN): 324699
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): 324699
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Part Number (P/N): 5393800-2

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Functional Revision (FNRV): 1A
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Product Code (PRD): BEPPS
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Pole (PLE): mke

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Serial Number (SN): BEYZMG
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYZMG
VPD Configuration Reads
; acqHWCap(1884); HW Rack Configuration Valid: LOGIQ E9 Configuration 2 (IC2) - NoCW, MLA4, GTX2.1 Lambda PS

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-17 Log Analysis - R4.x

Here is an example of how to analyze a Log:
1.) Startup Logging

; Starting log system
Same familiar comment to denote startup of the system.
; ScDisplayType(364); Monitor found in registry: MFG: "ENC", Model: "GA700", Serial Number: "20037077"
; EchoLoader(364); Primary display resolution set to High by SmartVideoResolution (display = GA700)
; Preset reset(364); SaveToStream change[0] hospital [GE Healthcare]
; Warning; ScResCat(364); Couldn't find filename to save to.
; Info ; EchoLoader(364); Primary display resolution set to 1280 x 1024 (60 Hz refresh - fallback from 75)
; GFI 0x02280108 , GFI_P2P_filter 0x00021006 driver versions are opened

; Downloading LSW from file: gfireboot.out
Driver for communication with GFI started.

; Downloading LSW from file: gfi2tr.out
; Downloading FPGA contents from file: C:\Scanner\target/firmware/GFI/gfi2_fpga_1.bin
GFI FPGA and DSP firmware downloaded
; ScFEProxy(364); FEProxy::targetPresent() is true.
The card rack HW has been detected and system is being booted normally.
; ConfigLog(364); TARGET_ROOT: "C:\Scanner\target"

; ConfigLog(364); TEST_ROOT: "D:\Scanner\target"
; ConfigLog(364); TEMP: "D:\temp"

; ConfigLog(364); Overall SW version R1.0.3C
; ConfigLog(364); Overall SW Part Number 5193239-4
; ConfigLog(364); SW Build Version XP-Shadow_mke_LOGIQ E9_p1
; ConfigLog(364); SW Build Date Mon Jul 07 17:01:45 2008
; ConfigLog(364); Ghost Part Number 5135125-20 Rev 3
; ConfigLog(364); Ghost Date 2008-06-27 14:00
; ConfigLog(364); BEP Version in Ghost = 5
Report of the SW and Base load version.

; ConfigLog(364); Processor Identifier = x86 Family 6 Model 15 Stepping 2, GenuineIntel
; ConfigLog(364); Number of Processor = 2
; AcqLoader(364); Cannot find file none.dll
; ScFEProxy(364); SSN: E00009

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-17 Log Analysis - R4.x (contd)

System serial number.
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Part Number (P/N): 5161631
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Functional Revision (FNRV): 2A
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Product Code (PRD): GFI
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Pole (PLE): mke
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Serial Number (SN): BEYTBK
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GFI Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYTBK

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX4 Serial Number (SN): BEYZK1
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX4 Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYZK1

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX3 Serial Number (SN): BEYZJH
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX3 Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYZJH
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX2 Serial Number (SN): BEYZJE
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for DRX2 Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYZJE


PROPRIETARY TO GE


; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRX2 Functional Revision (FNRV): 2B

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRX1 Functional Revision (FNRV): 2A

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Part Number (P/N): GA200296

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Functional Revision (FNRV): 2B
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Product Code (PRD): GRLY
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Pole (PLE): nor

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Serial Number (SN): 200718-009
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for GRLY Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): WO0718093009

PROPRIETARY TO GE

; acqGfi(3272); hardwarepck:HwConfig::RFI_GetHwConfig: Reading non-existing device(-1)
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Part Number (P/N): 5205052
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Functional Revision (FNRV): 1A
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Product Code (PRD): TXPS
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Pole (PLE): mke
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Serial Number (SN): 00018
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for TXPS Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): 00018
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Part Number (P/N): 5141000-3
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Functional Revision (FNRV): 1A
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Product Code (PRD): IOB
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Pole (PLE): mke
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Serial Number (SN): BEYZMJ
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for IOB Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYZMJ
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Part Number (P/N): 5161814
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Functional Revision (FNRV): 2A
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Product Code (PRD): BP

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Pole (PLE): mke
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Serial Number (SN): 324699
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BP Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): 324699
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Part Number (P/N): 5393800-2

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Functional Revision (FNRV): 1A
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Product Code (PRD): BEPPS
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Pole (PLE): mke

; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Serial Number (SN): BEYZMG
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); Vpd for BEPPS Bar Code Serial Number (BCSN): BEYZMG
VPD Configuration Reads
; acqHWCap(1884); HW Rack Configuration Valid: LOGIQ E9 Configuration 2 (IC2) - NoCW, MLA4, GTX2.1 Lambda PS

PROPRIETARY TO GE

HW Confuration Valid and boot will continue
; acqHWCap(1884); HWRH::AddToPartNumToBoardMap(): part num BP_FuncRev2A board name BP board revision 2A
; acqHWCap(1884); HWRH::AddToPartNumToBoardMap(): part num DRX_FuncRev2B board name DRX board revision 2B
; acqHWCap(1884); HWRH::AddToPartNumToBoardMap(): part num FECache board name FECache Configuration Settings
board revision 1
; acqHWCap(1884); HWRH::AddToPartNumToBoardMap(): part num GFI_FuncRev2A board name GFI board revision 2A
; acqHWCap(1884); HWRH::AddToPartNumToBoardMap(): part num GRLY_FuncRev2B board name GRLY board revision 2B
; acqHWCap(1884); HWRH::AddToPartNumToBoardMap(): part num GRX_FuncRev2A board name GRX board revision 2A
; acqHWCap(1884); HWRH::AddToPartNumToBoardMap(): part num GRX_FuncRev2B board name GRX board revision 2B
; acqHWCap(1884); HWRH::AddToPartNumToBoardMap(): part num GTX_FuncRev2A board name GTX board revision 2A
; acqHWCap(1884); HWRH::AddToPartNumToBoardMap(): part num MotCtrl board name MEC board revision 3.0
; acqHWCap(1884); HWRH::AddToPartNumToBoardMap(): part num TXPS_FuncRev1A board name TXPS board revision 1A
; acqHWCap(1884); HWRH::AddToPartNumToBoardMap(): part num system_hw board name Generic System HW Settings
board revision 1
; acqGfi(3272); hardwarepck:GTX-GTXIF FPGA version: 0xd20d
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); CHouseKeeping::LogVersionInfo: I/O Board Hardware version 2.0
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); CHouseKeeping::LogVersionInfo: I/O Board Firmware version 2.23
; acqGfi(3272); hardwarepck:GTX-David FPGA version: 0x0000
; acqGfi(3272); hardwarepck:DRX-GDIF FPGA version: 0xdf10
; acqGfi(3272); hardwarepck:DRX-Nathan FPGA version: 0xa51c
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); CHouseKeeping::LogVersionInfo: TxPs Firmware version 0.27
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); CHouseKeeping::LogVersionInfo: GFI SW version GFI: NOR_ROSETTA_2005_DEC_22.0.0.0 07/

07/2008
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); CHouseKeeping::LogFpgaVersion: CEDSDEM FPGA version 0x0085
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); CHouseKeeping::LogFpgaVersion: GFECTRL FPGA version 0x0040
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); CHouseKeeping::LogFpgaVersion: GDIF FPGA version 0xDF10
; acqHouseKeeping(1884); CHouseKeeping::LogFpgaVersion: GTXIF FPGA version 0xD20D
Report of FPGA Versions
2.) Logfile Annotation

; EchoDebugPck::HandleEvent(3036); UserEvent1 User pressed event 1 button (Alt-1)
; EchoDebugPck::HandleEvent(3036); UserEvent2 User pressed event 2 button (Alt-2)

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3.) Power Supply Errors
; Info ; acqHouseKeeping(3016); TxPs Alarm source[System (rack) supply] type[No alarm] detail[TS On Strobe]
; Info ; acqHouseKeeping(3020); TxPs alarm status AC-V[118.6 VAC] AC-Freq[60 Hz] ACErr[no] RackOn[48V LV ACinv]
; Info ; acqHouseKeeping(3020); +48V[48.02 Volts] +24V[24.01 Volts] +15V[15.03 Volts] -15V[-15.08 Volts]
+12V[11.01 Volts] +6V[5.90 Volts] -6V[-5.99 Volts] +5V[4.99 Volts]
; Info ; acqHouseKeeping(3024); TxPs alarm info source[Transmit supply 2] V+[0.32 Volts] V-[0.00 Volts] Power[0.00 Watts]
; Info ; acqHouseKeeping(3020); inTemp[38 C] outTemp[42 C] +PMX V[0.00 Volts] -PMX V[0.00 Volts]
; EScan.View(2004); ESStatus(0,Live): SetState RunState("Freeze" -> "Live") Modes("2D (B-Mode)") Probe("fla_M6-15L")

Appl("MscSkel")
; acqGfi(3860); scanctrl:ScanControl::startScan: still waiting for TS_LEVEL_OK after 200 ms

; DFEManager(3900); HandleRunFlag: setting RunBlock flag to false!
; ScanGeneric(2004); SetParam: scanID=1, paramId=23, LookupPort returned NULL!
; EScan.Main(2004); GetParam("RunState") should be replaced by GetParam("InLive")!

; EAErrorHandler(3900); Stops scan
; EAErrorHandler(3900); Error from HouseKeeping: GFI Processing Exception: SubType 101: scanctrl ScanControl::startScan:
Tx Power Supply is not ready. TS_LEVEL_OK timeout after 1002 ms, ScanSequencer NOT started! Hardware Status:-GFE Ch0
empty-GFE Ch1 empty-GTX1 HVFAULT-TS_OK_N-TS_LEVEL_OK_N-ACFAIL-THOR_PROBE_ERROR
; acqHouseKeeping(2004); CHouseKeeping::HandleGfiErrorEvents: Gfi Error Event Received: GFI Processing Exception:
SubType 101: scanctrl ScanControl::startScan: Tx Power Supply is not ready. TS_LEVEL_OK timeout after 1002 ms,
ScanSequencer NOT started! Hardware Status:-GFE Ch0 empty-GFE Ch1 empty-GTX1 HVFAULT-TS_OK_N-
TS_LEVEL_OK_N-ACFAIL-THOR_PROBE_ERROR

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18 LOGIQ E9 Log File Reading

This section is intended to assist anyone who needs to read log files when troubleshooting a problem.
ALT-D
What: Packages, log files and user comments for service review.
When: As quickly as possible after a problem occurs.
Who: Everyone! Teach your customers this valuable tool!
Tip: With R2.0.4 or later, the DOS window will no longer appear on the screen.
The naming convention for Log File Backup has changed in R5 and later.
In R4 and earlier Log File Backup appeared as this:
logfile.txt
logfile.txt.bak1
logfile.txt.bak3
logfile-Scope.txt
logfile-Scope.txt.bak2
In R5 and later Log File Backup appear as this:
logfile.txt
logfile20130624_072108.txt
logfile20130703_144734.txt
logfile-Scope.txt
logfile-Scope20130611_095646.txt
NOTE: Also, the rate of logging was reduced and extra whitespace in each log message was removed
so roll over to backup is less frequent.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-2 Customer Interaction

Was there a pop-up stating a problem?
- What did it say?
- Did you restart the system immediately?
Did you do ALT-D when the problem occurred?
7-9-18-2-1 Customer Interaction - Hangs

Key questions to ask:
Logs (ALT-D)
Exact time/date as indicated on the machine when the problem occurred.
What activity were they performing on the system? (Archive, Carotid scan, printing, etc).
Does the image and clock on the monitor keep updating?
What button did they try that did not work?
- TP buttons (one or more)
- A/N Keyboard
- Trackball
- Lower OP
How long did they wait before declaring the system hung and pressing Power Button?
Did they press and hold the Power Button or did the shutdown pop up appear?
Could they select buttons on the pop up?
Did the system shut down gracefully?
How often does this happen?
Is it reproducible?
Does the site use DICOM print/storage?
Do they do batch sends at the end of exams or do they send immediately?

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-2-2 Customer Interaction - Tips
What: ALT-PrintScreen
- Captures entire screen to d:\export\service\image
What: ALT-1/ALT-2
- Inserts a marker into log file.
Example:
Info ; UserEventLog(1928); ButtonPress: name=Alt1But, value=0
Debug ; EchoDebugPck::HandleEvent(1928); UserEvent1 User pressed event 1
button (Alt-1)
7-9-18-3 Key Log Files

Log/logfile.txt
- All the system messages and errors
Log/StartLoader.txt
- Summary of start and stop activity
- Example: Normal
- Example: Reboot
- Example: Hibernate
- Example: Abnormal Shutdown
Startloader.txt: Normal
Friday,Jan 15 20:46:24,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); ************ START
**************
Friday,Jan 15 20:46:24,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); StartLoader Version: "V
3.0.0.1"
Friday,Jan 15 20:46:25,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Turning Rack Power On
Friday,Jan 15 20:46:27,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Starting Echoloader
Friday,Jan 15 20:46:27,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); CreateProcess returned
success: ProcessId = 0x31C (796)
Friday,Jan 15 20:46:27,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Echoloader process started
Friday,Jan 15 20:46:59,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); WMI Reports Processor "CPU0"
ClockSpeed is 2133 (max 2133)
Friday,Jan 15 20:46:59,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); MSR 408 reports highpart
0x082A082A lowpart 0x0600082A
Friday,Jan 15 20:46:59,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); PerformanceState 2090 (0x82A)
Friday,Jan 15 21:30:30,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Process stopped, exit code =
0/2 (Shutdown OS)
Friday,Jan 15 21:30:30,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Shutdown OS
Friday,Jan 15 21:30:30,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Terminating
Friday,Jan 15 21:30:30,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Killing BlockWindowsKeys
**************

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-3 Key Log Files (contd)

Startloader.txt: Hibernate
**************
Friday,Jan 15 11:24:35,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); StartLoader Version: "V
3.0.0.1"
Friday,Jan 15 11:24:36,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Turning Rack Power On
success: ProcessId = 0x310 (784)
0/11 (Hibernate)
Friday,Jan 15 13:13:54,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Entering Hibernate
Friday,Jan 15 13:13:54,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Enter hibernate mode
Friday,Jan 15 13:14:50,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Return from hibernate
Friday,Jan 15 13:14:50,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Leaving Hibernate
Friday,Jan 15 13:14:53,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); No EchoLoader running, start
one
Friday,Jan 15 13:14:53,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); And RunSelectedConfig()
success: ProcessId = 0x5A8 (1448)
0/2 (Shutdown OS)
Friday,Jan 15 15:20:58,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Shutdown OS
Friday,Jan 15 15:20:58,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Terminating
Friday,Jan 15 15:20:58,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Killing BlockWindowsKeys
Friday,Jan 15 15:20:58,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); BlockWindowsKeys killed (0)

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Startloader.txt: Reboot
Monday,Jan 18 17:03:56,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); ************ START
**************
Monday,Jan 18 17:03:56,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); StartLoader Version: "V
3.0.0.1"
Monday,Jan 18 17:03:58,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Turning Rack Power On
Monday,Jan 18 17:03:59,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Starting Echoloader
Monday,Jan 18 17:03:59,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); CreateProcess returned
success: ProcessId = 0x4C8 (1224)
Monday,Jan 18 17:03:59,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Echoloader process started
Monday,Jan 18 17:04:31,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); WMI Reports Processor "CPU0"
Monday,Jan 18 17:04:31,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); MSR 408 reports highpart
Monday,Jan 18 17:04:31,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); PerformanceState 2090 (0x82A)
Monday,Jan 18 17:04:31,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Process stopped, exit code =
0/4 (Reboot OS)
Monday,Jan 18 17:04:37,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Restart OS
Monday,Jan 18 17:04:37,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Terminating
Monday,Jan 18 17:04:37,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Killing BlockWindowsKeys
**************
Startloader.txt: Abnormal
**************
Monday,Jan 18 08:33:45,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); StartLoader Version: "V
3.0.0.1"
Monday,Jan 18 08:33:47,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Starting Echoloader
Monday,Jan 18 08:33:47,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); CreateProcess returned
success: ProcessId = 0x4B4 (1204)
Monday,Jan 18 08:33:47,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Echoloader process started
Monday,Jan 18 08:34:29,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); WMI Reports Processor "CPU0"
Monday,Jan 18 08:34:29,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); MSR 408 reports highpart
Monday,Jan 18 08:34:29,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); PerformanceState 2090 (0x82A)
**************
************ START **************
Missing lines:
info ; StartLoader(0x0); Process stopped, exit code = 0/2 (Shutdown OS)
info ; StartLoader(0x0); Shutdown OS
info ; StartLoader(0x0); Terminating

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Startloader.txt: Hang
Monday,Mar 29 15:15:14,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); ************ START
**************
Monday,Mar 29 15:15:14,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); StartLoader Version: "V
3.0.0.1"
Monday,Mar 29 15:15:16,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Turning Rack Power On
Monday,Mar 29 15:15:18,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Starting Echoloader
Monday,Mar 29 15:15:18,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); CreateProcess returned
success: ProcessId = 0x778 (1912)
Monday,Mar 29 15:15:18,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Echoloader process started
Monday,Mar 29 15:15:42,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); WMI Reports Processor "CPU0"
Monday,Mar 29 15:15:42,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); MSR 408 reports highpart
Monday,Mar 29 15:15:42,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); PerformanceState 2090 (0x82A)
Monday,Mar 29 15:52:32,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Dumping call stack
Monday,Mar 29 15:52:35,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Killing process
Monday,Mar 29 15:52:35,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Killing Echoloader
Monday,Mar 29 15:52:46,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Unable to kill echoloader
process (100)
Monday,Mar 29 15:52:46,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Unable to kill abberant
EchoLoader process - shutting down system
Monday,Mar 29 15:52:46,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Shutdown OS
Monday,Mar 29 15:57:05,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); ************ START
**************
Will see log\CrashDumps\SLMiniDump-* files.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Startloader.txt: Crash
Monday,May 03 11:20:16,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); ************ START
**************
Monday,May 03 11:20:16,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); StartLoader Version: "V
3.0.0.1"
Monday,May 03 11:20:18,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Turning Rack Power On
Monday,May 03 11:20:19,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Starting Echoloader
Monday,May 03 11:20:19,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); CreateProcess returned
success: ProcessId = 0xBC (188)
Monday,May 03 11:20:19,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Echoloader process started
Monday,May 03 11:20:44,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); WMI Reports Processor "CPU0"
Monday,May 03 11:20:44,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); MSR 408 reports highpart
0x08220822 lowpart 0x06000822
Monday,May 03 11:20:44,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); PerformanceState 2082 (0x822)
Monday,May 03 11:24:00,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Process stopped, exit code =
-1073741819/-1073741819 (Unknown)
Monday,May 03 11:24:00,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Unknown return from
EchoLoader, querying user on response
Monday,May 03 11:24:16,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Restart Dialog: User Selected
to Shutdown the system. Or No Input from user.
Monday,May 03 11:24:16,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Shutdown OS
Monday,May 03 11:24:16,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Terminating
Monday,May 03 11:24:16,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Killing BlockWindowsKeys
Monday,May 03 11:26:44,2010; info ; StartLoader(0x0); ************ START
**************

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-3-1 Logfile-TempMon.txt
Should be imported into Excel for easier reading
- Example covered later in Appendix B
Key Items: DRX3_TOP
Friday,Mar 19 07:52:14,2010; Info ; Starting log system
Friday,Mar 19 07:52:14,2010; Info ; TempMonColumnHeadings(1920); TXPS Temp In;TXPS
Temp
Out;DRX2_LM83;DRX2_BOT;DRX2_TOP;DRX2_DCDC;DRX2_GDIF;DRX2_1062;DRX3_LM83;DRX3_BOT;DR
X3_TOP;DRX3_DCDC;DRX3_GDIF;DRX3_1062;DRX4_LM83;DRX4_BOT;DRX4_TOP;DRX4_DCDC;DRX4_GDI
F;DRX4_1062;GFI_LM83;GFI_GFE;GFI_SDEM;GFI_BOT;GRX1_LM83;GRX1_TOP;GRX1_BOT;GRX2_LM83
;GRX2_TOP;GRX2_BOT;GTX2_TOP;GTX2_1062;GTX3_TOP;GTX3_1062;GTX4_TOP;GTX4_1062;EPS
Temp;Fan_Control;Rack Fan 1;Rack Fan 2;Rack Fan 3;Rack Fan
4;BEP_SYS_TEMPERATURE;BEP_CPU_TEMPERATURE;BEP_AUX_TEMPERATURE;BEP_SYS_FANSPEED;BEP_
CPU_FANSPEED;GFI External Temperature;GFI Internal Temperature
Friday,Mar 19 07:53:25,2010; Info ; TempMon(3372); 27; 29; 26; 29; 40;

25; 36; 26; 26; 27; 40; 24; 39; 29; 26; 28; 40; 25; 36;
27; 33; 39; 39; 28; 26; 25; 23; 29; 29; 28; 32; 34; 32;
34; 33; 35; !!1374357529; @@76; 1712; 1945; 1988; 1955; 29.00; 26.00;
19.00; 2280.00; 917.00; !!21.61; !!27.86
Key
Values in file are preceded by:
No tag - Value is within normal operating range
^^ - Value is at first warning level (logging only)
@@ - Value is at second warning level(near limit Entry placed in logfile.txt)
!! - Value is over the set limits (may cause shutdown or loss of scanning) Operator Pop-up
appears every 5 minutes
NOT ALL VALUES IN LOG ARE PROPERLY MONITORED.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Logfile-TempMon.txt: Normal versus Elevated
Figure 7-165 Logfile-TempMon.txt: Normal versus Elevated
7-9-18-3-2 Log\CrashDumps & log\Crashes

Look for presence of files (normally empty)
Application software crashes
More on Log\CrashDumps & log\Crashes follow.
Figure 7-166 Example of Log\CrashDumps & log\Crashes

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-60 Log File List
File/Directory Name Contents
CrashDump Crash Dump files & SLMiniDump* files
Crashes Text files describing crash dumps
Diag Diagnostics logs
KBShadow Keyboard Shadow logs
logfile-CSDHomePage-ColNames.txt Column headers for Common Service Desktop page logs
logfile-CSDHomePage.txt CSD page log (semicolon delimited, level tagged)
logfile-DCVoltMon-ColNames.txt Column headers for DC Voltage Monitoring log
logfile-DCVoltMon.txt DC Voltage Monitoring log (semicolon delimited, level tagged)
logfile-dicom.txt DICOM transaction logging
Informatics log (deprecated, not accurate)

logfile-infor.txt
NOTE: Informatics is no longer present for R4.x and later.
logfile-Kretz4D.txt Kretz 4D package log
logfile-ScanAssistantCreator.txt Scan Assistant Creator log
logfile-SvcHistory.css Service History style sheet (for rendering, no data)
logfile-SvcHistory.xsl Service History style sheet (for rendering, no data)
logfile-SvcHistory.xml Service History log (DICOM services related configuration changes)
logfile-TempMon-ColNames.txt Column headers for Temperature Monitoring log
logfile-TempMon.txt Temperature Monitoring log (semicolon delimited, level tagged)
logfile-TxPsMon-ColNames.txt Column headers for Transmit PS (HV) Monitoring log
logfile-TxPsMon.txt Transmit PS (HV) Monitoring log
logfile-VpdEditRemote.txt Used by VPD Editor (no data)
logfile-WirelessNetwork.txt Log from Wireless Networking Redundant to info in Wireless Config tool
logfile-WirelessNetworkConfiguration.txt Log from Wireless Networking Redundant to info in Wireless Config tool
logfile.txt Everything that doesnt fit anywhere else, and then some
nfssvr.log Log file for NFS server (used to boot DVR, not used otherwise)
StartLoader.txt Log file for the low level process that starts the main application
SysCfg.csv Dump of the current system VPD config in Comma Separated Value format
Test.txt Scratch file (no data)
USBConfigLog.xml Dump of the current USB config (in XML format)
USBLog.log Log file for the USB device monitoring process (redundant to USBLog.xml)
USBLog.xml Running log of all USB device changes (and media changes) in the system

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-4 Log file changes in R4
Figure 7-167 Log file changes in R4
Date format changes: Adding more time resolution down to milliseconds

Sequence was improved to reflect real time occurrence of events and errors
Before: event will display the time when entering the log
Now: log entry shows real time of occurrence.
Because of this, sequential log entries may not be sequential in time.
Date/ me Type Moduke Message A B C

ESStatus(0,Live): SetMode RunState("Live") Modes("<none>" -> "2D")
2012/08/29 13:00:09.769 Info EScan.View(3844) 6697 Views\ESView.cpp(7099)
Probe("fla_11L-D") Appl("Stress") 1130
2012/08/29 13:00:09.771 Info TPDebug:ActivateTab called for All value=false force=false c5a3 ESTabMgr.cpp(2584)
EScan.TabMgr(3844) 1131
2012/08/29 13:00:09.771 Info TPDebug:These tabs are displayed: ac60 ESTabMgr.cpp(2585)

EScan.TabMgr(3844) 1132
Fields added for trending and future troubleshooting tools to read logs
A Log message number
B Log message ID (Internal Job identifier)
C Where the message comes from in the Software code
Figure 7-168 Log file changes in R4 (cont.)
R3
Friday,Apr 20 11:33:04,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); ************ START **************
Friday,Apr 20 11:33:04,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); StartLoader Version: "V 3.0.0.5"
Friday,Apr 20 11:33:05,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Turning Rack Power On
Friday,Apr 20 11:33:07,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Starting Echoloader
Friday,Apr 20 11:33:07,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); CreateProcess returned success: ProcessId = 0x774 (1908)
Friday,Apr 20 11:33:07,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Echoloader process started
Friday,Apr 20 11:33:23,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); WMI Reports Processor "CPU0" ClockSpeed is 2133 (max 2133) NumberOfCores is 2 NumberOfLogicalProcessors is 2
Friday,Apr 20 11:33:23,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); MSR 408 reports highpart 0x082A082A lowpart 0x0600082A
Friday,Apr 20 11:33:23,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); PerformanceState 2090 (0x82A)
Friday,Apr 20 11:38:36,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Power Button Detected
Friday,Apr 20 11:38:36,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Power Button Ignore Delay Active (Exit Dialog Displayed)
Friday,Apr 20 11:38:53,2012;
Friday,Apr 20 11:38:53,2012;
info
info
; StartLoader(0x0); Process stopped, exit code = 0/2 (Shutdown OS)
; StartLoader(0x0); Shutdown OS BEP5 information
Friday,Apr 20 11:38:53,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Terminating
Friday,Apr 20 11:38:53,2012; info ; StartLoader(0x0); Killing BlockWindowsKeys
R4 Internal job identifier

2012/08/21 08:55:10.881; info ;StartLoader.cpp(974); ************ START **************
2012/08/21 08:55:10.881; info ;StartLoader.cpp(976); StartLoader Version: "V 4.0.0.0"
2012/08/21 08:55:12.192; info ;StartLoader.cpp(162); Turning Rack Power On
2012/08/21 08:55:12.192; info ;StartLoader.cpp(168); Unable to open PS USB interface
2012/08/21 08:55:19.648; info ;StartLoader.cpp(1471); Starting Echoloader
2012/08/21 08:55:19.648; info ;StartLoader.cpp(1492); CreateProcess returned success: ProcessId = 0xE70 (3696)
2012/08/21 08:55:19.758; info ;StartLoader.cpp(1498); Echoloader process started
2012/08/21 08:55:20.834; info ;StartLoader.cpp(2405); WMI Reports Processor "CPU0" ClockSpeed is 3101 (max 3101) NumberOfCores is 4 NumberOfLogicalProcessors is 4
2012/08/21 08:57:25.197; info ;StartLoader.cpp(1680); Process stopped, exit code = 0/2 (Shutdown OS)
2012/08/21 08:57:25.197; info ;StartLoader.cpp(798); Shutdown OS
2012/08/21 08:57:25.213; info ;StartLoader.cpp(1894); Terminating
2012/08/21 09:00:46.866; info ;StartLoader.cpp(974); ************ START **************
BEP6 information
New date format

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-4 Log file changes in R4 (contd)
Figure 7-169 Temperature log file improvements
R3.x and earlier misreading

TempMonC
olumnHea TXPS TXPS Temp Fan_Contr
Monday,May 07 17:44:53,2012 Info dings(204) Temp In Out MRX_LM83 EPS Temp ol
TempMon(
Monday,May 07 17:46:00,2012 Info 3700) @@0 @@0 45 !!618465317 @@76
In R4 Logs are indicating real readings

Wednesday,Aug TXPS TXPS Temp EPS Fan_
29 12:59:44,2012 info TempMon(0) Temp In Out Temp Control
8/20/2012 17:45 Info TempMon(4160) 30 32 26 @@76
Figure 7-170 DC Voltage log VAC logging tip
Lambda PS does NOT log

the AC input
Friday,Apr 20 DCVoltMonColumnHeadings(1
09:57:58,2012 Info 628) VAC 48V Rail 24V Rail +15V Rail
Friday,Apr 20
09:59:14,2012 Info DCVoltMon(3824) !!0.00 48.23 23.96 15.11
Friday,Apr 20
10:04:15,2012 Info DCVoltMon(3824) !!0.00 48.23 24.06 15.13
Friday,Apr 20
10:09:16,2012 Info DCVoltMon(3824) !!0.00 48.23 24.06 15.11
Cherokee/Mitra/ Alpha PS logs

the AC input
Wednesday,Aug 29
12:59:44,2012 info DCVoltMon(0) VAC 48V Rail 24V Rail +15V Rail
8/20/2012 17:45 Info DCVoltMon(4160) 112.85 48.08 24.01 15.05
8/20/2012 17:50 Info DCVoltMon(4160) 112.85 48.13 24.01 15.05
This applies for all LOGIQ E9s versions. Although both Power Supplies monitor AC input, only one logs
the values.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 7-171 DC Voltage log - improvement
Spurious entries
EPS 5V BEP_VCO BEP_VCO BEP_P_1
Stby PS REA REB V5 BE
4.96 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!-0.00 2.46
4.96 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!0.00 !!-1.#R 2.46
Cleaner log
EPS EPS BEP_VCORE BEP_V_BAT

48V_OK +V5_CH A BEP_P_3V3 BEP_P_5V BEP_P_12V TERY IOB AUDIO_VOLTAGE
MonitorMa
nager.cpp(4
3.67 4.9 0.99 3.3 5.09 12.16 @@3.02 2.38 886 efed 62)
MonitorMa
nager.cpp(4
3.67 4.9 1.06 3.31 5.12 12.16 @@3.04 2.38 1420 1559 62)
Future use for log analysis

and trending
Figure 7-172 Main Power supply USB device Tip
Log entry for Power Supply with Hub

USBConfig: Required USB device "Power Supply Microcontroller": ("GEHC Power Supply USB Interface" "GE SOFT By De Mets Francois ") found;
USBConfig: Optional USB device "PowerSupply Hub": ("External Hub" "Unknown USB Device") found;
Both Supply and Hub are found

Log entry for Power Supply without Hub
USBConfig: Required USB device "Power Supply Microcontroller": ("Microchip Custom USB Device" "GE SOFT By De Mets Francois ") found
USBConfig: Optional USB device "PowerSupply Hub" not found
The supply is found but not the hub
This applies for both Lambda and Cherokee/Mitra/Alpha power supplies.
New versions of Main Power Supply will not have their internal USB Hub populated, since the HUB was
never used.
NOTE: The log may show the device as not found, but does not constitute a failure. See Alpha PS
example.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 7-173 New logs
Name Description Use

If imporng presets fails (for
example, imporng presets from
Logfile-PresetUpdate Output from imporng presets
another release), check this le
to see what happened.
Output from the ulity that resets the If the ulity failed, check this log
Logfile-ResetDb Paent Database for errors
This log will be used to
determine when a process
started and ended. It will help
Engineering understanding
Logfile-Scope Tracking track of iniang events normal behavior vs. anomalies.
For future use on trending and
log analysis

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-5 Errors versus Logs

What the user sees
What to look for in the logs
7-9-18-5-1 No Boot
Condition: System does not fully power on
See: 7-9-4 "Main Power Supply (MPS) Troubleshooting" on page 7-202.
7-9-18-5-2 POP-UP: Invalid Hardware Configuration

System will NOT Scan
Condition: System has found critical hardware that is not functioning or not configured correctly.
Correction: Inspect logs for errors and replace or reconfigure.
Examples:
USB Related
USB configuration is in log\USBConfigLog.xml

Log\logfile.txt near start of every boot:
Info ; acqHWCap(3132); USBConfig: Optional USB device "3D Position Sensor
Controller" (Ascension USB Device for DRIVEBAY) found
Info ; acqHWCap(3132); USBConfig: Optional USB device "4D Motor Controller"
(FTDI FT8U2XX Device) found
Info ; acqHWCap(3132); USBConfig: Required USB device "I/O Board First Level
Hub" (External Hub) found
Info ; acqHWCap(3132); USBConfig: Required USB device "I/O Board
Microcontroller" (GE Healthcare BEP IO Card) found
Error Example:
Error ; acqHWCap(184); USBConfig: USB Port "OP I/O Port #4" should be empty
but device "External Hub" is present

Error ; EAErrorHandler(284); Error from HWCap: HWCAP Invalid USB
Configuration. Severity : FatalHW

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-5 Errors versus Logs (contd)
Bad Hardware
From logfile.txt:
Error ; EAErrorHandler(2168); Error from HouseKeeping: GFI Hardware Exception:
SubType 62: Monitoring : RFIMonitor::handleMonitoring() - Failed reading
temperature[37] RX2_TOP. Severity : FatalHW
System tried to read the temperature but got no or invalid response

Can be temperature or voltages
Voltage reading errors are usually NOT hardware failures, but single failures of the system to read
a voltage. Replace hardware only when repeated errors are seen.
Log\logfile.txt Example:
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); ********************************************

Error ; acqHWCAP(228); *** ***
Error ; acqHWCap(228); *** HW RACK CONFIGURATION INVALID!!! ***
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); ********************************************
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); *** Board FuncRevs Provided ***
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); *** ----------------------- ***
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); *** BP_FuncRev2A (qty=1)
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); *** DRX_FuncRev3E (qty=3)
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); *** GFI_FuncRev2A (qty=1)
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); *** GRLY_FuncRev2C (qty=1)
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); *** GRX_FuncRev2A (qty=1)
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); *** GRX_FuncRev2B (qty=1)
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); *** GTX_FuncRev2C (qty=3)
Error ; acqHWCAP(228); ********************************************
Info ; DFEManager(228); HandleRunFlag: setting RunDfe and RunBlock flags to true!
Error ; EAErrorHandler(228); Error from acqHWCAP: Invalid Hardware Rack Configuration - Check logs. Severity :
FatalHW
Info ; DFEManager(228); HandleRunFlag: setting RunBlock flag to false!
Warning; EAErrorHandler(228); Stops scan
ONLY SHOWS WHAT WAS FOUND, NOT WHAT WAS BAD!

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-5-3 LCD Suddenly Goes Black

Condition: System is performing emergency shutdown due to loss of power
Action: Check log\logfile.txt for message about battery operation
Ensure operator waits for LED to go off before trying to turn system on
Example:
Error ; acqTransLayer(316); AC Failure detected - System will shut down
Info ; acqHouseKeeping(192); CHousekeeping::HandleAcFailEvent() called
Info ; acqHouseKeeping(192); Signaling event "SYSTEM_ON_BATTERY_BACKUP"
Info ; EchoSysmon:BatteryPower(3548); Battery Event signaled, beginning shutdown
process
7-9-18-5-4 POP-UP: Application has Performed an Unexpected Halt

Condition: Application Software Crash
Action: Check for files log\CrashDumps\CrashDump_*.dmp
Correction: Not usable in field refer to engineering for diagnosis
Example:
Figure 7-174

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-5-5 POP-UP: Application has Stopped Responding and Needs to Restart

Condition: Application is hung or performing very slowly.
Customer pushes Power Button interrupting application and forcing shutdown
Correction: Not usable in field. Determine what customer was doing when slowdown/hang occurred.
Look for files in log\CrashDumps\SLMiniDump-*
Figure 7-175
NOTE: One common cause of hang/slowdown symptom is system waiting communicate with PACs.
7-9-18-5-6 POP-UP: System Error. Please Reboot the system

Condition: Fatal scanning or configuration error has occurred Application will keep running.
Cause: Many and varied
Action: Search logfile.txt for EAErrorHandler
Example: Inside Next
Error ; EAErrorHandler(3660); Error from HouseKeeping: GFI Processing Exception:
SubType 166: scanseq Halting scan: s_current_iq_addr(0093ebc0) inside next
[0093ebc0,00941ff8> vector! (b=56, s=280). No of firings done: 65576, no of beams
received: 65548. Severity : NonFatalSW
Example: Power Supply Comm. Error

Debug ; acqGfi(3600); WatchDog:Watchdog still alive, errors=0x0060 [- - (ACFAIL)
- (TS_LEVEL_OK) - - - -]

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-5-7 POP-UP: System Voltage Fault System will Shutdown

Condition: An internal voltage is above or below preset limits
Example: Voltages cannot be read:
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(3400); GRLY_AVEE = -2147483.750 outside tolerance
limits. UpperBound = -4.000 []
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(3400); GRLY_DLP_AUX = -2147483.750 outside tolerance
limits. UpperBound = 0.000 []
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(3400); GRLY_PMX_VNN = -2147483.750 outside tolerance
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(3400); GRLY_PMX_VPP = -2147483.750 outside tolerance
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(3400); GRLY_12V = -2147483.750 outside tolerance limits.
UpperBound = 12.600 []
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(3400); GRLY_VCC = -2147483.750 outside tolerance limits.
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(3400); GRLY_3V3 = -2147483.750 outside tolerance limits.
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(3400); GRLY_LVDC = -2147483.750 outside tolerance
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(3400); GRLY_LVDC = -2147483.750 outside tolerance
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(1928); voltageDataOk = true
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(1928); voltageErrorCount = 0
Info ; acqHouseKeeping(1928); CHouseKeeping::GenerateMonitoringEvent:
monitoring event (strObjId = SYS_VOLTAGE_UNREADABLE, strData = SystemVoltage:
GRLY_LVDC = -2147483.750 Volt is outside tolerance. Voltage is unreadable!
UpperLimit = 3.900 LowerLimit = -1.000)
Error ; acqHouseKeeping(1928); Fatal error detected by HouseKeeping, prompting
the user to shutdown the system
In reality voltages could not be read monitor for further failures and take action if repeatable.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-5-8 Application Keeps Restarting

Condition: System attempts to clear some errors by restarting.
After THREE tries, system will be in simulator mode.
Example: Cannot talk to Front End
- From log\logfile.txt:
Error ; EchoRootPck(188); targetPresent() is false, rebooting 1 of 3 times
to attempt to reconnect to hardware
Example: USB Configuration Error

Error ; EAErrorHandler(284); Error from HWCap: HWCAP Invalid USB
Configuration. Severity : FatalHW
Example: Detailed USB Configuration Error

Error ; acqHWCap(328); USBConfig: *** Required USB device "OP I/O
Microcontroller" not found ***

Error ; HWCap(1916); USB configuration is incorrect, rebooting 1 of 2 times to
attempt to normalize hardware

Error ; HWCap(328); USB configuration is incorrect, 2 reboots exhausted, system
will post a user error

Error ; EAErrorHandler(328); Error from HWCap: HWCAP USB Configuration Error.
Severity : FatalSW
7-9-18-5-9 Slowdowns - DICOM

Items in spooler waiting to send Usually seen near shutdown
Can cause slow shutdowns or operation
Error ; ScDicom(3152); ERROR : Open_Association - Failed to connect to remote
host:
Error ; ScDicom(3152); DCM_FAILED : DcmCommand
Error ; ScDicom(3152); DCM_FAILED : DcmCommand
Error ; ScDicom(3152); DCM_FAILED : DicomJob::flush dcm_cmd_OpenArchive failed
Debug ; EchoSpooler(3172); Spooler status is 2

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-6 Keywords logfile.txt

Starting Log System
- First line written whenever application starts
EAErrorHandler
- Indicates serious error has occurred. Usually seen several times for each failure.
Inside Next
- Never seen except when Diags are run.
Error ; EAErrorHandler(3660); Error from HouseKeeping: GFI Processing
Exception: SubType 166: scanseq Halting scan: s_current_iq_addr(0093ebc0)
inside next [0093ebc0,00941ff8> vector! (b=56, s=280). No of firings done:
65576, no of beams received: 65548. Severity : NonFatalSW
Power Button Press

Info ; UserEventLog(304); ButtonPress: name=PowerBut, value=0
..
Info ; SysExitDlg(1912); System Exit Dialog Displayed
Info ; SysExitDlg(1912); System Exit Dialog - Shutdown Selected
Print Button Press

Info ; UserEventLog(168); ButtonPress: name=PrintBut1, value=0
Scan state, Probe Connected, etc.

- Look for ESStatus
Info ; EScan.View(1288); ESStatus(0,Live): SetState RunState("Live" ->
"Freeze") Modes("2DHAR") Probe("cla_15C-D") Appl("Abdomen")
System Hardware ID
- Stored on the backplane Should not be ZEROs!
Info ; EchoRoot(1288); HW Serial Number = 0x005E3250 = 6173264, 96348US8
Front End Card Crack Configuration

acqHWCap(200); HW Rack Configuration Valid: Ichiro Phase 2 - CW (2A/2C), DRX MLA4
(3E), GTX (2E), GRLY (2C), MLP PS (1C)
OR
Info ; acqHWCap(1904); HW Rack Configuration Valid: Ichiro Phase 1 - NoCW (2A/
2B), DRX MLA4 (3B), GTX (2C), GRLY (2C), MLP PS (1A)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-7 Errors That May Not Be Errors

No DVR found in system OK if there is not a DVR!
Info ; EchoVcr.GEdvrRecordUnit(3716); Failed to start process[net use

\\192.0.2.178 /user:root ""] ExitCode=2: GetLastError returned 0Info ;
EchoVcr.GEdvrRecordUnit(3716); Waiting till DVR board become
alive...Error ; EchoVcr.GEdvrRecordUnit(3716); DVR Board is not found!!
No PatIO found in system OK if there is not a Patient I/O!
Error ; PatioUsb(2300); OpenDriver Failed; 2
7-9-18-8 Tips
If the application does not allow the use of ALT-D (crashes quickly or will not start) the desktop icon
GatherLogs performs the same function.
- In extreme circumstances, reload the C: partition only. This allows access to the desktop and
use of GatherLogs.
Search for Starting log system to find start of session.
Logfile.txt only grows to ~100MB then copied to logfile.txt.bak.
Image Quality issues usually do not show up in log files.
Log files do not show everything.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-9 ScLogWindow
ScLogWindow application will help identify errors while the system is running.
There are two ways you can access this application:
1.) From Windows Desktop

2.) From Task Manager
From the Windows Desktop
Figure 7-176 ScLogWindow from Windows desktop
Insert Service Key
Exit to Windows
Once in Windows desktop,
click on the ScLogWindow
icon
After the ScLogWindow
opens, double-click on the
Ichiro icon on the desktop
Figure 7-177 Logging in the ScLogWindow
While the application is booting

up, you can observe logging in
the SgLoG window. (Press Alt
Tab to put the ScLogWindow in
front.)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-9 ScLogWindow (contd)
ScLogWindow from Task Manager

Figure 7-178 ScLogWindow from Task Manager
Insert Service Key
Press Cntrl+Alt+Del
Select Task Manager
Once Task Manager opens,
select New Task
Type SclogWindow and press

OK
The ScLogWindow will open

You can close task manager
window

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-18-9 ScLogWindow (contd)
Saving logs in ScLogWindow

Figure 7-179 Saving logs in ScLogWindow
To Save the log in

ScLogWindow, select File, then
Save as.
Filtering logs in ScLogWindow

Figure 7-180 Filtering logs in ScLogWindow
To filter by errors or other log

entries, select view and check
the entries desired.
Select stop, to stop the

logging.
Select clear, if you want to
clear the window and start a
fresh log capture.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19 LOGIQ E9 Transmit and Receive Signal Path Diagnostics

Use this to troubleshoot LOGIQ E9 DRX or MRX Boards, GTX Boards and/or Front Planes (Transmit
and Receive Signal Paths), and to identify Transmit and Receive Signal Path problems from other
system problems.
.
NOTE: Label the DRX and GTX Boards prior to removal to reflect which slot each board was removed
from. Install the boards back in the original locations throughout the troubleshooting process.
Label the Front Planes prior to removal to reflect which is the upper and which is the lower. Install the
Front Planes back in the original locations throughout the troubleshooting process.
NOTE: GTX "numbers" use 1, 2, 3 and 4 as nomenclature in VPD, but 0 (zero), 1, 2 and 3 are used as
nomenclature in diagnostics. In this Section, 1, 2, 3 and 4 nomenclature is used to identify
board, based on location in the Card Rack. See: Figure 7-181 "Card Rack - GFI Configuration"
on page 7-276, Figure 7-183 "Card Rack - GFI configuration" on page 7-278 or Figure 7-185
"Card Rack - MRX Configuration" on page 7-280.
Topics in this Section:
1.) Transmit Signal Path Description - see:

7-9-19-1 "Transmit Signal Path and Transmit/Receive (T/R) Signal Path" on page 7-276.
2.) Analog Receive Path Description - see:

7-9-19-2 "Analog Receive Signal Path and Analog Rx Path" on page 7-278.
3.) Signal Flow Path for MRX Configuration - see:

7-9-19-3 "Signal Flow Path for MRX Configuration" on page 7-280.
4.) How to read Diagnostic Results on T/R Channel Tests - see:

7-9-19-4 "T/R Channel Diagnostic Results" on page 7-282.
5.) How to read Diagnostic Results on Analog Rx Channel Tests - see:

7-9-19-5 "Analog RX Diagnostic Results" on page 7-283.
6.) Troubleshooting Tips For Suspected GTX Transformer Failure - see:

7-9-19-6 "Troubleshooting Tips for Suspected GTX Transformer Failure" on page 7-284.
7.) Visual Inspection of GTX Damage (what to look for) - see:

7-9-19-7 "Visual Inspection of Board" on page 7-285.
- Troubleshooting Step 1 - Upper Bank of Transmitter Channels - see:
"Troubleshooting Step 1 - Upper Bank of HV FET Section (contd)." on page 7-290.
- Troubleshooting Step 2 - Upper and Lower Transmit Bank - see:
"Troubleshooting Step 2 - Upper and Lower Transmit Bank" on page 7-292.
NOTE: A magnifying glass may be required to view and locate test points and grounds.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19-1 Transmit Signal Path and Transmit/Receive (T/R) Signal Path
Figure 7-181 Card Rack - GFI Configuration
The transmit signal is generated on the GTX Boards, then passes across the Front Planes to the GRLY
Board.
The GRLY Board passes the transmit signal to the transducer.
The echoes the transducer receives from the transmit signals generated on GTX1, are passed on to the
GRX64 Board.
GTX1 Board passes transmit signals to the Front Planes, the Front Planes pass signals to the GRLY
Board, GRLY Board passes signals to the transducer, the transducer passes signals to the GRX64.
The echoes the transducer receives from the transmit signals generated on GTX2 and GTX3, are
passed on to the GRX128 Board.
GTX2 and 3 Boards pass transmit signals to the Front Planes, the Front Planes pass signals to the
GRLY Board, GRLY Board passes signals to the transducer, the transducer passes signals to the
GRX128.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19-1 Transmit Signal Path and Transmit/Receive (T/R) Signal Path (contd)
7-9-19-1-1Transmit/Receive (T/R) Signal Path
Figure 7-182 T/R Signal Path
GTX 64 Ch DRX 64
GTX 64 Ch DRX 64
GRX64
David GTX Nathan DRX 64
Pulser 64 Ch A/D 0
GRX128 0
David Nathan
1 1
...
...
... 192
David Nathan
T/R aTGCaTGC 2 2
David Nathan
Pulser A/D 3
3 GFI
GDIF GDIF
FDEM SDEM BEP
ATGC T_sig
192
T/R Test
Uses pulsers to inject signal into the front-end.

Measures amplitude and frequency.
Dead channel detection.
Reports failures at channel level.
Analog Rx tests should be run first.
Failure indicates problem with GTX.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19-2 Analog Receive Signal Path and Analog Rx Path
Figure 7-183 Card Rack - GFI configuration
Echoes received by transducer pass through the GRLY Board, across the Front Planes and to the GRX
Board.
The GRX Board amplifies the signal and passes it to the DRX Boards via the Backplane.
The DRX Boards convert the analog signal to a digital signal which then gets passed on to the GFI
Board.
The GRX64 Board passes signals to the DRX1 Board.
The GRX128 Board passes signals to DRX2 and DRX3 Boards.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19-2 Analog Receive Signal Path and Analog Rx Path (contd)
7-9-19-2-1Analog Rx Signal Path
Figure 7-184 Analog Rx Signal Path
DRX 64
GRX64 Ch
DRX 64
GRX128 Ch
Nathan DRX 64
A/D 0
Nathan
... 1
192
...
aTGC
aTGC
Nathan
2
Nathan GFI
A/D 3
FDEM SDEM BEP

GDIF
ATGC T_sig
Analog Rx Tests (High, Medium and Low)
Test signal generated on GFI, and injected into GRX.

Tests frequency, amplitude, SNR, THD.
Reports failures at channel level.
Test both GRX Boards and A/D Converter on DRX Boards.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19-3 Signal Flow Path for MRX Configuration

Figure 7-185 Card Rack - MRX Configuration

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19-3 Signal Flow Path for MRX Configuration (contd)
Figure 7-186 LOGIQ E9 Signal Flow for MRX configuration
Frontplane
256 GTX 64 Ch
GTX 64 Ch
David GTX
Pulser 0 64 Ch
CW
David
MRX
Option
1
...
A/D
Converters David
I/Q 2
David
Filter Pulser 3
GRLY MRX 192 Ch GDIF

256
X I Analog
X
X Q Beamformer
TGC A/DA Nathan
TGC A/DA 32 Ch
R
192
TGC A/DA Nathan

e 256 32 Ch Front End
TGC A/DA
l T/ R Nathan Interface
a 32 Ch
Nathan
192
y 32 Ch
s Nathan
DSP
32 Ch
Nathan
192
32 Ch
TGC A/D SED
TGC Test
GFE
Gen Gen
The Transmit Pulse bursts transmitted, are still routed from the GTX board(s) via the XD bus to the
Relay board where the ultrasound probes send the energy into the body. Weak ultrasound echoes from
body structures and blood cells are received by the probes and routed via the Relay board and the XD
bus to the MRX board. The MRX board amplifies the ultrasound signal and connects it with an A/D
converter to the digital domain. The digital signals are then further processed on the MRX boards.
All the processing is the same as a GFI configuration, but now the DRX and GFI are no longer used.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19-4 T/R Channel Diagnostic Results
Figure 7-187 T/R Channel Diagnostic Results
The GTX column numbers, refer to GTX Board number, David ASIC, channel within David.
For example: If under the GTX column, you see 1,0,0 - this is referring to GTX1, David ASIC number 0,
channel 0 within David.
Transmit signals generated on GTX1, are received back on the GRX64 and passed via the Backplane
to DRX1. Transmit channels generated on GTX2, are received back on the GRX128 and passed via the
Backplane to DRX2. Transmit channels generated on GTX3, are received back on the GRX128 and
passed via the Backplane to DRX3.
For service, the relevant information is the board number. If any channel fails, the board in that path can
be identified.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19-5 Analog RX Diagnostic Results
Figure 7-188 Analog Rx Diagnostic Results
The DRX column numbers refer to DRX Board number, Nathan ASIC, channel within Nathan.
For example: If under the DRX column, you see 1,2,0 - this is referring to DRX1, Nathan ASIC
number 0, channel 0 within Nathan.
GRX64 passes signal to DRX1. GRX128 passes signals to DRX2 and DRX3. The Analog Receive tests
may be run with the Front Planes removed. There is Front Plane failure mode which can cause this
diagnostic to fail.
For service, the relevant information is the board number. If any channel fails, the board in that path can
be identified.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19-6 Troubleshooting Tips for Suspected GTX Transformer Failure
Typical customer complaint: a burning smell followed by a system error pop up during applications boot
up.
If this occurs, avoid any further live scanning, as probe damage can occur.
NOTE: DO NOT introduce additional probes onto the system until diagnostics have been successfully
run.
Remove GTX Boards one at a time and perform a visual inspection. Make sure to label the boards to
reflect which slot each board was removed from. Remember to install the GTX Boards back in their
original locations throughout the troubleshooting process.
Perform visual inspection of the diodes on the upper and lower Front Planes. Make sure to label the
Front Planes to reflect which is the upper and which is the lower. Remember to install the Front Planes
back in their original locations throughout the troubleshooting process.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19-7 Visual Inspection of Board

Figure 7-189 shows a damaged GTX Board. This damage may not be evident on systems running
R3 Application Software.
Figure 7-189 Damaged GTX Board

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-19-7 Visual Inspection of Board (contd)

Typically one of the local channel power resistors shows physical burn damage. The HV FET Switch
section (3) of the board can also exhibit visual signs of damage as well.
Figure 7-190 Visual Inspection of Board
1) Lower Transmit Bank

2) Upper Transmit Bank
3) HV FET Switch section

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Transmit Channel
Figure 7-191 Close up of Transmit Channel
4) Transmit Transformer
5) Local Power Resistors
When Visual Inspection Reveals Physical Damage
Replace the GTX Board that shows evidence of burn damage. Then run the following diagnostics:
- Run T/R Channel diagnostic

- Run Analog Rx diagnostics
Failure of one of these diagnostics, following the replacement of the defective GTX Board, will typically
mean damage to one of the Front Planes. Swap locations of the Front Planes and re-run the tests to
see if the failure follows the Front Plane. In rare occurrences damage has occurred to the GRX Board.
Damage to the GRX Board may show as a bright or dark spot in the near field image. See:
Figure 7-192 "Check in near Field Image" on page 7-288.
If these diagnostics pass check image quality in the near field:
- Install and check image quality on all probes that may have been used during the time period
that the system began to show the transformer failure issue.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Transmit Channel (contd)
Figure 7-192 Check in near Field Image
A dark streak in the near field indicates either a defective Front Plane or the transducer itself has been
damaged. Save image to the clipboard, swap the Front Plane locations, reproduce the saved image and
compare. If images are the same, the transducer is bad. If there is one dark streak and it moved, the
Front Plane is bad. If two dark streaks appear, both the Front Plane and transducer are most likely
defective.
When Visual Inspection does not show Damage
There are two levels of impedance testing that can be performed to identify which GTX Board is
defective.
1.) Check resistance value from the HV FET switch section to ground. See
"Troubleshooting Step 1 - Upper Bank of HV FET Section (contd)." on page 7-290.
2.) Check resistance value from pin 6 via of each of the output transformers to ground. See:
"Troubleshooting Step 2 - Upper and Lower Transmit Bank" on page 7-292.
NOTE: Always label the Front Planes and GTX Boards prior to removal. Remove GTX Boards one at
a time and perform the impedance checks in order, as detailed in the following pages.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Troubleshooting Step 1 - Upper Bank of HV FET Section

3) HV FET Switch section

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Troubleshooting Step 1 - Upper Bank of HV FET Section (contd).
If no Visual Damage is found on Upper Bank of Transmitter Channels
Measure resistance from output of HV feed resistors R97 and R131 to ground.
NOTE: Measured resistance of a good board should be ~ 90 - 110K ohms, with a calibrated ohm meter.
If measured resistance is less than ~ 90 - 110K (typically 5 ohms or less) this is indicative of a transmit
transformer with a primary to secondary short.
Figure 7-194 Upper Bank HV Switch Section (3) and Vias to ground (4)
Measure from these vias to ground (4) to test for possible transmit transformer short on the upper bank.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Troubleshooting Step 1 - Upper Bank of HV FET Section (contd).
If no Visual Damage is found on Lower Bank of Transmitter Channels
Measure resistance from output of HV feed resistors R19 and R32 to ground.
NOTE: Measured resistance of a good board should be ~ 90 - 110K ohms, with a calibrated ohm meter.
If measured resistance is less than ~ 90 - 110K (typically 5 ohms or less) this is indicative of a transmit
transformer with a primary to secondary short.
Figure 7-195 Lower Bank HV Switch Section (5) and Vias to ground (6)
Measure from these vias to ground (6) to test for possible transmit transformer short on the lower bank.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Troubleshooting Step 2 - Upper and Lower Transmit Bank


PROPRIETARY TO GE
Troubleshooting Step 2 - Upper and Lower Transmit Bank (contd)
With a calibrated ohm meter, measure from the pin 6 via of each transmit transformer to ground.
1.) Place the negative lead of the meter on board ground.

2.) Place the positive lead of the meter on the pin 6 via of the transmit transformer.
A good transmit channel should read close to zero ohms. Typically five ohms or less, with a calibrated
ohm meter.
A defective transmit channel will have a significantly higher reading. Typically in the mega-ohms or the
reading simply will not settle to a distinct level.
Repeat steps for each transmit transformer on each GTX board until the defective channel is identified
Figure 7-197 Upper Transmit Bank - Pin 6 Vias (3)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 7-198 Lower Transmit Bank - Pin 6 Vias (4)
Replace the GTX Board that shows evidence of burn damage. Then run the following diagnostics:
- Run T/R Channel diagnostic

- Run Analog Rx diagnostics
Failure of one of these diagnostics following the replacement of the defective GTX, will typically mean
damage to one of the Front Planes. Swap locations of the Front Planes and re-run the tests to see if the
failure follows the front plane. In rare occurrences, damage has occurred to the GRX Board.
If these diagnostics pass check image quality in the near field. See:
Figure 7-199 "Check in near Field Image" on page 7-295.
Install and check image quality on all probes that may have been used during the time period that the
system began to show the transformer failure issue.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 7-199 Check in near Field Image
A dark streak in the near field, indicates either a defective Front Plane or the transducer itself has been
damaged. Save image to the clipboard, swap the Front Plane locations, reproduce the saved image and
compare. If images are the same, the transducer is bad. If there is one dark streak and it moved, the
Front Plane is bad. If two dark streaks appear, both the transducer and the Front Plane are most likely
defective.
In very uncommon cases, it has been seen that there was no physical damage apparent and the T/R
Channel Test and Analog Rx diagnostics will pass, but there is a dark streak in the near field of the
image.
In this case, typically only one half of the transmit waveform is being seen at the transducer. This is
caused by one of the blocking diodes on a Front Plane being open.
It is important to use a known, good transducer to troubleshoot this type of failure mode.
Make sure the Front Planes and GTX Boards are marked for their original positions.
Remove GTX1 and GTX2, so only GTX3 is imaging in the system. Install the Front Planes in their
original positions and check the near field image. There should be one dark streak. Save this image to
the clipboard for reference.
Swap the Front Planes and check the near field image. If there are now two dark streaks, this is the
defective GTX Board.
If one dark streak is apparent, rotate the remaining GTX Boards through slot 3 and repeat the test until
the case of two dark streaks is seen.
If two dark streaks are seen with multiple GTX Boards, this may indicate a defective GRX Board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-20 How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for Cardrack
Troubleshooting on the LOGIQ E9
Use this to troubleshoot missing Transmit and Receive Channels in the Cardrack.
7-9-20-1 Topics in this Section

Image Artifact Troubleshooting, see:
7-9-20-2 "How to use this Section" on page 7-297
7-9-21 "How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for a 9L-D Probe in a
LOGIQ E9 GFI Configuration" on page 7-298
"7-9-21 How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for a 9L-D Probe in a
LOGIQ E9 GFI Configuration (contd)" on page 7-299
7-9-22 "How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for a C1-5-D Probe in a
LOGIQ E9 GFI Configuration" on page 7-304
7-9-23 "How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for a ML-6-15-D Probe in
a LOGIQ E9 GFI Configuration" on page 7-310
7-9-24 "How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for a 9L-D Probe in a
LOGIQ E9 MRX Configuration" on page 7-316
7-9-25 "How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for a C1-5-D Probe in a
LOGIQ E9 MRX Configuration" on page 7-322
7-9-26 "How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for a ML-6-15-D Probe in
a LOGIQ E9 MRX Configuration" on page 7-328.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-20-2 How to use this Section

This Section shows how to identify channels area of influence associated with certain probes, and
transmit and receive boards within the Cardrack. By looking at the missing channels area, you can
identify the boards associated with that channel and determine possible origin of a particular artifact.
Colors are used to identify the components and the "region" within the near field are bordered in the
same color (as the respective component). Within this "region" is where an artifact will appear.
The guide lines in the overlays represent an approximate border between components. When an artifact
is seen near the border between two components, both components should be considered.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-21 How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for a 9L-D Probe in a
LOGIQ E9 GFI Configuration
Table 7-61, GFI Configuration - 9L-D Probe with a correct 192 channel image, on page 298.
7-9-21-1 9L-D Probe - Missing Transmit and Receive Channels
Table 7-61 GFI Configuration - 9L-D Probe with a

correct 192 channel image
GTX1 GTX1
DRX1 DRX1
GRX64 GRX64
GTX2 GTX2
DRX2 DRX2
GRX128 GRX128
GTX3
DRX3
GRX128
Upper Frontplane Lower Frontplane
This shows a correct 192 channel image.

The areas identified in this image will appear dark, an artifact,when a transmit or receive signal
is missing or caused from those associated boards.
Examples of these are shown in Table 7-61 through Table 7-66.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
LOGIQ E9 GFI Configuration (contd)
Table 7-62 9L-D Probe - GFI Configuration
A B C
GTX1 GTX1
DRX1 DRX1
GRX64 GRX64
The dark areas or artifacts, bordering the near field (in the viewing area), indicate missing
transmit and receive channels associated with:
GTX1
DRX1
GRX64
Approximate distance from A (0 cm) to the following points:
B = 0.7 cm
C = 3.7 cm
NOTE: The values from A to the values listed will be the same for the same
probe in an MRX configuration LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-63 GFI Configuration - 9L-D Probe
A B C D E
GTX2 GTX2
DRX2 DRX2
GRX128 GRX128
The dark areas or artifacts, within the near field (in the viewing area), indicate missing transmit
and receive channels associated with:
GTX2
DRX2
GRX128
B = 0.7 cm
C = 1.5 cm
D = 2.9 cm
E = 3.8 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
A B C
GTX3
DRX3
GRX128
The dark area, centering the near field (in the viewing area), indicate missing transmit and
receive channels associated with:
GTX3
DRX3
GRX128
B = 1.5 cm
C = 2.9 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-21 How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for a 9L-D Probe in
a LOGIQ E9 GFI Configuration (contd)
A B
Lower Frontplane
The dark area, on the right of the near field (in the viewing area), indicate missing transmit and
Lower Frontplane
Approximate distance from A (0 cm) to the following point:
B = 2.3 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-21 How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for a 9L-D Probe in
a LOGIQ E9 GFI Configuration (contd)
A B
Upper Frontplane
The dark area, on the left of the near field (in the viewing area), indicate missing transmit and
Upper Frontplane
B = 2.3 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-22 How to Recognize missing Transmit and Receive Channels for a

C1-5-D Probe in a LOGIQ E9 GFI Configuration
Table 7-67, GFI Configuration - C1-5-D Probe with a correct 192 channel image, on page 304.
7-9-22-1 C1-5-D Probe - Missing Transmit and Receive Channels
Table 7-67 GFI Configuration - C1-5-D Probe with a

GTX1 GTX1
DRX1 DRX1
GRX64 GRX64
GTX3
DRX3
GRX128
GTX2 GTX2
DRX2 DRX2
GRX128 GRX128

The areas identified in this image will appear dark, an artifact, when a transmit or receive is
missing or caused from those associated boards.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-22-1 C1-5-D Probe - Missing Transmit and Receive Channels (contd)
Table 7-68 C1-5-D Probe - GFI Configuration
GTX1 GTX1
DRX1 DRX1
GRX64 GRX64
GTX1
DRX1
GRX64

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-69 GFI Configuration - C1-5-D Probe
GTX1
DRX1
GRX64
GTX2 GTX2
DRX2 DRX2
GRX128 GRX128
GTX2
DRX2
GRX128

PROPRIETARY TO GE
GTX3
DRX3
GRX128
GTX3
DRX3
GRX128

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Lower Frontplane
Lower Frontplane

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Upper Frontplane
Upper Frontplane

PROPRIETARY TO GE

ML-6-15-D Probe in a LOGIQ E9 GFI Configuration
Table 7-73, GFI Configuration - ML-6-15-D Probe with a correct 192 channel image, on page 310.
7-9-23-1 ML-6-15-D Probe - Missing Transmit and Receive Channels
Table 7-73 GFI Configuration - ML-6-15-D Probe with a

GTX1 GTX1
DRX1 DRX1
GTX3 GRX64 GTX3 GRX64
DRX3 DRX3
GRX128 GRX128
GTX2 GTX2 GTX2

GTX2
DRX2 DRX2 DRX2
DRX
GRX128 GRX128 GRX128
GRX128
Lower Frontplane Lower Frontplane

Upper Upper Frontplane
Frontplane


PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-23-1 ML-6-15-D Probe - Missing Transmit and Receive Channels (contd)
Table 7-74 ML-6-15-D Probe - GFI Configuration
A B C D
GTX1 GTX1
DRX1 DRX1
GRX64 GRX64
GTX1
DRX1
GRX64
B = 1.6 cm
C = 2.6 cm
D = 4.4 cm
probe in an MRX configuration LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-75 GFI Configuration - ML-6-15-D Probe
A C E G
B D F H
GTX2 GTX2 GTX2 GTX2

DRX DRX2 DRX2 DRX2
GRX128 GRX128 GRX128 GRX128
GTX2
DRX2
GRX128
B = 0.3 cm
C = 1.2 cm
D = 1.6 cm
E = 2.7 cm
F = 3.2 cm
G = 4.2 cm
H = 4.6 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
A C D E
B
GTX3 GTX3
DRX3 DRX3
GRX128 GRX128
GTX3
DRX3
GRX128
B = 0.3 cm
C = 1.2 cm
D = 3.3 cm
E = 4.2 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
A B C D
Lower Frontplane
B = 0.9 cm
C = 2.2 cm
D = 3.8 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
A B C D

Frontplane
Upper Frontplane
B = 0.9 cm
C = 2.2 cm
D = 3.8 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE

9L-D Probe in a LOGIQ E9 MRX Configuration
Table 7-79, MRX Configuration - 9L-D Probe with a correct 192 channel image, on page 316
Table 7-79 MRX Configuration - 9L-D Probe with a

GTX1 GTX1
MRX MRX
GTX2 GTX2
MRX MRX
GTX3
MRX

The areas identified in this image will appear dark, an artifact,when a transmit or receive signal
is missing or caused from those associated boards.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-80 9L-D Probe - MRX Configuration
A B C
GTX1 GTX1
MRX MRX
GTX1
MRX
B = 0.7 cm
C = 3.7 cm
probe in a GFI configuration LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-24-2 9L-D Probe - Missing Transmit and Receive Channels (contd)
Table 7-81 MRX Configuration - 9L-D Probe
A B C D E
GTX2 GTX2
MRX MRX
GTX2
MRX
B = 0.7 cm
C = 1.5 cm
D = 2.9 cm
E = 3.8 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
A B C
GTX3
MRX
GTX3
MRX
B = 1.5 cm
C = 2.9 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
A B
Lower Frontplane
Lower Frontplane
B = 2.3 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
A B
Upper Frontplane
Upper Frontplane
B = 2.3 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE

C1-5-D Probe in a LOGIQ E9 MRX Configuration
Table 7-85, MRX Configuration - C1-5-D Probe with a correct 192 channel image, on page 322
7-9-25-1 C1-5-D Probe - Missing Transmit and Receive Channels
Table 7-85 MRX Configuration - C1-5-D Probe with a

GTX1 GTX1
MRX MRX
GTX3
MRX
GTX2 GTX2
MRX MRX


PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-86 C1-5-D Probe - MRX Configuration
GTX1 GTX1
MRX MRX
GTX1
MRX

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-87 MRX Configuration - C1-5-D Probe
GTX2 GTX2
MRX MRX
GTX2
MRX

PROPRIETARY TO GE
GTX3
MRX
GTX3
MRX

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Lower Frontplane
Lower Frontplane

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Upper Frontplane
Upper Frontplane

PROPRIETARY TO GE

ML-6-15-D Probe in a LOGIQ E9 MRX Configuration
Table 7-91, MRX Configuration - ML-6-15-D Probe with a correct 192 channel image, on page 328
7-9-26-1 ML-6-15-D Probe - Missing Transmit and Receive Channels
Table 7-91 MRX Configuration - ML-6-15-D Probe with a

GTX1
GTX1
MRX
MRX
GTX3 GTX3
MRX MRX
GTX2 GTX2 GTX2

GTX2 MRX MRX MRX
MRX
Frontplane


PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-92 ML-6-15-D Probe - MRX Configuration
A B C D
GTX1 GTX1
DRX1 DRX1
GRX64 GRX64
GTX1
MRX
B = 1.6 cm
C = 2.6 cm
D = 4.4 cm
probe in a GFI configuration LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-93 MRX Configuration - ML-6-15-D Probe
A C E G
B D F H
GTX2
MRX GTX2 GTX2 GTX2
MRX MRX MRX
GTX2
MRX
B = 0.3 cm
C = 1.2 cm
D = 1.6 cm
E = 2.7 cm
F = 3.2 cm
G = 4.2 cm
H = 4.6 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
A C D E
B
GTX3 GTX3
MRX MRX
GTX3
MRX
B = 0.3 cm
C = 1.2 cm
D = 3.3 cm
E = 4.2 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
A B C D
Lower Frontplane
B = 0.9 cm
C = 2.2 cm
D = 3.8 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
A B C D

Frontplane
Upper Frontplane
B = 0.9 cm
C = 2.2 cm
D = 3.8 cm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-27 LOGIQ E9 GTX HV (High Voltage) Failure on MRX Systems

Use this to troubleshoot GTX Boards P/N 5201044-3, Rev. C or earlier on LOGIQ E9 - 5205000-5, -6
console models.
On MRX systems, some signals (JTAG) in the new Backplane are not terminated correctly, leaving
voltages floating. Depending on tolerances on the GTX Boards, these floating signals may induce
incorrect logic levels causing High Voltage errors; some GTX Boards may be more sensitive to this issue
than others. This problem may be observed running Diagnostics or while scanning and it is very
intermittent.
An artifact may be seen on the 2D image, intermittently and/or an error message will appear reporting
a High Voltage error, and the system needs to be rebooted to continue normal operation.
How to identify:
1.) Image artifact: System appears to have dead channels.
Figure 7-200 Image Artifact Dead Channels

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-27 LOGIQ E9 GTX HV (High Voltage) Failure on MRX Systems (contd)

NOTE: Use "FatalHW" as a search string to find error in the error log. This will help to identify the error
explained in step 2 and narrow down to the board that is causing it.
GTX "numbers" use 1, 2, 3 and 4 as nomenclature in VPD, but 0 (zero), 1, 2 and 3 are used as
nomenclature in diagnostics. In this manual, 1, 2, 3 and 4 nomenclature is used to identify board, based
on location in the Card Rack. See: Figure 7-201 "Card Rack - GTX Board Location (MRX Configuration)"
on page 7-336.
2.) Error log: The logfile.txt will display an entry like the following:
HouseKeeping: GFI Hardware Exception: SubType 31: -GFE Ch0 empty-GFE Ch1
empty-GTX3 HVFAULT. Severity : FatalHW
Thursday,Aug 11 15:58:41,2011; ; Info ; DFEManager(2980); HandleRunFlag:
setting RunBlock flag to false!
.
.
.
Thursday,Aug 11 15:58:41,2011; ; Debug ; acqGfi(2952); WatchDog:WatchDog :
GTX_PS_CR = 0x0038
GTX3 @0x0412 TEMP_MONITOR = 0x0000
GTX3 @0x0413 GTX_ErrorStatus = 0x0000
GTX3 @0x0421 Status_Bus_REGA = 0x0000
GTX3 @0x0422 Status_Bus_REGB = 0x0000
Thursday,Aug 11 15:58:41,2011; ; Debug ; acqGfi(2952); WatchDog:Watchdog
still alive, errors=0x0138 [(THOR) - - (TS_OK) (TS_LEVEL_OK) GTX3 -
0x0000 - This specific issue is identified by status registers of all zero value.
As the log indicates, the GTX3 was generating the error.
How to Fix:
The board needs to be replaced with the Rev. D or later, to prevent this error from reccurring.
The Rev. D Boards have been terminated correctly to prevent floating voltages.
NOTE: Label the GTX Boards prior to removal to reflect which slot each board was removed from, if
replacing one or two boards. Install the boards back in the original locations.
Label the Front Planes prior to removal to reflect which is the upper and which is the lower. Install the
Front Planes back in the original locations.
Service Stock of the GTX Boards have been purged and populated with Rev. D or later.
NOTE: GFI console models do not have this problem because those signals are terminated correctly
in the Backplanes for GFI console models.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-27 LOGIQ E9 GTX HV (High Voltage) Failure on MRX Systems (contd)
Figure 7-201 Card Rack - GTX Board Location (MRX Configuration)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-28 LOGIQ E9 Z-Axis Stuck Down

Use this procedure in the event the Z-Axis Gear (gear that drives the Z-Axis motion) may be driven
beyond the limitations, causing the Z-Axis Gear to jam below the lower, front flange of the Z-Mech
Support. See: Figure 7-202 "Z-Axis Gear (1) jammed below the lower, front flange (2) of the Z-Mech
Support (illustration showing behind the Drive Gear Assembly)" on page 7-337. The lower, front flange
protects exposure to the Drive Gear and Z-Axis Gear.
Figure 7-202 Z-Axis Gear (1) jammed below the lower, front flange (2) of the Z-Mech Support
(illustration showing behind the Drive Gear Assembly)
1
2

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-28 LOGIQ E9 Z-Axis Stuck Down (contd)
Table 7-97 Freeing the Z-Axis
1. Apply the Brakes and Direction Locks.

Remove the Right Side Cover. See:
Section 8-5-6-1 "Top Cover removal" on page 8-64.
2. Locate the Drive Gear Assembly on the

right hand side of the system.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3. Locate the area where the Z-Axis Gear is area where the Z-Axis Gear is jammed
jammed.
Z-Axis Gear (1) jammed below the lower,

front flange (2) of the Z-Mech Support
(picture from below Drive Gear Assembly)
4. Position the blade of a pry bar into the

gap, behind the Drive Gear Assembly,
where the Z-Axis Gear has jammed. DO
NOT position the pry bar on the Drive
Gear.
NOTE: Make sure ALL cables or ANY

components that can be damaged are
clear before proceeding to Step 5, as the
pry bar should not pinch any cables or
break any components or parts (plastic).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5. Pull back on the pry bar, and push up on

the underside of the Lower Operator
Panel until the Z-Axis Gear pops out of
the stuck position. The Top Console will
only rise slightly when the Drive Gear
becomes free.
NOTE: Apply only enough force to free

the jammed gear, but some force is
required to free the Z-Axis Gear.
Use the Z-Mechanism manual release

handle to raise the Top Console to ensure
the jammed Z-Axis Gear is free.
6. Perform the Functional Checks as described in the Drive Gear Assembly replacement section.
See: Table 8-203 "Drive Gear Assembly replacement Functional Checks" on page 8-332.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-29 Audio DOES NOT Play after Upgrade from R2 to R5
Table 7-98 Restoring Audio
1. Insert Service Key.
2. Exit to Windows using service password.
3. Open Start -> Control Panel -> Sound.
4. Click on the Recording Tab.
Left Click in the box: Select a recording

device and Confirm that Show Disabled
Devices is checked.
Select Line In and than Set Default. The

green check mark is displayed for Line in
Audio.
Select Microphone.
Click on the dropdown menu to the right

of Set Default and select Default
Communication Device.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5. Confirm that the green telephone icon is

shown next to Microphone as shown.
6. Click on the Playback Tab.
Left Click anywhere in the Select

Playback Device box and Confirm that
Show Disabled Devices is checked.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7. Left click USB Audio CODEC -> Select

Disable.
8. Confirm that Speaker USB Audio CODEC

is disabled and greyed out as shown.
Close the Sound window.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
9. Go to Start -> Control Panel -> Realtek

HD Audio Manager.
Make sure that Subwoofer and Front Left

and Right speakers are selected.
Close the window and shutdown.
10. Boot up to Application and launch the service desktop.
Under Service Diagnostics -> Backend Test -> IO Board test, Run IO Board Audio test.
IO Board Audio test should Pass.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-30 LOGIQ E9 Replacing New Fan Tray - Fails "GFI Fan Test"
LOGIQ E9 console models 5205000, 5205000-2, 5205000-3, 5205000-4 running Application Software
R2.x.x or earlier. The introduction of the new Fan Tray (P/N 5394406) fails system level diagnostic GFI
Fan Test.
The GFI Fan Test diagnostic checks for basic fan movement at two set points. The diagnostic checks
fan rotation by applying two different control voltage Duty Cycles to the fan tray. The current test
implementation sets restrictive limits on the rotation RPM. These rotation limits need to be widened
(become less restrictive) which will allow for fan and supplier variation.
This Section will instruct how review the test results data and assess if the fan is bad. This diagnostic
failure does not affect normal operation, it will only occur when running diagnostics.
GFI Fan Test Results Detail

Figure 7-203 Upper Limit on New Fan Rack Assembly will be 2500
NOTE: DO NOT replace any part unless the measured RPM falls outside of the new limit.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-31 LOGIQ E9 VPD Editor "Not Opening"

If a LOGIQ E9 console model running Application Software R3.1.0 and the VPD Editor does not open,
or takes too long to open, the VPD Editor, stand alone times out too quickly before it is able to establish
communication with the Card Rack.
If the system application is running, the VPD Editor will open immediately since the communication to
the Card Rack is already established by the system application.
This information s intended to inform the Field about a work around in case this issue is observed.
Table 7-99 Activating VPD Editor
Activating VPD Editor: Corresponding Graphic
Insert a Service Key:
Exit application and go to Windows

desktop.
Double-click on the "Vpdedit" (VPD

Editor) icon, on the desktop and wait.
If the VPD Editor does not open within

the next 30 seconds:
Double-click on the Go Ichiro icon to

launch the system application and keep
access to Windows.
NOTE: If the application does not start,

power-cycle the system (full power-
cycle, not re-start) and start procedure
over.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 7-99 Activating VPD Editor
Activating VPD Editor: Corresponding Graphic
Once the application opens, navigate to

the task bar and look for the desktop
short cut for show Desk Top.
The desktop will display.
Now double-click on the "Vpdedit" icon

to launch the VPD Editor Application.
Now the VPD Editor opens quickly since

the communication to the Card Rack is
already established through the system
applications.
NOTE: Make sure the Device column

lists the boards installed in the Card
Rack. This confirms that the VPD Editor
is able to read each board. If the Card
Rack boards are not detected as
installed, you need to close VPD Editor
and re-open.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-32 Sticking Brakes

Sticking brakes may be caused by screws backing out of the caster body and contacting the rubber on
the caster wheel. This can be found on either the front or the rear brakes. Observe the rubber on the
wheel, if you notice worn surfaces in the inside of the rubber or notice debris, replace the caster.
Caster body screw (1) wearing inside of the caster wheel (2). Images are for reference only, the casters
CANNOT be serviced. See: Figure 7-205 "How to identify if screws are backing out of Caster Body" on
page 7-349.
Figure 7-204 Worn Surface from screws

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-32 Sticking Brakes (contd)
Figure 7-205 How to identify if screws are backing out of Caster Body

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-9-33 Brake Functionality (not effectively stopping the LOGIQ E9)

Over time the Brake Arm may have worn a groove into the rubber of the caster wheel. The deeper this
groove becomes, the less effective the brakes will be. Observe the rubber on the wheel, if you notice
worn surfaces in the inside of the rubber or notice debris, replace the caster.
Brake Arm (1) wearing inside, inner diameter of the caster wheel (2). Images are for reference only, the
casters CANNOT be serviced.
Figure 7-206 Worn Surface from Brake Arm

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 7-10
Test of Printers
7-10-1 Windows Print Test Page
This tests that the printer is correctly installed and hooked up at the Windows level.
1.) Open the Printers folder, either from Start -> Settings -> Printers or from Utilities -> System ->
Printers.
2.) Right click on a printer and select Preferences.
3.) Select Print Test Page (this will send a print to the printer bypassing all of the Scanner software).
4.) Observe the page. If the page prints out, the problem you are looking for is probably a
configuration issue in windows, or configuration issue in Utilities -> Connectivity. If the page does
not print out, there probably is a cabling issue, or a printer configuration issue in windows.
NOTE: For the Sony small format printers you will see the test page clipped. This is normal.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
7-10-2 Set-up and Test a Printer Service

1.) Select Utility -> Connectivity.
If you get a pop-up asking you to log on, select ADM. If the customer has not changed the user it has
no password.
2.) Select the Service tab.

3.) In the comb box Select Service to Add select Standard Print and click on Add.
4.) In the right pane Properties Combo Box Select the printer you wish to test. Set any other
parameters you desire.
5.) In the left pane Properties Enter a name that describes the printer and configuration you just
selected in the right pane.
6.) Select the Button tab.
7.) Select one of the Physical Print Buttons that you want to configure.
8.) In the right pane click on the service name you just created in the Services Tab.
9.) Click on the >> button. This will place this service in the PrintFlow View for the printer button you
selected.
10.)Click on Save.
You have now configured a printer service and attached it to a print button.
Now you can test the printer by pressing the print button you just configured. If you configured it for 1
row and 1 column each time you press the print button you will get a print sent to the printer. If you
configured some other combination of rows or columns you will have to push the printer button multiple
times before a print is sent to the printer.
If the image does not print, check the configuration to verify that you have it set up correctly.
7-10-3 View the Windows Printer Queues

1.) Go to Utility -> System -> Peripherals, and click on Properties.
7 - 352 Section 7-10 - Test of Printers

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Chapter 8
Replacement procedures
Section 8-1
Overview
This chapter describes how to remove and install, or replace, modules and subsystems in the
LOGIQ E9. It also includes instructions for installing and re-installing the software.

8-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8-2 Warnings and important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-3 Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-4 Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-5 Replacing Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
8-6 Replacing Top Console Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115
8-7 Replacing XYZ Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-313
8-8 Main Console parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-338
8-9 Casters and Brakes replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-364
8-10 Front End Acquisition / Card Cage parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-384
8-11 BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-440
8-12 Main Power Supply parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-563
8-13 Peripherals replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-594
8-14 Cables replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-623
8-15 V Nav Roll Stand and/or On-Board Stand Installation and/or Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 8-632
8-16 Option Installation/Replacement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-651
Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8-1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 8-2
Warnings and important information
This section includes important information. Read it before doing any of the procedures in this chapter.

8-2-3 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-2-4 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-2-5 Manpower - When two persons are needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-2-6 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-2-3 Warnings

TAG
LOCKOUT
& 3. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE
Signed Date
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN OR
CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
4. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
WILL TURN OFF.
When the BEP door is open, the Extended Power Shutdown circuit board or ChargeBoard is exposed.
When working inside the BEP, remove the battery cable from the Extended Power Shutdown or
ChargeBoard to prevent accidental short circuit of the 24V of the battery that can damage the Extended
Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard circuitry.
WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD,
PLACING PEOPLE IN AWKWARD POSITIONS, WE HAVE LIMITED THE LIFTING
WEIGHT FOR ONE PERSON IN THE FIELDTO 16 KG (35 LBS). ANYTHING OVER 16 KG
(35 LBS) REQUIRES TWO PEOPLE.
WARNING AT LEAST TWO PERSONS ARE NEEDED WHEN REPLACING CASTERS (WHEELS) OR
ADJUSTING BRAKES.
8-2 Section 8-2 - Warnings and important information

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-2-3 Warnings (contd)
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED ESD
CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE POWER
CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING THE WASTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MUST NOT BE

DISPOSED AS UNSORTED MUNICIPAL WASTE AND MUST BE COLLECTED
SEPARATELY.
CONTACT THE MANUFACTURER OR OTHER AUTHORIZED DISPOSAL COMPANY TO
DECOMMISSION YOUR EQUIPMENT.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-2-4 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GE policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GE employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have
been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment
with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound
Probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as
the people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care are regulated medical waste for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.
8-2-5 Manpower - When two persons are needed

These replacement procedures require two persons:
Casters Replacement
The rest of the replacement procedures can be carried out by one person.
8-4 Section 8-2 - Warnings and important information

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-2-6 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9

In addition to the standard tools listed in 10-5-2 "Standard GE Tool Kit in the USA" on page 10-7, the
following tools (TORX bits or drivers) are needed to service the LOGIQ E9. If the torque is not indicated
with the procedure, hand tighten the screws/nuts.
Table 8-1 Tools used for servicing LOGIQ E9
TOOL TYPE TOOL SIZE

BIT # TX-10
BIT # TX-15
BIT # TX-20
TORX
BIT # TX-25
BIT # TX-30*
BIT # Tx-45*
FLAT BLADE
1/4 inch or 6 mm
SCREWDRIVER
PH1
PHILLIPS SCREWDRIVER PH2
PH3
5 mm
HEX KEY 8 mm
10 mm
5 mm
10 mm
OPEN END WRENCH
13 mm
TORQUE WRENCH
3/16 inch
Up to 81 Nm (59.7 lbf-ft)**
ADJUSTABLE WRENCH 152 mm (6 inches) long
PRY BAR approximately 18 inches overall (457 mm)
* 90 degree L is suggested. A full set of 90 degree L Torx wrenches are
recommended.
** Heavy mechanical parts may need a specific torque. Each procedure will indicate the
torque needed.
8-2-7 PPE Required During Service

The following PPE are required during service tasks, per EHS Policy:
Safety Glasses
Safety Shoes
Cut Resistant Gloves
Kneel pad (if kneeling is required)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 8-3
Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front
Figure 8-1 illustrates what is the Left Side (1), Rear / Back (2), Right Side (3), and Front (4) of the
LOGIQ E9.
Figure 8-1 Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front
8-6 Section 8-3 - Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 8-4
Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software
This section describes how to install and/or re-install software on LOGIQ E9.

8-4-3 LOGIQ E9 models versus software requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-4-4 Tools provided with the LOGIQ E9 or as part of an upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-4-5 Space management - moving all images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-4-6 Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-4-7 Loading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-4-8 Loading the Application Software Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8-4-9 Flashing the BIOS memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8-4-10 Setup after Software loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8-4-11 Verifications after the software has been loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8-4-12 Remote Software Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-3 LOGIQ E9 models versus software requirement

CONSOLE
NUMBER
Phase I BT2010 BT2011 R4 R5 R6
LOGIQ E9,
5205000 Y U U U U N
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-2 Y U U U U N
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-3 N Y U U U N
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-4 N Y U U U N
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-5 N N Y U U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-6 N N Y U U U
220-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-7 N N N Y U U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-8 N N N N Y U
100-240 VAC
LOGIQ E9,
5205000-9 N N N N N Y
100-240 VAC

Y Original
U Upgrade available
N Not supported
8-4-4 Tools provided with the LOGIQ E9 or as part of an upgrade

CD with LOGIQ E9 System software
CD with LOGIQ E9 Application software
If a patch software CD has been included:
CD with a Patch for LOGIQ E9

Verify that the software is current. Updated software may be available. Check for any available
FMIs.
NOTE: Service Dongle is not required and should NOT be installed during the software loading
session.
8-8 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-5 Space management - moving all images

NOTICE In order to complete a successful restore of the Patient Database, if needed, the images must be moved
away from LOGIQ E9 before doing backup of the Patient Database. Depending on the location set-up,
either move the images to a remote server or to removable media like DVD or CD discs.
As the images are moved, the database will point to the new location.
If the backup procedure is not completed correctly, the images and database information could be lost.
Refer to the latest revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 3 to perform the following
tasks:
Configure the Disk Management Function

Set the Disk Management Schedule
Configure Data Management Settings
Configure Destination Device Setting
Run the Disk Management Function
Start Disk Management Manually
Speak with the personnel at the site to determine which patient images need to be backed up prior to
starting.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-6 Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations

For information, refer to the latest revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 3.
8-4-7 Loading the Software
8-4-7-1 Manpower
One person, 60 minutes.
8-4-7-2 Tools
Software CDs
Service Dongle
8-4-7-3 Overview
The Hard Disk Drive on LOGIQ E9 is divided into five partitions.
NOTE: The Hard Disk Drive on LOGIQ E9 has three visible partitions (two partitions are hidden).
DRIVE LETTER LABEL
C: SYSTEM
D: USER
E: ARCHIVE
When installing (and re-installing) software, you get the choice to either replace all the contents on the
Hard Disk Drive, or only install the software on the C: partition. If you chose to replace all the contents
on the Hard Disk Drive, all stored data, including all set-up data will be lost. It is considered to be the
best practice to always move images away from the Hard Disk Drive, do backup of databases etc. and
record important configuration data on paper before starting a software load or reload, as described
earlier in this section.
The software is delivered on two CDs, one for the system software (which is technically a DVD) and one
for the LOGIQ E9 application software. In some cases, a third CD with a software patch, may also be
included. A software patch CD is used when a few new files should be installed or changed, but the
changes do not require a complete software load.
When installing the software, start with the system software, then the application software and if
included, install the patch software at the end. This is described in detail over the next pages.
8 - 10 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-7-3 Overview (contd)
NOTE: System Software may also be referred to as the Base Image or Ghost.
WARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA,

YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS AND
CUSTOMER PRESETS TO CD, DVD OR HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE
UPGRADE
Before the System Software Load, you must perform the following steps:
contact the customer to allow enough lead time to back up the system.
be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams.
review troubleshooting section to collect information for future analysis if you are troubleshooting
loss of image or patient data.
disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.
be sure all USB devices (printers only) are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash Drives).
If a printer is plugged in at this time, it is automatically installed.
save all Service Presets if you are connected to InSite to restore remote connectivity after
something is completed.
save all User Presets.
NOTE: After a full or partial system software load, confirm the Windows automatic Daylight Saving
Time feature is turned off (Utility -> System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab ->
Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox). Be sure the system and DVR date, time and time zone
are set correctly.
NOTE: System and Application software disables the Run window normally accessed from Start ->
Run, and the mouse right-click (left set key) feature.
Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 - 11

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-7-4 System Software Load - R3 and earlier

1.) Turn on the system.
2.) Turn on all digital peripherals.
NOTE: R.2.x.x or later: If Wireless LAN option is installed. Collect Wireless LAN information as well.
See: 4-2-15-3 "Connectivity WLAN" on page 4-22. Also, if WLAN is using WPA-2 security
and requires user name and password to access the network, you need to contact the IT
department to obtain this data since it will be lost during reload.
3.) Record the systems TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,
Network Speed) from the Utility -> Configuration -> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back
to the system in the System Checkout section after the install.
For a convenient form, see: 4-2-15-2 "Connectivity Recording the TCP/IP settings" on page 4-
21 and 4-2-15-4 "Connectivity Recording the AE Title and Port settings" on page 4-23.
4.) Record the systems installed Option strings from the Utility -> Admin -> System Admin page.
This step is precautionary in the event the software load has issues. For a convenient form, see:
4-2-15-9 "Admin Recording the Software Option Keys" on page 4-29.
5.) Perform a Backup from the Utility -> System -> Backup/Restore page. You should back up the
Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer Presets), and
Service settings. You will perform a Restore after the install.
For a full Base load, this step is mandatory.
For a C: Partition load, this step is precautionary in the event the software load has issues. The data
should transfer over for a C: Partition load.
See: the latest revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 3.
6.) Confirm with customer that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive.
7.) Insert the applicable LOGIQ E9 System Software disk into the DVD drive.
8.) Properly power down the System. Depress the ON switch and select Shutdown on the window.
9.) Wait until the LCDs on the Operator Panel are switched off and the ON switch has turned amber.
10.)Power ON the System.
The scanner boots from the Software disk and displays a load warning message.
Figure 8-2 System Software load warning message
****WARNING * WARNING * WARNING * WARNING * WARNING * WARNING ****
THIS PROCEDURE MAY RESULT IN COMPLETE PATIENT DATA LOSS IF NOT USED CORRECTLY! PLEASE READ
THE OPTIONS BELOW CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING.
This process is NOT REVERSIBLE and should NOT be stopped once started! DO NOT power off the
system until the process has completed. It will take less than 10 minutes to load the drive.
If this process is stopped for some reason, you will have to run it again to completion or
else the system will not work.
If you want to proceed with this process press the Enter key to continue with option
selection.
...or...
Remove the disk from the Optical drive and Press CTRL-C now to exit and power cycle your
system to restart it without overwriting your disk drives current contents.
Press any key to continue...

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-7-4 System Software Load - R3 and earlier (contd)
11.)Press any key to continue; or to abort, remove the disk from the drive and press CTRL-C.
The System Software Load Instruction window displays.

Figure 8-3 System Software load instruction (R1x.x)
Figure 8-4 System Software load instruction (R2.x.x)
NOTICE If you select [1] in the next step, ALL existing software and data will be erased. If backup has not been
performed as described earlier in this manual, all data like Patient Database, System Configuration and
User Configurations (Customer Presets) will be lost.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

12.)Choose one of the following:
a.) Select [1] ONLY if a [2] update cannot be used: Selecting [1] performs a complete LOGIQ E9
software installation. (All data will be erased.)
b.) Select [2] to update/re-install the software on the C:\ partition. (Only data on the C:\ partition
will be erased. This will keep Patient Archive and Presets intact.) On R2.x.x or later, C:\ and
Z:\ partitions will be reloaded. Archive and presets are not affected.
c.) Select [3] to Exit.(The procedure exits without software load.)
Depending on the choice, a message displays explaining choice again. This is the last
warning message prior to software load. Press CTRL-C to abort.
With choice [1] or [2], the Software loader program launches.
The Norton Ghost window displays.
Figure 8-5 Norton Ghost window
WARNING Do not interrupt the software loading at any time.
13.)Wait for the software installation to complete. (Typical installation time: 5-10 minutes). Status bar
on the screen indicates progress.
The Base Load Complete message displays. See: NOTICE below.
Figure 8-6 Base Load Complete message
If there are no error messages listed above, the Base System Software Load Image process has successfully com-
pleted. You will now need to load the Application Software onto your system.
Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system and then continue with the Application Software
load procedure.
NOTICE DO NOT proceed with the Application Software load yet.

DO NOT insert the Application disk into the DVD drive until you have completed all the remaining
directions in this section. If you insert media in the drive beforehand, the drives will not remap correctly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

14.)Remove the Base Load disk.
NOTE: If you do not remove the disk, the Base Load process repeats when the system boots up.
15.)Restart the System using Ctl+Alt+Del.

When the system reboots, it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal
process.
NOTE: If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button (button turns
amber).
16.)Allow the hardware checking process to run to completion.
NOTE: Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front
panel could corrupt the installation. While the script is running, several windows or dialog
boxes appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive.
17.)Wait for the System Settings Change window asking Do you want to restart your computer now?
to display, approximately 1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed.
Figure 8-7 System Settings Change dialog box - Restart Windows Message
18.)Select Yes (see: Figure 8-7) to restart.
NOTE: In R2.x.x, a DOS window will display, that times out and automatically reboots the system. You
can wait or select Yes to restart.
19.)Wait until all drivers are installed automatically and the reboot is complete.
20.)Check your Service Dongle. Plug in your Service Dongle to ensure that it is recognized and lights
up.
21.)From Windows, double-click on My Computer to confirm the CD/DVD drive is mapped to G:\.
If the drive is not mapped to the G:\:
a.) From the Desktop, select My Computer.

b.) Open C:\remap\newmap.
c.) Double-click on newmap.bat to remap the drive.
22.)Remove the Service Dongle.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-7-5 System Software Load - R4 or later

1.) Turn ON the LOGIQ E9.
2.) Turn ON all digital peripherals.
Table 8-4 Software Load - R4 or later
1. Insert the applicable LOGIQ E9 Base System Software Load warning message
Image Load Software disk provided in the
Kit, into the DVD drive.
Power down the LOGIQ E9.
Wait until the LCDs on the Operator Panel

are switched off and the ON switch has
turned amber.
Power ON the LOGIQ E9. Some Windows

screens will be displayed before displaying
the software load warning message.
The scanner boots from the Software disk

and displays a load warning message.
2. R5 Base Image consist of two disks. Insert Disk #1 (1 of 2).
3. If CTRL-C to cancel is pressed: after any key is pressed
Type y.
if cancelled
Type exit.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4. Press any key to continue; or to abort,

remove the disk from the drive and press System Software load
CTRL-C. instruction (R.4)
The System Software Load Instruction

window displays.
5. Choose Option 1 to perform a complete After any key to boot DVD Ghost
Software installation, all data will be erased.
Choose Option 2 to install Software on C
partition only. Only data on C partition will
be erased.
Choose Option 1.
Ghost wait until next
The Software loader program will begin to

launch and the following warning will
appear:
You are about to reload the

entire disk. If you DO NOT want
to do this, remove the CDROM from
the CDROM drive and Press
"CTRL-C" now to exit and power
cycle your system to restart
without overwriting your disk
drive's current contents. Symantec Ghost Window
Press any key to continue...
The Software loader program will continue

to launch.
In R5 or later, at some point the system will

prompt to insert Disk #2. Follow the screen
instructions.
The Symantec Ghost window displays.
WARNING
DO NOT interrupt the software loading at any time.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6. Wait for the software installation to Partition Load

complete. (Typical installation time: 30
minutes). Status bar on the screen
indicates progress.
The Base Load Complete message

displays.
DO NOT insert the Application disk into the

DVD drive until you have completed all the
remaining directions in this section. If you
insert media in the drive beforehand, the
drives will not remap correctly.
Base Load Complete message
NOTICE
DO NOT proceed with the Application Software load yet.
7. Remove the base load disk.
NOTE: If you do not remove the disk, the base load process repeats when the LOGIQ E9 boots
up.
8. To restart the LOGIQ E9, type "exit" and press enter to reboot.
When the LOGIQ E9 reboots, it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal
process.
NOTE: If the LOGIQ E9 does not reboot, press and hold down the Power ON/OFF button (button
turns amber).
Allow the hardware checking process to run to completion.
NOTE: DO NOT TOUCH THE LOGIQ E9 during this process. Activating the keyboard,
mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation. While the script is running, several
windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At times it may look like the LOGIQ E9 is
unresponsive.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
9. Wait until all drivers are installed Restart Windows Message

automatically and the reboot is complete.
DO NOT PRESS ANY KEY, ignore all

messages until the automatic reboot is
complete.
10. Plug in your Service Dongle to ensure that it is recognized and lights up.
From Windows, double-click on My Computer to confirm the CD/DVD drive is mapped to G:\. If
the drive is not mapped to the G:\:
From the Desktop:
a. select My Computer.
b. Open C:\remap\newmap.
c. Double-click on newmap.bat to remap the drive.
Remove the Service Dongle.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-7-6 Loading the Application Software

1.) Insert the applicable disk labelled LOGIQ E9 Application SW.
2.) Wait about 30 seconds.
A window opens (see: Figure 8-8) showing the contents of the drive.
3.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
Figure 8-8 LoadSoftware.bat File
4.) If the pop-up window in Figure 8-8 does not open in a minute, perform steps A - C below.
A.) From the Desktop, select My Computer.
B.) Double-click the G:\ drive to open the pop-up window in above.
C.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
NOTE: If the base image does not match the part number and revision of the approved base image,
then the system notifies you of the required base image needed and does not run the software.
A Command window similar to the example shown in Figure 8-9 opens.
Figure 8-9 Command Window (Note: Window will reflect actual software version instead of Rx.x.x)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-7-6 Loading the Application Software (contd)

5.) As indicated, press any key to continue, ONLY for R4 and earlier.
The process is completely automated and provides you with several status messages, including the
message in Figure 8-10 (LoadSoftware Information Window).
NOTE: When the LoadSoftware Information Window displays asking you to select OK, do nothing. This
window closes automatically.
Figure 8-10 LoadSoftware Information Window - Do not select OK
6.) Wait while the software loads (approximately 7-8 minutes). Do not interrupt process.
WARNING Do not interrupt the software loading at any time.
After software load is complete, the system reboots.
After the reboot, the System installs the Service Platform.
NOTICE Do not try to prevent the reboot. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading turned off. If hyper
threading is turned off, the system responds slower than expected.
If hyper threading turns off, you must perform the re-ghost and application software load again.
NOTE: After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot, you may get some error
messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present,
these messages are normal and should be ignored.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
After the Service Platform reboot, the Start Application window displays.
Figure 8-11 Start Application window (Note: Window will reflect actual software version instead of Rx.x.x)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-7-6 Loading the Application Software (contd)

7.) Remove the applications disk from the DVD drive.
8.) From the Start Applications window, select Start (if the CD is still in the tray; otherwise, the system
starts up automatically).
The System powers down and reboots.
The first time the application loads after a SW reload, you may see: the error shown in Figure 8-12.
Select OK and reboot the system.
Figure 8-12 SW Reload Error Message
During the reboot process, the system may prompt for the Basic Option string (valid license) (see:
Figure 8-13.
If the Basic Option string is not saved in the Option Dongle, or if this is a software upgrade, the SW
License window may open.
NOTE: If only the title bar is visible in the lower left corner of the monitor, double-click the SW License
title bar to expand the window.
Figure 8-13 Enter Option String
NOTE: All systems must have at least the Basic Option string for the software to run. Any single Option
String may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic).
Demo Option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo Option
string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.
NOTE: If the system does not display an image or a good image when you boot up, Do Not troubleshoot
it as a problem yet. Continue with this install.
9.) Update the Vital Product Data (VPD) information.

Proper Vital Product Data coding is essential to proper system function and optimization. For
information on updating VPD, see: 8-4-8-3 "Verify and Update Vital Product Data" on page 8-31.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-7-7 Loading Software Patches

If a CD with software patches is included, load the CD, restart the LOGIQ E9 and follow the instructions.
8-4-7-8 Verifying the software versions

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> System -> ABOUT.
2.) Verify software and hardware versions as recorded in Table 4-15 "Record Software and Hardware
versions" on page 4-33.
8-4-7-9 Verifying the software option key settings
NOTE: Software Option Dongles are software version dependant. If a new software version has been
installed, follow installation instructions for that software. Usually, new software option strings
are needed. When re-installing the same software, the Software Option Strings should be
reused.
2.) Verify that the Software Option String(s) (alphanumeric strings) in the S/W Option Dongle section
is (are) the same as recorded in Table 4-11 "Software Option Keys" on page 4-29.
3.) If needed, enter any new or missing option key string(s) in S/W Option Key field and select Add.
8-4-7-10 Verifying the TCP/IP settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utilities -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP.
2.) Verify that all settings on the TCP/IP screen match those recorded in Table 4-3 "Record settings
from TCP/IP screen" on page 4-21.
3.) Select SAVE SETTINGS.
4.) Select OK to continue.
5.) Reboot system.
8-4-7-11 Verifying the AE Title and Port settings

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utilities -> Connectivity -> Device.
2.) Verify that all settings on the Device settings screen match those recorded in 4-2-15-4 "Connectivity
Recording the AE Title and Port settings" on page 4-23.
3.) Select SAVE SETTINGS.
4.) Select OK to continue.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-7-12 Restoring Patient Archive and System Configurations

For complete instructions, refer to the latest revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16.
1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> System -> Backup/Restore.
2.) On the Restore screen, select as needed:
- Patient archive to restore the patient archive images.
- Report archive
- System configuration to restore all System Settings/User Defined Configuration (Presets), OR
- One or several system configuration items to restore parts of the System Settings and User
Defined Configuration (Presets), see: Figure 4-24 "Backup/Restore settings" on page 4-31.
3.) Select the appropriate Source Device.
CAUTION The Restore procedure will OVERWRITE the existing data on the local Hard Drive. Make sure to select
the correct source device.
4.) If restore is done from a backup on a removable media, insert the media in the drive.
5.) Select Restore Now.
Depending on the selection, one or two Restore confirmation windows are displayed:
6.) Ensure that the correct source is selected, and select OK.
The selected items are copied to the systems. If items from the System Configuration are restored
the system needs to be rebooted. The Reboot system window is displayed.
7.) Select OK to reboot the system, and verify the Customer Presets are working properly.
8-4-7-13 Verifying the Video and DVR settings

1.) Select Utility -> System -> Peripherals.
2.) Verify Video Settings Format as recorded in Table 4-14 "Record settings from Peripheral screen"
on page 4-32.
Correct the selection if needed.
3.) Verify DVR model as recorded in Table 4-14 "Record settings from Peripheral screen" on page 4-32.
Correct the selection if needed.
4.) Format a DVD, and backup Customer Presets to confirm proper DVD/DVR write functionality.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-7-14 Functional Checks

Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.
If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual,
Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use.
Table 8-1 Loading the Software Functional Checks
See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual,
Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment
4-3-19 Mechanical Function Checks passed all required checks and is ready for use.
Software DVR (Option) Configuration

(if present)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-8 Loading the Application Software Only

Use this procedure to update application software only.
1.) Place the LOGIQ E9 Application Software DVD in the CD/DVD Drive, while the system is running.
2.) Reboot the system. The Start Application window displays.
Figure 8-14 Start Application window (window will reflect actual software version
instead of Rx.x.x)
3.) Select Install SW. Press OK on the Start Loader message and then press OK on the New System
Software message. A Command window similar to the example shown in Figure 8-15 "Command
Window" on page 8-28 opens.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-8 Loading the Application Software Only (contd)

Figure 8-15 Command Window
NOTE: The window reflects the actual software version instead of R6.0.6EP1_L9_, as shown above.
4.) If indicated, press any key to continue.
NOTE: When the LoadSoftware Information Window displays asking you to select OK, do nothing. This
window closes automatically.
Figure 8-16 LoadSoftware Information Window - Do not select OK
5.) Wait while the software loads (approximately 7-8 minutes). Do not interrupt this process and ignore
any errors.
WARNING Do not interrupt the software load at any time.
After the software load is complete, the system reboots.
NOTICE Do not try to prevent the reboot.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

After the reboot, the Start Application window displays.
6.) Remove the LOGIQ E9 Applications Software DVD from the DVD drive.
7.) Store the application disks with the system.
8.) Remove and destroy the previous Application software version disks.
Figure 8-17 Start Application window (window will reflect actual software version
instead of Rx.x.x)
9.) From the Start Application window, select Start.

The first time the application loads after a SW reload, you may see: the error shown in Figure 8-18,
"SW Reload Error Message." Select OK and reboot the system.
During the reboot process, the system may prompt for the Basic Option string (valid license) (see:
Figure 8-19 "Enter Option String" on page 8-30.
If the Basic Option string is not saved in the Option Dongle, or if this is a software upgrade, the SW
License window may open.
NOTE: If only the title bar is visible in the lower, left corner of the monitor, double-click the SW License
title bar to expand the window.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 8-19 Enter Option String
NOTE: All systems must have at least the Basic Option string for the software to run. Any single Option String
may enable multiple options (i.e., Basic).
R2.x.x requires basic plus BT2010 option String.
Demo Option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo Option string
in a unit when it is sold to a customer.
8-4-8-1 Verifying the software versions

1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> System -> About.
2.) Verify the software version. Ensure that the software version shown on the screen matches the
disk label.

to the customer.
Table 8-2 Loading the Application Software only Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks


(if present)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-8-3 Verify and Update Vital Product Data

It is essential that Vital Product Data (VPD) is verified or updated after any hardware change to the Back
End Processor (BEP) or Front End Processors.
NOTE: NOTE: Failure to properly program Vital Product Data could cause adverse affects on system
operation and image quality.
Refer to: Section 5-17 "VPD Editor" on page 5-194 and 8-10-11 "VPD - GFI and MRX Configuration" on
page 8-412 for additional information.
8-4-9 Flashing the BIOS memory

1.) Boot system and insert the BIOS BLASTER disk.
2.) When prompted to load the new BIOS, press y.
3.) When prompted, remove the disk.
4.) Hold down the ON/OFF button to power down the system.
5.) Reboot the system, and look for the new BIOS number.
8-4-10 Setup after Software loading

NOTE: Use this procedure if all partitions on the HDD were erased during the software load.
NOTE: If only the software on C:\ has been replaced or updated, go to: 8-4-11 "Verifications after the
software has been loaded" on page 8-32.
1.) Restore the Patient Archive and System Configurations from the backup you made before the
software load. For instructions, see Data Backup and Restore in the User Manual/User Guide.
2.) With your recordings from before the software load available, continue with the setup instructions
starting in: Section 3-7 "Configuration" on page 3-34. Correct the settings as needed.
3.) Continue with: Section 3-9 "Connectivity Setup and Tips" on page 3-40. Based on your recordings,
correct the settings as needed.
4.) Continue with: Section 3-10 "Setup paperwork" on page 3-85. Based on your recordings, correct
the settings as needed.
5.) After a software load, you should always calibrate the Front End, as described in: Section 6-6 "DC
Offset Calibration" on page 6-34.
6.) Next, continue with: 8-4-11-1 "Functional Checks" on page 8-32.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-11 Verifications after the software has been loaded

NOTE: DO NOT use this procedure if all partitions on the HDD have been erased during the software
load, but refer to: 8-4-10 "Setup after Software loading" on page 8-31.
NOTE: Use this procedure if only the software on C:\ has been replaced or updated or reloaded.
1.) With your recordings from before the software loading available, continue with the setup instructions
starting in: Section 3-7 "Configuration" on page 3-34. Correct the settings as needed.
2.) Continue with: Section 3-9 "Connectivity Setup and Tips" on page 3-40. Based on your recordings,
correct the settings as needed.
3.) Continue with: Section 3-10 "Setup paperwork" on page 3-85. Based on your recordings, correct
the settings as needed.
4.) After a software load, you should always calibrate the Front End, as described in: Section 6-6 "DC
Offset Calibration" on page 6-34.
5.) Next, continue with: 8-4-11-1 "Functional Checks" on page 8-32.

to the customer.
Table 8-3 Verifications after software has been loaded Functional Checks
See:

4-3-6 B-Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual,

4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment
passed all required checks and is ready for use.

(if present)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12 Remote Software Reload
This procedure describes the steps to perform a remote Base Load and application software reloads.
This procedure is intended for GE On-Line Engineers or GE Field Engineers with remote access
capabilities.
NOTE: Remote Software Reload is not recommended over wireless if the site uses Protected
Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) security since the username/password cannot be
restored automatically. In those cases, it is required to perform the Download/Reload over a
LAN connection and manually set up the wireless connection again, once reload is complete.
8-4-12-2 Manpower
Field Engineer or OLC Engineer and customer, 60 minutes.
8-4-12-3 Tools
PC
InSite ExC connection and access.
When troubleshooting; or the Software Application is corrupted, these are the steps on the Remote
Software Reload process:
1.) Set up Fast poll.

2.) Confirm backups for Patient Data and presets.
3.) Connect to the device.
4.) Software reload.
5.) Reconnect to the device.
6.) Reset default Poll interval.
Instructions for each step follow below.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-5 Fast Poll Set Up

1.) Select CONFIGURATION -> Manage devices on the right side of the screen.
Figure 8-20 Configuration and Manage Devices Display

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-5 Fast Poll Set Up (contd)

2.) Click on the search icon on the upper, right-hand corner of the screen to search for the device.
Figure 8-21 Search Icon
3.) Select the device and press OK.
Figure 8-22 Search for Device

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-5 Fast Poll Set Up (contd)

4.) Under the PROFILE tab, set the Pending poll interval to 15 (the default value is 900).
Figure 8-23 Pending Poll Interval
5.) Press Save and Close. Fast polling is now set. The icon changes from a "dot icon to a "lightning
icon.
Figure 8-24 Verify Icon Change
NOTE: You may need to refresh the screen to see the current status.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-6 Confirm Backups for Patient Data and Presets

Although remote software reload does not delete any presets or settings on the system since it reloads
the C:\ partition only and application, it is recommended to follow these steps:
* Contact the customer to allow enough lead timeto back upthe system. Be sure no images
are on the clipboard or in opened exams.
* Be sure that the DICOM spooler is empty.
* Review the troubleshooting section to collect information for future analysis (if you are
troubleshooting loss of image or patient data).
* Be sure all USB printers, microphones and the footswitch are connected and powered on.
These USB devices will be automatically installed during the base image load process.
* Remove all USB Hard DiskDrives and Flash Drives. Failure to do so may result in a failure
of the software reload process and damage to the data on the USB device.
* Be sure the Customer has saved all Presets, both User Defined and Service. This is
precautionary in case the presets need to be restored manually.
* Note any windows type configurations, such as regional settings, keyboards, and
localization settings.
8-4-12-7 Connect to the Device

To connect to the device, use the search tool on the left-hand side of the Questra page.
1.) Have the customer activate fast poll on their device (left click on the InSite ExC icon and select
Connect to GE), to established a connection faster.
2.) Select Connect to device.
3.) Select Connect under UL_CSD.
4.) Log in as GE Service.
Figure 8-25 Select Connect under UL_CSD

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-7 Connect to the Device (contd)

5.) Request Disruptive Mode through the CSD.
Figure 8-26 Request Disruptive Mode from the CSD
6.) Ask the Customer to authorize Disruptive Mode on the device.
Figure 8-27 InSite Notification on the scanner

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-7 Connect to the Device (contd)

Once enabled, the message, Successfully Changed Disruptive Status, appears and you can
proceed.
Figure 8-28 Successful Change Display
7.) Before proceeding, ask the customer to leave the system alone until you contact them again.
Reinforce the following:
* DO NOT press any key.
* DO NOT disturb the process.
* Ignore all pop-up messages.
* The system will reboot several times during the process, THIS IS EXPECTED.
* Put a note on the scanner that it is being serviced remotely and do not touch it and provide
a contact number on how to contact GE if there is any questions.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-8 Software Reload
To reload software,
1.) Select Utilities -> Common Utilities -> Invoke SW Reload.
Figure 8-29 Invoke SW Reload

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-8 Software Reload (contd)
NOTE: Step 2.) through Step 5.) ARE ONLY APPLICABLE to R3 or earlier and can be skipped for R4
or later". For R4, proceed to Step 6.).
2.) Copy the challenge string that appears on the right-hand side of the screen.
Figure 8-30 Challenge String
NOTE: The challenge and response strings are case-sensitive.
If the device IS NOT in Disruptive Mode, this error message appears:
Figure 8-31 Disruptive Mode Enabled Error

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3.) On your PC, log in as GE Service at http://3.62.153.99/service/.
4.) Type the challenge string from the device into the Challenge Response String GUI on your PC and
press Submit Challenge.
Figure 8-32 Challenge String from the system to Challenge Response String GUI on PC
NOTE: Remember, the challenge and response strings are case-sensitive.
5.) Type the Response string into the device and press Submit Response.
Figure 8-33 Response String from PC to Device
Figure 8-34 "Reload System Setup successful. Reboot system to begin SW Reload." screen
The message, "Reload System Setup successful. Reboot system to begin SW Reload." displays, on the
last line. Proceed to Step 7.).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6.) For R4 and later, click on Setup Software Reload.
Figure 8-35 Setup Software Reload tab - R4 and later
7.) Restart the device using the Shutdown menu. Select Utility Tools -> System Shutdown ->
Restart System, check Retain Disruptive Mode, and press Submit.
8.) Press Confirm to confirm device restart.
Figure 8-36 Shutdown Menu
NOTE: Retain Disruptive Mode is not required to reload software; but is recommended in case the
Software Reload does not start.
NOTE: The reload process takes about 20 minutes from the time you start reloading software, until the
devices last reboot.
9.) Reconnect to the device via InSite ExC.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-9 Reconnect to the Device

1.) Check if the device is online. You may need to refresh the screen to show the devices current
status.
2.) Select Connect to Device.
3.) Select Connect under UL_CSD.
4.) Login as GE Service.
Figure 8-37 Reconnect to the Device
5.) Activate VCO and wait until it is running.
Figure 8-38 Activate VCO

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-9 Reconnect to the Device (contd)

6.) On the TotalAccess window, select Connect under UL_VNC.
Figure 8-39 TotalAccess Window
7.) Close the My Computer Window on the device (it appears every time you activate VCO).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-9 Reconnect to the Device (contd)

8.) Press OK on the IO.SYS message, if present, and verify that the device boots up to the application
(it may take several seconds to complete the boot up).
9.) Ask the customer to perform the Functional Checks below.

to the customer.
1.) Ask the customer to perform these tests. You may need the customer to connect Probes and to
verify that the device is scanning.
Table 8-4 Remote Software Reload Functional Checks
See:

4-4-1 Software Configuration Checks

(if present)
2.) Ask the customer to reboot the system as a final step and to verify that the device boots up to scan.
3.) Reboot the system to ensure VCO and Disruptive Mode are off before returning the device to
customer use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-11 Reset to Default Poll Set
NOTE: This is mandatory in order to prevent any server overload.
1.) Select CONFIGURATION -> Manage devices.
Figure 8-41 Configuration and Manage Devices Display
2.) Click on the search icon to search for the device.
Figure 8-42 Search Icon

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-11 Reset to Default Poll Set (contd)

3.) Select the device and press OK.
Figure 8-43 Search for Device
4.) Under the PROFILE tab, set the Pending poll interval to 900.
5.) Press Save and Close.
The next time the device polls the network, it will be updated to the default poll.
Figure 8-44 Pending Poll interval

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-4-12-11 Reset to Default Poll Set (contd)

6.) Verify that the icon changes from the "lightning icon" to the "dot icon." The dot icon indicates
the normal poll is set (default).
Figure 8-45 Verify Icon Change
NOTE: You may need to refresh the screen to see the current status.
8-4-12-12 Troubleshooting Tips for Remote Software Reload
Table 8-5 Troubleshooting TIPs for Remote Software Reload
What to do if? Solution
Allow some time to wait and see if the scanner comes back on its own.
Cannot find the system active
If more than 40 minutes have passed, then contact the customer to
in the Questra agent after
check on the status of the system. You may want to try remote reload
reloading SW?
once more before having to dispatch an FE.
Cannot find the system active

Field Engineers, contact the OLC, most likely they will have connection
in the Questra agent after
to GE website and can assist you with the challenge strings.
reloading SW?

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 8-5
Replacing Covers and Bumpers
This section describes how to replace the Covers and Bumpers on the LOGIQ E9.

8-5-3 Covers and Bumpers overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
8-5-4 Side Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8-5-5 Shearwave Console Cover replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
8-5-6 Top Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
8-5-7 Side Bumpers replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
8-5-8 Foot Rest Bumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
8-5-9 Front Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8-5-10 Plate Connectors w/Guide replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
8-5-11 Filter Cover replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78
8-5-12 Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
8-5-13 Rear Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
8-5-14 Door, I/O Panel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
8-5-15 Cable Hook replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
8-5-16 Rear Bumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90
8-5-17 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
8-5-18 Rear Handle replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
8-5-19 Printer Filler Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97
8-5-20 Column Cover Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
8-5-21 Main Cable Cover replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
8-5-22 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106
8-5-23 Bulkhead Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-110
8-5-24 Left Handle Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
8-5-25 Right Handle Cover Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
8 - 50 Section 8-5 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-3 Covers and Bumpers overview

The Main Console has a Front Cover, two Side Covers with Bumpers, one for the left side and one for
the right side, a Rear Cover and a Top Cover.
In addition there is a combined Foot Rest and Bumper mounted on the front of the system.
NOTE: When replacing Covers for a LOGIQ E9 used in veterinary environment, the LOGIQ E9 Spare
Parts Handling for Veterinary Systems MUST BE re-installed before the LOGIQ E9 returned for
use. See: 8-5-10-5 "Label Placement for the LOGIQ E9 used in a Veterinary Environment" on
page 8-77 and Section 9-20 "Product Labels on LOGIQ E9 consoles used in a veterinary
environment" on page 9-123.
Table 8-6 Covers and Bumpers for LOGIQ E9
PART NAME ILLUSTRATION QTY
Left Side Cover Assy 1
Right Side Cover Assy 1
Right Side Cover Assy

with Slots On-board V Nav 1
Stand
Right Side Cover Assy 1

Removable Fan Tray

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-6 Covers and Bumpers for LOGIQ E9 (Continued)
Fan Tray Cover 1
Foot Rest Bumper 1
Shear Wave Console Cover 1

Assembly - Option
Front Cover Assy 1

(two pieces)
Rear Cover 1
Filter Cover 1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Door I/O Panel 1
Rear Bumper 1
Top Cover 1
Rear Handle 1
Printer Filler Storage 1
Cover, Main Cable 1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Column Cover Kit 1
Bulkhead Cover 1
Contains:
1. knob for lock (x1),
2. second Arm Cap (x4).
3. third Arm Cap (x1),
4. first Arm Cover (x1)
5. second Arm Cover (x1),
6. second Axis Cover (x1)
LCD Arm Plastic Covers 7. third Arm Cover (x1)
(for LCD V2, Arm Assembly
1 3
used in R4.x). See: 8-5-17
"LCD Monitor V2 Arm 2 1
Assembly Covers 6
replacement" on page 8-
4
92.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Contains:
1. Pan Arm Down Cover
2. Lift Arm Cover - Right
3. Lift Arm Cover - Left
LCD Arm Plastic Covers 4. Joint Cover
(for LCD V2, Ergotron Arm 5. Extension Arm Cover
Assembly used in R5.x and 6. Rotation Limit Screw
later). See: 8-5-17 "LCD 1
Monitor V2 Arm Assembly 3 4
Covers replacement" on 1
page 8-92.
2
6
5

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-4 Side Covers replacement
Table 8-7 Manpower / Time and Tools
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
5 minutes per Refer to: 8-2-6 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
Side Cover
Table 8-8 Preparations and Preparation Link
Preparations - you must perform the following steps
1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
Preparation Link (if you need more information):


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-4-1 Side Covers removal
When removing or installing the right side cover on a LOGIQ E9 with the On-board V Nav Stand, the
cover is removed and installed in the same manner, except the rear portion of the cover must be placed
behind the stand.
Table 8-9 Side Covers removal

1. NOTE: The removal procedure is easier if
the rear lock is released first, and then the
front lock.
The Side Covers are clicked on to the

LOGIQ E9 with two locks, located at the
lower end of the cover.
1a. Push a #1 Phillips screwdriver into the

rectangular hole in the Side Bumper until it
reaches the lock mechanism.
1b. Push the handle on the screwdriver

downwards to release the lock.
2. Lift the cover backwards and up to remove

it from the system. Repeat steps for the
opposite side.
Set cover in a safe place.
LOGIQ E9 with Covers and

Side Cover removed

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-9 Side Covers removal

3. If the LOGIQ E9 has the Removable Fan
Tray, the right Side Cover removes by
removing the Fan Tray and the four Phillips
screws at the bottom of the Cover.
Slide Fan Tray out of the LOGIQ E9.
Remove the four Phillips screws at the

bottom of the Cover.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-4-2 Side Covers installation
Table 8-10 Side Covers installation

1. NOTE: If the left Side Cover was removed,
MAKE SURE to clear the BEP Fan(s)
intake(s) of any debris, before installing the
cover.
Align tabs at the top inside of the Side

Cover with the slots on the Top Cover.
Place the top edge of the Side Cover so it

hooks onto the Top Cover.
2. Align and squeeze the front edge of the side

cover to latch it into place.
Position the Side Cover side lock first.
Position the Side Cover front lock.
Align and squeeze the bottom front of the

side cover to latch it into place.
Position the Side Cover rear lock, lifting up

the rear tab and guiding it into place.
Align and squeeze the bottom rear of the

side cover to latch it into place. Repeat
steps for the opposite side.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-10 Side Covers installation

3. If the LOGIQ E9 has the Removable Fan
Tray, re-install the four Phillips screws at
the bottom of the Cover.
Slide the Fan Tray into the LOGIQ E9.

Make sure the Fan Tray SEATS
COMPLETELY into the Card Cage.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-4-3 Removable Fan Tray Cover replacement
Table 8-11 Removable Fan Tray Cover removal / installation

1. Slide Fan Tray out of the LOGIQ E9.
2. Flip the Fan Tray over and lay on a safe

surface.
Remove the four screws securing the Fan

Tray Cover to the Fan Tray.
Retain the screws.
3. Install the replacement Cover and secure with the screws removed.
4. Re-install the Fan Tray Assembly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-5 Shearwave Console Cover replacement

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-6 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.
10 minutes
Table 8-13 Preparations and Preparation Links

3. Remove the Left Side Cover and loosen the Top Cover.
Preparation Links (if you need more information):

8-5-4 "Side Covers replacement" on page 8-56.
8-5-6 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-64.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-5-1 Shear Wave Console Cover removal / installation
Table 8-14 Shear Wave Console Cover removal / installation

1. Loosening the Top Cover or removing ti will
allow the Front Cover to flex enough to
slide the Shear Wave Console Cover out.
Slide the Cover out.
2. Re-install the replacemnt Cover.

3. Re-install the Top Cover, if removed and the Side Cover.
4. If the Top Cover was removed, perform Functional Checks. See: 8-5-6-3 - Calibration and
adjustments, 8-5-6-4 - Verification and 8-5-6-5 "Functional Checks" on page 8-66.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-6 Top Cover replacement
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes

3. Remove Side Covers.

8-5-6-1 Top Cover removal
Table 8-17 Top Cover removal

(Top Cover Screw placement as seen from above.)

1.. Remove the two screws that secure the Top
Cover.
Remove the Top Cover and gently pull back

and up.
Re-installed to the screws to avoid damage

to the Rear Handle.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-6-2 Top Cover installation
Table 8-18 Top Cover Installation

1. Remove the two screws re-installed to Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover
avoid damage to the Rear Handle. (seen from front)
Position the Top Cover onto the Front Cov-

er at the four hooks.
Install and tighten the two Phillips screws.
Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover

(seen from side)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-6-3 Calibration and adjustments

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.
8-5-6-4 Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:
1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.

to the customer.
Table 8-19 Top Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:

4-3-6 B-Mode Checks Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment
4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks passed all required checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-7 Side Bumpers replacement

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes

3. Remove the Side Cover(s).

8-5-7-1 Side Bumpers removal
Table 8-22 Side Bumpers removal

1. Unscrew and remove the six screws and washers that fasten the Side Bumper to the Side Cover.
Remove the Side Bumper from the Side Cover.
8-5-7-2 Side Bumpers installation
Table 8-23 Side Bumpers installation

1. Align the fastening holes in the Side Bumper with the holes in the Side Cover.
Fasten the screws with washer, one by one until all have been inserted.
Tighten the screws.

2. Install the Side Cover(s).

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-24 Side Bumpers replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-8 Foot Rest Bumper replacement

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
No additional tools required.
15 minutes


8-5-8-1 Foot Rest Bumper removal
NOTE: In Table 8-27, the Side Cover was removed to be able to view the Side Latch. You do not need
to remove the Side Cover to perform this procedure.
The Foot Rest Bumper is fixed with snap locks.
Table 8-27 Side Latch for Foot Rest Bumper

1.. Pull the Foot Rest Bumper upwards and
over the pedals to release the snap locks,
while freeing the side latches.
You may need to push down the pedals to

be able to remove the Foot Rest Bumper.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-8-2 Foot Rest Bumper installation
Table 8-28 Foot Rest Bumper installation

1. Position the Foot Rest Bumper in place.
Push the Foot Rest Bumper down and over the pedals.
You may need to push down the pedals to be able to place the Foot Rest Bumper.
2. Replace the Side Covers, if they were removed.

1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier.


to the customer.
Table 8-29 Foot Rest Bumper replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-9 Front Cover replacement

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes

3. Remove the Side Covers, Top Cover and the Foot Rest Bumper.

8-5-8 "Foot Rest Bumper replacement" on page 8-69.
8-5-9-1 Front Cover removal
The Front Cover Assembly is made of two pieces.
Table 8-32 Front Cover Screw placement

1.. Unscrew the two Phillips screws that fix the
Front Cover Assembly to the chassis.
Pull the upper end of the Front Cover out

and upwards to free it from the pedals and
the frame.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-9-2 Front Cover installation
Table 8-33 Front Cover installation

1. Thread the Front Cover so it fits in between
chassis and pedals.
Align the Front Cover guide pins with holes

in the frame.
Front Cover Assembly (cover on left and

probe plate on right) with guide pins.
Fasten Front Cover with two Phillips

screws.
2. Install the Foot Rest Bumper, the Top Cover and the Side Covers.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-34 Front Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:



PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-10 Plate Connectors w/Guide replacement

NOTE: The Plate Connectors w/Guide is replaced, it does not include the Probe Connectors Label. If
the Plate Connectors w/Guide is replaced, the Label MUST BE installed. Or, if only replacing
the Label, see: Table 8-38 "Probe Connectors Label Placement" on page 8-75.
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes

3. Remove the Side Covers, Top Cover, Foot Rest Bumper and the Front Cover.

8-5-9 "Front Cover replacement" on page 8-71.
8-5-10-1 Plate Connectors w/Guide removal
The Plate Connectors w/Guide is attached with hatches.
Table 8-37 Plate Connectors w/Guide removal

1. Use a flat bladed screwdriver to loosen the hatches.
Remove the Plate Connectors w/Guide.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-10-2 Probe Connectors Label Placement
Table 8-38 Probe Connectors Label Placement

1. Remove the adhesive from the new Label
and place it above the Probe Connector
openings, as shown. 5328860
If replacing the Label only, remove the old

Label completely.
8-5-10-3 Plate Connectors w/Guide installation
Table 8-39 Plate Connectors w/Guide installation

1. Position the plate and snap it into position.
2. Install the Front Cover, Foot Rest Bumper, Top Cover and the Side Covers.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

to the customer.
Table 8-40 Plate Connectors w/Guide replacement Functional Checks
See:

4-3-6 B-Mode Checks 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required
4-3-19 Mechanical Function Checks checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-10-5 Label Placement for the LOGIQ E9 used in a Veterinary Environment
Table 8-41 LOGIQ E9 used in a Veterinary Environment Label Placement

1. If the Side Cover Assemblies are replaced,
re-install the VET Label as shown.
2. If the Rear Cover Assembly is replaced,

re-install the For Veterinary use only Label
for the Rear Cover Assembly as shown.
For Veterinary
use only
5454608
NOTE: The Back Cover Label with ETL

Label is not a Spare Part.
3. If a Probe is replaced, re-install the For

Veterinary use only Label for Probes as
shown.
5447716

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-11 Filter Cover replacement
8-5-11-1 Manpower
8-5-11-2 Tools
No tools are needed to replace the filter cover.
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:
1.) Power down the system

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
Follow this link if you need more information:
8-5-11-4 Filter Cover removal

1.) Gently pull the Filter Cover out and away from the System.
Figure 8-46 Remove the Filter Cover
8-5-11-5 Back Filter Cover installation

1.) Inspect the Filter, and clean if necessary.
2.) Place the Filter Cover into position and press the Filter Cover top corners until the Filter Cover locks
engage.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier


to the customer.
Table 8-42 Filter Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-5-12 Filter replacement

See: 8-8-3 "Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement / cleaning" on page 8-339.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-13 Rear Cover replacement

NOTE: When replacing Rear Cover Assembly for a LOGIQ E9 used in veterinary environment, the
LOGIQ E9 Spare Parts Handling for Veterinary Systems MUST BE re-installed before the
LOGIQ E9 returned for use. See: 8-5-10-5 "Label Placement for the LOGIQ E9 used in a
Veterinary Environment" on page 8-77 and Section 9-20 "Product Labels on LOGIQ E9
consoles used in a veterinary environment" on page 9-123.
If the V Nav On-Board Stand Option is present on the LOGIQ E9, the Option must be removed to
remove the Rear Cover. See:
8-15-5 "Assembling or replacing the On-Board V Nav Stand" on page 8-644.
8-5-13-1 Manpower
8-5-13-2 Tools
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-6 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5.

3.) Disconnect all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Remove the Rear Bumper.
5.) Remove both Side Covers.
6.) Remove Filter Cover at rear.
7.) Remove Filter.
Follow these links if you need more information:

8-5-11 "Filter Cover replacement" on page 8-78.
8-8-3 "Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement / cleaning" on page 8-339.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-13-4 Rear Cover removal

1.) Remove the two Phillips screws on each side of the Rear Cover.
2.) Lift the Rear Cover away.
Figure 8-47 Rear Cover fixing screws

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-13-5 Rear Cover installation

1.) Position the lower edge of the Rear Cover into place on the rear of the system frame.
2.) Tilt the top edge of the Rear Cover toward the system frame.
Be sure the manual release handle of the Z Mechanism extends through the air vent on the Rear
Cover.
Figure 8-48 Z Mechanism manual release handle
3.) Position the Rear Cover into place.

4.) Gently pull up on the Z Mechanisms manual release handle to confirm proper position through the
Rear Cover air vents.
5.) Install the four screws, two on each side.
6.) Inspect the Filter, and clean in necessary.
7.) Install the Filter.
8.) Install the Filter Cover
9.) Re-install the V Nav On-Board Stand if present.

PROPRIETARY TO GE



to the customer.
Table 8-43 Rear Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-14 Door, I/O Panel replacement
8-5-14-1 Manpower
8-5-14-2 Tools


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-14-4 Door, I/O Panel removal

1.) At the back of the system, push a four, flat blade screwdriver into the rectangular hole, next to the
Door, I/O panel until it reaches the lock mechanism.
2.) Push the handle on the screwdriver to the left to release the lock.
Figure 8-49 Door, I/O Panel
3.) Open the Door, I/O Panel.

4.) Hold the Door, I/O Panel near the upper hinge (1), and pop hinge out and away from the upper hinge
post (2) on the Rear Cover.
Figure 8-50 Hinge placement on Door, I/O Panel
8-5-14-5 Door, I/O Panel installation

1.) Place the Door, I/O Panel into position by sliding lower hinge (3) onto lower hinge post (4).
2.) Pop the upper hinge into place onto the upper hinge post.

PROPRIETARY TO GE



to the customer.
Table 8-44 Door, I/O Panel replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-15 Cable Hook replacement
8-5-15-1 Manpower
8-5-15-2 Tools

3.) Remove the Side Covers.
4.) Remove the Rear Cover.

8-5-13 "Rear Cover replacement" on page 8-80.
8-5-15-4 Cable Hook removal

1.) Locate the Cable Hook(s).
Figure 8-51 Cable Hooks
2.) Place the Rear Cover face down on a protected, flat surface.
3.) Remove the screw securing the Cable Hook.
4.) Repeat step 2 to remove the other Cable Hook, if necessary.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-15-4 Cable Hook removal (contd)
Figure 8-52 Cable Hook screw placement
8-5-15-5 Cable Hook installation

1.) Position the Cable Hook on the Rear Cover.
2.) Install the screw to secure the Cable Hook to the Rear Cover.
3.) Repeat step 2 to replace the other Cable Hook, if necessary.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-45 Cable Hook replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-16 Rear Bumper replacement
8-5-16-1 Manpower
8-5-16-2 Tools

4.) Remove Side Covers.
5.) Remove Rear Cover.

8-5-16-4 Rear Bumper removal

1.) Remove the two screws securing the Rear Bumper.
2.) Remove Bumper.
Figure 8-53 Left screw placement for Rear Bumper
8-5-16-5 Rear Bumper installation

1.) Place the Rear Bumper into position
2.) Install the two screws to secure the Rear Bumper.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-46 Rear Bumper replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-17 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers replacement

Two types of V2 Arm Assembly Covers are described in this Section. For R4, see: Table 8-49 "LCD
Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers removal and installation - R4" on page 8-92 or Table 8-50 "LCD
Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers removal and installation - R5.x and later" on page 8-93.
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes

2. Move the User Interface (Top Console) to its lower position.

Table 8-49 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers removal and installation - R4

1. Remove Arm Assembly Covers. Illustration shows direction and
sequence covers should be removed
The Rear (1) and Upper (2) LCD Arm
Covers snap into place and removed, in the
direction shown. The Upper Cover must be
installed before the Rear Cover.
The Rear (1) snaps into place pushing
forward and removed pulling back.
The Upper (2) snaps into place at the rear,
after the front guides are inserted into
place. The Upper can be removed, by tilting
forward.
The Lower Cover (3) and LCD Bracket
Cover (4) are securedwith screws (5). After
the front guide of the Lower Cover is
inserted into place, the cover can be
secured. To remove, remove the screw and
tilt forward. The arm must be released and
the upper arm clear.
The LCD Bracket Cover (4) seats in
position.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-17 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers replacement (contd)
Table 8-50 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers removal and installation - R5.x and later

1. Pan Arm Down Cover (1), remove two
Phillips screws and lift the cover off.
Lift Arm Cover - Right (2) and Lift Arm
Cover - Left (3), remove the 3 mm screws 2 4
and slide the Cover toward the Monitor. 1
Joint Cover (4), slightly push the bottom of
the Cover forward to bow the cover and
pry at the leading, forward edge of the
3
Cover to remove.
Extension Arm Cover (5), remove the
3 mm screw and lower cover.
Install covers in the reverse motion. To 5
install the Joint Cover, place top of Cover
into position and snap into place.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


3.) LCD Arm and LCD Monitor movement functions in all directions without the covers loosening.

to the customer.
Table 8-51 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers replacement Functional

Checks
See:

4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-18 Rear Handle replacement
8-5-18-1 Manpower
8-5-18-2 Tools

6.) Remove the Top Cover.

8-5-18-4 Rear Handle removal

1.) Remove the two upper screws (1), one on each side.
2.) Remove the four hexcap screws (2), two on each side.
Figure 8-54 One Phillips and two hexcap screws on each side (left side illustrated)
3.) Lift the Rear Handle away.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-18-5 Rear Handle installation

1.) Install the Rear handle in position so the fastening holes are flush with the holes in the frame.
2.) Install the two screws for the Rear Handle (torque 3 Nm {2.2 lbf-ft}).
3.) Install the four hexcap screws for the Rear Handle.
4.) Install the Top Cover.
5.) Install the Rear Cover.
6.) Install the Side Covers.


to the customer.
Table 8-52 Rear Handle replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-19 Printer Filler Storage
8-5-19-1 Manpower
8-5-19-2 Tools
1.) Power down the system.

4.) Remove the Right Side cover.

8-5-19-4 Printer Filler Storage

1.) Release the fixing bracket.
2.) Pull the Printer Filler Storage forwards, out of the system.
8-5-19-5 Printer Filler Storage installation
NOTE: The Printer Filler Storage is used in the printer compartment on systems without an on-board
printer.
1.) Insert the Printer Filler Storage from the front of the system, into the empty printer compartment.
2.) Fasten (lock) the fixing bracket.
3.) Install the Side Cover you removed earlier.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this Printer Filler
Storage replacement:
1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier has been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes you removed earlier.

to the customer.
Table 8-53 Printer Filler Storage replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-20 Column Cover Assembly replacement
8-5-20-1 Manpower
8-5-20-2 Tools
Flexible shaft bit driver extension (optional)


8-5-20-4 Column Cover Assembly removal

1.) Lower the console to lowest possible level.
2.) Remove the lower screw on the right side that is visible near the rear of the DVD drive.
Figure 8-55 With console lowered, lower right side screw placement

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-20-4 Column Cover Assembly removal (contd)
3.) Raise the console to full height.

4.) Remove the remaining screw on the right side that secures the Column Cover Assembly.
Figure 8-56 With console raised, upper right side screw placement
5.) Remove the two screws on the left side that secure the Column Cover Assembly.
Figure 8-57 With console raised, left side screw placement
6.) Remove Column Cover Assembly.
NOTE: The Main Cable Cover will also be released.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-20-5 Column Cover Assembly installation

1.) Install the Main Cable Cover so the Column Cover Assembly overlaps Main Cable Cover edges.
2.) Install screws to Column Cover Assembly (tighten by hand).
3.) Position the lower Column Cover tab inside the Front Cover.
Figure 8-58 Position the column cover inside the front cover


PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-54 Column Cover Assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:

Operator I/O Movement - XY and Z Mechanism

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-21 Main Cable Cover replacement
8-5-21-1 Manpower
8-5-21-2 Tools

6.) Remove the four screws to the Column Cover Assembly.

8-5-20 "Column Cover Assembly replacement" on page 8-99.
8-5-21-4 Main Cable Cover removal

1.) Remove the Main Cable Cover.
Figure 8-59 Main Cable Cover (Column Cover overlaps Main Cable Cover)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-21-5 Main Cable Cover installation

1.) Install the Main Cable Cover so the Column Cover Assembly overlaps Main Cable Cover edges
(see: Figure 8-59 "Main Cable Cover (Column Cover overlaps Main Cable Cover)" on page 8-103).
2.) With the console raised to its full height, install the 3 screws to secure the Main Cable Cover and
Column Cover Assembly.
3.) Lower the console and install the lower right side screw (see: Figure 8-55 "With console lowered,
lower right side screw placement" on page 8-99).
4.) Position the lower Column Cover tab inside the Front Cover.
Figure 8-60 Position the column cover tab inside the front cover


PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-55 Main Cable Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:



PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-22 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors replacement
8-5-22-1 Manpower
8-5-22-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND
CHANGING PARTS.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-22-4 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors removal

1.) At the rear of the system, release the consoles frogleg mechanism by inserting a screwdriver into
the release point and pressing until release. Pull the console out to its extended position to gain
access to the screws in the next step.
Figure 8-61 XY / Frogleg mechanism release
2.) Under the XY / Frogleg mechanism, identify the four separate covers. There are two types of
covers, one type has two screws (1) and the other type has one screw (2).
3.) Remove the screws from the cover(s) to replace.
Figure 8-62 XY / Frogleg mechanism covers, right side frog leg, from underneath

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-22-4 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors removal (contd)
4.) Pull down and slide the cover(s) away from the XY / Frogleg mechanism. Be sure to flex the plastic
slightly so the plastic clears the XY.
Figure 8-63 Pull down and slide XY / Frogleg cover out
5.) Disconnect the cable.

6.) Remove the screw securing the ground.
7.) Thread the cover(s) off the cable.
8-5-22-5 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors installation

1.) Thread the cover(s) on the cable.
2.) Perform a dry fit of the covers (confirm the covers face the correct way) before connecting the cable
and ground.
3.) Install the screw securing the ground.
4.) Connect the cable.
5.) Slide cover(s) into place.
6.) Replace the screws to the cover(s).

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-56 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors Functional Checks
See:

4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual,
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-23 Bulkhead Cover replacement

Manpower /
Tools
Time Total
One person /
No tools are needed to replace the Bulkhead Cover.
15 minutes



PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-23-1 Bulkhead Cover removal
Table 8-59 Bulkhead Cover removal

1. At the rear of the system, release the XY / Frogleg mechanism release
LOGIQ E9 frogleg mechanism by inserting
a screwdriver into the release point and
pressing until release. Pull the console out
to its extended position to gain access to
the screws in the next step.
Bulkhead Cover
2. Use thumbs to press upper lock tabs Upper lock tabs (placement on Bulkhead Cover)
toward the front of the system to release
the top of the Bulkhead Cover.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-59 Bulkhead Cover removal

3. Pull the Bulkhead Cover away from the Bulkhead Cover Tabs (cover removed)
system.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-23-2 Bulkhead Cover installation

1.) Position the Bulkhead Cover, tucking any cables within the cover to avoid pinching the cables.
2.) Install lower tab locks first, and then upper tab locks.
3.) Replace the Bulkhead Cover.


to the customer.
Table 8-60 Bulkhead Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-5-24 Left Handle Cover Replacement

See: 8-6-30 "Left Handle Cover replacement" on page 8-290.
8-5-25 Right Handle Cover Replacement

See: 8-6-31 "Right Handle Cover replacement" on page 8-293.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 8-6
Replacing Top Console Parts
This section describes how to replace the Top Console parts.

8-6-3 Monitor assembly replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-116
8-6-4 Monitor Arm assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-138
8-6-5 V2 Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter replacement - R4.x and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-157
8-6-6 LCD Cables replacement - R3.x and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-165
8-6-7 LCD Mount Lock replacement - R3.x and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-172
8-6-8 WLAN replacement - R2.x and R3.x only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-175
8-6-9 Probe Holder Insert replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-180
8-6-10 OP Panel Knobs replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-183
8-6-11 Upper Operator Panel / Touch Panel Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-185
8-6-12 Upper Main Controller Board and sub-FRUs Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-196
8-6-13 Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-209
8-6-14 USB Connector Board replacement - 5207000 OP Panel family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-214
8-6-15 High Voltage Inverter Board / LED Driver Board with Cable replacement - 5207000 OP Panel
family. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-217
8-6-16 Bulkhead Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-220
8-6-17 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-226
8-6-18 Speaker replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-230
8-6-19 Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-234
8-6-20 Lower Operator Panel (OP) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-239
8-6-21 Lower Operator Panel Frame Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-256
8-6-22 Upper Bezel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-260
8-6-23 Lower Bezel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-263
8-6-24 Frame UI Upper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-267
8-6-25 Trackball Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-270
8-6-26 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-276
8-6-27 Mode Select Encoders replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-279
8-6-28 Joystick Encoder replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-284
8-6-29 Palm Rest Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-287
8-6-30 Left Handle Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-290
8-6-31 Right Handle Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-293
8-6-32 Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-296
8-6-33 Gel Warmer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-300
8-6-34 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-304
8-6-35 Replacing the Gel Warmer with a Storage Tray or TV/TR Probe Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-306
8-6-36 XYZ Buttons replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-307
8-6-37 Probe Cable Hooks replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-311
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-3 Monitor assembly replacement
There are four types of LOGIQ E9 Monitors:

Original LCD Monitor (P/N 5167953)
LCD Monitors used in R4 original consoles, LCD Monitor V2 (5392293-21 and 5392293-22, used
in R4.x and R5 production)
On R6 and later production, there are two Monitor versions, a 23 inch Monitor and a 22 inch OLED
Monitor. The 23 inch Monitor version may not be available in all regions.
NOTE: Before removing the Monitor, record old monitor settings or user settings if possible.
For Original LCD Monitor, see: Section 8-6-3-1 "LCD Monitor removal - R3.x and earlier" on page 8-118
and Section 8-6-3-2 "LCD Monitor installation - R3.x and earlier" on page 8-120.
For LCD Monitor V2 (LCD and Arm Assembly used in R4.x production), see: Section 8-6-3-3 "LCD
Monitor V2 removal - R4.x" on page 8-122 and Section 8-6-3-4 "LCD Monitor V2 installation - R4.x" on
page 8-124.
For Monitors used in R5.x and later production), see: Section 8-6-3-5 "Monitor removal - R5.x and later
(Ergotron Arm)" on page 8-126 and Section 8-6-3-6 "Monitor installation - R5.x and later (Ergotron)" on
page 8-131.
Manpower /
Tools
Time Total
One person /
40 minutes
NOTE: If the device is equipped with WLAN option, Velcro will be required to ensure proper installation
of the re-installed WLAN dongle.
8 - 116 Section 8-6 - Replacing Top Console Parts

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-3 Monitor assembly replacement (contd)

TAG
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.
BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS
SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS
EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may
be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

2. Move the User Interface (Top Console) to its lower position.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-3 Monitor assembly replacement (contd)

NOTE: New labels have been added to the LCD rear cover to meet the IEC 60601-1 compliance
requirements. When replacing the LCD Monitor on a LOGIQ E9 console, make sure that if the
LCD back cover labels are on the console, the labels are on the replacement FRU. This will
ensure there is no confusion between the labels on the console and the labels described in the
User and Service Documentation.
Table 8-63 LCD Rear Cover Labels
Console FRU Action
Console is third edition The original VESA cover with

compliant: FRU DOES NOT have the new new labels should be used on the
labels ARE ON the LCD Monitor labels on the LCD Cover. replacement Monitor to maintain
Cover compliance of the console.
The original VESA cover on the

Console is pre-third edition console should be used on the
compliant and the new labels FRU HAS the new labels on the replacement LCD Monitor. The
ARE NOT on the LCD Monitor LCD Monitor Cover. new labels ARE NOT described
Cover. in the User and Service
Documentation.
8-6-3-1 LCD Monitor removal - R3.x and earlier

A cover at the rear side of the LCD Monitor assembly covers the two cables to the monitor. To get
access to the cable connectors, remove the Cable Cover.
Table 8-64 LCD Monitor removal - R3.x and earlier

1. For easy access, tilt the LCD Monitor Monitor Cables Cover Screw and
forward to horizontal position. Monitor tilted forward
Unscrew the fixing screw on the rear side of

the LCD Monitor assembly.
Remove the Monitor Cables Cover.
Lift the cover away and place it in a safe

place.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-64 LCD Monitor removal - R3.x and earlier

2. Disconnect the cables to the Monitor. LCD Monitor Cables and Clamps
NOTE: If you are replacing any cables (1),

you will also need to remove two additional
tie-wraps (2) at the bracket.
Remove the clamps (3).
NOTE: If the device is equipped with the

WLAN option, remove the WLAN dongle
and transfer it to the new monitor.
WLAN Dongle removal

To remove the dongle, slightly lift up the
end to disengage the Velcro, then pull the
dongle out of the USB port.
3. Tilt the monitor back to vertical position. LCD Monitor fixing screws
Lock the monitor back into place vertically.
Loosen the four screws by turning each

screw between one half and one turn
counter-clockwise. You dont need to
remove the screws.
Lift the LCD Monitor assembly upwards

until you can lift it away from the Monitor
Bracket.
Place the LCD Monitor on a clean and safe

surface.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-3-2 LCD Monitor installation - R3.x and earlier
Table 8-65 LCD Monitor installation - R3.x and earlier

1. NOTE: To ensure the LCD Monitor is
installed level with the system and before
tightening the four screws:
MAKE SURE:
- the system is on a level surface,
- the wheels are in-line,
- the LCD Monitor Arm Lock is LOCKED.
Check that the system is level.
Install the LCD Monitor assembly on the

Monitor Bracket. Verify that all four fixing
screws have engaged in their slots.
Place a level on the monitor (as shown).
Tighten the four screws, torque: 160 Ncm

{14.2 lbf-in}).
NOTE: If a level is not available, make sure

the Monitor is as square as possible with
the system, visually.
2. Tilt the monitor to horizontal position. LCD Monitor Cables and Clamps
Connect the cables (1).
If the cables were replaced the tie-wraps

(2) and cable clamps (3), if present.
Re-install WLAN dongle, if device is

equipped with option.
NOTE: It is important to reapply a piece of

the loop portion of Velcro to the WLAN
dongle when it is re-installed into the new
monitor.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-65 LCD Monitor installation - R3.x and earlier

3. Install the Monitor Cables Cover and fasten
it with the fixing screw.
NOTE: If the replacement FRU DOES NOT

have the new labels on the LCD Cover, the
original VESA cover with new labels should
be used on the replacement Monitor to
maintain compliance of the console. See:
Table 8-63 "LCD Rear Cover Labels" on
page 8-118.
4. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-6-3-7 - Calibration and adjustments, 8-6-3-8 - Verification
and 8-6-3-9 "Functional Checks" on page 8-137.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-3-3 LCD Monitor V2 removal - R4.x

A cover at the rear side of the LCD Monitor assembly covers the cable to the monitor. To get access to
the cable connector, remove the Cable Cover.
Table 8-66 LCD Monitor V2 removal - R4.x

1. Remove the LCD Cable Cover fixing
screws.
2. The LCD Cable to LCD is secured to the

LCD with a retaining screw (1), an EMC
shielded retainer (2) and two Phillips
screws (3).
Remove the screws and retainer.
Disconnect the Cable from the LCD.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-66 LCD Monitor V2 removal - R4.x

3. WARNING
WHEN REMOVING THE LCD FROM THE
ARM, KEEP THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY
IN THE LOCKED POSITION. THE
SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN
CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN
CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY
AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
4. Keep the LCD supported and remove the

two M5x20 screws and spring lock
washers which mount the LCD to the Arm
Assembly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-3-4 LCD Monitor V2 installation - R4.x
Table 8-67 LCD Monitor V2 installation - R4.x

1. WARNING
WHEN INSTALLING THE LCD TO THE
ARM, KEEP THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY
IN THE LOCKED POSITION. THE
Keep the LCD supported and mate the flat

surfaces of the LCD Arm to the flat surfaces
of the LCD mounts.
Install the LCD Arm Assembly to the LCD

with the two M5x20 screws and spring
lock washers removed. Torque: 9.8 Nm
(7.2 lbf-ft {86.7 lbf-in}).
2. The LCD Cable to LCD is secured to the

LCD with a retaining screw (1), an EMC
shielded retainer (2) and two Phillips
screws (3).
Remove the screws and retainer, if present

or re-install the Cable into LCD and tighten
the screw (1).
Install the retainer and secure with the two

M4X12 screws (3).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-67 LCD Monitor V2 installation - R4.x

3. NOTE: To ensure the LCD Monitor is
installed level with the system and before
re- installing the LCD Back Cover:
MAKE SURE:
- the system is on a level surface,
- the LCD Monitor Arm Lock is LOCKED.
Check that the system is level.
Tighten the four screws, torque: 160 Ncm

{14.2 lbf-in}).

the system, visually.
Re-install the LCD Cable Cover and fixing

screws.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-3-5 Monitor removal - R5.x and later (Ergotron Arm)
This procedure applies LOGIQ E9 consoles with Ergortron Arms ONLY. If the LOGIQ E9 has an original
Arm or a Daeil Arm, see: 8-6-3-1 "LCD Monitor removal - R3.x and earlier" on page 8-118 and 8-6-3-2
"LCD Monitor installation - R3.x and earlier" on page 8-120, for original Arm, or 8-6-3-3 "LCD Monitor
V2 removal - R4.x" on page 8-122 and 8-6-3-4 "LCD Monitor V2 installation - R4.x" on page 8-124 for
the Deail Arm.
Table 8-68 LOGIQ E9 Monitor Arms
Original Arm Daeil Ergotron
A cover at the rear side of the Monitor assembly covers the cable to the monitor. To get access to the
cable connector, remove the Cable Cover.
NOTE: For R6 and later, the Main Monitor could be a 23 inch Monitor or a 22 inch OLED Monitor. The
Monitor mounts to the Monitor Arm in the same manner as R5, only the type and location of the
cables are different. This procedure covers both R5 and R6 and later.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-3-5 Monitor removal - R5.x and later (Ergotron Arm) (contd)
Table 8-69 Monitor removal - R5.x and later (Ergotron Arm)

1. Remove the Monitor Cable Cover fixing Monitor Cable Cover fixing screws location -
screws. 19 inch R5 and earlier
DO NOT discard the Cable Cover of the

OLED Monitor, transfer it to the
replacement Monitor. The Cover IS NOT
included in the Monitor FRU.
23 inch - R6 and later
OLED Monitor - R6 and later

PROPRIETARY TO GE

2. For 19 inch Monitor: LCD Cable to LCD - R5
The Cable to the monitor is secured with a
retaining screw (1), an EMC shielded
retainer (2) and two Phillips screws (3).
Remove the screws and retainer.
NOTE: Not all R5 LOGIQ E9 consoles used
this retainer.
Disconnect the Cable from the LCD.
For 23 inch and OLED Monitor: 23 inch - R6 and later

Disconnect the HDMI (4), the USB (5) and
the Power (6) Cables from the Monitor.
If the LOGIQ E9 has the Optional USB
Microphone, remove it to transfer to the
replacement Monitor.
OLED - R6 and later

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3. WARNING
WHEN REMOVING THE MONITOR
FROM THE ARM, KEEP THE MONITOR
ARM ASSEMBLY IN THE LOCKED
POSITION. THE SPRINGS TO SUPPORT
THE MONITOR CAN CAUSE THE ARM
TO SPRING OPEN CAUSING SEVERE
PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4. Lay the Monitor flat. 19 and 23 inch Monitor (19 inch shown)
Remove the two lower Phillips screws (1).
Loosen the upper Phillips screws (2). The

Monitor will be supported by the two upper
screws.
Slide the Monitor off of the Arm Assembly.
Remove the upper Phillips screws to re-

install into the replacement Monitor.
Upper Monitor mounting screw (2) and hole
OLED Monitor mounting screws and holes

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-3-6 Monitor installation - R5.x and later (Ergotron)
Table 8-70 Monitor installation - R5.x and later (Ergotron)

1. WARNING
WHEN INSTALLING THE MONITOR TO
THE ARM, KEEP THE MONITOR ARM
ASSEMBLY IN THE LOCKED POSITION.
THE SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE
MONITOR CAN CAUSE THE ARM TO
SPRING OPEN CAUSING SEVERE
PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
2. 23 inch Monitor only: 23 inch R6 and later

The 23 inch Monitor has hinges which are
not required when attaching it to the
Ergotron Arm.
Remove the four Phillips screws securing
the hinges to the Monitor.
NOTE: Discard any removed components
in the appropriate manner.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3. Re-install the upper two Phillips screws into 19 and 23 inch Monitor (19 inch shown)
the Monitor. Leave enough clearance to
slide the Monitor onto the Arm.
With the Monitor flat, slide the Monitor onto

the Arm Assembly and support the lower
portion of the Monitor while the installing
the two lower Phillips screws (1).
Tighten the upper Phillips screws (2). Make

sure the Monitor is level before tightening
the screws securely.
(LCD Cable to Monitor {3} shown, will be

installed in the next step. 19 inch Monitor
only.) 23 inch shown
OLED Monitor mounting screws and holes

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4. For 19 inch Monitor: LCD Cable to LCD - R5
Re-install the LCD Cable Connector to LCD
and secure the Connector with the
retaining screw (3).
For 23 inch and OLED Monitor: 23 inch R6 and later

Reconnect the HDMI (4), the USB (5) and
the Power (6) Cables from the Monitor.
If the LOGIQ E9 had the Optional USB
Microphone, re-install to the replacement
Monitor.
NOTE: When the USB Microphone is
powered, a red LED indicator may be
visable, indicating the USB Microphone
has power. This does not indicate any
warning.
OLED Cable connectors - R6 and later

PROPRIETARY TO GE

5. NOTE: To ensure the Monitor is installed
level with the system and before
re- installing the Cable Cover:
MAKE SURE:
- the LOGIQ E9 is on a level surface,
- the Monitor Arm Lock is LOCKED.
Check that the LOGIQ E9 is level.
If any adjustment is required, loosen the
four mounting screws and make the
adjustment. Re-tighten the four screws
after the adjustment.
the LOGIQ E9, visually.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

6. Re-install the Cable Cover and fixing Monitor Cable Cover fixing screws location -
screws. 19 inch R5 and earlier
For 19 and 23 inch Monitor:
Proceed to Step 7.
For OLED Monitor:

Re-install the Cable Cover from the
replaced OLED Monitor. The Cover IS NOT
a FRU.
Proceed to next Step.
23 inch - R6 and later
OLED Monitor - R6 and later

PROPRIETARY TO GE

7. Apply XDclear Label: 23 inch Monitor
Before applying the Label, make sure the
surface is clean and free of debris.
Remove the adhesive liner.
Apply the Label on the front, upper right
corner of the Monitor, using the protective
film (dotted) and the inside edge and upper
edge of the Monitor frame as a guide.
Press firmly to ensure the Label adheres to
the Monitor frame.
Peel off the protective film,
OLED Monitor

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Refer to: Section 6-3 "Monitor adjustments" on page 6-2 for LCD Monitor calibration instructions and/or
Monitor Arm and Monitor Friction Adjustment.
1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
NOTE: Wide Screen Monitors may need a second reboot for the system to fully identify the monitors
USB device. To confirm, verify that the Monitor Controls for the Wide Screen Monitors are
available on the Touch Panel Utility pages.

to the customer.
Table 8-71 LCD Monitor assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-3 Power ON/Boot Up LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual,
4-2-4 Power shut down Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Leakage
Current measured at (record the value) and
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all
4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks required checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-4 Monitor Arm assembly replacement

There are three types of LOGIQ E9 Arms Assemblies are covered in this Section:
Table 8-72 LOGIQ E9 Monitor and Monitor Arm Configurations
Monitor Monitor Arm

19 inch Original P/N 5167953 Original P/N 5183750
19 inch V2 P/N 5382293-21, -22 Daeil P/N 5415182-20
Daeil P/N 5415182-20 or
19 inch LED LCD P/N 5382293-23
Ergotron 5957000-110, 111
23 inch LED LCD P/N 5501560-20 Ergotron 5957000-80
OLED P/N GC200350 Ergotron 5957000-130
Manpower /
Tools
Total Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-6 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5
40 minutes

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-4 Monitor Arm assembly replacement (contd)


WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO
VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
TAG
&
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE
LOCKOUT
ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL
Signed Date
ON/OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF.

SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD
IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP
may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC
Outlet.

NOTE: If you are also replacing the LCD Monitor, you do not need to remove the monitor from the arm.
3. Remove the LCD Monitor assembly and the Bulkhead cover.

4-2-4 "Power shut down" on page 4-7
8-6-3 "Monitor assembly replacement" on page 8-116
8-5-23 "Bulkhead Cover replacement" on page 8-110
For Original Arm Assembly used on R3 and earlier, see: 8-6-4-1 "LCD Arm (Original) replacement - R3.x
and earlier" on page 8-140.
For Daeil Arm Assembly used with LCD Monitor V2 (LCD and Arm Assembly used in R4, see: 8-6-4-2
"LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly (Daeil) replacement (used in R4.x production)" on page 8-142.
If the Ergotron Arm Assembly is being replaced, see: 8-6-4-3 "Monitor Arm assembly (Ergotron)
replacement - R5.x and later production" on page 8-148,
If the V2 Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter is being replaced, see: 8-6-5 "V2 Monitor Arm Assembly
Adapter replacement - R4.x and later" on page 8-157,

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-4-1 LCD Arm (Original) replacement - R3.x and earlier
Table 8-75 LCD Arm assembly (Original) removal

1. Disconnect the LCD cables; video (P10) LCD Cables at Bulkhead
and power (P3) from the connectors on the
Bulkhead. The Gel Warmer cable (P1)
does not have to be removed.
2. Push the LCD Mount Lock handle (1) into LCD Mount Lock Handle
the unlocked position (shown LOCKED).
DO NOT loosen nut (2).
Move the LCD Arm from side to side when

at the same time pulling upwards, until you
can lift LCD Arm assembly away.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-4-1 LCD Arm (Original) replacement - R3.x and earlier (contd)
Table 8-76 LCD Arm assembly (Original) installation
1. Carefully install the LCD Arm assembly into LCD Mount Lock Handle
position, first feeding the LCD Arm cables
down through the console opening.
Push the LCD Mount Lock handle (1) into

the locked position (shown LOCKED).
DO NOT adjust nut (2).
NOTICE
DO NOT connect the LCD power cable to the power (P3) connector on the Bulkhead when the
LOGIQ E9 is powered up. Damage to the LCD Power Cable and/or the Bulkhead Board can
occur. See images below of damage that can occur.
48VDC pin in the P3 connector (center pin), shows damage.
The outside two pins are Ground. Cable left, Bulkhead Connector right.
LCD Cables at Bulkhead

2. Connect the LCD cables; video (P10) and
power (P3) from the connectors on the
Bulkhead. The Gel Warmer cable (P1)
does not have to be removed.
Install the Bulkhead Cover.
Install the LCD Monitor assembly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-4-2 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly (Daeil) replacement (used in R4.x production)
Table 8-77 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly (Daeil) removal - R4 production

1. Remove the LCD Monitor.
2. WARNING
WHEN REMOVING THE LCD ARM, KEEP
THE ARM LOCKED, AS SHOWN TO
ENSURE THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY IS
IN THE LOCKED POSITION UNTILL THE
ARM AND LCD ARE INSTALLED. THE
3. Remove the Bulkhead Cover.

4. Disconnect the LCD cables; video (P10)
and the power (P3) from the LCD.
The Video Cable has a retainer and screw.

Loosen the screw with a small, flat blade
screwdriver.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-77 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly (Daeil) removal - R4 production

5. Remove the Set Screw.
Carefully lift the Arm Assembly up from the

LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-4-2 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly (Daeil) replacement (used in R4.x production) (contd)
Table 8-78 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly (Daeil) installation - R4 production

1. WARNING
WHEN INSTALLING THE LCD ARM
ASSEMBLY, KEEP THE LCD ARM IN
THE LOCKED POSITION. THE SPRINGS
TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN CAUSE
THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN CAUSING
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
IF INSTALLING A NEW FRU, KEEP THE
SHIPPING WRAP INTACT TO ENSURE
THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY IS IN THE
LOCKED POSITION UNTIL THE LCD IS
INSTALLED.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

2. Take the LCD Arm and Cable Assembly
and feed the LCD Power Cable into the
Adapter first.
Position the Video Cable Connector as

shown and continue to feed the cables into
the Adapter.
Install the Arm Assembly.
3. Position the Arm Assembly so the Set

Screw mounting hole faces the left side of
the LOGIQ E9.
Install the Set Screw. Torque: 9.8 Nm

(7.2 lbf-ft {86.4 lbf-in}).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
NOTICE
DO NOT connect the LCD power cable to the power (P3) connector on the Bulkhead when the
LOGIQ E9 is powered up. Damage to the LCD Power Cable and/or the Bulkhead Board can
occur. See images below of damage that can occur.
4. Connect the LCD cables; video (P10) and

power (P3) from the LCD.

Tighten the screw with a small, flat blade
screwdriver.
Make sure the cables do not interfere with

the installation of the cables. It may be
necessary to push the cables up before
installing the Bulkhead Cover.
5. Re-install the LCD Monitor.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

6. After plugging in the LCD Cable, bend the
cable as shown, pull with your index finger
and push with your thumb. The S bend
allows the cable to flex in the up direction
when the Bulk Head Cover is installed.
7. Remove the shipping wrap, if present. DO NOT damage the surface of the Arm Assembly.
8. Install the Bulkhead Cover.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-4-3 Monitor Arm assembly (Ergotron) replacement - R5.x and later production
This procedure assumes that the Monitor and Bulkhead Cover have been removed.
NOTE: On R6 and later production, there are two Monitor versions, 23 inch Monitor and 22 inch OLED
Monitor. The Cables that connect the Monitor to the Bulkhead Board are different. This
procedure covers both R5 and R6 and later.
Table 8-79 Monitor Arm assembly (Ergotron) removal - R5 and later production

1. WARNING
WHEN REMOVING THE MONITOR ARM,
KEEP THE ARM LOCKED, AS SHOWN
TO ENSURE THE MONITOR ARM
ASSEMBLY IS IN THE LOCKED
POSITION UNTILL THE ARM AND
MONITOR ARE INSTALLED. THE
SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE MONITOR
CAN CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING
OPEN CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL
INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
2. For R5 production Bulkhead Board: Monitor Cables to Bulkhead - R5

19 inch Monitor and Bulkhead Board
P/N GA200290 or P/N 5482676.
Disconnect the Monitor and Arm cables;
Video (P10) and power/USB (P3) and the
ground Cable from the Arm (A).
Disconnect the ground Cable for the Upper
section of the Arm (Ab) from the Bulkhead
Board (A).
Go to Step 5.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3. For R6 production Bulkhead Board: 23 inch Monitor - R6 and later
P/N 5492372.
Disconnect the Power/USB Cable (P2), the
HDMI (P10), the Accessory USB (P3) from
the Bulkhead Board.
Go to Step 5.
4. For R6 production Bulkhead Board: OLED Monitor - R6 and later

OLED Monitor and Bulkhead Board
P/N 5492372.
Disconnect the Power/USB Cable (P3), the
HDMI (P10), the USB (P3) from the
Bulkhead Board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

5. Remove the Set Screw using a 5 mm Hex
Key.
Carefully lift the Arm Assembly up from the

LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-4-3 Monitor Arm assembly (Ergotron) replacement - R5.x and later production (contd)
Table 8-80 Monitor Arm assembly (Ergotron) installation - R5 and later production

1. Make sure the Bushing is installed and
positioned in the orientation shown. The
larger hole in the Bushing is to
accommodate the pin.
2. Remove the Rotation Limit Set Screw from

the Arm Assembly using a 5 mm Hex Key.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3. The R5 and later Arm Assembly Cable R5 shown
route in the same manner as R4.
R5 has a has a ground Cable for the Arm.
R6 and later has no ground Cable for the

Arm.
Take the Monitor Arm and Cables and feed

the Power Cable into the Adapter first.
Position the Video Cable Connector as

shown and continue to feed the cables into
the Adapter.
Install the Arm Assembly.
R6 and later:
Route the Cables into the Adapter one at a
time.
4. Position the Arm Assembly so the Set

Screw mounting hole faces the left side of
the LOGIQ E9.
Install the Set Screw. Torque: 9.8 Nm

(7.2 lbf-ft {86.4 lbf-in}).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
NOTICE
DO NOT connect the Monitor power cable to the power (P3) connector on the Bulkhead when
the LOGIQ E9 is powered up. Damage to the Monitor Power Cable and/or the Bulkhead Board
can occur. See images below of damage that can occur.
5. For R5 production Bulkhead Board: Monitor Cables to Bulkhead - R5

P/N GA200290 or P/N 5482676.
Connect the Monitor and Arm cables: Arm
ground Cables (Aa) and (Ab) to the ground
on the Bulkhead (A) first, Video (P10) and
power/USB (P3) to the Monitor.
If the Video Cable has a retainer and screw.
Tighten the screw with a small, flat blade
screwdriver.
Make sure the cables do not interfere with
the installation of the cables. It may be
necessary to push the cables up before
installing the Bulkhead Cover.
Go to Step 9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
NOTICE
DO NOT connect the Monitor power cable to the power (P2) or (P3) connector on the Bulkhead
when the LOGIQ E9 is powered up. Damage to the Monitor Power Cable and/or the Bulkhead
Board can occur. See images below of damage that can occur.
6. 23 inch Monitor and Bulkhead Board Monitor Cables to Bulkhead

P/N 5492372. If OLED, go to Step 8. 23 inch - R6 and later
Connect the Monitor cables; Video (P10),
power/USB (P2) to the Monitor and
accessory USB (P3) to the Bulkhead Board
(USB lower port). See Bulkhead layout in
Step 7 for reference.
Go to Step 10.
7.
R6 and later Bulkhead Board

(P/N 5492372)
P1 = 48V Gel Warmer power
P2 = 48V/USB (power and accessory USB
for 23 inch Monitor)
for OLED Monitor {USB, lower portion of
port is used for USB for 23 inch Monitor})
P10 = video (HDMI)
A = Bulkhead ground

PROPRIETARY TO GE

8. OLED Monitor and Bulkhead Board OLED Monitor - R6 and later
P/N 5492372.
Connect the Monitor cables; the Power/
USB Cable (P3) and the HDMI (P10). See
Bulkhead layout in Step 7 for reference.
Go to Step 10.
9. After plugging in the Monitor Cable, bend R5 only

the cable as shown, pull with your index
finger and push with your thumb. The S
bend allows the cable to flex in the up
direction when the Bulk Head Cover is
installed.
11. Re-install the Monitor.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Refer to: Section 6-3 "Monitor adjustments" on page 6-2 for Monitor calibration instructions and/or
Monitor Arm and Monitor Friction Adjustment.
4.) Move the Monitor Arm from side to side and ensure that it moves as intended.

to the customer.
Table 8-81 Monitor Arm assembly replacement Functional Checks
See

4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
6-3-4 Monitor Adjustment Procedure passed all required checks and is ready for use.
10-7-4 Grounding continuity
10-7-5 Chassis leakage current test

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-5 V2 Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter replacement - R4.x and later

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
30 minutes

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

5. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN
WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND
THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS.
Outlet.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes.
NOTE: If you are replacing the V2 Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter replacement, you do not need to remove the monitor
from the arm.
3. Remove the Monitor and Arm Assembly and the Bulkhead cover.

8-6-4-2 "LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly (Daeil) replacement (used in R4.x production)" on page 8-142.
8-5-23 "Bulkhead Cover replacement" on page 8-110.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-5-1 V2 Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter removal
Table 8-84 V2 Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter removal

2. Disconnect the LCD cables; video (P10) R4 shown
and power (P3) from the LCD.

Loosen the screw with a small, flat blade
screwdriver.
Disconnect the Power Cable (P2), the Monitor Cables to Bulkhead

HDMI (P10) and the USB (P3) from the 23 inch - R6 and later
Bulkhead Board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

2. Disconnect the Power/USB Cable (P3), the OLED Monitor - R6 and later
(cont.)
HDMI (P10) and the USB (P3).
3. Remove the Ground Cable from the Ground Cable installed (R5 shown)
Adapter and the Bulkhead, if not removed.
Discard (the new FRUwill include the cable
and mounting hardware).
4. Early R5 production and earlier:
Remove the Plate. The plate is captured by

the two retaining pins that protrude from the
Adapter.
NOTE: A pin or pick can be used to lift the

plate slightly to remove.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4. Later R5 production and later:
(cont.)
Remove the Bearing. The plate is captured

by the two retaining pins that protrude from
the Adapter.
NOTE: A pin or pick can be used to lift the

plate slightly to remove.
5. Remove the two M5 x 50 hex key screws Early R5 production and earlier shown
using a 4 mm Hex Key.
Remove adapter.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-5-2 V2 Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter installation
Table 8-85 V2 Arm Adapter installation

1. Early R5 production and earlier: (rear of LOGIQ E9)
Insert the Adapter into the Frame UI Upper

Assembly.
Align the mounting holes and install the two

M5 x 50 hex key screws using a 4 mm Hex
Key to secure the Adapter. Torque 2.5 Nm
(1.8 lbf-ft {21.6 lbf-in}).
NOTE: Note the shape of the rear

mounting hole, this is important for the
next step before the Thrust Plate is
installed.
(Op Panel, front of LOGIQ E9)
2. NOTE: MAKE SURE the rear mounting
hole for the Arm Neck Lock Pin, in the Trust
Plate is aligned with the rear mounting hole
of the Adapter BEFORE installing the
Plate. If the Plate is installed incorrectly, it
may be very difficult to remove.
Align the rear mounting hole for the Arm

Neck Lock Pin, in the Trust Plate with the
rear mounting hole of the Adapter.
Seat the Plate. The plate will be captured

by the two retaining pins that protrude from
the Adapter.
3. Later R5 production and later: (rear of LOGIQ E9)
NOTE: Note the shape of the REAR

mounting hole, this is important for when
the UI Boss Bearing is installed.
(Op Panel, front of LOGIQ E9)

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4. Insert the Adapter into the Frame UI Upper
Assembly with the rear mounting hole at
the rear.
Align the mounting holes and install the two

M5 x 50 hex key screws using a 4 mm Hex
Key to secure the Adapter. Torque 2.5 Nm
(1.8 lbf-ft {21.6 lbf-in}).
NOTE: Note the four bosses on the

Adapter Bearing surface, these capture
and position the Bearing when it is
installed.
5. NOTE: MAKE SURE the REAR mounting

hole for the Arm Neck Lock Pin, in the
Bearing is aligned with the REAR mounting
hole and the four bosses of the Adapter
capture and position the Bearing.
The Bearing should seat firmly on the

Adapter. If the Bearing rocks, it is NOT
installed correctly.
(space intentionally left blank)

PROPRIETARY TO GE

6. Install the Ground Cable to the Adapter and Ground Cable installed (R5 shown)
to the Bulkhead using the two screws and
lock washers. Torque 1.3 Nm (0.96 lbf-ft
{11.5 lbf-in}).
NOTICE
Board can occur. See: images below of damage that can occur.
7. Re-install the Monitor and Arm Assembly and connect the Monitor Cables.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Refer to: Section 6-3 "Monitor adjustments" on page 6-2 for LCD Monitor calibration instructions.
3.) Power up the LOGIQ E9 to verify that it operates as intended.

Perform the following functional tests to confirm the LOGIQ E9 is operational before returning the
LOGIQ E9 to the customer.
Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
Table 8-86 V2 Arm Adapter replacement Functional Checks
See:
Section Functional Checks Debrief Script
4-2-4 Power shut down LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual,
4-2-5 Top Console position adjustment Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Leakage
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks required checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-6 LCD Cables replacement - R3.x and earlier
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person / Refer to: 8-2-6 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9" on page 8-5
15 minutes Four Tie Wraps

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

Outlet.

3. Remove the LCD Monitor assembly and the LCD Arm.

8-6-3 "Monitor assembly replacement" on page 8-116.
8-6-4 "Monitor Arm assembly replacement" on page 8-138.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-6-1 LCD Cables removal
NOTE: When handling the arm, use the arm lock unless the arm is being turned. Locking will help
stabilize the arm.
NOTE: LCD cable color may be different than shown.
Table 8-89 LCD Cables removal

1. Remove the two M4 x 8 screws securing
the Bumper Cover to the Arm.
2. Remove the bumper cover from the end of Bumper Cover removed
the first arm.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-89 LCD Cables removal

3. Remove the covers from all three arm Second Arm Section Cover removal
sections of the arm assembly:
- the M4 x 8 screw securing the first arm

section cover and the third arm section
cover,
- the M4 x 16 screws securing the second
arm section cover with Phillips screwdriver.
Cut the tie wraps securing cables in the

arm.
Remove the cable(s) to be replaced.
Mark cables: After removing the cable(s)

to be replaced, stretch out both the existing
and replacement cable side-by-side, and
transfer any markings from existing cable
to replacement cable.
4. Cut the tie wraps securing cables in the arm.
Remove the cable(s) to be replaced.
Mark cables:
After removing the cable(s) to be replaced, stretch out both the existing and replacement cable
side-by-side, and transfer any markings from existing cable to replacement cable.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-6-2 LCD Cables installation
NOTE: Do not over-stretch cables. Before putting covers on arms, be sure arm has full pivot motion/
rotation without stressing cables. If replacing more than one cable, begin with the thickest cable
first.
Table 8-90 LCD Cables installation

1. Holding the monitor-end of the cable and
starting at the console-end of the first arm
section (1), thread the replacement
cable(s) through the arm sections toward
the monitor-end.
Feed cable (2) through opening opposite
the arm lock mechanism (3) side of first arm
section, opening closest to the arm lock
knob (4).

PROPRIETARY TO GE

2. Make sure the cable markings line up with Midpoint and Tie Wrap Location -
the midpoint placement locations for the First Arm Section, Second Arm Section
first arm. Feed the cable through opening (shown on right side of Figure)
for the second arm section. Make sure the
markings line up with the midpoint
placement location for the second arm.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

3. Feed the cables through opening (5), for Feeding Cable through the Third Arm
the third arm section. DO NOT feed cable
around the outside (6) of the third arm.
For the Video and Power cables, make

sure the markings appear past the third
arm and almost to the LCD bracket (7).
4. NOTE: Do not pull cables too tight. Before Tie Wrap Location for Power and
putting covers on arms, test arm motion Video Cables to LCD bracket
and cable stress.
Secure the cables in the locations indicated

(the markings line up with the midpoint
placement location for the second and third
arm).
Feed the tie wraps through the holes in the

LCD bracket. Attach the Power Cable and
the Video Cable to the LCD bracket with tie
wraps.
Feed the cables through opening (5), for

the third arm section. DO NOT feed cable
around the outside (6) of the third arm.
For the Video and Power cables, make

sure the markings appear past the third
arm and almost to the LCD bracket (7).

PROPRIETARY TO GE

5. Replace the second arm cover:
the third arm cover,
the first arm cover,
the bumper cover.
NOTE: Rotate arm adapter assembly on arm to ensure movement is smooth and free from
binding through full 180.
Re-install the LCD arm and the LCD monitor.
NOTE: Rotate arm to ensure movement is smooth and free from binding through full 180. Make
sure you do this with the arm in the proper upright position with the LCD end up.

Refer to: Section 6-3 "Monitor adjustments" on page 6-2 for LCD Monitor calibration instructions.

to the customer.
Table 8-91 LCD Cables installation Functional Checks
See:

4-3-6 B-Mode Checks Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Leakage
6-3-4 Monitor Adjustment Procedure required checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-7 LCD Mount Lock replacement - R3.x and earlier
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into theAC Outlet.



PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-7-1 LCD Mount Lock removal
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the LCD Monitor or the LCD Arm.
Table 8-94 LCD Mount Lock removal
1. Remove the two screws (1) securing the

LCD Mount Lock. DO NOT loosen nut (2).
Remove the LCD Mount Lock.
8-6-7-2 LCD Mount Lock installation\
Table 8-95 LCD Mount Lock installation
1. Position the LCD Mount Lock.
Install the two screws securing the LCD Mount Lock.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4.) Move the LCD Monitor Arm from side to side and ensure that it moves as intended.

to the customer.
Table 8-96 LCD Mount Lock replacement Functional Checks
See:

4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-8 WLAN replacement - R2.x and R3.x only

For WLAN replacement for R4.x, see 8-11-23 "WLAN replacement - BEP6.x" on page 8-543.
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Appropriate PPE
15 minutes
ESD
NOTICE ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR LOGIQ E9

TAG
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
Outlet.
1.Select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP -> Wireless Network -> Configuration
2.As a precautionary step:
a.Document all the information regarding configuration of the WLAN.
b.Select the Properties tab.
c.Record the following information (provided by the Customer site IT):
i. Network Name (SSID)
ii. Network Authentication
iii.Data Encryption
iv.Network Key
v.Key Index
vi.Specify Yes/No to The Key is Provided Automatically
vii.IEEE 802.1x Authentication information
viii.EAP type
d. Press Close.
4. Move the User Interface (Top Console) to the lowest position.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-8-1 WLAN removal

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the LCD Monitor or the LCD Arm.
Table 8-99 WLAN removal
Steps
1. Remove the rear cover of LCD monitor.
For easy access, tilt the LCD Monitor forward to horizontal position.
NOTE: You CANNOT fully remove the cover unless the LCD is tilted forward to the horizontal
position.
2. To remove the dongle, slightly lift up the end to disengage the Velcro, then pull the dongle out of
the USB port.
8-6-8-2 WLAN installation
Table 8-100 WLAN installation
1. NETGEAR USB dongle WN111 is

identified with the following markings:
Remove the dongle from the Factory

packaging.
Remove the plastic cover from the dongle

and discard.
Remove the Velcro pieces from the Factory
packaging.
Discard all other items included in the

dongle packaging, only the dongle and
Velcro are required.
2. Choose a piece of Velcro with the Hook

gender (rigid piece). Remove the
adhesive protection strip and attach this
portion of the Velcro to the dongle on the
side WITHOUT the LED, at the orientation
and location as shown.
The outer edges of the Velcro have no

hooks. Attach the Velcro at this orientation,
to prevent covering up the vent holes. DO
NOT cover the vent holes.
Align the Velcro where the flat starts to

curve (1).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-100 WLAN installation
3. Attach the opposite piece of the Velcro to WLAN with opposite piece of Velcro attached
the hook side and remove the adhesive
protection strip, if the loop side of Velcro is
not present in the monitor.
NOTE: If this is a replacement WLAN

dongle, you do not need to attach this
opposite piece of Velcro if the opposite
piece is already attached to the LCD.
4. Install the WLAN dongle into the USB port; WLAN Dongle installed
lifting slightly, to prevent the adhesive from
attaching before the dongle is installed.
Once installed, push on the end of the

dongle, to adhere the adhesive.
NOTE: To remove the dongle, slightly lift up

the end to disengage the Velcro, then pull
the dongle out of the USB port.
5. Re-install the LCD monitor cover. Reboot the system.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-8-3 WLAN - Set up and Check
Table 8-101 WLAN - Set up and Check
1. All configuration parameters should have WLAN Active

been kept and the WLAN should start
working right away. If it does not, check
configuration.
For setting up the WLAN, refer to the latest

revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User
Manual, Chapter 16.
WLAN not Active
When the WLAN is active, an icon appears
in the status bar to indicate whether the
WLAN is installed or disconnected.
2. Select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP -> Configuration Tool Screen
Wireless Network -> Configuration.
If enabled, Available Wireless Networks
appear.
If not connected:
Highlight the wireless network you wan to

use.
Click Connect at the bottom of the
Configuration tool.
To check WLAN is working properly, ping/

verify a device in the network, query WL or
Send an image.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-8-4 Functional Test

to the customer.
Table 8-102 WLAN replacement instructions Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-9 Probe Holder Insert replacement

Table 8-103 Probe Holder Insert replacement Introduction
Introduction
The Probe Holder Inserts are soft rubber inserts, used to protect the Probes from scratches,
when stored on the LOGIQ E9. You can place the Probe Holder Inserts in any of the desired
places on the edge of the Operator Panel. The following types of inserts are available:
Probe Holder Insert STD
Probe Holder Insert 3D
Probe Holder Softinsert Doppler
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
No tools are needed for this procedure,
15 minutes
Table 8-105 Preparations
1. Disconnect and remove all Probes.

2. Store Probes in a safe place.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-9-1 Probe Holder Insert removal
Table 8-106 Probe Holder Insert removal
1. Carefully pull the flexible Probe Holder Probe Holder placement

Insert out of the lower UI frame. Large (1)
and small (2) soft, Probe Holder Inserts.
2. To remove the dongle, slightly lift up the end to disengage the Velcro, then pull the dongle out of
the USB port.
8-6-9-2 Probe Holder Insert installation
Table 8-107 Probe Holder Insert installation
1. Install the flexible Probe Holder Insert into Probe Holder placement
the lower UI frame. Be sure the hooks (1)
and tabs (2) fit properly and the Probe
Holder fits snugly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

No calibrations or adjustments are needed.

to the customer.
Table 8-108 Probe Holder Insert replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-4 Power shut down LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual,
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-10 OP Panel Knobs replacement

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
No tools are needed for this procedure,
15 minutes
Table 8-110 Preparations
Preparations
No preparations needed for this procedure.
8-6-10-1 Operator Panel Knobs removal
Table 8-111 Operator Panel Knobs removal
Step
1. Carefully pull the knobs, one by one, to remove them.
8-6-10-2 Operator Panel Knobs installation
Table 8-112 Operator Panel Knobs installation
1. NOTE: The Operator Panel knobs are OP Panel Knobs

concentric knobs, the center shaft has a D
LOGIQ
shape. Replace the outer knobs first then
the inner ones.
Install the knobs, one by one in their

respective positions.
1
PW
X Z
CW
PDI
M CF
lasto V Nav Logiq Contrast
View
CHI
Steer Width
Measure
Zoom Depth
B
Comment 3D/4D
Auto
L R
P4
Clear
Freeze
P1 P2 P3

PROPRIETARY TO GE

No calibrations or adjustments are needed.

2.) Operate all knobs and verify that they dont slip when operated.

to the customer.
Table 8-113 OP Panel Knobs replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

4-3-11 Basic Measurements passed all required checks and is ready for use.
7-5-17-2 Touch Panel Calibration Verification

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-11 Upper Operator Panel / Touch Panel Assembly replacement
Table 8-114 Upper Operator Panel / Touch Panel Assembly replacement -

Manpower / Time and Tools
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes
WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO

TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE
ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE
SCANNER (NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

Outlet.

3. Remove the five OP Panel Knobs and the Operator Panel, Upper.

8-6-27 "Mode Select Encoders replacement" on page 8-279.
8-6-11 "Upper Operator Panel / Touch Panel Assembly replacement" on page 8-185.
8-6-15 "High Voltage Inverter Board / LED Driver Board with Cable replacement - 5207000 OP Panel family" on page
8-217.
If you need more information, see:
8-6-10 "OP Panel Knobs replacement" on page 8-183.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-11-1 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal
Table 8-116 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal
1. Make sure that the OP Panel is in its OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly

uppermost position, with the LCD out of the
way: LOGIQ
CW
PDI

View
CHI
Steer Width
Measure
Zoom Depth
Comment 3D/4D
Auto
L R
P4
Clear
Freeze
P1 P2 P3
2. Remove the five OP Panel Knobs.
NOTICE
Failure to remove the five OP Panel Knobs first, could cause damage to the knob shafts.
3. At the rear of the system, release the XY / Frogleg mechanism release

frogleg mechanism for the console by
inserting a screwdriver into the release
point and pressing until release. Pull the
console out to its extended position to gain
access to the screws in the next step.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-116 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal
4. Remove the four screws with washers from Back Cover of the Upper OP Panel/Touch
the rear of the console. Panel Assembly, Screws and Washers
5. NOTE: Make sure the five OP Panel Knobs Removing the Upper OP Panel/Touch
have been removed. Panel Assembly
Lift the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel

assembly slightly from the bottom, and then
tilt the top toward the front of the system.
There are tabs at the bottom of the Touch
Panel Assembly. Pull straight up on these
tabs.
NOTE: For better access, swing the LCD

Monitor to the side.
6. Disconnect the cables at the back of the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly (see:
Figure 8-64 "Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cable placement - R4 and earlier" on page
8-188).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-11-1 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal (contd)
Figure 8-64 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cable placement - R4 and earlier
1. Upper OP Panel 5. Power - ON/OFF LOGIC to BEP

USB - OUT to Bulkhead Board
2. Cable to J24 is not present in later 6. AN Keyboard USB and Power
production
3. USB - Video from BEP 7. USB - Trackball
4. USB - Upper OP Panel from BEP
NOTE: The spacers (circled) on the back of the Upper Op Panel are not included with early FRUs
(these will be added to FRUs after product release). So, if you have to swap an Upper Op Panel,
take the spacers off of the old Op panel and swap them into the new one. If they are on so tightly
that you cannot take them off using your fingers, use a pair of pliers and rotate them back and
forth to work them off. These spacers prevent the Op panel from working past its mounting
surface and getting sucked too far into the upper frame, causing the Op panel to get twisted
and causing problems.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 8-65 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cable placement - R5 and later
1. Upper OP Panel 4. USB - Video - J22

48V Power - ON/OFF LOGIC to
2. USB - Main Display - J25 5.
BEP - J23
Upper to Lower Connector:
3. USB - BEP - J21 6. Power - J17 (top)
USB - J16

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-11-2 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation
Table 8-117 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation
1. Place the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel OP Grounding and Grounding Strap Clamp
Assembly in the frame.
Make sure the position the cable grounds

shielding is under the Grounding Strap
Clamp when it is secured. Also, the USB
cables have markings and should be in the
same area. Notice that the cables are not
crossed or snug when routed into the
Lower OP Frame Assembly.
Apply the Grounding Strap Clamp loosely,

then connect cables. Adjust lengths as
necessary and tighten the Clamp as
shown. Refer to: 8-14-4-5 "Main Cable
(Harness) installation" on page 8-625.
2. Connect the cables to the Operator Panel, Upper. See: Figure 8-66 "Upper OP Panel/Touch
Panel assembly cables - R4 and earlier" on page 8-191.
NOTICE
Do not stretch on the Ribbon Cable. If stretched, the connector on Operator Panel, Lower may
break, resulting in a malfunction.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-11-2 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation (contd)
Figure 8-66 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cables - R4 and earlier
Bulkhead Board USB Cable 2 (from

Ribbon Cable from the Operator
1. 5. bulkhead position furthest from the
Panel, Lower
OP) in position J25
2. Trackball Cable from the Operator 6. USB Cable 1 (part of Main Cable) in
Panel, Lower position J21
USB Cable 2 (part of Main Cable) in
3. A/N Cable from the A/N Keyboard 7.
position J22
Bulkhead Board USB Cable 1
4. Power/On-Off switch (part of Main
(from bulkhead position closest to 8.
Cable) in position J23
the OP) in position J24
NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the 195 Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 8-67 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly cables - R5 5208000 and 5209000 family

USB
HUB MICROPHONE
R J25 (2)
J4 6
BULKHEAD
BOARD
P5 J21 USB TRACK 6 J53
P1
J22 USB USB J18 8 J52
HUB BALL
HUB
(3)
USB J23 (7)
P8 J51
USB J17
KEYBOARD
AUDIO 7
P3 48V
+48V uP
VPD
BKLT
VPD
P4
REG
12V CNTRL TOUCH
P6 J12 J5 J26 J7 12V
CNTRL
1 2 3
ENABLE
L LED
REG
5V ON/
CN10 CN4
BKLight PCAP OFF
3.3V VIDEO
CNTRL TOUCH
CN7
4 SVGA
ROTARIES, SLIDES

BUTTONS
MAIN CABLE OP PANEL X = comes in OP Panel Cable Kit

DVI VIDEO
48V POWER/AUDIO
USB for OP PANEL
Customer USB Ports:

1. Video Controller Power 5. Power - J17
USB - J16
2. Video Controller USB 6. Trackball
3. Backlight 7. Power Upper to Lower
4. Video 8. USB Upper to Lower
NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the Touch Panel Assembly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-118 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation (contd)
3. Attach the cables to the Upper OP Panel/ Cables to Upper OP

Touch Panel Assembly before installing it
to the system.
9 - Power - ON/OFF (from BEP)

10 - USB - Upper OP Panel (from BEP)
11 - USB - Video (from BEP), if present
4. Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly

Assembly into the Frame UI Upper. Be sure alignment tabs and slots
the Upper OP Bezel alignment tabs are
positioned, correctly into the slots in the
Lower OP Bezel and Frame UI Upper
Cover.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-118 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation (contd)
NOTICE
Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.
5. Install the four screws to the Back Cover Back Cover of the Upper OP Panel/Touch
from behind. Panel Assembly, Screws and Washers
6. Install the five OP Panel Knobs.
7. NOTE: If replacing the Bezel, you need to

install the same color LOGIQ E9
Nameplate as originally installed
(nameplates are included in the Bezel
FRU).
Apply the LOGIQ E9 Nameplate:
Before applying the Nameplate, make sure
the surface is clean and free of debris.
Remove the adhesive liner.
Apply the Nameplate into the indentation at
the top of the Bezel.
Press firmly to ensure the Nameplate
adheres to the Bezel.
Remove the protective film.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-119 Upper Operator Panel / Touch Panel Assembly installation Functional
Checks
See:

4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
4-3-11 Basic Measurements passed all required checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-12 Upper Main Controller Board and sub-FRUs Replacement
Use these procedures to replace Upper OP sub-FRUs.
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

Outlet.

3. Remove the five OP Panel Knobs and the Operator Panel, Upper.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-12-1 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal
The R5 and Upper OP Panel rear cover is removed and installed in the same manner as the R4 and
earlier.
Table 8-122 Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly removal - R4 and earlier
1. Lift out the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel removed
Assembly and place it face down on an
ESD safe surface.
2. Remove the back cover by removing the

three fixing screws (Phillips #1) and the two
screws at the D-SUB connector (3/16 inch
nut driver). Screws are circled.
Lift (pull) the upper part of the LCD cover so

you can release it from the four protruding
tabs (1).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the EMC

gasketing that goes around the Touch
Panel Assembly, especially during re-
assembly.
NOTE: The spacers on the back of the Upper Op Panel are not included with early FRUs (these
will be added to FRUs after product release). So, if you have to swap an Upper Op Panel, take
the spacers off of the old Op panel and swap them into the new one. If they are on so tightly that
you cannot take them off using your fingers, use a pair of pliers and rotate them back and forth
to work them off. These spacers prevent the Op panel from working past its mounting surface
and getting sucked too far into the upper frame, causing the Op panel to get twisted and
causing problems.
If you are replacing the Customer USB and/or the Main Controller on a R5 and later Op Panel,
see: Table 8-123 - Main Controller Board/Customer USB replacement - R5 and later.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3. Remove the cables that connect to the Main Controllers:

High Voltage Inverter Board (A), or the LED top - earlier production (LCD),
Driver Board (B). bottom - later production (LED)
Remove the two screws (C) that secure the

High Voltage Inverter Board or the LED
Driver Board from the Main Controller
Board.
NOTE: The Main Controller Board does not

come with the High Voltage Inverter Board
(A), or the LED Driver Board (B), BUT it
does come with the USB Video Board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4. Remove the two cables (USB Video to the Main Controllers:

screen and USB Video to the Touch top two - earlier production (LCD),
Screen). bottom - later production through R4 (LED)
NOTE: All Main Controllers are removed in

the same way.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5. Remove the five screws.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
6. Carefully lift the board off the Main

Controller USB headers.
7. Remove the two screws and lift off the USB USB Board removed (earlier (top) and
Board. later production)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
This procedure covers the replacement of the Customer USB and the Main Controller Board used in R5
and later
Table 8-123 Main Controller Board/Customer USB replacement - R5 and later
1. Main Controller Board Connectors and Mounting
Circled - Board and USB Mounting Screws D - Main Controller Board to Touch Panel Cables
A - USB Cable E - Main Controller Board to Touch Panel ZIF
B - USB Cable tie wrap Connectors (Zero Insertion Force)
C - Ground Cable
Customer USB replacement:

The Controller Board does not have to be
removed to replace the Customer USB.
Disconnect the USB Cables (A) from the
Main Controller.
Slide the tie wrap (B) from the Controller
Board.
Remove the Phillips screws (circled)
securing the USB to the Bezel.
Replace the USB, reconnect the USB

Cables, install the screws and the tie wrap.
MAKE SURE to position the excess length
of the USB Cable between the Board and
the Touch Panel.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
ZIF Connectors Description - Removal/Installation
1. Shows the ZIF Connectors (Left - Cable Clamp closed, right - Cable Clamp open {this image was
stretched to better show clamp closed/open})
2. How to handle the Ribbon Cable during removal and installation.
3. How to remove and install the Ribbon Cable (note that the Cable Clamp (4) is open).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2. Main Controller replacement:

Disconnect the USB Cables (A) from the
Main Controller.
Slide the tie wrap (B) from the Controller
Board.
Remove the Phillips screws (circled)
securing the Controller and the ground
cable (C).
Remove the cables (D) connecting the

Main Controller to the Touch Panel and ZIF
(Zero Insertion Force) (E) cables. The ZIF
cables slide out to remove and slide in to
install.
Lift the Main Controller away from the
Touch Panel.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3. Tilt the replacement Main Controller Board

to insert the ZIF Cables (E) and close the
Clamp.
Lay the Board onto the Touch Panel.

Connect the cables (D) connecting the
Main Controller to the Touch Panel.
Re-install the Phillips screws (circled) to
secure the Controller to the Touch Panel.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4. Reconnect the USB Cables (A) to the Main

Controller.
Slide the tie wrap (B) onto the Controller
Board.
Re-install the Phillips screws (circled) to
secure the ground cable (C).
Re-install the back cover.
5. Re-install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly. Refer to:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-12-2 Main Controller Board Installation - R4 and earlier
Table 8-124 Main Controller Board Installation
1. Install the USB Board with the two screws Video Cable Routing
removed. 5207000-33, or later Operator
Panel includes USB Board.
Carefully re-install the Main Controller

Board onto the Main Controller USB
headers.
Install the five screws.
If replacing Upper Controller 5207000-30 - Main Ctrl. Board with USB Video Board and Cable, with
5207000-40 - Main Ctrl. Board with USB Video Board and Cable, use the existing USB Video to the
LCD Screen USB Cable, as shown. The existing cable fits better with the older LCD Frames, found in
5207000-23, or earlier Operator Panel Assembly.
To transfer the cable:
Remove the screws on the Video Controller Board, on the old board to remove the cable.
Thread the cable thorough the hole on the new board. Re-connect cable.
Reattach the two cables (USB Video to the screen and USB Video to the Touch Screen).
2. Re-install the High Voltage Inverter Board (if replacing P/N 5207000-53, or earlier), or the LED
Driver Board (if replacing P/N 5207000-63 or later).
3. Install the back cover. Be careful with the

four protruding tabs (1).
Install the three fixing screws (Phillips #1)

and the two screws at the D-SUB
connector (3/16 inch nut driver). Screws
are circled.
4. Re-install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly. Refer to:


PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-125 Main Controller removal Functional Checks
See:

5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required
checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-13 Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen replacement

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes
WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO

TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE
ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE
SCANNER (NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR).

8-6-15 "High Voltage Inverter Board / LED Driver Board with Cable replacement - 5207000 OP Panel family" on page
8-217.
8-6-10 "OP Panel Knobs replacement" on page 8-183.
NOTE: Check FRU compatibility to ensure that the Frame is compatible with the Main Controller Board.
See: Figure 9-14 "Back End Processor (BEP) cables - BEP5.x (MRX, R3.1.2 and later)" on
page 9-103.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-13-1 Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen removal
Table 8-128 Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen removal
1. Remove the back cover by removing the

three fixing screws (Phillips #1) and the two
screws at the D-SUB connector (3/16 inch
nut driver). Screws are circled.
Lift (pull) the upper part of the LCD cover so

you can release it from the four protruding
tabs (1).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the EMC

gasketing that goes around the Touch
Panel Assembly, especially during re-
assembly.
EMC fingers at openings for USB connectors

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-128 Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen removal
2. Remove the two fixing screws with spacers Operator Panel, Upper, without cover,
(1). (Spacers may be present, later seen from the rear side
production did not use screws with
spacers.)
Remove the five fixing screws (2) used to

fix the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen to
the LCD (plastic) Cover.
Remove the two fixing screws (3) used to

fix the USB Connector Board to the LCD
(plastic) Cover.
Carefully, separate the Frame w/LCD and

Touch Screen from the LCD (plastic)
Cover.
3. Carefully separate the Frame w/LCD and Frame w/LCD - Upper Bezel (top) and
Touch Screen and the Upper Bezel. Touch Screen (bottom)
4. Transfer the existing Main Controller Board to the new Frame w/LCD.
5. Transfer the High Voltage Backlight Inverter to the new Frame w/LCD, if removed.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-13-2 Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen installation
Table 8-129 Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen installation
1. Place the Upper Bezel, with the front down EMC fingers
on a clean, antistatic surface.
Install the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen

so it aligns with the fixing screw holes on
the Upper Bezel.
Install the fixing screws.
NOTE: Be careful so you dont bend the

EMC fingers (circled) when installing the
LCD Cover.
2. 1. Install the LCD Cover.

2. Install the five fixing screws.
3. Install the Operator Panel, Upper.
4. Install the Control Knobs.
5. Install the same color LOGIQ E9 Nameplate as the originally installed (nameplates included
in the FRU), if it is not installed.
Table 8-117 "Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation" on page 8-190
Table 8-112 "Operator Panel Knobs installation" on page 8-183

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Run the Touch Panel Calibration Verification in section
7-5-17-2 "Calibration Verification" on page 7-131.

to the customer.
Table 8-130 Replacing the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen Functional Checks
See:

4-3-6 B-Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction 5180483-100,

Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for
4-3-8-3 Color Mode Checks use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-14 USB Connector Board replacement - 5207000 OP Panel family

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes
Table 8-132 Preparation and Links
WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING
THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED
ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (NEAR THE
POWER CONNECTOR).
3. Remove the five OP Panel Knobs, the Operator Panel, Upper and the Main Controller Board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-14-1 USB Connector Board removal
Table 8-133 USB Connector Board removal
1. Remove five OP Panel Knobs.
2. Place the Main Controller Board on a clean, Main Controller Board with USB board -
antistatic surface with the solder side up. earlier (top) and later production
The USB Connector Board is plugged into

the Main Controller Board.
Pull the USB Connector Board upwards to

disconnect it from the Main Controller
Board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-14-2 USB Connector Board installation
Table 8-134 USB Connector Board installation
1. 1. Install the USB Connector Board.

2. Install the Main Controller Board.
Table 8-117 "Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation" on page 8-190
8-6-27 "Mode Select Encoders replacement" on page 8-279


to the customer.
Table 8-135 USB Connector Board replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-15 High Voltage Inverter Board / LED Driver Board with Cable
replacement - 5207000 OP Panel family
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes
POWER CONNECTOR).
4. Remove the Operator Panel, Upper.
8-6-12 "Upper Main Controller Board and sub-FRUs Replacement" on page 8-196 to remove the High Voltage
Inverter Board or LED Driver Board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-15-1 High Voltage Inverter / LED Driver Board with Cable removal
Table 8-138 High Voltage Inverter / LED Driver Board with Cable removal
1. Remove five OP Panel Knobs.
2. Disconnect the cables to the: A B

High Voltage Inverter Board (A), or
LED Driver Board (B).
Remove the two fixing screws (circled).
Remove the Board with Cable.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-15-2 High Voltage Inverter Board / LED Driver Board with Cable installation
Table 8-139 High Voltage Inverter Board / LED Driver Board with Cable installation
Steps
1. 1. Align the fixing holes of the board to the respective holes on the Main Controller Board or LED
DrIver Board.
2. Install the two fixing screws. (Size: M 2.5)
3. Plug in the cable to the connector on the Main Controller Board.
Table 8-117 "Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation" on page 8-190.


to the customer.
Table 8-140 High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-16 Bulkhead Board replacement

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes
POWER CONNECTOR).
3. Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-16-1 Bulkhead Board removal
Table 8-143 Bulkhead Board removal
1. Disconnect the cables from the Bulkhead Bulkhead Board front cables
Board at the front of the console:
Power / Audio cable (1) - slide locking
latch to release,
two Speaker cables (2).
Video (HDMI) cable (3) - remove 5 mm
hex screw (circled) to release cable from
the bulkhead.
two USB cables (4).
NOTE: New consoles only have one USB
Cable.
2. Disconnect the LCD cables behind the LCD Cables at Bulkhead - original Board shown
Bulkhead Cover:
Video (HDMI) cable (P10)
Power cable (P3) to LCD monitor
Gel Warmer cable (P1)

(P/N 5492372)
(disconnects for R6 and later)
P10 = video (HDMI)
A = Bulkhead ground

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-143 Bulkhead Board removal
3. Remove the two M3x 6 screws (5) securing Bulkhead Board screws and Tabs
the Bulkhead Board. Note how the board is
installed under the tabs (6).
Slide out the Bulkhead Board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-16-2 Bulkhead Board installation
Table 8-144 Bulkhead Board installation
1. Connect the Power / Audio cable (1) before Bulkhead Board front cables
sliding in the Bulkhead Board.
Slide the Bulkhead Board into the correct

position.
Bulkhead Board screws and Tabs

NOTE: The Bulkhead Board slides in
between tabs (6). The board MUST go
under the tabs.
NOTE: Component leads protruding

through the board may need to be trimmed
for easy installation.
Install the two screws (5, M3 x 6, torque:

1.2 Nm {0.88 lbf-ft or 10.6 lbf-in}).
(space intentionally left blank)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-144 Bulkhead Board installation
NOTICE
Be very careful when reconnecting the Video HDMI cable.

Avoid bending the delicate conductors, or cable damage may occur.
NOTICE
Board can occur. See images below of damage that can occur.
2. Connect the rest of the cables:

two Speaker cables (2) LCD Cables at Bulkhead - original shown
Video (HDMI) cable (3) - re-install the
5 mm hex screw (circled) to secure the
cable to the bulkhead
two USB cables (4)
Video (HDMI) cable (P10)
Power cable (P3) to LCD monitor
Gel Warmer cable (P1)
NOTE: R6 and later connections shown on
next page.

(P/N 5492372)
(reconnects for R6 and later)
P10 = video (HDMI)
A = Bulkhead ground
3. Install Bulkhead Cover.
4. Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

to the customer.
Table 8-145 Bulkhead Board replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction
4-3-11 Basic Measurements checks and is ready for use.
Calibration

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-17 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
45 minutes

3. Remove:
the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.
the five OP Panel Knobs.
the Operator Panel, Upper.
the two Speaker Assemblies.
the Bulkhead board.
the Operator Panel, Lower.

8-6-27-4 "Mode Select Encoder removal" on page 8-280.
8-6-18-1 "Speakers removal" on page 8-231.
8-6-16-2 "Bulkhead Board installation" on page 8-223.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-17-1 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended removal
Table 8-148 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended removal
1. The Bulkhead Plate is used to secure the OP Grounding Strap Clamp

Upper UI Frame to the Lower UI Frame.
NOTE: Mark the order of the cables, under

the Grounding Strap Clamp, before
removal. Marking the order will allow them
to be installed in the same location.
2. Remove the seven fixing screws. Bulkhead Plate and screws
Remove the Bulkhead Plate and the

Grounding Strap Clamp.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-17-2 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended installation
Table 8-149 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended installation
1. Position the Bulkhead Plate so it aligns with Bulkhead Plate and screws
the holes for the fixing screws.
Install the seven fixing screws as described

below:
- The two upper screws are M6 x 20,
torque: 10 Nm (7.4 lbf-ft).
- The next screw is M6 x 45, torque: 10 Nm
(7.4 lbf-ft).
- The four lower screws are M6 x 25,
torque: 10 Nm (7.4 lbf-ft). Two of the
screws are also fixing the Cable Clamp.
2. Install:
the Bulkhead Board
the two Speaker assemblies
the Operator Panel, Lower
the Operator Panel, Upper
the Operator Panel Knobs

8-6-20-3 "Lower Operator Panel installation" on page 8-254.
8-6-16-2 "Bulkhead Board installation" on page 8-223.
8-6-18 "Speaker replacement" on page 8-230.
Table 8-117 "Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly installation" on page 8-190.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-150 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-18 Speaker replacement
Table 8-151 Speaker replacement Manpower / Time and Tools
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF
Signed Date


3. Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-18-1 Speakers removal
Table 8-153 Speaker removal
1. Remove the Phillips screw (behind the Speaker Phillips screw

speaker) fixing the Speaker Bracket to the
OP frame.
Disconnect the Speaker cable to the

Bulkhead Board.
Remove the Speaker.
Repeat steps for the other Speaker, if

necessary.
8-6-18-2 Speakers installation - R3.x and earlier
Table 8-154 Speaker installation - R3.x and earlier
Steps
1. Position the Speaker.
Install the Phillips screw, fixing the Speaker Bracket to the OP frame.
NOTE: Check that the speaker bottom edge is tight or the speaker may rattle.
Connect the Speaker cable to the Bulkhead Board.
Repeat steps for the other Speaker, if necessary.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-18-3 Speakers installation - R4.x and later
Table 8-155 Speaker installation - R4.x and later
Steps
1. Position the Speaker.
Install the Phillips screw, fixing the Speaker Bracket to the OP frame.
NOTE: Check that the speaker bottom edge is tight or the speaker may rattle.
2. Connect the Audio High Pass Cable to the Audio High Pass Cable
Speaker cable.
3. Connect the Audio High Pass Cable to the

Bulkhead Board.
4. Repeat steps for the other Speaker, if necessary.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-156 Speaker replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual,
Monitor adjustments - Monitor Arm and/or Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment
Section 6-4
Monitor range of motion Adjustment procedure passed all required checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-19 Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard replacement

Table 8-157 Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard replacement Manpower / Time and
Tools
Manpower /
Tools
Time
15 minutes Keytop removal tool

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date




PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-19-1 Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly removal
Table 8-159 Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard removal
1. The Alphanumeric Keyboard Keycap Tool

Assembly is installed in the Lower
Operator Panel.
Remove the two shift keys (caplock

arrows), using the key removal tool
[the MacGyver keycap removal
tool will work as well, e.g., a
paperclip] to expose the screws that
secure the keyboard to the Lower
Operator Panel.
NOTE: If the keycap plunger does

not come off with the key, you have
to re-install it.
Keyboard Mounting Screw
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the keytops, use a small Phillips screwdriver to remove the keyboard
screws.
2. Remove the Alphanumeric Keyboard screws (M3 x 8).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-159 Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard removal
3. NOTE: Ensure that the elastomer Elastomer Actuators on

actuator (white spacers) do not get
Keyboard Assembly
separated from the shift keys when
you remove the keys. The new
keyboard keys will include these
actuators. So remove these if they
get left over when removing the shift
keys.
Using both hands, lift up on the

Keyboard space bar.
The Alphanumeric Keyboard
assembly tabs will act like a hinge
Slide the Alphanumeric Keyboard

assembly out and away from the
tabs.
Remove the Alphanumeric

Keyboard screws (M3 x 8).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-19-2 Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly installation
Table 8-160 Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard installation
1. Guide the Alphanumeric Keyboard Alphanumeric Keyboard Assembly tabs

assembly tabs into the slots.
Lower the Alphanumeric Keyboard,

making sure the plastic fingers
seat into the board.
2. Lower the Alphanumeric Keyboard, Alphanumeric Keyboard plastic fingers

making sure the plastic fingers
seat into the board.
3. Install the two screws.
4. Install the keytops.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-161 Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

4-3-11 Basic Measurements 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required
Alphanumeric Keyboard and Display Platform
4-3-19-1
(Console) Checks

Calibration

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-20 Lower Operator Panel (OP) replacement
Manpower /
Tools
Time

TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date


3. Remove Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly in order to remove the Lower Op Panel.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-20-1 Lower Operator Panel (OP) removal
Table 8-164 Lower Operator Panel (OP) removal
1. Keep XY / Frogleg mechanism in a Frogleg mechanism released and

released state and the console
console extended
extended to gain access to the
screws in the next step. The screws
are available from the underside of
the OP Panel Lower Frame.
2. Remove the five longer, and the Screw placement, Lower OP Panel Frame
three shorter screws (closest to
Assembly (shown) to Lower OP Panel
front) that secure the Lower
Operator Panel to the Lower
Operator Panel Frame Assembly.
Access the screws from beneath

the Lower OP Panel Frame
Assembly.
3. Remove the Alphanumeric Keyboard screws (M3 x 8).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-164 Lower Operator Panel (OP) removal
4. Holding the front edge, gently flex Flex points on Lower OP Panel
the Lower OP Panel up until the
(when the front edge is lifted)
Trackball Assembly just clears the
Lower OP Panel Frame Assembly
handle.
Pull the Lower OP Panel out and

away from the Lower OP Panel
Frame Assembly.
Store it on an ESD safe place.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-20-2 Lower Op Panel Board replacement
Table 8-165 Lower Op Panel Board replacement
1. To replace the Lower Op Panel Lower Op Panel Board - face down

Board, remove all the knobs from
the control board before removing it
(Mode knobs, TGC Slide Pots,
Alpha-numeric keyboard, Body
Pattern, Zoom, and Depth joystick
encoder knobs). For the Mode
knobs, ensure that these stay intact.
There are d-ring inserts in to spots
in the Mode keys -- DO NOT let
these come apart.
Remove all the knobs.
NOTE: The two encoders near the

trackball have different knobs than
the other six locations. These knobs Lower Op Panel Board with
have taller ribs inside, so they sit Customer Removable Trackball
higher up on the shaft. This position
prevents the knob from hitting the
puffy feature on the bezel.
Turn the board over, face down.
Remove the Trackball.
Remove the power and USB

cables. These cables are anchored
to a screw, so youll need to remove
the screw first.
5208000 OP Panel Lower family

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Joystick Encoder Cables
2. Detach the five joystick encoder
cables that stick through the Upper
OP I/O.
J1 Cable attached
3. DO NOT remove the flat J1 cable
that is attached to the Lower Op
Panel Board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4. Unscrew the 34 screws. Lower Op Panel Board - screws
Slowly and carefully lift the board

away from the Lower Op Panel
Bezel. IF any of the keycap holders
are upset, reset them. DO NOT
drop the Lower Op Panel Bezel
because you will have to replace all
of the keycap holders.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5. Remove the TGC dust gasket. The TGC Dust Gasket

gasket is included with the complete
Lower Panel and the Lower Panel
Circuit Board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-20-2-1 Lower Bezel Replacement
Table 8-166 Lower Bezel Replacement
1. Remove and transfer keycap and Ring of Keys Parts

carriers over to the new Lower (used on P/N 5207000-33 and prior only)
Bezel.
Remove and transfer Encoders to

the new Lower Bezel.
Remove and transfer the Trackball

ring of keys parts to the new Lower
Bezel.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-166 Lower Bezel Replacement
2. Customer Removable Trackball

Bezel DOES NOT use a Ring of C
Keys. B
The keys are smaller and retained

to the Bezel with pivot points (E).
D
A - Trackball Key, Bottom
B - Trackball Key, Left
C - Trackball Key, Top
D - Trackball Key, Right
E - Trackball Key, Pivot Points
A E
One Pivot Point (E) shown on

Bottom Key (A).
The Keys MUST BE tilted up to

remove. Keys A - Bottom, B - Left
and D - Right, are squeezed to be
removed.
Key C - Top, Pivot Points are pulled

outward.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-20-2-2 Touch Panel Joystick Encoder Replacement
Table 8-167 Touch Panel Joystick Encoder Replacement

Encoder Hex Nuts
1. From the front of the Lower Bezel,
remove the hex nut from the
Joystick Encoder.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-20-2-3 Depth-Type Joystick Encoder Replacement
Table 8-168 Depth-Type Joystick Encoder Replacement
1. Remove the elastomer covering Elastomer Cover

from the Lower Bezel.
2. Flip the board over. Bottom of Board
Detach the cable.
Flip the board over again.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-168 Depth-Type Joystick Encoder Replacement
3. Remove the hex nut. Joystick Encoder Nuts (top view of board)
8-6-20-2-4 Mode Encoder Replacement
Table 8-169 Mode Encoder Replacement
Step
1. These encoders plug into the headers on the board; so remove the nut from the top side and pull
out the encoder from the bottom side.
NOTE: The elastomer is on the top side.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-20-2-5 Elastomer Lower Op Panel Replacement
Table 8-170 Elastomer Lower Op Panel Replacement
1. Align the elastomer guides. Elastomer
Elastomer Guides - bottom view

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2. On the bottom side of the Lower Elastomer Guides - top view (not
Bezel, pull through the elastomer
all elastomer anchors are identified
guides until they lock in.
Double check that all 16 elastomer

guides (anchors) are pulled through
all the way, or else it will not seat
properly.
Install the Trackball.
Reattach the Power and USB

cables.
3. When replacing the Lower Op Lower Op Panel Board and Lower Bezel
Panel Bezel:
Make sure that carriers, buttons,

knobs are all in place before setting
the Lower Op Panel Board on top of
the Lower Bezel.
Ensure that the board is flat on top

of the bezel. Put a few screws in,
then flip it over to make sure none of
the buttons are cocked, or out of
place.
Replace the remaining screws.
D. Replace the TGC dust gasket.

The clear, plastic backing must be
facing down when the bezel is
installed. (The clear, plastic backing
should be facing up from this view.)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
4. Replace the TGC dust gasket. The TGC Dust Gasket to Lower Bezel
clear, plastic backing must be
facing down when the bezel is
installed. (The clear, plastic backing
should be facing up from this view.)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-20-3 Lower Operator Panel installation
Table 8-171 Lower Operator Panel installation
1. While holding the Lower OP Panel, Cables over top of Lower OP Panel
be sure to maintain control of the
three OP Panel cables so that they
come up and over the top of the
Lower OP Panel.
2. NOTE: Edge tips described are Left edge tip of Lower OP Panel Assembly
fragile. DO NOT lift or bend the
Lower OP Panel Assembly sharply,
or the edge tips may break.
Slide the left and right Lower OP

Panel edge tips carefully between
the Upper OP Panel
Frame (1 - white) and the Lower OP
Panel Frame (2 - blue).
Begin to slide the Lower OP Panel

into its compartment while making
sure the Trackball Assembly just
clears the Lower OP Panel Frame
Assembly handle.
3. Place the Lower OP Panel into its compartment.
Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly.
Install the eight screws that affix the Lower OP Panel assembly to the Lower OP Panel Frame
Assembly.
Be sure the three shorter screws are installed at the front (see: Table 8-164 "Lower Operator
Panel (OP) removal" on page 8-240).

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-172 Lower Operator Panel (OP) replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

4-3-19-1
(Console) Checks

Calibration

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-21 Lower Operator Panel Frame Assembly replacement
8-6-21-1 Manpower
8-6-21-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.

4.) Remove the LCD Arm.
5.) Remove the Upper Operator Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.
6.) Remove the Lower Operator Panel.
7.) Remove the Bulkhead Board.
8.) Remove the Palm Rest.
9.) Remove the Left and Right Handler Cover.
10.)Remove the XYZ Buttons Frame.

8-6-14 "USB Connector Board replacement - 5207000 OP Panel family" on page 8-214.
8-6-20 "Lower Operator Panel (OP) replacement" on page 8-239.
8-6-29 "Palm Rest Cover replacement" on page 8-287.
8-6-30 "Left Handle Cover replacement" on page 8-290.
8-6-31 "Right Handle Cover replacement" on page 8-293.
8-6-36 "XYZ Buttons replacement" on page 8-307.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-21-4 Lower Operator Panel Frame removal

1.) Remove the two screws securing the Main Cable.
Figure 8-68 Screw placement, Main Cable Grounding Strap Clamp
2.) Remove the three remaining screws securing the bulkhead bracket.
Figure 8-69 Screw placement, bulkhead bracket
3.) Remove the bulkhead bracket.

4.) From underneath the Frame, pull the Main Cables through the Frame opening to free the Frame.
5.) remove the Upper Frame.
6.) Remove two plastic Plate Washers on each side of the Bulkhead Bracket.
7.) Remove the Lower Operator Panel Frame.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-21-5 Lower Operator Panel Frame installation

1.) Position the Lower Operator Panel Frame.
2.) Install the Upper Frame.
3.) Install the plastic Plate Washers on both side of the Bulkhead Bracket.
4.) Position the bulkhead bracket.
5.) Install the five screws to secure the bulkhead bracket.
6.) Install the XYZ Buttons Frame.
7.) Install the Palm Rest.
8.) Install the Main Cable at the Lower Operator Panel end.
9.) Install the Bulkhead Board.
10.)Install the Lower Operator Panel.
11.)Install the Upper Operator Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.
12.)Install the LCD Arm.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-173 Lower Operator Panel Frame Assembly replacement Functional

Checks
See:

4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

Alphanumeric Keyboard and Display Platform checks and is ready for use.
4-3-19-1
(Console) Checks

4-3-4-1 Trackball Area

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-22 Upper Bezel replacement
8-6-22-1 Manpower
8-6-22-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.

4.) Remove Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-22-4 Upper Bezel removal
Figure 8-70 Upper Bezel
The Upper Bezel is what is left when you have removed the Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen.
Use the procedure in 8-6-13 "Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen replacement" on page 8-209 and 8-
6-13-1 "Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen removal" on page 8-210, to remove the Upper Bezel.
8-6-22-5 Upper Bezel installation

Use the procedure in 8-6-13-2 "Frame w/LCD and Touch Screen installation" on page 8-212, to
install the Upper Bezel.
NOTE: LOGIQ E9 Nameplate may not come installed in FRU. If so, you need to install the correct color
Nameplate (same color as originally installed). If not in FRU, See Chapter 9 for spare part
number.
Apply the LOGIQ E9 Nameplate:
Before applying the Nameplate, make sure the surface is clean and free of debris.
Figure 8-71 Upper Bezel - apply Nameplate, if not present
1.) Remove the adhesive liner.

2.) Apply the Nameplate into the indentation at the top of the Bezel.
3.) Press firmly to ensure the Nameplate adheres to the Bezel.
4.) Remove the protective film.
PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-174 Upper Bezel replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks


4-3-19-1
(Console) Checks

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-23 Lower Bezel replacement

Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

3. Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly. Place it on a clean surface with the front down.
4. Remove the Lower Operator Panel, Trackball, Encoder Board and Lower Switch Board with Elastomer.

8-6-19 "Alphanumeric (A/N) Keyboard replacement" on page 8-234.
8-6-24 "Frame UI Upper replacement" on page 8-267.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-23-1 Lower Bezel removal
Table 8-177 Lower Bezel removal
1. Remove the OP knobs. OP Knobs (Customer Removable Trackball

shown below to show difference)
If possible, place them in their LOGIQ
relative position on a table, or other

place where you can keep them
until you start the re-installation. If
you are going to install a new Lower 1
Bezel, you should move the OP

2
Knobs over to the new Lower Bezel,

one by one. Y
PW
X Z
CW
PDI
M CF
View
CHI
Steer Width
Measure
Zoom Depth
B
Comment 3D/4D
Auto
L R
P4
Clear
Freeze
P1 P2 P3
The Customer Removable

Trackball has a ring around the
Trackball that when it is turned Measure
counterclockwise, the ring and Body Pattern
Trackball will pop out. Turn the ring
Zoom
Ellipse
clockwise to re-install.
Comment 3D/4D
The Trackball cavity is completely
sealed and has no moving parts.
Clear
P1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-177 Lower Bezel removal
2. Disconnect the Encoders and Screw placement, Lower Bezel (back of the Customer
remove the screws to remove the Removable Trackball shown below to show
circuit board. differences)
Remove the Bezel from the

elastomer layer.

Trackball connects and mounts in
the same manner as the previous
Trackball.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-23-2 Lower Bezel Installation
Table 8-178 Lower Bezel Installation
1. Set the new Bezel in place.

Position the Bezel carefully over the elastomer layer.
2. Install the screws to reattach the circuit board.

Before continuing, test the joysticks and keys to ensure they operate properly.
3. Install the A/N Keyboard, the Lower Operator Panel and the Upper Operator Panel / Touch Panel
Assembly.


to the customer.
Table 8-179 Lower Bezel replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

4-3-19-1
(Console) Checks
Joystick
Console

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-24 Frame UI Upper replacement
8-6-24-1 Manpower
8-6-24-2 Tools

4.) Remove the LCD Arm.
5.) Remove the Upper Operator Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.
8.) Remove the Bulkhead Plate.

8-6-4-1 "LCD Arm (Original) replacement - R3.x and earlier" on page 8-140.
8-6-4-2 "LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly (Daeil) replacement (used in R4.x production)" on page 8-
142.
8-6-4-3 "Monitor Arm assembly (Ergotron) replacement - R5.x and later production" on page 8-148.
8-6-22-4 "Upper Bezel removal" on page 8-261.
8-6-16 "Bulkhead Board replacement" on page 8-220.
8-6-17-1 "Bulkhead, Plate, Extended removal" on page 8-227.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-24-4 Remove the Frame UI Upper

The Bulkhead Plate is used to secure the Upper UI Frame to the Lower UI Frame.
1.) Remove the fixing screws: Short screws (1), medium length screws (2) and long screws (3).
Figure 8-72 The Bulkhead Plate and Plate Washer Frame
2.) Remove the Frame UI Upper.
8-6-24-5 Install the Frame UI Upper

1.) Position the Frame UI Upper so it aligns with the holes for the fixing screws.
2.) Position the Bulkhead Plate so it aligns with the holes for the fixing screws.
3.) Install the seven fixing screws as described below:
- The two upper screws are M6 x 20, torque: 24 Nm (17.7 lbf-ft).
- The next screw is M6 x 45, torque: 24 Nm (17.7 lbf-ft).
- The four lower screws are M6 x 25, torque: 24 Nm (17.7 lbf-ft). Two of the screws are also
fixing the Grounding Strap Clamp.
4.) Install the Operator Panel, Lower.
6.) Install the two Speaker assemblies.
7.) Install the Operator Panel, Upper.
8.) Install the Operator Panel Knobs.
For more information:
8-6-20-3 "Lower Operator Panel installation" on page 8-254.

8-6-4-1 "LCD Arm (Original) replacement - R3.x and earlier" on page 8-140.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-180 Frame UI Upper replacement Functional Checks
See:
LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction 5180483-100,

4-2-3 Power ON/Boot Up Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for
use.
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
4-3-8-3 Color Mode Checks

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-25 Trackball Assembly replacement

Manpower /
Tools
Time
POWER CONNECTOR).
TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

3. Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly and the Lower Operator Panel. Place it on a clean surface
with the front down.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-25-1 Trackball Assembly removal
Table 8-183 Trackball Assembly removal
1. Detach the signal cable connectors Trackball mounting (Customer Removable Trackball
(1) from the Trackball Assembly. shown below to show differences)
Use a Phillips screwdriver to
remove the two fixing screws (2).
Remove the Trackball Assembly.
NOTE: To clean the Trackball used

in earlier production, remove the
Trackball locking ring and use soap
and water or t-spray wipes on the
Trackball. Do NOT use alcohol.

Trackball can be cleaned from the
top.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-183 Trackball Assembly removal
2. Disconnect the Encoders and Screw placement, Lower Bezel (back of the Customer
remove the screws to remove the Removable Trackball shown below to show
circuit board. differences)
Remove the Bezel from the
elastomer layer.

Trackball connects and mounts in
the same manner as the previous
Trackball.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-25-2 Trackball Assembly Installation
Table 8-184 Trackball Assembly Installation
1. Install the Trackball and the two fixing screws.

Removable Trackball:
NOTE: HAND TIGHTEN, DO NOT overweighted (~0.4 Nm {0.3 lbf-ft}). Overtightening the
screws on the Removable Trackball can break the plastic mounting tabs.
2. Connect signal cable connectors to the Trackball Assembly.
3. Install the Lower Operator Panel and the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel Assembly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-185 Dipswitch Settings - Inductive Trackball ONLY
1. Ensure that the Inductive Trackball

dipswitches (1) is set to 1=ON
(towards ON), and dipswitch (2) is
set to 2=OFF (towards 2).
No calibration or adjustments are

needed for the Optical Trackball or
Customer Removable Trackball.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

to the customer.
Table 8-186 Trackball Assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks


4-3-19-1
(Console) Checks

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-26 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer replacement
CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
8-6-26-1 Manpower
8-6-26-2 Tools

4.) Remove the Operator Panel, Upper.
5.) Remove the Operator Panel, Lower and place it on a clean surface with the front down.
6.) Remove the Trackball.

8-6-20-2 "Lower Op Panel Board replacement" on page 8-242.
8-6-25-1 "Trackball Assembly removal" on page 8-271.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-26-4 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer removal

1.) Disconnect the cable to the Encoder Board.
Figure 8-73 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer - Trackball already removed.
2.) Remove the 26 fixing screws.

3.) Remove the Lower Switch Board with Elastomer. Store it in an ESD safe place.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-26-5 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer installation

1.) Verify that all switch cups are in their correct positions.
2.) Position the Lower Switch Board with Elastomer in its correct position.
3.) Install the 26 fixing screws.
4.) Connect the cable to the Encoder Board.
5.) Install the Trackball.


to the customer.
Table 8-187 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer replacement Functional Checks
See:

LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction 5180483-100,
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for
use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-27 Mode Select Encoders replacement

The four Mode Select (Concentric Shaft) Encoders adjust the M-mode, PW-mode, CF-Mode, and B-
Mode scans.
8-6-27-1 Manpower
8-6-27-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.

4.) Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel.
5.) Remove the Operator Panel.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-27-4 Mode Select Encoder removal

1.) Remove one or more of the knobs.
NOTE: After removing the encoder knob(s); if the elastomer is in the way, the encoder(s) cannot be
removed from the top. Refer to: 8-6-20 "Lower Operator Panel (OP) replacement" on page 8-
239 to remove the Main Board and gain access to the individual encoders.
Figure 8-74 Mode Select Knobs
LOGIQ
PW
X Z
CW
PDI
M CF
View
CHI
Steer Width
Measure
Zoom Depth
B
Comment 3D/4D
Auto
L R
P4
Clear
Freeze
P1 P2 P3
2.) Use the 7/16 inch, deep socket wrench, or 7/16 inch open-ended wrench to loosen the nut.
3.) Use needle-nose pliers to remove the lock washer, and then nut.
Figure 8-75 Loosen and remove the Mode Select Encoders shaft nut(s)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-27-4 Mode Select Encoder removal (contd)
4.) Flip the Operator Panel over and place face down on a protected surface.
Figure 8-76 Mode Select Encoder(s) (rear view)
5.) Remove the encoder(s).
Figure 8-77 Remove the Mode Select Encoder(s)
8-6-27-5 Mode Select Encoder replacement

1.) Set the new Encoder in place.
2.) Turn the Operator Panel face up.
3.) Replace the lock washer and nut.
4.) Use a pen or slender tool to seat and thread the nut onto the Encoder.
5.) Tighten the nut.
6.) Install the outer/inner knob.
7.) Install the Lower Operator Panel.
8.) Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-188 Mode Select Encoders replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required

4-3-19-1
(Console) Checks

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-27-9 Encoder Board installation

1.) Position the Encoder board so the holes for the fixing screws aligns.
2.) Install the four screws.
3.) Turn the Operator Panel, Lower with the front down.
4.) Plug in the cable to the Operator Panel, Lower.


to the customer.
Table 8-189 Encoder Board installation Functional Checks
See:



PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-28 Joystick Encoder replacement
8-6-28-1 Manpower
8-6-28-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.

4.) Remove the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-28-4 Joystick Encoder(s) removal

1.) Remove the knobs to replace.
Figure 8-78 Joystick Encoder Knobs
LOGIQ
PW
X Z
CW
PDI
M CF
View
CHI
Steer Width
Measure
Zoom Depth
B
Comment 3D/4D
Auto
L R
P4
Clear
Freeze
P1 P2 P3
2.) Remove the screws to free the circuit board.
Figure 8-79 Screw placement, Single Shaft Encoder(s)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-28-5 Joystick Encoder(s) Installation

1.) Set the new Encoder in place.
2.) Install the screws to reattach the circuit board.
3.) Before continuing, test the joysticks to ensure they operate properly.
5.) Install the Upper Operator Panel / Touch Panel Assembly.


to the customer.
Table 8-190 Joystick Encoder replacement Functional Checks
See:

4-3-6 B-Mode Checks


4-3-19-1
(Console) Checks

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-29 Palm Rest Cover replacement
8-6-29-1 Manpower
8-6-29-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.


8-6-29-4 Palm Rest Cover removal

1.) Remove three short screws from the Lower Operator Panel.
2.) Remove two screws from under the Palm Rest.
3.) Remove the Palm Rest Cover.
Figure 8-80 Palm Rest Cover

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-29-5 Palm Rest Cover installation

1.) Ensure the XYZ Buttons cable runs along the lower tray cable channel so that the cable is not
pinched when the Palm Rest is replaced.
Figure 8-81 XYZ Buttons Frame - cable routing and channel
2.) Replace the Palm Rest Cover and two screws.

3.) Replace the Lower Operator Panel and three screws.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4.) Operate the XY and Z Controls to verify operation as intended.

to the customer.
Table 8-191 Palm Rest Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:

4-3-6 B-Mode Checks


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-30 Left Handle Cover replacement
8-6-30-1 Manpower
8-6-30-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.



PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-30-4 Left Handle Cover removal

1.) Release the lock mechanisms (1) from the top Left Handle Cover.
2.) Release the lock mechanisms (2) from the bottom Left Handle Cover.
Figure 8-82 Lock mechanism for Left Handle Cover
8-6-30-5 Left Handle Cover installation

1.) Position the bottom Left Handle Cover and secure with locking mechanisms.
2.) Position the top Left Handle Cover and secure with locking mechanisms.
5.) Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-192 Left Handle Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:

4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-31 Right Handle Cover replacement
8-6-31-1 Manpower
8-6-31-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.



PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-31-4 Right Handle Cover removal

1.) Release the lock mechanisms (1) from the top Right Handle Cover.
2.) Release the lock mechanisms (2) from the bottom Right Handle Cover.
Figure 8-83 Lock mechanism for Right Handle Cover
8-6-31-5 Right Handle Cover installation

1.) Position the bottom Right Handle Cover and secure with locking mechanisms.
2.) Position the top Right Handle Cover and secure with locking mechanisms.
5.) Install the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-193 Right Handle Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-32 Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement

The Options Holder (the Left Support or Right Support) is the base piece that attaches to the upper
console to support either a Transvaginal Probe Holder, a Gel Warmer, or a Storage Tray. The system
can support one Left Options Holder and one Right Options Holder at the same time. A Right Options
Holder comes standard with the system, with the Gel Warmer (48V).
8-6-32-1 Manpower
8-6-32-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.

3.) If the Options Holder is supporting the Gel Warmer, remove the Gel Warmer first (8-6-33 "Gel
Warmer replacement" on page 8-300).
4.) Separate and remove the Storage Tray or Transvaginal Probe Holder from the Options Holder, if
applicable.

8-6-33 "Gel Warmer replacement" on page 8-300.
8-6-34 "Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder replacement" on page 8-304.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-32-4 Options Holder removal

1.) From underneath the Upper Console, remove the three screws securing the Options Holder.
Figure 8-84 Screws, underneath upper console - gel warmer and option tray shown
2.) Remove the Options Holder from the Upper Console.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-32-5 Options Holder installation
Figure 8-85 Screw locations
1.) If this Options Holder will besupporting a Gel Warmer, place the Gel Warmer in the Options Holder
first and then install the Gel Warmer to the Options holder.
NOTE: Be sure the Gel Warmer cable fits in the cable channels and is not pinched.
2.) Position the Options Holder in place.
NOTE: Be sure the Gel Warmer cable fits in the cable channels and is not pinched.
3.) Install the three screws securing the Options Holder.

4.) Install the Storage Tray or Transvaginal Probe Holder to the Options Holder, if applicable.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4.) If a Gel Warmer is installed in the Options Holder, see: additional Verification and Functional
Checks for Gel Warmer (see: 8-6-33 "Gel Warmer replacement" on page 8-300).

to the customer.
Table 8-194 Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement Functional Checks
See:



PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-33 Gel Warmer replacement
8-6-33-1 Manpower
8-6-33-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-33-4 Gel Warmer removal

1.) Remove the Bulkhead Cover.
2.) Disconnect the Gel Warmer cable from (P1) on the back of the bulkhead.
3.) The Gel Warmer cable is routed through the cable channel (1) and the lower frame support (2). Pull
the Gel Warmer cable through the lower frame cable support to free the cable.
Figure 8-86 Gel Warmer Cable placement
4.) Remove the Options Holder (8-6-32 "Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement" on page
8-296).
Figure 8-87 Options Holder removed, with Gel Warmer in place
5.) Remove the two screws at the Gel Warmer base.

6.) Lift the Gel Warmer out of the Options Holder.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-33-5 Gel Warmer installation

1.) Place the Gel Warmer in the Options Holder, routing the cable through the cutout (1) between the
Options Holder and Gel Warmer and through the cable channel (2).
NOTE: Be careful not to pinch wires.
Figure 8-88 Options Holder removed, with Gel Warmer in place
2.) Install the two screws at the Gel Warmer base, securing the Gel Warmer to the Options Holder
(Torque: 3 Nm {2.2 lbf-ft}).
3.) Install the Options Holder.
4.) Route the Gel Warmer cable through the lower frame cable support.
5.) Connect the Gel Warmer cable to the bulkhead.
6.) Replace the Bulkhead Cover.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

Temperature is preset to its highest level: 38 degrees C (+/-2 degrees C). It is recommended to retain
default setting.
User can turn dial to adjust the temperature to its lowest level: 32 degrees C (+/-2 degrees C).
4.) Place a closed bottle of gel, applicator end first, in the gel warmer. Verify warmer is operational.

to the customer.
Table 8-195 Gel Warmer replacement Functional Checks
See:


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-34 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder replacement

The Storage Tray and Transvaginal Probe Holder rests inside the Options Holder base part and are
interchangeable. They can also replace the Gel Warmer. See: 8-6-33 "Gel Warmer replacement" on
page 8-300 and 8-6-35 "Replacing the Gel Warmer with a Storage Tray or TV/TR Probe Holder" on page
8-306.
Follow this procedure for replacement, or replacing a tray with a Probe Holder or a Probe Holder with a
tray.
8-6-34-1 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder removal

1.) Locate the two prongs below the tray or Probe Holder.
Figure 8-89 Locate the two prongs
2.) Squeeze the two prongs together, then lift the tray or Probe Holder off the system.
Figure 8-90 Squeeze the two prongs

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-34-2 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder installation

1.) Seat the tray or Probe Holder tab into the options holder base and snap into place.
Figure 8-91 Seat and snap into place

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-35 Replacing the Gel Warmer with a Storage Tray or TV/TR Probe Holder
Follow these instructions when removing the gel warmer and replacing it with a Storage Tray or a TV/
TR Tray.
8-6-35-1 Gel Warmer removal

Before starting this procedure, see: 8-6-33 "Gel Warmer replacement" on page 8-300.
1.) Remove the Gel Warmer.
2.) Seat the tray tab into the options holder base and snap into place. See: Figure 8-91 "Seat and snap
into place" on page 8-305.
Figure 8-92 TV/TR Probe Holder installed

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-36 XYZ Buttons replacement

The XYZ Buttons, located on the palm rest, control the XY (frogleg) and Z (up/down) movement.
Push the left button, and then reposition the XY (horizontal) location of the upper console. Three
seconds after pushing the left button, the four motors in the XY frog leg lock to stabilize the console.
Toggle the right button to reposition the Z (vertical) location of the upper console. Toggle up to raise, or
down to lower, the console.
Figure 8-93 XYZ Buttons in Palm Rest
8-6-36-1 Manpower
8-6-36-2 Tools

PROPRIETARY TO GE

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.

4.) Remove the Palm Rest Cover.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-36-4 XYZ Buttons removal

Note the location of the cable for the XYZ Buttons cable in the lower tray cable channel (1) so that the
cable is not pinched when the Palm Rest is replaced.
1.) Disconnect the cable, connected to the back of the XYZ Buttons (2).
The lower OP Panel.does not have to be completely removed, only three screws secure the palm rest.
Figure 8-94 XYZ Buttons Frame cable
2.) Gently pop the XYZ Buttons out of the Palm Rest section of the Lower Op Panel frame handle.
8-6-36-5 XYZ Buttons installation

1.) Insert the XYZ Buttons into the Palm Rest section of the Lower Op Panel frame handle.
2.) Connect the cable to the XYZ Buttons.
3.) Ensure the XYZ Buttons cable runs along the Lower Op Panel cable channel so that the cable is
not pinched when the Palm Rest is replaced (see: Figure 8-94).
4.) Replace the Palm Rest.
5.) Replace the Lower Operator Panel.
6.) Replace the Upper OP Panel/Touch Panel assembly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4.) Operate the XY and Z Controls to verify operation as intended.

to the customer.
Table 8-196 XYZ Buttons replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
4-3-11 Basic Measurements Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment
Alphanumeric Keyboard and Display

4-3-19-1
Platform (Console) Checks
Operator I/O Movement - XY and Z
Mechanism

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-37 Probe Cable Hooks replacement
8-6-37-1 Manpower
8-6-37-2 Tools
8-6-37-3 Probe Cable Hook removal

1.) Unscrew the fastening screw.
The screw may be locked with Lock-Tite, so you may need to apply a little extra force.
Figure 8-95 Screw placement, Probe Cable Hook
2.) Remove the Cable Hook.
8-6-37-4 Probe Cable Hook installation

1.) Position the Probe Cable Hook (Figure 8-95).
2.) Fix it in place by using an M5x20 screw with an M6 washer. Lock-Tite has to be used.
Torque: 50 Ncm (0.37 lbf-ft or 4.4 lbf-in) (fingertight).

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-6-37-5 Probe Cable Hooks Functional Checks

to the customer.
Table 8-197 Probe Cable Hooks replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-8-3 Color Mode Checks checks and is ready for use.
4-3-16 Peripherals Checks

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 8-7
Replacing XYZ Parts
This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts in the Main Console

8-7-3 XY Mechanism replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-314
8-7-4 XY Brake Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-318
8-7-5 Z-Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-323
8-7-6 Drive Gear Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-328
8-7-7 XYZ Control Assembly replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-333

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-3 XY Mechanism replacement
8-7-3-1 Manpower
8-7-3-2 Tools

4.) Remove the LCD Rear Cover.
5.) Remove the LCD Monitor assembly.
6.) Remove the LCD Arm assembly.
8.) Remove the Operator Panel, Lower.
10.)Remove the Bulkhead Plate.
11.)Remove the Upper Frame Assembly.
12.)Remove the Lower Frame Assembly.

8-6-24-4 "Remove the Frame UI Upper" on page 8-268.
8 - 314 Section 8-7 - Replacing XYZ Parts

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-3-4 XY Mechanism removal
Figure 8-96 XY Mechanism OP Panels removed
1.) Remove the four 6 MM screws.
Figure 8-97 XY Mechanism 6 MM Screws
2.) Carefully remove the cables from the left brake and right brake assemblies. Remove main cable
bracket from the top of the motor controller to disconnect the brake cables (plus ground) from the
control box.
3.) From the rear side of the LOGIQ E9, remove the four 6 mm fixing screws that come up from
underneath and into the frogleg assembly at the rear.
4.) Remove the articulating plastic arm to the z axis assembly (main cable assembly).
5.) Carefully lift the frogleg assembly.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-3-5 XY Mechanism installation

For the installation procedure, reverse the replacement procedures referenced below:
1.) Position the XY mechanism so it aligns with the holes for the four fixing screws.
2.) Install the four fixing screws (Torque: 24 Nm {17.7 lbf-ft}).
3.) Install the Lower Frame Assembly.
4.) Install the Upper Frame Assembly.
5.) Install the Bulkhead Plate.
9.) Install the LCD Arm assembly.
10.)Install the LCD Monitor assembly.
11.)Install the LCD Rear Cover.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

If it is difficult to lock the XY mechanism in parked position, the locking mechanism need adjustments.
For Operator Panel adjustments, refer to: Section 6-7 "Operator Panel movement" on page 6-35.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it starts as it should.

to the customer.
Table 8-198 XY Mechanism replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
Gel Warmer Check
4-2-14-1 The Casters (Wheels) control 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required
and and checks and is ready for use.
Operator Functional Check
Run BEP I/O Diagnostics to Check
Audio Speakers

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-4 XY Brake Assembly replacement
Figure 8-98 XY Brake Assembly
8-7-4-1 Manpower
One person, 10 minutes
8-7-4-2 Tools
1.) Make sure the XY arms are in the unlocked (floating) position.
NOTE: While system is shutting down, make sure the XY arms are in the unlocked (floating) position
and hold the brake release/XY unlock button until system is fully shut down. This will remove
tension from the brake shoes and allow for much easier brake assembly removal.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-4-4 XY Brake Assembly removal

The four XY Brake Assemblies (1) are located inside the XY (froglegs), one in each leg.
To remove one XY Brake Assembly, follow these steps:
1.) Unscrew and remove the screw(s) (2) that fix the cover to the leg.
Figure 8-99 Covers, XY Brake Assembly and fixing screws
1
3 2
2.) Remove the cover.

3.) Disconnect the XY Brake cable.
4.) Unscrew and remove the fixing screw (3) for the XY Brake Assembly.
Figure 8-100 XY Brake Retaining Screw

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-4-4 XY Brake Assembly removal (contd)

5.) Remove the brake assembly retainer screw.
6.) Disconnect the brake motor wire connector.
7.) Using a 3 mm, L Allen wrench, slide the short L end of the wrench between the motor and the
metal part of the brake ramp. The short L end, should be visible as shown in Figure 8-101. BE
CAREFULL not to pinch the brake motor wires. See: Figure 8-102 "XY Brake Allen wrench
placement - reference" on page 8-321.
Figure 8-101 XY Brake Removal (end of Allen wrench)
8.) Gently, but firmly, pull down on the long end of the allen wrench. The brake assembly will slide out
of the slot it mates with in the brake shoe.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-4-4 XY Brake Assembly removal (contd)
NOTE: Figure 8-102 shows the XY brake removed and demonstrates placement of the Allen wrench.
Figure 8-102 XY Brake Allen wrench placement - reference
8-7-4-5 XY Brake Assembly installation

1.) Position the XY Brake Assembly into the arm. You may need to turn the axle on the motor(by hand)
to adjust the lever so it fits.
2.) Install the fixing screw for the XY Brake Assembly.
3.) Connect the cable from the motor to the XY Brake cable.
4.) Position the Cover so it aligns with the hole(s) for the fixing screw(s).
5.) Install the fixing screws:
- The covers for the front legs are fixed with one screw. Use low Torque, maximum
2.5 Nm (1.8 lbf-ft) (plastic part).
- The covers for the rear legs are fixed with two screws. Use low Torque, maximum
2.5 Nm (1.8 lbf-ft) (plastic part).

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-199 XY Brake Assembly replacement Functional Test
See:
4-2-5 Top Console position adjustment 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-5 Z-Mechanism replacement
Figure 8-103 Z-Mechanism
8-7-5-1 Manpower
8-7-5-2 Tools

4.) Remove the LCD Rear Cover.
5.) Remove the LCD Monitor assembly.
6.) Remove the LCD Arm assembly.
8.) Remove the Operator Panel, Lower.
10.)Remove the Bulkhead Plate.
11.)Remove the Upper Frame Assembly.
12.)Remove the Lower Frame Assembly.
13.)Remove the XY (Frogleg) Assembly.
14.)Remove the Covers:
a.) Left
b.) Right
c.) Top
15.)Remove the Card Cage and the BEP. These steps are optional in case there is no easy access to
the Z Mech mounting hardware.
NOTE: The USB Cable should not be connected.
16.)Remove the plate on top of XYZ Control.

17.)Remove the XYZ Control Box

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-5-3 Preparations (contd)


Section 8-5 "Replacing Covers and Bumpers" on page 8-50.
8-6-24-4 "Remove the Frame UI Upper" on page 8-268.
8-7-3-4 "XY Mechanism removal" on page 8-315.
8-7-7-4 "XYZ Control Assembly removal" on page 8-334.
8-10-4-1 "Front End Card Cage Cover removal" on page 8-389.
8-11-6 "BEP replacement - R3.x and earlier" on page 8-452.
8-11-7 "BEP replacement - R4.x and later" on page 8-460.
8-7-5-4 Z-Mechanism removal

The Z-Mechanism is fastened with several screws.
1.) Remove the four screws from the lower part of the Z-Mechanism.
Figure 8-104 Remove four screws

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-5-4 Z-Mechanism removal (contd)

2.) Remove the three screws securing the plate and Z-Mechanism to the Frame, at the top and remove
the plate, and remove the two remaining screws.
Figure 8-105 Remove four screws
3.) Lift the Z-Mechanism away.

Figure 8-106 Lifting the Z-Mechanism

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-5-5 Z-Mechanism installation

1.) Position the Z-Mechanism so the holes for the fixing screws align.
2.) Install two M6x16 Countersunk and two M6x16 screws (torque specification is 10 Nm {7.4 lbf-ft}).
3.) Install four M6x16 (lower part of unit) (torque specification is 10 Nm {7.4 lbf-ft}).
4.) Install the BEP and the Card Cage, if removed.
5.) Install the XY (Frogleg) Mechanism.
6.) Install the Lower Frame Assembly.
7.) Install the Upper Frame Assembly.
8.) Install the Bulkhead Plate.
10.)Install the Operator Panel, Lower.
11.)Install the Operator Panel, Upper.
12.)Install the LCD Arm assembly.
13.)Install the LCD Monitor assembly.
14.)Install the LCD Rear Cover.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-200 Z-Mechanism replacement Functional Checks
See:
Gel Warmer Check 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required
Operator Functional Check
Run BEP I/O Diagnostics to Check
Audio Speakers

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-6 Drive Gear Assembly replacement
Figure 8-107 Drive Gear Assembly
8-7-6-1 Manpower
Two people, 30-45 minutes.
NOTE: Two people are recommended for this procedure because it is very difficult for one person to
position the motor and wiggle the Top Console assembly at the same time; the second person
does not need to be a trained FE or do any lifting.
8-7-6-2 Tools
1.) While the system is powered up, move the Operator Interface up and towards the user.
NOTE: No need to disconnect the Probes, they are probably safest if kept on the system. The External
I/O Cabling does not need to be removed unless it is in the way.
4.) Remove the Right Side Cover, Left Side Cover.


8-5-4-1 "Side Covers removal" on page 8-57.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-6-4 Drive Gear Assembly removal
Table 8-201 Drive Gear Assembly removal
Step Corresponding Graphic

1. NOTE: The Drive Gear Assembly used on Drive Gear Assembly location
BT11 (5205000-5 and 5205000-6) and
later console models, does not require
use a 5 mm L-Allen wrench with a Ball
Head to take off the whole assembly.
Allen wrench slot on P/N GA200750

Z-Mechanism Drive Motor
The clutch lever release slot is narrower
on earlier production Z-Mechanism Drive
Motor. (This size slot uses a 5 mm Allen
wrench to release the Z-Mechanism
clutch, to the release maximum.)
Slot on P/N 5396884

The slot is wider on BT11 and later
Z-Mechanism Drive Motor. This does not
require a 5 mm Allen wrench to release
the Z-Mechanism clutch, to the release
maximum.
This can be removed by guiding the clutch

lever as the drive motor is being removed
from the system.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-201 Drive Gear Assembly removal

2. The Drive Gear Assembly is a part of the
Z Mechanism. To remove the Drive Gear
Assembly. 1
Place a piece of paper on top of the Card

Rack to prevent any debris which may 2
have developed from Drive Gear
Assembly.
1
Disconnect the motor cable from the XYZ 1
Control Box and the Volume Navigation
ground lead, if present.
Unscrew and remove the four fixing

screws (1). Use a 5 mm L-Allen wrench
with a Ball Head to take off the whole
assembly (four bolts).
Push the clutch lever (2) to its maximum.

3. Put a 5 mm Allen wrench in the clutch Allen wrench placement for
lever release opening, if required. P/N GA200750
Pull the unit away. You may need to either
operate the Z-release lever when pulling,
or move the Top Console slightly up or
down to make the wheel disengage from
the gear.
NOTE: This step will take time because

you need to gently work the Motor
assembly back and forth as you pull it, in
order to gradually remove the shaft from
the bearing. Wiggle the Top Console up
and down to aid in removal.
Remove the 5 mm Allen wrench.
Carefully remove the piece of paper to

capture any debris that may be present.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-6-5 Drive Gear Assembly installation
Table 8-202 Drive Gear Assembly installation

1. Insert the Allen wrench on the new Drive Drive Gear Assembly placement
Gear, if required.
NOTE: When attaching the replacement

assembly, you need to carefully work the
new assembly into place, wiggling the
motor assembly and the Top Console until
the shaft slides into the bearing.
Insert the Drive Gear assembly in the front

top, checking that the lever and motor
body are not wedged on the frame. Install
it from the top and at an angle, ensuring
that the clutch handle goes through the
clutch opening in the back of the system.
You may need to either operate the

Z-release lever when positioning, or move
the Top Console slightly up or down to
engage the teeth on the wheel with the
teeth on the gear.
Be sure to position the replacement unit

so that it is nearly installed. Once it is
inside, remove the 5 mm Allen wrench, if
used.
Install the four fixing screws with washers.

(M6 x 16, torque: 9.5 Nm {7.0 lbf-ft}.)
2. Connect the motor cable from the XYZ Control Box and the Volume Navigation ground lead, if
present.
Power up the unit and verify that the XYZ function as intended.
Power down the unit.
Install the Top Cover, Rear Cover and the Right side Cover.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-203 Drive Gear Assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-7 XYZ Control Assembly replacement
Figure 8-108 XYZ Control Assembly
8-7-7-1 Manpower
8-7-7-2 Tools

4.) Remove the Left Side Cover.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-7-4 XYZ Control Assembly removal
NOTE: On systems running R2.0.4 or later, there is a USB cable connected to the XYZ Controller, from
J25 of the BEP. The cable must also be removed from the USB port labeled USB Interface of
the controller.
1.) Disconnect the cables to the XYZ Control Assembly.

2.) Unscrew and remove two screws.
Figure 8-109 XYZ Control Assembly mounting screws
3.) Pull the top of the XYZ Control Assembly forwards, up and away from the bracket.
8-7-7-5 XYZ Control Assembly installation

1.) Thread the XYZ Control Assembly into position.
2.) Install the three screws at the top, rear. (M6x16 sunken. Torque: 9.8 Nm {7.2 lbf-ft}) (If they have
been removed as part of Z Mechanism replacement.)
3.) Install the two remaining screws on the top. (M4x8, sunken. Torque: 4.9 Nm {3.6 lbf-ft}).
4.) Connect the cables to the XYZ Control Assembly.
7.) Install the Left Side Cover.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


PROPRIETARY TO GE

to the customer.
8-7-7-8-1 Testing the XY Control - for systems running R2.0.4 or later
Table 8-204 XYZ Utilities Folder (XYZ Utils)

1. Access Common Service Desktop as
GE Service. Select Diagnostics tab.
At the end of the list of available Service

Diagnostics, you will find the XYZ Utils
(XYZ Utilities) Folder.
XYZ Utils provides two different tests:

XYZ Version Test
XYZ Fix Park Lock
Table 8-205 XYZ Version Test

2. Run the XYZ Version Test.
The system will retrieve the Hardware and

Firmware versions as follows and will show
status PASS.
NOTE: The version displayed in the

illustration may not match the one in the
field. The pass status will indicate that the
system can read the device.
Table 8-206 XYZ Fix Park Lock

3. Run the XYZ Fix Park Lock Test.
The system will release (Undock) the OP

Panel and reset the position of the park
lock. You will hear the motor moving,
releasing the console. The status should
show Passed.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-7-7-8 Functional Checks (contd)
Table 8-207 XYZ Control Assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-4 Power shut down LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 8-8
Main Console parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts in the Main Console

8-8-3 Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement / cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-339
8-8-4 Bottom Filter installation (looped type strap). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-344
8-8-5 Removable Fan Tray Filter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-350
8-8-6 Fan Assembly replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-353
8-8-7 Subwoofer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-358
8-8-8 Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-363
8-8-9 Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-363
8-8-10 Main Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-363
8-8-11 Pedal Mechanism replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-363
8-8-12 Rear Handle replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-363
8 - 338 Section 8-8 - Main Console parts replacement

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-3 Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement / cleaning
8-8-3-1 Manpower
8-8-3-2 Tools
No tools are needed to replace the filter.

3.) Remove the Filter Cover.

8-5-11 "Filter Cover replacement" on page 8-78.
Clean the air filters to ensure that a clogged filter does not cause the system to overheat and reduce
system performance and reliability. It is recommended the filters be cleaned quarterly (once every three
months) or more often in locations where high levels of dust are present.
The LOGIQ E9 has two air filters which need to be cleaned. The top air filter is located on the back of
the LOGIQ E9 below the power cord and the bottom air filter is located underneath the LOGIQ E9.
Table 8-208 Removing and Cleaning Filters
1. Power down the system before

removing the filters to prevent any
loose or knocked-off debris from
entering the Fan Tray.
Walk the LOGIQ E9 forward until

the caster is in position to access
the filter handle. The right side,
rear caster must be in-line and
away from the LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
2. Lock the Brakes.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
3. Filter Locations
A. Rear Filter - Remove the

Cover and then remove the filter.
B. Bottom Filter - Remove the

Filter Assembly by lowering the
handle.
NOTE: The handle for the bottom

filter is located in the same
location for both Filter
Assemblies.
4. Clean the Rear Filter after it is

removed by removing excess lint
or dust from the soiled side; or
vacuum if necessary.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
5. Clean the Bottom Filter after it is

removed by removing excess lint
or dust from the soiled side. If
necessary, use a clean, soft
brush; or vacuum.
6. Re-install the rear and tuck the

edges of the filter under the Rear
Bumper and Rear Cover.
Re-install Filter Cover.
7. Re-install Bottom Filter by

positioning the filter under the
system and placing the handle
into the stowed position. The filter
will be drawn to the filter mounting
magnets.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-209 Rear Filter Installation Functional Checks
See:
4-2-3 Power ON/Boot Up LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction
4-2-4 Power shut down checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-4 Bottom Filter installation (looped type strap)
8-8-4-1 Removal Process with Looped Strap
Figure 8-110 Bottom Filter Looped Strap (located in wheel well)
1.) Locate the looped strap on the right hand side of the LOGIQ E9, which can be viewed through the
right rear wheel well.
2.) Insert the first and second fingers of your right hand through the filter removal loop.
3.) Using the first and second fingers of the your hand, lever down on the filter removal loop and the
fingers of the right hand.
Figure 8-111 Placement of Fingers in Looped Strap
NOTE: This action will prevent your fingers from being struck by the filter when you remove it and it
pops loose.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-4-1 Removal Process with Looped Strap (contd)
Figure 8-112 Filter removed
4.) Remove the filter from the frame.
NOTE: The filter frame will clear your fingers as you remove the filter.
Figure 8-113 Bottom View to show Removing the Filter
WARNING Tilting the system is NOT a recommended method for the removal of the filter. The
bottom view in Figure 8-113 is only for illustrative purposes.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-4-2 Removal Process with Non-loop Type Strap
Figure 8-114 Non-loop Type Strap
1.) Locate the strap on the right hand side of the LOGIQ E9, which can be viewed through the right rear
wheel well.
Figure 8-115 Fingers Holding Strap
2.) Grasp the filter removal strap with the thumb and index finger of your right hand.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-4-2 Removal Process with Non-loop Type Strap (contd)

3.) Using the first and second fingers of your left hand, lever down on the filter removal strap.
Figure 8-116 Placement of Fingers Around Strap
NOTE: This action will prevent your fingers from being struck by the filter when you remove it and it
pops loose.
Figure 8-117 Removing Filter Frame
4.) Remove the filter from the frame.
NOTE: The filter frame will clear your fingers as you remove the filter.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-4-2 Removal Process with Non-loop Type Strap (contd)
Figure 8-118 Bottom View for Removing the Filter
WARNING Tilting the system is NOT a recommended method for the removal of the filter. The
bottom view in Figure 8-118 is only for illustrative purposes.
8-8-4-2-1Cleaning the bottom filter

The bottom filter is held in place with magnets. To clean the bottom air filter,
1.) You need to kneel down on the floor to access the bottom filter. Locate the piece of cloth extending
from the air filter on the bottom of the LOGIQ E9.
2.) You need two hands to remove this filter. One hand is used to pull on the piece of cloth that extends
from the filter and the other hand is used to wedge a finger just under a corner of the filter. In this
step, firmly take hold of the piece of cloth that extends from the filter.
3.) Position your other hand at a corner of the filter and wedge a finger between the filter and the bottom
of the LOGIQ E9.
4.) Pull down on the filter with the finger that is wedged between the filter and the LOGIQ E9 while
pulling on the piece of cloth that extends from the filter at the same time to remove the filter.
5.) Clean this filter with soap and water, or vacuum clean.
6.) Reposition the filter at the bottom of the LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE



to the customer.
Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use
Table 8-210 Filter replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks passed all required checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-5 Removable Fan Tray Filter cleaning
Table 8-211 Removable Fan Tray Filter cleaning
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
No tools are needed to replace the filter.
15 minutes

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
3. Remove the Removable Fan Tray.

Clean the Fan Tray filter to ensure that a clogged filter does not cause the system to overheat and
reduce system performance and reliability. It is recommended the filter be cleaned quarterly (once every
three months) or more often in locations where high levels of dust are present.
Table 8-213 Removing the Fan Tray Filter

1. Slide Fan Tray out of the LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-213 Removing the Fan Tray Filter

2. Flip the Fan Tray over on a clean, safe
surface.
Pull out the Filter latch and slide the Filter

out.
Clean the Bottom Filter after it is removed

by removing excess lint or dust from the
soiled side. If necessary, use a clean, soft
brush; or vacuum.
3. Re-install the Filter into the Fan Tray and re-install the Fan Tray. Make sure the Fan Tray seats
completely into the Card Cage.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-214 Rear Filter Installation Functional Checks
See:
4-3-14 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-6 Fan Assembly replacement

Two types of Fan Assemblies are described in this Section. For R4, see: 8-8-6-4 "Fan Assembly
removal - R4 andearlier" on page 8-354 or 8-8-6-6 "Removable Fan Tray Assembly replacement /
installation - R5 and later" on page 8-355.
8-8-6-1 Manpower
8-8-6-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.
CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
4.) Remove the Right Side Cover.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-6-4 Fan Assembly removal - R4 andearlier

1.) Disconnect the PCIe express cable from the GFI board visible at the front of the Card Rack Cover,
if GFI configuration. MRX configuration does not have this cable.
Figure 8-119 Disconnect PCIe express cable from GFI board (GFI configuration only)
2.) Unscrew the thumb screws of the Card Rack Cover.

3.) Remove the Card Rack Cover.
4.) Pull the Fan Assembly out of the frame.
Figure 8-120 Fan Assembly removal

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-6-5 Fan Assembly installation - R4 and earlier

1.) Align the Fan Assembly with the rails in the frame and push it into position.
2.) Install the Card Rack Cover.
3.) Install the thumb screws of the Card Rack Cover.
4.) Connect the PCIe express cable to the GFI board connector, if GFI configuration.
8-8-6-6 Removable Fan Tray Assembly replacement / installation - R5 and later
Table 8-215 Removable Fan Tray Assembly replacement / installation

1. Slide Fan Tray out of the LOGIQ E9. The
Fan Tray Assembly does not include the
Fan Tray Cover, transfer the Cover to the
replacement. See:
8-5-4-3 "Removable Fan Tray Cover
replacement" on page 8-61.
2. Flip the Fan Tray over and pull out the Filter
latch and slide the Filter out.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-215 Removable Fan Tray Assembly replacement / installation

3. Transfer the Fan Tray Cover to the
replacement Fan Tray Assembly if it is not
damaged. If the Cover is damaged, replace
it.
Flip the Fan Tray over and lay on a safe
surface.
Remove the four screws securing the Fan
Tray Cover to the Fan Tray.
Retain the screws.
4. Re-install the Filter into the Fan Tray Assembly and install the Tray into the Card Cage. Make sure the
Fan Tray seats completely into the Card Cage.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4.) Verify that there is no unusual noise from the Fan Assembly.

to the customer.
Table 8-216 Fan Assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
Let the LOGIQ E9 run for 10 minutes and
observe that the Fans are running and
there are no errors reported by the
LOGIQ E9.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-7 Subwoofer replacement

There are two types of Subwoofer used in the LOGIQ E9. Identify the Subwoofer and/or Cable being
replaced and the new torque specification for the later production Subwoofer. See: Table 8-217,
Table 8-218 and Table 8-219 "New Subwoofer Differences" on page 8-359. The Subwoofer Cable
connects and routes the same for both types.
Table 8-217 Identifying the Subwoofer in the LOGIQ E9
New Subwoofer P/N 5261127-2 Old Subwoofer (P/N 5261127)
W14xxxx-08 CA 15 RLY
8 OHM H1216-08 ohm
Made in Norway
Made in Norway
8 OHM H1216-08 ohm
W14xxxx-08 CA 15 RLY
The new Subwoofer can be identified by the The old Subwoofer can be identified by the
white label above the Cable Connectors as white label above the Cable Connectors as
shown. shown.
(Subwoofer shown as installed.) (Subwoofer shown as installed.)
Table 8-218 New Subwoofer Cable Differences
The old Subwoofer Cable (P/N 5194498)

New Subwoofer Cable P/N 5194498-2
NOT BACKWARD COMPATIBLE
Replace like for like or

BACKWARD COMPATIBLE P/N 5194498-2 can be used in
place of P/N 5194498.
SUBWOOFER 5194498-2 REV x BEP J33 SUBWOOFER 5194498 BEP J33

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-7 Subwoofer replacement (contd)
Table 8-219 New Subwoofer Differences
New Subwoofer P/N 5261127-2 Old Subwoofer (P/N 5261127)
NOT BACKWARD COMPATIBLE Replace like for like!
6 Pan Head M3x12 6 Pan Head M4x12

fasteners, fasteners,
torque 0.6 N-m torque 1.3 N-m
The new Subwoofer attaches to the Base

Casting using six pan head, M3x12 The old Subwoofer P/N 5261127
fasteners and are torqued to 0.6 N-m. WILL NOT fit if a new Subwoofer
The new Base Casting has six holes, was installed.
equally spaced on a 135.2 mm diameter to Replace like for like!
accommodate the new Subwoofer.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-7 Subwoofer replacement (contd)
8-8-7-1 Manpower
8-8-7-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.

4.) Remove the Left Side Cover.
5.) Remove the BEP.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-7-4 Subwoofer removal

1.) Remove the four screws securing the Subwoofer to the chassis.
Figure 8-121 Subwoofer
2.) Remove the P-clamp screw (1) to release the Subwoofer cable to the BEP I/O (J33).
Figure 8-122 P-clamp screw
3.) Release the ground wire cable.

4.) Remove the Subwoofer.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-7-5 Subwoofer installation

1.) Position the Subwoofer at the base of the chassis.
2.) Install the ground wire cable.
3.) Install the four screws securing the Subwoofer to the chassis (Torque to the value specified in
Table 8-219 "New Subwoofer Differences" on page 8-359).
4.) Secure the Subwoofer cable using the P-clamp and screw. Make sure the P-clamp is grounding the
cable.

4.) Turn the volume control on at the Op panel.
5.) Select PW mode and press on the selected Probe to ensure the Subwoofer produces sound.

to the customer.
Table 8-220 Subwoofer replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks passed all required checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-8-8 Casters replacement

See: Section 8-9 "Casters and Brakes replacement" on page 8-364.
8-8-9 Covers replacement

See: Section 8-5 "Replacing Covers and Bumpers" on page 8-50.
8-8-10 Main Cable replacement

See: Section 8-14 "Cables replacement" on page 8-623.
8-8-11 Pedal Mechanism replacement

See: 8-9-5 "Pedal Mechanism replacement" on page 8-370.
8-8-12 Rear Handle replacement

See: 8-5-18 "Rear Handle replacement" on page 8-95.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 8-9
Casters and Brakes replacement
This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts for the Casters and Brakes.

8-9-3 Rear Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-364
8-9-4 Front Casters replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-367
8-9-5 Pedal Mechanism replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-370
8-9-7 Brake Pedal replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-382
8-9-8 Pedal Release replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-383
8-9-9 Pedal Direction Lock replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-383
8-9-3 Rear Casters replacement
8-9-3-1 Manpower
Two people, 15 minutes.
8-9-3-2 Tools
NOTE: This procedure requires an extended HEX key (UNBRAKO / ALLEN key) due to the high torque:
130 Nm {95.9 lbf-ft}.

5.) Remove the Rear Bumper.

8-5-16 "Rear Bumper replacement" on page 8-90.
8 - 364 Section 8-9 - Casters and Brakes replacement

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-3-4 Rear Casters removal

1.) Turn Front Casters so they are pointing forwards.
2.) Activate Direction Lock.
3.) Put the Bevel Edged Board on the floor.
WARNING Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating Operator Panel is locked in its lowest,
parking position.
WARNING Use extreme caution as long as LOGIQ E9 is un-stable, not resting on all four Casters.
4.) Pull the system backwards up the board incline. This will lift the Rear Wheel on the opposite side of
the System from the floor.
5.) Turn the Rear Caster that stands on the Bevel Edged Board in the direction as shown in
Figure 8-123.
Figure 8-123 Pull system backwards up the board incline
6.) Activate the brakes.

7.) The system is now nearly balanced between one Front and one Rear Caster.
8.) Make the LOGIQ E9 rest on both Front Casters and lift the Rear Caster. Put the Wooden Wedge
under the chassis. This will stabilize the LOGIQ E9 with one Rear Caster free from the floor. This
Rear Caster can now be removed.
9.) Unscrew and remove the fixing bolt. Save the bolt for later use.
10.)Remove the Rear Caster.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-3-5 Rear Casters installation

1.) Loose the bolt before putting on the ramp.
2.) Align the Caster, mounting it flat and toward the back.
3.) Position the Caster so it align with the hole for the fixing bolt.
4.) Install the fixing bolt (M12 X 40 mm). Use a 10 mm HEX key, torque: 81 Nm (59.7 lbf-ft).
5.) Remove the Wooden Wedge.
6.) Roll the system off the Bevel Edged Board.
7.) To replace the other Rear Caster, repeat all the steps, starting from 8-9-3-4 "Rear Casters removal"
on page 8-365, but now using the Bevel Edged board and the Wooden Wedge on the other side of
the system.
9.) Install the Rear Bumper.
10.)Install the Side Covers.


to the customer.
Table 8-221 Rear Casters replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
4-3-8-3 Color Mode Checks LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service Manual, Direction
and and

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-4 Front Casters replacement
8-9-4-1 Manpower
8-9-4-2 Tools

5.) Remove the Foot Rest Bumper.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-4-4 Front Casters removal

1.) Turn Front Casters so they are pointing forwards.
2.) Activate Direction Lock.
3.) Put the Bevel Edged Board on the floor.
WARNING Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating Operator Panel is locked in its lowest,
parking position.
WARNING Use extreme caution as long as LOGIQ E9 is un-stable, not resting on all four Casters.
4.) Pull the system backwards up the board incline. This will lift the Rear Wheel on the opposite side of
the System from the floor.
5.) Turn the Rear Caster that stands on the Bevel Edged Board in the direction as shown in
Figure 8-123.
Figure 8-124 Pull system backwards up the board incline
6.) The system is now nearly balanced between one Front and one Rear Caster.
7.) Make the LOGIQ E9 rest on both Rear Casters and lift the Front Caster.
8.) Put the Wooden Wedge under the chassis. This will stabilize the LOGIQ E9 with one Front Caster
free from the floor.
9.) Unscrew and remove the fixing screws (T-45) for the Front Caster that is free from the floor. Save
the screw for later use.
10.)Remove the Caster.
11.)Disconnect the lock by unscrewing the hex nut that holds it to the rod.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-4-5 Front Casters installation

1.) Position the Caster so it align with the fastening screw.
2.) Install the three fixing screws (M8 x 20 mm), torque: 20.5 Nm (15.1 lbf-ft).
3.) Remove the Wooden Wedge.
4.) Roll the system off the Bevel Edged Board.
5.) To replace the other Front Caster, repeat all the steps from 8-9-4-4 "Front Casters removal" on page
8-368, but now using the Bevel Edged board and the Wooden Wedge on the other side of the
system.
6.) Install the Foot Rest Cover.


to the customer.
Table 8-222 Front Casters replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
and and

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-5 Pedal Mechanism replacement
8-9-5-1 Manpower
8-9-5-2 Tools

6.) Remove the Top Cover
7.) Remove the Front Cover

8-9-5-4 Pedal Mechanism removal

1.) Disconnect the rods from the Pedal Mechanism. This is done by pulling the ball joints apart.
2.) Four screws are used to fix the Pedal Mechanism to the chassis. Remove the four top screws (1).
Figure 8-125 Fixing screws
3.) Remove the two bottom screws (2), a plate comes loose with it.
4.) Remove the screw (pivot screw 3) that ties the rod assembly to the pedal mechanism. Use T30
(Torque: 10 Nm {7.4 lbf-ft}). This requires unscrewing the nuts in the back while holding the screw
on the front.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-5-4 Pedal Mechanism removal (contd)
Figure 8-126 Rod Assembly- earlier production
Figure 8-127 Rod Assembly, -5 and -6 Console Models
5.) Tilt and gently pull up the Pedal Mechanism.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-5-5 Pedal Mechanism installation

1.) Position the Pedal Mechanism and install the top four fixing screws (Torque: 24 Nm {17.7 lbf-ft}).
2.) Install the two bottom screws, including the plate.
3.) Install the screw that ties the rod assembly to the pedal mechanism.
4.) Connect the rods by snapping on the ball joints.
5.) Verify that the pedals work as intended:
a.) Push down brake pedal (from free position), release it and verify the pedal to return quickly
up to half position.
b.) Try to move the system back and forward; and verify that the brake pedal stays in brake mode.
c.) Push down direction lock pedal and verify the pedal to return quickly.
d.) Move system and verify Casters stay in direction lock mode.
e.) At push down, observe the Latches to come over pivot T-Shape, and interfere by engaging.
6.) Install the Front Cover.
8.) Install the Foot Rest Bumper.
8-9-5-6 Rod Assembly removal

1.) Remove the screw that ties the rod assembly to the pedal mechanism. This requires unscrewing
the nuts in the back while holding the screw on the front.
2.) Remove the nut on the left and the casters on the right that tie to the rod.
8-9-5-7 Rod Assembly installation

1.) Position the Pedal Mechanism and install the top four fixing screws (Torque: 10 Nm {7.4 lbf-ft}).
2.) Install the two bottom screws.
3.) Install the screw that ties the rod assembly to the pedal mechanism.You need to hand tighten the
nut that attaches the rod to the wheel.
4.) Connect the rods by snapping on the ball joints.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-5-7 Rod Assembly installation (contd)
NOTE: Rod Assembly installation can be updated to the configuration used on Console Models
5205000-5 and 5205000-6 when the pieces (spacer and lock nuts) are available as part of the
Hardware Kit. See: Table 8-224 "Rod Assembly installation - Console Models 5205000-5 and
5205000-6" on page 8-374.
Table 8-223 Rod Assembly installation - earlier production Console Models

1. All the washers must be placed in
the sequence as shown.
Place the screw (1) through the 5

medium size, flat washer,
followed with a large, flat washer,
then a small, flat washer.
The bearing (2) will seat between

the two small, flat washers.
Place the screw, washers and

bearing through the Brake Rod 4
Assembly and the Pedal
Assembly Mechanism. Follow 3
with the other large, flat washer.
A
2
Hand tighten the first 10 mm 5
"locking" nut (3) to the screw,
1
washers and bearing.
Maintain a gap of approximately (8 mm {0.31 inches})

0.9 mm (0.035 inches) between
the mating surface (A) of the
Pedal Assembly Mechanism and
the mating surface of the large,
flat washer.
Install the second 10 mm

"locking" nut (4); DO NOT disturb
the position of the nut (3). Secure
nut (3) with one wrench and
torque the "locking" nuts together,
to 10 Nm (7.4 lbf-ft).
NOTE: An 8 mm wrench is
required when tightening the
pivots to the actuator lever on the
front castors.
Check ALL other nuts (5) on the

Brake Rod Assembly to ensure
ALL are tight.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-5-7 Rod Assembly installation (contd)
Table 8-224 Rod Assembly installation - Console Models 5205000-5 and 5205000-6

1. All the washers must be placed in
the sequence as shown.
5
Place the screw (1) through the
small, flat washer, followed with a
large, flat washer.
The spacer (2) will seat between

the two large, flat washers.
Place the screw, washers and

spacer through the Brake Rod
Assembly and the Pedal 4
Assembly Mechanism. Follow
with the other large, flat washer. 3
2
Tighten the first 10 mm nut (3) to
the screw, washers and spacer. 5 1
Install the 10 mm locking nut (4)
and tighten.
(8 mm {0.31 inches})
NOTE: An 8 mm wrench is
required when tightening the
pivots to the actuator lever on the
front castors.
Check ALL other nuts (5) on the

Brake Rod Assembly to ensure
ALL are tight.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-225 Pedal Mechanism replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
and and

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-6 Pedal Mechanism Cam FRU Replacement
Table 8-226 Cam to Pedal Mechanism installation - Manpower / Time and Tools
Manpower /
Tools
Time
Tools:
Torx driver - T30. Optional Torx L-wrench or Torx socket.
Open end Wrench, 10 mm.
Wrench, Box, 10 mm. Optional deep socket.
Adjustable wrench, 152 mm (6 inches) long (if a longer adjustable
wrench is used, it will contact the floor when trying to turn it.
One person / Two M5 X 0.8 X 16 mm screws (P/N 46-312358P52) from Box 1 of
30 minutes the LOGIQ E9 Hardware Kit (P/N 5310019).
LOCTITE 290 (LOCTITE P/N 29031). Click:
"Material Safety Data Sheet link:" on page 8-376 to access data sheet.
LOCTITE 290 can be obtained from Grainger.
Grainger item number 5E217.
NOTE: An adjustable wrench is deeper than an open end wrench and
will secure the Cam Plate better in this procedure.
Material Safety Data Sheet link:

http://gensuite.ge.com/geh/ehs/msds/msds.cfm?org=americas%20s/s&loc=wauwatosa%20wi,%20am%20s/s&sno=w.137-
337&mno=406592&popup=true

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-6 Pedal Mechanism Cam FRU Replacement (contd)

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the Pedal Mechanism to replace the Pedal Mechanism Cam. To
simplify the installation of the Cam, it is important to understand the location and how the Cam
is positioned in the Pedal Mechanism.
Table 8-227 Cam to Pedal Mechanism installation

1. Power down the LOGIQ E9 and lock the
Rear Casters.
2. Remove the pivot screw that ties the Brake Pivot screw location
Rod Assembly to the pedal mechanism.
Use a T30 Torx driver. Unscrew the screw,
while holding the nuts in the back.
Take note of the sequence of the screw,

washers, spacer and nuts, while removing.
3. The Cam (1) seats above the Cam Cam Roller seated in center of Cam
Roller (2) and needs to be installed as
shown, or the Cam mounting holes (3) will
not be aligned.
The Cam Roller needs to be lowered to

install the Cam. The Torsion Spring (4) and
Cam Roller (2) will hold the Cam in
position, after the Cam is in place. 3
1
2

PROPRIETARY TO GE

4. Open the adjustable wrench to 14 mm Wrench position on Cam Plate
(0.55 inches).
14mm
(0.55 inches)
@ 100%
Slide the wrench on to the Cam Plate (5), 2

behind the Cam Roller (2). Turn the wrench
down slightly to insert the Cam (1).
Apply LOCTITE 290 to the two Cam (1) position on Pedal Mech
M5 X 0.8 X 16 mm screws (6). Torque the
screws: 2.6 Nm (1.9 lbf-ft).
Re-install the pivot screw. See:

step 5 for early production console
models, or
step 6 for R3.x and later models.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

5.. NOTE: For R3.x and later console models, earlier production console models
go to Step 6.
All the washers must be placed in the

sequence as shown.
Place the screw (1) through the medium 5

size washer, followed with a nylon
washer (2), then a small washer (3). 6
The bearing (4) must mate the two small 8

washers. 7
Place the screw, washers and bearing

through the Brake Rod Assembly (5), 4
followed with the second nylon washer. 3 2
The second nylon washer must be A 1
between the Pedal Assembly Mechanism 0.9 mm
(6) and the Brake Rod Assembly (5). (0.035 inches)
Hand tighten the first 10 mm "locking"
nut (7) to the screw, washers and bearing. mounting hardware (not to scale)
Maintain a gap of approximately 0.9 mm A - 0.9 mm

(0.035 inches) (A) between the mating 5 (0.035 inches)
surface of the Pedal Assembly Mechanism
and the mating surface of the nylon 2
6
washer.
3
Install the second 10 mm "locking" nut (8);
DO NOT disturb the position of nut (7)
because you need the 0.9 mmfor the brake
pedal movement. Secure nut (7) with one 1 4 7 8
wrench and torque nut (8): 10 Nm
(7.4 lbf-ft), locking the nuts together.
Go to page 7 of 8 to finish this procedure.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

6.. All the washers must be placed in the R3.x and later console models
sequence as shown.
Place the screw (1) through the small

washer, followed with a nylon washer (2)
and the spacer (3).
5
The spacer (3) must mate with the small
washer and the Pedal Mechanism 4
Assembly (4).
7
Place the screw, washers and spacer 6
through the Brake Rod Assembly (5),
followed with the second nylon washer. 3
The second nylon washer must be 2
between the Pedal Assembly 1
Mechanism (4) and the Brake Rod A
Assembly (5). 0.9 mm
(0.035 inches)
Hand tighten the first 10 mm "locking"
nut (6) to the screw, washersand spacer. If
the "locking" nut has an integral lock mounting hardware (not to scale)
washer, make sure it is installed so it locks
A - 0.9 mm
to nut (7). 5 (0.035 inches)
Maintain a gap of approximately 0.9 mm 2
(0.035 inches) (A) between the mating 4
surface of the Pedal Assembly Mechanism
and the mating surface of the nylon
washer.
Install the second 10 mm "locking" nut (7); 1 3 6 7

DO NOT disturb the position of the nut (6)
because you need the 0.9 mmfor the brake
pedal movement. Secure nut (6) with one
wrench and torque nut (7): 10 Nm
(7.4 lbf-ft), locking the nuts together.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


Perform the following functional tests to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer. Refer to the appropriate sections noted below of the LOGIQ E9 Proprietary Service
Manual, Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7.
Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
Table 8-228 Pedal Mechanism replacement Functional Tests
See:
Section Functional Tests Debrief Script
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
and and

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-9-7 Brake Pedal replacement
8-9-7-1 Manpower
8-9-7-2 Tools
8-9-7-4 Brake Pedal removal

The pedal is fixed to the Pedal Mechanism with four Torx screws from below.
1.) Unscrew and remove the four screws.

2.) Remove the Brake Pedal.
8-9-7-5 Brake Pedal installation

1.) Position the Brake Pedal so you can install the fixing screws.
2.) Install the four fixing screws.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-229 Brake Pedal replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks
and and
8-9-8 Pedal Release replacement

This pedal, placed in the middle, is fixed with three screws. With this in mind, refer to: 8-9-7 "Brake Pedal
replacement" on page 8-382 for replacement instructions.
8-9-9 Pedal Direction Lock replacement

This pedal is fixed to the Pedal Mechanism in the same manner as the Brake Pedal.
Refer to: 8-9-7 "Brake Pedal replacement" on page 8-382 for replacement instructions.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 8-10
Front End Acquisition / Card Cage parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the parts in the Front End / Card Cage.

8-10-3 Front End Card Rack parts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-385
8-10-4 Front End Card Cage Cover replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-388
8-10-5 Front Plane Board / XD BUS replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-392
8-10-6 Relay Board (GRLY or RLY) replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-396
8-10-7 Receiver Board (GRX) replacement - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-399
8-10-8 Transmitter Board (GTX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-402
8-10-9 Digital Receiver Board (DRX) replacement - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-405
8-10-10 GFI Board replacement - GFI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-408
8-10-11 VPD - GFI and MRX Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-412
8-10-12 MRX Board replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-420
8-10-13 Power Distribution (PD) Board replacement - MRX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-423
8-10-14 Backplane replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-426
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL
CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS.
ALWAYS USE NON-CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT OF ESD SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL
FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED BEFORE MAKING
CONTACT.
IF THE SHEAR WAVE OPTION IS PRESENT, MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE
CAPACITOR PACK ARE OFF BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE CAPACITOR PACK
CABLES.
8 - 384 Section 8-10 - Front End Acquisition / Card Cage parts replacement
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-3 Front End Card Rack parts overview

Table 8-230 lists positions of the cards in a GFI configuration. Position #1 is nearest the Probe
connectors (front of unit).
Figure 8-128 Front end card rack - GFI Configuration
UPPER FRONT
PLANE BOARD
LOWER FRONT
PLANE BOARD

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-3 Front End Card Rack parts overview (contd)
Table 8-230 Card Cage Card Positions - GFI Configuration
CARD TOTAL NUMBER OF

POSITION ABBREVATION CARD NAME CARDS PER SYSTEM
1. GRLY Relay Board 1
2. GRX64 Analog Receiver Board 1
3. GRX128 Analog Receiver Board 1
4. GTX Transmitter Board
5. GTX Transmitter Board 3
7. DRX Digital Receiver Board
8. DRX Digital Receiver Board 3
9. DRX Digital Receiver Board
10. GFI Global Front End Interface 1
The Front Plane Boards connect to the back of the Relay Board,
Front Plane / XD
N/A The Analog Receiver Boards and the Transmitter Board. These 2
BUS
boards are interchangeable.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-3 Front End Card Rack parts overview (contd)

Table 8-231 lists positions of the cards in an MRX configuration. Position #1 is nearest the Probe
connectors (front of unit).
Figure 8-129 Front end card rack - MRX
Quiet Room
Ultra-Quiet Room
David
David
Tx 128 C
David
/ R ha
David David
x A nn
David
nal el
David
og
Bu
s
David
David
David
Front Planes
Nathan
2 each 128 channel
Tx 64 Channel
David
Nathan
Tx 64 Channel
David
Nathan
Tx 64 Channel
David
David
Nathan
64 Channel
David
Nathan
Board Key
4-D
David
Rx 64 Channels
64 Channel
(A-A F ilter, A/D)
Channels
David
(A-A F ilter, A/D)
Nathan
Rx 64 Channels
GRLY
ilter, A/D)
XDIF
Nathan
64 Channels
Tx 128 C
(A-A Filter, A/D)

David
Nathan
/R h
MRX
RF Amp
David
x A ann
Filter,
Nathan
nal el
David
TxRx64
Tx
og
Tx Board Bu
David
SCAN
s
-A F
Nathan
(A-A
Front Plane
Nathan
n
t io
Rx
Nathan
PD ib u
Nathan
tr
Backplane Dis C
er
EQ
w /D
Po DC
BMP
Shield
GRLY
MRX
192 Channels Shield
GTX Board Shield
PD Board Backplane
Table 8-231 Card Cage Card Positions - MRX
CARD TOTAL NUMBER OF

POSITION ABBREVATION CARD NAME CARDS PER SYSTEM
1. GRLY Relay Board 1
2. MRX Multi-receiver Board 1
8. GTX Transmitter Board 3
10. PD Power Distribution 1
The Front Plane Boards connect to the back of the Relay Board,
Front Plane / XD
N/A the Analog Receiver Boards and the Transmitter Board. These 2
BUS
boards are interchangeable.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-4 Front End Card Cage Cover replacement
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
15 minutes

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet, all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove the Right Side Cover.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-4-1 Front End Card Cage Cover removal
NOTE: If the V Nav Inside option is installed, the Hi-Pass connection from the GRLY Board to the
DriveBay2+ must be disconnected.
Table 8-234 Front End Card Cage Cover removal

1. Remove the PCIe express cable cover by PCIe express cable cover - GFI Configuration
removing the M4x 8 mm screw. GFI
Configuration only. MRX does not use this
cover.
Disconnect the PCIe express cable from
GFI board. GFI Configuration only. MRX
does not use this cable.
Hi-Pass connection - V Nav Inside option

If the V Nav Inside option is installed,
remove the Hi-Pass connection cable
cover by removing the M4x 8 mm screw.
Disconnect the Hi-Pass cable from GRLY
Board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-234 Front End Card Cage Cover removal

1. Unscrew the eight fixing screws and
remove the Card Cage Cover. Watch for
the bumper corner during cover removal
and installation.
8-10-4-2 Card Cage Cover installation
Table 8-235 Front End Card Cage Cover installation
1. Install the Card Cage Cover and fasten it with the eight fixing screws.
2. Connect the PCIe cable to the front of the GFI board, or the V Nav Inside Cable to the GRLY
Board. Re-install cover(s) for Card Cage connector(s).
3. Remove the screw from the clamp to

secure the clamp the shielded cable to the
Card Cage Cover.
4. Re-install the Right Side Cover.
5. Perform Functional Checks. See: 8-10-4-3 "Functional Checks" on page 8-391.
PROPRIETARY TO GE

to the customer.
507
Table 8-236 Front End Card Cage Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-6 B-Mode Checks Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Leakage
4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all
4-3-11 Basic Measurements required checks and is ready for use.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-5 Front Plane Board / XD BUS replacement
8-10-5-1 Manpower
8-10-5-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.
CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (TO THE RIGHT OF THE
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED OFF. AVOID ALL CONTACT WITH
ELECTRICAL CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS. ALWAYS USE NON-
CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF ESD
SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL FOR STORING ENERGY MUST
BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED BEFORE MAKING CONTACT.
IF THE SHEAR WAVE OPTION IS PRESENT, MAKE SURE THE LEDS ONTHE CAPACITOR PACK
ARE OFF BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE CAPACITOR PACK CABLES.
WARNING Prior to removing the Card Rack Boards, the LEDs on the end of each board should be
unlit, to indicate boards are NOT powered.
2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
4.) Disconnect the PCIe cable to the front of the GFI board. GFI Configuration only. MRX does not use
this cable.
5.) Unscrew the Card Cage Cover fixing screws and remove the cover.
PROPRIETARY TO GE


8-10-4 "Front End Card Cage Cover replacement" on page 8-388.
8-10-5-4 Front Plane Boards removal
Figure 8-130 Front Plane Boards
NOTE: Label the Front Planes prior to removal to reflect which is the upper and which is the lower.
Install the Front Planes back in the original locations.:
NOTICE Read through the removal and installation steps completely before performing. Perform the steps
carefully to avoid damage to the Front Plane Board connectors.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-5-4 Front Plane Boards removal (contd)

1.) Engage the top and bottom ejector on the Relay (GRLY) Board as if you were going to remove the
Relay board. Gently slide the board out approximately 1/2 to 1 inch.
2.) Engage the top and bottom ejector on the farthest right GTX Board as if you were going to remove
the board. Gently slide the board out approximately 1/2 to 1 inch.
Steps 1 - 2 help unseat the Front Plane boards from the other boards.
3.) Repeat Steps 1 - 2 until the Front Plane Boards connectors disengage from the other boards.
4.) Holding the upper and lower edges of the board with both hands, rock the upper Front Plane Board
evenly away from the GRLY and GTX boards. Be careful not to bend the connector pins.
5.) Repeat Step 4 for the other Front Plane Board.
NOTE: Even if only one Front Plane Board is replaced, remove both so that the Relay Board and GTX
Board are returned to the proper position before installing the Front Plane Board.
8-10-5-5 Front Plane Boards installation

1.) Install the GRLY and GTX boards.
2.) Holding the upper and lower edges of the board with both hands, carefully install the lower Front
Plane Board. Ensure that you do not bend any of the connector pins during the installation.
3.) Be sure to apply even pressure across the board and to apply gentle, even pressure at the four
corners of the Front Plane Board to make full contact with the other boards.
4.) Repeat Steps 2 - 3 for the other Front Plane Board.
5.) Install the Card Cage Cover and fasten it with its fixing screws.
6.) Connect the PCIe cable to the front of the GFI board. GFI Configuration only. MRX does not use
this cable.
7.) Install the Right Side Cover.
8.) Record VPD information for the Front End Board. For information on updating VPD, see:
8-4-8-3 "Verify and Update Vital Product Data" on page 8-31.
PROPRIETARY TO GE

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after these parts replacement.

to the customer.
Table 8-237 Front Plane Board / XD BUS replacement Functional Checks
See:
Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Leakage
4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks Current measured at (record the value) and
required checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-6 Relay Board (GRLY or RLY) replacement
8-10-6-1 Manpower
8-10-6-2 Tools
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and Disconnect all Probes and External I/O
Cabling.
this cable.
5.) Unscrew the Card Rack Cover fixing screws and remove the cover.
6.) Carefully remove the two Front Plane Boards.
PROPRIETARY TO GE


8-10-5 "Front Plane Board / XD BUS replacement" on page 8-392.
8-10-6-4 Relay Board removal
Figure 8-131 Relay Board Location
1.) Pull out the Relay Board.

2.) Place it on an ESD safe place.
8-10-6-5 Relay Board installation

1.) Carefully align the Relay Board with the rails and push it in until it is seated in the Backplane
connectors.
2.) Carefully install the two Front Plane Boards.
3.) Install the Card Rack Cover and fasten it with the fixing screws.
this cable.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-238 Relay Board (GRLY or RLY) replacement Functional Checks
See:
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-7 Receiver Board (GRX) replacement - GFI Configuration
8-10-7-1 Manpower
8-10-7-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.
5.) Disconnect the PCIe cable to the front of the GFI board.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


8-10-7-4 GRX Board removal
Figure 8-132 GRX Board Locations
1.) Pull out the GRX Board.

8-10-7-5 GRX Board installation
NOTE: The 128 channel board (GRX128) is positioned in the right hand position (nearest the GFI), the
64 channel board (GRX64) is positioned in the left hand position.
1.) Carefully align the GRX Board with the rails and push it in until it is seated in the Backplane
connectors.
4.) Connect the PCIe cable to the front of the GFI board.
PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-239 Receiver Board (GRX) replacement Functional Checks
See:

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-8 Transmitter Board (GTX) replacement
8-10-8-1 Manpower
8-10-8-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
this cable.
PROPRIETARY TO GE

8-10-8-4 GTX Board removal
Figure 8-133 GTX Board Locations
NOTE: Label the GTX Boards prior to removal to reflect which slot each board was removed from, if
replacing one or two boards. Install the boards back in the original locations.
GTX "numbers" use 1, 2, 3 and 4 nomenclature in VPD, but uses 0 (zero), 1, 2 and 3 in diagnostics. In
this Service Note, 1, 2, 3 and 4 nomenclature are used to identify board, based on location in the Card
Rack.
1.) Pull out the GTX Board.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-8-5 GTX Board installation

1.) Carefully align the GTX Board with the rails and push it in until it is seated in the Backplane
connectors.
3.) Install the Card Cage Cover fasten it with the fixing screws.
this cable.


to the customer.
Table 8-240 Transmitter Board (GTX) replacement Functional Checks
See:
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-9 Digital Receiver Board (DRX) replacement - GFI Configuration
8-10-9-1 Manpower
8-10-9-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


8-10-9-4 DRX Board removal
Figure 8-134 DRX Board Locations
1.) Pull out the DRX Board.

8-10-9-5 DRX Board installation

1.) Carefully align the DRX Board with the rails and push it in until it is seated in the Backplane
connectors.
2.) Install the Card Cage Cover fasten it with the fixing screws.
3.) Connect the PCIe cable to the front of the GFI board.
PROPRIETARY TO GE

to the customer.
Table 8-241 Digital Receiver Board (DRX) replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-3-8 System CFM and PWD Checks Direction 5180483-100, Rev. 7. Leakage
4-3-11 Basic Measurements meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all
6-6-2-1 DC Calibration Procedure required checks and is ready for use.


PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-10 GFI Board replacement - GFI Configuration
8-10-10-1 Manpower
8-10-10-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.
EQUIPMENT.
CONTACT.
6.) Unscrew the Card Cage Cover fixing and remove the cover.
PROPRIETARY TO GE


Section 5 Vital Product Data.
8-10-10-4 GFI Board removal
Figure 8-135 GFI Board Location

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-10-4 GFI Board removal (contd)

1.) Disconnect the PCIe express cable from the GFI board visible at the front of the Card Rack Cover.
Figure 8-136 Disconnect PCIe express cable from GFI board
3.) Remove the Card Rack Cover.
4.) Pull out the GFI Board.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-10-5 GFI Board installation - GFI Configuration

1.) Carefully align the GFI Board with the rails and push it in until it is seated in the Backplane
connectors.
2.) Install the Card Cage Cover and fasten it with the fixing screws.
3.) Connect the PCIe express cable to the GFI board visible at the front of the Card Rack Cover.


to the customer.
Table 8-242 GFI Board replacement Functional Checks
See:

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-11 VPD - GFI and MRX Configuration

NOTE: VPD data is essentially the same for GFI or MRX configuration systems; only the VPD Data is
displayed differently. (MRX is displayed in the device grid, where GFI was displayed and PD is
displayed in the device grid, where DRX was displayed.)
Before replacing the GFI or a MRX board you need to save a template containing the Extra Devices
VPD data. These are the devices that do not carry their own VPD data, therefore their VPD is stored in
the GFI or MRX board. The following devices are considered extra devices:
LCD Monitor (LCDMON)

4D Motor controller (4DMC)
BEP w/Extended Power Shutdown (BEP_EPS)
Console (FRAME). This field carries the Console part number and Console serial number
Front Plane Upper (FPLNUPR)
Front Plane Lower (FPLNLWR)
LCD Arm (LCDARM)
Application Software (APPSW)
Customer ghost (CSTGHST)
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-11 VPD - GFI and MRX Configuration (contd)

Below, find content typically found in the VPD file:
Figure 8-137 Typical VPD file example
A - VPD Data
B - Extra Device VPD Data, EDV01, EDV02, etc.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-11-1 Before Replacing a Board

Before replacing the board:
1.) If the application is running, insert the Service Dongle.

2.) Press the ON/OFF button to bring up the exit dialog, and click exit.
3.) Double-click the VPD Editor icon on the desktop.
4.) Select the GFI or MRX in the device grid if it was not already selected. The screen should resemble
the screen shown in Figure 8-138 or Figure 8-139.
Figure 8-138 VPD Data - GFI Configuration
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-11-1 Before Replacing a Board (contd)
Figure 8-139 VPD Data - MRX Configuration
5.) Click the Save template button. An open file dialog will appear
6.) Save as GFI Extra or MRX Extra (You can use any name) under the Userdefs folder
(D:\scanner\target\resources\userdefs). Take note of the name you use for the file.
7.) In the windows desktop, click on My computer and open the file you just created using Notepad
8.) Delete the lines between the line:
<Vpd productAbbrev="GFI"> or <Vpd productAbbrev="MRX"> (Do not delete this line.)
and
<Field name="EXCT">10</Field>. (Do not delete this line.)
9.) EXCT is the start line of the Extra devices. The number 10 in this example, indicates the number of
extra devices VPD data.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-11-1 Before Replacing a Board (contd)
Figure 8-140 Extra VPD: WordPad - DELETE Highlighted (GFI Configuration shown)
10.)Then Click Save.

11.)Shut the system down and replace the GFI or MRX board.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-11-2 After Replacing a Board

1.) Reboot the system into Windows desktop again and double-click the VPD Editor icon on the
desktop.
2.) Select the GFI or MRX in the device grid if it was not already selected.
3.) Click on Load Template button.
Figure 8-141 Load VPD Template

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-11-2 After Replacing a Board (contd)

4.) Select the file you saved in the steps above (GFI Extra, MRX Extra or the name you entered) in the
list and click open.
5.) Click the write dirty fields button. The wait cursor (hourglass) may come up while the data is written
to the component. When the data is written to the component, it will be re-read and the grid will
reflect the new values as in the figure below:
Figure 8-142 Grid, with New Values (GFI Configuration shown)
6.) Verify extra devices VPD. Locate the Frame Serial number field to make sure the serial number
matches the system you are working on.
7.) Click on Check System Serial. This will check that all the boards will be matching the serial number
of the Frame.
8.) Click the close button (small x) in the upper right corner to exit.
9.) Reboot the system and proceed to Functional Checks.
See: 8-10-10-3 "Preparations" on page 8-408.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-11-3 If the System is NOT Functional to Access the Windows Desktop BEFORE Replacing the Board
1.) After installing the new board. Reboot the system into Windows and access VPD editor.
2.) Click on the GFI or MRX field and locate the FRAME serial number field. (Typically EBC01 field.)
3.) Enter the Serial number of the console in the Frame field. (Example 93976US9)
4.) Click the write dirty fields button.
5.) Click on Check System Serial.
6.) The extra device data will be lost, but this should not prevent the system from working properly. You
can request the data from Manufacturing and enter it later.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-12 MRX Board replacement

Before replacing the MRX board you need to save a template containing the Extra Devices VPD data.
These are the devices that do not carry their own VPD data, therefore their VPD is stored in the MRX
board. See: 8-10-11 "VPD - GFI and MRX Configuration" on page 8-412.
8-10-12-1 Manpower
8-10-12-2 Tools

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER
THAN 30 VOLTS:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST
POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION. THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON/OFF BUTTON WILL TURN
Signed Date
OFF.
5. DISCONNECT THE EPS (EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN) BATTERY AT J3, OR THE BATTERY
FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP. THIS SHOULD BE DONE
WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING
PARTS.
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and Probes and External I/O Cabling.
PROPRIETARY TO GE


8-10-12-4 MRX Board removal
Figure 8-143 MRX Board Location
1.) Pull out the MRX Board.

8-10-12-5 MRX Board installation

1.) Carefully align the MRX Board with the rails and push it in until it is seated in the Backplane
connectors.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-243 MRX Board replacement Functional Checks
See:
6-6-2-1 DC Calibration Procedure required checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-13 Power Distribution (PD) Board replacement - MRX
8-10-13-1 Manpower
8-10-13-2 Tools

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.

PROPRIETARY TO GE


8-10-13-4 PD Board removal
Figure 8-144 PD Board Location
1.) Pull out the PD Board.

8-10-13-5 PD Board installation

1.) Carefully align the PD Board with the rails and push it in until it is seated in the Backplane
connectors.
2.) Install the Card Cage Cover and fasten it with the fixing screws.
PROPRIETARY TO GE

to the customer.
Table 8-244 PD replacement Functional Checks
See:

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-14 Backplane replacement
8-10-14-1 Manpower
CAUTION The Card Rack, with all boards installed, weighs in excess of 16 kg (35 lbs).
You must remove the Card Rack as part of the Backplane replacement procedure.
You must remove all boards before removing the Card Rack from the chassis.
8-10-14-2 Tools
WARNING BEWARE OF POSSIBLE SHARP EDGES ON ALL MECHANICAL PARTS. IF SHARP

EDGES ARE ENCOUNTERED, THE APPROPRIATE PPE SHOULD BE USED TO
REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY.

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WILL TURN OFF.
CHANGING PARTS.
POWER CONNECTOR).
EQUIPMENT.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
Prior to shut down the unit, if possible, record the VPD data from the back plane to transfer to new board.
See: 8-10-14-6 "LOGIQ E9 Backplane VPD Data Editing Instructions" on page 8-436.

7.) Remove the Front Cover.
9.) Remove the Main Power Supply.
10.)Disconnect the DVD drive cables.
11.)Disconnect the V Nav (Bay of Birds) cables, if installed.
12.)Open the BEP cover and disconnect the BEP to Backplane cable from J3 on a GFI Configuration
or J2 (left) on a MRX Configuration.
Figure 8-145 BEP Cable to Backplane J3 of GFI Configuration (view inside the BEP)

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Figure 8-146 BEP Cable to Backplane, J2 (left) of MRX Configuration (view inside the BEP)
PROPRIETARY TO GE

13.)Remove the Printer.
14.)Remove the Printer Tray or the Shear Wave Capacitor Pack if Shear Wave option is installed.
15.)Remove the Card Rack Front Cover.
16.)Remove the Fan Assembly.
CAUTION The Card Rack, with all boards installed, weighs in excess of 16 kg (35 lbs).
You must remove the Card Rack as part of the Backplane replacement procedure.
You must remove all boards before removing the Card Rack from the chassis.
17.)Remove the Front Plane Boards, and the remaining boards (GRLY, GRX, GTX, DRX, GFI, MRX or
PD) and place on a safe ESD location.

8-8-6 "Fan Assembly replacement" on page 8-353.
8-10-6 "Relay Board (GRLY or RLY) replacement" on page 8-396.
8-10-7 "Receiver Board (GRX) replacement - GFI Configuration" on page 8-399.
8-10-8 "Transmitter Board (GTX) replacement" on page 8-402.
8-10-9 "Digital Receiver Board (DRX) replacement - GFI Configuration" on page 8-405.
8-10-10 "GFI Board replacement - GFI Configuration" on page 8-408.
8-10-12 "MRX Board replacement" on page 8-420.
8-10-13 "Power Distribution (PD) Board replacement - MRX" on page 8-423.
8-12-3 "Main Power Supply replacement" on page 8-564.
8-13-4 "DVD R/W drive replacement" on page 8-595.
8-13-7 "V Nav module replacement" on page 8-601.
8-13-8 "Digital Graphic Printer replacement" on page 8-604
8-13-9 "Printer Tray replacement" on page 8-606.
8-13-10 "Printer Bracket replacement" on page 8-609.
8-13-11 "Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement" on page 8-617, if present.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-14-4 Backplane removal
NOTICE Before removing the Card Rack from the chassis:

The bottom edge of the Backplane protrudes below the base of the Card Rack, where it connects to the
Fan Assembly.
After removing the Card Rack from the chassis, place the entire Card Rack on raised supports / lifts /
2 inch (50.8 mm) blocks to avoid damaging the Backplane.
If you remove the Card Rack with the Backplane in place, and place the Card Rack on a flat surface,
the weight of the entire Card Rack rests on that protruding part of the Backplane and could cause
damage to the board.
1.) Remove the three #5 HEX key screws securing the Card Rack to the rear of the chassis. Use a
straight shaft 5 mm Hex socket.
Figure 8-147 Screw placement for Card Rack, rear of console, with Main PS removed
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-14-4 Backplane removal (contd)

2.) Remove the four #5 HEX key screws securing the Card Rack to the front of the chassis.
NOTE: Be careful with the cables.
Figure 8-148 Screw placement for Card Rack, front of console
3.) Slide the entire Card Rack out of the chassis.

4.) Place the Card Rack on supports that will keep the bottom of the Backplane above the flat surface
where the Card Rack will rest (Figure 8-149).
5.) Remove the two screws securing the CW bracket (Figure 8-149).
Figure 8-149 CW bracket on Card Rack back cover (BEP side) and supports under Card Rack

PROPRIETARY TO GE

6.) Remove the six screws securing the Card Rack back cover.
Figure 8-150 Screw placement, Card Rack back cover (back cover removed) - Backplane identified below
Card Rack
PROPRIETARY TO GE

7.) Remove the 21 screws securing the Backplane.
Figure 8-151 Screw placement, Backplane
8.) Reach into the Probe connector opening with your right index finger, and gently push the top right
corner of the Backplane toward you until the CW connector on the right side clears the Card Rack.
Figure 8-152 Freeing the Backplane, CW connector edge out first (right side of board)

PROPRIETARY TO GE

9.) Remove the Backplane, making sure the Main Power Supply connectors on the left side of the
Backplane clear the Card Rack.
Figure 8-153 Freeing the Backplane, Main Power Supply connector side last (left side of board)
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-14-5 Front End Card Rack installation
NOTE: When replacing the Backplane Board, the replacement board may not have the correct VPD
data entered. Some Backplanes have been shipped from supplier with no VPD data or
incorrect/incomplete data causing hardware errors after the board is installed.
Before replacing the board, write down the part number and serial number of the new board to be
installed. This information will be used to check or correct the VPD file. If there is no VPD data or
incorrect/incomplete data, see
8-10-14-6 "LOGIQ E9 Backplane VPD Data Editing Instructions" on page 8-436.
1.) Install the Backplane, inserting the Main Power Supply connectors (left side) first.
2.) Install the 21 screws to secure the Backplane.
3.) Install the six screws to secure the Card Rack back cover (hand tighten).
4.) Install the two screws to secure the CW bracket (Torque: 3 Nm {2.2 lbf-ft}).
5.) Place the entire Card Rack onto the chassis.
NOTE: Be careful with the cables.
6.) Install the four #5 HEX key screws to secure the Card Rack at the front of the console
7.) Install the three #5 HEX key screws to secure the Card Rack at the back of the console
8.) Install the boards.
9.) Install the Fan Tray Assembly below the Card Rack.
10.)Install the Card Rack Front Cover.
11.)Install the Printer Tray or the Shear Wave Capacitor Pack.
12.)Install the Printer.
13.)Install the Card Rack Cover and fasten it with the fixing screws.
14.)Reconnect the DVD drive and V Nav / Bay of Birds cables.
15.)Reconnect the PCIe (HDMI) express cable to the GFI board. GFI Configuration only. MRX does not
use this cable.
Be sure to route the cable behind the Main Power Supply and under the fang.
16.)Install the Main Power Supply.

17.)Reconnect the internal BEP cable to the Backplane.
NOTE: If you do not reconnect the internal BEP cable to the Backplane, the system will power up but
will not scan.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-14-5 Front End Card Rack installation (contd)

18.)Install the BEP cover.
19.)Reconnect any remaining cables.
20.)Install the Rear Cover.
21.)Install the Front Cover.
22.)Install the Top Cover.
23.)Install the Side Covers.
24.)Install the Foot Rest Bumper.
25.)Update VPD data, see:
8-10-14-6 "LOGIQ E9 Backplane VPD Data Editing Instructions" on page 8-436
8-10-14-6 LOGIQ E9 Backplane VPD Data Editing Instructions

1.) If the application is running, install the Service Dongle into a USB port.
2.) Press the ON/OFF Button to bring up the Exit dialog, and click Exit. The Maintenance Access dialog
will display.
3.) Leave the Username field empty and type the current GE Service Password in the Password field
and press Enter or click on OK.
NOTE: After you have pressed Enter or clicked OK, the Start Application dialog will be displayed on
screen, be ready to click Maintenance, before the Time Bar is full, or the application software
will start. The Maintenance dialog will display.
4.) Select Exit to Windows. This will display the Windows Desktop on the screen.
5.) Double-click on the "VpdEdit" (VPD Editor) icon on the desktop.
6.) Select the BP in the device grid if it was not already selected.
7.) Click the Save template button. An open file dialog will appear.
8.) Save as BPnew (any unique name can be used) on a USB flash drive. You can use the Windows
desktop temporarily but delete the file once the procedure is done under the Userdefs folder.
(D:\scanner\target\resources\userdefs). Write down the name you use for the file.
9.) On the Windows desktop, click on My Computer and open the file you just created using Notepad.
PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-14-6 LOGIQ E9 Backplane VPD Data Editing Instructions (contd)
10.)Edit the mandatory fields as displayed below, the rest of the fields can be left as is or empty.
<Vpd productAbbrev="BP">
<Field name="VRF">1</Field> - MANDATORY field - (value should be 1)
<Field name="PLE">nor</Field> - MANDATORY field - (value should be nor for GA200685 or mke for the 5161814-2 or
5393910)
<Field name="PRD">BP</Field> - MANDATORY field - (value should be BP)
<Field name="FNRV">3A</Field> - MANDATORY field - (value should be 3A)
<Field name="SPFC">Ichiro</Field> - MANDATORY field - (value should be Ichiro)
<Field name="P/N">GA200685</Field> - recommended field - (value should be actual P/N of the new board {GA200685 or
5161814-2, or 5393910})
<Field name="BCSN">24224</Field> - recommended field - (value should be actual serial number of the board)
<Field name="SN">24224</Field> - recommended field - (value should be actual serial number of the board)
<Field name="GEML">mke</Field> - recommended field - (value should be mke)
<Field name="DMFG">18.09.10</Field>
<Field name="ASRV">1</Field>
<Field name="PROT">0</Field> - MANDATORY field - (value should be 0 {this is the prototype flag})
<Field name="MDN1">0</Field>
<Field name="POSA"></Field>
<Field name="SLWO">0</Field>
<Field name="MLOC">HRT1</Field>
<Field name="MP/N">0</Field>
<Field name="MPRV">0</Field>
<Field name="NRTS">0</Field>
<Field name="CRC1">0x7F15</Field>
<Field name="SSN">12345US6</Field> - recommended field - (value should be the actual serial number of the
console model)
<Field name="RSVD">0</Field>
<Field name="POH">0</Field>
<Field name="DIN">invalid date</Field>
<Field name="RSCT">0</Field>
<Field name="DGC1">invalid</Field>
<Field name="REA1">invalid</Field>
<Field name="FDT1">invalid date</Field>
<Field name="SWVR"></Field>
<Field name="CRC2">0x6F96</Field>
<Field name="DTL">221</Field>
</Vpd>

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-10-14-6 LOGIQ E9 Backplane VPD Data Editing Instructions (contd)
11.)Click Save.
12.)Shut the system down and replace the Backplane Board.
13.)Reboot the system into Windows desktop again and double click the VPD Editor icon on the
Desktop.
14.)Select the Backplane in the device grid if it was not already selected. If the system booted up without
errors, continue to Step 18.
15.)If the VPD data is incorrect/incomplete, or causing Hardware errors, at boot up, click on Load
Template button.
WARNING DO NOT MIX TEMPLATES. DO NOT load any other board template in to the BP or vice versa.
Every board has a VPD template particular to that board, mixing them will corrupt the VPD data.
16.)Select the file you saved in the steps above (BPnew or the name you entered) in the list and click
open.
17.)Click the write dirty fields button. The wait cursor (hourglass) may come up while the data is written
to the component. When the data is written to the component, it will be re-read and the grid will
reflect the new values.
18.)Locate the Frame Serial number field to make sure the serial number matches the system you are
working on.
19.)Verify that the Prototype flag is set to 0 (zero) value.
20.)Click on Check System Serial. This will check that all the boards will be matching the serial number
of the Frame.
21.)Click the close button (small x) in the upper right corner to exit.
22.)Reboot the system and proceed to Section 8-10-14-7 "Calibration and adjustments" on page 8-439.
If your system is not allowing you to save the template from the old board, because it does not boot up,
once you have replaced the Backplane Board:
- boot up to Windows,
- follow the same steps, Step 1 through Step 11, using the template from the new board as a
starting point,
- perform the edits on that template and continue with Steps 14 through Step 22.
PROPRIETARY TO GE


to the customer.
Table 8-245 Backplane replacement Functional Checks
See:
10-7-4 Grounding continuity required checks and is ready for use.

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Section 8-11
BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the BEP itself and the service parts inside the BEP.

8-11-3 BEP (Back End Processor) parts overview - R3 and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-441
8-11-4 BEP6.x parts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-447
8-11-5 BEP6 Cable Connectors (BEP Door Label) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-451
8-11-6 BEP replacement - R3.x and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-452
8-11-7 BEP replacement - R4.x and later. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-460
8-11-8 BEP Power Supply - R3.x and earlier replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-471
8-11-9 BEP PB (PowerBoard) replacement - R4.x and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-475
8-11-10 BEP I/O Board Assembly replacement - BEP5.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-482
8-11-11 BEP Side I/O Board Assembly replacement - BEP6.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-486
8-11-12 BEP HDD (Hard Disk Drive) replacement - BEP5.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-491
8-11-13 BEP HDD replacement - BEP6.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-495
8-11-14 BEP Front Module replacement - BEP5.x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-500
8-11-15 BEP Front Module replacement - BEP6.x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-504
8-11-16 BEP Battery Pack replacement - BEP5.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-509
8-11-17 BEP Battery Pack replacement - BEP6.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-513
8-11-18 BEP EPS (Extended Power Shutdown) replacement - BEP5.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-518
8-11-19 BEP CB (ChargeBoard) replacement - BEP6.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-521
8-11-20 DVR (Digital Video Recorder) replacement - BEP5.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-526
8-11-21 DVR replacement - BEP6.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-530
8-11-22 S-Video Card replacement - BEP6.x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-538
8-11-23 WLAN replacement - BEP6.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-543
8-11-24 BEP Fan replacement - BEP5.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-552
8-11-25 BEP Fan replacement - BEP6.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-556
8 - 440 Section 8-11 - BEP (Back End Processor) parts replacement

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-11-3 BEP (Back End Processor) parts overview - R3 and earlier
Figure 8-154 BEP5.x Assembly - Item 1, see Table 8-246 for descriptions
Table 8-246 BEP5.x for LOGIQ E9 1 of 5 (not all parts listed are identified in
Figure 8-154 on page 8-441
ITEM PART NAME ILLUSTRATION QTY

1.
BEP Assembly 1

PROPRIETARY TO GE
Table 8-246 BEP5.x for LOGIQ E9 (Continued)2 of 5 (not all parts listed are identified in

1.
Power Supply 1
2.
Front Module 1
3.
Hard Disk Drive Bracket 1
4.
Hard Disk Drive 1
5.
C370 R398 P6
C66
DS9 DS11 TP162 L36

TP163 R397 C307 R399
L41
C102
C324 R396 R395 R472

R470 C500
R255 R351 C236
R245
R246
C372 R473 C313 R474 C371 J18 R100 J9 R479

S4
C248
C99 R252
C321 R403
C57
C18
C67 R327 U76

R500C242 R256 R341
C374
R131
C316
U69 D6 D5 D7
L40
Y11
C373
C299 R355 J23
R62
R63
C308 R402 U19 U44

C296 C298 C302
C64
C139
R325
C239
R354 C301
C368 R337 C441

R478 C330 C326 C328
C241
C240
R409 R407
R411 R408
C293
U32 U20
R486 C329 C325 C327
C430
C264
D11
R475 C309 R476 R471

C69
R392 R47 R462 R389 L31

RN30 RN31
RN20 RN19
U64
RN5
RN6
C442
C369 U45
R391
C294
R505
C306 R394 R250 R251 R25

R25 R253 R254
C65
R405
R502
R503
R504
R501
C439
C367
RN27
RN26
L52
R393 C438
C350 R377
R345
R390
C292 R249
R379
R380 R378
C519 R527
C375
C305
C431
R222
C265
R224
L34
U66 C246 C244 R314 R315

C166
C237
U47
C238
C291
C331
C80
C81
U1
C332
D16
R318
U21
R467
J22 Y7 U74
C245
C311
C243
C320 C365 C445

C310
L30 C295
L44 R485
R248 U46 R247 R79 R80 C446

C319
U68 R412 R404

R477 U42 R313 R267
L29
R76
C249
R188
C161
U43
C463C449C267 C266
C462C450 C433 C432
Q13
Q12
R84 DS50
R448
R449
R456
R457
R340
R488
R450
R451
R330 RN17 RN1

RN10 RN1
RN12 RN11 RN13
L33
C275
C317 U80 R1 R95 R94 R92 R91 R90 R89 C71C39

R352
R221
R220
R205
R206
R182
R181
R240 R243
U49
R41
R52
R51
R32
R33
U78 R30 Q50 R520

C379 R328 R346
DS51
C297
R2
R525
R526
C357
C300
C79 C91 R154 C444

C461C447
C460C448
R523
R270
R301
R289
R290
R296
R297
R300
R187
R219
RN7
R153
C234 C205
C443
C76
L12 L16
R135 R160 C119 C133
C356
R338 R465 L70 Q51
R521 R155 J25
Y8 DS52
R241
R242
C85 R348 R157 C518

R178 R159 C73 C170 R336 R339 R369 U75
C77
C510C511
C51 C511
C144
R459 R461 R460 R370 R171
R524
C68
R115 R117
R11
L27
L23 R239
RN2
C502 R522
R93 J1
C512 C513 C514
R136
R189
R196 R19
R19 R198 R199 R87 R81 R417
R148
L42
C172
C141
R226 R225 R88 R82 R418

U28 R83 R320
R32 R321R150
R332
C117
L24 C82 R343 R144 R419

R231 R234 R236 C206 R217
C280
R401 R458 R406
RN8
DS13 DS12 R420
DVR Card (option)

C72 U79 R228 R227
R230 R263 R235 R233
U50
1
C517
C506
R71
R7 R72
R177
R200
R142
L28 C228
R74 C74 C70 R112 R158

L19
C171 C121 C95
R331
C63
U7 U13
U67
RN9
R143
R73 C235
C84
Y9
C164 C75
L14
C118
R342
C62
R64
C163
J21
RN3
C507 C508
C50
L18
R232 C146 R264 R244 R322 R201

C61 RN34
R257
R274
R261
R262
R212 R211 R329 R265 R169 R410

R61
R463
R266
R215 R280 C258
C195 R214
C93 C173 R223 R334 R156 R333 R335 U34 U33 R326
R286 R283
C419 C426 R287C262 R285 R260
RN35
C105
R464
C89
C165
Q19
L20 R210
C162
R466 R213 C194 U8

C501 C503 C83 Y10
C106
C78 R425 R484

C88
R276R279 R282 C247
RN36
U58
C229
TP191 R69 R68 R237

L35
R281
L69 L71
R238
Q15 Q14
C358
D8
R382R383 R384
C90 R469
C480
R31 C418
C260 C304
C231 L21
R349 R344
R386 DS7 DS8 R439

C107
C318 R442
Q22
U77
R388
TP161 R385 Q21 R66 R65 R440 R284 C261 C257 R278 R347
C482
C481 R387 R441 R46

R381
R275
C259
R277
U48 R55
R323 R436
L32 U9
C263
R56
L76
L67
R438 C398 C407 C408 C395

C100
C417 C108
C8
R480 DS14 DS15 R57
P1
C409 R437
C193 L4 L11 L8 R430

C415 C390 C416 C401 C402 C397 C399 C403 C405
L1 R481 R47
C42 R184 C52
R49 R183 C191
R146 R145 C124

C35 R39 C41
C252
R482 U71
R45 J2
C233
C256 C287 R58

R483
D3 R529 C521 R528 C520 R48
C159 C43
C123 C36
DS2
C284 C227 C288
R103 C53 C51 C34 C33

C290
C392
R432
L3
R3 R8 L43
R176
R109 R110
R99 C13 Q18 DS3

D1 R102
R431
R433
C285 C19
Q20
U38 R185 U27 R147

C410 C393
R4 R9
C1 R104 C20 U73 C406
C253
C160 R186
DS4
U5
R38
R85
R97 R15 R429 R427 R40 R434

L68 C412
R423
R13 C56 C45

C55
C46
L77
C37
C38
C198
R50
R428
R98 DS5 DS10

R78 R11 C54 C44 R435
C286
J20
C394
C276
R10 C26 U70

R455
R96 Q17
C378 C376
TP159 TP158
C396
R105
R127
D2
C377
C226
L66
C14
L2
C381
L64
L9
L7
R122 R126 C255 R121 C274 C386 C385 C387

C400
C158
C380
C122
R129 R130 C254 R106 TP160

R123 C391 C389 C414 C413 C388 C411
C382
C38
C404
C383

PROPRIETARY TO GE

6. PCIe Cable (High Speed
Cable from GFI to BEP) CABLE J
PCI Express (PCIe) (GFI to BEP-J5) 1
GFI Configuration only.
MRX does not use this
BEP J5
cable.
7.
Motherboard Harness 1
8. Cable 1
BEP Power Harness 2
9. Cable 8
Cable, SATA Cable - DVR MBOARD J3 BEP J5
1
10.
BEP LOGIQ E9 with EPS

(Extended Power
Shutdown)
NOTE: There are two 1

versions of the BEP: one
supports GFI Configuration
and one supports MRX
Conflagration.

PROPRIETARY TO GE

11.
BEP I/O Board
NOTE: There are two

versions of the I/O Board: 1
one supports GFI
Configuration and one
supports MRX Configuring.
12.
Fan BEP 1
13.
LOGIQ E9 BEP Cover w/ 1

Battery Tray
14.
Battery Pack Assembly 1

PROPRIETARY TO GE

15.
Extended Power Shutdown 1

Assembly - LOGIQ E9
16. Cable 10
DVI Flex Video Cable 1
17. PCI Express Bulkhead

Cable 4
GFI Configuration only. MBOARD J3 BEP J5
1
MRX does not use this
cable.
18. Cable 3
Front Panel Harness 1
19. Cable Na
Cable, BEP to Card Rack
Backplane and PCI IO BOAR
J36
D 1
Express - MRX
5372764 REV X
BACKPLANE #NAME# MBOARD
J2 (LEFT) #ORIGIN# J3
#DATE#

PROPRIETARY TO GE
8-11-3-1 BEP5.x Cable Connectors (BEP Door Label) R3.x and earlier
Figure 8-155 BEP5.x cable connectors, J5 PCIe to GFI2 is not present on MRX - R3.x and earlier
REMOVE ALL OPTIONS

(e.g. DVR, PATIENT I/O,
J4 Main
PS USB
J1Main PS
48V, 5V In
Option Dongle)
BEFORE RETURNING TO SWAP
BEP Front
J3 SA1 J2 SA2
DVD SPARE
SPD LED
BEP Top
J5 PCIe
to GFI2 ACT LED ACT LED
BEP Rear
BEP Face
J41 Customer USB
J44 Customer Video Out
J40 Customer USB J46 LAN

10/100/1000
DS2 Stat1 DS1 Stat0
J43 J42
Customer Audio DVI IN
Hub3 OK/Error
Hub2 OK/Error
MC OK/Error
J22 pins of note:
5 - PWR_SW
25
25
6 - 5V_STDBY
13
13
9-13 - 48V
Test Connector
15, 17, 22-25 - GND

J22 A/V Out
18 - PWR_LED_P
21 - PWR_LED_N
Test Connector
pins of note:
5, 13, 23 - Ground
14
14
1
3 - 24V DS3 5V
4 - 48V STBY BEP
8 - 12V
9 - 5V J100 Op
10 - AC_FAIL_N Panel Video
11 - 3.3V
J7 USB Error LED J7 Op Panel
12 - 5V_STDBY
16 - VBAT_TP J7 USB OK LED Buttons DS5 48V
17 - 3.3V J28 USB Error LED J28 4D OK PS
24 - PWR_SW J28 USB OK LED Motorcontrol
25 - PSON_N J27 USB Error LED
J27 Bay Bird
J27 USB OK LED
J26 USB Error LED J26 BW DS4 48V
J26 USB OK LED Printer OK BAT
J25 USB Error LED J25 XYZ Motor
J25 USB OK LED Controller *
3V3A 5V
3V3D 12V
Inside BEP
6

Service Manual Logiqe9

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Service Manual Logiqe9

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

8/6/15

ADVANCED SERVICE DOCUMENTATION.

Part Number: 5180483-100

THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS.

DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA EST DISPONVEL APENAS EM INGLS.

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

KESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.

TM HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.

EZEN KARBANTARTSI KZIKNYV KIZRLAG ANGOL NYELVEN RHET EL.

ESSI JNUSTUHANDBK ER EINGNGU FANLEG ENSKU.

TENTO SERVISN NVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKM JAZYCE.

DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN P ENGELSK.

DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR.

APKALPES ROKASGRMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGU VALOD.

IS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA ILEISTAS TIK ANGL KALBA.

DENNE SERVICEHNDBOKEN FINNES BARE P ENGELSK.

NINIEJSZY PODRCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JZYKU

ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI N LIMBA ENGLEZ.

OVAJ PRIRUNIK ZA SERVISIRANJE DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM

TA SERVISNI PRIRONIK JE NA VOLJO SAMO V ANGLEINI.

OVAJ SERVISNI PRIRUNIK DOSTUPAN JE SAMO NA ENGLESKOM JEZIKU.

TTO SERVISN PRRUKA JE K DISPOZCII LEN V ANGLITINE.

DEN HR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGNGLIG P ENGELSKA.

BU SERVS KILAVUZU YALNIZCA NGLZCE OLARAK SALANMITIR.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Mail the information to:

SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Rev. 2 2008/12/01 R1.0.4 Release

Rev. 3 2009/10/01 R2.0.0 Release

Rev. 4 2011/01/14 R3.1.0 Release

Rev. 5 2012/11/06 R4 Release

Rev. 6 2014/07/21 R5 Release

Rev. 7 2015/08/05 R6 Release

List of Effected Pages (LOEP)

Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

Warnings Rev. 7 5-1 to 5-196 Rev. 7 Index Rev. 7

TOC Rev. 7 6-1 to 6-48 Rev. 7 Back Cover N/A

2-1 to 2-12 Rev. 7 8-1 to 8-672 Rev. 7

3-1 to 3-92 Rev. 7 9-1 to 9-128 Rev. 7

Service manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2

Dangerous procedure warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 20

Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 21

Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 21

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 22

General console requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Receiving and unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 4

Packing materials - recycling information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 11

Preparing for setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 12

Completing the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15

Volume Navigation Roll Stand Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 35

Configuring Insite ExC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45

Recording important settings and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19

Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 43

Application Turnover Check List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53

Power supply test and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53

3D/4D and Volume Navigation Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53

Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1